Toshiba Copier e STUDIO281c User Manual

SERVICE HANDBOOK  
MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL COLOR SYSTEMS  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c  
File No. SHE050003B0  
R05032182700-TTEC  
Ver02_2005-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE SERVICE FOR  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c  
The installation and service should be done by a qualified service  
technician.  
1) Transportation/Installation  
-
When transporting/installing the equipment, employ four persons and be sure to hold the posi-  
tions as shown in the figure.  
The equipment is quite heavy and weighs approximately 113 kg (249 lb), therefore pay full atten-  
tion when handling it.  
-
-
Be sure not to hold the movable parts or units (e.g. the control panel, ADU or RADF) when trans-  
porting the equipment.  
Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 110 V / 13.2 A, 115 V or 127 V / 12 A, 220-240 V or 240  
V / 8 A for its power source.  
-
-
The equipment must be grounded for safety.  
Select a suitable place for installation. Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and  
direct sunlight.  
-
-
Provide proper ventilation since the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone.  
To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of 80  
cm (32”) on the left, 80 cm (32”) on the right and 10 cm (4”) on the rear.  
The equipment shall be installed near the socket outlet and shall be accessible.  
Be sure to fix and plug in the power cable securely after the installation so that no one trips over  
it.  
-
-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2) General Precautions at Service  
-
-
-
Be sure to turn the power OFF and unplug the power cable during service (except for the service  
should be done with the power turned ON).  
Unplug the power cable and clean the area around the prongs of the plug and socket outlet once  
a year or more. A fire may occur when dust lies on this area.  
When the parts are disassembled, reassembly is the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise  
noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to install small parts such as  
screws, washers, pins, E-rings, star washers in the wrong places.  
-
-
Basically, the equipment should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled.  
The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a wristband  
since the ICs on it may be damaged due to static electricity.  
Caution: Before using the wristband, unplug the power cable of the equipment and  
make sure that there are no charged objects which are not insulated in the  
vicinity.  
-
Avoid expose to laser beam during service. This equipment uses a laser diode. Be sure not to  
expose your eyes to the laser beam. Do not insert reflecting parts or tools such as a screwdriver  
on the laser beam path. Remove all reflecting metals such as watches, rings, etc. before starting  
service.  
-
-
Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, fuser unit, damp  
heater and areas around them.  
Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, transfer belt, 2nd transfer roller,  
developer, IH control circuit, high-voltage transformer, exposure lamp control inverter, inverter for  
the LCD backlight and power supply unit. Especially, the board of these components should not  
be touched since the electric charge may remain in the capacitors, etc. on them even after the  
power is turned OFF.  
-
Make sure that the equipment will not operate before touching potentially dangerous places (e.g.  
rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts pulleys, fans and laser beam exit of the laser  
optical unit).  
-
-
Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges  
underneath.  
When servicing the equipment with the power turned ON, be sure not to touch live sections and  
rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposing your eyes to laser beam.  
Use designated jigs and tools.  
-
-
-
Use recommended measuring instruments or equivalents.  
Return the equipment to the original state and check the operation when the service is finished.  
3) Important Service Parts for Safety  
-
The breaker, door switch, fuse, thermostat, thermofuse, thermistor, IC-RAMs including lithium  
batteries, etc. are particularly important for safety. Be sure to handle/install them properly. If  
these parts are short-circuited and their functions become ineffective, they may result in fatal  
accidents such as burnout. Do not allow a short-circuit or do not use the parts not recommended  
by Toshiba TEC Corporation.  
4) Cautionary Labels  
During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and cautionary labels such as “Unplug the  
-
power cable during service”, “CAUTION. HOT”, “CAUTION. HIGH VOLTAGE”, “CAUTION.  
LASER BEAM”, etc. to see if there is any dirt on their surface and if they are properly stuck to the  
equipment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5) Disposal of the Equipment, Supplies, Packing Materials, Used Batteries and IC-RAMs  
-
Regarding the recovery and disposal of the equipment, supplies, packing materials, used batter-  
ies and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries, follow the relevant local regulations or rules.  
Caution:  
Dispose of used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual.  
Attention:  
Se débarrasser de batteries et IC-RAMs usés y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel.  
Vorsicht:  
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien und IC-RAMs (inclusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem Handbuch.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTENTS  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c CONTENTS  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c CONTENTS  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c CONTENTS  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10.2 DC Wire Harness....................................................................................................... Appendix  
10.3 Electric Parts Layout.................................................................................................. Appendix  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c CONTENTS  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES  
1.1 Specifications  
1
yCopy process ..........................Indirect electrophotographic process (dry)  
yType.........................................Desktop type (Console type: when optional Paper Feed Pedestal  
(PFP) or optional Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) is installed.)  
yOriginal table ...........................Fixed type (the left rear corner used as guide to place originals)  
yAccepted originals...................Original type: Sheets, books and 3-dimensional objects  
Note that when the optional Reversing Automatic Document Feeder is  
used, carbon, bounded or stapled originals cannot be accepted, and  
2
paper type of the original should be 35-157g/m (9.3 lb. Bond -58 lb.  
2
Cover) for single-sided copy and 50-157 g/m (13.3 lb. Bond -58 lb.  
Cover) for double-sided copy.  
Maximum size: A3/LD  
Copy speed (Copies/min.)  
e-STUDIO281c  
Paper supply  
Bypass feed  
LCF  
(A4/LT only)  
Drawer  
PFP  
Size not  
Paper size  
Size specified  
specified  
A4, LT  
28 (11)  
28 (11)  
16 (5)  
28 (11)  
28 (11)  
B5, A5-R, ST-R  
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R  
B4, LG  
-
-
-
-
21 (5)  
18 (5)  
16 (5)  
21 (5)  
18 (5)  
16 (5)  
16 (5)  
16 (5)  
16 (5)  
21 (5)  
18 (5)  
16 (5)  
A3, LD  
e-STUDIO351c  
Bypass feed  
Paper supply  
Paper size  
LCF  
(A4/LT only)  
Drawer  
PFP  
Size not  
Size specified  
specified  
A4, LT  
35 (11)  
35 (11)  
21 (5)  
35 (11)  
35 (11)  
B5, A5-R, ST-R  
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R  
B4, LG  
-
-
-
-
28 (5)  
24 (5)  
21 (5)  
28 (5)  
24 (5)  
21 (5)  
21 (5)  
21 (5)  
21 (5)  
28 (5)  
24 (5)  
21 (5)  
A3, LD  
e-STUDIO451c  
Bypass feed  
Paper supply  
Paper size  
LCF  
(A4/LT only)  
Drawer  
PFP  
Size not  
Size specified  
specified  
A4, LT  
45 (11)  
45 (11)  
22 (5)  
45 (11)  
45 (11)  
B5, A5-R, ST-R  
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R  
B4, LG  
-
-
-
-
32 (5)  
26 (5)  
22 (5)  
32 (5)  
26 (5)  
22 (5)  
22 (5)  
22 (5)  
22 (5)  
32 (5)  
26 (5)  
22 (5)  
A3, LD  
*
*
*
*
"-" means "Not acceptable".  
When originals are manually placed for single-sided, continuous copying.  
Plain paper is selected for the paper type.  
When the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder is used, copying in the speed of 28, 35 and 45  
sheets per minute are only possible under the following conditions:  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES  
1 - 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Original: A4 or LT (single-sided)  
Mode: APS and Automatic density not selected, Plain paper mode  
Number of copies:  
Black mode: 28 sheets or more (e-STUDIO281c), 35 sheets or more (e-STUDIO351c), 45 sheets  
or more (e-STUDIO451c)  
Color mode: 11 sheets or more  
Reproduction ratio: 100%  
*
The values in ( ) can be realized in the color mode.  
Thick paper / OHP  
e-STUDIO281c  
2
2
Thick1 (81 g/m to 105 g/m , 21 lb. Bond to 28 lb. Bond)  
Bypass feed  
Paper supply  
Paper size  
LCF  
(A4/LT only)  
Drawer  
PFP  
Size not  
Size specified  
specified  
A4, LT  
28 (11)  
28 (11)  
16 (5)  
28 (11)  
28 (11)  
B5, A5-R, ST-R  
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R  
B4, LG  
-
-
-
-
20 (5)  
18 (5)  
16 (5)  
20 (5)  
18 (5)  
16 (5)  
16 (5)  
16 (5)  
16 (5)  
20 (5)  
18 (5)  
16 (5)  
A3, LD  
2
2
Thick2 (106 g/m to 163 g/m , 29 lb. Bond to 90 lb. Index)  
Bypass feed  
Paper supply  
Paper size  
LCF  
(A4/LT only)  
Drawer  
PFP  
Size not  
Size specified  
specified  
A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R  
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R  
B4, LG  
-
-
-
-
20 (6)  
14 (3)  
11 (3)  
10 (2)  
10 (2)  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
10 (2)  
10 (2)  
A3, LD  
10 (2)  
2
2
Thick3 (164 g/m to 209 g/m , 91 lb. Index to 110 lb. Index)  
Bypass feed  
Paper supply  
Paper size  
LCF  
(A4/LT only)  
Drawer  
PFP  
Size not  
Size specified  
specified  
A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R  
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R  
B4, LG  
-
-
-
-
20 (2)  
14 (2)  
11 (2)  
10 (2)  
10 (2)  
10 (2)  
10 (2)  
10 (2)  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
A3, LD  
OHP  
Bypass feed  
Paper supply  
Paper size  
LCF  
(A4/LT only)  
Drawer  
PFP  
Size not  
Size specified  
specified  
A4, LT  
-
10 (3)  
-
-
-
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES  
1 - 2  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
e-STUDIO351c  
2
2
Thick1 (81 g/m to 105 g/m , 21 lb. Bond to 28 lb. Bond)  
Bypass feed  
1
Paper supply  
Paper size  
LCF  
(A4/LT only)  
Drawer  
PFP  
Size not  
specified  
Size specified  
A4, LT  
30 (11)  
30 (11)  
16 (5)  
30 (11)  
30 (11)  
B5, A5-R, ST-R  
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R  
B4, LG  
-
-
-
-
23 (5)  
19 (5)  
16 (5)  
23 (5)  
19 (5)  
16 (5)  
16 (5)  
16 (5)  
16 (5)  
23 (5)  
19 (5)  
16 (5)  
A3, LD  
2
2
Thick2 (106 g/m to 163 g/m , 29 lb. Bond to 90 lb. Index)  
Bypass feed  
Paper supply  
Paper size  
LCF  
(A4/LT only)  
Drawer  
PFP  
Size not  
Size specified  
specified  
A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R  
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R  
B4, LG  
-
-
-
-
20 (6)  
14 (3)  
11 (3)  
10 (2)  
10 (2)  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
10 (2)  
10 (2)  
A3, LD  
10 (2)  
2
2
Thick3 (164 g/m to 209 g/m , 91 lb. Index to 110 lb. Index)  
Bypass feed  
Paper supply  
Paper size  
LCF  
(A4/LT only)  
Drawer  
PFP  
Size not  
Size specified  
specified  
A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R  
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R  
B4, LG  
-
-
-
-
20 (2)  
14 (2)  
11 (2)  
10 (2)  
10 (2)  
10 (2)  
10 (2)  
10 (2)  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
A3, LD  
OHP  
Bypass feed  
Paper supply  
Paper size  
LCF  
(A4/LT only)  
Drawer  
PFP  
Size not  
Size specified  
specified  
A4, LT  
-
10 (3)  
-
-
-
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES  
1 - 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
e-STUDIO451c  
2
2
Thick1 (81 g/m to 105 g/m , 21 lb. Bond to 28 lb. Bond)  
Bypass feed  
Paper supply  
Paper size  
LCF  
(A4/LT only)  
Drawer  
PFP  
Size not  
specified  
Size specified  
A4, LT  
30 (11)  
30 (11)  
16 (5)  
30 (11)  
30 (11)  
B5, A5-R, ST-R  
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R  
B4, LG  
-
-
-
-
23 (5)  
19 (5)  
16 (5)  
23 (5)  
19 (5)  
16 (5)  
16 (5)  
16 (5)  
16 (5)  
23 (5)  
19 (5)  
16 (5)  
A3, LD  
2
2
Thick2 (106 g/m to 163 g/m , 29 lb. Bond to 90 lb. Index)  
Bypass feed  
Paper supply  
Paper size  
LCF  
(A4/LT only)  
Drawer  
PFP  
Size not  
Size specified  
specified  
A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R  
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R  
B4, LG  
-
-
-
-
20 (6)  
14 (3)  
11 (3)  
10 (2)  
10 (2)  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
10 (2)  
10 (2)  
A3, LD  
10 (2)  
2
2
Thick3 (164 g/m to 209 g/m , 91 lb. Index to 110 lb. Index)  
Bypass feed  
Paper supply  
Paper size  
LCF  
(A4/LT only)  
Drawer  
PFP  
Size not  
Size specified  
specified  
A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R  
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R  
B4, LG  
-
-
-
-
20 (2)  
14 (2)  
11 (2)  
10 (2)  
10 (2)  
10 (2)  
10 (2)  
10 (2)  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
A3, LD  
OHP  
Bypass feed  
Paper supply  
Paper size  
LCF  
(A4/LT only)  
Drawer  
PFP  
Size not  
Size specified  
specified  
A4, LT  
-
10 (3)  
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
"-" means "Not acceptable".  
When originals are manually placed for single side, continuous copying.  
The bypass copying speed is measured with the paper size specified.  
The values in ( ) can be realized in the color mode.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES  
1 - 4  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
*
System copy speed  
Sec.  
Copy mode  
e-STUDIO281c  
31.26 (71.97)  
e-STUDIO351c  
28.15 (71.97)  
61.02 (182.19)  
95.19 (289.94)  
29.65 (81.63)  
64.92 (189.38)  
101.75 (299.04)  
63.54 (138.12)  
134.25 (355.91)  
205.69 (574.51)  
58.76 (128.31)  
126.57 (347.08)  
194.49 (565.02)  
e-STUDIO451c  
24.99 (71.97)  
1
Single-sided originals  
Single-sided copies  
1 set  
3 sets  
5 sets  
1 set  
74.07 (182.19)  
116.64 (289.94)  
32.61 (81.63)  
50.03 (182.19)  
76.63 (289.94)  
28.49 (81.63)  
Single-sided originals  
Double-sided copies  
3 sets  
5 sets  
1 set  
74.69 (189.38)  
117.45 (299.04)  
64.24 (138.12)  
150.73 (355.91)  
234.59 (574.51)  
58.85 (128.31)  
143.68 (347.08)  
228.58 (565.02)  
60.76 (189.38)  
92.2 (299.04)  
Double-sided originals  
Double-sided copies  
63.01 (138.12)  
126.36 (355.91)  
189.67 (574.51)  
58.09 (128.31)  
110.94 (347.08)  
165.19 (565.02)  
3 sets  
5 sets  
1 set  
Double-sided originals  
Single-sided copies  
3 sets  
5 sets  
*
*
Shows the period of time from when the [START] button is pressed until the message "Ready" is dis-  
played. (10 sheets of A4/LT size original are set on the RADF and one of the copy modes above is  
selected.)  
Setting: when in the Text/Photo mode with Automatic density and APS/AMS set to OFF, or when in  
the sort mode with paper fed from the upper drawer.  
*
*
The Saddle Stitch Finisher and hole punch unit not installed.  
The values in ( ) are the speeds of when in the color mode.  
Copy paper  
Drawer  
ADU  
PFP  
LCF  
Bypass copy  
Remarks  
Size  
A3 to A6-R, LD to ST-R, 13"  
LG, 8.5"SQ, 305 x 457 mm  
(12" x 18")  
(Non-standard or userspec-  
ified sizes can be set.)  
A3 to A5-R,  
LD to ST-R,  
13" LG,  
A4, LT  
8.5"SQ  
2
64 to 209 g/m , 17 lb. Bond  
to 110 lb. Index  
2
64 to 105 g/m  
17 to 28 lb.  
(Continuous feeding)  
Weight  
2
64 to 209 g/m , 17 lb. Bond  
Bond  
to 110 lb. Index  
(Single paper feeding)  
Special  
paper  
Labels, OHP film  
(thickness: 80µm or thicker)  
Special paper recom-  
mended by Toshiba Tec  
-
yFirst copy time.........................Approx. 6.8 sec. or less (black), approx. 16.2 sec. or less (color)  
(A4/LT, upper drawer, 100%, original placed manually)  
yWarming-up time.....................Approx. 40 sec. (Stand-alone, temperature: 20°C)  
yMultiple copying.......................Up to 999 copies; Key in set numbers  
yReproduction ratio...................Actual ratio: 100±0.5%  
Zooming: 25 to 400% in increments of 1%  
(25 to 200% when using RADF)  
yResolution/Gradation...............Scanning: 600 dpi x 600 dpi  
Printing: Equivalent to 2400 dpi x 600 dpi (black)  
Equivalent to 600 dpi x 600 dpi (color)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES  
1 - 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
yEliminated portion....................Leading edges: 3.0±2.0 mm, Side/trailing edges: 2.0±2.0 mm (black  
copy)  
Leading edges: 5.0±2.0 mm, Side/trailing edges: 2.0±2.0 mm (color  
copy)  
Leading / trailing edges: 5.0±2.0 mm, Side edges: 5.0±2.0 mm (black /  
color print)  
yPaper feeding..........................Standard drawers:  
2 drawers (stack height 60.5 mm, equivalent to 550 sheets; 64 to 80 g/  
2
m (17 to 22 lb. Bond))  
PFP:  
Option (One drawer or two: stack height 60.5 mm, equivalent to 550  
2
sheets; 64 to 80 g/m (17 to 22 lb. Bond))  
LCF:  
Option (Stack height 137.5 mm x 2: equivalent to 2500 sheets; 64 to 80  
2
g/m (17 to 22 lb. Bond))  
Bypass feeding:  
2
Stack height 11 mm: equivalent to 100 sheets; 64 to 80 g/m (17 to 22  
lb. Bond)  
yCapacity of originals in the reversing automatic document feeder (Option)  
..................................................A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R:  
2
100 sheets / 80 g/m (Stack height 16 mm or less)  
yAutomatic duplexing unit .........Stackless, Switchback type  
yToner supply............................Automatic toner density detection/supply  
Toner cartridge replacing method  
yDensity control.........................Automatic density mode and manual density mode selectable in 11  
steps  
yWeight .....................................Approximately 113 kg (249 lb.)  
yPower requirements ................AC 110 V / 13.2 A, 115 V or 127 V / 12 A  
220-240 V or 240 V / 8 A (50/60 Hz)  
*
The acceptable value of each voltage is ±10%.  
yPower consumption.................1.5 kW or less (100 V series), 17 kW or less (200 V series)  
The electric power is supplied to the RADF, Finisher, PFP and LCF through the equipment.  
*
yTotal counter............................Electronical counter  
yDimensions of the equipment...................... See the figure below (W 660 x D 758 x H 739 (mm))  
*
When the tilt angle of the control panel is 45 degrees.  
45°  
Fig.1-1  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES  
1 - 6  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.2 Accessories  
1
Unpacking/Setup instruction  
Operator’s manual  
Operator's manual pocket  
Power cable  
1 set  
4 pcs. (except for MJD and ASU)  
1 pc.  
1 pc.  
Warranty sheet  
1 pc. (for NAD)  
1 set (for NAD, MJD and CND)  
1 pc. (for MJD)  
1 pc.  
Setup report  
PM sticker  
Drum (installed inside of the equipment)  
Control panel stopper  
Color developer holder  
Rubber plug  
1 pc.  
6 pc.  
4 pcs.  
Blind seal (small / large)  
CD-ROM  
3 pcs. /1 pc.  
3 pcs.  
Developer material (Y, M, C, K)  
Screw M4 x 8  
1 pc. each (for CND)  
1 pc.  
Guide  
1 pc.  
Approval sheet  
1 set (for CND)  
1 pc. each (for CND)  
1 pc. (for CND)  
Toner cartridge (Y, M, C, K)  
Platen cover  
*
Machine version  
NAD:  
North America  
Europe  
MJD:  
AUD:  
Australia  
ASD:  
TWD:  
SAD  
ASU  
CND  
Asia, Argentine  
Taiwan  
Saudi Arabia  
Saudi Arabia, Asia  
China  
KRD  
Korea  
JPD:  
Japan  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES  
1 - 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1.3 Options  
Platen cover  
KA-3511PC / -C  
MR-3018  
Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF)  
Drawer module  
MY-1021 / -C  
Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP)  
Large Capacity Feeder (LCF)  
Hanging Finisher  
KD-1011 / -C  
KD-1012 A4/LT / A4-C  
MJ-1022 / -C  
Finisher  
MJ-1023 / -C  
Saddle Stitch Finisher  
Hole punch unit  
MJ-1024 / -C  
MJ-6004 N/E/F/S / E-C  
Staple cartridge  
STAPLE-1600 (for MJ-1022)  
STAPLE-2000 (for MJ-1023/1024)  
STAPLE-600  
(for saddle stitcher of MJ-1024)  
Bridge kit  
KN-3511 / -C  
KK-3511 / -C  
MF-3511U/E  
GD-1200 NA/AU/AS/EU/C/TW  
GD-1160 NA/EU-N/C/TW  
GC-1181  
Work table  
Damp heater kit  
FAX unit  
2nd line for fax unit  
128 MB Expansion memory  
512 MB Expansion memory  
Wireless LAN module  
PCI slot  
GC-1230  
GN-1040/1041  
GO-1060  
Scrambler board  
Bluetooth module  
Antenna  
GP-1040  
GN-2010  
GN-3010  
Parallel interface kit  
Data overwrite kit  
Desk  
GF-1140  
GP-1060  
MH-1700  
Harness kit for coin controller  
GQ-1020  
Notes:  
1. The bridge kit (KN-3511) is necessary for installation of the finisher (MJ-1022, MJ-1023 or MJ-  
1024).  
2. The finisher (MJ-1023 or MJ-1024) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-  
6004N/E/F/S).  
3. The PCI slot (GO-1060) is necessary for the installation of the scrambler board (GP-1040)  
and the parallel interface kit (GF-1140).  
4. The antenna (GN-3010) is necessary to enable the wireless LAN module (GN-1040/1041)  
and the bluetooth module (GN-2010).  
5. Up to 1 antenna (GN-3010) can be connected to the wireless LAN module (GN-1040/1041).  
6. When the wireless LAN module (GN-1040/1041) and the bluetooth module (GN-2010) are  
installed together, only 1 antenna (GN-3010) can be connected to each.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES  
1 - 8  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1.4 Supplies  
1
Drum  
OD-3511N  
Toner bag  
PS-TB-281C/ C-E/ C-C  
D-3511-K  
Developer (K)  
Developer (Y)  
Developer (M)  
Developer (C)  
Toner cartridge (K)  
D-281C-Y  
D-281C-M  
D-281C-C  
PS-ZT281C-K(4)  
PS-ZT281C-EK(1)  
PS-ZT3511DK  
PS-ZT3511TK  
PS-ZT3511CK  
PS-ZT281C-Y(4)  
PS-ZT281C-EY(1)  
PS-ZT3511DY  
PS-ZT3511TY  
PS-ZT3511CY  
PS-ZT281C-M(4)  
PS-ZT281C-EM(1)  
PS-ZT3511DM  
PS-ZT3511TM  
PS-ZT3511CM  
PS-ZT281C-C(4)  
PS-ZT281C-EC(1)  
PS-ZT3511DC  
PS-ZT3511TC  
PS-ZT3511CC  
NAD  
MJD  
Others  
TWD  
CND  
NAD  
Toner cartridge (Y)  
Toner cartridge (M)  
Toner cartridge (C)  
MJD  
Others  
TWD  
CND  
NAD  
MJD  
Others  
TWD  
CND  
NAD  
MJD  
Others  
TWD  
CND  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES  
1 - 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1.5 System List  
Fig.1-2  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES  
1 - 10  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2.1 Error Code List  
The following error codes is displayed at the upper right of the screen when the “CLEAR PAPER” or “CALL  
SERVICE” symbol is blinking.  
2
2.1.1  
Jam  
Error code  
Classification  
Paper exit jam  
Contents  
Troubleshooting  
E010  
Jam not reaching the exit sensor : The paper which  
has passed through the fuser unit does not reach  
the exit sensor.  
E020  
Paper exit jam  
Stop jam at the exit sensor: The trailing edge of the  
paper does not pass the exit sensor after its leading  
edge has reached this sensor.  
E030  
E061  
Other paper jam  
Power-ON jam: The paper is remaining on the  
paper transport path when power is turned ON.  
Incorrect paper size setting for upper drawer: The  
size of paper in the 1st drawer differs from size set-  
ting of the equipment.  
E062  
E063  
E064  
E065  
E090  
Incorrect paper size setting for lower drawer: The  
size of paper in the 2nd drawer differs from size set-  
ting of the equipment.  
Incorrect paper size setting for PFP upper drawer:  
The size of paper in the 3rd drawer differs from size  
setting of the equipment.  
Incorrect paper size setting for PFP lower drawer:  
The size of paper in the 4th drawer differs from size  
setting of the equipment.  
Incorrect paper size setting for bypass tray: The  
size of paper in the bypass tray differs from size  
setting of the equipment.  
Image data delay jam: Image data to be printed  
cannot be prepared.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Error code  
Classification  
Contents  
Troubleshooting  
E110  
Paper misfeeding  
ADU misfeeding (Paper not reaching the registra-  
tion sensor): The paper which has passed through  
ADU does not reach the registration sensor during  
duplex printing.  
E120  
E130  
Bypass misfeeding (Paper not reaching the regis-  
tration sensor): The paper fed from the bypass tray  
does not reach the registration sensor.  
Upper drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the  
upper drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the  
upper drawer does not reach the upper drawer feed  
sensor.  
E140  
E150  
E160  
Lower drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the  
lower drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the  
lower drawer does not reach the lower drawer feed  
sensor.  
PFP upper drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching  
the PFP upper drawer feed sensor): The paper fed  
from the PFP upper drawer does not reach the PFP  
upper drawer feed sensor.  
PFP lower drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching  
the PFP lower drawer feed sensor): The paper fed  
from the PFP lower drawer does not reach the PFP  
lower drawer feed sensor.  
E190  
E200  
LCF misfeeding (Paper not reaching the LCF feed  
sensor): The paper fed from the LCF does not  
reach the LCF feed sensor.  
Paper transport jam  
Upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the  
registration sensor): The paper does not reach the  
registration sensor after it has passed the upper  
drawer feed sensor.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 2  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error code  
Classification  
Contents  
Troubleshooting  
E210  
Paper transport jam  
Lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the  
registration sensor): The paper does not reach the  
registration sensor after it has passed the upper  
drawer feed sensor.  
E220  
E300  
E310  
E320  
E330  
E340  
E350  
E360  
Lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the  
upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not  
reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has  
passed the lower drawer feed sensor.  
2
PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reach-  
ing the registration sensor): The paper does not  
reach the registration sensor after it has passed the  
upper drawer feed sensor.  
PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reach-  
ing the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does  
not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has  
passed the lower drawer feed sensor.  
PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reach-  
ing the lower drawer feed sensor): The paper does  
not reach the lower drawer feed sensor after it has  
passed the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.  
PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reach-  
ing the registration sensor): The paper does not  
reach the registration sensor after it has passed the  
upper drawer feed sensor.  
PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reach-  
ing the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does  
not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has  
passed the lower drawer feed sensor.  
PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reach-  
ing the lower drawer feed sensor): The paper does  
not reach the lower drawer feed sensor after it has  
passed the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.  
PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reach-  
ing the PFP upper drawer feed sensor): The paper  
does not reach the PFP upper drawer feed sensor  
after it has passed the PFP lower drawer feed sen-  
sor.  
E400  
E410  
E420  
E430  
E440  
E450  
E480  
E510  
Cover open jam  
Cover open jam  
Jam access cover open jam: The jam access cover  
has opened during printing.  
Front cover open jam: The front cover has opened  
during printing.  
PFP side cover open jam: The PFP side cover has  
opened during printing.  
ADU open jam: The ADU has opened during print-  
ing.  
Side cover open jam: The side cover has opened  
during printing.  
LCF side cover open jam: The LCF side cover has  
opened during printing.  
Bridge unit open jam: The bridge unit has opened  
during printing.  
Paper transport jam  
(ADU section)  
Jam not reaching the ADU entrance sensor: The  
paper does not reach the ADU entrance sensor  
after it is switchbacked in the exit section.  
E520  
Stop jam in the ADU: The paper does not reach the  
ADU exit sensor after it has passed the ADU  
entrance sensor.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error code  
Classification  
Contents  
Troubleshooting  
E550  
Other paper jam  
Paper remaining jam on the transport path: The  
paper is remaining on the transport path when print-  
ing is finished (caused by a multiple paper feeding).  
E712  
E713  
RADF jam  
Jam not reaching the original registration sensor:  
The original fed from the original feeding tray does  
not reach the original registration sensor.  
Cover open jam in the read ready status: Jam  
caused by opening of the RADF jam access cover  
or front cover while the RADF is waiting for the  
scanning start signal from the equipment.  
E714  
E721  
Feed signal reception jam: The feed signal is  
received even no original exists on the original  
feeding tray.  
Jam not reaching the read sensor: The original  
does not reach the read sensor after it has passed  
the registration sensor (when scanning obverse  
side) or the reverse sensor (when scanning reverse  
side).  
E722  
E724  
Jam not reaching the original exit/reverse sensor  
(during scanning): The original which passed the  
read sensor does not reach the original exit/reverse  
sensor when it is transported from the scanning  
section to exit section.  
Stop jam at the original registration sensor: The  
trailing edge of the original does not pass the origi-  
nal registration sensor after its leading edge has  
reached this sensor.  
E725  
E731  
Stop jam at the read sensor: The trailing edge of the  
original does not pass the read sensor after its lead-  
ing edge has reached this sensor.  
Stop jam at the original exit/reverse sensor: The  
trailing edge of the original does not pass the origi-  
nal exit/reverse sensor after its leading edge has  
reached this sensor.  
E860  
E870  
E910  
RADF jam access cover open: The RADF jam  
access cover has opened during RADF operation.  
RADF open jam: RADF has opened during RADF  
operation.  
Finisher jam  
(Bridge unit)  
Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 1: The  
paper does not reach the bridge unit transport sen-  
sor 1 after it has passed the exit sensor.  
E920  
E930  
E940  
E9F0  
Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 1: The  
trailing edge of the paper does not pass the bridge  
unit transport sensor 1 after its leading edge has  
reached the sensor.  
Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 2: The trail-  
ing edge of the paper does not reach the bridge unit  
transport sensor 2 after its leading edge has  
reached the bridge unit transport sensor 1.  
Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 2: The  
trailing edge of the paper does not pass the bridge  
unit transport sensor 2 after its leading edge has  
reached the bridge unit transport sensor 2.  
Finisher jam  
(Punch unit)  
Punching jam: Punching is not performed properly.  
[MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)]  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 4  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error code  
Classification  
Finisher jam  
(Finisher section)  
Contents  
Troubleshooting  
EA10  
Paper transport delay jam: The paper which has  
passed the bridge  
unit does not reach the inlet sensor. [MJ-1022/  
1023/1024]  
EA20  
Paper transport stop jam:  
(1) The paper does not pass through the inlet sen-  
sor.  
[MJ-1022/1023/1024]  
2
(2) The paper has passed through the inlet sensor  
but does not reach or pass the feed path sensor  
or processing tray sensor.  
[MJ-1023/1024]  
EA30  
EA40  
Power-ON jam:  
(1) Paper exists at the inlet sensor when power is  
turned ON.  
[MJ-1022/1023/1024]  
(2) Paper exists at the feed path sensor or pro-  
cessing tray sensor when power is turned ON.  
[MJ-1023/1024]  
Finisher jam  
(Finisher section)  
Door open jam:  
1) The finisher has been released from the equip-  
ment during printing. [MJ-1022]  
2) The upper/front cover of the finisher section or  
the upper/ front door of the puncher section has  
opened during printing. [MJ-1023/1024]  
EA50  
EA60  
Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed properly.  
[MJ-1022/1023/1024]  
Early arrival jam: The inlet sensor detects the paper  
earlier than a specified timing. [MJ-1022/1023/  
1024]  
EA70  
Stack delivery jam: It cannot deliver the stack of  
paper on the intermediary process tray to the stack  
tray. [MJ-1022]  
EA80  
EA90  
EAA0  
Finisher jam  
(Saddle stitcher sec-  
tion)  
Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed properly.  
[MJ-1024]  
Door open jam: The delivery cover or inlet cover  
has opened dur-ing printing [MJ-1024].  
Power-ON jam: Paper exists at No.1 paper sensor,  
No. 2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor, vertical  
path paper sensor or delivery sensor when power is  
turned ON. [MJ-1024]  
EAB0  
Transport stop jam: The paper which passed  
through the inlet sensor does not reach or pass  
No.1 paper sensor, No. 2 paper sensor, No.3 paper  
sensor or delivery sensor. [MJ-1024]  
EAC0  
EAD0  
Transport delay jam: The paper which has reached  
the inlet sensor does not pass through the inlet sen-  
sor. [MJ-1024]  
Other paper jam  
Finisher jam  
Print end command time-out jam: The printing has  
not finished normally because of the communica-  
tion error between the SYS board and LGC board  
at the end of printing.  
EAE0  
Receiving time time-out jam: The printing has been  
interrupted because of the communication error  
between the equipment and finisher when the  
paper is transported from the equipment to the fin-  
isher.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error code  
Classification  
Finisher jam  
(Finisher section)  
Contents  
Troubleshooting  
EAF0  
Stack return jam: It cannot load the paper which  
passed through the delivery roller on the intermedi-  
ary process tray. [MJ-1022]  
EB30  
Finisher jam  
Ready time time-out jam: The equipment judges  
that the paper transport to the finisher is disabled  
because of the communication error between the  
equipment and finisher at the start of printing.  
EB50  
EB60  
Paper transport jam  
Paper remaining on the transport path: The multiple  
feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding  
of upcoming paper.  
Paper remaining on the transport path: The multiple  
feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding  
of upcoming paper (redetection after no jam is  
detected at [EB50]).  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 6  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.1.2  
Service call  
Error code  
Classification  
Contents  
Troubleshooting  
C010  
Drive system related  
service call  
Main motor abnormality: The main motor is not  
rotating normally.  
C020  
C030  
C040  
Developer motor abnormality: The developer motor  
is not rotating normally.  
2
Transport motor abnormality: The transport motor is  
not rotating normally.  
Paper feeding system PFP motor abnormality: The PFP motor is not rotat-  
related service call  
ing normally. (the case that paper can be fed from  
any drawer except the PFP)  
C130  
Upper drawer tray abnormality: The upper drawer  
tray-up motor is not rotating or the upper drawer  
tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper  
can be fed from any drawer except the upper  
drawer)  
C140  
C150  
Lower drawer tray abnormality: The lower drawer  
tray-up motor is not rotating or the lower drawer tray  
is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be  
fed from any drawer except the lower drawer)  
PFP upper drawer tray abnormality: The PFP upper  
drawer tray-up motor is not rotating or the PFP  
upper drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case  
that paper can be fed from any drawer except the  
PFP upper drawer)  
C160  
PFP lower drawer tray abnormality: The PFP lower  
drawer tray-up motor is not rotating or the PFP  
lower drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case  
that paper can be fed from any drawer except the  
PFP lower drawer)  
C180  
C1A0  
LCF tray-up motor abnormality: The LCF tray-up  
motor is not rotating or the LCF tray is not moving  
normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any  
drawer except the LCF)  
LCF end fence motor abnormality: The LCF end  
fence motor is not rotating or the LCF end fence is  
not moving normally. (the case that paper can be  
fed from any drawer except the LCF)  
C1B0  
C260  
C270  
C280  
LCF transport motor abnormality: The LCF trans-  
port motor is not rotating normally. (the case that  
paper can be fed from any drawer except the LCF)  
Scanning system  
related service call  
Peak detection error: Lighting of the exposure lamp  
(white reference) is not detected when power is  
turned ON.  
Carriage home position sensor not turning OFF  
within a specified period of time: The carriage does  
not shift from its home position in a specified time.  
Carriage home position sensor not turning ON  
within a specified period of time: The carriage does  
not reach to its home position in a specified period  
of time.  
C360  
Copy process related  
service call  
Charger cleaner motor abnormality: Charger  
cleaner motor is not rotating or wire cleaner is not  
moving normally.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Error code  
Classification  
Contents  
Troubleshooting  
C411  
Fuser unit related ser- Thermistor or heater abnormality at power-ON:  
vice call  
Abnormality of the thermistor is detected when  
power is turned ON or the temperature of the fuser  
roller does not rise in a specified period of time after  
power is turned ON.  
C412  
Thermistor/heater abnormality at power-ON: Ther-  
mistor abnormality is detected at power-ON or the  
fuser roller temperature does not rise within a spec-  
ified period of time after power-ON.  
C443  
C445  
C446  
C447  
C449  
C471  
Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment (not  
reaching to intermediate temperature)  
Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment  
(pre-running end temperature abnormality)  
Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment  
(pre-running end temperature abnormality)  
Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment  
(temperature abnormality at ready status)  
Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment  
(overheating)  
IH power voltage abnormality or IH initial abnormal-  
ity  
(IH board initial abnormality)  
C472  
C475  
C480  
C490  
IH power voltage abnormality (power supply abnor-  
mality)  
IH power voltage abnormality (power supply abnor-  
mality when door is opened)  
Overheating of IGBT: The temperature of the IGBT  
rises abnormally.  
IH control circuit or IH coil abnormality: Abnormality  
is detected in IH control circuit or IH coil is broken/  
shorted.  
C4B0  
C550  
Fuser unit counter abnormality  
Optional communica-  
RADF I/F error: Communication error has occurred  
tion related service call between the RADF and the scanner.  
C570  
C580  
C900  
Communication error between Engine-CPU and  
IPC board  
Communication error between IPC board and fin-  
isher  
Circuit related service Connection error between SYS board and LGC  
call  
board  
C940  
C950  
C960  
Engine-CPU abnormality  
LGC board memory abnormality  
Connection error between LGC board and DRV  
board, ID abnormality  
C970  
C9E0  
CA10  
CA20  
Process related ser-  
vice call  
High-voltage transformer abnormality: Leakage of  
the main charger is detected.  
Circuit related service Connection error between SLG board and SYS  
call  
board, ID abnormality  
Laser optical unit  
related service call  
Polygonal motor abnormality: The polygonal motor  
is not rotating normally.  
H-Sync detection error: H-Sync signal detection PC  
board cannot detect laser beams.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 8  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error code  
Classification  
Contents  
Troubleshooting  
CB20  
Finisher related ser-  
vice call  
Delivery motor abnormality: Delivery motor or deliv-  
ery roller is not rotating normally. [MJ-1022]  
CB30  
CB40  
CB50  
CB60  
CB80  
Tray 1/Tray 2 shift motor abnormality: Tray 1/Tray 2  
shift motor is not rotating or delivery tray is not mov-  
ing normally. [MJ-1023/1024]  
Rear aligning plate motor abnormality: Rear align-  
ing plate motor is not rotating or aligning plate is not  
moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024]  
2
Staple motor abnormality: Staple motor is not rotat-  
ing or stapler is not moving normally. [MJ-1022/  
1023/1024]  
Stapler shift motor abnormality: Stapler shift motor  
is not rotating or staple unit is not moving normally.  
[MJ-1023/1024]  
Backup RAM data abnormality:  
1) Abnormality of checksum value on finisher con-  
troller PC board is detected when the power is  
turned ON. [MJ-1023/1024]  
2) Abnormality of checksum value on punch con-  
troller PC board is detected when the power is  
turned ON. [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is  
installed)]  
CB90  
CBA0  
CBB0  
CBC0  
Paper pushing plate motor abnormality: Paper  
pushing plate motor is not rotating or paper pushing  
plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1024]  
Stitch motor (front) abnormality: Stitch motor (front)  
is not rotating or rotary cam is not moving normally.  
[MJ-1024]  
Stitch motor (rear) abnormality: Stitch motor (rear)  
is not rotating or rotary cam is not moving normally.  
[MJ-1024]  
Alignment motor abnormality: Alignment motor is  
not rotating or aligning plate is not moving normally.  
[MJ-1024]  
CBD0  
CBE0  
Guide motor abnormality: Guide motor is not rotat-  
ing or guide is not moving normally. [MJ-1024]  
Paper folding motor abnormality: Paper folding  
motor or paper folding roller is not rotating normally.  
[MJ-1024]  
CBF0  
CC00  
Paper positioning plate motor abnormality: Paper  
positioning plate motor is not rotating or paper posi-  
tioning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1024]  
Sensor connector abnormality: Connector of guide  
home position sensor, paper pushing plate home  
position sensor or paper pushing plate top position  
sensor is disconnected. [MJ-1024]  
CC10  
Micro switch abnormality: With all covers closed,  
inlet door switch, delivery door switch or front cover  
switch is open. [MJ-1024]  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error code  
Classification  
Contents  
Troubleshooting  
CC20  
Finisher related ser-  
vice call  
Communication error between finisher and saddle  
stitcher: Communication error between finisher con-  
troller PC board and saddle stitcher controller board  
[MJ-1023/1024]  
CC30  
CC40  
CC50  
Stack processing motor abnormality: The stack pro-  
cessing motor is not rotating or the stack delivery  
belt is not moving normally. [MJ-1022]  
Swing motor abnormality: Swing motor is not rotat-  
ing or swing unit is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/  
1024]  
Horizontal registration motor abnormality: Horizon-  
tal registration motor is not rotating or puncher is  
not shifting normally. [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-  
6004 is installed)]  
CC60  
CC80  
Punch motor abnormality: Punch motor is not rotat-  
ing or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1023/  
1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)]  
Front alignment motor abnormality: Front alignment  
motor is not rotating or front aligning plate is not  
moving normally. [MJ-1022]  
Front aligning plate motor abnormality: Front align-  
ing plate motor is not rotating or aligning plate is not  
moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024]  
CC90  
CCA0  
CCB0  
CCD0  
CCE0  
Upper stack tray lift motor abnormality: The upper  
stack tray lift motor is not rotating or the upper stack  
tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1022]  
Lower stack tray lift motor abnormality: The lower  
stack tray lift motor is not rotating or the lower stack  
tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1022]  
Rear jogging motor abnormality: The rear jogging  
motor is not rotating or the rear jogging plate is not  
moving normally. [MJ-1022]  
Stack ejection motor abnormality: Stack ejection  
motor or stack ejection roller is not rotating nor-  
mally. [MJ-1023/1024]  
Paper trailing edge assist motor abnormality: Paper  
trailing edge assist motor is not rotating or paper  
trailing edge assist is not moving normally. [MJ-  
1023/1024]  
CCF0  
CE00  
Gear changing motor abnormality: Gear changing  
motor is not rotating normally. [MJ-1023/1024]  
Communication error between finisher and punch  
unit: Communication error between finisher control-  
ler PC board and punch controller PC board [MJ-  
1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)]  
CE10  
CE20  
Image control related  
service call  
Image quality sensor abnormality (OFF level): The  
output value of this sensor is out of a specified  
range when sensor light source is OFF.  
Image quality sensor abnormality (no pattern level):  
The output value of this sensor is out of a specified  
range when the image quality control test pattern is  
not formed.  
CE40  
CE50  
CE90  
Image quality control test pattern abnormality: The  
test pattern is not formed normally.  
Temperature/humidity sensor abnormality: The out-  
put value of this sensor is out of a specified range.  
Drum thermistor abnormality: The output value of  
the drum thermistor is out of a specified range.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 10  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error code  
Classification  
Contents  
Troubleshooting  
CEA0  
Copy process related  
service call  
Revolver home position detection abnormality: It  
cannot detect that the revolver is at its home posi-  
tion.  
CEB0  
CEC0  
CEE0  
CEE1  
Black developer unit lifting movement abnormality:  
The black developer unit does not move up or down  
normally (lifting cam does not operate normally).  
Copy process related  
service call  
2nd transfer roller position detection abnormality:  
The 2nd transfer roller does not contact/release  
normally.  
2
Transfer belt position detection abnormality (normal  
speed): The home position of the transfer belt can-  
not be detected.  
Transfer belt position detection abnormality (when  
decelerating): Reference position of the transfer  
belt cannot be detected.  
CEF0  
CF20  
Revolver motor abnormality: Revolver motor is not  
rotating or revolver is not moving normally.  
Toner density control  
related service call  
Toner density detection voltage abnormality: The  
output value of the color auto-toner sensor in print-  
ing is out of a specified range.  
CF30  
CF40  
Reference plate detection voltage abnormality: The  
output value of the color auto-toner sensor against  
the reference plate is out of a specified range at the  
light amount correction during an auto-toner adjust-  
ment or when a print job has finished.  
Light amount correction voltage abnormality: The  
light amount correction is not finished normally dur-  
ing an auto-toner adjustment or when a print job  
has finished, or the output value of the sensor is out  
of a specified range when the light amount correc-  
tion has finished.  
CF50  
F070  
Color auto-toner sensor abnormality: The connec-  
tion of the color auto-toner sensor cannot be  
detected at the initialization, or the output value of  
color auto-toner sensor when the revolver starts  
rotating for initialization is out of a specified range.  
Communication  
related service call  
Communication error between System-CPU and  
Engine-CPU  
F090  
F091  
F092  
F100  
Circuit related service SRAM abnormality on the SYS board  
call  
NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board  
SRAM and NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board  
Other service call  
HDD format error: HDD cannot be initialized nor-  
mally.  
F101  
HDD unmounted: Connection of HDD cannot be  
detected.  
F102  
F103  
HDD start error: HDD cannot become ‘Ready’ state.  
HDD transfer time-out: Reading/writing cannot be  
performed in the specified period of time.  
F104  
HDD data error: Abnormality is detected in the data  
of HDD.  
F105  
F106  
F107  
F108  
HDD other error  
Point and Print partition damage  
/BOX partition damage  
/SHA partition damage  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error code  
Classification  
Contents  
Troubleshooting  
F110  
Communication  
related service call  
Communication error between System-CPU and  
Scanner-CPU  
F111  
F120  
Scanner response abnormality  
Other service call  
Database abnormality: Database is not operating  
normally.  
F130  
F200  
F350  
Invalid MAC address  
Data overwrite kit (GP-1060) is taken off  
Circuit related service SLG board abnormality  
call  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 12  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.1.3  
Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function  
1) Internet FAX related error  
Error code  
Classification  
Troubleshooting  
-
1C10  
1C11  
1C12  
1C13  
1C14  
1C15  
1C20  
1C21  
1C22  
1C30  
1C31  
1C32  
1C33  
1C40  
1C60  
1C61  
1C62  
1C63  
1C64  
1C65  
1C66  
1C67  
1C68  
1C69  
1C6A  
1C6B  
1C6C  
1C6D  
1C70  
1C71  
1C72  
1C80  
1C81  
1C82  
1CC0  
1CC1  
System access abnormality  
Insufficient memory  
Message reception error  
Message transmission error  
Invalid parameter  
2
Exceeding file capacity  
System management module access abnormality  
Job control module access abnormality  
Job control module access abnormality  
Directory creation failure  
File creation failure  
File deletion failure  
File access failure  
Image conversion abnormality  
HDD full failure during processing  
Address Book reading failure  
Memory acquiring failure  
Terminal IP address unset  
Terminal mail address unset  
SMTP address unset  
Server time time-out error  
NIC time time-out error  
NIC access error  
SMTP server connection error  
HOST NAME error  
Terminal mail address error  
Destination mail address error  
System error  
SMTP client OFF  
SMTP authentication error  
POP before SMTP error  
Internet FAX transmission failure when processing E-mail job received  
Onramp Gateway transmission failure  
Internet FAX transmission failure when processing FAX job received  
Job canceling  
Power failure  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2) RFC related error  
Message displayed in  
the TopAccess screen  
Error code  
Contents  
Troubleshooting  
2500  
Syntax error, command unrecog-  
nized  
HOST NAME error(RFC: 500)  
Destination mail address error  
(RFC: 500)  
Terminal mail address error  
(RFC: 500)  
2501  
Syntax error in parameters or argu-  
ments  
HOST NAME error(RFC: 501)  
Destination mail address error  
(RFC: 501)  
Terminal mail address error  
(RFC: 501)  
2503  
2504  
2550  
2551  
2552  
Bad sequence of commands  
Destination mail address error  
(RFC: 503)  
Command parameter not imple-  
mented  
HOST NAME error  
(RFC: 504)  
Mailbox unavailable  
Destination mail address error  
(RFC: 550)  
User not local  
Destination mail address error  
(RFC: 551)  
Insufficient system storage  
Terminal/Destination mail address  
error  
(RFC: 552)  
2553  
Mailbox name not allowed  
Destination mail address error  
(RFC: 553)  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 14  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3) Electronic Filing related error  
Message displayed in  
the TopAccess screen  
Error code  
Contents  
Troubleshooting  
2B10  
There was no applicable job.  
No applicable job error in job control  
module  
2B11  
2B20  
2B30  
Job status failed.  
JOB status abnormality  
File library function error  
Failed to access file.  
Insufficient disk space.  
Insufficient disk space in /BOX parti-  
tion  
2
2B31  
2B32  
Failed to access Electronic Filing.  
Status of specified Electronic Filing  
or folder is undefined or being cre-  
ated/deleted  
Failed to print Electronic Filing docu- Electronic Filing printing failure:  
ment.  
Specified document can not be  
printed because of client’s access  
(being edited, etc.).  
2B50  
2B51  
2B71  
Failed to process image.  
Image library error  
List library error  
Failed to process print image.  
-
Document(s) expire(s) in a few days Documents expiring in a few days  
exist  
2B80  
Hard Disk space for Electronic Filing Hard disk space in /BOX partition is  
-
nearly full.  
nearly full (90%).  
2B90  
2BA0  
2BB0  
2BB1  
2BC0  
2BC1  
Insufficient Memory.  
Invalid Box password specified.  
Job canceled  
Insufficient memory capacity  
Invalid Box password  
Job canceling  
-
Power failure occurred  
System fatal error.  
Power failure  
Fatal failure occurred  
Failed to acquire resource.  
System management module  
resource acquiring failure  
2BD0  
Power failure occurred during e-Fil-  
ing restoring.  
Power failure occurred during restor-  
ing of Electronic Filing  
2BE0  
2BF0  
Failed to get machine parameter.  
Machine parameter reading failure  
Maximum number of page range is  
reached.  
Exceeding maximum number of  
pages  
2BF1  
2BF2  
Maximum number of document  
range is reached.  
Exceeding maximum number of doc-  
uments  
Maximum number of folder range is  
reached.  
Exceeding maximum number of fold-  
ers  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4) E-mail related error  
Message displayed in  
the TopAccess screen  
Illegal Job status  
Error code  
Contents  
Troubleshooting  
2C10  
2C11  
2C12  
2C13  
2C14  
2C15  
System access abnormality  
Insufficient memory  
Not enough memory  
Illegal Job status  
Message reception error  
Message transmission error  
Invalid parameter  
Illegal Job status  
Invalid parameter specified  
Message size exceeded limit or max- Exceeding file capacity  
imum size  
2C20  
2C21  
2C22  
Illegal Job status  
Illegal Job status  
Illegal Job status  
System management module access  
abnormality  
Job control module access abnor-  
mality  
Job control module access abnor-  
mality  
2C30  
2C31  
2C32  
2C33  
2C40  
2C60  
Failed to create directory  
Failed to create file  
Directory creation failure  
File creation failure  
Failed to delete file  
File deletion failure  
Failed to create file  
File access failure  
Failed to convert image file format  
Image conversion abnormality  
HDD full failure during processing  
Failed to process your Job. Insuffi-  
cient disk space.  
2C61  
2C62  
2C63  
2C64  
2C65  
2C66  
2C67  
2C68  
2C69  
2C6A  
2C6B  
Failed to read AddressBook  
Not enough memory  
Address Book reading failure  
Memory acquiring failure  
Terminal IP address unset  
Terminal mail address unset  
SMTP address unset  
Invalid Domain Address  
Invalid Domain Address  
Failed to connect to SMTP server  
Failed to connect to SMTP server  
Failed to send E-Mail message  
Failed to send E-Mail message  
Failed to connect to SMTP server  
Failed to send E-Mail message  
Server time time-out error  
NIC time time-out error  
NIC access error  
SMTP server connection error  
HOST NAME error (No RFC error)  
Terminal mail address error  
Invalid address specified in From:  
field  
2C6C  
Invalid address specified in To: field  
Destination mail address error (No  
RFC error)  
2C6D  
2C70  
2C71  
2C72  
NIC system error  
System error  
SMTP service is not available  
Failed SMTP Authentication  
SMTP client OFF  
SMTP authentication error  
POP before SMTP error  
POP Before SMTP Authentication  
Failed  
2C80  
Failed to process received E-mail job E-mail transmission failure when pro-  
cessing E-mail job received  
2C81  
2CC0  
2CC1  
Failed to process received Fax job  
Job canceled  
Process failure of FAX job received  
Job canceling  
-
Power failure occurred  
Power failure  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 16  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5) File sharing related error  
Message displayed in  
the TopAccess screen  
Illegal Job status  
Not enough memory  
Illegal Job status  
Illegal Job status  
Invalid parameter specified  
There are too many documents in the Exceeding document number  
Error code  
Contents  
Troubleshooting  
2D10  
2D11  
2D12  
2D13  
2D14  
2D15  
System access abnormality  
Insufficient memory  
Message reception error  
Message transmission error  
Invalid parameter  
2
folder. Failed in creating new docu-  
ment.  
2D20  
2D21  
2D22  
Illegal Job status  
Illegal Job status  
Illegal Job status  
System management module access  
abnormality  
Job control module access abnor-  
mality  
Job control module access abnor-  
mality  
2D30  
2D31  
2D32  
2D33  
2D40  
2D60  
2D61  
2D62  
Failed to create directory  
Failed to create file  
Failed to delete file  
Failed to create file  
Failed to convert image file format  
Failed to copy file  
Invalid parameter specified  
Failed to connect to network destina- File server connection error  
tion. Check destination path  
Directory creation failure  
File creation failure  
File deletion failure  
File access failure  
Image conversion abnormality  
File library access abnormality  
Invalid parameter  
2D63  
2D64  
2D65  
Specified network path is invalid.  
Check destination path  
Logon to file server failed. Check  
username and password  
There are too many documents in the Exceeding documents in folder:  
folder. Failed in creating new docu-  
ment.  
Invalid network path  
Login failure  
Creating new document is failed.  
2D66  
Failed to process your Job. Insuffi-  
cient disk space.  
HDD full failure during processing  
2D67  
2D68  
2DA0  
FTP service is not available  
File Sharing service is not available  
Expired scan documents deleted  
from share folder.  
FTP service not available  
File sharing service not available  
Periodical deletion of scanned docu-  
ments completed properly.  
-
2DA1  
2DA2  
2DA3  
2DA4  
2DA5  
Expired Sent Fax documents deleted Periodical deletion of transmitted  
-
-
-
-
-
from shared folder.  
FAX documents completed properly.  
Expired Received Fax documents  
deleted from shared folder.  
Periodical deletion of received FAX  
documents completed properly.  
Scanned documents in shared folder Manual deletion of scanned docu-  
deleted upon user’s request. ments completed properly.  
Sent Fax Documents in shared folder Manual deletion of transmitted FAX  
deleted upon user’s request.  
documents completed properly.  
Received Fax Documents in shared  
folder deleted upon user’s request.  
Manual deletion of received FAX  
documents completed properly.  
2DA6  
2DA7  
2DC0  
2DC1  
Failed to delete file.  
Failed to acquire resource.  
Job canceled  
File deletion failure  
Resource acquiring failure  
Job canceling  
-
Power failure occurred  
Power failure  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6) E-mail reception related error  
Message displayed in  
the TopAccess screen  
Error code  
Contents  
Troubleshooting  
3A10  
MIME Error has been detected in the E-mail MIME error  
received mail.  
3A11  
3A12  
MIME Error has been detected in the  
received mail. This mail has been  
transferred to the administrator.  
MIME Error has been detected in the  
received mail. This mail could not be  
transferred to the administrator.  
3A20  
3A21  
Analyze Error has been detected in  
the received mail.  
Analyze Error has been detected in  
the received mail. This mail has been  
transferred to the administrator.  
E-mail analysis error  
3A22  
Analyze Error has been detected in  
the received mail. This mail could not  
be transferred to the administrator.  
3A30  
3A40  
3A50  
3A51  
Whole partial mails were not reached Partial mail time-out error  
by timeout.  
Partial Mail Error has been detected Partial mail related error  
in the received mail.  
HDD Full Error has been occurred in Insufficient HDD capacity error  
this mail.  
HDD Full Error has been occurred in  
this mail. This mail has been trans-  
ferred to the administrator.  
3A52  
HDD Full Error has been occurred in  
this mail. This mail could not be  
transferred to the administrator.  
3A60  
3A61  
HDD Full Warning has been occurred Warning of insufficient HDD capacity  
in this mail.  
HDD Full Warning has been occurred  
in this mail. This mail could not be  
transferred to the administrator.  
3A62  
3A70  
HDD Full Warning has been occurred  
in this mail. This mail could not be  
transferred to the administrator.  
Receiving partial mail was aborted  
since the partial mail setting has  
been changed to Disable.  
Partial mail was received during the  
partial mail setting is disabled.  
Partial mail was received during the  
partial mail setting is disabled. This  
mail has been transferred to the  
administrator.  
Warning of partial mail interruption  
Partial mail reception setting OFF  
3A80  
3A81  
3A82  
Partial mail was received during the  
partial mail setting is disabled. This  
mail could not be transferred to the  
administrator.  
3B10  
3B11  
Format Error has been detected in  
the received mail.  
Format Error has been detected in  
the received mail. This mail has been  
transferred to the administrator.  
E-mail format error  
3B12  
Format Error has been detected in  
the received mail. This mail could not  
be transferred to the administrator.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 18  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Message displayed in  
the TopAccess screen  
Content-Type Error has been  
detected in the received mail.  
Error code  
Contents  
Content-Type error  
Troubleshooting  
3B20  
3B21  
3B22  
Content-Type Error has been  
detected in the received mail. This  
mail has been transferred to the  
administrator.  
Content-Type Error has been  
detected in the received mail. This  
mail could not be transferred to the  
administrator.  
2
3B30  
3B31  
Charset Error has been detected in  
the received mail.  
Charset Error has been detected in  
the received mail. This mail has been  
transferred to the administrator.  
Charset error  
3B32  
Charset Error has been detected in  
the received mail. This mail could not  
be transferred to the administrator.  
3B40  
3B41  
Decode Error has been detected in  
the received mail.  
Decode Error has been detected in  
the received mail. This mail has been  
transferred to the administrator.  
E-mail decode error  
3B42  
Decode Error has been detected in  
the received mail. This mail could not  
be transferred to the administrator.  
3C10  
3C11  
Tiff Analyze Error has been detected TIFF analysis error  
in the received mail.  
Tiff Analyze Error has been detected  
in the received mail. This mail has  
been transferred to the administrator.  
3C12  
Tiff Analyze Error has been detected  
in the received mail. This mail could  
not be transferred to the administra-  
tor.  
3C13  
3C20  
3C21  
Tiff Analyze Error has been detected  
in the received mail.  
Tiff Compression Error has been  
detected in the received mail.  
Tiff Compression Error has been  
detected in the received mail. This  
mail has been transferred to the  
administrator.  
E-mail format error  
3C22  
Tiff Compression Error has been  
detected in the received mail. This  
mail could not be transferred to the  
administrator.  
3C30  
3C31  
Tiff Resolution Error has been  
detected in the received mail.  
Tiff Resolution Error has been  
detected in the received mail. This  
mail has been transferred to the  
administrator.  
Content-Type error  
3C32  
Tiff Resolution Error has been  
detected in the received mail. This  
mail could not be transferred to the  
administrator.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Message displayed in  
the TopAccess screen  
Error code  
Contents  
Troubleshooting  
3C40  
Tiff Paper Size Error has been  
detected in the received mail.  
Charset error  
3C41  
3C42  
Tiff Paper Size Error has been  
detected in the received mail. This  
mail has been transferred to the  
administrator.  
Tiff Paper Size Error has been  
detected in the received mail. This  
mail could not be transferred to the  
administrator.  
3C50  
3C51  
Offramp Destination Error has been  
detected in the received mail.  
Offramp Destination Error has been  
detected in the received mail. This  
mail has been transferred to the  
administrator.  
E-mail decode error  
3C52  
Offramp Destination Error has been  
detected in the received mail. This  
mail could not be transferred to the  
administrator.  
3C60  
3C61  
Offramp Security Error has been  
detected in the received mail.  
Offramp Security Error has been  
detected in the received mail. This  
mail has been transferred to the  
administrator.  
TIFF analysis error  
3C62  
Offramp Security Error has been  
detected in the received mail. This  
mail could not be transferred to the  
administrator.  
3C70  
3D10  
Power Failure has been occurred in  
Email receiving.  
SMTP Destination Error has been  
detected in the received mail. This  
mail was deleted.  
Power failure error  
Destination address error  
3D20  
Offramp Destination limitation Error  
has been detected in the received  
mail.  
Offramp destination limitation error  
3D30  
3E10  
3E20  
3E30  
3E40  
Fax Board Error has been occurred  
in the received mail.  
POP3 Connection Error has been  
occurred in the received mail.  
POP3 Connection Timeout Error has POP3 server connection time-out  
been occurred in the received mail. error  
POP3 Login Error has been occurred POP3 login error  
in the received mail.  
FAX board error  
POP3 server connection error  
POP3 Login Error occurred in the  
received mail.  
POP3 login method error  
3F00  
3F10  
3F20  
3F30  
3F40  
File I/O Error has been occurred in  
this mail. The mail could not be  
received until File I/O is recovered.  
File I/O error  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 20  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.1.4  
Printer function error  
Following codes are displayed at the end of the user name on the print job log screen.  
Error code  
Contents  
Troubleshooting  
402F  
Page memory size error - 1200 dpi network print is performed by the equip-  
ment with 128 MB (standard) memory.  
4031  
4032  
4033  
HDD full during print - Large quantity image data by private print or invalid  
network print are saved in HDD.  
Private-print-only error: Jobs other than Private print jobs cannot be per-  
formed.  
Printing data storing limitation error: Printing with its data being stored to the  
HDD temporarily (Proof print, Private print, Scheduled print, etc.) cannot be  
performed.  
2
4034  
4035  
4036  
A221  
A222  
A290  
e-Filing storing limitation error: Printing with its data being stored to the HDD  
(print and e-Filing, print to e-Filing, etc.) cannot be performed.  
Local file storing limitation error: Network FAX or Internet FAX cannot be sent  
when "Local" is selected for the destination of the file to save.  
User authentication error: The user who intended to print a document is not  
registered as a user.  
Print job cancellation - Print job (copy, list print, network print) is deleted from  
the print job screen.  
Print job power failure - The power of the equipment is turned OFF during  
print job (copy, list print, network print).  
Limit over error (Black): The numbers of output pages have exceeded those  
specified with both of the department code and the user code at the same  
time.  
A291  
A292  
A2A0  
Limit over error (Black): The number of output pages has exceeded the one  
specified with the user code.  
Limit over error (Black): The number of output pages has exceeded the one  
specified with the department code.  
Limit over error (Color): The numbers of output pages have exceeded those  
specified with both of the department code and the user code at the same  
time.  
A2A1  
A2A2  
Limit over error (Color): The number of output pages has exceeded the one  
specified with the user code.  
Limit over error (Color): The number of output pages has exceeded the one  
specified with the department code.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
<<Error history>>  
In the setting mode (08-253), the latest twenty groups of error data will be displayed.  
Display example  
EA10  
99999999  
05 06 14 17 57 32  
064  
064  
23621000000  
ABCDEFHIJLO  
11 digits  
Error code  
4 digits  
Total counter YY MM DD HH MM SS  
MMM  
NNN  
3 digits  
8 digits  
12 digits (Year is indicated 3 digits  
with its last two digits.)  
A
B
Paper source  
0: Not selected 1: Bypass feed 2: LCF 3: Upper drawer 4: Lower drawer 5: PFP upper drawer  
6: PFP lower drawer 7: Unused 8: Unused  
Paper size code  
0: A5/ST 1: A5-R 2: ST-R 3: LT, 4: A4 5: B5-R 6: LT-R 7: A4-R 8: OTHER/UNIV 9: B5,  
A: FOLIO/COMP B: LG C: B4 D: LD E: A3 F: 13"LG G: Unsed H: A6-R I: Post card J: 8.5"SQ  
K: A3-wide L: 305×457 mm M: 8K N: 16K-R O: 16K Z: Not selected  
C
Sort mode/staple mode  
0: Non-sort/Non-staple 1: Group 2: Sort 7: Front staple  
8: Double staple 9: Rear staple A: Saddle stitch  
D
E
F
ADF mode  
0: Unused 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED  
APS/AMS mode  
0: Not selected 1: APS 2: AMS  
Duplex mode  
0: Not selected 1: Book 2: Double-sided/Single-sided 4: Double-sided/Duplex copying  
8: Single-sided/Duplex copying  
G
H
Unused  
Image shift  
0: Unused 1: Book 2: Left 4: Right  
I
Editing  
0: Unused 1: Masking 2: Trimming 3: Mirror image 4: Unused  
J
Edge erase/Dual-page  
0: Unused 1: Edge erase 2: Dual-page 3: Edge erase & Dual-page  
K
L
Unused  
Function  
0: Unused 1: Copying 2: FAX/Internet FAX transmission 3: FAX/Internet FAX/E-mail reception printing  
4: Unused 5: Printing/List print 6: Scan/E-mail transmission  
MMM  
NNN  
O
Primary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)  
(Mx256)+(Mx16)+M  
Secondary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)  
(Nx256)+(Nx16)+N  
Color mode  
0: Auto color 1: Full color 2: Black 3: Unused 4: Twin color copy 5: Gray scale  
6: Unused 7: Image smoothing  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 22  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.2 Self-diagnosis Modes  
Mode  
For start  
[0]+[1]+  
[POWER]  
Contents  
For exit  
Display  
Control panel  
check mode  
All LEDs on the control panel are lit, and all  
the LCD pixels blink.  
[POWER]  
OFF/ON  
-
Test mode  
[0]+[3]+  
[POWER]  
Checks the status of input/output signals.  
Outputs the test patterns.  
Adjusts various items.  
[POWER]  
OFF/ON  
100% C A4  
TEST MODE  
2
Test print mode [0]+[4]+  
[POWER]  
[POWER]  
OFF/ON  
100% P A4  
TEST PRINT  
Adjustment  
mode  
[0]+[5]+  
[POWER]  
[POWER]  
OFF/ON  
100% A A4  
TEST MODE  
Setting mode  
[0]+[8]+  
[POWER]  
Sets various items.  
[POWER]  
OFF/ON  
100% D  
TEST MODE  
List print mode [9]+[START]+ Prints out the data lists of the codes 05 and  
[POWER] 08, PM support mode and pixel counter.  
[POWER]  
OFF/ON  
100% UA A4  
LIST PRINT  
PM support  
mode  
[6]+[START]+ Clears each counter.  
[POWER]  
[POWER]  
OFF/ON  
100% K  
TEST MODE  
Firmware  
update mode  
[8]+[9]+  
[POWER]  
Performs updating of the system firmware.  
[POWER]  
OFF/ON  
-
Note:  
To enter the desired mode, turn ON the power while two digital keys designated to each mode  
(e.g. [0] and [5]) are pressed simultaneously.  
To exit from Adjustment mode and Setting mode:  
Shut down the equipment. When the power should be turned OFF, be sure to shut down the equip-  
ment by pressing the [ENERGY SAVER] button for a few seconds.  
<Operation procedure>  
Control panel check mode (01):  
[POWER] OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
[0][1]  
[POWER]  
LED lit/  
LCD blinking  
[START]  
[START]  
(Button check)  
Notes:  
1. A mode can be canceled by [POWER] OFF/ON when the LED is lit and the LCD is blinking.  
2. Button Check  
Buttons with LED  
(Press to turn OFF the LED.)  
Buttons without LED  
Button on touch panel  
(Press to display the message on the control panel.)  
(Press to display the screen on the control panel at power-ON.)  
Test mode (03): Refer to “2.2.1. Input check (test mode 03)” and “2.2.2. Output check (test mode  
03)”.  
Test print mode (04): Refer to “2.2.3. Test print mode (04)”.  
Adjustment mode (05): Refer to “2.2.4. Adjustment mode (05)”.  
Setting mode (08): Refer to “2.2.5. Setting mode (08)”.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
List print mode (9S): The procedure varies depending on the code.  
[9][START]  
[POWER]  
(Code)  
[START]  
[Digital keys]  
Key in the first  
code to be printed  
[START]  
[Digital keys]  
Key in the last  
code to be printed  
[START]  
List starts to  
be printed  
[POWER]  
OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
101: Adjustment mode (05)  
102: Setting mode (08)  
(Code)  
103: PM support mode  
104: Stored information of pixel counter (toner cartridge reference)  
105: Stored information of pixel counter (service technician reference)  
106: Error history (Maximum 1000 items)  
107: Error history (Latest 80 items)  
PM support mode (6S):  
[6][START]  
[POWER]  
(Code)  
2: PM Support Screen  
[START]  
(Operation started)  
[POWER] OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
Firmware update mode (89): Refer to “6. FIRMWARE UPDATING”.  
[POWER]  
ON  
Normal  
[0][1]  
[0][3]  
[0][4]  
[0][5]  
[0][8]  
[9][START]  
[6][START]  
[8][9]  
Firmware  
update mode  
Adjustment  
mode  
List print  
mode  
Control panel  
check mode  
Test print  
mode  
PM support  
mode  
Setting  
mode  
Test mode  
Warming up  
Ready  
[POWER]  
OFF  
*1  
To user  
State transition diagram of self-diagnosis modes  
Fig.2-1  
*1 Turn OFF the power after using the self-diagnosis mode, and leave the equipment to the user.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 24  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.2.1  
Input check (Test mode 03)  
The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the [FAX] button, [COPY] button and  
the digital keys in the test mode (03).  
<Operation procedure>  
2
[FAX]  
or  
[COPY]  
[0][3]  
[POWER]  
[START]  
[Digital keys]  
[CLEAR]  
(LCD ON)  
[POWER] OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
Note:  
Initialization is performed before the equipment enters the test mode.  
Fig.2-2 Example of display during input check  
Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted are  
listed in the following pages.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[FAX] button: OFF/[COPY] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: OFF/[COPY] LED: OFF)  
Contents  
Digital  
key  
Highlighted display  
Normal display  
Button  
Items to check  
e.g.  
e.g.  
A
B
C
D
E
F
Bypass unit connection  
Not connected  
Not connected  
Connected  
ADU connection  
Connected  
-
-
-
LCF connection  
Not connected  
Connected  
[1]  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
LCF drawer detection switch  
PFP upper drawer detection switch  
-
Drawer not installed Drawer present  
Drawer not installed  
-
Drawer present  
-
PFP upper drawer paper stock sensor  
PFP upper drawer feed sensor  
PFP connection  
Paper almost empty Paper present  
Paper present  
Not connected  
Cover opened  
No paper  
No paper  
[2]  
Connected  
Cover closed  
Paper present  
PFP side cover open/close switch  
PFP upper drawer empty sensor  
PFP upper drawer tray-up sensor  
G
H
Tray at upper limit  
position  
Other than upper  
limit position  
A
B
LCF tray bottom sensor  
Tray at bottom posi- Other than upper  
tion  
limit position  
LCF standby side paper misload detection sen- Properly loaded  
sor  
Paper misload  
C
D
E
F
-
-
-
[3]  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
-
Paper stock sensor at LCF feed side  
PFP lower drawer detection switch  
-
Paper present  
No paper  
Drawer not installed Drawer present  
-
-
PFP lower drawer paper stock sensor  
PFP lower drawer feed sensor  
Paper almost empty Paper present  
Paper present  
No paper  
PFP motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at  
output mode (03))  
Abnormal rotation  
Normal rotation  
[4]  
F
G
H
-
-
-
PFP lower drawer empty sensor  
PFP lower drawer tray-up sensor  
No paper  
Paper present  
Tray at upper limit  
position  
Other than upper  
limit position  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 26  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Highlighted display  
Digital  
key  
Normal display  
e.g.  
Button  
Items to check  
e.g.  
A
B
LCF end fence home position sensor  
LCF end fence stop position sensor  
Fence home posi-  
tion  
Other than home  
position  
Fence stop position Other than stop  
position  
2
C
D
E
Empty sensor at LCF standby side  
LCF side cover open/close switch  
No paper  
Paper present  
Cover opened  
Normal rotation  
Cover closed  
Abnormal rotation  
[5]  
LCF motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at  
output mode (03))  
F
LCF tray-up sensor  
Tray at upper limit  
position  
Other than upper  
limit position  
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
LCF feed sensor  
No paper  
No paper  
Paper present  
Paper present  
Empty sensor at LCF feed side  
Lower drawer detection switch  
Upper drawer detection switch  
Lower drawer paper stock sensor  
Upper drawer paper stock sensor  
Lower drawer empty sensor  
Upper drawer empty sensor  
Lower drawer tray-up sensor  
Drawer not installed Drawer present  
Drawer not installed Drawer present  
Paper almost empty Paper present  
Paper almost empty Paper present  
No paper  
No paper  
Paper present  
Paper present  
[6]  
G
Tray at upper limit  
position  
Other than upper  
limit position  
H
Upper drawer tray-up sensor  
Tray at upper limit  
position  
Other than upper  
limit position  
A
B
C
D
E
F
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Side cover open/close switch  
Front cover opening/closing switch  
-
-
Cover opened  
Cover opened  
-
-
Cover closed  
Cover closed  
-
[7]  
G
H
A
Exit sensor  
Paper present  
Bit 1  
No paper  
Bit 0  
Bypass feed paper width sensor 3  
(Refer to table1)  
B
C
D
Bypass feed paper width sensor 2  
(Refer to table1)  
Bit 0  
Bit 0  
Bit 0  
Bit 1  
Bit 1  
Bit 1  
Bypass feed paper width sensor 1  
(Refer to table1)  
[8]  
Bypass feed paper width sensor 0  
(Refer to table1)  
E
F
Bypass sensor  
No paper  
Paper present  
ADU closed  
No paper  
ADU opening/closing switch  
ADU exit sensor  
ADU opened  
Paper present  
Paper present  
G
H
ADU entrance sensor  
No paper  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Highlighted display  
e.g.  
Digital  
key  
Normal display  
e.g.  
Button  
Items to check  
A
B
C
D
E
F
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[9]  
-
-
Key copy counter connection  
-
Not connected  
Connected  
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[0]  
G
H
Table 1. Relation between the status of the bypass paper width sensor and paper size (width).  
Bypass paper width sensor  
Paper width size  
3
0
1
1
1
0
1
2
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
A3/LD  
A4-R/LT-R  
A5-R/ST-R  
Card size  
B4-R/LG  
B5-R  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 28  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[FAX] button: ON/[COPY] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: ON/[COPY] LED: OFF)  
Contents  
Digital  
key  
Highlighted display  
Normal display  
Button  
Items to check  
e.g.  
e.g.  
A
B
2nd transfer roller position detection sensor  
Released  
Contacted  
Black developer contact timing detection sensor Releasing move-  
ment  
Contacting move-  
ment  
2
C
D
E
F
Black developer contact position detection sen- Released position  
sor  
Contacted position  
Normal rotation  
Normal rotation  
Normal rotation  
Normal rotation  
Main motor rotation status  
Abnormal rotation  
Abnormal rotation  
Abnormal rotation  
Abnormal rotation  
(Motor is rotating at Output Mode (03))  
[1]  
Developer motor rotation status  
(Motor is rotating at Output Mode (03))  
Transport motor rotation status  
(Motor is rotating at Output Mode (03))  
G
Polygonal motor rotation status  
(Motor is rotating at Output Mode (03))  
H
A
B
C
24V Power supply  
Power OFF  
Not connected  
Normally  
Power ON  
IPC board connection  
Connected  
Color toner cartridge sensor  
Revolver home position sensor  
Installation fault  
Home position  
Other than home  
position  
D
E
F
-
-
-
[2]  
-
-
-
Toner bag full detection sensor  
Toner bag full  
Not full  
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
Black auto-toner sensor connection  
Not connected  
Connected  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[3]  
-
-
-
-
-
-
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
Lower drawer feed sensor  
No paper  
Paper present  
Upper drawer feed sensor  
Paper present  
No paper  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[4]  
Bridge unit connection  
Not connected  
Connected  
Color auto-toner sensor connection  
Not connected  
Connected  
G
H
-
-
-
-
-
-
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Highlighted display  
e.g.  
Digital  
key  
Normal display  
e.g.  
Button  
Items to check  
A
B
C
D
E
F
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[5]  
-
RADF connection  
RADF connected  
Not connected  
G
H
Platen sensor  
Platen cove opened Platen cover closed  
Carriage home position sensor  
Home position  
Other than home  
position  
A
B
C
D
E
F
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
APS sensor (APS-R)  
APS sensor (APS-C)  
APS sensor (APS-3)  
APS sensor (APS-2)  
APS sensor (APS-1)  
RADF tray sensor  
RADF empty sensor  
RADF jam access cover sensor  
RADF open/close sensor  
RADF exit sensor  
RADF intermediate sensor  
RADF read sensor  
RADF registration sensor  
-
No original  
No original  
No original  
No original  
No original  
Original present  
Original present  
Cover opened  
RADF opened  
Original present  
Original present  
Original present  
Original present  
-
Original present  
Original present  
Original present  
Original present  
Original present  
No original  
No original  
Cover closed  
RADF closed  
No original  
No original  
No original  
No original  
-
[6]  
[7]  
[8]  
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
RADF original length sensor  
RADF original width sensor 1  
RADF original width sensor 2  
Original present  
Original present  
Original present  
No original  
No original  
No original  
-
G
H
A
-
-
Black toner cartridge switch  
Cartridge not  
installed  
Cartridge installed  
B
C
D
E
F
-
-
-
-
-
-
Bypass feed sensor  
No paper  
Paper present  
[9]  
Registration sensor  
Paper present  
No paper  
-
-
-
-
G
H
-
-
Transfer belt home position sensor  
Home position  
Other tha home  
position  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 30  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Highlighted display  
Digital  
key  
Normal display  
e.g.  
Button  
Items to check  
e.g.  
A
B
C
D
E
F
Bridge unit transport sensor 2  
Bridge unit cover open/close detection switch  
Bridge unit transport sensor 1  
Bridge unit paper full detection sensor  
-
Paper present  
Cover opened  
Paper present  
Paper not full  
-
No paper  
Cover closed  
No paper  
Paper full  
-
2
[0]  
Charger cleaner front position detection switch  
Cleaner home posi- Other than home  
tion  
position  
G
H
Charger cleaner rear position detection switch  
-
Cleaner rear posi-  
tion  
Other than rear posi-  
tion  
-
-
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[FAX] button: OFF/[COPY] button: ON ([FAX] LED: OFF/[COPY] LED: ON)  
Contents  
Digital  
key  
Highlighted display  
Normal display  
Button  
Items to check  
e.g.  
e.g.  
-
-
-
Temperature/humidity sensor (displays temper-  
ature inside of the equipment)  
Temperature/humidity sensor (displays humidity  
inside of the equipment)  
Drum thermistor (displays drum surface temper-  
ature)  
-
-
-
Temperature [°C]  
[1]  
[2]  
[3]  
Humidity [%RH]  
Temperature [°C]  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[4]  
[5]  
[6]  
[7]  
[8]  
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 32  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Highlighted display  
Digital  
key  
Normal display  
e.g.  
Button  
Items to check  
e.g.  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[9]  
2
-
-
-
Dongles for other equipments / Other USB  
devices  
Judgement for acceptable USB storage device Acceptable  
(*1)  
Connectable  
Not connectable  
[0]  
E
Not acceptable  
F
G
H
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
*1  
Be sure to install the USB storage device to the equipment and check if the device can be used with  
this code.  
Be sure to turn OFF the write protection (the function to prevent data from erasure by the accidental  
recording or deleting) of the USB storage device before performing the check, otherwise this code  
cannot be used.  
It may take some time (2 sec. to 10 sec.) before this check is completed depending on the USB stor-  
age device.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 33  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.2.2  
Output check (test mode 03)  
Status of the output signals can be checked by entering the following codes in the test mode 03.  
<Operation procedure>  
Procedure 1  
[0][3]  
[POWER]  
Stop  
code  
Operation  
OFF  
Operation  
ON  
[POWER] OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
[START]  
(Code)  
(Code)  
(Code)  
[START]  
Procedure 2  
[0][3]  
[POWER]  
[POWER] OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
Operation  
One direction  
Test mode  
standby  
[START]  
[CLEAR]  
Procedure 3  
[POWER]  
OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
[0][3]  
Test mode  
standby  
Operation  
ON  
Operation  
OFF  
[START]  
[START]  
[CLEAR]  
[POWER]  
Procedure 4  
[0][3]  
[POWER]  
[POWER] OFF  
[START]  
(Code)  
Code  
Function  
Code  
Function  
Procedure  
101  
Main motor ON (Operational without  
black developer unit)  
151  
Code No.101 function OFF  
1
102  
103  
108  
109  
110  
112  
Toner motor K (normal rotation) ON  
Polygonal motor (600dpi) ON  
Registration clutch ON  
PFP motor ON  
152  
153  
158  
159  
160  
162  
Code No.102 function OFF  
Code No.103 function OFF  
Code No.108 function OFF  
Code No.109 function OFF  
Code No.110 function OFF  
Code No.112 function OFF  
1
1
1
1
1
1
ADU motor ON  
Developer motor ON (Operational with  
black developer unit)  
115  
116  
118  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
Drum cleaning brush motor ON  
Transfer belt cleaner auger motor ON  
Laser ON  
165  
166  
168  
170  
171  
172  
173  
174  
175  
Code No.115 function OFF  
Code No.116 function OFF  
Code No.118 function OFF  
Code No.120 function OFF  
Code No.121 function OFF  
Code No.122 function OFF  
Code No.123 function OFF  
Code No.124 function OFF  
Code No.125 function OFF  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Exit motor (normal rotation) ON  
Exit motor (reversal rotation) ON  
LCF motor ON  
Transport motor ON  
Toner motor K (reversal rotation) ON  
Color auto-toner sensor shutter sole-  
noid ON (open)  
126  
Color auto-toner sensor LED ON  
176  
Code No.126 function OFF  
1
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 34  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Code  
201  
202  
203  
204  
205  
206  
207  
208  
209  
210  
218  
222  
225  
226  
228  
232  
235  
241  
242  
243  
248  
249  
252  
261  
Function  
Procedure  
Upper drawer feed clutch ON/OFF  
Lower drawer feed clutch ON/OFF  
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
3
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
3
3
3
2
Lower transport clutch (high speed) ON/OFF  
Bypass feed clutch ON/OFF  
Lower transport clutch (low speed) ON/OFF  
LCF pickup solenoid ON/OFF  
2
LCF end fence reciprocating movement  
LCF end fence motor ON/OFF  
LCF feed clutch ON/OFF  
LCF transport clutch ON/OFF  
Key copy counter count up  
ADU clutch ON/OFF  
PFP transport clutch ON/OFF  
PFP upper drawer feed clutch ON/OFF  
PFP lower drawer feed clutch ON/OFF  
Bridge unit gate solenoid ON/OFF  
Discharge LED ON/OFF  
IH board cooling fan (low speed) ON/OFF  
Upper drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)  
Lower drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)  
Developer bias (Black) [+DC] ON/OFF  
Developer bias (Black) [-DC] ON/OFF  
Main charger ON/OFF  
Scan motor ON (Automatically stops at limit position, speed can be changed by using  
ZOOM button)  
264  
265  
267  
268  
271  
278  
280  
281  
282  
283  
284  
285  
294  
295  
297  
410  
411  
SLG board cooling fan / Scanner unit cooling fan ON (high/low speed)  
SLG board cooling fan / Scanner unit cooling fan OFF  
Scanner exposure lamp ON/OFF  
1
1
3
3
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
3
3
3
Laser unit cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF  
LCF tray-up motor UP/DOWN  
PFP upper drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)  
PFP lower drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)  
RADF feed motor ON/OFF (normal rotation)  
RADF feed motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation)  
RADF read motor ON/OFF  
RADF exit/reverse motor ON/OFF (normal rotation)  
RADF exit/reverse motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation)  
RADF reverse solenoid ON/OFF  
Power OFF mode (for 200V series)  
RADF fan motor ON/OFF  
Power supply cooling fan (low speed) ON/OFF  
Power supply cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Code  
412  
413  
416  
417  
418  
419  
420  
421  
422  
424  
425  
426  
427  
428  
430  
431  
432  
433  
435  
437  
439  
440  
442  
450  
451  
452  
453  
454  
455  
456  
457  
458  
459  
460  
461  
Function  
Internal cooling fan ON/OFF (low speed)  
Procedure  
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
2
Internal cooling fan ON/OFF (high speed)  
IH board cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF  
Ozone exhaust fan (low speed) ON/OFF  
Ozone exhaust fan (high speed) ON/OFF  
Developer bias (Black) [AC] ON/OFF  
Developer bias (Color) [+DC] ON/OFF  
Developer bias (Color) [-DC1] ON/OFF  
Developer bias (Color) [AC] ON/OFF  
1st transfer roller bias [+] ON/OFF  
1st transfer roller bias [-] ON/OFF  
2nd transfer roller bias [+] ON/OFF  
2nd transfer roller bias [-] ON/OFF  
Drum cleaning blade bias ON/OFF  
Image quality sensor shutter solenoid ON/OFF  
Color developer drive clutch ON/OFF  
Black developer drive clutch ON/OFF  
Black developer lifting clutch ON/OFF  
2nd transfer roller contact clutch ON/OFF  
Transfer belt cleaner clutch ON/OFF  
Upper transport clutch (high speed) ON/OFF  
Upper transport clutch (low speed) ON/OFF  
Color developer toner supply clutch ON/OFF  
Revolver motor ON/OFF (printing operation)  
Revolver motor operation (at standby position)  
Revolver motor operation (at toner cartridge Y access position)  
Revolver motor operation (at toner cartridge M access position)  
Revolver motor operation (at toner cartridge C access position)  
Revolver motor operation (at developer unit Y access position)  
Revolver motor operation (at developer unit M access position)  
Revolver motor operation (at developer unit C access position)  
Revolver motor operation (at home position)  
Revolver motor operation (at developing position)  
Black developer unit lifting movement ON/OFF (continuous lifting movement)  
Charger cleaner motor movement (one reciprocating movement)  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 36  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.2.3  
Test print mode (test mode 04)  
The embedded test pattern can be printed out by keying in the following codes in the test print mode (04).  
<Procedure 1>  
[0][4]  
[POWER]  
(Code)  
[START]  
Operation  
Continuous  
Test Printing  
[CLEAR]  
[POWER] OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
2
<Procedure 2>  
[0][4]  
[POWER]  
(Code)  
[START]  
[CLEAR]  
Color  
selection  
[START]  
Operation  
Continuous  
Test Printing  
[CLEAR]  
[POWER] OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
Notes:  
1. When an error occurs, it is indicated on the panel, but the recovery operation is not per-  
formed.  
Turn OFF the power and then back ON to clear the error.  
2. During test printing, the [CLEAR] button is disabled when “Wait adding toner” is displayed.  
Code  
142  
204  
219  
220  
231  
Types of test pattern  
Grid pattern (black)  
Remarks  
Remarks  
Pattern width: 2 dots, Pitch: 10 mm  
Pattern width: 1 dot, Pitch: 10 mm  
1
2
2
2
2
Grid pattern (color)  
6% test pattern  
8% test pattern  
Secondary scanning direction 33 grada- 3 pixels standard, Width: 10 mm  
tion steps  
237  
262  
Halftone  
2
2
Pattern for jitter evaluation  
(4 lines ON / 4 lines OFF)  
1 pixel standard, for color deviation cor-  
rection  
270  
Image quality control test pattern  
For checking the image quality control  
2
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2.2.4  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Items in the adjustment mode list in the following pages can be corrected or changed in this adjustment mode  
(05). Turn ON the power with pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously in order to enter this mode.  
When the power should be turned OFF, be sure to shut down the equipment by pressing the [ENERGY SAVER]  
button for a few seconds.  
Procedure 1  
[Digital key]  
[FAX]  
[ENTER]  
or  
[POWER]  
OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
[Digital key]  
(Code)  
[0][5]  
[POWER]  
*
[FUNCTION CLEAR]  
[START]  
(Key in a value)  
[START]  
(Test copy)  
[INTERRUPT]  
(Stores value in RAM)  
[CANCEL]  
[CLEAR]  
(Corrects value)  
*Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).  
Procedure 2  
[ENTER]  
or  
[INTERRUPT]  
Value  
displayed  
[POWER]  
OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
[0][5]  
[POWER]  
[Digital key]  
(Code)  
[START]  
([FAX] [START])  
(Test copy)  
(
)
(Value unchangeable)  
Procedure 3  
[POWER]  
OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
[UP]  
or  
[DOWN]  
(Adjust a value)  
[ENTER]  
or  
[INTERRUPT]  
[Digital key]  
(Code)  
[0][5]  
[POWER]  
[START]  
([FAX] [START])  
(Test copy)  
(Stores value in RAM)  
[CANCEL]  
[CLEAR]  
(Corrects value)  
Procedure 4  
[CANCEL]  
[START]  
([FAX]  
[ENTER]  
or  
[0][5]  
[POWER]  
[Digital key]  
(Code)  
[START]  
[Digital key]  
(Sub code)  
[START] [Digital key]  
[POWER]  
OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
[INTERRUPT]  
[START])  
*[FUNCTION CLEAR]  
(Key in a value)  
Stores value  
in RAM  
(Test copy)  
[CLEAR]  
(Corrects value)  
[CLEAR]  
(Corrects value)  
*Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).  
Procedure 5  
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]  
[FAX]  
[POWER]  
OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
[UP]  
or  
[DOWN]  
[ENTER]  
or  
[INTERRUPT]  
[0][5]  
[POWER]  
Automatic  
adjustment  
[Digital key] [START]  
(Code)  
[START]  
(Test copy)  
(Adjust a value) Stores value  
in RAM  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 38  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Procedure 6  
[POWER]OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
[Digital key]  
(Code)  
[0][5]  
[POWER]  
Automatic  
adjustment  
[FAX] [COPY])  
(Test copy)  
[START]  
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]  
*
*
When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, an error message is  
displayed.  
Return to standby screen by pressing the [CANCEL] or [CLEAR]  
button.  
2
Procedure 7  
[CANCEL]  
[FAX]  
[ENTER]  
Stores value  
in RAM  
[POWER]  
OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
[Digital key]  
(Code)  
Automatic  
adjustment  
[0][5]  
[POWER]  
[START]  
[START]  
(Test copy)  
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]  
*
*
When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, an error message is  
displayed.  
Return to standby screen by pressing the [CANCEL] or [CLEAR] button.  
Procedure 10  
[POWER]  
OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
[0][5]  
[POWER]  
[Digital key]  
(Code)  
[Digital key]  
(Sub code)  
Value  
displayed  
[START]  
[START]  
[START]  
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT]  
(Value unchangeable)  
Procedure 14  
[ENTER]  
or  
[FAX]  
[POWER]  
[0][5]  
[UP] or [DOWN]  
(Adjust a value)  
[Digital key]  
(Code)  
[Digital key]  
(Sub code)  
[START]  
[START]  
OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
[POWER]  
[INTERRUPT]  
[START]  
Stores value  
in RAM  
(Test copy)  
[CLEAR]  
(Corrects value)  
[CANCEL]  
(Corrects value)  
Note:  
The fuser roller temperature control at the adjustment mode is different from that at the normal  
state.  
Therefore, the problem of fusing efficiency may be occurred in the test copy at the adjustment  
mode.  
In that case, turn ON the power normally, leave the equipment for approx. 3 minutes after it has  
become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test print pattern in Adjustment Mode (05)  
Operation:  
One test print is printed out when the [FAX] button is pressed after the code is keyed in at Standby  
Screen.  
Code  
Types of test pattern  
Grid pattern (Black)  
Grid pattern (Black/Duplex printing)  
Remarks  
1
3
4
Refer to 3.4.3 Printer related adjustment  
Refer to 3.4.3 Printer related adjustment  
For gamma adjustment (Color/Black integrated Refer to 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment  
pattern)  
5
6
For gamma adjustment (Color)  
For gamma adjustment (Black)  
For gamma adjustment (Color)  
For gamma adjustment (Black)  
Refer to 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment  
For checking the gradation reproduction  
For checking the gradation reproduction  
Refer to 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment  
For checking the image of printer section  
7
10  
12  
Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation  
steps (Y)  
13  
14  
15  
47  
48  
49  
50  
Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation  
steps (M)  
For checking the image of printer section  
For checking the image of printer section  
For checking the image of printer section  
Refer to 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment  
Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation  
steps (C)  
Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation  
steps (K)  
Gamma adjustment for printer (PS/ 600 x 600  
dpi)  
Gamma adjustment for printer (PS/ 1,200 x 600 Refer to 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment  
dpi)  
Gamma adjustment for printer (PCL/ 600 x 600 Refer to 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment  
dpi)  
Gamma adjustment for printer (PCL/ 1,200 x  
600 dpi)  
Refer to 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment  
51  
52  
Gamma checking for printer (PS/ 600 x 600 dpi) For checking the gradation reproduction  
Gamma checking for printer (PS/ 1,200 x 600  
dpi)  
For checking the gradation reproduction  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
Grid pattern (Full Color / Thick paper 2)  
Grid pattern (Full Color / Thick paper 3)  
Grid pattern (Full Color / OHP)  
Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration  
roller  
Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration  
roller  
Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration  
roller  
Grid pattern (Black / Thick paper 2)  
Grid pattern (Black / Thick paper 3)  
Grid pattern (Black / OHP)  
Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration  
roller  
Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration  
roller  
Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration  
roller  
62  
63  
64  
68  
69  
For color deviation correction (Full Color)  
For color deviation correction (Full Color)  
For color deviation correction (Full Color)  
For color deviation correction (Full Color)  
For color deviation correction (Full Color)  
Only for A3/LD size  
Only for A3/LD size  
Only for A3/LD size  
Only for A4/LT size  
Only for A4/LT size  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 40  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes:  
1. The digit after the hyphen in “Code” of the following table is a sub code.  
2. In “RAM”, the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. “M”  
stands for the LGC board and “SYS” stands for the SYS board.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
2
tion  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
able  
value>  
200  
201  
202  
203  
204  
206  
207  
Develop- Initializationof  
ment  
All  
(Y,M,C,K)  
-
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
The value starts chang-  
ing approx. 3 minutes  
after this adjustment  
started.  
The value is automati-  
cally set during this  
adjustment (approx. 2  
minutes).  
(As the value increases,  
the sensor output  
increases correspond-  
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
color auto-  
toner sensor  
light amount  
correction tar-  
get value  
<0-255>  
Y
-
<0-255>  
M
-
<0-255>  
C
-
<0-255>  
K
-
<0-255>  
YMC  
-
<0-255>  
Develop- Initialization of color auto-  
ment  
ALL  
-
Initializes the color  
auto-toner sensor light  
amount correction tar-  
get value.  
toner sensor light amount  
correction target value  
(color)  
208  
210  
Develop- Enforced correction of  
ALL  
(color)  
-
M
M
Performs the color  
auto-toner sensor light  
amount correction forc-  
ibly.  
6
3
ment  
color auto-toner sensor  
light amount  
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias out-  
put adjustment (When not  
transferred)  
ALL  
225  
<0-225>  
When the value  
decreases, the 1st  
transfer roller bias out-  
put increases.  
The adjustment value  
becomes effective  
when the Setting Mode  
(08- 541, 549 and 551)  
is 0 (invalid).  
224  
225  
226  
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias out-  
put adjustment (When  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
147  
<0-187>  
M
M
M
When the value  
3
3
3
decreases, the 2nd  
transfer roller bias out-  
put increases.  
cleaning the roller [+] )  
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias out-  
put adjustment (When  
229  
<188-  
255>  
When the value  
decreases, the 2nd  
transfer roller bias out-  
put increases.  
cleaning the roller [-] )  
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias out-  
put adjustment (Paper  
interval/When not trans-  
ferred)  
191  
<188-  
255>  
When the value  
decreases, the 2nd  
transfer roller bias out-  
put increases.  
227-0  
227-1  
Transfer 2nd transfer  
Single  
159  
M
M
When the value  
14  
14  
roller bias out- side  
(black) <0-187>  
ALL 134  
(black) <0-187>  
decreases, the 2nd  
transfer roller bias out-  
put increases.  
The adjustment value  
becomes effective  
when the Setting Mode  
(08- 544, 549 and 551)  
is 0 (invalid).  
put adjust-  
ment  
(Plain paper)  
Reverse  
side at  
duplexing  
227-2  
227-3  
Single  
side  
Reverse  
side at  
ALL  
(color) <0-187>  
ALL 128  
(color) <0-187>  
147  
M
M
14  
14  
duplexing  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
144  
229-0  
229-1  
Transfer 2nd transfer  
Single  
ALL  
M
M
When the value  
14  
14  
roller bias out- side  
(black) <0-187>  
ALL 119  
(black) <0-187>  
decreases, the 2nd  
transfer roller bias out-  
put increases.  
The adjustment value  
becomes effective  
when the Setting Mode  
(08-544, 549 and 551)  
is 0 (invalid).  
put adjust-  
ment  
Reverse  
side at  
(Thick paper  
duplexing  
1)  
229-2  
229-3  
Single  
side  
Reverse  
side at  
ALL  
(color) <0-187>  
ALL 112  
(color) <0-187>  
125  
M
M
14  
14  
duplexing  
230-0  
230-1  
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias out-  
put (Thick paper 2)  
ALL  
(black) <0-187>  
ALL 150  
(color) <0-187>  
153  
M
M
When the value  
14  
14  
decreases, the 2nd  
transfer roller bias out-  
put increases.  
The adjustment value  
becomes effective  
when the Setting Mode  
(08- 544, 549 and 551)  
is 0 (invalid).  
231-0  
231-1  
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias out-  
put (Thick paper 3)  
ALL  
(black) <0-187>  
ALL 131  
(color) <0-187>  
131  
M
M
When the value  
14  
14  
decreases, the 2nd  
transfer roller bias out-  
put increases.  
The adjustment value  
becomes effective  
when the Setting Mode  
(08- 544, 549 and 551)  
is 0 (invalid).  
232-0  
232-1  
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias out-  
put (OHP film)  
ALL  
(black) <0-187>  
ALL 119  
(color) <0-187>  
119  
M
M
When the value  
14  
14  
decreases, the 2nd  
transfer roller bias out-  
put increases.  
The adjustment value  
becomes effective  
when the Setting Mode  
(08- 544, 549 and 551)  
is 0 (invalid).  
234-0  
234-1  
Transfer 2nd transfer  
Single  
ALL  
(black)  
ALL  
(black)  
5
M
M
Sets the offset amount  
of 2nd transfer roller  
bias.  
0: -500V 1: -400V  
2: -300V 3: -200V  
4: -100V 5: 0V  
6: +100V 7: +200V  
8: +300V 9: +400V  
10: +500V  
4
4
roller bias off- side  
setting adjust-  
ment  
(Plain paper)  
<0-10>  
Reverse  
side at  
duplexing  
Single  
side  
Reverse  
side at  
5
<0-10>  
234-2  
234-3  
ALL  
(color)  
ALL  
(color)  
5
M
M
4
4
<0-10>  
5
<0-10>  
duplexing  
236-0  
236-1  
Transfer 2nd transfer  
Single  
ALL  
(black)  
ALL  
(black)  
5
M
M
Sets the offset amount  
of 2nd transfer roller  
bias.  
0: -500V 1: -400V  
2: -300V 3: -200V  
4: -100V 5: 0V  
6: +100V 7: +200V  
8: +300V 9: +400V  
10: +500V  
4
4
roller bias off- side  
<0-10>  
setting adjust-  
ment (Thick  
paper 1)  
Reverse  
side at  
duplexing  
Single  
side  
Reverse  
side at  
5
<0-10>  
236-2  
236-3  
ALL  
(color)  
ALL  
(color)  
5
M
M
4
4
<0-10>  
5
<0-10>  
duplexing  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 42  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
237-0  
237-1  
238-0  
238-1  
239-0  
239-1  
241  
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias off-  
setting adjustment  
ALL  
(black)  
ALL  
(color)  
ALL  
(black)  
ALL  
(color)  
ALL  
(black)  
ALL  
(color)  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
5
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Sets the offsetting  
amount of 2nd transfer  
roller bias.  
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
1
<0-10>  
(Thick paper 2)  
5
0: -1,000V  
2: -600V  
4: -200V  
1: -800V  
3: -400 V  
5: 0 V  
<0-10>  
2
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias off-  
setting adjustment  
5
<0-10>  
6: +200V  
8: +600V  
10: +1,000V  
7: +400V  
9: +800 V  
(Thick paper 3)  
5
<0-10>  
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias off-  
setting adjustment  
5
<0-10>  
(OHP film)  
5
<0-10>  
78  
<0-255>  
84  
<0-255>  
87  
<0-255>  
Main  
charger grid bias  
Main charger  
Y
M
C
K
As the value increases,  
the transformer output  
increases. The adjust-  
ment value becomes  
effective only when the  
setting mode (08-549,  
551, 556, 557) is 0  
(invalid).  
adjustment  
242  
243  
244  
94  
<0-255>  
245  
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias off-  
setting  
ALL  
(black)  
5
Sets the offsetting  
amount of 1st transfer  
roller bias.  
<0-10>  
0: -500 V  
2: -300 V  
4: -100 V  
6: +100 V  
8: +300 V  
10: +500 V  
1: -400 V  
3: -200 V  
5: 0 V  
7: +200 V  
9: +400 V  
247  
248  
250  
251  
Transfer Temperature/humidity sen-  
sor Humidity display  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
50  
<0-100>  
M
M
M
M
The humidity of the  
inside of the equipment  
is displayed.  
2
2
1
1
[Unit: RH%]  
Transfer Drum thermistor Tempera-  
ture displa  
23  
<0-100>  
The ambient tempera-  
ture of the drum surface  
is displayed.  
[Unit: °C]  
Transfer 1st transfer  
roller bias out-  
+Low  
+High  
4000  
<3600-  
4400>  
Transformer output set-  
ting of the 1st transfer  
roller bias.  
When replacing the  
high-voltage trans-  
former, the values listed  
in attached data sheet  
are entered.  
put voltage  
400  
<280-  
520>  
(Unit: V)  
252  
253  
Transfer 2nd transfer  
roller bias out-  
+Low  
+High  
ALL  
ALL  
6000  
<5400-  
6600>  
M
M
Transformer output set-  
ting of the 2nd transfer  
roller bias (plus output).  
When replacing the  
high-voltage trans-  
former, the values listed  
in attached data sheet  
are entered.  
1
1
put voltage  
500  
<350-  
650>  
(Unit: V)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
254  
Transfer 2nd transfer  
roller bias out-  
-Low  
-High  
ALL  
-500  
<-9999-  
0>  
M
Transformer output set-  
ting of the 2nd transfer  
roller bias (minus out-  
put).  
When replacing the  
high-voltage trans-  
former, the values listed  
in attached data sheet  
are entered.  
1
put voltage  
255  
270  
ALL  
ALL  
-2000  
<-9999-  
0>  
M
M
1
(Unit: V)  
Transfer Temperature/humidity sen-  
sor Temperature display  
23  
<0-100>  
The temperature of the  
inside of the equipment  
is displayed.  
2
[Unit: °C]  
275  
276  
Transfer 2nd transfer  
roller bias  
(+)  
(-)  
ALL  
ALL  
147  
<0-255>  
229  
<0-255>  
M
M
Displays the value of  
2nd transfer roller bias  
when printing is oper-  
ated.  
2
2
actual value  
(When clean-  
ing the roller)  
277-0  
277-1  
Transfer 2nd transfer  
roller bias  
Single  
side  
Reverse  
side at  
ALL  
159  
M
M
Displays the value of  
2nd transfer roller bias  
when printing is oper-  
ated.  
10  
10  
(black) <0-187>  
ALL 134  
(black) <0-187>  
actual value  
display (Plain  
paper)  
duplexing  
277-2  
277-3  
Single  
side  
Reverse  
side at  
ALL  
(color) <0-187>  
ALL 128  
(color) <0-187>  
147  
M
M
10  
10  
duplexing  
279-0  
279-1  
Transfer 2nd transfer  
roller bias  
Single  
side  
Reverse  
side at  
ALL  
(black) <0-187>  
ALL 119  
(black) <0-187>  
144  
M
M
Displays the value of  
2nd transfer roller bias  
when printing is oper-  
ated.  
10  
10  
actual value  
display (Thick  
paper 1)  
duplexing  
279-2  
279-3  
Single  
side  
Reverse  
side at  
ALL  
(color) <0-187>  
ALL 112  
(color) <0-187>  
125  
M
M
10  
10  
duplexing  
281  
284  
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias  
resistance detection con-  
trol  
Transfer Transfer belt cleaning unit  
contact timing adjustment  
ALL  
ALL  
-
M
M
The RMS value of the  
main charger grid bias  
is displayed..  
2
1
<0-255>  
141  
<88-168>  
When the value  
increases, the contact  
timing of transfer belt  
cleaning unit is delayed.  
285  
Transfer Transfer belt cleaning unit  
release timing adjustment  
ALL  
ALL  
121  
<88-168>  
M
When the value  
1
increases, the release  
timing of transfer belt  
cleaning unit is delayed.  
Displays the value of  
2nd transfer roller bias  
when printing is oper-  
ated.  
290-0  
290-1  
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias off-  
setting adjustment  
153  
M
M
10  
10  
(black) <0-187>  
ALL 150  
(color) <0-187>  
(Thick paper 2)  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 44  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
131  
291-0  
291-1  
292-0  
292-1  
293-0  
293-1  
293-2  
293-3  
293-4  
294-0  
294-1  
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias off-  
setting adjustment  
ALL  
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Displays the value of  
2nd transfer roller bias  
when printing is oper-  
ated.  
10  
10  
10  
10  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
10  
10  
(black) <0-187>  
ALL 131  
(color) <0-187>  
ALL 119  
(black) <0-187>  
ALL 119  
(color) <0-187>  
(Thick paper 3)  
2
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias off-  
setting adjustment  
Displays the value of  
2nd transfer roller bias  
when printing is oper-  
ated.  
(OHP film)  
Transfer 2nd transfer  
Plain  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
85  
<0-255>  
75  
<0-255>  
80  
<0-255>  
80  
<0-255>  
Corrects the 2nd trans-  
fer roller bias output of  
leading/trailing edge of  
paper (05-227, 229,  
230, 231 and 232).  
roller bias cor- paper  
rection of  
leading/trail-  
ing edge of  
paper  
Thick  
paper 1  
Thick  
Correcting factor: %  
paper 2  
Thick  
paper 3  
OHP film  
80  
<0-255>  
164  
Transfer Actual value  
Single  
Displays the value of  
2nd transfer roller bias  
on the leading/trailing  
edge of paper when  
printing is performed.  
(The value corrected in  
05-293 is displayed.)  
display of 2nd side  
(black) <0-255>  
ALL 142  
(black) <0-255>  
transfer roller  
bias of lead-  
ing/trailing  
edge of paper  
(Plain paper)  
Reverse  
side at  
duplexing  
294-2  
294-3  
Single  
side  
Reverse  
side at  
ALL  
(color) <0-255>  
ALL 137  
(color) <0-255>  
153  
M
M
10  
10  
duplexing  
296-0  
296-1  
Transfer Actual value  
Single  
ALL  
(black) <0-255>  
ALL 136  
(black) <0-255>  
155  
M
M
10  
10  
display of 2nd side  
transfer roller  
bias of lead-  
ing/trailing  
edge of paper  
(Thick paper  
1)  
Reverse  
side at  
duplexing  
Single  
side  
Reverse  
side at  
296-2  
296-3  
ALL  
(color) <0-255>  
ALL 131  
(color) <0-255>  
141  
M
M
10  
10  
duplexing  
297-0  
297-1  
298-0  
298-1  
299-0  
299-1  
Transfer Actual value display of 2nd  
ALL  
160  
M
M
M
M
M
M
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
transfer roller bias of lead- (black) <0-255>  
ing/trailing edge of paper  
(Thick paper 2)  
ALL  
(color) <0-255>  
ALL 142  
158  
Transfer Actual value display of 2nd  
transfer roller bias of lead- (black) <0-255>  
ing/trailing edge of paper  
(Thick paper 3)  
ALL  
(color) <0-255>  
ALL 133  
143  
Transfer Actual value display of 2nd  
Displays the value of  
2nd transfer roller bias  
on the leading/trailing  
edge of paper when  
printing is performed.  
(The value corrected in  
05-293 is displayed.)  
transfer roller bias of lead- (black) <0-255>  
ing/trailing edge of paper  
(OHP film)  
ALL  
133  
(color) <0-255>  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
305  
Scanner Image location adjustment  
of secondary scanning  
direction  
ALL  
124  
<92-164>  
SYS When the value  
increases by “1”, the  
image shifts by approx.  
0.137 mm toward the  
trailing edge of the  
paper.  
1
(scanner section)  
306  
308  
Scanner Image location adjustment  
of secondary scanning  
direction  
ALL  
ALL  
113  
<0-255>  
SYS When the value  
increases by “1”, the  
image shifts by approx.  
0.0423 mm toward the  
front side of the paper.  
1
6
(scanner section)  
Scanner Distortion mode  
-
-
Moves carriages to the  
adjusting position.  
330-0  
330-1  
330-2  
330-3  
Image  
Image quality  
Y
M
C
K
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
3
M
M
M
M
Sets the maximum cor-  
rection number of time  
of the contrast voltage  
in the closed-loop con-  
trol mode 2.  
4
4
4
4
control closed-loop  
control con-  
trast voltage  
correction/  
<0-255>  
3
<0-255>  
3
Mode 2 maxi-  
mum number  
of time cor-  
<0-255>  
3
<0-255>  
rected  
331-0  
331-1  
331-2  
331-3  
332-0  
332-1  
332-2  
332-3  
Image  
Image quality  
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
2
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Sets the maximum cor-  
rection number of time  
of the laser power in the  
closed-loop control  
mode 2.  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
control closed-loop  
control laser  
power correc-  
tion/Mode 2  
<0-255>  
2
<0-255>  
2
maximum  
number of  
time corrected  
<0-255>  
2
<0-255>  
Image  
Image quality  
1
Sets the maximum cor-  
rection number of time  
of the contrast voltage  
in the closed-loop con-  
trol mode 1.  
control closed-loop  
control con-  
trast voltage  
correction/  
<0-255>  
1
<0-255>  
1
Mode 1 maxi-  
mum number  
of time cor-  
<0-255>  
1
<0-255>  
rected  
333-0  
333-1  
333-2  
333-3  
334  
Image  
Image quality  
Y
M
C
K
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
1
M
M
M
M
M
Sets the maximum cor-  
rection number of time  
of the laser power in the  
closed-loop control  
mode 1.  
4
4
4
4
1
control closed-loop  
control laser  
power correc-  
tion/Mode 1  
<0-255>  
1
<0-255>  
1
maximum  
number of  
time corrected  
<0-255>  
1
<0-255>  
Image  
Main charger grid calibra-  
300  
<210-  
390>  
1000  
<900-  
1100>  
Transformer output cali-  
bration of the main  
charger grid bias. When  
replacing the high-volt-  
age transformer, the  
values listed in attached  
data sheet are entered.  
(Unit: V)  
control tion voltage 1 (low)  
335  
Image  
Main charger grid calibra-  
ALL  
M
1
control tion voltage 2 (high)  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 46  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
338  
Image  
Color developer bias DC  
ALL  
100  
<70-130>  
M
Transformer output cali-  
bration of the color  
developer bias. When  
replacing the high-volt-  
age transformer, the  
values listed in attached  
data sheet are entered.  
(Unit: V)  
1
control (-) calibration voltage 1  
(low)  
339  
340  
Image  
Color developer bias DC  
ALL  
ALL  
900  
<810-  
990>  
M
1
2
control (-) calibration voltage 2  
(high)  
Scanner Reproduction ratio adjust-  
ment of secondary scan-  
ning direction (scanner  
section)  
127  
<0-255>  
SYS When the value  
increases by “1”, the  
reproduction ratio in the  
secondary scanning  
direction (vertical to  
paper feeding direc-  
tion) increases by  
1
approx. 0.223%.  
350  
351  
354  
355  
356  
Scanner Shading posi- Original  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
128  
<118-  
138>  
128  
<118-  
138>  
SYS 0.1369 mm/step  
1
1
1
1
6
tion adjust-  
ment  
glass  
RADF  
SYS  
0.1369 mm/step  
RADF  
Adjustment of for single-  
10  
<0-20>  
SYS When the value  
increases by “1”, the  
aligning amount  
RADF paper  
alignment  
sided orig-  
inal  
increases by approx.  
0.5 mm.  
for double  
sided orig-  
inal  
10  
<0-20>  
SYS  
RADF  
RADF  
Automatic adjustment of  
RADF sensor and  
EEPROM initialization  
-
SYS Performs the adjust-  
ment and initialization  
when the RADF board  
or RADF sensor is  
replaced.  
SYS When the value  
increases by “1”, the  
reproduction ratio of the  
secondary scanning  
direction on original (fed  
from the RADF)  
357  
358  
Fine adjustment of RADF  
transport speed  
ALL  
50  
<0-100>  
1
1
increases by approx.  
0.1%.  
RADF  
RADF sideways deviation  
adjustment  
ALL  
ALL  
128  
<0-255>  
SYS When the value  
increases by “1”, the  
image of original fed  
from the RADF shifts  
toward the rear side of  
paper by approx.  
0.0423 mm.  
SYS When the value  
increases by “1”, the  
359  
360  
Scanner Carriage position adjust-  
128  
1
1
ment during scanning from (black) <0-255>  
RADF  
carriage position shifts  
by approx. 0.1 mm  
ALL  
128  
SYS  
(color) <0-255>  
toward the exit side  
when using the RADF.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
361  
Scanner Log table switching for  
RADF copying  
ALL  
(color)  
0
SYS 0: Same log table as  
the one used at  
1
<0-4>  
copying with original  
glass  
1: Background repro-  
duction - Light 2  
2: Background repro-  
duction - Light 1  
3: Background repro-  
duction - Dark 1  
4: Background repro-  
duction - Dark 2  
362  
ALL  
(black)  
0
SYS 0: Same log table as  
the one used at  
1
<0-4>  
copying with original  
glass  
1: Background repro-  
duction - Light 2  
2: Background repro-  
duction - Light 1  
3: Background repro-  
duction - Dark 1  
4: Background repro-  
duction - Dark 2  
363  
Scanner Data transfer of character-  
istic value of scanner / SYS  
board SLG board  
SCN  
-
SYS Transfers the character-  
istic values of the scan-  
ner (shading correction  
factor / RGB color cor-  
rection / reproduction  
ratio color aberration  
correction) from the  
6
NVRAM of the SYS  
board to the NVRAM of  
the SLG board.  
364  
Scanner Data transfer of character-  
istic value of scanner / SLG  
board SYS board  
SCN  
-
SYS Transfers the character-  
istic values of the scan-  
ner (shading correction  
factor / RGB color cor-  
rection / reproduction  
ratio color aberration  
correction) from the  
6
NVRAM of the SLG  
board to the NVRAM of  
the SYS board.  
365  
366  
RADF  
RADF lead-  
ing edge posi- sided orig-  
tion 1  
adjustment  
for single-  
ALL  
ALL  
50  
<0-100>  
SYS When the value  
increases by “1”, the  
copied image of original  
1
1
inal  
fed from the RADF  
shifts toward the trail-  
ing edge of paper by  
approx. 0.1 mm.  
for double  
sided orig-  
inal  
50  
<0-100>  
SYS  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 48  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
-
367  
RADF  
RADF  
Image  
RADF original guide width  
adjustment  
ALL  
-
Stores the current width  
of RADF original guide  
by keying in this code  
with the guide set at the  
minimum width. Per-  
form this adjustment  
when the RADF board  
or volume is replaced,  
or when the code (05-  
356) is performed.  
6
(Minimum)  
2
368  
RADF original guide width  
adjustment  
(Maximum)  
ALL  
-
-
Stores the current width  
of RADF original guide  
by keying in this code  
with the guide set at the  
maximum width. Per-  
form this adjustment  
when the RADF board  
or volume is replaced,  
or when the code (05-  
356) is performed.  
6
372  
373  
Black developer bias DC  
ALL  
ALL  
100  
<70-130>  
M
M
Transformer output cali-  
bration of the black  
developer bias. When  
replacing the high-volt-  
age transformer, the  
values listed in attached  
data sheet are entered.  
(Unit: V)  
1
1
control (-) calibration voltage 1  
(low)  
Image  
Black developer bias DC  
900  
<810-  
990>  
control (-) calibration voltage 2  
(high)  
380-0  
380-1  
380-2  
380-3  
381-0  
381-1  
381-2  
381-3  
382-0  
382-1  
382-2  
382-3  
Image  
Image quality  
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
320  
<0-999>  
330  
<0-999>  
340  
<0-999>  
375  
<0-999>  
320  
<0-999>  
330  
<0-999>  
340  
<0-999>  
375  
<0-999>  
408  
<0-999>  
408  
<0-999>  
408  
<0-999>  
408  
<0-999>  
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Displays the contrast  
voltage initial value set  
by the open-loop con-  
trol. (Unit: V)  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
control open-loop  
control/ con-  
trast voltage  
initial value  
display  
Image  
control age actual  
value display  
Contrast volt-  
Displays the contrast  
voltage when printing is  
operated. (Unit: V)  
Image  
control open-loop  
control/ laser  
Image quality  
Displays the laser  
power initial value set  
by the open-loop con-  
trol. (Unit: µW)  
power initial  
value display  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
able  
value>  
92  
<0-255>  
92  
<0-255>  
92  
<0-255>  
92  
<0-255>  
408  
<0-999>  
408  
<0-999>  
408  
<0-999>  
408  
<0-999>  
78  
<0-255>  
84  
<0-255>  
87  
<0-255>  
94  
<0-255>  
135  
<0-255>  
137  
<0-255>  
139  
<0-255>  
383-0  
383-1  
383-2  
383-3  
384-0  
384-1  
384-2  
384-3  
385-0  
385-1  
385-2  
385-3  
386-0  
386-1  
386-2  
386-3  
388  
Image  
control actual value  
Laser power  
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Displays the laser  
power when printing is  
operated. (bit value)  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
2
display  
Image  
control actual value  
display  
Laser power  
Displays the laser  
power when printing is  
operated. (Unit: µW)  
Image  
control grid bias  
actual value  
Main charger  
Displays the main  
charger grid bias when  
printing is operated. (bit  
value)  
display  
Image  
control bias DC (-)  
actual value  
Developer  
Displays the developer  
bias when printing is  
operated. (bit value)  
display  
146  
<0-255>  
Image  
control display of  
Output value  
When the  
light  
0
Displays the output  
value of image quality  
sensor when the sensor  
light source is OFF.  
<0-1023>  
image quality source is  
sensor  
OFF  
389  
Transfer  
belt sur-  
face  
ALL  
0
M
Displays the output  
value of image quality  
sensor (when there is  
no test pattern) on the  
transfer belt.  
2
<0-1023>  
390-0  
390-1  
390-2  
390-3  
Highden-  
sity pat-  
tern Y  
Highden-  
sity pat-  
tern M  
Highden-  
sity pat-  
tern C  
Highden-  
sity pat-  
tern K  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
0
M
M
M
M
Displays the output  
value of image quality  
sensor when a high-  
density test pattern is  
written.  
The larger the value is,  
the smaller the toner  
amount adhered  
becomes.  
10  
10  
10  
10  
<0-1023>  
0
<0-1023>  
0
<0-1023>  
0
<0-1023>  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 50  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
391-0  
Image  
control display of  
Output value  
Lowden-  
sity pat-  
ALL  
0
M
Displays the output  
value of image quality  
sensor when a low-den-  
sity test pattern is writ-  
ten.  
The larger the value is,  
the smaller the toner  
amount adhered  
becomes.  
10  
10  
10  
10  
2
<0-1023>  
image quality tern Y  
sensor  
391-1  
391-2  
391-3  
392  
Lowden-  
sity pat-  
tern M  
Lowden-  
sity pat-  
tern C  
Lowden-  
sity pat-  
tern K  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
0
M
M
M
M
2
<0-1023>  
0
<0-1023>  
0
<0-1023>  
Image  
Light amount adjustment  
0
The LED light amount  
adjustment value of this  
sensor is the reference  
value to set the  
control result of image quality sen-  
sor  
<0-255>  
reflected light from the  
belt surface.  
393  
Image  
Relative humidity display  
ALL  
0
M
Displays the relative  
humidity at the latest  
performing of the  
closed-loop  
2
control during latest closed-loop  
control  
<0-100>  
control.  
394  
395  
Image  
Enforced performing of  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
-
Performs the image  
quality open-loop con-  
trol.  
Performs the image  
quality closedloop con-  
trol.  
Performs the image  
quality control, initialize  
each control value.  
Sets the target value of  
high image density con-  
trol at the time of the  
image quality control.  
6
6
6
4
4
4
4
control image quality open-loop  
control  
Image  
Enforced performing of  
M
M
M
M
M
M
control image quality closed-loop  
control  
396  
Image  
control ization  
Image quality control initial-  
398-0  
398-1  
398-2  
398-3  
Image  
Target value  
Y
M
C
K
265  
<220-  
360>  
300  
<220-  
360>  
320  
<220-  
360>  
370  
<300-  
420>  
control of the high  
image den-  
sity control  
401  
405  
Laser  
Laser  
Fine adjustment of polygo-  
nal motor rotation speed  
(reproduction ratio adjust-  
ment)  
PRT  
PPC  
134  
<0-255>  
135  
<0-255>  
M
M
When the value  
1
1
increases by “1”, the  
reproduction ratio of pri-  
mary scanning direction  
increases by approx.  
0.07%. (approx. 0.1  
mm/step)  
410  
411  
Adjustment of primary  
scanning laser writing start  
position  
PPC  
PRT  
128  
<0-255>  
120  
<0-255>  
M
M
When the value  
1
1
increases by “1”, the  
writing start position  
shifts to the front side  
by approx. 0.0423 mm.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
417-0  
Image  
Color devia-  
tion correc-  
tion 1  
(A3/LD)  
K
C
M
Y
K
C
M
Y
ALL  
127  
<118-  
138>  
128  
<118-  
138>  
128  
<118-  
138>  
128  
<118-  
138>  
130  
<118-  
138>  
128  
<118-  
138>  
128  
<118-  
138>  
128  
<118-  
138>  
M
When the value  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
increases by “1”, the  
image shifts toward the  
trailing edge of the  
paper by 0.0423 mm.  
417-1  
417-2  
417-3  
418-0  
418-1  
418-2  
418-3  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Image  
Color devia-  
tion correc-  
tion 2  
When the value  
increases by “1”, the  
image shifts toward the  
trailing edge of the  
paper by 0.0423 mm.  
(A3/LD)  
421  
422  
Drive  
Drive  
Adjustment of secondary  
scanning direction repro-  
duction ratio (fine adjust-  
ment of main motor speed)  
PPC/  
PRT  
FAX  
127  
<0-255>  
128  
<0-255>  
M
M
When the value  
1
1
increases by “1”, the  
reproduction ratio of  
secondary scanning  
direction increases by  
approx. 0.04%.  
When the value  
increases by “1”, the  
rotation becomes faster  
by approx.  
424  
425  
Fine adjustment of exit  
motor speed  
PPC/  
PRT  
FAX  
107  
<0-255>  
EUR: 140  
UC: 140  
JPN: 128  
Others:  
140  
M
M
1
1
0.05%.  
<0-255>  
426  
427  
Drive  
Adjustment of secondary  
scanning direction repro-  
duction ratio (fine adjust-  
ment of transport motor  
speed)  
PPC/  
PRT  
FAX  
138  
<0-255>  
139  
<0-255>  
M
M
When the value  
1
1
increases by “1”, the  
reproduction ratio of  
secondary scanning  
direction increases by  
approx. 0.04%.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 52  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
430  
Image  
Image  
Top margin adjustment  
(blank area at the leading  
edge of the paper))  
Left margin adjustment  
(blank area at the left of the  
paper along the paper  
feeding direction)  
Right margin adjustment  
(blank area at the right of  
the paper along the paper  
feeding direction)  
Bottom margin adjustment  
(blank area at the trailing  
edge of the paper)  
PPC  
26  
<0-255>  
M
When the value  
increases by “1”, the  
blank area becomes  
wider by approx.  
0.0423 mm.  
1
431  
432  
PPC  
PPC  
PPC  
0
M
M
1
2
<0-255>  
Image  
15  
<0-255>  
1
433  
Image  
Image  
43  
<0-255>  
M
M
1
4
434-0  
Bottom margin adjustment  
(blank area at the trailing  
edge of the paper)  
PPC/  
PRT  
EUR: 45  
UC: 28  
JPN: 28  
Others:  
45  
/Reverse side at duplexing  
<0-255>  
434-1  
Image  
Right margin adjustment  
(blank area at the right of  
the paper along the paper  
feeding direction)  
PPC/  
PRT  
18  
<0-255>  
M
4
/Reverse side at duplexing  
435  
436  
Image  
Image  
Top margin adjustment  
(blank area at the leading  
edge of the paper)  
Left margin adjustment  
(blank area at the left of the  
paper along the paper  
feeding direction)  
Right margin adjustment  
(blank area at the right of  
the paper along the paper  
feeding direction)  
PRT  
PRT  
24  
<0-255>  
M
M
1
1
0
When the value  
increases by “1”, the  
blank area becomes  
wider by approx.  
0.0423 mm.  
<0-255>  
437  
Image  
PRT  
0
M
1
<0-255>  
438  
439  
Image  
Image  
Bottom margin adjustment  
(blank area at the trailing  
edge of the paper)  
Bottom margin adjustment  
(blank area at the trailing  
edge of the paper along  
the paper feeding direc-  
tion) when paper size is not  
specified at bypass feed  
PRT  
ALL  
0
M
M
1
1
<0-255>  
128  
<0-255>  
When the value  
increases by “1”, the  
margin increases by  
approx. 0.2 mm.  
440  
441  
442  
443  
444  
445  
Laser  
Secondary  
scanning  
laser writing  
start position  
Upper  
drawer  
Lower  
drawer  
Bypass  
feeding  
LCF  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
21  
<0-40>  
47  
<0-80>  
22  
<0-40>  
20  
<0-40>  
20  
<0-40>  
21  
<0-40>  
M
M
M
M
M
M
When the value  
increases by “1”, the  
image shifts toward the  
trailing edge of the  
paper by approx.  
0.2 mm.  
1
1
1
1
1
1
PFP  
Duplex  
feeding  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
able  
value>  
15  
<0-63>  
15  
<0-63>  
15  
<0-63>  
15  
<0-63>  
15  
<0-63>  
15  
<0-63>  
15  
<0-63>  
15  
<0-63>  
18  
<0-63>  
18  
<0-63>  
18  
<0-63>  
18  
<0-63>  
18  
<0-63>  
18  
<0-63>  
15  
<0-63>  
448-0  
448-1  
448-2  
448-3  
449-0  
449-1  
449-2  
449-3  
450-0  
450-1  
450-2  
450-3  
452-0  
452-1  
452-2  
452-3  
Paper  
feeding amount  
Paperaligning Long  
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
When the value  
increases by “1”, the  
aligning amount  
increases by approx.  
0.8 mm.  
<Paper length>  
Long size:  
330 mm or longer  
Middle size:  
220 mm to 329 mm  
Short size 1:  
205 mm to 219 mm  
Short size 2:  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
size  
adjustment at  
Middle  
size  
the registra-  
tion section  
(PFP upper  
drawer / Plain  
paper)  
Short  
size 1  
Short  
size 2  
Paper  
feeding amount  
adjustment at  
Paperaligning Long  
size  
Middle  
size  
the registra-  
tion section  
(PFP lower  
drawer / Plain  
paper)  
204 mm or shorter  
Short  
size 1  
Short  
size 2  
Paper  
feeding amount  
adjustment at  
Paperaligning Long  
size  
Middle  
size  
the registra-  
tion section  
(Upperdrawer  
/ Plain paper)  
Short  
size 1  
Short  
size 2  
Paper  
feeding amount  
adjustment at  
Paperaligning Long  
When the value  
increases by “1”, the  
aligning amount  
increases by approx.  
0.8 mm.  
<Paper length>  
Long size:  
330 mm or longer  
Middle size:  
size  
Middle  
size  
the registra-  
tion section  
(Lowerdrawer  
Short  
size 1  
Short  
size 2  
/ Plain paper)  
15  
<0-63>  
220 mm to 329 mm  
Short size 1:  
205 mm to 219 mm  
Short size 2:  
204 mm or shorter  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 54  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
able  
value>  
455-0  
455-1  
455-2  
Paper  
feeding amount  
Paperaligning Long  
8
M
M
M
When the value  
increases by “1”, the  
aligning amount  
increases by approx.  
0.8 mm.  
<Paper length>  
Long size:  
4
4
4
size  
<0-63>  
adjustment at  
Middle  
size  
8
the registra-  
tion section  
(Duplex feed-  
ing / Plain  
paper)  
<0-63>  
12  
<0-63>  
2
Short  
size  
330 mm or longer  
Middle size:  
220 mm to 329 mm  
Short size:  
457  
Paper  
Paper aligning amount  
ALL  
15  
<0-63>  
M
1
feeding adjustment at the registra-  
tion section (LCF / Plain  
paper)  
Paper  
feeding amount  
adjustment at  
219 mm or shorter  
*
Postcard is sup-  
ported only for JPN  
model.  
458-0  
458-1  
458-2  
Paperaligning Long  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
14  
<0-63>  
14  
<0-63>  
14  
<0-63>  
M
M
M
4
4
4
size  
Middle  
size  
Short  
size  
the registra-  
tion section  
(Bypass feed-  
ing/Plain  
paper)  
460-0  
460-1  
460-2  
Paper  
feeding amount  
adjustment at  
Paperaligning Long  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
16  
<0-63>  
16  
<0-63>  
16  
<0-63>  
M
M
M
4
4
4
size  
Middle  
size  
Short  
size  
the registra-  
tion section  
(Bypass feed-  
ing/Thick  
paper 1)  
461-0  
461-1  
461-2  
Paper  
feeding amount  
adjustment at  
Paperaligning Long  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
17  
<0-63>  
17  
<0-63>  
17  
<0-63>  
M
M
M
4
4
4
size  
Middle  
size  
Short  
size  
the registra-  
tion section  
(Bypass feed-  
ing/Thick  
paper 2)  
462-0  
462-1  
462-2  
462-3  
463-0  
463-1  
463-2  
Paper  
feeding amount  
adjustment at  
Paperaligning Long  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
17  
<0-63>  
17  
<0-63>  
17  
<0-63>  
16  
<0-63>  
16  
<0-63>  
16  
<0-63>  
16  
<0-63>  
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
size  
Middle  
size  
Short  
size  
Post  
card  
the registra-  
tion section  
(Bypass feed-  
ing/Thick  
paper 3)  
Paper  
feeding amount  
adjustment at  
Paperaligning Long  
size  
Middle  
size  
Short  
size  
the registra-  
tion section  
(Bypass feed-  
ing/OHP film)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
able  
value>  
143  
<0-255>  
170  
<0-255>  
143  
<0-255>  
143  
<0-255>  
143  
<0-255>  
143  
<0-255>  
128  
466-0  
466-1  
466-4  
466-5  
466-6  
466-7  
467  
Paper  
Adjustment of Plain  
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
When the value  
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
feeding paper push-  
ing amount /  
Bypass feed-  
ing  
paper  
increases by “1”, the  
driving speed of bypass  
feed roller increases by  
approx. 2 ms when the  
paper transport is  
started from the regis-  
tration section.  
Post card  
Thick  
paper 1  
Thick  
paper 2  
*
Post card is sup-  
ported only for JPN  
model.  
Thick  
paper 3  
OHP film  
Paper  
Adjustment of paper push-  
When the value  
feeding ing amount/Duplex feed-  
<0-255>  
increases by “1”, the  
driving speed of ADU  
transport roller  
ing (short size)  
increases by approx.  
2 ms when the paper  
transport is started from  
the registration section.  
468-0  
468-1  
468-2  
469-0  
469-1  
469-2  
469-3  
Finisher Fine adjust-  
A4-R  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
0
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
When the value  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
ment of bind- /LT-R  
<-14-14>  
increases by “1”, the  
binding/folding position  
shifts toward the right  
page by 0.25 mm.  
ing position/  
folding posi-  
tion  
B4  
0
<-14-14>  
A3/LD  
0
<-14-14>  
18  
<0-63>  
18  
<0-63>  
18  
<0-63>  
18  
<0-63>  
15  
<0-63>  
15  
<0-63>  
15  
<0-63>  
15  
<0-63>  
15  
<0-63>  
15  
<0-63>  
15  
<0-63>  
Paper  
feeding amount  
adjustment at  
Paperaligning Long  
When the value  
increases by "1", the  
aligning amount  
increases by approx.  
0.8 mm.  
<Paper length>  
Long size:  
330 mm or longer  
Middle size:  
220 mm to 329 mm  
Short size 1:  
205 mm to 219 mm  
Short size 2:  
size  
Middle  
size  
Short  
size 1  
Short  
size 2  
the registra-  
tion section  
(Upperdrawer  
/ Thick paper  
1)  
470-0 Paper  
feeding  
Paperaligning Long  
amount  
size  
Middle  
size  
Short  
size 1  
Short  
size 2  
adjustment at  
the registra-  
tion section  
(Lowerdrawer  
/ Thick  
470-1  
470-2  
470-3  
204 mm or shorter  
paper 1)  
471-0  
471-1  
471-2  
471-3  
Paper  
feeding amount  
adjustment at  
Paperaligning Long  
size  
Middle  
size  
Short  
size 1  
Short  
size 2  
the registra-  
tion section  
(PFP upper  
drawer / Thick  
paper 1)  
15  
<0-63>  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 56  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
able  
value>  
15  
<0-63>  
15  
<0-63>  
15  
<0-63>  
15  
<0-63>  
15  
<0-63>  
472-0  
472-1  
472-2  
472-3  
473  
Paper  
feeding amount  
Paperaligning Long  
M
M
M
M
M
When the value  
increases by "1", the  
aligning amount  
increases by approx.  
0.8 mm.  
<Paper length>  
Long size:  
330 mm or longer  
Middle size:  
220 mm to 329 mm  
Short size:  
219 mm or shorter  
Short size 1:  
4
4
4
4
1
size  
adjustment at  
Middle  
size  
the registra-  
tion section  
(PFP lower  
drawer / Thick  
paper 1)  
2
Short  
size 1  
Short  
size 2  
Paper  
Paper aligning amount  
feeding adjustment at the registra-  
tion section (LCF / Thick  
paper 1)  
474-0  
474-1  
474-2  
Paper  
feeding amount  
adjustment at  
Paperaligning Long  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
8
M
M
M
205 mm to 219 mm  
Short size 2:  
204 mm or shorter  
4
4
4
size  
Middle  
size  
Short  
size  
<0-63>  
8
the registra-  
tion section  
(ADU / Thick  
paper 1)  
*
Post card is sup-  
ported only for JPN  
model.  
<0-63>  
12  
<0-63>  
475-0  
475-1  
Paper  
feeding amount  
adjustment at Long size  
Paperaligning Thick  
ALL  
ALL  
28  
<0-63>  
M
M
4
4
paper 2  
the registra-  
tion section  
(Bypass feed-  
ing)  
Thick  
paper 2  
Middle  
size  
28  
<0-63>  
475-2  
475-3  
475-4  
Thick  
paper 2  
Short size  
Thick  
paper 3  
Long size  
Thick  
paper 3  
Middle  
size  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
28  
<0-63>  
M
M
M
4
4
4
28  
<0-63>  
28  
<0-63>  
475-5  
Thick  
paper 3  
ALL  
28  
<0-63>  
M
4
Short size  
475-6  
475-7  
OHP film  
Long size  
OHP film  
Middle  
size  
ALL  
ALL  
24  
<0-63>  
24  
<0-63>  
M
M
4
4
475-8  
475-9  
OHP film  
Short size  
ALL  
ALL  
24  
<0-63>  
M
M
4
4
28  
<0-63>  
Post card  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
494  
Laser  
Secondary  
scanning data decelerat-  
laser writing  
start position  
When  
ALL  
135  
<0-255>  
M
When the value  
increases by “1”, the  
image shifts by approx.  
0.2 mm toward the  
trailing edge of the  
paper.  
1
1
1
ing to 1/2  
When  
decelerat-  
ing to 1/3  
When  
495  
496  
ALL  
ALL  
135  
<0-255>  
M
M
128  
decelerat-  
ing to 1/4  
<0-255>  
497-0  
497-1  
497-2  
497-3  
497-4  
497-5  
498-0  
498-1  
Laser  
Adjustment of Upper  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
128  
<0-255>  
128  
<0-255>  
128  
<0-255>  
128  
<0-255>  
128  
<0-255>  
128  
<0-255>  
131  
<0-255>  
131  
<0-255>  
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
When the value  
increases by “1”, the  
image shifts toward the  
front side by 0.0423  
mm.  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
drawer side-  
ways devia-  
tion  
drawer  
Lower  
drawer  
PFPupper  
drawer  
PFP lower  
drawer  
LCF  
Bypass  
feeding  
Adjustment of Long size  
duplex feed-  
Laser  
When the value  
increases by “1”, the  
image shifts toward the  
front side by 0.0423  
mm.  
ing sideways  
deviation  
Short size  
(A4/LT or  
smaller)  
499  
Develop- Black developer unit lift up/  
ALL  
4
M
Change the lift up/down  
timing of the black  
developer unit when a  
CEB0 error occurs.  
1
ment  
down timing adjustment  
<0-255>  
501  
503  
504  
505  
506  
507  
Image  
Density  
Photo  
PPC  
128  
SYS When the value  
increases, the image of  
1
1
1
1
1
1
adjustment  
Fine adjust-  
ment of “man-  
ual density”  
/Center value  
(black) <0-255>  
Text/Photo PPC 128  
(black) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(black) <0-255>  
Text/Photo PPC 20  
(black) <0-255>  
PPC 20  
(black) <0-255>  
PPC 20  
(black) <0-255>  
the center step density  
becomes darker.  
SYS  
Text  
SYS  
Image  
Image  
Density  
SYS Sets the changing  
amount by 1 step at the  
adjustment  
Fine adjust-  
ment of “man-  
ual density”  
/Light step  
value  
density adjustment.  
When the value  
Photo  
Text  
SYS  
increases, the image of  
the “light” steps  
SYS  
becomes lighter.  
SYS Sets the changing  
amount by 1 step at the  
508  
509  
510  
Density  
Text/Photo PPC  
20  
1
1
1
adjustment  
Fine adjust-  
ment of “man-  
ual density”  
/Dark step  
value  
(black) <0-255>  
PPC 20  
(black) <0-255>  
PPC 20  
(black) <0-255>  
density adjustment.  
When the value  
Photo  
Text  
SYS  
increases, the image of  
the “dark” steps  
SYS  
becomes darker.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 58  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
128  
512  
514  
515  
532  
533  
534  
570  
Image  
Density  
Photo  
PPC  
SYS When the value  
increases, the image  
SYS  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
adjustment  
(black) <0-255>  
Text/Photo PPC 128  
(black) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(black) <0-255>  
Fine adjust-  
ment of “auto-  
matic density”  
becomes darker.  
2
Text  
SYS  
Image  
Range correc- Text/Photo PPC  
40  
<0-255>  
SYS When the value  
increases, the back-  
tion Back-  
(black)  
ground peak  
adjustment  
ground of the image  
(low density area)  
becomes harder to be  
printed out.  
Photo  
Text  
PPC  
(black)  
16  
<0-255>  
SYS  
PPC  
(black)  
40  
<0-255>  
SYS  
Image  
Range correc- Text/Photo PPC  
22  
SYS Sets whether the values  
of the background peak  
and text peak are fixed  
or not. One’s place is  
tion on origi-  
nal manually  
set on the  
<11-14,  
21-24,  
31-34,  
41-44>  
(black)  
original glass  
an adjustment for “auto-  
matic density” and ten’s  
place is for “manual  
density”. Once they are  
fixed, the range correc-  
tion is performed with  
standard values. The  
values of the back-  
ground peak and text  
peak affect the repro-  
duction of the back-  
ground density and text  
density respectively.  
571  
572  
Photo  
Text  
PPC  
(black)  
12  
SYS  
1
1
<11-14,  
21-24,  
31-34,  
41-44>  
PPC  
(black)  
22  
SYS  
<11-14,  
21-24,  
31-34,  
41-44>  
1: fixed/fixed  
2: varied/fixed  
3: fixed/varied  
4: varied/varied  
*
Background peak/  
Text peak  
580  
Image  
Automatic gamma adjust-  
ment  
PPC  
(black)  
-
-
Adjusts the gradation  
reproduction automati-  
cally.  
7
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
128  
590-0  
590-1  
590-2  
591-0  
591-1  
591-2  
592-0  
592-1  
592-2  
596-0  
596-1  
596-2  
597-0  
597-1  
597-2  
598-0  
598-1  
598-2  
599-0  
599-1  
599-2  
600  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Adjustment of  
L
M
H
L
PPC  
SYS When the value  
increases, the density  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
gamma bal-  
ance (Text/  
Photo)  
(black) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(black) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(black) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(black) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(black) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(black) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(black) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(black) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(black) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(black) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(black) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(black) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(black) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(black) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(black) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(black) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(black) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(black) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(black) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(black) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(black) <0-255>  
in the target area  
becomes higher.  
L : Low density area  
M : Medium density  
area  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
Adjustment of  
gamma bal-  
ance (Text)  
H : High density area  
M
H
L
Adjustment of  
gamma bal-  
ance (Photo)  
M
H
L
Adjustment of  
gamma bal-  
ance (PS/  
M
H
L
Smooth)  
Adjustment of  
gamma bal-  
ance  
SYS When the value  
increases, the density  
in the target area  
becomes higher.  
L: Low density area  
M: Medium density  
area  
M
H
L
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
(PS/Detail)  
Adjustment of  
gamma bal-  
ance  
H : High density area  
M
H
L
(PCL/Smooth)  
Adjustment of  
gamma bal-  
ance  
M
H
(PCL/Detail)  
Background  
adjustment  
Text/Photo PPC  
(black)  
5
SYS When the value  
decreases, the back-  
<1-9>  
ground becomes  
darker. When the value  
increases, the back-  
ground becomes  
lighter.  
601  
Text  
PPC  
5
SYS  
(black)  
<1-9>  
602  
Photo  
PPC  
5
SYS  
(black)  
<1-9>  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 60  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
604  
Image  
Sharpness  
adjustment  
Text/Photo PPC  
(black)  
0
SYS When the value  
increases, the image  
becomes sharper.  
When the value  
1
<0-31>  
2
decreases, the image  
becomes softer.  
The smaller the value  
is, the less the moire  
becomes.  
605  
Text  
PPC  
(black)  
0
SYS  
1
<0-31>  
606  
648  
Photo  
PPC  
(black)  
0
SYS  
1
1
*
The default value 0  
is equivalent to 16  
(center value).  
<0-31>  
Image  
Adjustment of Text/Photo PPC  
30  
SYS Adjustment of the  
smudged/faint text.  
With increasing the  
value, the faint text is  
suppressed, and with  
decreasing it, the  
smudged/faint  
text  
(black) <0-255>  
smudged text is sup-  
pressed.  
654  
655  
663  
Image  
Image  
Adjustment of  
smudged/faint  
text  
PS  
PRT  
(black)  
PRT  
(black)  
5
SYS When the value  
decreases, the width of  
1
1
1
<0-9>  
5
<0-9>  
255  
text becomes wider.  
PCL  
SYS  
Dot size adjustment in  
black printing  
PRT  
SYS Adjusts the dot size of  
primary scanning direc-  
tion in black printing.  
The smaller the value  
is, the dot becomes  
smaller.  
(black) <0-255>  
664  
Image  
Image  
Upper limit in  
toner saving  
mode  
PS  
PRT  
(black) <0-255>  
PRT 176  
(black) <0-255>  
PPC  
176  
SYS When the value  
decreases, the printing  
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
density becomes  
lighter.  
665  
PCL  
SYS  
667-0  
667-1  
667-2  
667-3  
667-4  
Setting beam  
level conver-  
sion  
Beam  
0
M
Sets the beam level for  
4 divided smoothing.  
The primary scanning  
direction is divided into  
4 and the dot width is  
set at the 5 levels (incl.  
level “0”). The smaller  
the value is, the smaller  
the primary scanning  
direction of the dot  
level 0/4 (black) <0-255>  
Beam PPC 63  
level 1/4 (black) <0-255>  
Beam PPC 127  
level 2/4 (black) <0-255>  
Beam PPC 191  
level 3/4 (black) <0-255>  
Beam PPC 255  
level 4/4 (black) <0-255>  
M
M
M
M
becomes.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
22  
693  
Image  
Range correc- Text/Photo PPC  
SYS Sets whether the values  
of the background peak  
and text peak are fixed  
or not. One’s place is  
1
tion on origi-  
nal set on the  
RADF  
(black) <11-14,  
21-24,  
31-34,  
41-44>  
an adjustment for “auto-  
matic density” and ten’s  
place is for “manual  
density”. Once they are  
fixed, the range correc-  
tion is performed with  
standard values.  
The values of the back-  
ground peak and text  
peak affect the repro-  
duction of the back-  
ground density and text  
density respectively.  
1: fixed/fixed  
694  
695  
Photo  
Text  
PPC  
(black) <11-14,  
21-24,  
12  
SYS  
SYS  
1
1
31-34,  
41-44>  
PPC  
(black) <11-14,  
21-24,  
22  
2: varied/fixed  
3: fixed/varied  
4: varied/varied  
31-34,  
41-44>  
*
Background peak/  
Text peak  
700  
701  
Image  
Adjustment of  
binarized  
threshold  
(Text)  
Center  
value  
FAX  
125  
SYS When the value  
increases, the image of  
1
1
(black) <0-255>  
center value density  
becomes darker.  
SYS Sets the changing  
amount by 1 step at the  
density adjustment.  
When the value  
Light step  
value  
FAX  
20  
(black) <0-255>  
increases, the image of  
“light” side becomes  
lighter.  
702  
710  
Dark step  
value  
FAX  
20  
SYS Sets the changing  
amount by 1 step at the  
density adjustment.  
SYS When the value  
increases, the image of  
the center step density  
1
1
(black) <0-255>  
Image  
Image  
Density  
Photo  
FAX  
128  
adjustment  
“manual den-  
sity” fine  
adjustment/  
Center value  
(black) <0-255>  
becomes darker.  
714  
715  
Text/Photo  
Photo  
FAX  
128  
SYS  
1
1
(black) <0-255>  
Density  
FAX  
20  
SYS Sets the changing  
amount by 1 step at the  
density adjustment.  
adjustment  
“manual den-  
sity” fine  
adjustment/  
Light step  
value  
(black) <0-255>  
When the value  
increases, the image of  
the “light” steps  
719  
Text/Photo  
FAX  
20  
SYS  
1
(black) <0-255>  
becomes lighter.  
720  
724  
Image  
Density  
Photo  
FAX  
(black) <0-255>  
FAX 20  
(black) <0-255>  
20  
SYS Sets the changing  
amount by 1 step at the  
1
1
adjustment  
“manual den-  
sity” fine  
adjustment/  
Dark step  
value  
density adjustment.  
When the value  
Text/Photo  
SYS  
increases, the image of  
the “dark” steps  
becomes darker.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 62  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
128  
725  
729  
Image  
Density  
Photo  
FAX  
SYS When the value  
increases, the image  
SYS  
1
1
adjustment  
“automatic  
density” fine  
adjustment  
(black) <0-255>  
FAX 128  
(black) <0-255>  
becomes darker.  
Text/Photo  
2
825  
826  
827  
828  
Image  
Range correc- Text/Photo SCN  
12  
SYS Sets whether the values  
of the background peak  
and text peak are fixed  
or not. One’s place is  
1
1
1
1
tion on origi-  
nal manually  
set on the  
(black) <11-14,  
21-24,  
31-34,  
41-44>  
12  
original glass  
an adjustment for “auto-  
matic density” and ten’s  
place is for “manual  
density”. Once they are  
fixed, the range correc-  
tion is performed with  
standard values. The  
values of the back-  
ground peak and text  
peak affect the repro-  
duction of the back-  
ground density and text  
density respectively.  
1: fixed/fixed  
Text  
SCN  
(black) <11-14,  
21-24,  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
31-34,  
41-44>  
12  
Photo  
SCN  
(black) <11-14,  
21-24,  
31-34,  
41-44>  
12  
Gray scale SCN  
(black) <11-14,  
21-24,  
31-34,  
41-44>  
2: varied/fixed  
3: fixed/varied  
4: varied/varied  
*
Background peak/  
Text peak  
830  
831  
832  
833  
Image  
Range correc- Text/Photo SCN  
12  
SYS Sets whether the values  
of the background peak  
and text peak are fixed  
or not. One’s place is  
1
1
1
1
tion on origi-  
nal set on the  
RADF  
(black) <11-14,  
21-24,  
31-34,  
41-44>  
12  
an adjustment for “auto-  
matic density” and ten’s  
place is for “manual  
density”. Once they are  
fixed, the range correc-  
tion is performed with  
standard values.  
The values of the back-  
ground peak and text  
peak affect the repro-  
duction of the back-  
ground density and text  
density respectively.  
1: fixed/fixed  
Text  
SCN  
(black) <11-14,  
21-24,  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
31-34,  
41-44>  
12  
Photo  
SCN  
(black) <11-14,  
21-24,  
31-34,  
41-44>  
12  
Gray scale SCN  
(black) <11-14,  
21-24,  
2: varied/fixed  
3: fixed/varied  
4: varied/varied  
31-34,  
41-44>  
*
Background peak/  
Text peak  
835  
836  
837  
838  
Image  
Range correc- Text/Photo SCN  
tion Back-  
56  
(black) <0-255>  
SCN 48  
(black) <0-255>  
SCN 16  
(black) <0-255>  
Gray scale SCN 32  
(black) <0-255>  
SYS When the value  
increases, the back-  
1
1
1
1
ground peak  
adjustment  
ground of the image  
(low density area)  
becomes harder to be  
printed out.  
Text  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
Photo  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
840  
Image  
Sharpness  
adjustment  
Text/Photo SCN  
(black)  
0
SYS When the value  
increases, the image  
becomes sharper.  
1
1
1
1
<0-31>  
When the value  
841  
842  
843  
Text  
SCN  
(black)  
0
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
decreases, the image  
<0-31>  
becomes softer.  
The smaller the value  
is, the less the moire  
becomes.  
Photo  
SCN  
(black)  
0
<0-31>  
*
The default value 0  
is equivalent to 16  
(center value).  
Gray scale SCN  
(black)  
0
<0-31>  
845  
846  
847  
848  
Image  
Density  
Text/Photo SCN  
128  
SYS When the value  
increases, the image  
1
1
1
1
adjustment  
“manual den-  
sity” fine  
adjustment/  
Center value  
(black) <0-255>  
SCN 128  
(black) <0-255>  
SCN 128  
(black) <0-255>  
SCN 128  
becomes darker.  
Text  
SYS  
Photo  
SYS  
Image  
Image  
Fine adjustment of back-  
ground / Center value  
SYS When the value  
increases, the back-  
ground becomes  
darker.  
SYS When the value  
increases, the image of  
(black) <0-255>  
850  
851  
852  
Density  
Text/Photo SCN  
20  
1
1
1
adjustment  
“manual den-  
sity” fine  
adjustment/  
Light step  
value  
(black) <0-255>  
the “light” steps  
becomes lighter.  
Text  
SCN  
(black) <0-255>  
SCN 20  
(black) <0-255>  
20  
SYS  
Photo  
SYS  
853  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Fine adjustment of back-  
ground / Light step value  
(Image smoothing)  
SCN 50  
(black) <0-255>  
SYS Sets the changing  
amount by 1 step at  
background adjust-  
1
ment. When the value  
increases, the back-  
ground of the “light”  
steps becomes lighter.  
855  
856  
857  
Density  
Text/Photo SCN  
20  
SYS When the value  
increases, the image of  
1
1
1
adjustment  
“manual den-  
sity” fine  
(black) <0-255>  
the “dark” steps  
becomes darker.  
Text  
SCN  
(black) <0-255>  
SCN 20  
(black) <0-255>  
20  
SYS  
adjustment/  
Dark step  
value  
Photo  
SYS  
858  
Fine adjustment of back-  
ground / Dark step value  
(Image smoothing)  
SCN 50  
(black) <0-255>  
SYS Sets the changing  
amount by 1 step at  
background adjust-  
1
ment. When the value  
increases, the back-  
ground of the “dark”  
steps becomes darker.  
860  
861  
862  
Density  
Text/Photo SCN  
128  
SYS When the value  
increases, the image  
1
1
1
adjustment  
“automatic  
density” fine  
adjustment  
(black) <0-255>  
becomes darker.  
Text  
SCN  
(black) <0-255>  
SCN 128  
(black) <0-255>  
128  
SYS  
Photo  
SYS  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 64  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
128  
880-0  
880-1  
880-2  
881-0  
881-1  
881-2  
882-0  
882-1  
882-2  
883-0  
883-1  
883-2  
884  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Adjustment of  
L
M
H
L
SCN  
SYS When the value  
increases, the density  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
gamma bal-  
ance (Text/  
Photo)  
(black) <0-255>  
SCN 128  
(black) <0-255>  
SCN 128  
(black) <0-255>  
SCN 128  
(black) <0-255>  
SCN 128  
(black) <0-255>  
SCN 128  
(black) <0-255>  
SCN 128  
(black) <0-255>  
SCN 128  
(black) <0-255>  
SCN 128  
(black) <0-255>  
SCN 128  
(black) <0-255>  
SCN 128  
(black) <0-255>  
SCN 128  
(black) <0-255>  
SCN 128  
(black) <0-255>  
in the target area  
becomes higher.  
L: Low density area  
M: Medium density area  
H: High density area  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
2
Adjustment of  
gamma bal-  
ance (Text)  
M
H
L
Adjustment of  
gamma bal-  
ance (Photo)  
M
H
L
Adjustment of  
gamma bal-  
ance (Gray  
scale)  
M
H
Reproduction ratio fine  
adjustment of primary  
scanning direction  
SYS When the value  
increases by “1”, the  
reproduction ratio of pri-  
mary scanning direction  
increases by approx.  
0.1%.  
Effective with the reso-  
lution other than 600  
dpi.  
953-0  
953-1  
953-2  
953-3  
Image  
Color devia-  
tion correc-  
tion 3  
K
C
M
Y
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
128  
<118-  
138>  
128  
<118-  
138>  
M
M
M
M
When the value  
4
4
4
4
increases by "1", the  
image shifts toward the  
trailing edge of the  
paper by 0.0423 mm.  
(A4/LT)  
128  
<118-  
138>  
128  
<118-  
138>  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
954-0  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Color devia-  
tion correc-  
tion 4  
(A4/LT)  
128  
<118-  
138>  
M
When the value  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
K
C
M
Y
K
C
M
Y
K
C
M
Y
ALL  
increases by "1", the  
image shifts toward the  
trailing edge of the  
paper by 0.0423 mm.  
954-1  
954-2  
954-3  
955-0  
955-1  
955-2  
955-3  
956-0  
956-1  
956-2  
956-3  
976  
128  
<118-  
138>  
128  
<118-  
138>  
128  
<118-  
138>  
128  
<118-  
138>  
128  
<118-  
138>  
128  
<118-  
138>  
128  
<118-  
138>  
128  
<118-  
138>  
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
Color devia-  
tion correc-  
tion 5  
When the value  
increases by "1", the  
image shifts toward the  
trailing edge of the  
paper by 0.0423 mm.  
(A4/LT)  
Color devia-  
tion correc-  
tion 6  
When the value  
increases by "1", the  
image shifts toward the  
trailing edge of the  
paper by 0.0423 mm.  
(A4/LT)  
128  
<118-  
138>  
128  
<118-  
138>  
128  
<118-  
138>  
Mainte- Equipment number (serial  
nance  
-
SYS When this adjustment is  
performed with this  
code, the setting code  
(08-995) is also per-  
formed automatically.  
(10 digits)  
number) display  
1000  
1001  
1002  
1003  
Image  
Automatic  
gamma  
adjustment  
PS/  
PRT  
-
-
-
-
SYS Adjusts the gradation  
reproduction for each  
color, Y, M, C and K.  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
7
7
7
7
600x600 (color)  
dpi  
PS/  
1200x600 (color)  
dpi  
PCL/  
600x600 (color)  
dpi  
PCL/  
1200x600 (color)  
dpi  
PRT  
PRT  
PRT  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 66  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
128  
1010-0  
1010-1  
1010-2  
1011-0  
1011-1  
1011-2  
1012-0  
1012-1  
1012-2  
1013-0  
1013-1  
1013-2  
1014-0  
1014-1  
1014-2  
1015-0  
1015-1  
1015-2  
1016-0  
1016-1  
1016-2  
1017-0  
1017-1  
1017-2  
1018-0  
1018-1  
1018-2  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Color bal-  
L
M
H
L
PRT  
SYS The target color, mode  
and density area  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
ance adjust-  
ment for “Y”  
(PS/  
600x600dpi/  
Smooth)  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
become darker as the  
value increases.  
L: Low density area  
M: Medium density  
area  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
2
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “M”  
(PS/  
600x600dpi/  
Smooth)  
H: High density area  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “C”  
(PS/  
600x600dpi/  
Smooth)  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “K”  
(PS/  
600x600dpi/  
Smooth)  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “Y”  
(PS/  
600x600dpi/  
Detail)  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “M”  
(PS/  
600x600dpi/  
Detail)  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “C”  
(PS/  
600x600dpi/  
Detail)  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “K”  
(PS/  
600x600dpi/  
Detail)  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “Y”  
(PS/  
1200x600dpi/  
Smooth)  
M
H
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
128  
1019-0  
1019-1  
1019-2  
1020-0  
1020-1  
1020-2  
1021-0  
1021-1  
1021-2  
1022-0  
1022-1  
1022-2  
1023-0  
1023-1  
1023-2  
1024-0  
1024-1  
1024-2  
1025-0  
1025-1  
1025-2  
1026-0  
1026-1  
1026-2  
1027-0  
1027-1  
1027-2  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Color bal-  
L
M
H
L
PRT  
SYS The target color, mode  
and density area  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
ance adjust-  
ment for “M”  
(PS/  
1200x600dpi/  
Smooth)  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
become darker as the  
value increases.  
L: Low density area  
M: Medium density  
area  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “C”  
(PS/  
1200x600dpi/  
Smooth)  
H: High density area  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “K”  
(PS/  
1200x600dpi/  
Smooth)  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “Y”  
(PS/  
1200x600dpi/  
Detail)  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “M”  
(PS/  
1200x600dpi/  
Detail)  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “C”  
(PS/  
1200x600dpi/  
Detail)  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “K”  
(PS/  
1200x600dpi/  
Detail)  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “Y”  
(PCL/  
600x600dpi/  
Smooth)  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “M”  
(PCL/  
600x600dpi/  
Smooth)  
M
H
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 68  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
128  
1028-0  
1028-1  
1028-2  
1029-0  
1029-1  
1029-2  
1030-0  
1030-1  
1030-2  
1031-0  
1031-1  
1031-2  
1032-0  
1032-1  
1032-2  
1033-0  
1033-1  
1033-2  
1034-0  
1034-1  
1034-2  
1035-0  
1035-1  
1035-2  
1036-0  
1036-1  
1036-2  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Color bal-  
L
M
H
L
PRT  
SYS The target color, mode  
and density area  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
ance adjust-  
ment for “C”  
(PCL/  
600x600dpi/  
Smooth)  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
become darker as the  
value increases.  
L: Low density area  
M: Medium density  
area  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
2
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “K”  
(PCL/  
600x600dpi/  
Smooth)  
H: High density area  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “Y”  
(PCL/  
600x600dpi/  
Detail)  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “M”  
(PCL/  
600x600dpi/  
Detail)  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “C”  
(PCL/  
600x600dpi/  
Detail)  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “K”  
(PCL/  
600x600dpi/  
Detail)  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “Y”  
(PCL/  
1200x600dpi/  
Smooth)  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “M”  
(PCL/  
1200x600dpi/  
Smooth)  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “C”  
(PCL/  
1200x600dpi/  
Smooth)  
M
H
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
128  
1037-0  
1037-1  
1037-2  
1038-0  
1038-1  
1038-2  
1039-0  
1039-1  
1039-2  
1040-0  
1040-1  
1040-2  
1041-0  
1041-1  
1041-2  
1046-0  
1046-1  
1047-0  
1047-1  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Color bal-  
L
M
PRT  
SYS The target color, mode  
and density area  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
ance adjust-  
ment for “K”  
(PCL/  
1200x600dpi/  
Smooth)  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 255  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 255  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 255  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 255  
(color) <0-255>  
become darker as the  
value increases.  
L: Low density area  
M: Medium density  
area  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
H
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “Y”  
(PCL/  
1200x600dpi/  
Detail)  
L
H: High density area  
M
H
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “M”  
(PCL/  
1200x600dpi/  
Detail)  
L
M
H
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “C”  
(PCL/  
1200x600dpi/  
Detail)  
L
M
H
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “K”  
(PCL/  
1200x600dpi/  
Detail)  
L
M
H
Image  
Image  
Adjustment of  
maximum  
toner amount  
PS  
PCL  
PS  
PCL  
SYS When the value  
decreases, the image  
becomes lighter.  
Note:  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
(Plain paper)  
When the value  
Adjustment of  
maximum  
toner amount  
(Thick paper  
1)  
increases, the  
image offsetting  
may occur.  
1048-0  
1048-1  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Adjustment of  
maximum  
toner amount  
(Thick paper  
2)  
Adjustment of  
maximum  
toner amount  
(Thick paper  
3)  
PS  
PRT  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 255  
(color) <0-255>  
255  
SYS  
SYS  
4
4
PCL  
1049-0  
1049-1  
PS  
PRT  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 255  
(color) <0-255>  
255  
SYS  
SYS  
4
4
PCL  
1050-0  
1050-1  
Adjustment of  
maximum  
toner amount  
(OHP film)  
PS  
PRT  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 200  
(color) <0-255>  
200  
SYS  
SYS  
4
4
PCL  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 70  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
176  
1055  
1056  
1057  
1058  
1060  
Image  
Upper limit in toner saving  
mode  
PRT  
SYS When the value  
decreases, the printing  
1
1
1
1
1
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 176  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 176  
(color) <0-255>  
PRT 176  
(color) <0-255>  
SCN 128  
(color) <0-255>  
density becomes  
lighter.  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
2
Image  
Reproduction ratio fine  
adjustment of primary  
scanning direction  
SYS When the value  
increases by “1”, the  
reproduction ratio of pri-  
mary scanning direction  
increases by approx.  
0.1%.  
Effective with the reso-  
lution other than 600  
dpi.  
1065  
1066  
Image  
Image  
Judgment threshold for  
ACS  
Judgment threshold for  
ACS on original set on the (color) <0-255>  
RADF  
SCN  
(color) <0-255>  
SCN 70  
70  
SYS When the value  
increases, originals  
1
1
tend to be judged as  
monochrome, and  
when the value  
SYS  
decreases, they tend to  
be judged as color in  
autocolor mode.  
1070  
1071  
1072  
1075  
1076  
1077  
1080  
1081  
1082  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Fine adjust-  
ment of back-  
ground  
Text  
SCN  
(color)  
SCN  
(color)  
SCN  
(color)  
SCN  
(color)  
SCN  
(color)  
SCN  
(color)  
SCN  
(color)  
SCN  
(color)  
0
SYS Adjusts the level of  
background. When the  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
<0-50>  
value increases, the  
background becomes  
more brightened.  
Printed  
image  
Photo  
0
SYS  
<0-50>  
0
SYS  
<0-50>  
Fine adjust-  
ment of black  
density  
Text  
0
SYS Adjusts the black den-  
sity of the scanned  
<0-4>  
0
<0-4>  
0
<0-4>  
0
<0-3>  
0
image. When the value  
increases, the black  
density becomes  
darker.  
Printed  
image  
Photo  
SYS  
SYS  
RGB conver- Text  
sion method  
selection  
SYS Sets the color space  
format of the output  
image.  
0: sRGB  
Printed  
image  
Photo  
SYS  
<0-3>  
0
<0-3>  
1: AppleRGB  
2: ROMMRGB  
3: AdobeRGB  
SCN  
(color)  
SYS  
1086  
1087  
1088  
Image  
Sharpness  
adjustment  
Text  
SCN  
(color)  
SCN  
(color)  
SCN  
(color)  
0
SYS When the value  
increases, the image  
1
1
1
<0-31>  
becomes sharper.  
When the value  
Printed  
image  
Photo  
0
SYS  
<0-31>  
decreases, the image  
becomes softer.  
0
SYS  
<0-31>  
The smaller the value  
is, the less the moire  
becomes.  
*
The default value 0  
is equivalent to 16  
(center value).  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
128  
1550  
1551  
1552  
1553  
1554  
1560  
1561  
1562  
1563  
1564  
1570  
1571  
1572  
1573  
1574  
1580  
1581  
1582  
1583  
1584  
1612  
1613  
1614  
1615  
1616  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Density  
Text/Photo PPC  
SYS When the value  
increases, the image  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
adjustment  
“manual den-  
sity” fine  
adjustment/  
Center value  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
Text/Photo PPC 20  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 20  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 20  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 20  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 20  
(color) <0-255>  
Text/Photo PPC 20  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 20  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 20  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 20  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 20  
(color) <0-255>  
Text/Photo PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 255  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 249  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 237  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 237  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 249  
(color) <0-255>  
becomes darker.  
Text  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
Printed  
image  
Photo  
Map  
Density  
SYS Sets the changing  
amount by 1 step at the  
adjustment  
“manual den-  
sity” fine  
adjustment/  
Dark step  
value  
density adjustment.  
When the value  
increases, the image of  
the “dark” steps  
becomes darker.  
Text  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
Printed  
image  
Photo  
Map  
Density  
SYS Sets the changing  
amount by 1 step at the  
adjustment  
“manual den-  
sity” fine  
adjustment/  
Light step  
value  
density adjustment.  
When the value  
increases, the image of  
the “light” steps  
becomes lighter.  
Text  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
Printed  
image  
Photo  
Map  
Density  
SYS When the value  
increases, the image  
adjustment  
“automatic  
density” fine  
adjustment  
becomes darker.  
Text  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
Printed  
image  
Photo  
Map  
Adjustment of  
maximum  
toner amount  
Plain  
paper  
Thick  
paper 1  
Thick  
paper 2  
Thick  
paper 3  
SYS When the value  
decreases, the image  
becomes lighter.  
Note:  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
When the value  
increases,  
image offsetting  
may occur.  
OHP film  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 72  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1630  
1631  
1632  
1633  
1642  
Image  
Maximum text  
density  
adjustment  
Y
M
C
K
PPC  
(color)  
PPC  
(color)  
PPC  
(color)  
PPC  
(color)  
5
SYS When the value  
increases by “1”, the  
1
1
1
1
7
<0-10>  
maximum text density  
of each color becomes  
darker.  
5
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
<0-10>  
2
5
<0-10>  
5
<0-10>  
Image  
Automatic  
gamma  
adjustment  
Color/  
Black  
PPC  
-
SYS Automatic adjustment  
of gradation reproduc-  
tion in the Full Color  
Mode (each color of Y,  
M, C and K) and Black  
Mode.  
1643  
Color  
PPC  
PPC  
-
SYS Automatic adjustment  
of gradation reproduc-  
tion in the Full Color  
Mode (each color of Y,  
M, C and K).  
SYS When the value  
increases, originals  
tend to be judged as  
black, and when the  
7
1675  
1676  
Image  
Judgment threshold for  
ACS  
70  
1
1
(color) <0-255>  
value decreases, they  
tend to be judged as  
color in auto-color  
mode.  
Image  
Image  
Judgment threshold for  
ACS on original set on the (color) <0-255>  
PPC  
70  
SYS  
RADF  
1688  
1689  
1690  
1691  
1692  
1693  
1694  
1695  
1696  
1697  
Automatic off- Text/Photo PPC  
128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
Automatic off- Text/Photo PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
SYS When the value  
increases, the back-  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
setting adjust-  
ment for  
background  
processing  
(background  
density)  
ground becomes  
darker.  
Text  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
Printed  
image  
Photo  
Map  
Image  
SYS When the value  
increases, the text  
setting adjust-  
ment for  
background  
processing  
(text density)  
becomes darker.  
Text  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
Printed  
image  
Photo  
Map  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
128  
1698  
1699  
1700  
1701  
1702  
1708  
1709  
1710  
1711  
1712  
1725  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Manual offset- Text/Photo PPC  
SYS When the value  
increases, the back-  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ting adjust-  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
Manual offset- Text/Photo PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
ment for  
ground becomes  
darker.  
Text  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
background  
processing  
(background  
density)  
Printed  
image  
Photo  
Map  
SYS When the value  
increases, the text  
ting adjust-  
ment for  
background  
processing  
(text density)  
becomes darker.  
Text  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
Printed  
image  
Photo  
Map  
Text/Photo reproduction  
level adjustment  
PPC  
(color)  
0
SYS 0: Default  
1: Photo oriented 2  
<0-5>  
(The printed image  
reproduction level  
higher than that of  
the Photo oriented  
1)  
2: Photo oriented 1  
(The printed image  
reproduction level  
higher than that of  
the Default)  
3: Equivalent to the  
Default  
4: Text oriented 1 (The  
text reproduction  
level higher than  
that of the Default)  
5: Text oriented 2 (The  
text reproduction  
level higher than  
that of the Text ori-  
ented 1)  
1737  
1738  
1739  
1740  
1741  
Image  
Sharpness  
adjustment /  
Full Color  
Mode  
Text/Photo PPC  
(color)  
0
SYS When the value  
1
1
1
1
1
<0-31>  
increases, the image  
becomes sharper.  
When the value  
Text  
PPC  
(color)  
0
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
<0-31>  
decreases, the image  
becomes softer.  
Printed  
image  
PPC  
(color)  
0
<0-31>  
The smaller the value  
is, the less the moire  
becomes.  
Photo  
PPC  
(color)  
0
<0-31>  
Map  
PPC  
(color)  
0
*
The default value 0  
is equivalent to 16  
(center value).  
<0-31>  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 74  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1757  
Image  
Sharpness adjustment /  
Auto Color Mode (Text/  
Photo)  
PPC  
(color)  
EUR: 0  
UC: 0  
JAPN: 22  
<0-31>  
SYS When the value  
increases, the image  
becomes sharper.  
When the value  
1
2
decreases, the image  
becomes softer. The  
smaller the value is, the  
less the moire  
becomes.  
*
The default value 0  
is equivalent to  
16(center value).  
1761  
Image  
Image  
Black reproduction switch-  
ing  
PPC  
(color)  
0
SYS 0: Default  
1: Black reproduction  
oriented  
SYS Sets the reproduction  
mode for highlighter for  
1
<0-1>  
1769  
Setting for  
highlighter  
Vivid  
PPC  
(color)  
0
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
<0-2>  
four types of one touch  
adjustment.  
0: Default  
1: Highlighter 1  
2: Highlighter 2  
1770  
Clear  
PPC  
(color)  
PPC  
(color)  
PPC  
(color)  
PPC  
0
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
<0-2>  
0
<0-2>  
0
<0-2>  
128  
1771  
Warm  
Cool  
L
1772  
1779-0  
1779-1  
1779-2  
1780-0  
1780-1  
1780-2  
1781-0  
1781-1  
1781-2  
1782-0  
1782-1  
1782-2  
1783-0  
1783-1  
1783-2  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Color bal-  
SYS The target color, mode  
and density area  
ance adjust-  
ment for “Y”  
(Text/Photo)  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
become darker as the  
value increases.  
L: Low density area  
M: Medium density  
area  
M
H
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “Y”  
(Text)  
L
H: High density area  
M
H
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “Y”  
(Printed  
L
M
H
image)  
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “Y”  
(Photo)  
L
M
H
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “Y”  
(Map)  
L
M
H
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
128  
1784-0  
1784-1  
1784-2  
1785-0  
1785-1  
1785-2  
1786-0  
1786-1  
1786-2  
1787-0  
1787-1  
1787-2  
1788-0  
1788-1  
1788-2  
1789-0  
1789-1  
1789-2  
1790-0  
1790-1  
1790-2  
1791-0  
1791-1  
1791-2  
1792-0  
1792-1  
1792-2  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Color bal-  
L
M
H
L
PPC  
SYS The target color, mode  
and density area  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
ance adjust-  
ment for “M”  
(Text/Photo)  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
become darker as the  
value increases.  
L: Low density area  
M: Medium density  
area  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “M”  
(Text)  
H: High density area  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “M”  
(Printed  
M
H
L
image)  
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “M”  
(Photo)  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “M”  
(Map)  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “C”  
(Text/Photo)  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “C”  
(Text)  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “C”  
(Printed  
M
H
L
image)  
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “C”  
(Photo)  
M
H
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 76  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
128  
1793-0  
1793-1  
1793-2  
1794-0  
1794-1  
1794-2  
1795-0  
1795-1  
1795-2  
1796-0  
1796-1  
1796-2  
1797-0  
1797-1  
1797-2  
1798-0  
1798-1  
1798-2  
1800-0  
1800-1  
1800-2  
1800-3  
1801-0  
1801-1  
1801-2  
1801-3  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Color bal-  
L
M
H
L
PPC  
SYS The target color, mode  
and density area  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
ance adjust-  
ment for “C”  
(Map)  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
PPC 128  
(color) <0-255>  
become darker as the  
value increases.  
L: Low density area  
M: Medium density  
area  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
M
2
Color bal-  
H: High density area  
ance adjust-  
ment for “K”  
(Text/Photo)  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “K”  
(Text)  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “K”  
(Printed  
M
H
L
image)  
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “K”  
(Photo)  
M
H
L
Color bal-  
ance adjust-  
ment for “K”  
(Map)  
M
H
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Upper limit  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
650  
<0-999>  
650  
<0-999>  
650  
<0-999>  
600  
<0-999>  
120  
<0-999>  
120  
<0-999>  
120  
<0-999>  
120  
<0-999>  
Sets the upper limit  
value of the contrast  
voltage at the image  
quality control. (Unit: V)  
control value of con-  
trast voltage  
M
M
M
Image  
control value of con-  
Lower limit  
M
Sets the lower limit  
value of the contrast  
voltage at the image  
quality control. (Unit: V)  
trast voltage  
M
M
M
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
able  
value>  
800  
<0-999>  
800  
<0-999>  
800  
<0-999>  
800  
<0-999>  
350  
<0-999>  
350  
<0-999>  
350  
<0-999>  
350  
<0-999>  
125  
<0-999>  
125  
<0-999>  
125  
<0-999>  
125  
<0-999>  
979  
<0-999>  
979  
<0-999>  
979  
<0-999>  
1802-0  
1802-1  
1802-2  
1802-3  
1803-0  
1803-1  
1803-2  
1803-3  
1804-0  
1804-1  
1804-2  
1804-3  
1805-0  
1805-1  
1805-2  
1805-3  
1806-0  
Image  
control value of laser  
Upper limit  
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Sets the upper limit  
value of the laser power  
at the image quality  
control. (Unit: µW)  
4
4
power  
4
4
Image  
control value of laser  
power  
Lower limit  
Sets the lower limit  
value of the laser power  
at the image quality  
control. (Unit: µW)  
4
4
4
4
Image  
control voltage actual  
value display  
Background  
Displays the back-  
ground voltage when  
printing is operated.  
(Unit: V)  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
Image  
control potential char-  
acteristic/  
Drum surface  
Displays the slope fac-  
tor of the approximate  
expression of the drum  
surface potential to the  
main charger grid volt-  
age at the open-loop  
control.  
slope factor  
display  
990  
<0-999>  
-6  
<-999-  
Image  
Drum surface  
Displays the offset fac-  
tor of the approximate  
expression of the drum  
surface potential to the  
main charger grid volt-  
age at the open-loop  
control.  
control potential char-  
acteristic/off-  
set factor  
999>  
1806-1  
1806-2  
1806-3  
M
C
K
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
-6  
<-999-  
999>  
-6  
<-999-  
999>  
M
M
M
10  
10  
10  
display  
-4  
<-999-  
999>  
1807-0  
1807-1  
1807-2  
1807-3  
Image  
Drum expo-  
Y
M
C
K
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
58  
<0-999>  
58  
<0-999>  
58  
<0-999>  
60  
<0-999>  
M
M
M
M
Displays the slope fac-  
tor of the approximate  
expression of the drum  
exposure voltage to the  
main charger grid volt-  
age at the open-loop  
control.  
10  
10  
10  
10  
control sure voltage  
characteristic/  
slope factor  
display (main  
charger grid  
low voltage  
area)  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 78  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1808-0  
Image  
Drum expo-  
Y
M
C
K
ALL  
35  
<-999-  
999>  
35  
<-999-  
999>  
35  
<-999-  
999>  
42  
M
Displays the offset fac-  
tor of the approximate  
expression of the drum  
exposure voltage to the  
main charger grid volt-  
age at the open-loop  
control.  
10  
10  
10  
10  
control sure voltage  
characteristic/  
offset factor  
display (main  
charger grid  
low voltage  
1808-1  
1808-2  
1808-3  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
M
M
M
2
area)  
<-999-  
999>  
1809-0  
1809-1  
1809-2  
1809-3  
1810-0  
Image  
Drum expo-  
Y
M
C
K
Y
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
49  
<0-999>  
49  
<0-999>  
49  
<0-999>  
53  
<0-999>  
41  
<-999-  
999>  
41  
<-999-  
999>  
41  
<-999-  
999>  
47  
M
M
M
M
M
Displays the slope fac-  
tor of the approximate  
expression of the drum  
exposure voltage to the  
main charger grid volt-  
age at the open-loop  
control.  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
control sure voltage  
characteristic/  
slope factor  
display (main  
charger grid  
high voltage  
area)  
Image  
Drum expo-  
Displays the offset fac-  
tor of the approximate  
expression of the drum  
exposure voltage to the  
main charger grid volt-  
age at the open-loop  
control.  
control sure voltage  
characteristic/  
offset factor  
1810-1  
1810-2  
1810-3  
M
C
K
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
M
M
M
10  
10  
10  
display (main  
charger grid  
high voltage  
area)  
<-999-  
999>  
1811-0  
1811-1  
1811-2  
1811-3  
1812-0  
1812-1  
1812-2  
1812-3  
Image  
control age/upper  
limit actual  
Contrast volt-  
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
500  
<0-999>  
500  
<0-999>  
500  
<0-999>  
600  
<0-999>  
120  
<0-999>  
120  
<0-999>  
120  
<0-999>  
120  
<0-999>  
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Displays the upper limit  
value of the contrast  
voltage when printing is  
operated. (Unit: V)  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
value display  
Image  
control age/lowerlimit  
actual value  
Contrast volt-  
Displays the lower limit  
value of the contrast  
voltage when printing is  
operated. (Unit: V)  
display  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
PPC  
able  
value>  
170  
<0-999>  
170  
<0-999>  
170  
<0-999>  
170  
<0-999>  
80  
<0-999>  
80  
<0-999>  
80  
<0-999>  
1813-0  
1813-1  
1813-2  
1813-3  
1814-0  
1814-1  
1814-2  
1814-3  
1815-0  
1815-1  
1815-2  
1815-3  
1816-0  
1816-1  
1816-2  
1816-3  
1817  
Image  
Display of  
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Displays the upper limit  
value of the background  
voltage when printing is  
operated. (Unit: V)  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
2
control background  
voltage/upper  
limit actual  
value  
Image  
control voltage/lower  
limit actual  
Background  
Displays the lower limit  
value of the background  
voltage when printing is  
operated. (Unit: V)  
value display  
80  
<0-999>  
Image  
control age/correc-  
tion number of  
Contrast volt-  
0
Displays the actual  
number of time the con-  
trast voltage has been  
corrected at the closed-  
loop control.  
<0-255>  
0
time display  
<0-255>  
0
<0-255>  
0
<0-255>  
Image  
control correction/  
number of  
Laser power  
0
Displays the actual  
number of time the  
laser power has been  
corrected at the closed-  
loop control.  
<0-255>  
0
time display  
<0-255>  
0
<0-255>  
0
<0-255>  
Image  
control display  
Laser power actual value  
92  
Displays the laser  
power value when  
copying in the Black  
Mode. (Bit value)  
(black) <0-255>  
1819  
1820  
Image  
control tor  
Laser power correcting fac- PPC  
100  
<100-  
255>  
M
M
Perform the correction  
of the setting 05-1817.  
(Unit: %)  
Displays the laser  
power value when print-  
ing in the Black Mode.  
(Bit value)  
1
2
(black)  
Image  
control display  
Laser power actual value  
PRT  
92  
(black) <0-255>  
1821  
Image  
control tor  
Laser power correcting fac- PRT  
100  
<100-  
255>  
M
Perform the correction  
of the setting 05-1820.  
(Unit: %)  
1
(black)  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 80  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
able  
value>  
92  
<0-255>  
88  
<0-255>  
90  
<0-255>  
90  
<0-255>  
90  
<0-255>  
1822-0 Transfer 2nd transfer  
roller bias cor-  
Plain  
paper  
Thick  
paper 1  
Thick  
paper 2  
Thick  
paper 3  
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Corrects the 2nd trans-  
fer roller bias output of  
the trailing edge of  
paper (05-227, 229,  
230, 231 and 232).  
Correction factor: %  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
10  
10  
rection of trail-  
ing edge of  
paper  
1822-1  
1822-2  
1822-3  
1822-4  
2
OHP film  
1823-0 Transfer Display of  
intermediate  
Single  
side  
Reverse  
side at  
162  
Displays the value of  
2nd transfer roller bias  
when the actual printing  
is operated.  
(The value corrected in  
05-1822 is displayed.)  
(black) <0-255>  
ALL 139  
(black) <0-255>  
level of 2nd  
transfer roller  
bias actual  
value of trail-  
ing edge of  
paper  
1823-1  
duplexing  
1823-2  
1823-3  
Single  
side  
Reverse  
side at  
ALL  
(color) <0-255>  
ALL 133  
(color) <0-255>  
150  
M
M
10  
10  
(Plain paper)  
duplexing  
1825-0 Transfer Display of  
intermediate  
Single  
side  
Reverse  
side at  
duplexing  
Single  
side  
Reverse  
side at  
duplexing  
ALL  
(black) <0-255>  
ALL 127  
(black) <0-255>  
149  
M
M
10  
10  
level of 2nd  
transfe rroller  
bias actual  
value of trail-  
ing edge of  
paper  
1825-1  
1825-2  
1825-3  
ALL  
(color) <0-255>  
ALL 121  
(color) <0-255>  
133  
M
M
10  
10  
(Thick paper  
1)  
1826-0 Transfer Display of intermediate  
level of 2nd transfer roller  
ALL  
(black) <0-255>  
ALL 154  
(color) <0-255>  
157  
M
M
10  
10  
bias actual value of trailing  
edge of paper  
1826-1  
(Thick paper 2)  
1827-0 Transfer Display of intermediate  
level of 2nd transfer roller  
ALL  
(black) <0-255>  
ALL 137  
(color) <0-255>  
137  
M
M
10  
10  
bias actual value of trailing  
edge of paper  
1827-1  
(Thick paper 3)  
1828-0 Transfer Display of intermediate  
level of 2nd transfer roller  
ALL  
(black) <0-255>  
ALL 126  
(color) <0-255>  
126  
M
M
M
M
M
10  
10  
14  
14  
14  
bias actual value of trailing  
edge of paper (OHP film)  
1828-1  
1829-0 Transfer 1st transfer  
roller bias cor-  
Thick  
paper 2  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
80  
<0-100>  
80  
<0-100>  
Corrects the 1st trans-  
fer roller bias output.  
Correction factor: %  
rection at  
deceleration  
1829-1  
Thick  
paper 3  
1829-2  
OHP film  
80  
<0-100>  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
187  
1831  
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias  
actual value display at  
deceleration  
ALL  
M
Displays the value of  
1st transfer roller bias  
at deceleration when  
the actual printing is  
operated.  
(The value corrected in  
05-1829 is displayed.)  
2
2
2
2
(black) <0-255>  
(Thick paper 2)  
1832  
1833  
1836  
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias  
actual value display at  
deceleration  
ALL  
187  
M
M
M
(black) <0-255>  
(Thick paper 3)  
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias  
actual value display at  
deceleration  
ALL  
187  
(black) <0-255>  
(OHP film)  
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias  
ALL  
178  
Displays the actual  
value of the 1st transfer  
roller bias when the  
transfers of all colors (Y,  
M, C and K) have fin-  
ished.  
actual value display in low- (color) <0-255>  
speed color printing  
(Plain paper / Thick paper  
1)  
This adjustment is valid  
only when the value of  
the code 08-497 is “1”  
(6 pages/minute).  
1839-0 Transfer 2nd transfer  
Intermedi-  
ALL  
100  
<0-100>  
M
Corrects the 2nd trans-  
fer roller bias output of  
leading/trailing edge of  
paper (05-1840).  
14  
roller bias cor- ate level  
rection of  
leading/trail-  
ing edge of  
paper  
bias of  
trailing  
edge  
Bias of  
leading/  
trailing  
edge  
(Correcting factor: %)  
1839-1  
ALL  
ALL  
90  
<0-100>  
M
M
M
14  
14  
14  
(Tab paper)  
1840-0 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias  
output adjustment  
153  
As the value decreases,  
the 2nd transfer roller  
bias output increases  
correspondingly.  
The adjustment value  
becomes effective  
when the Setting Mode  
(08-544, 549 and 551)  
is 0 (invalid).  
(black) <0-187>  
(Tab paper)  
1840-1  
ALL  
150  
(color) <0-187>  
1841-0 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias  
offsetting adjustment  
ALL  
(black)  
5
M
M
Sets the offset amount  
of 2nd transfer roller  
bias.  
4
4
<0-10>  
(Tab paper)  
0: -500V  
2: -300V  
4: -100V  
6: +100V  
8: +300V  
10: +500V  
1: -400V  
3: -200V  
5: 0V  
7: +200V  
9: +400V  
1841-1  
ALL  
(color)  
5
<0-10>  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 82  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
153  
1842-0 Transfer Actual value  
Intermedi-  
ALL  
M
Displays the value of  
2nd transfer roller bias  
on the leading/trailing  
edge of paper when  
printing is performed.  
(The value corrected in  
05-1839 is displayed.)  
10  
display of 2nd  
transfer roller  
bias  
ate level (black) <0-225>  
bias of  
trailing  
edge  
2
of leading/  
trailing  
edge of paper  
(Tab paper)  
1842-1  
1842-2  
Bias of  
leading/  
trailing  
edge  
ALL  
157  
M
M
10  
10  
(black) <0-225>  
Intermedi-  
ate level  
bias of  
ALL  
150  
(color) <0-225>  
trailing  
edge  
1842-3  
Bias of  
leading/  
trailing  
edge  
ALL  
154  
M
10  
(color) <0-225>  
1845-0 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias  
actual value display  
ALL  
(black) <0-187>  
ALL 150  
(color) <0-187>  
153  
M
M
M
Displays the value of  
2nd transfer roller bias  
when printing is oper-  
ated.  
10  
10  
1
(Tab paper)  
1845-1  
1847  
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias  
actual value display  
(Tab paper)  
ALL  
400  
<300-  
800>  
The drum surface  
potential at the 1st  
transfer bias resistance  
detection control is  
adjusted.  
[Unit: V]  
1848  
1849  
Transfer 1st transfer bias resis-  
tance detection control  
ALL  
ALL  
-
M
M
The result value of the  
1st transfer bias resis-  
tance detection control  
is displayed.  
[Unit: V]  
When the value  
decreases, the 1st  
transfer roller bias out-  
put increases.  
2
1
<0-9999>  
Result value display  
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias out-  
put adjustment  
154  
(black) <0-225>  
This setting is enabled  
when "0" (disabled) is  
set at the codes 08-  
541, -549 and -551.  
1850-0 Transfer 1st transfer  
roller bias out-  
Y
M
C
K
ALL  
(color) <0-225>  
ALL 143  
(color) <0-225>  
ALL 154  
(color) <0-225>  
ALL 154  
(color) <0-225>  
ALL 154  
(black) <0-225>  
138  
M
M
M
M
M
When the value  
4
4
4
4
2
decreases, the 1st  
transfer roller bias out-  
put increases.  
This setting is enabled  
when "0" (disabled) is  
set at the codes 08-  
541, -549 and -551.  
put adjust-  
ment  
1850-1  
1850-2  
1850-3  
1861  
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias RMS  
value display  
The RMS value of the  
1st transfer roller bias  
at the time of printing is  
displayed.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
138  
1862-0 Transfer 1st transfer  
roller bias  
Y
M
C
K
ALL  
M
M
M
M
M
The RMS value of the  
1st transfer roller bias  
at the time of printing is  
displayed.  
10  
10  
10  
10  
1
(color) <0-225>  
ALL 143  
(color) <0-225>  
ALL 154  
(color) <0-225>  
ALL 154  
(color) <0-225>  
RMS value  
display  
1862-1  
1862-2  
1862-3  
1863  
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias  
resistance detection Cur-  
rent offset adjustment  
ALL  
5
The current offset  
amount of the 1st trans-  
fer roller bias resistance  
detection is adjusted.  
0: -10 1: -8 2: -6  
3: -4 4: -2 5: 0  
<0-10>  
6: +2 7: +4 8: +6  
9: +8 10: +10  
[Unit: µA]  
1864  
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias cor-  
rection at low-speed color  
printing  
ALL  
(color)  
100  
<0-100>  
M
The 1st transfer roller  
bias output after the  
completion of transfer  
of all colors (Y, M, C  
and K) is corrected.  
This setting is enabled  
when "1" (6 sheets/  
minute) is set at the  
code 08-497.  
1
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 84  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.2.5  
Setting mode (08)  
The items in the setting code list can be set or changed in this setting mode (08).  
When the power should be turned OFF, be sure to shut down the equipment by pressing the  
[ENERGY SAVER] button for a few seconds.  
2
Procedure 1  
[CANCEL]  
[ENTER]  
[0][8]  
[POWER]  
[Digital key]  
(Code)  
[POWER] OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
[Digital key]  
[FUNCTION CLEAR]  
Sets or  
[START]  
or  
[INTERRUPT]  
*
(Stores value in RAM)  
changes value  
[CLEAR]  
(Corrects value)  
*
Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).  
Procedure 2  
[ENTER]  
or  
[0][8]  
[POWER]  
[Digital key]  
(Code)  
[POWER]OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
[START]  
[INTERRUPT]  
Adjustment value  
cannot be changed  
Procedure 3  
[ENTER]  
or  
[0][8]  
[POWER]  
[POWER] OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
[Digital key]  
(Code)  
[START]  
(Automatic setting)  
[INTERRUPT]  
(Stores value in RAM)  
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]  
Procedure 4  
[CANCEL]  
[START]  
[ENTER]  
or  
[POWER]  
OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
[0][8]  
[POWER]  
[Digital key]  
(Code)  
[Digital key]  
(Sub-code)  
[START]  
[START]  
[Digital key]  
[INTERRUPT]  
(Stores value  
in RAM)  
*
[FUNCTION CLEAR]  
Sets or  
changes value  
[CLEAR]  
(Corrects value)  
[CLEAR]  
(Corrects value)  
*
Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Procedure 5  
[CANCEL]  
[START]  
[ENTER]  
or  
[INTERRUPT]  
[0][8]  
[POWER]  
[Digital key]  
(Code)  
[Digital key]  
*[HELP]  
Sets or  
[POWER] OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
(Stores value in RAM)  
changes value  
[CLEAR]  
(Corrects value)  
*
Press [HELP] to enter "-".  
Procedure 7  
[CANCEL]  
[ENTER]  
or  
[0][8]  
[POWER]  
[Digital key]  
(Code)  
[Digital key]  
[START]  
(Setting)  
(HDD formatting)  
[POWER] OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
[INTERRUPT]  
(Stores value in RAM)  
[CLEAR]  
(Corrects value)  
Procedure 9  
[CANCEL]  
[ENTER]  
or  
[0][8]  
[POWER]  
[Digital key]  
(Code)  
[POWER] OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
[Select button]  
[START]  
[INTERRUPT]  
(Stores value in RAM)  
[CLEAR]  
(Corrects value)  
Procedure 10  
[CANCEL]  
[ENTER]  
or  
[INTERRUPT]  
[POWER]  
OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
[0][8]  
[POWER]  
[Digital key]  
(Code)  
[Digital key]  
(1st setting)  
[Digital key]  
(2nd setting)  
[START]  
[START]  
(Stores value in RAM)  
[CLEAR]  
(Corrects value)  
[CLEAR]  
(Corrects value)  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 86  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Procedure 11 and 12  
[CANCEL]  
[Digital key]  
or  
[0][8]  
[POWER]  
[Digital key]  
(Code)  
[POWER] OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
[ENTER]  
*2(Stores value in RAM)  
[START]  
[Software keyboard]  
*1 [MONITOR/PAUSE]  
Sets or  
changes value  
[CLEAR]  
(Corrects value)  
2
*1 Press [MONITOR/PAUSE] to enter "-", when entering telephone number.  
*2 The data are stored in SYS-RAM in procedure 11 and stored in NIC-RAM  
in procedure 12.  
Procedure 14  
[CANCEL]  
[ENTER]  
[0][8]  
[POWER]  
[Digital key]  
(Code)  
[Digital key]  
(Sub-code)  
[POWER]  
OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
[START]  
[START]  
or  
[INTERRUPT]  
Adjustment value  
cannot be changed  
[CLEAR]  
(Corrects value)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes:  
1. The digit after the hyphen in “Code” of the following table is a sub code.  
2. In “RAM”, the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. “M”  
stands for the LGC board, “SYS”, “NIC” and “UTY” stands for the SYS board.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
200  
General Date and time setting  
ALL  
-
-
Year/month/date/day/  
hour/minute/second  
Example:  
5
<13 dig-  
its>  
03 07 0 13 13 27 48  
“Day” - “0” is for “Sun-  
day”. Proceeds Monday  
through Saturday from  
“1” to “6”.  
201  
202  
General Destination selection  
ALL  
ALL  
EUR: 0  
UC: 1  
JPN: 2  
<0-3>  
M
M
0: EUR  
1: UC  
2: JPN  
3: Other  
0: No external counter  
1: Coin controller  
1
1
User  
Counter installed externally  
0
interface  
<0-4>  
2: Copy key card  
3: Key copy counter  
4: Key card for OEM1  
203  
204  
General Line adjustment mode  
ALL  
ALL  
0
M
0: For factory ship-  
ment  
1: For line  
1
1
<0-1>  
*
Field: “0” must be  
selected  
User  
Auto-clear timer setting  
3
SYS Timer to return the  
equipment to the  
default settings when  
the [START] button is  
not pressed after the  
function and the mode  
are set  
interface  
<0-10>  
0: Not cleared  
1 to 10:  
Set number x 15  
sec.  
205  
User  
interface  
Auto power save mode  
timer setting  
ALL  
11  
SYS Timer to automatically  
switch to the energy  
saving mode when the  
equipment has not  
been used  
1
<0, 6-15>  
0: Invalid 6: 3min.  
7: 4min. 8: 5min.  
9: 7min.  
10: 10min.  
11: 15min.  
12: 20min.  
13: 30min.  
14: 45min.  
15: 60min.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 88  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
206  
User  
Auto Shut Off Mode timer  
ALL  
Refer to  
content  
<0-20>  
SYS Timer to enter the Sleep  
Mode automatically  
when the equipment  
has not been used  
0: 3min. 1: 5min.  
2: 10min. 3: 15min.  
4: 20min. 5: 25min.  
6: 30min. 7: 40min.  
8: 50min. 9: 60min.  
10: 70min.  
1
interface setting (Sleep Mode)  
2
11: 80min.  
12: 90min.  
13: 100min.  
14: 110min.  
15: 120min.  
16: 150min.  
17:180min.  
18: 210min.  
19:240min.  
20: Not used  
<Default value>  
e-STUDIO281c: 9  
e-STUDIO351c: 9  
e-STUDIO451c: 12  
207  
209  
User  
interface LCD  
Highlighting display on  
ALL  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Black letter on white  
background  
1: White letter on black  
background  
SYS 0: TIFF (Multi)  
1: PDF (Multi)  
1
1
<0-1>  
User  
Default setting of filing for-  
1
interface mat when E-mailing (com- (color)  
mon in all color modes)  
<0-4>  
2: Not used  
3: TIFF (Single)  
4: PDF (Single)  
210  
218  
219  
220  
Paper  
Paper size (A6-R)  
PRT  
148/105  
<148-  
432/105-  
-
10  
1
feeding feeding/widthwise direction  
297>  
User  
Default setting of filing for-  
SCN  
(color)  
1
SYS 0: TIFF (Multi)  
1: PDF (Multi) 2: JPG  
3: TIFF (Single)  
interface mat when storing files  
<0-4>  
(at color/ACS modes)  
4: PDF (Single)  
User  
Default setting of filing for-  
ALL  
(black)  
0
SYS 0: TIFF (Multi)  
1: PDF (Multi) 2: JPG  
3: TIFF (Single)  
1
interface mat when storing files  
<0-4>  
(at black mode)  
4: PDF (Single)  
User  
Language displayed at  
ALL  
EUR: 0  
UC: 0  
JPN: 5  
<0-6>  
SYS 0: Language 1  
1: Language 2  
2: Language 3  
3: Language 4  
4: Language 5  
5: Language 6  
6: Language 7  
1
interface power-ON  
221  
User  
Language selection in UI  
ALL  
EUR: 0  
UC: 0  
JPN: 5  
<0-6>  
SYS 0: Language 1  
1: Language 2  
2: Language 3  
3: Language 4  
4: Language 5  
5: Language 6  
6: Language 7  
1
interface data at Web power ON  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 89  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
223  
Mainte- Switching of output pages/  
ALL  
0
M
Selects the reference to  
notify the PM timing.  
(The message is dis-  
played on the LCD  
screen.)  
1
nance  
driving counts at PM  
<0-1>  
0: PM counter (The  
number of output  
pages is set at 08-  
251.)  
1: PM time counter  
(The timing is set at  
08-375.)  
224  
225  
Paper  
feeding  
Paper  
feeding drawer  
Paper size for bypass feed  
Paper size for upper  
PPC  
ALL  
UNDEF  
SYS Press the button on the  
LCD to select the size.  
9
9
EUR: A4  
UC: LT  
JPN: A4  
EUR: A3  
UC: LD  
JPN: A3  
EUR:  
A4-R  
UC:  
M
M
M
Press the button on the  
LCD to select the size.  
226  
227  
Paper  
feeding drawer  
Paper size for lower  
ALL  
ALL  
Press the button on the  
LCD to select the size.  
9
9
Paper  
feeding drawer  
Paper size for PFP upper  
Press the button on the  
LCD to select the size.  
LT-R  
JPN:  
A4-R  
228  
229  
Paper  
feeding drawer  
Paper size for PFP lower  
ALL  
ALL  
EUR: A4  
UC: LG  
JPN: B4  
420/297  
<182-  
M
M
Press the button on the  
LCD to select the size.  
9
Paper  
Paper size (A3)  
10  
feeding feeding/widthwise direction  
432/140-  
297>  
230  
231  
232  
233  
234  
235  
Paper  
Paper size (A4-R)  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
297/210  
<182-  
432/140-  
297>  
210/148  
<182-  
432/140-  
297>  
364/257  
<182-  
432/140-  
297>  
257/182  
<182-  
432/140-  
297>  
M
M
M
M
M
M
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
feeding feeding/widthwise direction  
Paper  
Paper size (A5-R)  
feeding feeding/widthwise direction  
Paper  
Paper size (B4)  
feeding feeding/widthwise direction  
Paper  
Paper size (B5-R)  
feeding feeding/widthwise direction  
Paper  
Paper size (LT-R)  
279/216  
<182-  
432/140-  
297>  
432/279  
<182-  
feeding feeding/widthwise direction  
Paper  
Paper size (LD)  
feeding feeding/widthwise direction  
432/140-  
297>  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 90  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
236  
Paper  
Paper size (LG)  
ALL  
356/216  
<182-  
432/140-  
297>  
216/140  
<182-  
432/140-  
297>  
356/257  
<182-  
432/140-  
297>  
330/210  
<182-  
432/140-  
297>  
330/216  
<182-  
432/140-  
297>  
216/216  
<182-  
432/140-  
297>  
432/279  
<148-  
432/105-  
297>  
148/100  
<148-  
432/100-  
297>  
390/270  
<182-  
432/140-  
297>  
270/195  
<182-  
432/140-  
297>  
457/305  
<182-  
457/140-  
305>  
148/100  
<148-  
432/100-  
297>  
148/100  
<148-  
M
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
feeding feeding/widthwise direction  
2
237  
238  
239  
240  
241  
242  
243  
244  
245  
246  
247  
248  
249  
Paper  
Paper size (ST-R)  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
M
M
feeding feeding/widthwise direction  
Paper  
Paper size (COMPUTER)  
feeding feeding/widthwise direction  
Paper  
Paper size (FOLIO)  
M
feeding feeding/widthwise direction  
Paper  
Paper size (13”LG)  
M
feeding feeding/widthwise direction  
Paper  
Paper size (8.5”X8.5”)  
M
feeding feeding/widthwise direction  
Paper  
Paper size (Non-standard)  
SYS  
feeding feeding/widthwise direction  
Paper  
Memory 1  
SYS Registers the paper  
size of bypass feed  
(non-standard type) into  
[MEMORY 1].  
M
M
M
feeding Paper size (bypass feed-  
ing/non-standard type)  
feeding/widthwise direction  
Paper size (8K)  
Paper  
feeding feeding/widthwise direction  
Paper  
Paper size (16K-R)  
feeding feeding/widthwise direction  
Paper  
Paper size (A3-wide)  
feeding feeding/widthwise direction  
Paper  
Memory 2  
SYS Registers the paper  
size of bypass feed  
(non-standard type) into  
[MEMORY 2].  
SYS Registers the paper  
size of bypass feed  
(non-standard type) into  
[MEMORY 3].  
SYS Registers the paper  
size of bypass feed  
(non-standard type) into  
[MEMORY 4].  
feeding Paper size (bypass feed-  
ing/non-standard type)  
feeding/widthwise direction  
Memory 3  
Paper  
feeding Paper size (bypass feed-  
ing/non-standard type)  
432/100-  
297>  
148/100  
<148-  
432/100-  
feeding/widthwise direction  
Memory 4  
Paper  
feeding Paper size (bypass feed-  
ing/non-standard type)  
feeding/widthwise direction  
297>  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
250  
Mainte- Service technician tele-  
nance phone number  
ALL  
0
SYS A telephone number  
can be entered up to 32  
digits. Use the [MONI-  
TOR/PAUSE] button to  
enter a hyphen(-).  
11  
<32 dig-  
its>  
251  
Mainte- Setting value of PM  
nance counter  
ALL  
Refer to  
content  
<8 digits>  
M
<Default>  
e-STUDIO281c  
UC, EUR:  
1
100,000 JPN: 0  
e-STUDIO351c  
UC, EUR:  
120,000 JPN: 0  
e-STUDIO451c  
UC, EUR:  
150,000 JPN: 0  
252  
Mainte- Current value of PM  
nance counter Display/0 clearing  
ALL  
0
M
Counts up when the  
registration sensor is  
ON.  
1
<8 digits>  
253  
254  
Mainte- Error history display  
nance  
ALL  
-
SYS Displays the latest 20  
errors data  
2
1
Paper  
LTA4/LDA3  
PRT  
0
SYS Sets whether the data is  
printed on the different  
but similar size paper or  
not when the paper of  
corresponding size is  
not available.  
feeding  
<0-1>  
0: Valid (The data is  
printed on A4/A3  
when LT/LD is  
selected or vice  
versa.)  
1: Invalid (The mes-  
sage to use the  
selected paper size  
is displayed.)  
255  
Paper  
feeding  
PFP/LCF installation  
ALL  
0
M
0: Automatic  
1: PFP single-drawer  
type installed  
1
<0-4>  
2: PFP dual-drawer  
type installed  
3: LCF installed  
4: Not installed  
256  
257  
Paper  
feeding  
Paper size setting /LCF  
ALL  
ALL  
EUR: A4  
UC: LT  
JPN: A4  
M
-
Press the icon on the  
LCD to select the size.  
9
-
Counter Counter copy  
-
1: Electrical counter ->  
Backup counter  
<1-2>  
2: Backup counter ->  
Electrical counter  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 92  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
258  
Mainte- FSMS acceptance  
nance  
ALL  
1
SYS Sets whether the FSMS  
connection is accepted  
or not.  
1
<0-2>  
0: Prohibited  
2
1: Accepted (serial  
connection only)  
2: Accepted (both  
serial and USB con-  
nections)  
259  
260  
Network Storage period at trail and  
private  
PRT  
ALL  
14  
<0-35>  
SYS 0: No limits  
1 to 30: 1 to 30 days  
31: 1 hour  
1
1
32: 2 hours  
33: 4 hours  
34: 8 hours  
35: 12 hours  
Network Web data retention period  
10  
<3 digits>  
SYS When a certain period  
of time has passed  
without operation after  
accessing TopAccess,  
the data being regis-  
tered is automatically  
reset. This period is set  
at this code.  
(Unit: Minute)  
263  
User  
Administrator's password  
ALL  
123456  
<10 dig-  
its>  
-
The password can be  
entered in alphabets  
and figures (A-Z, a-z  
and 0-9) within 10 dig-  
its.  
11  
interface (Maximum 10 digits)  
264  
265  
266  
267  
Network File retention period  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
30  
<0-999>  
30  
<2-30>  
30  
<2-30>  
SYS 0: No limits  
1 to 999: 1 to 999 days  
SYS 2 to 30 M bytes  
1
1
1
1
Network Maximum data capacity at  
E-mailing  
Network Maximum data capacity at  
Internet FAX  
SYS 2 to 30 M bytes  
Elec-  
tronic  
filing  
Full guarantee of docu-  
ments in Electronic Filing  
when HDD is full  
0
SYS Sets the file retention  
level when editing the  
files in the Electronic  
Filing (at CutDoc/Save-  
Doc command execu-  
tion).  
<0-1>  
0: Not full retained  
1: Fully retained  
Retains the source  
file until CutDoc/  
SaveDoc command  
is completed.  
*
The file is not  
deleted even if the  
HDD has become  
full during the exe-  
cution of command  
when “1” is set.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 93  
05/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
268  
User  
Binarizing level selection  
ALL  
3
SYS 0: Step -2  
1: Step -1  
1
interface (When judging as black in  
<1-5>  
the ACS Mode)  
2: Step 0 (center)  
3: Step 1  
4: Step 2  
*
The binarizing level  
of each step is set  
at 08-609.  
270  
271  
Elec-  
tronic  
filing  
Default setting of user box  
retention period  
ALL  
ALL  
0
SYS Sets the data retention  
period when creating a  
user box.  
1
1
<0-999>  
0: Not deleted  
1 to 999:  
Retention period  
(Unit: Day)  
SYS Sets the percentage of  
HDD partition filled  
when warning notifica-  
tion is sent.  
General Warning notification of the  
File Share and e-Filling  
90  
<0-100>  
partitions are filled  
0 to 100: 0 to 100%  
*
Related code  
08-288  
272  
273  
Scanning Notification setting of E-  
mail saving time limit  
ALL  
ALL  
3
SYS Sets the days left the  
notification of E-mail  
saving time limit  
appears  
0 to 99: 0 to 99 days  
SYS Sets the default value  
for the partial size of E-  
mail to be transmitted  
when creating a tem-  
plate.  
1
1
<0-99>  
Scanning Default setting of partial  
size when transmitting E-  
mail  
0
<0-6>  
0: Not divided  
1: 64  
3: 256  
5: 1024  
2: 128  
4: 512  
6: 2048 (Unit: KB)  
274  
FAX  
Default setting of page by  
page when transmitting  
Internet FAX  
ALL  
0
SYS Sets the default value  
for the page by page of  
Internet FAX to be  
transmitted when creat-  
ing a template.  
1
<0-4>  
0: Not divided  
1: 256  
2: 512  
3: 1024  
4: 2048 (Unit: KB)  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 94  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
276  
User  
Default setting of density  
SCN  
(black)  
0
SYS 0: Automatic density  
1: Step -5  
1
interface adjustment (Black)  
<0-11>  
2: Step -4  
3: Step -3  
4: Step -2  
2
5: Step -1  
6: Step 0 (center)  
7: Step +1  
8: Step +2  
9: Step +3  
10: Step +4  
11: Step +5  
(1 to 11: Manual den-  
sity)  
277  
278  
User  
Default setting of back-  
SCN  
(color)  
3
SYS 1: Step -2  
2: Step -1  
1
1
interface ground adjustment  
(Full Color)  
<1-5>  
3: Step 0 (center)  
4: Step +1  
5: Step +2  
User  
interface mode  
Default setting of color  
SCN  
0
SYS 0: Black  
1: Gray Scale  
2: Unused  
<0-4>  
3: Full Color  
4: Auto Color  
279  
280  
User  
Default setting of resolution  
SCN  
(color)  
2
SYS 0: 100 dpi  
1: 150 dpi  
2: 200 dpi  
3: 300dpi  
SYS 0: 100 dpi  
1: 150 dpi  
1
1
interface (Full Color)  
<0-3>  
User  
Default setting of resolution  
SCN  
(black)  
2
interface (Gray Scale)  
<0-4>  
2: 200 dpi  
3: 300dpi  
4: 400 dpi  
281  
User  
interface (Black)  
Default setting of resolution  
SCN  
(black)  
1
SYS 0: 150 dpi  
1: 200 dpi  
1
<0-4>  
2: 300 dpi  
3: 400dpi  
4: 600 dpi  
282  
283  
284  
285  
User  
Default setting of original  
SCN  
(color)  
0
SYS 0: Text  
1: Photo  
1
1
1
1
interface mode (Full Color)  
<0-2>  
2: Printed Image  
User  
Default setting of original  
SCN  
(black)  
0
SYS 0: Text  
1: Text/Photo  
2: Photo  
SYS 0: Single  
1: Book  
2: Tablet  
SYS 0: 0 degree  
1: 90 degrees  
interface mode (Black)  
<0-2>  
User  
interface mode  
Default setting of scanning  
SCN  
SCN  
0
<0-2>  
User  
interface mode  
Default setting of rotation  
0
<0-3>  
2: 180 degrees  
3: 270 degrees  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
286  
User  
Default setting of original  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Automatic  
1
interface paper size  
<0-22>  
1: A3  
2: A4  
3: LD  
4: LT  
5: A4-R 6: A5-R  
7: LT-R  
9: B4  
8: LG  
10: B5  
11: ST-R 12: COMP  
13: B5-R 14: FOLIO  
15: 13"LG 16: 8.5"x 8.5"  
18: A6-R  
19: Size mixed  
20: 8K  
21: 16K  
22: 16K-R  
288  
289  
General Searching interval of delet-  
ing expired files and check-  
ing capacity of HDD  
ALL  
ALL  
12  
<1-24>  
SYS Sets the search inter-  
val of deleting expired  
files and checking  
capacity of HDD parti-  
tions.  
1
1
partitions  
(Unit: Hour)  
*
Related code  
08-271  
User  
Default setting of back-  
3
SYS 1: Step -2  
2: Step -1  
interface ground adjustment  
<1-5>  
(Gray Scale)  
3: Step 0 (center)  
4: Step +1  
5: Step +2  
290  
291  
Network Raw printing job (Duplex)  
PRT  
PRT  
1
SYS 0: Valid  
1: Invalid  
SYS 0: LD  
1
1
<0-1>  
EUR: 6  
UC: 2  
Network Raw printing job  
(Paper size)  
1: LG  
3: COMP  
5: A3  
2: LT  
4: ST  
JPN: 6  
<0 -13>  
6: A4  
8: A6  
7: A5  
9: B4  
10: B5  
11: FOLIO  
12: 13 "LG  
13: 8.5" x 8.5"  
292  
Network Raw printing job  
(Paper type)  
PRT  
0
SYS 0: Plain paper  
1: Thick paper 1  
2: Thick paper 2  
3: Thick paper 3  
4: OHP film  
1
<0-5>  
5: Tab paper  
293  
294  
295  
Network Raw printing job  
(Paper direction)  
Network Raw printing job (Staple)  
PRT  
PRT  
PRT  
0
SYS 0: Portrait  
1: Landscape  
SYS 0: Valid  
1: Invalid  
SYS 0: Inner tray  
1: Finisher tray 1  
2: Finisher tray 2  
3: Unused  
1
1
1
<0-1>  
1
<0-1>  
0
Network Raw printing job (Exit tray)  
<0-6>  
4: Unused  
5: Unused  
6: Unused  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 96  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
296  
Network Raw printing job  
(Number of form lines)  
PRT  
1200  
<500-  
12800>  
SYS Sets the number of  
form lines from 5 to  
128. (A hundredfold of  
the number of form  
lines is defined as the  
setting value.)  
1
2
297  
298  
Network Raw printing job  
(PCL font pitch)  
PRT  
PRT  
1000  
<44-  
9999>  
SYS Sets the font pitch from  
0.44 to 99.99. (A hun-  
dredfold of the font  
pitch is defined as the  
setting value.)  
SYS Sets the font size from  
4 to 999.75.  
1
1
Network Raw printing job  
(PCL font size)  
1200  
<400-  
99975>  
(A hundredfold of the  
font size is defined as  
the setting value.)  
299  
300  
Network Raw printing job  
(PCL font number)  
PRT  
PPC  
PPC  
0
SYS Sets the PCL font num-  
ber.  
SYS 0: 999 1: 99 2: 9  
1
1
4
<0-79>  
User  
Maximum number of copy  
0
interface volume (MAX9)  
<0-2>  
0
301-0  
301-1  
301-2  
301-3  
301-4  
301-5  
301-6  
301-7  
301-8  
301-9  
301-10  
301-11  
301-12  
301-13  
301-14  
301-15  
301-16  
302  
Counter Number of  
output pages  
at Full Color  
Mode in  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
SYS Counts the output  
pages at the Full Color  
Mode in the Copier  
Function for each paper  
size according to the  
setting for the count  
setting of largesized  
paper (08-352) and the  
definition setting of  
large-sized paper (08-  
353).  
(color) <8 digits>  
Copier Func-  
tion  
B4  
B5  
FOLIO  
LD  
LG  
LT  
ST  
COMP  
13”LG  
8.5” x 8.5”  
16K  
8K  
Others  
User  
Original counter display  
PPC  
EUR: 2  
UC: 0  
JPN: 0  
SYS Sets whether the origi-  
nal counter is dis-  
played or not.  
1
interface  
<0, 2, 4>  
0: Not displayed  
2: Displayed  
4: Displayed (Double-  
sized original is  
counted as 2.)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
0
303-0  
303-1  
303-2  
303-3  
303-4  
303-5  
303-6  
303-7  
303-8  
303-9  
303-10  
303-11  
303-12  
303-13  
303-14  
303-15  
303-16  
304-0  
304-1  
304-2  
304-3  
304-4  
304-5  
304-6  
304-7  
304-8  
304-9  
304-10  
304-11  
304-12  
304-13  
304-14  
304-15  
304-16  
Counter Number of  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
PRT  
SYS Counts the output  
pages at the Full Color  
Mode in the Printer  
Function for each paper  
size according to the  
setting for the count  
setting of largesized  
paper (08-352) and the  
definition setting of  
large-sized paper (08-  
353).  
4
output pages  
at Full Color  
Mode in  
(color) <8 digits>  
Printer Func-  
B4  
tion  
B5  
FOLIO  
LD  
LG  
LT  
ST  
COMP  
13”LG  
8.5” x 8.5”  
16K  
8K  
Others  
A3  
A4  
Counter Number of  
output pages  
at Twin Color  
Mode in  
PPC  
0
SYS Counts the output  
pages at the Twin Color  
Mode in the Copier  
Function for each paper  
size according to the  
setting for the count  
setting of largesized  
paper (08-352) and the  
definition setting of  
large-sized paper (08-  
353).  
4
(color) <8 digits>  
A5  
A6  
B4  
Copier Func-  
tion  
B5  
FOLIO  
LD  
LG  
LT  
ST  
COMP  
13”LG  
8.5” x 8.5”  
16K  
8K  
Others  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 98  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
0
305-0  
305-1  
305-2  
305-3  
305-4  
305-5  
305-6  
305-7  
305-8  
305-9  
305-10  
305-11  
305-12  
305-13  
305-14  
305-15  
305-16  
306-0  
306-1  
306-2  
306-3  
306-4  
306-5  
306-6  
306-7  
306-8  
306-9  
306-10  
306-11  
306-12  
306-13  
306-14  
306-15  
306-16  
Counter Number of  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
PPC  
SYS Counts the output  
pages at the Black  
Mode in the Copier  
Function for each paper  
size according to the  
setting for the count  
setting of large-sized  
paper (08-352) and the  
definition setting of  
large-sized paper (08-  
353).  
4
output pages  
at Black Mode  
in Copier  
(black) <8 digits>  
2
Function  
B4  
B5  
FOLIO  
LD  
LG  
LT  
ST  
COMP  
13”LG  
8.5” x 8.5”  
16K  
8K  
Others  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
B4  
B5  
FOLIO  
LD  
LG  
Counter Number of  
output pages  
at Black Mode  
in Printer  
PRT  
0
SYS Counts the output  
pages at the Black  
Mode in the Printer  
Function for each paper  
size according to the  
setting for the count  
setting of large-sized  
paper (08-352) and the  
definition setting of  
large-sized paper (08-  
353).  
4
(black) <8 digits>  
Function  
LT  
ST  
COMP  
13”LG  
8.5” x 8.5”  
16K  
8K  
Others  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
0
307-0  
307-1  
307-2  
307-3  
307-4  
307-5  
307-6  
307-7  
307-8  
307-9  
307-10  
307-11  
307-12  
307-13  
307-14  
307-15  
307-16  
308-0  
308-1  
308-2  
308-3  
308-4  
308-5  
308-6  
308-7  
308-8  
308-9  
308-10  
308-11  
308-12  
308-13  
308-14  
308-15  
308-16  
Counter Number of  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
PRT  
SYS Counts the output  
pages at the List Print  
Mode for each paper  
size according to the  
setting for the count  
setting of large-sized  
paper (08-352) and the  
definition setting of  
largesized paper (08-  
353).  
4
output pages  
at List Print  
Mode  
(black) <8 digits>  
B4  
B5  
FOLIO  
LD  
LG  
LT  
ST  
COMP  
13”LG  
8.5” x 8.5”  
16K  
8K  
Others  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
B4  
B5  
FOLIO  
LD  
LG  
Counter Number of  
output pages  
in FAX Func-  
tion  
FAX  
0
SYS Counts the output  
pages in the FAX Func-  
tion for each paper size  
according to the setting  
for the count setting of  
large-sized paper (08-  
352) and the definition  
setting of large-sized  
paper (08-353).  
4
<8 digits>  
LT  
ST  
COMP  
13”LG  
8.5” x 8.5”  
16K  
8K  
Others  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 100  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
0
309-0  
309-1  
309-2  
309-3  
309-4  
309-5  
309-6  
309-7  
309-8  
309-9  
309-10  
309-11  
309-12  
309-13  
309-14  
309-15  
309-16  
310-0  
310-1  
310-2  
310-3  
310-4  
310-5  
310-6  
310-7  
310-8  
310-9  
310-10  
310-11  
310-12  
310-13  
310-14  
310-15  
310-16  
Counter Number of  
scanning  
A3  
PPC  
SYS Counts the scanning  
pages at the Full Color  
Mode in the Copier  
Function for each paper  
size according to the  
setting for the count  
setting of large-sized  
paper (08-352) and the  
definition setting of  
large-sized paper (08-  
353).  
4
(color) <8 digits>  
A4  
A5  
A6  
B4  
pages at Full  
Color Mode in  
Copier Func-  
tion  
2
B5  
FOLIO  
LD  
LG  
LT  
ST  
COMP  
13”LG  
8.5” x 8.5”  
16K  
8K  
Others  
A3  
Counter Number of  
scanning  
SCN  
0
SYS Counts the scanning  
pages at the Full Color  
Mode in the Scanning  
Function for each paper  
size according to the  
setting for the count  
setting of large-sized  
paper (08-352) and the  
definition setting of  
large-sized paper (08-  
353).  
4
(color) <8 digits>  
A4  
A5  
A6  
B4  
pages at Full  
Color Mode in  
Scanning  
Function  
B5  
FOLIO  
LD  
LG  
LT  
ST  
COMP  
13”LG  
8.5” x 8.5”  
16K  
8K  
Others  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
0
311-0  
311-1  
311-2  
311-3  
311-4  
311-5  
311-6  
311-7  
311-8  
Counter Number of  
scanning  
A3  
PPC  
SYS Counts the scanning  
pages at the Twin Color  
Mode in the Copier  
Function for each paper  
size according to the  
setting for the count  
setting of large-sized  
paper (08-352) and the  
definition setting of  
large-sized paper (08-  
353).  
4
(color) <8 digits>  
A4  
A5  
A6  
B4  
pages at Twin  
Color Mode in  
Copier Func-  
tion  
B5  
FOLIO  
LD  
LG  
LT  
311-9  
311-10  
311-11  
311-12  
311-13  
311-14  
311-15  
311-16  
312-0  
312-1  
312-2  
312-3  
312-4  
312-5  
312-6  
312-7  
312-8  
312-9  
312-10  
312-11  
312-12  
312-13  
312-14  
312-15  
312-16  
ST  
COMP  
13”LG  
8.5” x 8.5”  
16K  
8K  
Others  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
B4  
B5  
FOLIO  
LD  
LG  
LT  
ST  
COMP  
13”LG  
8.5” x 8.5”  
16K  
8K  
Counter Number of  
scanning  
PPC  
0
SYS Counts the scanning  
pages at the Black  
Mode in the Copier  
Function for each paper  
size according to the  
setting for the count  
setting of largesized  
paper (08-352) and the  
definition setting of  
large-sized paper (08-  
353).  
4
(black) <8 digits>  
pages at  
Black Mode in  
Copier Func-  
tion  
Others  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 102  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
0
313-0  
313-1  
313-2  
313-3  
313-4  
313-5  
313-6  
313-7  
313-8  
313-9  
313-10  
313-11  
313-12  
313-13  
313-14  
313-15  
313-16  
314-0  
314-1  
314-2  
314-3  
314-4  
314-5  
314-6  
314-7  
314-8  
314-9  
314-10  
314-11  
314-12  
314-13  
314-14  
314-15  
314-16  
Counter Number of  
scanning  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
B4  
B5  
FOLIO  
LD  
LG  
SCN  
SYS Counts the scanning  
pages at the Black  
Mode in the Scanning  
Function for each paper  
size according to the  
setting for the count  
setting of largesized  
paper (08-352) and the  
definition setting of  
large-sized paper (08-  
353).  
4
(black) <8 digits>  
pages in  
Scanning  
Function  
2
LT  
ST  
COMP  
13”LG  
8.5” x 8.5”  
16K  
8K  
Others  
A3  
Counter Number of  
scanning  
FAX  
0
SYS Counts the scanning  
pages in the FAX Func-  
tion for each paper size  
according to the setting  
for the count setting of  
large-sized paper (08-  
352) and the definition  
setting of largesized  
4
<8 digits>  
A4  
A5  
pages in FAX  
Function  
A6  
B4  
B5  
FOLIO  
LD  
LG  
LT  
ST  
paper (08-353).  
COMP  
13”LG  
8.5” x 8.5”  
16K  
8K  
Others  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
315-0  
315-1  
315-2  
315-3  
315-4  
315-5  
315-6  
315-7  
315-8  
315-9  
315-10  
315-11  
315-12  
315-13  
315-14  
315-15  
315-16  
316-0  
316-1  
316-2  
316-3  
316-4  
316-5  
316-6  
316-7  
316-8  
316-9  
316-10  
316-11  
316-12  
316-13  
316-14  
316-15  
316-16  
Counter Number of  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
B4  
B5  
FOLIO  
LD  
LG  
FAX  
0
SYS Counts the transmitted  
pages in the FAX Func-  
tion for each paper size  
according to the setting  
for the count setting of  
large-sized paper (08-  
352) and the definition  
setting of largesized  
4
transmitted  
pages in FAX  
Function  
<8 digits>  
paper (08-353).  
LT  
ST  
COMP  
13”LG  
8.5” x 8.5”  
16K  
8K  
Others  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
B4  
B5  
FOLIO  
LD  
LG  
LT  
ST  
COMP  
13”LG  
8.5” x 8.5”  
16K  
8K  
Counter Number of  
received  
FAX  
0
SYS Counts the received  
pages in the FAX Func-  
tion for each paper size  
according to the setting  
for the count setting of  
large-sized paper (08-  
352) and the definition  
setting of largesized  
4
<8 digits>  
pages in FAX  
Function  
paper (08-353).  
Others  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 104  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
0
317-0  
317-1  
317-2  
Counter Display of  
number of  
Counter  
Large  
Small  
Total  
PPC  
SYS Counts the number of  
output pages at the Full  
SYS  
14  
14  
14  
(color) <8 digits>  
PPC  
(color) <8 digits>  
PPC  
(color) <8 digits>  
output pages  
at Full Color  
Mode in  
Copier Func-  
tion  
Color Mode in the  
Copier Function  
according to its size  
(large/small).  
Large:  
0
2
Counter  
0
SYS  
Number of output  
pages of large-sized  
paper defined at 08-  
353  
Small:  
Number of output  
pages other than  
set as large-sized  
paper  
Total:  
Total number out-  
put pages of all  
paper sizes.  
318-0  
318-1  
318-2  
Counter Display of  
number of  
Large  
Small  
Total  
PRT  
(color) <8 digits>  
PRT  
(color) <8 digits>  
PRT  
(color) <8 digits>  
0
SYS Counts the number of  
output pages at the Full  
14  
14  
14  
output pages  
at Full Color  
Mode in  
Color Mode in the  
Printer Function  
according to its size  
(large/small).  
Large:  
Counter  
0
SYS  
Counter  
0
SYS  
Printer Func-  
tion  
Number of output  
pages of large-sized  
paper defined at 08-  
353  
Small:  
Number of output  
pages other than  
set as large-sized  
paper  
Total:  
Total number out-  
put pages of all  
paper sizes.  
319-0  
319-1  
319-2  
Counter Display of  
number of  
Large  
Small  
Total  
PPC  
(color) <8 digits>  
PPC  
(color) <8 digits>  
PPC  
(color) <8 digits>  
0
SYS Counts the number of  
output pages at the  
14  
14  
14  
output pages  
at Twin Color  
Mode in  
Twin Color Mode in the  
Copier Function  
according to its size  
(large/small).  
Large:  
Counter  
0
SYS  
Counter  
0
SYS  
Copier Func-  
tion  
Number of output  
pages of large-sized  
paper defined at 08-  
353  
Small:  
Number of output  
pages other than  
set as large-sized  
paper  
Total:  
Total number out-  
put pages of all  
paper sizes.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
0
320-0  
320-1  
320-2  
Counter Display of  
number of  
Counter  
Large  
Small  
Total  
PPC  
SYS Counts the number of  
output pages at the  
SYS  
14  
14  
14  
(black) <8 digits>  
PPC  
(black) <8 digits>  
PPC  
(black) <8 digits>  
output pages  
at Black Mode  
in Copier  
Black Mode in the  
Copier Function  
according to its size  
(large/small).  
Large:  
0
Counter  
0
SYS  
Function  
Number of output  
pages of large-sized  
paper defined at 08-  
353  
Small:  
Number of output  
pages other than  
set as large-sized  
paper  
Total:  
Total number out-  
put pages of all  
paper sizes.  
321-0  
321-1  
321-2  
Counter Display of  
number of  
Large  
Small  
Total  
PRT  
(black) <8 digits>  
PRT  
(black) <8 digits>  
PRT  
(black) <8 digits>  
0
SYS Counts the number of  
output pages at the  
14  
14  
14  
output pages  
at Black Mode  
in Printer  
Black Mode in the  
Printer Function  
according to its size  
(large/small).  
Large:  
Counter  
0
SYS  
Counter  
0
SYS  
Function  
Number of output  
pages of large-sized  
paper defined at 08-  
353  
Small:  
Number of output  
pages other than  
set as large-sized  
paper  
Total:  
Total number out-  
put pages of all  
paper sizes.  
322-0  
322-1  
322-2  
Counter Display of  
number of  
Large  
Small  
Total  
PRT  
(black) <8 digits>  
PRT  
(black) <8 digits>  
PRT  
(black) <8 digits>  
0
SYS Counts the number of  
output pages at the List  
14  
14  
14  
output pages  
at List Print  
Mode  
Print Mode Function  
according to its size  
(large/small).  
Large:  
Counter  
0
SYS  
Counter  
0
SYS  
Number of output  
pages of large-sized  
paper defined at 08-  
353  
Small:  
Number of output  
pages other than  
set as large-sized  
paper  
Total:  
Total number out-  
put pages of all  
paper sizes.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 106  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
FAX  
FAX  
FAX  
able  
value>  
323-0  
323-1  
323-2  
Counter Display of  
number of  
Counter  
Large  
Small  
Total  
0
SYS Counts the number of  
output pages in the FAX  
SYS  
14  
14  
14  
<8 digits>  
output pages  
in FAX Func-  
tion  
Function according to  
its size (large/small).  
Large:  
0
<8 digits>  
2
Counter  
0
SYS  
Number of output  
pages of large-sized  
paper defined at 08-  
353  
<8 digits>  
Small:  
Number of output  
pages other than  
set as large-sized  
paper  
Total:  
Total number out-  
put pages of all  
paper sizes.  
324-0  
324-1  
324-2  
Counter Display of  
number of  
Large  
Small  
Total  
PPC  
0
SYS Counts the number of  
scanning pages at the  
14  
14  
14  
(color) <8 digits>  
PPC  
(color) <8 digits>  
PPC  
(color) <8 digits>  
scanning  
Full Color Mode in the  
Copier Function  
according to its size  
(large/small).  
Large:  
Counter  
0
SYS  
pages at Full  
Color Mode in  
Copier Func-  
tion  
Counter  
0
SYS  
Number of output  
pages of large-sized  
paper defined at 08-  
353  
Small:  
Number of output  
pages other than  
set as large-sized  
paper  
Total:  
Total number out-  
put pages of all  
paper sizes.  
325-0  
325-1  
325-2  
Counter Display of  
number of  
Large  
Small  
Total  
SCN  
(color) <8 digits>  
SCN  
(color) <8 digits>  
SCN  
(color) <8 digits>  
0
SYS Counts the number of  
scanning pages at the  
14  
14  
14  
scanning  
Full Color Mode in the  
Scanning Function  
according to its size  
(large/small).  
Large:  
Counter  
0
SYS  
pages at Full  
Color Mode in  
Scanning  
Counter  
0
SYS  
Function  
Number of output  
pages of large-sized  
paper defined at 08-  
353  
Small:  
Number of output  
pages other than  
set as large-sized  
paper  
Total:  
Total number out-  
put pages of all  
paper sizes.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
0
326-0  
326-1  
326-2  
Counter Display of  
number of  
Counter  
Large  
Small  
Total  
PPC  
SYS Counts the number of  
scanning pages at the  
SYS  
14  
14  
14  
(color) <8 digits>  
PPC  
(color) <8 digits>  
PPC  
(color) <8 digits>  
scanning  
Twin Color Mode in the  
Copier Function  
according to its size  
(large/small).  
Large:  
0
pages at Twin  
Color Mode in  
Copier Func-  
tion  
Counter  
0
SYS  
Number of output  
pages of large-sized  
paper defined at 08-  
353  
Small:  
Number of output  
pages other than  
set as large-sized  
paper  
Total:  
Total number out-  
put pages of all  
paper sizes.  
327-0  
327-1  
327-2  
Counter Display of  
number of  
Large  
Small  
Total  
PPC  
(black) <8 digits>  
PPC  
(black) <8 digits>  
PPC  
(black) <8 digits>  
0
SYS Counts the number of  
scanning pages at the  
14  
14  
14  
scanning  
pages at  
Black Mode in the  
Copier Function  
according to its size  
(large/small).  
Large:  
Counter  
0
SYS  
Black Mode in  
Copier Func-  
tion  
Counter  
0
SYS  
Number of output  
pages of large-sized  
paper defined at 08-  
353  
Small:  
Number of output  
pages other than  
set as large-sized  
paper  
Total:  
Total number out-  
put pages of all  
paper sizes.  
328-0  
328-1  
328-2  
Counter Display of  
number of  
Large  
Small  
Total  
FAX  
FAX  
FAX  
0
SYS Counts the number of  
scanning pages in the  
14  
14  
14  
<8 digits>  
scanning  
pages in FAX  
FAX Function according  
to its size (large/small).  
Large:  
Counter  
0
SYS  
<8 digits>  
Function  
Counter  
0
SYS  
Number of output  
pages of large-sized  
paper defined at 08-  
353  
<8 digits>  
Small:  
Number of output  
pages other than  
set as large-sized  
paper  
Total:  
Total number out-  
put pages of all  
paper sizes.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 108  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
0
329-0  
329-1  
329-2  
Counter Display of  
number of  
Counter  
Large  
Small  
Total  
SCN  
SYS Counts the number of  
scanning pages in the  
SYS  
14  
14  
14  
(black) <8 digits>  
SCN  
(black) <8 digits>  
SCN  
(black) <8 digits>  
scanning  
pages in  
Scanning  
Function  
Scanning Function  
according to its size  
(large/small).  
Large:  
0
2
Counter  
0
SYS  
Number of output  
pages of large-sized  
paper defined at 08-  
353  
Small:  
Number of output  
pages other than  
set as large-sized  
paper  
Total:  
Total number out-  
put pages of all  
paper sizes.  
330-0  
330-1  
330-2  
Counter Display of  
number of  
Large  
Small  
Total  
FAX  
FAX  
FAX  
0
SYS Counts the number of  
transmitted pages in the  
14  
14  
14  
<8 digits>  
transmitted  
pages in FAX  
Function  
FAX Function according  
to its size (large/small).  
Large:  
Counter  
0
SYS  
<8 digits>  
Counter  
0
SYS  
Number of output  
pages of large-sized  
paper defined at 08-  
353  
<8 digits>  
Small:  
Number of output  
pages other than  
set as large-sized  
paper  
Total:  
Total number out-  
put pages of all  
paper sizes.  
331  
User  
interface  
Default setting of screen  
ALL  
0
SYS Sets the screen to be  
displayed after the  
auto-clear time has  
passed or it has recov-  
ered from the energy  
saving mode or sleep  
mode.  
1
<0-3>  
0: Copier 1: Fax  
2: Scan 3: Box  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
FAX  
FAX  
FAX  
able  
value>  
332-0  
332-1  
332-2  
Counter Display of  
number of  
Counter  
Large  
Small  
Total  
0
SYS Counts the number of  
received pages in the  
SYS  
14  
14  
14  
<8 digits>  
received  
FAX Function according  
to its size (large/small).  
Large:  
0
pages in FAX  
Function  
<8 digits>  
Counter  
0
SYS  
Number of output  
pages of large-sized  
paper defined at 08-  
353  
<8 digits>  
Small:  
Number of output  
pages other than  
set as large-sized  
paper  
Total:  
Total number out-  
put pages of all  
paper sizes.  
333-0  
333-1  
333-2  
334-0  
334-1  
334-2  
335-0  
335-1  
335-2  
342  
Counter Display of  
total number  
Large  
Small  
Total  
ALL  
0
SYS Displays the total num-  
ber of pages at Full  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
1
(color) <8 digits>  
ALL  
(color) <8 digits>  
ALL  
(color) <8 digits>  
ALL  
(color) <8 digits>  
ALL  
(color) <8 digits>  
ALL  
(color) <8 digits>  
ALL  
(black) <8 digits>  
ALL  
(black) <8 digits>  
ALL  
(black) <8 digits>  
of pages at  
Full Color  
Mode  
Color Mode in the  
Copier/Printer/Scan-  
ning Functions.  
Counter  
0
SYS  
Counter  
0
SYS  
Counter Display of  
total number  
Large  
Small  
Total  
0
SYS Displays the total num-  
ber of pages at Twin  
of pages at  
Twin Color  
Mode  
Color Mode in the  
Copier Function.  
Counter  
0
SYS  
Counter  
0
SYS  
Counter Display of  
total number  
Large  
Small  
Total  
0
SYS Displays the total num-  
ber of pages at Black  
of pages at  
Black Mode  
Mode in the Copier/  
Printer/Scanning/FAX  
Functions.  
Counter  
Counter  
User  
0
SYS  
0
SYS  
Displaying number of  
PPC  
0
SYS This setting is whether  
the number of pages of  
originals placed on the  
original glass is dis-  
played or not.  
interface original pages placed on  
original glass  
<0-1>  
0: Not displayed  
1: Displayed  
343  
User  
interface  
Black-free function  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Disabled  
1: Enabled  
1
<0-1>  
When "1" (enabled) is  
set at this code, "1"  
(black) is automatically  
set at the code 08-588.  
344  
346  
347  
Counter Count setting of tab paper  
(PM)  
Counter Count setting of large-  
sized paper (PM)  
Counter Definition setting of large-  
sized paper (PM)  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
1
M
M
M
0: Counted as 1  
1: Counted as 2  
0: Counted as 1  
1: Counted as 2  
0: A3/LD  
1: A3/LD/B4/LG/  
FOLIO/COMP  
1
1
1
<0-1>  
1
<0-1>  
1
<0-1>  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 110  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
able  
value>  
348  
349  
352  
Counter Count setting of thick paper  
(PM)  
Counter Count setting of OHP film  
(PM)  
Counter Count setting of large-  
sized paper (Fee charging  
system counter)  
1
M
M
M
0: Counted as 1  
1: Counted as 2  
0: Counted as 1  
1: Counted as 2  
0: Counted as 1  
1: Counted as 2  
2: Counted as 1  
(Mechanicalcounter  
is double counter)  
1
1
1
<0-1>  
1
<0-1>  
JPN: 0  
OTHER:  
1
2
<0-2>  
353  
356  
357  
358  
Counter Definition setting of large-  
sized paper (Fee charging  
system counter)  
Counter Counter for upper drawer  
feeding  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
0
M
M
M
M
0: A3/LD  
1: A3/LD/B4/LG/  
1
2
2
2
<0-1>  
FOLIO/COMP/8k  
0
Counts the number of  
sheets fed from upper  
drawer  
Counts the number of  
sheets fed from lower  
drawer  
Counts the number of  
sheets fed from bypass  
feed  
Counts the number of  
sheets fed from LCF  
<8 digits>  
Counter Counter for lower drawer  
feeding  
0
<8 digits>  
Counter Counter for bypass feeding  
Counter Counter for LCF feeding  
0
<8 digits>  
359  
360  
ALL  
ALL  
0
M
M
2
2
<8 digits>  
Counter Counter for PFP upper  
drawer feeding  
0
Counts the number of  
sheets fed from PFP  
upper drawer  
<8 digits>  
370  
372  
Counter Counter for PFP lower  
drawer feeding  
ALL  
ALL  
0
M
M
Counts the number of  
sheets fed from PFP  
lower drawer  
Counts the number of  
output pages of duplex  
printing.  
2
2
<8 digits>  
Counter Counter for ADU  
0
<8 digits>  
374  
375  
Counter Counter for RADF  
ALL  
ALL  
0
SYS Counts the number of  
originals fed from RADF  
2
1
<8 digits>  
Refer to  
content  
Mainte- Setting value of PM time  
M
<Default>  
e-STUDIO281c  
nance  
counter display/0 clearing  
<8 digits>  
JPN:0  
UC, EUR: 315,000  
e-STUDIO351c  
JPN:0  
UC, EUR: 315,000  
e-STUDIO451c  
JPN: 0  
UC, EUR: 315,000  
376  
381  
Mainte- Current value of PM time  
nance counter  
Counter Setting for counter installed  
externally  
ALL  
ALL  
0
M
M
Counts the drum driving  
time (main motor ON).  
Selects the job to count  
up for the external  
counter.  
1
1
<8 digits>  
1
<0-7>  
0: Not selected  
1: Copier  
2: FAX  
3: Copier/FAX  
4: Printer  
5: Copier/Printer  
6: Printer/FAX  
7: Copier/Printer/FAX  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
PPC  
FAX  
SCN  
PRT  
ALL  
able  
value>  
390  
391  
392  
393  
398  
Counter Number of errors in HDD  
(Copying)  
Counter Number of errors in HDD  
(FAX)  
Counter Number of errors in HDD  
(Scanning)  
Counter Number of errors in HDD  
(Printer)  
0
SYS The number of error is  
reset at HDD format-  
2
2
2
2
2
<8 digits>  
ting.  
0
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
M
<8 digits>  
0
<8 digits>  
0
<8 digits>  
Laser  
Number of polygonal motor  
rotational speed switching  
0
Counts the number of  
time the polygonal  
motor has switched its  
rotational speed  
<8 digits>  
between normal rota-  
tion and standby rota-  
tion  
399  
400  
Laser  
Fuser  
Accumulated time of polyg-  
onal motor at normal rota-  
tion  
ALL  
ALL  
0
M
M
Accumulates the time  
the polygonal motor has  
rotated at normal rota-  
tion.  
0: No error  
1: C411 2: C412  
2
1
<8 digits>  
Fuser unit error status  
counter  
0
<0-29>  
3: C433 4: -  
5: C445 6: C446  
7: C447 8: -  
9: C449 10: C475  
11: C471 12: C472  
13: -  
14: -  
15: C480 16: -  
17: C490 18: -  
19: C449 20: -  
21: C449 22: C449  
23: C449 24: C447  
25: C449 26: -  
27: C449 28: -  
29: C449  
409  
Fuser  
Fuser roller temperature at  
a energy saver mode  
(Center thermistor)  
ALL  
13  
<0-16>  
M
0: OFF 1: 40°C  
2: 45°C 3: 50°C  
4: 55°C 5: 60°C  
6: 65°C 7: 70°C  
8: 75°C 9: 80°C  
10: 85°C 11: 90°C  
12: 95°C 13: 100°C  
14: 105°C 15: 110°C  
16:115°C  
1
410-0  
410-1  
Fuser  
Fuser  
Fuser roller temperature  
during printing (Center  
thermistor/Plain paper)  
ALL  
(black)  
12  
<0-16>  
M
M
0: 120°C 1: 125°C  
2: 130°C 3: 135°C  
4: 140°C 5: 145°C  
6: 150°C 7: 155°C  
8: 160°C 9: 165°C  
10: 170°C 11: 175°C  
12: 180°C 13: 185°C  
14: 190°C 15: 195°C  
16: 200°C  
4
4
ALL  
(color)  
11  
<0-16>  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 112  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
411  
Fuser  
Fuser  
Fuser  
Fuser roller temperature on  
standby (Center ther-  
mistor)  
ALL  
12  
<0-16>  
M
0: 120°C 1: 125°C  
2: 130°C 3: 135°C  
4: 140°C 5: 145°C  
6: 150°C 7: 155°C  
8: 160°C 9: 165°C  
10: 170°C 11: 175°C  
12: 180°C 13: 185°C  
14: 190°C 15: 195°C  
16: 200°C  
0: 120°C 1: 125°C  
2: 130°C 3: 135°C  
4: 140°C 5: 145°C  
6: 150°C 7: 155°C  
8: 160°C 9: 165°C  
10: 170°C 11: 175°C  
12: 180°C 13: 185°C  
14: 190°C 15: 195°C  
16: 200°C  
0: 120°C 1: 125°C  
2: 130°C 3: 135°C  
4: 140°C 5: 145°C  
6: 150°C 7: 155°C  
8: 160°C 9: 165°C  
10: 170°C 11: 175°C  
12: 180°C 13: 185°C  
14: 190°C 15: 195°C  
16: 200°C  
1
2
412-0  
412-1  
Fuser roller temperature  
during printing  
(Center thermistor/Thick  
ALL  
(black)  
12  
<0-16>  
M
M
4
4
paper 3)  
ALL  
(color)  
12  
<0-16>  
413-0  
413-1  
Fuser roller temperature  
during printing  
(Center thermistor/Thick  
paper 1)  
ALL  
(black)  
12  
<0-16>  
M
M
4
4
ALL  
(color)  
12  
<0-16>  
415-0  
Fuser  
Fuser  
Period of time retaining  
print-start temperature  
(Thick paper 3)  
ALL  
(black)  
3
M
0: Invalid 1: 1 sec.  
2: 2 sec 3: 3 sec  
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.  
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.  
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.  
10: 10 sec.  
0: 120°C 1: 125°C  
2: 130°C 3: 135°C  
4: 140°C 5: 145°C  
6: 150°C 7: 155°C  
8: 160°C 9: 165°C  
10: 170°C 11: 175°C  
12: Invalid  
4
<0-10>  
415-1  
416  
ALL  
(color)  
2
M
M
4
1
<0-10>  
Temperature setting to  
start solving abnormality  
(Center/Side thermistor/  
Thick paper 3)  
ALL  
9
<0-12>  
417-0  
417-1  
Fuser  
Pre-running time for first  
printing (Thick paper 3)  
ALL  
(black)  
16  
<0-16>  
M
M
0: Invalid  
2: 2 sec.  
4: 4 sec.  
6: 6 sec.  
8: 8 sec.  
10: 12 sec. 11: 14 sec.  
12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec.  
14: 20 sec. 15: 25 sec.  
16: 30 sec.  
1: 0 sec.  
3: 3 sec.  
5: 5 sec.  
7: 7 sec.  
9: 10 sec.  
4
4
ALL  
(color)  
0
<0-16>  
422  
Fuser  
Fuser roller temperature  
setting at the end of pre-  
running during warming-up  
ALL  
4
M
0: 120°C 1: 125°C  
2: 130°C 3: 135°C  
4: 140°C 5: 145°C  
6: 150°C 7: 155°C  
8: 160°C 9: 165°C  
10: 170°C 11: 175°C  
12: 180°C 13: 185°C  
14: 190°C 15: 195°C  
16: 200°C  
1
<0-16>  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
428-0  
Fuser  
Period of time retaining  
print-start temperature  
(Thick paper 2)  
3
M
0: Invalid  
1: 1 sec.  
3: 3 sec.  
5: 5 sec.  
7: 7 sec.  
9: 9 sec.  
4
ALL  
(black)  
<0-10>  
2: 2 sec.  
4: 4 sec.  
6: 6 sec.  
8: 8 sec.  
10: 10 sec.  
428-1  
2
M
4
ALL  
(color)  
<0-10>  
430  
431  
Fuser  
Transport motor speed  
deceleration (OHP film)  
Transport motor speed  
deceleration  
ALL  
(color)  
1
M
M
Sets deceleration ratio  
of paper transport  
speed.  
1
1
<0-3>  
1
<0-3>  
ALL  
(color)  
0: 1/1  
2: 1/3  
1: 1/2  
3: 1/4  
(Thick paper 2)  
432  
436  
Transport motor speed  
deceleration  
(Thick paper 3)  
Temperature setting to  
start solving abnormal-  
ity(Center/Side thermistor/  
Thick paper2)  
2
M
M
1
1
ALL  
(color)  
<0-3>  
Fuser  
Fuser  
ALL  
9
0: 120°C 1: 125°C  
2: 130°C 3: 135°C  
4: 140°C 5: 145°C  
6: 150°C 7: 155°C  
8: 160°C 9: 165°C  
10: 170°C 11: 175°C  
12: Invalid  
0: 120°C 1: 125°C  
2: 130°C 3: 135°C  
4: 140°C 5: 145°C  
6: 150°C 7: 155°C  
8: 160°C 9: 165°C  
10: 170°C 11: 175°C  
12: 180°C 13: 185°C  
14: 190°C 15: 195°C  
16: 200°C  
<0-12>  
437-0  
437-1  
Fuser roller temperature  
during printing  
(Center thermistor /Thick  
paper 2)  
ALL  
(black)  
12  
<0-16>  
M
M
4
4
ALL  
(color)  
12  
<0-16>  
438-0  
438-1  
Fuser  
Fuser roller temperature  
during printing (Center  
thermistor/OHP film)  
ALL  
(black)  
12  
<0-16>  
M
M
0: 120°C 1: 125°C  
2: 130°C 3: 135°C  
4: 140°C 5: 145°C  
6: 150°C 7: 155°C  
8: 160°C 9: 165°C  
10: 170°C 11: 175°C  
12: 180°C 13: 185°C  
14: 190°C 15: 195°C  
16: 200°C  
4
4
ALL  
(color)  
10  
<0-16>  
439-0  
439-1  
Fuser  
Pre-running time for first  
printing (Thick paper 2)  
ALL  
(black)  
14  
<0-16>  
M
M
0: Invalid 1: 0 sec.  
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.  
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.  
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.  
8: 8 sec. 9: 10 sec.  
10: 12 sec.  
11: 14 sec.  
12: 16 sec.  
13: 18 sec.  
4
4
ALL  
(color)  
0
<0-16>  
14: 20 sec.  
15: 25 sec.  
16: 30 sec.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 114  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
440-0  
Fuser  
Fuser  
Paper  
Pre-running time for first  
printing  
(Plain paper/Low tempera-  
ture environment)  
ALL  
(black)  
12  
<0-16>  
M
0: Invalid 1: 0 sec.  
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.  
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.  
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.  
8: 8 sec. 9: 10 sec.  
10: 12 sec.  
11: 14 sec.  
12: 16 sec.  
13: 18 sec.  
14: 20 sec.  
4
2
440-1  
441-0  
ALL  
(color)  
0
M
M
4
4
<0-16>  
15: 25 sec.  
16: 30 sec.  
Pre-running time for first  
printing (Thick paper 1)  
ALL  
(black)  
9
0: Invalid 1: 0 sec.  
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.  
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.  
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.  
8: 8 sec. 9: 10 sec.  
10: 12 sec.  
11: 14 sec.  
12: 16 sec.  
13: 18 sec.  
14: 20 sec.  
15: 25 sec.  
16: 30 sec.  
0: Enabled  
1: Disabled  
0: 0°C 1: 5°C  
2: 9°C 3: 10°C  
4: 12°C 5: 14°C  
6: 15°C 7: 16°C  
8: 17°C 9: 18°C  
10: 19°C 11: 20°C  
<0-16>  
441-1  
ALL  
(color)  
5
M
4
<0-16>  
449  
458  
Switching for incorrect  
ALL  
ALL  
0
M
M
1
1
feeding paper size jam detection  
Fuser  
<0-1>  
6
<0-11>  
Threshold for warming-up  
temperature(Low-tempera-  
ture environment)  
459  
Fuser  
Warming-up time(Low-tem-  
perature environment)  
ALL  
7
M
0: No warming-up  
1: 30 sec. 2: 40 sec.  
3: 50 sec. 4: 60 sec.  
5: 70 sec. 6: 80 sec.  
7: 90 sec.  
1
<0-11>  
8: 100 sec.  
9: 120 sec.  
10: 180 sec.  
11: 300 sec.  
460  
461  
Fuser  
Fuser  
Threshold of temperature  
for pre-running time for first  
printing(Low-temperature  
environment)  
ALL  
ALL  
9
M
M
0: 0°C 1: 5°C  
2: 9°C 3: 10°C  
4: 12°C 5: 14°C  
6: 15°C 7: 16°C  
8: 17°C 9: 18°C  
10: 19°C 11: 20°C  
0: Invalid (always)  
1: 0 min. 2: 0.5 min.  
3: 1 min. 4: 2 min.  
5: 3 min. 6: 5 min.  
7: 7 min. 8: 10 min.  
9: 15 min. 10: 30 min.  
11: 60 min.  
1
1
<0-11>  
Pre-running time for first  
printing(Plain paper/Low-  
temperature environment)  
8
<0-11>  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
462  
RADF  
Setting for switchback  
operation in mixed-size  
copying using RADF  
ALL  
0
M
This setting is whether  
the original length is  
detected or not by  
transporting without  
scanning in reverse  
when A4-R/FOLIO  
paper or LT-R/LG paper  
is detected in a mixed-  
size copying.  
1
<0-2>  
0: Disabled -  
AMS:  
A series - Judges as  
A4-R without trans-  
porting in reverse  
with no scanning.  
LT series - Judges  
whether it is LT-R or  
LG by its length  
without transporting  
in reverse with no  
scanning.  
APS:  
A series - Judges  
whether it is A4-R or  
FOLIO without  
transporting in  
reverse with no  
scanning.  
LT series - Judges  
whether it is LT-R or  
LG without trans-  
porting in reverse  
with no scanning.  
1: Enable 1  
AMS:  
A series - Judges  
whether it is A4-R or  
FOLIO by transport-  
ing without scanning  
in reverse to detect  
its length.  
LT series - Judges  
whether it is LT-R or  
LG by transporting  
without scanning in  
reverse to detect its  
length.  
APS:  
The same as that of  
APS in 0: Disabled.  
2: Enable 2  
AMS/APS:  
The same as that of  
AMS in 1: Enable 1.  
463-0  
463-1  
Paper  
feeding number set-  
ting (upper  
Feeding retry Plain  
ALL  
ALL  
5
M
M
Sets the number of  
times of the feeding  
retry from the upper  
drawer.  
4
4
paper  
<0-5>  
5
<0-5>  
Others  
drawer)  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 116  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
able  
value>  
464-0  
464-1  
465-0  
465-1  
466-0  
466-1  
467-0  
467-1  
468-0  
468-1  
470  
Paper  
feeding number set-  
Feeding retry Plain  
5
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Sets the number of  
times of the feeding  
retry from the lower  
drawer.  
4
4
paper  
Others  
<0-5>  
5
<0-5>  
5
<0-5>  
5
<0-5>  
5
<0-5>  
5
<0-5>  
5
<0-5>  
5
<0-5>  
5
ting (lower  
drawer)  
2
Paper  
feeding number set-  
ting (PFP  
Feeding retry Plain  
Sets the number of  
times of the feeding  
retry from the PFP  
upper drawer.  
4
paper  
Others  
4
upper drawer)  
Paper  
feeding number set-  
ting (PFP  
Feeding retry Plain  
Sets the number of  
times of the feeding  
retry from the PFP  
lower drawer.  
4
paper  
Others  
4
lower drawer)  
Paper  
Feeding retry Plain  
Sets the number of  
times of the feeding  
retry from the bypass  
tray.  
4
feeding number set-  
ting (bypass  
feed)  
paper  
Others  
4
Paper  
feeding number set-  
ting (LCF)  
Feeding retry Plain  
Sets the number of  
times of the feeding  
retry from the LCF.  
4
paper  
Others  
<0-5>  
5
<0-5>  
457/305  
<148-  
4
Paper  
Paper size (305x457 mm)  
feeding feeding/widthwise direction  
10  
457/105-  
305>  
471  
478  
Paper  
Paper size (Post card)  
ALL  
ALL  
148/100  
<148-  
432/100-  
297>  
M
M
*
Post card is sup-  
ported only for JPN  
model.  
10  
1
feeding feeding/widthwise direction  
Laser  
Laser  
Judged number of polygo-  
nal motor rotation error  
(Normal rotation)  
0
Displays the error  
[CA10] when the set  
number of rotation error  
has been detected.  
0: 2 times  
<0-1>  
1: 12 times  
479  
480  
Judged number of polygo-  
nal motor rotation error (At  
acceleration/deceleration)  
ALL  
0
M
0: Waiting time for  
polygonal motor  
rotation overshoot-  
ing 0.6 sec.  
1: Waiting time for  
polygonal motor  
rotation overshoot-  
ing 2.2 sec.  
1
1
<0-1>  
Paper  
feeding source  
Default setting of paper  
PPC  
0
SYS 0: A4/LT  
1: LCF  
<0-5>  
2: Upper drawer  
3: Lower drawer  
4: PFP upper drawer  
5: PFP lower drawer  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
481  
Paper  
feeding source  
Automatic change of paper  
PPC  
1
SYS Sets whether or not  
changing the drawer  
automatically to the  
other drawer with the  
paper of the same size  
when paper in the  
selected drawer has run  
out.  
1
<0-2>  
0: OFF  
1: ON (Changes to the  
drawer with the  
same paper direc-  
tion and size: ex. A4  
to A4)  
2: ON (Changes to the  
drawer with the  
same paper size.  
Paper with the dif-  
ferent direction is  
acceptable as long  
as the size is the  
same: ex., A4 to A4-  
R, LT-R to LT. “1” is  
applied when the  
staple/holepunch is  
specified.)  
482  
483  
Paper  
feeding  
Laser  
Feeding retry setting  
ALL  
ALL  
0
M
0: ON  
1: OFF  
1
1
<0-1>  
0
<0-2>  
Pre-running rotation of  
polygonal motor  
SYS Sets whether or not  
switching the polygonal  
motor from the standby  
rotation to the normal  
rotation when the origi-  
nal is set on the RADF  
or the platen cover is  
opened.  
0: Valid (when using  
RADF and the origi-  
nal is set manually)  
1: Invalid  
2: Valid (when using  
RADF only)  
484  
485  
Laser  
Laser  
Polygonal motor rotational  
status switching at the Auto  
Clear Mode  
ALL  
ALL  
0
SYS Sets whether or not  
switching the polygonal  
motor from the normal  
rotation to the standby  
rotation at the Auto  
Clear Mode.  
0: Valid  
1: Invalid  
SYS Sets the rotational sta-  
tus of polygonal motor  
on standby.  
1
1
<0-1>  
Rotational status of polygo-  
nal motor on standby  
0
<0-1>  
0: Rotated (The rota-  
tional speed is set at  
08-490.)  
1: Stopped  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 118  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
486  
Laser  
Timing of auto-clearing of  
polygonal motor pre-run-  
ning rotation  
ALL  
0
SYS Switches the polygonal  
motor to the standby  
rotation when a certain  
period of time has  
passed from the pre-  
running. At this code,  
the period to switch the  
status to the standby  
rotation is set.  
1
<0-2>  
2
0: 15 sec.  
1: 30 sec.  
2: 45 sec.  
*
This setting is effec-  
tive when “0” or “2”  
is set at 08-483.  
487  
Transfer Selection of performing the  
2nd transfer roller cleaning  
(Bypass feed)  
ALL  
0
M
0: Performs only at no  
paper size is desig-  
nated  
1
<0-1>  
1: Performsregardless  
of designation of  
paper size  
488  
489  
Laser  
Laser  
Setting of polygonal motor  
type  
ALL  
ALL  
3
M
M
Set the type of polygo-  
nal motor.  
2: 2 clock type  
3: 3 clock type  
0: 38090.55rpm  
1: 35000rpm  
2: 30000rpm  
3: 25000rpm  
4: 20000rpm  
5: 10000rpm  
1
1
<2-3>  
Polygonal motor rotation  
number on standby  
5
<0-5>  
490  
497  
Laser  
Polygonal motor rotation in  
the energy saving mode  
ALL  
0
M
M
0: Stopped  
1: 10000rpm.  
Sets the speed for color  
printing.  
1
1
<0-1>  
0
<0-1>  
General Speed switching for color  
printing  
ALL  
(color)  
0: 11 pages/minute  
1: 6 pages/minute  
502  
Image  
Error diffusion and dither  
setting at photo mode  
PPC  
(black)  
0
SYS Sets the image repro-  
duction method at  
photo mode.  
1
<0-1>  
0: Error diffusion  
1: Dither  
503  
511  
User  
Default setting of density  
PPC  
(black)  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Automatic  
1: Manual (Center)  
1
1
4
4
interface adjustment  
Main  
charger cleaning setting  
Fuser  
<0-1>  
1
<0-1>  
16  
Main charger wire auto-  
M
M
M
0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
526-0  
526-1  
Pre-running time for first  
printing  
(OHP film)  
ALL  
(black)  
ALL  
(color)  
0: Invalid  
2: 2 sec.  
4: 4 sec.  
6: 6 sec.  
8: 8 sec.  
10: 12 sec.  
11: 14 sec.  
12: 16 sec.  
13: 18 sec.  
14: 20 sec.  
15: 25 sec.  
16: 30 sec.  
1: 0 sec.  
3: 3 sec.  
5: 5 sec.  
7: 7 sec.  
9: 10 sec.  
<0-16>  
0
<0-16>  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
544  
Image  
Environment correction  
ALL  
1
M
Sets whether or not cor-  
recting the 2nd transfer  
roller bias depending on  
the environment.  
0: Invalid  
1
1
1
control control of 2nd transfer  
<0-1>  
roller bias  
1: Valid  
545  
546  
Image  
Transfer belt life correction  
ALL  
ALL  
1
M
M
Sets whether or not cor-  
recting the 2nd transfer  
roller bias depending on  
the transfer belt life.  
0: Invalid  
control of 2nd transfer roller bias  
<0-1>  
1: Valid  
Image  
2nd transfer roller life cor-  
1
Sets whether or not cor-  
recting the 2nd transfer  
roller bias depending on  
the 2nd transfer roller  
life.  
control rection of 2nd transfer  
roller bias  
<0-1>  
0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
548  
549  
Transfer Setting of 2nd transfer  
roller bias table (for each  
destination/paper thick-  
ness)  
ALL  
ALL  
EUR:0  
UC:1  
JPN:2  
<0-2>  
M
M
0:80 g/m2 (21.3 lb.)/  
EUR  
1: 75 g/m2 (20 lb.)/UC  
2: 64 g/m2 (17.1 lb.)/  
JPN  
Sets whether or not  
performing the open-  
loop control 1.The  
open-loop control 1 is  
performed in advance  
of the closed-loop con-  
trol.  
1
1
Image  
Image quality control/open-  
1
control loop control 1  
<0-1>  
0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
550  
551  
Image  
Image  
Default setting of Original  
mode  
PPC  
(black)  
0
SYS 0: Text/Photo  
1: Photo  
1
1
<0-3>  
2: Text  
3: Gray Scale  
Image quality control/open-  
ALL  
1
M
Sets whether or not  
performing the open-  
loop control 2.The  
open-loop control 2 is  
performed before or  
during printing.  
control loop control 2  
<0-1>  
0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
552  
Image  
control  
Drum life correction control  
ALL  
1
M
Sets whether or not cor-  
recting the drum volt-  
age depending on the  
drum life in open-loop  
control.  
1
<0-1>  
0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 120  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
553  
Image  
control tion control  
Drum temperature correc-  
ALL  
1
M
Sets whether or not cor-  
recting the drum volt-  
age depending on the  
drum surface tempera-  
ture in open-loop con-  
trol.  
1
<0-1>  
2
0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
554  
555  
Image  
Image quality open-loop  
ALL  
ALL  
1
M
M
Sets whether or not  
deciding the initial value  
of contrast voltage in  
open-loop control.  
0: Invalid  
1
1
control control/Contrast voltage  
initial value  
<0-1>  
1: Valid  
Image  
Drum life correction of  
1
Sets whether or not cor-  
recting the laser power  
depending on the drum  
life when the laser  
power initial value is set  
in open-loop control.  
0: Invalid  
control laser power initial value  
<0-1>  
1: Valid  
556  
Image  
Image quality closed-loop  
ALL  
1
M
Sets whether or not cor-  
recting the contrast volt-  
age in closed-loop  
control.  
1
control control/Contrast voltage  
<0-1>  
0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
557  
558  
Image  
Image quality closed-loop  
ALL  
ALL  
1
M
M
Sets whether or not cor-  
recting the laser power  
in closed-loop control.  
0: Invalid  
1
1
control control/Laser power  
<0-1>  
1: Valid  
Image  
Contrast voltage/Correc-  
1
Sets whether or not  
switching the correc-  
tion amount once at  
contrast voltage correc-  
tion depending on the  
environment.  
control tion gain environment set-  
<0-1>  
ting  
0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
559  
Image  
Image quality closed-loop  
ALL  
(color)  
1
M
Sets whether perform-  
ing closed-loop control  
automatically at power-  
ON when the fuser  
roller temperature  
becomes below the  
specified level.  
1
control control automatic start-up/  
At power-ON  
<0-2>  
0: Invalid  
1: Valid (at mode 1)  
2: Valid (at mode 2)  
560  
Imagel Process switching for  
image smoothing (Text/  
Photo)  
PPC  
(black)  
1
M
Sets whether or not  
performing a smooth-  
ing process (primary  
scanning direction,  
2,400 dpi or equiva-  
lent).  
1
<0-1>  
0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
561  
Image  
Image  
Process switching for  
image smoothing (Photo)  
PPC  
(black)  
0
M
Sets whether or not  
performing a smooth-  
ing process (primary  
scanning direction,  
2,400 dpi or equiva-  
lent).  
1
<0-1>  
562  
565  
Process switching for  
image smoothing (Text)  
PPC  
(black)  
1
M
M
1
<0-1>  
0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
Image  
Image quality closed-loop  
ALL  
(color)  
1
Sets whether or not  
performing closed-loop  
control automatically  
when the relative  
humidity becomes  
below the specified  
level from the previous  
control.  
1
control control automatic start-up/  
Relative humidity variation  
<0-2>  
0: Invalid  
1: Valid (at mode 1)  
2: Valid (at mode 2)  
566  
Image  
Image quality closed-loop  
ALL  
(color)  
1
M
Sets whether or not  
performing closed-loop  
control automatically  
when the equipment  
has not been used for a  
specified period of time.  
0: Invalid  
1
control control automatic start-up/  
Period of time unattended  
<0-2>  
1: Valid (at mode 1)  
2: Valid (at mode 2)  
567  
Image  
Image quality closed-loop  
ALL  
(color)  
2
M
Sets whether or not  
performing closed-loop  
control automatically  
when the specified  
number of sheets has  
been printed out from  
the previous control.  
0: Invalid  
1
control control automatic start-up/  
<0-2>  
Accumulated print volume  
1: Valid (at mode 1)  
2: Valid (at mode 2)  
568  
Image  
Image quality closed-loop  
ALL  
(color)  
2
M
Sets whether or not  
performing closed-loop  
control automatically  
when recovered from  
Toner empty”.  
1
control control automatic start-up/  
<0-2>  
When recovered from  
Toner empty”  
0: Invalid  
1: Valid (at mode 1)  
2: Valid (at mode 2)  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 122  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
569  
Image  
Image quality closed-loop  
ALL  
(color)  
8
M
Sets the fuser roller  
temperature to perform  
closed-loop control  
when “1” or “2” (valid) is  
set in 08-559.  
1
control control automatic start-up/  
<0-20>  
Temperature setting of  
fuser roller at power-ON  
2
0: 20°C 1: 25°C  
2: 30°C 3: 35°C  
4: 40°C 5: 45°C  
6: 50°C 7: 55°C  
8: 60°C 9: 65°C  
10: 70°C 11: 75°C  
12: 80°C 13: 85°C  
14: 90°C 15: 95°C  
16: 100°C 17: 105°C  
18: 110°C 19: 115°C  
20: 120°C  
570  
Image  
Image quality closed-loop  
ALL  
(color)  
4
M
Sets the relative humid-  
ity difference to per-  
form the closed-loop  
control when “1” or “2”  
(valid) is set in 08-565.  
1
control control automatic start-up/  
Relative humidity differ-  
ence setting  
<0-6>  
0: 0%  
1: 5%  
3: 15%  
5: 25%  
2: 10%  
4: 20%  
6: 30%  
571  
572  
Image  
Image quality closed-loop  
ALL  
(color)  
4
M
M
Sets the period of time  
unattended to perform  
closed-loop control  
when “1” or “2” (valid) is  
set in 08-566.  
1
1
control control automatic start-up/  
Setting of period of time  
unattended  
<0-24>  
Setting value x 1 (hour)  
Image  
Image quality closed-loop  
ALL  
(color)  
10  
<0-30>  
Sets the number of  
accumulated print vol-  
ume to perform closed-  
loop control when “1” or  
“2” (valid) is set in 08-  
567.  
control control automatic start-up/  
Setting of accumulated  
print volume  
Setting value x 100  
(pages)  
573  
574  
575  
576  
Image  
control count (Y)  
Display/0 clearing  
Abnormality detection  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
0
M
M
M
M
Counts the abnormality  
detection of image qual-  
ity control. Accumulat-  
ing total of [CE10],  
1
1
1
1
<0-16>  
[CE20] and [CE40]  
Image  
control count (M)  
Display/0 clearing  
Abnormality detection  
0
Counts the abnormality  
detection of image qual-  
ity control. Accumulat-  
ing total of [CE10],  
<0-16>  
[CE20] and [CE40]  
Image  
control count (C)  
Display/0 clearing  
Abnormality detection  
0
Counts the abnormality  
detection of image qual-  
ity control. Accumulat-  
ing total of [CE10],  
<0-16>  
[CE20] and [CE40]  
Image  
control count (K)  
Display/0 clearing  
Abnormality detection  
0
Counts the abnormality  
detection of image qual-  
ity control. Accumulat-  
ing total of [CE10],  
<0-16>  
[CE20] and [CE40]  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
583-0  
Fuser  
Pre-running  
time at power- motor  
ON and ready speed 1/1  
status  
Transport  
ALL  
1
M
0: 3 sec.  
2: 9 sec.  
4: 15 sec. 5: 18 sec.  
6: 21 sec. 7: 24 sec.  
8: 27 sec. 9: 30 sec.  
10: 33 sec.  
1: 6 sec.  
3: 12 sec.  
4
4
4
1
1
<0-10>  
583-1  
583-2  
584  
Transport  
motor  
speed 1/2  
Transport  
motor  
speed 1/3  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
4
M
M
M
<0-10>  
7
<0-10>  
Fuser  
User  
Transport motor speed of  
pre-running at ready status  
0
0: Decelerating to 1/1  
1: Decelerating to 1/2  
2: Decelerating to 1/3  
<0-2>  
585  
Default setting of Original  
PPC  
(color)  
0
SYS 0: Text/Photo  
1: Text  
interface mode  
<0-4>  
2: Printed image  
3: Photo  
4: Map  
586  
Image  
Image quality switching  
when selecting the Image  
Smoothing Mode  
PPC  
(black)  
0
SYS Selects the method of  
image processing when  
the Image Smoothing is  
selected in the original  
modes.  
1
<0-1>  
0: Processing for  
Image Smoothing  
1: Processing when  
judging as black in  
the ACS Mode  
587  
588  
User  
interface mode  
User  
interface mode  
Default setting of Density  
PPC  
(color)  
PPC  
1
SYS 0: Automatic  
1: Manual (Center)  
SYS 0: Auto color  
1: Black  
1
1
<0-1>  
1
<0-2>  
Default setting of Color  
2: Full color  
589  
Image  
Image quality switching  
when judging as black in  
the ACS Mode  
PPC  
(black)  
1
SYS Selects the method of  
image processing when  
the original is judged as  
black in the ACS Mode.  
0: Processing for  
1
<0-1>  
Image Smoothing  
1: Processing when  
judging as black in  
the ACS Mode  
595  
Image  
Scanning operation switch- PPC  
ing at automatic calibration (color)  
0
SYS 0: Scanning color/  
black integrated pat-  
tern  
1
<0-1>  
1: Scanning color pat-  
tern only  
597  
602  
Image  
User  
Gamma correction table all  
clearing  
PRT  
(color)  
-
SYS Initializes the status of  
automatic gamma  
adjustment in color  
printing.  
SYS 0: OFF  
1: ON  
3
1
Screen setting for auto-  
ALL  
EUR:0  
UC:1  
JPN:1  
interface matic energy saver/auto-  
matic power OFF  
<0-1>  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 124  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
603  
User  
Setting for automatic  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Single-sided to  
1
interface duplexing mode  
<0-3>  
duplex copying  
2: Two-sided to duplex  
copying  
2
3: User selection  
604  
User  
interface AMS  
Default setting for APS/  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: APS (Automatic  
Paper Selection)  
1: AMS (Automatic  
Magnification Selec-  
tion)  
1
<0-2>  
2: Not selected  
605  
607  
User  
Centering printing of pri-  
PPC  
PPC  
1
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
1
1
interface mary/secondary direction  
at AMS  
User  
<0-1>  
Default setting of RADF  
0
SYS 0: Continuous feeding  
(by pressing the  
interface mode  
<0-1>  
[START] button)  
1: Single feeding  
(by setting original  
on the tray)  
609-0  
609-1  
609-2  
609-3  
609-4  
610  
Image  
Binarizing  
Step -2  
Step -1  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
PPC  
88  
<0-255>  
108  
<0-255>  
148  
<0-255>  
178  
<0-255>  
SYS Sets the binarizing level  
of each step.  
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
level setting  
(When judg-  
ing as black in  
the ACS  
When the value  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
increases, the image  
becomes darker. When  
the value decreases,  
the image becomes  
lighter.  
Step 0  
(center)  
Step +1  
Mode)  
*
Refer to 08-268.  
Step +2  
208  
<0-255>  
User  
interface  
User  
Key touch sound of control  
panel  
1
SYS 0: OFF  
1: ON  
<0-1>  
611  
Book type original priority  
0
SYS 0: Left page to right  
<0-1>  
page  
interface  
1: Right page to left  
page  
612  
613  
General Summer time mode  
User Paper size selection for  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Not summer time  
1: Summer time  
SYS Press the icon on the  
LCD to select the size.  
1
9
<0-1>  
PPC EUR:  
FOLIO  
UC:  
COMP  
JPN:  
A5-R  
interface [OTHER] button  
614  
Network Local I/F time-out period  
ALL  
6
SYS Sets the period of time  
when the job is judged  
as completed in local I/  
F printing (USB or par-  
allel).  
1
<1-50>  
1: 1.0 sec.  
2: 1.5 sec.  
50: 25.5 sec.  
(in increments of 0.5  
sec.)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
-
615  
General Size information of main  
memory and page memory  
ALL  
SYS Displays the sizes of  
the main memory and  
page memory. Enables  
to check if each mem-  
ory is properly recog-  
nized.  
SYS Sets the counting  
method in Twin Color  
Mode with the Limita-  
tion Function.  
2
1
1
616  
Counter Counting method in Twin  
Color Mode  
ALL  
JPN: 1  
UC: 0  
EUR: 0  
(Limitation Function)  
<0-1>  
0: Count as color  
1: Count as black  
617  
User  
Print setting without  
ALL  
1
SYS 0: Printed forcibly  
1: Not printed  
interface department code  
<0-2>  
2: Deleted forcibly  
618  
619  
User  
Default setting of RADF  
PPC  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Same size originals  
1: Mixed size originals  
1
1
interface original size  
Paper  
feeding of bypass feeding  
<0-1>  
4
<0-10>  
Time lag before auto-start  
SYS Sets the time taken to  
add paper feeding  
when paper in the  
bypass tray has run out  
during the bypass feed  
copying.  
0: Paper is not drawn  
in unless the  
[START] button is  
pressed.  
1-10: Setting value x  
0.5sec.  
620  
621  
622  
623  
624  
625  
User  
interface  
Department management  
setting (Copier)  
Department management  
setting (FAX)  
PPC  
FAX  
PRT  
SCN  
PRT  
PPC  
1
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
1
1
1
1
1
1
<0-1>  
User  
interface  
1
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
<0-1>  
User  
interface  
User  
interface  
Department management  
setting (Printer)  
1
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
<0-1>  
Department management  
setting (Scanner)  
1
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
<0-1>  
User  
Department management  
1
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
interface setting (List print)  
User  
interface mode during RADF jam-  
ming  
<0-1>  
0
<0-1>  
Blank copying prevention  
SYS 0: OFF  
1: ON (Start printing  
when the scanning  
of each page is fin-  
ished)  
627  
628  
629  
632  
User  
Rotation printing at the  
ALL  
PPC  
ALL  
PPC  
0
SYS 0: Not rotating  
1: Rotating  
SYS 0: Automatic  
1: Portrait  
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
SYS Sets the disclosing level  
of automatic calibration.  
0: Service technician  
1: Administrator  
1
1
1
1
interface nonsorting  
User  
interface image  
User  
interface setting  
User  
interface closure level  
<0-1>  
0
<0-1>  
0
<0-1>  
1
<0-2>  
Direction priority of original  
Department management  
Automatic calibration dis-  
2: User  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 126  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
633  
Data  
overwrite call  
Releasing F200 service  
0
0: Not used  
1: Board installed  
ALL  
SYS  
1
<0-2>  
kit  
2: Service call  
634  
636  
User  
Inner receiving tray priority  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Normal  
1: Inner receiving tray  
SYS 0: ON  
1: OFF  
1
1
2
interface at Non-sort Mode  
User  
interface shift copying (linkage of  
<0-1>  
0
<0-1>  
Width setting for image  
PPC  
front side and back side)  
638  
General Time differences  
ALL  
EUR: 24 SYS 0: +12.0h 1: +11.5h  
1
UC: 40  
JPN: 6  
<0-47>  
2: +11.0h 3: +10.5h  
4: +10.0h 5: 9.5h  
6: +9.0h 7: +8.5h  
8: +8.0h 9: +7.5h  
10: +7.0h 11: +6.5h  
12: +6.0h 13: +5.5h  
14: +5.0h 15: +4.5h  
16: +4.0h 17: +3.5h  
18: +3.0h 19: +2.5h  
20: +2.0h 21: +1.5h  
22: +1.0h 23: +0.5h  
24: 0.0h 25:-0.5h  
26: -1.0h 27: -1.5h  
28: -2.0h 29: -2.5h  
30: -3.0h 31: -3.5h  
32: -4.0h 33: -4.5h  
34: -5.0h 35: -5.5h  
36: -6.0h 37: -6.5h  
38: -7.0h 39: -7.5h  
40: -8.0h 41: -8.5h  
42: -9.0h 43: -9.5h  
44: -10.0h 45: -10.5h  
46: -11.0h 47: -11.5h  
640  
641  
User  
interface  
Date display format  
ALL  
EUR:1  
UC:2  
JPN:0  
<0-2>  
SYS 0: YYYY.MM.DD.  
1: DD.MM.YYYY  
1
1
2: MM.DD.YYYY  
User  
Automatic Sorting Mode  
PPC  
2
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: STAPLE  
interface setting (RADF)  
<0-4>  
2: SORT  
3: GROUP  
4: ROTATE SORT  
642  
User  
interface Mode  
Default setting of Sorter  
PPC  
0
SYS 0: NON-SORT  
1: STAPLE  
1
<0-4>  
2: SORT  
3: GROUP  
4: ROTATE SORT  
643  
644  
User  
Color 1 at twin color selec-  
PPC  
(color)  
0
SYS 0: K 1: Y 2: M  
3: C 4: R 5: G  
6: B  
SYS 0: K 1: Y 2: M  
3: C 4: R 5: G  
6: B  
1
1
interface tion (Select what color  
black in original is copied)  
User  
interface tion (Select what color  
other than black in original  
is copied)  
<0-6>  
Color 2 at twin color selec-  
PPC  
(color)  
4
<0-6>  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 127  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
645  
User  
Correction of reproduction  
PPC  
10  
<0-10>  
SYS Sets the reproduction  
ratio for the “X in 1”  
printing (including mag-  
azine sort) to the  
1
interface ratio in editing copy  
“Reproduction ratio x  
Correction ratio”.  
0: 90% 1: 91%  
2: 92% 3: 93%  
4: 94% 5: 95%  
6: 96% 7: 97%  
8: 98% 9: 99%  
10: 100%  
646  
648  
649  
User  
interface  
Image position in editing  
Returning finisher tray  
PPC  
ALL  
0
SYS Sets the page pasted  
position for “X in 1” to  
the upper left corner/  
center.  
0: Cornering  
1: Centering  
SYS Sets whether or not  
returning the finisher  
tray to the bin 1 when  
printing is finished.  
0: Not returned  
1
1
1
<0-1>  
User  
0
interface when printing is finished  
<0-1>  
1: Returned  
SYS 0: Left page to right  
User  
interface  
Magazine sort setting  
PPC  
0
<0-1>  
page  
1: Right page to left  
page  
650  
651  
User  
2 in 1/4 in 1 page allocating  
PPC  
PPC  
0
SYS 0: Horizontal  
1: Vertical  
SYS Hyphen  
(with page number)  
/Dropout  
1
1
interface order setting  
User  
interface Time Stamp and Page  
<0-1>  
2
<0-3>  
Printing format setting for  
Number  
(with date, time and  
page number)  
0: OFF/OFF  
1: ON/OFF  
2: OFF/ON  
3: ON/ON  
Note:  
Hyphen printing  
format  
ON: -1- OFF: 1  
652  
653  
657  
User  
interface  
User  
interface  
Cascade operation setting  
Cascade operation setting  
Default setting of printing  
PPC  
PRT  
PPC  
0
SYS 0: OFF  
1
1
1
<0-1>  
0
<0-1>  
0
1: ON  
SYS 0: OFF  
1: ON  
SYS 0: Short edge  
1: Long edge  
User  
interface direction for Time Stamp  
and Page Number  
<0-1>  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 128  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
658  
User  
Auto-start setting for  
PRT  
0
SYS Sets whether or not  
feeding a paper auto-  
matically into the copier  
when it is placed on the  
bypass tray.  
1
interface bypass feed printing  
<0-1>  
2
0: OFF (Press the  
[START] button to  
start feeding.)  
1: ON (Automatical  
feeding)  
659  
User  
Auto-start setting for  
PPC  
1
SYS Sets whether or not  
feeding a paper auto-  
matically into the copier  
when it is placed on the  
bypass tray.  
1
interface bypass feed printing  
<0-1>  
0: OFF (Press the  
[START] button to  
start feeding.)  
1: ON (Automatical  
feeding)  
660  
661  
662  
Network Auto-forwarding setting of  
received FAX  
Network Auto-forwarding setting of  
received E-mail  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
SYS Clears SMS partition.  
(Performs when the  
service call [F106] has  
occurred.)  
1
1
3
<0-1>  
0
<0-1>  
General Clearing of SMS partition  
-
663  
Counter Counting method in Twin  
Color Mode  
PPC  
0
SYS Sets the counting  
method of fee charging  
or department count in  
Twin Color Mode.  
0: Count as Twin Color  
Mode  
1
<0-2>  
1: Count as Black  
Mode  
2: Count as Full Color  
Mode  
M/SYS all clearing  
ALL  
M/  
SYS  
Initializes all the adjust-  
ment modes and setting  
modes.  
3
665  
General  
-
666  
667  
669  
670  
General BOX partition clearing  
General /SHA partition clearing  
General System all clearing  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
-
SYS Initializes the Elec-  
tronic Filing.  
SYS Initializes the shared  
folder.  
SYS Initializes system  
NVRAM area.  
SYS Display the HDD infor-  
3
3
3
2
General HDD diagnostic menu dis-  
play  
mation  
671  
User  
interface  
Size indicator  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid  
1
<0-1>  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 129  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
-
672  
General Initialization of department  
management information  
-
SYS Initializing of the depart-  
ment management  
information  
3
*
Enter the code with  
the digital keys and  
press the [INITIAL-  
IZE] button to per-  
form the  
initialization.  
If the area storing  
the department  
management infor-  
mation is destroyed  
for some reason,  
“Enter Department  
Code” is displayed  
on the control panel  
even if the depart-  
ment management  
function is not set  
on. In this case, ini-  
tialize the area with  
this code. This area  
is normally initial-  
ized at the factory.  
675-0  
675-1  
Paper  
feeding Mode setting  
for paper  
Coated Paper Upper  
ALL  
ALL  
0
SYS Sets whether or not  
applying the Coated  
Paper Mode to each  
paper source.  
4
4
drawer  
<0-1>  
source  
0: Normal mode  
1: Coated Paper Mode  
Lower  
drawer  
0
SYS  
*
Coated Paper Mode  
- This mode is  
<0-1>  
selected when the  
paper which often  
causes the misfeed-  
ing (ex. coated  
paper) is used. The  
occurrence of mis-  
feeding is reduced  
by lengthening the  
jam detection time.  
However, the print-  
ing speed is low-  
ered since the  
675-2  
675-3  
675-4  
PFPupper  
drawer  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
0
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
4
4
4
<0-1>  
PFP lower  
drawer  
0
<0-1>  
LCF  
0
<0-1>  
printing cycle is also  
lengthened with the  
lengthened jam  
detection time.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 130  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
676  
Paper  
Bypass copy printing  
PPC  
0
SYS Sets whether or not dis-  
playing the [COATED]  
button on the LCD  
screen at bypass feed-  
ing.  
1
feeding [COATED] button display  
<0-1>  
2
0: Not displayed  
1: Displayed (The  
Coated Paper Mode  
is applied by press-  
ing the [COATED]  
button at bypass  
feeding.)  
*
Coated Paper Mode  
- This mode is  
selected when the  
paper which often  
causes the misfeed-  
ing (ex. coated  
paper) is used. The  
occurrence of mis-  
feeding is reduced  
by lengthening the  
jam detection time.  
However, the print-  
ing speed is low-  
ered since the  
printing cycle is also  
lengthened with the  
lengthened jam  
detection time.  
677-0  
677-1  
677-2  
677-3  
677-4  
677-5  
Paper  
feeding Mode setting  
at bypass  
Coated Paper Plain  
PRT  
PRT  
PRT  
PRT  
PRT  
PRT  
0
SYS Sets whether or not  
applying the Coated  
4
4
4
4
4
4
paper  
<0-1>  
Paper Mode on each  
paper type at bypass  
feeding  
printing.  
0: Normal mode  
1: Coated Paper Mode  
Thick  
paper 1  
0
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
SYS  
<0-1>  
*
Coated Paper Mode  
- This mode is  
Thick  
paper 2  
0
selected when the  
paper which often  
causes the misfeed-  
ing (ex. coated  
paper) is used. The  
occurrence of mis-  
feeding is reduced  
by lengthening the  
jam detection time.  
However, the print-  
ing speed is low-  
ered since the  
<0-1>  
Thick  
paper 3  
0
<0-1>  
OHP film  
Envelop  
0
<0-1>  
0
printing cycle is also  
lengthened with the  
lengthened jam  
<0-1>  
detection time.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
678  
General Setting of banner advertis-  
ing display  
ALL  
0
SYS Sets whether or not dis-  
playing the banner  
1
<0-1>  
advertising. The setting  
contents of 08-679 and  
08-680 are displayed at  
the time display section  
on the right top of the  
screen. When both are  
set, each content is dis-  
played alternately.  
0: Not displayed  
1: Displayed  
679  
680  
681  
General Banner advertising display  
1
General Banner advertising display  
2
General Display of [BANNER MES-  
SAGE] button  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
SYS Maximum 27 letters  
(one-byte character)  
SYS Maximum 27 letters  
(one-byte character)  
SYS 0: Not displayed  
1: Displayed  
11  
11  
1
0
<0-1>  
*
This button enables  
the entry of “Banner  
advertising display 1  
(08-679)” and “Ban-  
ner advertising dis-  
play 2 (08-680)” on  
the control panel.  
682  
683  
Use  
interface  
General Duplex printing setting  
when coin controller is  
used  
Offsetting between jobs  
ALL  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
1
1
<0-1>  
1
<0-1>  
SYS When the duplex print-  
ing is short paid with a  
coin controller, reverse  
side of the original is  
not printed and is con-  
sidered as a defect  
(printing job may be  
cleared). To solve this  
problem, the selection  
of printing method is  
enabled with this set-  
ting.  
0: Invalid (Both sides  
printed)  
1: Valid (Only one side  
printed)  
684  
685  
General Rebuilding all databases  
General Rebuilding all databases  
related to Address Book  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
SYS Rebuilds all databases.  
3
3
SYS Rebuilds all databases  
related to the Address  
Book.  
686  
689  
General Rebuilding all databases  
related to log  
ALL  
FAX  
-
SYS Rebuilds all databases  
related to the logs.  
SYS 0: Not subjected for  
APS judgment  
3
1
FAX  
Adaptation of paper source  
priority selection  
0
<0-1>  
1: Subjected for APS  
judgment  
690  
691  
General HDD formatting  
General HDD type display  
ALL  
ALL  
-
SYS 2: Normal formatting  
7
7
<2>  
-
<0-2>  
SYS 0: Not formatted  
1: Not used  
2: Normal format  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 132  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
-
692  
Mainte- Performing panel calibra-  
nance tion  
ALL  
SYS Performs the calibration  
of the pressing position  
on the touch panel  
1
(LCD screen). The cali-  
bration is performed by  
pressing 2 reference  
positions after this code  
is started up.  
2
693  
General Initialization of NIC infor-  
mation  
ALL  
-
-
SYS Returns the value to the  
factory shipping default  
value.  
3
694  
696  
General Performing HDD testing  
Scram- Installation of scrambler  
ALL  
ALL  
SYS Checks the bad sector.  
3
2
0
-
0: Not installed  
1: Installed  
bler  
board (Option)  
<0-1>  
board  
697  
698  
Paper  
feeding  
Paper type priority  
PPC  
ALL  
1
SYS Sets the paper type pri-  
ority during copying.  
1: Normal paper  
1
5
<1-2>  
2: Thick paper 1  
Scram- Entering the key code for  
bler  
board  
-
-
-
Start up this code and  
have the user enter the  
key code.  
scrambler board  
Once the key code has  
been set, this code can-  
not be set again on  
security grounds.  
699  
701  
Scram- Erasing all data in HDD  
bler  
board  
FAX  
ALL  
FAX  
-
This setting is effective  
only when the scram-  
bler board is installed.  
3
1
Destination setting for FAX  
EUR: 5  
UC: 4  
SYS 0: Japan  
1: Asia  
JPN: 0  
Other: 1  
<0-25>  
2: Australia  
3: Hong Kong  
4: U.S.A./Canada  
5: Germany  
6: U.K.  
7: Italy  
8: Belgium  
9: Netherlands  
10: Finland  
11: Spain  
12: Austria  
13: Switzerland  
14: Sweden  
15: Denmark  
16: Norway  
17: Portugal  
18: France  
19: Greece  
20: Poland  
21: Hungary  
22: Czech  
23: Turkey  
24: South Africa  
25: Taiwan  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
702  
Mainte- Remote-controlled service  
nance function  
ALL  
2
SYS 0: Valid (Remote-con-  
trolled server)  
1
<0-2>  
1: Valid (L2)  
2: Invalid  
703  
Mainte- Remote-controlled service  
ALL  
ALL  
-
SYS Maximum 256 Bytes  
11  
11  
nance  
HTTP server  
URL setting  
704-0  
Interruption of Copying  
stapling oper-  
ation (no sta-  
ple)  
1
SYS 0: Continues printing  
by switching sort  
<0-1>  
setting  
1: Interrupts printing  
704-1  
707  
Printing /  
BOX print-  
ing  
ALL  
ALL  
1
SYS 0: Continues printing  
by switching sort  
setting  
1: Interrupts printing  
SYS Maximum 256 Bytes  
4
<0-1>  
Mainte- Remote-controlled service  
https://  
device.mf  
p-sup-  
11  
nance  
HTTP initially-registered  
server  
URL setting  
port.com:  
443/  
device/fir-  
streg-  
ist.ashx  
710  
Mainte- Short time interval setting  
nance of recovery from Emer-  
(Remote) gency Mode  
ALL  
24  
<1-48>  
SYS Sets the time interval to  
recover from the Emer-  
gency Mode to the Nor-  
mal Mode.  
1
(Unit: Hour)  
711  
715  
Mainte- Short time interval setting  
ALL  
ALL  
60  
<30-360>  
1230  
SYS Unit: Minute  
1
1
nance  
of Emergency Mode  
Mainte- Remote-controlled service  
SYS 0 (0:00) to 2359 (23:59)  
nance  
periodical polling timing  
(Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute)  
716  
717  
718  
Mainte- Remote-controlled service  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Prohibited  
1: Accepted  
1
1
1
nance  
Writing data of self-diag-  
nostic code  
<0-1>  
Mainte- Remote-controlled service  
3
SYS Unit: Minute  
nance  
response waiting time  
(Timeout)  
<1-30>  
Mainte- Remote-controlled service  
nance initial registration  
0
SYS 0: OFF  
1: Start  
<0-2>  
2: Only certification is  
scanned  
719  
720  
Mainte- Remote-controlled service  
nance tentative password  
Mainte- Status of remote-con-  
ALL  
ALL  
-
SYS Maximum 10 letters  
11  
2
0
SYS 0: Not registered  
1: Registered  
nance  
trolled service initial regis-  
tration (Display only)  
<0-1>  
721  
Mainte- Service center call function  
nance  
ALL  
2
SYS 0: OFF  
1: Notifies all service  
calls  
1
<0-2>  
2: Notifies all but  
paper jams  
723  
726  
Mainte- Service center call HTTP  
ALL  
ALL  
-
SYS Maximum 256 letters  
11  
1
nance  
server URL setting  
Mainte- HTTP proxy setting  
nance  
1
SYS 0: Valid  
1: Invalid  
<0-1>  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 134  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
-
727  
Mainte- HTTP proxy IP address  
nance setting  
ALL  
SYS 000.000.000.000 -  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value  
11  
000.000.000.000)  
2
728  
Mainte- HTTP proxy port number  
nance setting  
ALL  
0
<0-  
SYS  
1
65535>  
729  
730  
731  
732  
Mainte- HTTP proxy ID setting  
nance  
Mainte- HTTP proxy password set-  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
SYS Maximum 30 letters  
SYS Maximum 30 letters  
11  
11  
1
nance  
ting  
Mainte- HTTP proxy panel display  
nance  
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-  
1
SYS 0: Valid  
1: Invalid  
SYS 0: Ordered by FAX  
1: Ordered by E-mail  
2: Ordered by HTTP  
3: OFF  
<0-1>  
3
<0-3>  
1
nance  
tion of supplies  
(Remote)  
733  
734  
738  
739  
740  
741  
742  
743  
744  
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-  
nance tion of supplies  
(Remote) FAX number  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
SYS Maximum 32 digits  
Enter hyphen with the  
[Monitor/Pause] button  
SYS Maximum 192 letters  
List: 256 digits  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-  
nance  
tion of supplies  
(Remote) E-mail address  
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-  
SYS Maximum 50 letters  
nance  
tion of supplies  
(Remote) User's name  
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-  
SYS Maximum 32 digits  
Enter hyphen with the  
[Monitor/Pause] button  
SYS Maximum 192 letters  
List: 256 digits  
nance  
tion of supplies  
(Remote) User's telephone number  
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-  
nance  
tion of supplies  
(Remote) User's E-mail address  
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-  
SYS Maximum 100 letters  
SYS Maximum 5 digits  
SYS Maximum 50 letters  
nance  
tion of supplies  
(Remote) User's address  
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-  
nance  
tion of supplies  
(Remote) Service number  
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-  
nance  
tion of supplies  
(Remote) Service technician's name  
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-  
SYS Maximum 32 digits  
Enter hyphen with the  
[Monitor/Pause] button  
nance  
tion of supplies  
(Remote) Service technician's tele-  
phone number  
745  
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-  
ALL  
SYS Maximum 192 letters  
List: 256 digits  
11  
nance  
tion of supplies  
(Remote) Service technician's E-mail  
address  
746  
747  
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-  
ALL  
ALL  
SYS Maximum 50 letters  
SYS Maximum 100 letters  
11  
11  
nance  
tion of supplies  
(Remote) Supplier's name  
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-  
nance  
tion of supplies  
(Remote) Supplier's address  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
748  
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-  
nance tion of supplies  
(Remote) Notes  
ALL  
SYS Maximum 128 letters  
11  
11  
1
749  
750  
751  
752  
753  
754  
755  
756  
757  
758  
759  
760  
761  
762  
763  
764  
765  
Mainte- Information about supplies  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
SYS Maximum 20 digits  
nance  
Part number of toner car-  
(Remote) tridge C  
Mainte- Information about supplies  
1
SYS  
nance  
Order quantity of toner car-  
<1-99>  
(Remote) tridge C  
Mainte- Information about supplies  
1
SYS  
1
nance  
Condition number of toner  
<1-99>  
(Remote) cartridge C  
Mainte- Information about supplies  
SYS Maximum 20 digits  
11  
1
nance  
Part number of toner car-  
(Remote) tridge M  
Mainte- Information about supplies  
1
SYS  
nance  
Order quantity of toner car-  
<1-99>  
(Remote) tridge M  
Mainte- Information about supplies  
1
SYS  
1
nance  
Condition number of toner  
<1-99>  
(Remote) cartridge M  
Mainte- Information about supplies  
-
SYS Maximum 20 digits  
11  
1
nance  
Part number of toner car-  
(Remote) tridge Y  
Mainte- Information about supplies  
1
SYS  
nance  
Order quantity of toner car-  
<1-99>  
(Remote) tridge Y  
Mainte- Information about supplies  
1
SYS  
1
nance  
Condition number of toner  
<1-99>  
(Remote) cartridge Y  
Mainte- Information about supplies  
-
SYS Maximum 20 digits  
11  
1
nance  
Part number of toner car-  
(Remote) tridge K  
Mainte- Information about supplies  
1
SYS  
nance  
Order quantity of toner car-  
<1-99>  
(Remote) tridge K  
Mainte- Information about supplies  
1
SYS  
1
nance  
Condition number of toner  
<1-99>  
(Remote) cartridge K  
Mainte- Information about supplies  
-
SYS Maximum 20 digits  
11  
1
nance  
Part number of toner bag  
(Remote)  
Mainte- Information about supplies  
1
SYS  
SYS  
nance  
Order quantity of toner bag  
<1-99>  
(Remote)  
Mainte- Information about supplies  
nance Condition number of toner  
(Remote) bag  
Mainte- Automatic ordering sup-  
1
1
<1-99>  
1
SYS 0: OFF  
1: Always  
1
nance  
plies  
<0-2>  
(Remote) Result table printout  
Mainte- Automatic ordering sup-  
2: ON Error  
2
SYS 0: Valid  
(FAX/Internet FAX)  
1: Valid  
1
nance  
plies  
<0-2>  
(Remote) Display  
(FAX/Internet FAX/  
HTTP)  
2: Invalid  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 136  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
767  
Mainte- Service Notification setting  
nance  
ALL  
0
SYS Enables to set up to 3  
E-mail  
1
<0-2>  
(Remote)  
addresses to be sent.  
(08-768, 777, 778)  
0: Invalid  
2
1: Valid (E-mail)  
2: Valid (FAX)  
768  
769  
770  
771  
772  
773  
774  
775  
776  
777  
778  
779  
780  
Mainte- Destination E-mail address  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
-
SYS Maximum 192 letters  
11  
1
nance  
1
(Remote)  
Mainte- Total counter information  
0
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
nance  
transmission setting  
<0-1>  
(Remote)  
Mainte- Total counter transmission  
1
SYS 1 to 31  
1
nance  
date setting  
<1-31>  
(Remote)  
Mainte- PM counter notification set-  
0
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
1
nance  
ting  
<0-1>  
(Remote)  
Mainte- Dealer's name  
nance  
-
-
SYS Maximum 100 letters  
Needed at initial regis-  
tration  
SYS Maximum 20 letters  
Needed at initial regis-  
tration  
11  
11  
1
Mainte- Login name  
nance  
Mainte- Display setting of [Service  
0
SYS 0: Not displayed  
1: Displayed  
nance  
Notification] button  
<0-1>  
(Remote)  
Mainte- Sending error contents of  
0
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
1
nance  
equipment  
<0-1>  
(Remote)  
Mainte- Setting total counter trans-  
nance mission interval  
(Remote) (Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute)  
Mainte- Destination E-mail address  
-
-
-
SYS  
1
SYS Maximum 192 letters  
SYS Maximum 192 letters  
11  
11  
1
nance  
2
(Remote)  
Mainte- Destination E-mail address  
nance  
3
(Remote)  
Mainte- Notification format selec-  
0
SYS 0: Text  
nance  
tion  
<0-1>  
1: Text + XML data  
(Remote)  
Mainte- Remote-controlled service  
nance polling day selection Day-1  
0
SYS 0: OFF  
1 to 31:  
1
<0-31>  
1st to 31st of a  
month  
781  
782  
Mainte- Remote-controlled service  
nance polling day selection Day-2  
ALL  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: OFF  
1 to 31:  
1st to 31st of a  
month  
SYS 0: OFF  
1 to 31:  
1
1
<0-31>  
Mainte- Remote-controlled service  
nance polling day selection Day-3  
0
<0-31>  
1st to 31st of a  
month  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
783  
Mainte- Remote-controlled service  
nance polling day selection Day-4  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: OFF  
1 to 31:  
1
<0-31>  
1st to 31st of a  
month  
784  
785  
786  
787  
788  
Mainte- Remote-controlled service  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
1
1
1
1
1
nance  
polling day selection Sun-  
day  
<0-1>  
Mainte- Remote-controlled service  
0
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
nance  
polling day selection Mon-  
day  
<0-1>  
Mainte- Remote-controlled service  
0
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
nance  
polling day selection Tues-  
day  
<0-1>  
Mainte- Remote-controlled service  
0
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
nance  
polling day selection  
Wednesday  
<0-1>  
Mainte- Remote-controlled service  
0
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
nance  
polling day selection  
Thursday  
<0-1>  
789  
790  
Mainte- Remote-controlled service  
nance polling day selection Friday  
Mainte- Remote-controlled service  
ALL  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
1
1
<0-1>  
0
<0-1>  
nance  
polling day selection Satur-  
day  
791  
792  
793  
794  
795  
796  
Mainte- Information of supplies set-  
nance ting of toner cartridge C  
Mainte- Information of supplies set-  
nance ting of toner cartridge M  
Mainte- Information of supplies set-  
nance ting of toner cartridge Y  
Mainte- Information of supplies set-  
nance ting of toner cartridge K  
Mainte- Information of supplies set-  
nance ting of toner bag  
Mainte- Remote-controlled service  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
1
1
1
1
1
1
<0-1>  
0
<0-1>  
0
<0-1>  
0
<0-1>  
0
<0-1>  
0
<0-1>  
nance  
lengthened interval polling  
(End of month)  
797  
815-0  
815-1  
815-2  
816  
Mainte- Firmware download  
nance  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Accepted  
1: Prohibited  
1
4
4
4
1
<0-1>  
1
<0-1>  
1
<0-1>  
1
<0-1>  
1
Image  
Detection of  
Y
M
C
ALL  
(color)  
ALL  
(color)  
ALL  
(color)  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
M
M
M
M
0: ON  
1: OFF  
process- the status  
ing  
color toner is  
nearly empty  
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias  
resistance detection con-  
trol  
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias  
temperature detection con-  
trol  
0: Disabled  
1: Enabled  
<0-1>  
817  
818  
1
M
M
0: Disabled  
1: Enabled  
1
1
<0-1>  
Transfer Temperature correction  
factor table setting  
JPN: 1  
UC: 0  
EUR: 0  
Others: 1  
<0-1>  
0: No Damp Heater  
1: Damp Heater  
installed  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 138  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
256  
819-0  
819-1  
819-2  
Develop- Color auto-  
ment  
Y
M
C
ALL  
M
M
M
Sets the target output  
value of color auto-  
toner sensor to the  
sleeve in the auto-toner  
control. (This is set  
when performing the  
automatic adjustment of  
auto-toner sensor.)  
4
4
4
toner sensor  
output setting  
for initial  
(color) <0-1023>  
ALL 256  
(color) <0-1023>  
ALL 256  
(color) <0-1023>  
2
developer  
material  
820-0  
820-1  
820-2  
821  
Develop- Color auto-  
Y
M
C
ALL  
(color) <0-1023>  
ALL  
(color) <0-1023>  
ALL  
(color) <0-1023>  
-
M
M
M
M
Displays the output  
value of the color auto-  
toner sensor to the  
4
4
4
1
ment  
toner sensor  
output  
-
display for  
developer  
material  
sleeve in color printing.  
-
Develop- ON/OFF of the mode for  
ALL  
0
Sets whether or not  
performing an aging to  
stabilize the status of  
developer material  
when the toner density  
is uneven or the toner  
charging amount is low-  
ered.  
ment  
developer material stabili-  
zation  
(color)  
<0-1>  
0: ON  
1: OFF  
822-0  
822-1  
822-2  
Develop- Number of  
Y
M
C
ALL  
0
M
M
M
Displays the number of  
times the developer  
material stabilization is  
performed.  
4
4
4
ment  
times the  
mode for  
(color) <0-255>  
ALL  
(color) <0-255>  
ALL  
(color) <0-255>  
0
developer  
material stabi-  
lization is per-  
formed  
0
823-0  
823-1  
823-2  
Develop- Color auto-  
Y
M
C
ALL  
(color)  
0
M
M
M
Displays “1” when the  
abnormal output volt-  
age is detected for the  
color auto-toner sensor  
light amount correction.  
([CF40] error)  
4
4
4
ment  
toner sensor/  
light amount  
correction  
<0-1>  
ALL  
(color)  
0
voltage abnor-  
mal detection  
<0-1>  
0: Normal  
1: Abnormality  
ALL  
(color)  
0
<0-1>  
detected  
824-0  
824-1  
824-2  
Develop- Color auto-  
Y
M
C
ALL  
(color)  
ALL  
(color)  
ALL  
(color)  
0
M
M
M
Displays “1” when the  
abnormal toner density  
detection voltage is  
detected. ([CF20] error)  
0: Normal  
4
4
4
ment  
toner sensor/  
toner density  
detection volt-  
age abnormal  
detection  
<0-1>  
0
<0-1>  
0
1: Abnormality  
<0-1>  
detected  
849  
Fuser  
Fusing control switching for  
TWD and SAD models  
ALL  
Other  
than  
M
1
TWD and  
SAD: 0  
TWD and  
SAD: 1  
<0-1>  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
858-0  
858-1  
858-2  
859-0  
859-1  
859-2  
860-0  
860-1  
Develop- Color toner  
Y
ALL  
(color)  
ALL  
(color)  
ALL  
(color)  
ALL  
(color)  
ALL  
(color)  
ALL  
(color)  
0
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Becomes “1” when the  
toner density decreases  
and it is judged forced  
toner supply is needed.  
0: Normal level  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
4
ment  
forced supply  
level display  
<0-1>  
0
<0-1>  
0
<0-1>  
0
<0-1>  
0
<0-1>  
0
<0-1>  
20  
M
C
1: Forced supply level  
Develop- Toner empty  
ment  
Y
M
Becomes “1” when  
detecting the toner  
empty.  
0: Normal  
1: Empty detected  
detection  
C
Develop- Color auto-  
Upper limit  
Lower limit  
ALL  
Sets the range for judg-  
ing whether the sensor  
output value when the  
sensor light source is  
OFF is correct  
ment  
toner sensor/  
proper range  
setting of OFF  
level voltage  
(color) <0-1023>  
ALL  
(color) <0-1023>  
0
4
or not.  
861-0  
861-1  
Develop- Color auto-  
Upper limit  
Lower limit  
ALL  
205  
M
M
Sets the range for judg-  
ing whether the adjust-  
ment result of sensor  
light amount is correct  
or not.  
4
4
ment  
toner sensor/  
proper range  
setting of  
(color) <0-255>  
ALL  
40  
standard light  
amount volt-  
age  
(color) <0-255>  
862-0  
Develop- Color auto-  
Upper limit  
ALL  
950  
M
Sets the range for judg-  
ing whether the sensor  
output value for the ref-  
erence plate is correct  
or not.  
4
ment  
toner sensor/  
proper range  
setting of ref-  
erence plate  
output  
(color) <0-1023>  
862-1  
863-0  
Lower limit  
Upper limit  
ALL  
205  
M
M
4
4
(color) <0-1023>  
Develop- Color auto-  
ALL  
450  
Sets the range for judg-  
ing whether the sensor  
output value for the  
ment  
toner sensor/  
proper range  
setting of  
(color) <0-1023>  
sleeve is correct or not.  
863-1  
864  
Lower limit  
ALL  
155  
M
M
4
2
developer out-  
put  
Develop- Color auto-toner sensor/  
(color) <0-1023>  
ALL  
-
Displays the sensor  
output value when the  
sensor light source is  
OFF at power ON.  
ment  
sensor OFF output value  
display at power ON  
(color) <0-1023>  
865  
Develop- Color auto-toner sensor/  
ALL  
-
M
Displays the sensor  
output value with the  
standard light amount  
for the reference plate  
at power ON.  
2
ment  
reference plate output  
value display at power ON  
(color) <0-1023>  
866-0  
866-1  
Develop- Color auto-  
Upper limit  
Lower limit  
ALL  
820  
M
M
Sets the range for judg-  
ing whether the differ-  
ence between the  
sensor output when the  
sensor light source is  
OFF and the sensor  
output for the reference  
plate is correct or not.  
4
4
ment  
toner sensor/  
abnormal  
(color) <0-1023>  
detection  
potential dif-  
ference set-  
ting of  
Develop-  
ment  
ALL  
205  
(color) <0-1023>  
reference  
plate output  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 140  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
867  
Develop- Color auto-toner control  
ALL  
(color)  
0
M
Sets whether the sen-  
sor light amount is cor-  
rected or not depending  
on the environment and  
life.  
1
ment  
environment and life light  
amount correction setting  
<0-1>  
2
0: Correction  
1: No correction  
868  
Develop- Color auto-toner adjust-  
ALL  
4
M
Sets the difference from  
the target value for  
judging whether the  
color auto-toner adjust-  
ment finishes correctly  
or not.  
1
ment  
ment finishing range set-  
ting  
(color) <0-255>  
869  
870  
Develop- Color auto-toner control  
ALL  
5
M
M
Sets the difference from  
the target value for  
judging whether the  
light amount correction  
finishes correctly or not.  
Sets the number of  
times of continuous  
error detection before  
the light amount correc-  
tion abnormality is dis-  
played.  
1
1
ment  
environment and life light  
amount correction/correc-  
tion finishing range setting  
(color) <0-255>  
Develop- Color auto-toner sensor/  
ALL  
3
ment  
setting of number of times  
of error detection at light  
amount correction  
(color) <0-255>  
871  
872  
Develop- Color auto-toner control  
ALL  
0
M
M
Displays the number of  
times of the reference  
plate detection error for  
the environment and life  
light amount correction.  
Displays the number of  
times of the light  
amount control voltage  
adjustment error for the  
environment and life  
light amount correction.  
2
2
ment  
environment and life light  
amount correction/display  
of number of times of refer-  
ence plate detection error  
(color) <0-255>  
Develop- Color auto-toner control  
ALL  
0
ment  
environment and life light  
amount correction/display  
of number of times of light  
amount control voltage  
adjustment error  
(color) <0-255>  
873-0  
873-1  
873-2  
874  
Develop- Color auto-  
Y
M
C
ALL  
(color) <0-1023>  
ALL 256  
(color) <0-1023>  
ALL 256  
(color) <0-1023>  
256  
M
M
M
M
Sets the initial devel-  
oper output target  
value.  
4
4
4
1
ment  
Develop-  
ment  
Develop-  
ment  
toner control/  
developer ini-  
tial output set-  
ting  
Develop- Color developer life correc-  
ment tion  
ALL  
0
Sets whether the toner  
density detection volt-  
age correction is per-  
formed or not  
(color)  
<0-1>  
depending on the  
developer life in the  
color auto-toner control.  
0: Corrected  
1: Not corrected  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
875-0  
Develop- Color devel-  
Y
M
C
Y
ALL  
(color)  
0
M
Sets the correction  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
ment  
oper life cor-  
rection value  
(segment 0)  
<-512-  
511>  
amount of the toner  
density detection volt-  
age depending on the  
developer life. In this  
code, the life count  
within 0-2000 is set as  
the correction amount.  
875-1  
875-2  
876-0  
876-1  
876-2  
877-0  
877-1  
877-2  
878-0  
878-1  
878-2  
879-0  
879-1  
879-2  
880-0  
880-1  
880-2  
ALL  
(color)  
0
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
<-512-  
511>  
ALL  
(color)  
0
<-512-  
511>  
-4  
<-512-  
511>  
-2  
<-512-  
511>  
-2  
<-512-  
511>  
-6  
<-512-  
511>  
-3  
<-512-  
511>  
-3  
<-512-  
511>  
-8  
<-512-  
511>  
-4  
<-512-  
511>  
-4  
<-512-  
511>  
-10  
<-512-  
511>  
-5  
<-512-  
511>  
-5  
<-512-  
511>  
-12  
<-512-  
511>  
-6  
Develop- Color devel-  
ALL  
(color)  
Sets the correction  
amount of the toner  
density detection volt-  
age depending on the  
developer life. In this  
code, the life count  
within 2001-5000 is set  
as the correction  
ment  
oper life cor-  
rection value  
(segment 1)  
M
C
Y
ALL  
(color)  
ALL  
(color)  
amount.  
Develop- Color devel-  
ALL  
(color)  
Sets the correction  
amount of the toner  
density detection volt-  
age depending on the  
developer life. In this  
code, the life count  
within 5001-10000 is  
set as the correction  
amount.  
ment  
oper life cor-  
rection value  
(segment 2)  
M
C
Y
ALL  
(color)  
ALL  
(color)  
Develop- Color devel-  
ALL  
(color)  
Sets the correction  
amount of the toner  
density detection volt-  
age depending on the  
developer life. In this  
code, the life count  
within 10001-20000 is  
set as the correction  
amount.  
ment  
oper life cor-  
rection value  
(segment 3)  
M
C
Y
ALL  
(color)  
ALL  
(color)  
Develop- Color devel-  
ALL  
(color)  
Sets the correction  
amount of the toner  
density detection volt-  
age depending on the  
developer life. In this  
code, the life count  
within 20001-30000 is  
set as the correction  
amount.  
ment  
oper life cor-  
rection value  
(segment 4)  
M
C
Y
ALL  
(color)  
ALL  
(color)  
Develop- Color devel-  
ALL  
(color)  
Sets the correction  
amount of the toner  
density detection volt-  
age depending on the  
developer life. In this  
code, the life count  
within 30001-37500 is  
set as the correction  
amount.  
ment  
oper life cor-  
rection value  
(segment 5)  
M
C
ALL  
(color)  
<-512-  
511>  
-6  
<-512-  
511>  
ALL  
(color)  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 142  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
881-0  
Develop- Color devel-  
Y
M
C
ALL  
(color)  
-12  
<-512-  
511>  
-6  
<-512-  
511>  
-6  
<-512-  
511>  
M
Sets the correction  
4
4
4
2
ment  
oper life cor-  
rection value  
(segment 6)  
amount of the toner  
density detection volt-  
age depending on the  
developer life. In this  
code, the life count  
37501 or more is set as  
the correction amount.  
881-1  
881-2  
900  
ALL  
(color)  
M
M
-
2
ALL  
(color)  
Version System firmware ROM ver-  
sion  
ALL  
-
JPN: T410SY0JXXX  
UC: T410SY0UXXX  
EUR: T410SY0EXXX  
Others: T410SY0XXXX  
903  
905  
907  
908  
915  
920  
Version Engine ROM version  
Version Scanner ROM version  
Version RADF ROM version  
Version Finisher ROM version  
Version FAX board ROM version  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
FAX  
ALL  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
410M-XXX  
410S-XXX  
DF-XXXX  
SDL-XX FIN-XX  
F562-XXX  
VX.XX/X.XX  
2
2
2
2
2
2
Version FROM basic section soft-  
ware version  
921  
922  
Version FROM internal program  
Version UI data fixed section ver-  
sion  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
-
VXXX.XXX X  
VXXX.XXX X  
2
2
923  
924  
925  
926  
927  
928  
929  
930  
Version UI data common section  
version  
Version Version of UI data lan-  
guage 1 in HDD  
Version Version of UI data lan-  
guage 2 in HDD  
Version Version of UI data lan-  
guage 3 in HDD  
Version Version of UI data lan-  
guage 4 in HDD  
Version Version of UI data lan-  
guage 5 in HDD  
Version Version of UI data lan-  
guage 6 in HDD  
Version Version of UI data in  
FROM displayed at power-  
ON  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
VXXX.XXX X  
VXXX.XXX X  
VXXX.XXX X  
VXXX.XXX X  
VXXX.XXX X  
VXXX.XXX X  
VXXX.XXX X  
VXXX.XXX X  
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
931  
Version Version of UI data lan-  
guage 7 in HDD  
ALL  
-
-
VXXX.XXX X  
2
933  
934  
Version Web data whole version  
Version Web UI data in HDD  
Version: Language 1  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
-
VXXX.XXX X  
VXXX.XXX X  
2
2
935  
936  
937  
938  
939  
Version Web UI data in HDD  
Version: Language 2  
Version Web UI data in HDD  
Version: Language 3  
Version Web UI data in HDD  
Version: Language 4  
Version Web UI data in HDD  
Version: Language 5  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
VXXX.XXX X  
VXXX.XXX X  
VXXX.XXX X  
VXXX.XXX X  
VXXX.XXX X  
2
2
2
2
2
Version Web UI data in HDD  
Version: Language 6  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
-
944  
Version HD version  
ALL  
-
JPN: T410HD0JXXX  
UC: T410HD0UXXX  
EUR: T410HD0EXXX  
Others: T410HD0XXXX  
2
945  
947  
Network Two-way setting of Raw-  
Port 9100  
General Initialization after software  
version upgrade  
ALL  
ALL  
2
UTY 1: Valid  
2: Invalid  
12  
3
<1-2>  
-
-
Perform this code when  
the software in this  
equipment has been  
upgraded.  
949  
950  
General Automatic interruption  
page setting during black  
printing  
ALL  
ALL  
0
SYS Sets the number of  
pages to interrupt the  
printing automatically.  
0-100: 0 to 100 pages  
SYS Sets the start-up  
method of the Elec-  
tronic Filing.  
1
1
<0-100>  
Elec-  
tronic  
filing  
Start-up method of Elec-  
tronic Filing  
0
<0-2>  
0: Standard  
1: Forced start-up  
(Not recovered)  
2: Forced start-up  
(Recovered)  
951  
User  
Image setting for Electronic  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: General  
1: Photograph  
2: Presentation  
3: Line art  
1
interface Filing printing (Only for  
color image)  
<0-3>  
953  
954  
User  
Access code entry for  
ALL  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Renewed automati-  
cally  
1
1
interface Electronic Filing printing  
<0-1>  
1: Enter every time  
User  
Clearing timing for files and  
1
SYS 0: Immediately after  
the completion of  
scanning  
interface Electronic Filing Agent  
<0-1>  
1: Cleared by Auto  
Clear  
969  
970  
User  
interface  
User  
Error sound  
ALL  
ALL  
1
SYS 0: OFF  
1: ON  
SYS 0: OFF  
1: ON  
1
1
<0-1>  
1
<0-1>  
Sound setting when  
interface switching to Energy Saving  
Mode  
973  
Network PCL line feed code setting  
PRT  
0
SYS Sets the PCL line feed  
code.  
1
<0-3>  
0: Automatic setting  
1: CR=CR, LF=LF  
2: CR=CR+LF, LF=LF  
3: CR=CR, LF=CR+LF  
975  
General Job handling when print-  
ing is short paid with coin  
controller  
ALL  
1
SYS Sets whether pause or  
stop the printing job  
when it is short paid  
using a coin controller.  
0: Pause the job  
1
<0-1>  
1: Stop the job  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 144  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
976  
Scanning Equipment name and user  
name setting to a folder  
ALL  
0
SYS Sets whether or not  
adding the equipment  
name and user name to  
the folder when saving  
files.  
1
<0-2>  
when saving files  
2
0: Not add  
1: Add the equipment  
name  
2: Add the user name  
978  
979  
Network Raw printing job  
(Paper feeding drawer)  
PRT  
PRT  
0
SYS 0: AUTO  
1: Upper drawer  
2: Lower drawer  
3: PFP upper drawer  
4: PFP lower drawer  
5: LCF  
SYS 0: Roman-8  
1: ISO 8859/1 Latin 1  
2: ISO 8859/2 Latin 2  
3: ISO 8859/9 Latin 5  
4: PC-8, Code Page  
437  
1
1
<0-5>  
Network Raw printing job  
(PCL symbol set)  
0
<0-39>  
5: PC-8 D/N, Danish/  
Norwegian  
6: PC-850, Multilingual  
7: PC-852, Latin2  
8: PC-8 Turkish  
9: Windows 3.1 Latin 1  
10: Windows 3.1 Latin 2  
11: Windows 3.1 Latin 5  
12: DeskTop  
13: PS Text  
14: Ventura Interna-  
tional  
15: Ventura US  
16: Microsoft Publishing  
17: Math-8  
18: PS Math  
19: Ventura Math  
20: Pi Font  
21: Legal  
22: ISO 4: United King-  
dom  
23: ISO 6: ASCII  
24: ISO 11  
25: ISO 15: Italian  
26: ISO 17  
27: ISO 21: German  
28: ISO 60: Danish/Nor-  
wegian  
29: ISO 69: French  
30: Windows 3.0 Latin 1  
31: MC Text  
32: PC Cyrillic  
33: ITC Zapf Dingbats  
34: ISO 8859/10 Latin 6  
35: PC-775  
36: PC-1004  
37: Symbol  
38: Windows Baltic  
39: Wingdings  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
986  
General Copy function setting  
PPC  
0
SYS Sets the copy function  
to be invalid.  
1
<0-1>  
0: Valid  
1: Invalid  
988  
995  
Paper  
Setting of paper size  
ALL  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Not switched  
1: LG13"LG  
1
feeding switching to 13" LG  
<0-2>  
2: FOLIO13"LG  
Mainte- Equipment number  
nance  
0
SYS This code can be also  
keyed in from the  
adjustment mode (05-  
976).  
11  
(serial number) display  
<10 dig-  
its>  
10 digits  
999  
Mainte- FSMS total counter  
nance  
Network Selection of NIC board sta-  
tus information  
ALL  
ALL  
0
SYS Refer to values of total  
counter.  
NIC 1: Not printed out  
when the copier is  
restarted  
1
<8 digits>  
1002  
1
12  
<1-2>  
2: Printed out when  
the copier is  
restarted  
1003  
Communication speed and  
settings of Ethernet  
1
1: Auto  
2: 10MBPS Half  
Duplex  
Network  
ALL  
NIC  
12  
<1-5>  
3: 10MBPS Full  
Duplex  
4: 100MBPS Half  
Duplex  
5: 100MBPS Full  
Duplex  
1006  
Network Address Mode  
ALL  
2
NIC 1: Fixed IP address  
2: Dynamic IP address  
3: Dynamic IP address  
without AutoIP  
12  
<1-3>  
1007  
1008  
Network Domain name  
Network IP address  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
NIC Maximum 96 letters  
12  
12  
NIC 000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value  
000.000.000.000)  
1009  
1010  
Network Subnet mask  
Network Gateway  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
NIC 000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value  
12  
12  
000.000.000.000)  
NIC 000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value  
000.000.000.000)  
1011  
1012  
Network Availability of IPX  
Network Network frame type  
ALL  
ALL  
1
NIC 1: Available  
2: Not available  
NIC 1: Automatic  
2: IEEE802.3  
12  
12  
<1-2>  
1
<1-5>  
3: Ethernet II  
4: IEEE802.3 SNAP  
5: IEEE802.2  
1014  
1015  
Network Availability of AppleTalk  
Network Zone setting of AppleTalk  
ALL  
ALL  
1
NIC 1: Available  
2: Not available  
NIC Maximum 32 letters  
*: Wildcard character  
12  
12  
<1-2>  
*
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 146  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
able  
value>  
1016  
1017  
1018  
Network Availability of LDAP  
Network Availability of DNS  
1
NIC 1: Available  
2: Not available  
NIC 1: Available  
2: Not available  
NIC 000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value  
12  
12  
12  
<1-2>  
1
<1-2>  
2
Network IP address to DNS server  
(Primary)  
-
000.000.000.000)  
1019  
1020  
Network IP address to DNS server  
(Secondary)  
ALL  
ALL  
-
NIC 000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value  
000.000.000.000)  
NIC 1: Invalid  
2: Via DHCP  
12  
12  
Network DDNS Desired level  
1
<1-5>  
3: Insecure DDNS  
4: Secure DDNS  
5: Multi-secure DDNS  
1022  
1023  
Network From Name Creation set-  
ting in SMTP authentica-  
tion  
ALL  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Not edited  
1: Account name of  
From Address  
1
<0-1>  
+Device name  
Network NetBios name  
MFP_  
serial  
UTY Maximum 15 letters  
The network-related  
serial number of the  
equipment appears at  
"serial"  
12  
1024  
1025  
Network Name of WINS server or IP  
address (Primary)  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
UTY 000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value  
12  
12  
000.000.000.000)  
Network Name of WINS server or IP  
address (Secondary)  
UTY 000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value  
000.000.000.000)  
1026  
1027  
Network Availability of Bindery  
Network Availability of NDS  
ALL  
ALL  
1
NIC 1: Available  
2: Not available  
NIC 1: Available  
2: Not available  
12  
12  
<1-2>  
1
<1-2>  
1028  
1029  
1030  
Network Directory service context  
Network Directory service tree  
Network Availability of HTTP server  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
1
NIC Maximum 127 letters  
NIC Maximum 47 letters  
NIC 1: Available  
2: Not available  
12  
12  
12  
<1-2>  
1031  
1032  
Network Port number to NIC HTTP  
server  
ALL  
ALL  
80  
<1-  
65535>  
8080  
<1-  
NIC  
12  
12  
Network Port number to system  
HTTP server  
NIC  
65535>  
1037  
1038  
1039  
Network Availability of SMTP client  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
1
NIC 1: Available  
2: Not available  
NIC Maximum 128 Bytes  
12  
12  
12  
<1-2>  
Network FQDN or IP address to  
SMTP server  
Network TCP port number of SMTP  
client  
-
25  
<1-  
NIC  
65535>  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 147  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
ALL  
ALL  
able  
value>  
1040  
1041  
Network Availability of SMTP server  
1
UTY 1: Available  
2: Not available  
UTY  
12  
12  
<1-2>  
25  
<1-  
Network TCP port number of SMTP  
server  
65535>  
1042  
1043  
1044  
1045  
1046  
1047  
1048  
Network E-mail box name to SMTP  
server  
Network Availability of Offramp  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
-
UTY Maximum 192 letters  
12  
12  
12  
12  
12  
12  
12  
2
UTY 1: Available  
2: Not available  
UTY 1: Available  
2: Not available  
UTY 1: Available  
2: Not available  
NIC 1: Available  
2: Not available  
<1-2>  
1
<1-2>  
1
<1-2>  
1
<1-2>  
Network Offramp security  
Network Printing at Offramp  
Network Availability of POP3 clients  
Network FQDN or IP address to  
POP3 server  
Network Types of POP3 server  
-
NIC Maximum 128 Bytes  
1
NIC 1: Automatic  
2: POP3  
<1-3>  
3: APOP  
1049  
Network Login name to POP3  
server  
Network Login password to POP3  
Network E-mail reception interval  
ALL  
-
-
NIC Maximum 96 letters  
12  
1050  
1051  
ALL  
ALL  
NIC Maximum 96 letters  
NIC Unit: Minute  
12  
12  
5
<0-4096>  
1052  
1055  
Network TCP port number of POP3  
client  
ALL  
ALL  
110  
<1-  
65535>  
21  
<1-  
NIC  
12  
12  
Network TCP port number of FTP  
client  
UTY  
65535>  
1059  
1060  
Network Availability of FTP server  
ALL  
ALL  
1
NIC 1: Available  
2: Not available  
UTY  
12  
12  
<1-2>  
21  
<1-  
Network TCP port number of FTP  
server  
65535>  
1063  
Network MIB function  
ALL  
1
NIC 1: Valid  
2: Invalid  
12  
<1-2>  
1065  
1066  
Network Setting of read Community  
Network Setting of read/Write Com-  
munity  
ALL  
ALL  
public  
private  
NIC Maximum 31 letters  
NIC Maximum 31 letters  
12  
12  
1069  
Network TRAP destination IP  
address  
ALL  
-
UTY 000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value  
12  
000.000.000.000)  
1070  
1073  
1074  
Network Community setting of  
TRAP (via IP)  
Network Availability of Raw/TCP  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
public  
NIC Maximum 31 letters  
12  
12  
12  
1
NIC 1: Valid  
2: Invalid  
NIC  
<1-2>  
9100  
<1-  
Network TCP port number of Raw  
65535>  
1075  
Network Availability of LPD client  
ALL  
1
NIC 1: Valid  
2: Invalid  
12  
<1-2>  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 148  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1076  
Network TCP port number of LPD  
ALL  
515  
<1-  
NIC  
12  
65535>  
1077  
1078  
Network LPD queue name  
Network Availability of IPP  
ALL  
ALL  
-
1
NIC Maximum 31 letters  
NIC 1: Valid  
2: Invalid  
12  
12  
2
<1-2>  
1079  
1080  
Network Availability of IPP port  
number “80”  
Network TCP port number of IPP  
ALL  
ALL  
1
NIC 1: Valid  
2: Invalid  
NIC  
12  
12  
<1-2>  
631  
<1-  
65535>  
1081  
Network IPP printer name  
ALL  
MFP_  
serial  
NIC Maximum 127 letters  
The network-related  
serial number of the  
equipment appears at  
"serial"  
12  
1082  
1083  
1084  
Network IPP printer location  
Network IPP printer information  
Network IPP printer information  
(more)  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
NIC Maximum 127 letters  
NIC Maximum 127 letters  
NIC Maximum 127 letters  
12  
12  
12  
1085  
1086  
1087  
Network Installer of IPP printer  
driver  
Network IPP printer “Make and  
Model”  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
NIC Maximum 127 letters  
NIC Maximum 127 letters  
NIC Maximum 127 letters  
12  
12  
12  
Network IPP printer information  
(more)  
MFGR  
1088  
1089  
Network IPP message from opera-  
tor  
Network Availability of FTP print  
ALL  
ALL  
-
NIC Maximum 127 letters  
12  
12  
1
NIC 1: Available  
2: Not available  
<1-2>  
1090  
1091  
Network Printer user name of FTP  
Network Printer user password of  
FTP  
ALL  
ALL  
print  
-
NIC Maximum 31 letters  
NIC Maximum 31 letters  
12  
12  
1092  
1093  
Network TCP port number to FTP  
print server  
ALL  
ALL  
21  
<1-  
65535>  
MFP_  
serial  
NIC  
12  
12  
Network Login name to Novell print  
server  
NIC Maximum 47 letters  
The network-related  
serial number of the  
equipment appears at  
"serial"  
1094  
1095  
1096  
1097  
Network Login password to Novell  
print server  
Network Name of SearchRoot  
server  
Network Scan rate setting of print  
queue  
Network Page number limitation for  
printing text of received  
Email  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
NIC Maximum 31 letters  
NIC Maximum 31 letters  
NIC Unit: Second  
UTY  
12  
12  
12  
12  
5
<1-255>  
5
<1-99>  
1098  
Network MDN return mail setting  
when receiving E-mail  
ALL  
2
UTY 1: Valid  
2: Invalid  
12  
<1-2>  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 149  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
-
1099  
Network Trap destination of IPX  
ALL  
UTY 24 letters  
(Valid from 0 to 9 and  
12  
from A to F)  
1100  
Network Method of SMTP server  
authentication  
ALL  
1
NIC 1: Disable  
2: Plain  
12  
<1-6,10>  
3: Login  
4; Cram-MD5  
5: Digest MD5  
6: Kerberos  
10: Auto  
1101  
1102  
1103  
1104  
Network Login name for SMTP  
server authentication  
Network Login password for SMTP  
server authentication  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
NIC Maximum 64 letters  
12  
12  
12  
12  
NIC Maximum 64 letters  
Network Rendezvous setting  
1
NIC 1: Valid  
2: Invalid  
<1-2>  
MFP_  
serial  
Network Link local host name  
NIC Maximum 127 letters  
The network-related  
serial number of the  
equipment appears at  
"serial"  
1105  
Network Service name setting  
ALL  
Refer to  
contents  
NIC Maximum 63 letters  
The network-related  
serial number of the  
equipment appears at  
"serial"  
12  
<Default value>  
e-STUDIO281C:  
TOSHIBA  
e-STUDIO281C_serial  
e-STUDIO351C:  
TOSHIBA  
e-STUDIO351C_serial  
e-STUDIO451C:  
TOSHIBA  
e-STUDIO451C_serial  
1111  
1112  
Network POP Before SMTP setting  
Network Host name  
ALL  
ALL  
2
NIC 1: Valid  
2: Invalid  
12  
12  
<1-2>  
MFP_  
serial  
NIC Maximum 63 letters  
The network-related  
serial number of the  
equipment appears at  
"serial"  
1113  
1114  
1117  
Network Windows domain No.1 of  
user authentication  
Network Sending mail text of Inter-  
netFAX  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
-
UTY Maximum 128 letters  
12  
1
1
SYS 0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
SYS Unit: Second  
<0-1>  
300  
<1-9999>  
Network SMB time-out period  
1
1118  
1119  
General Clearing of TAT partition  
ALL  
ALL  
3
3
-
-
SYS  
Initialization of NIC infor-  
mation  
Initializes only the infor-  
mation of the Network  
setting items.  
Network  
-
1121  
Network PDC (Primary Domain  
Controller) name No.1 of  
authentication  
ALL  
-
UTY Maximum 128 letters  
12  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 150  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
-
1122  
Network BDC (Backup Domain  
Controller) name No.1 of  
authentication  
ALL  
UTY Maximum 128 letters  
12  
1123  
Network Windows domain of device  
authentication  
ALL  
4
UTY 3: ON  
(Domain selected)  
4: OFF  
12  
2
<3-4>  
(Work group  
selected)  
1124  
1125  
Network Workgroup name  
ALL  
ALL  
work-  
group  
0
UTY Maximum 15 letters  
12  
1
Data writing of address  
book data import  
0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
General  
SYS  
SYS  
<0-1>  
(overwriting method)  
1126  
Counter Validity of interrupt copy-  
ing when external counters  
are installed  
0
0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
ALL  
1
<0-1>  
1128  
1129  
1130  
NetwareUserAuthTree  
Name1  
NetwareUserAuthContext  
Name1  
Maximum 47 letters  
Maximum 127 letters  
Network  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
UTY  
UTY  
12  
12  
1
Network  
User  
interface  
Job Build Function  
1
SYS Sets the Job Build  
Function.  
<0-1>  
0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
1131  
1132  
User  
Maximum number of time  
ALL  
ALL  
1000  
<5-1000>  
SYS Sets the maximum  
number of time a job  
build has been per-  
formed.  
1
1
interface job build performed  
5-1000: 5 to 1000 times  
General Default screen selection of  
the User Function menu  
1
SYS Selects the default  
screen when entering  
the User Function menu  
by pressing the [USER  
FUNCTIONS] button.  
0: ADDRESS  
<0-1>  
1: COUNTER  
1134  
1135  
NetwareUserAuthTree  
Name2  
Default setting of drawers  
Maximum 47 letters  
Network  
Paper  
ALL  
ALL  
-
UTY  
12  
1
1
SYS 1: LCF  
2: Upper drawer  
feeding (Printer/BOX)  
<1-5>  
3: Lower drawer  
4: PFP upper drawer  
5: PFP lower drawer  
1136  
Network Number of lines simulta-  
neously connectable when  
using SMB  
ALL  
13  
<8-16>  
SYS  
1
1137  
1138  
Network Memory partition size  
when using Samba  
Network LDAP search method set-  
ting  
ALL  
ALL  
16  
<8-20>  
SYS 8-20 M bytes  
1
1
0
SYS Sets the search method  
when performing a  
LDAP search.  
<0-3>  
0: Partial match  
1: Prefix match  
2: Suffix match  
3: Full match  
1139  
Network LDAP authentication set-  
ting  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Not authenticated  
1: Authenticated  
1
<0-1>  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 151  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1140  
User  
Restriction of the template  
ALL  
0
SYS Selects the restriction of  
the template function  
usage setting.  
1
interface function with the adminis-  
<0-1>  
trator privilege  
0: No restriction  
1: Only available with  
the administrator  
privilege.  
1141  
Network Display of MAC address  
ALL  
-
SYS (**:**:**:**:**:**)  
The address is dis-  
2
played as above (6-byte  
data is divided by a  
colon at every 2 bytes).  
1143  
1144  
1145  
NetwareUserAuthContext  
Name2  
NetwareUserAuthTree  
Name3  
Maximum 127 letters  
12  
Network  
Network  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
UTY  
UTY  
Maximum 47 letters  
12  
11  
Mainte- Counter notification  
SYS Maximum 32 digits  
Enter a hyphen with the  
[MONITOR/PAUSE]  
button.  
nance  
(Remote)  
Remote FAX setting  
1148  
1370  
NetwareUserAuthContext  
Name3  
Image quality control time  
Maximum 127 letters  
Network  
Image  
ALL  
ALL  
-
UTY  
12  
1
0
M
Counts driving count of  
the drum (image qual-  
ity control time).  
process- accumulating counter  
<8 digits>  
ing  
Counts up when drum  
motor and image quality  
control are ON.  
1371  
1372  
Image  
Accumulated counter of  
ALL  
ALL  
0
M
M
Cleared to “0” by the  
image quality closed-  
loop control. Counts up  
with the number of  
printing job received  
after this control.  
Counts up the heater  
control time accumu-  
lated (when power of  
the copier is ON) but  
does not count at the  
Sleep Mode. When the  
counter value of the  
fuser belt is cleared,  
this counter value is  
also cleared in sync at  
PM support mode.  
2
1
process- output pages since the per-  
<4 digits>  
ing  
forming of image quality  
control  
Image  
Heater and energizing time  
0
process- accumulating counter Dis-  
<8 digits>  
ing  
play/0 clearing  
1378  
Image  
Fuser roller ready tempera-  
ALL  
0
M
Counts up the heater  
control time accumu-  
lated (on standby).  
When the counter value  
of the fuser belt is  
cleared, this counter  
value is also cleared in  
sync at PM support  
mode.  
2
process- ture time accumulating  
ing counter  
<8 digits>  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 152  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1380  
Image  
Fuser roller printing tem-  
ALL  
0
M
Counts up the heater  
control time accumu-  
lated (during printing).  
When the counter value  
of the fuser belt is  
cleared, this counter  
value is also cleared in  
sync at PM support  
mode.  
2
process- perature time accumulating  
<8 digits>  
ing  
counter  
2
1382  
Image  
Fuser roller energy saving  
ALL  
0
M
Counts up the heater  
control time accumu-  
lated (at energy saving  
mode). When the  
2
process- temperature time accumu-  
<8 digits>  
ing  
lating counter Display/0  
clearing  
counter value of the  
fuser belt is cleared,  
this counter value is  
also cleared in sync at  
PM support mode.  
1385  
1386  
1387  
1388  
Image  
Number of output pages  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
0
M
M
M
M
Counts up when the  
registration sensor is  
ON. When the counter  
value of the fuser belt is  
cleared, this counter  
value is also cleared in  
sync at PM support  
mode.  
Counts up when the  
registration sensor is  
ON. When the counter  
value of the fuser belt is  
cleared, this counter  
value is also cleared in  
sync at PM support  
mode.  
Counts up when the  
registration sensor is  
ON. When the counter  
value of the fuser belt is  
cleared, this counter  
value is also cleared in  
sync at PM support  
mode.  
Counts up when the  
registration sensor is  
ON. When the counter  
value of the fuser belt is  
cleared, this counter  
value is also cleared in  
sync at PM support  
mode.  
1
1
1
1
process- (Thick paper 1)  
ing  
<8 digits>  
Image  
Number of output pages  
0
process- (Thick paper 2)  
ing  
<8 digits>  
Image  
Number of output pages  
0
process- (Thick paper 3)  
ing  
<8 digits>  
Image  
process- (OHP film)  
Number of output pages  
0
<8 digits>  
ing  
1389  
1390  
Main  
Main charger wire clean-  
ALL  
ALL  
0
M
M
Does not count up  
when cleaning is not  
effective.  
Counts the number of  
times of the feeding  
retry from the upper  
drawer.  
1
1
charger ing counter display/0 clear-  
ing  
Paper  
<5 digits>  
Feeding retry counter  
0
feeding (upper drawer)  
<8 digits>  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1391  
Paper  
Feeding retry counter  
ALL  
0
M
Counts the number of  
times of the feeding  
retry from the lower  
drawer.  
Counts the number of  
times of the feeding  
retry from the PFP  
upper drawer.  
Counts the number of  
times of the feeding  
retry from the PFP  
lower drawer.  
Counts the number of  
times of the feeding  
retry from the bypass  
tray.  
1
1
1
1
feeding (lower drawer)  
<8 digits>  
1392  
1393  
1394  
Paper  
Feeding retry counter  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
0
M
M
M
feeding (PFP upper drawer)  
<8 digits>  
Paper  
Feeding retry counter  
0
feeding (PFP lower drawer)  
<8 digits>  
Paper  
Feeding retry counter  
0
feeding (bypass feed)  
<8 digits>  
1395  
1396  
1397  
1398  
1399  
1400  
Paper  
feeding (LCF)  
Feeding retry counter  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
0
M
M
M
M
M
M
Counts the number of  
times of the feeding  
retry from the LCF.  
When the number of  
feeding retry (08-1390  
to 08-1395) exceeds  
the setting value, the  
feeding retry will not be  
performed subse-  
quently. In case “0” is  
set as a setting value,  
however, the feeding  
retry continues regard-  
less of the counter set-  
ting value.  
1
1
1
1
1
1
<8 digits>  
Paper  
Feeding retry counter  
10  
<8 digits>  
feeding upper limit value  
(upper drawer)  
Paper  
Feeding retry counter  
10  
<8 digits>  
feeding upper limit value  
(lower drawer)  
Feeding retry counter  
Paper  
10  
<8 digits>  
feeding upper limit value  
(PFP upper drawer)  
Paper  
feeding upper limit value  
(PFP lower drawer)  
Paper  
Feeding retry counter  
10  
<8 digits>  
Refer to (Note 1).  
Feeding retry counter  
10  
<8 digits>  
feeding upper limit value  
(bypass feed)  
1401  
1410  
1412  
Paper  
Feeding retry counter  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
10  
<8 digits>  
M
M
M
1
1
1
feeding upper limit value (LCF)  
Counter Black toner cartridge drive  
counts/0 clearing  
0
<8 digits>  
Counter Counter for tab paper  
0
Counts up when the  
registration sensor is  
ON. When the counter  
value of the fuser roller  
is reset, this counter is  
reset in sync at the PM  
support mode.  
<8 digits>  
1414  
1415  
Image  
Toner cartridge wrong  
ALL  
ALL  
0
M
M
0: ON  
1: OFF  
1
1
process- installation detection ON/  
ing  
Image  
<0-1>  
OFF setting  
Detection/control that the  
0
Sets ON or OFF of the  
detection/control that  
the toner cartridge is  
nearly empty.  
process- toner cartridge is nearly  
<0-2>  
ing empty  
0: All colors (Y/M/C/K)  
OFF  
1: Black (K) ON  
2: All colors (Y/M/C/K)  
ON  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 154  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1416  
Image  
Threshold for detecting  
ALL  
322500  
<8 digits>  
M
1
process- that black toner cartridge is  
ing  
nearly empty  
1422  
Data  
over-  
write kit  
HDD data overwriting type  
setting  
ALL  
0
SYS Select the type of the  
overwriting level; LOW,  
MEDIUM, or HIGH for  
deleting HDD data.  
(This setting is enabled  
only when the GP-1060  
is installed.)  
1
2
<0-2>  
0: LOW  
1: MEDIUM  
2: HIGH  
1424  
Data  
over-  
write kit  
HDD data clearing type  
setting (forcible clearing)  
ALL  
0
SYS Select the type of the  
overwriting level; LOW,  
MEDIUM, or HIGH for  
deleting HDD data.  
(This setting is enabled  
only when the GP-1060  
is installed.)  
1
<0-2>  
0: LOW  
1: MEDIUM  
2: HIGH  
1426  
1427  
1428  
1429  
Data  
over-  
write kit  
Forcible HDD data clearing  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
-
-
-
HDD data is cleared in  
the procedure set in 08-  
1424.  
3
3
*
This setting is  
enabled only when  
the GP-1060 is  
installed.  
Data  
over-  
write kit  
Forcible NVRAM data all  
clearing  
When this code is per-  
formed, the equipment  
cannot be started up.  
*
This setting is  
enabled only when  
the GP-1060 is  
installed.  
Data  
over-  
write kit  
Forcible SRAM backup  
data all clearing  
When this code is per-  
formed, the equipment  
cannot be started up.  
3
*
This setting is  
enabled only when  
the GP-1060 is  
installed.  
User  
Margin width  
Front: 7/  
Back: 7  
SYS This setting is not  
reflected in "Right",  
10  
interface (Top/Bottom, Left/Right)  
<2-100/-  
100-100>  
even if the value less  
than 2 is set for "Back".  
1430  
1431  
User  
Margin width  
ALL  
ALL  
14  
<2-30>  
SYS  
1
1
interface (Bookbinding margin)  
Network ACC  
1
SYS 0: ACC prohibited  
1: Only in the same  
paper direction  
(AT_CASETTE_CHANGE)  
for Printer/Box printing  
<0-2>  
2: In both same direc-  
tion and different  
directions  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 155  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1432  
Network Private-print-only mode  
Network Disabling e-Filing function  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Normal  
1: Private-print-only  
1
<0-1>  
mode  
1433  
1435  
1436  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Function off (No  
restriction on data  
saving and other  
operations)  
1
<0-1>  
1: Function on (Data  
saving and other  
operations have  
some restrictions)  
Network "Disable private and proof  
print save" function  
0
SYS 0: Function OFF (no  
restriction on data  
saving or other  
1
1
<0-1>  
operations)  
1: Function ON (Data  
saving or other  
operations are  
restricted)  
Network "Disable fax save" function  
0
SYS 0: Function OFF (no  
restriction on data  
saving or other  
<0-1>  
operations)  
1: Function ON (Data  
saving or other  
operations are  
restricted  
1440  
1441  
IP Conflict Detect  
SNTP Enable  
1
OFF/ON  
1: Valid  
2: Invalid  
OFF/ON  
1: Valid  
2: Invalid  
Network  
Network  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
12  
12  
<1-2>  
2
<1-2>  
1442  
1444  
1445  
1446  
SNTP Polling rate  
24  
<1-168>  
Data obtaining interval  
(Unit: Hour)  
SNTP server IP  
Address (Primary)  
SNTP server IP  
Network  
Network  
Network  
Network  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
-
12  
12  
12  
12  
Primary SNTP Address  
Secondary SNTP Address  
Port number to SNTP  
-
-
Address (Secondary)  
123  
<1-  
65535>  
1447  
1448  
Network IPP administrator name  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
This should be an  
account which can con-  
trol all IPP jobs.  
This should be the  
password of an account  
which can control all  
IPP jobs.  
12  
12  
Network IPP administrator pass-  
word  
-
1449  
1450  
Network IPP authentication method  
ALL  
ALL  
1
-
-
1: Disabled  
2: Basic  
3: Digest  
12  
12  
<1-4>  
4: Basic Digest  
Network User name for IPP authen-  
tication  
-
This should be the  
account at the time IPP  
authentication was per-  
formed.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 156  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
-
1451  
Network Password for IPP authenti-  
cation  
ALL  
-
This should be the  
password of the  
12  
account at the time IPP  
authentication was per-  
formed.  
2
1464  
Network Samba server ON/OFF  
setting  
ALL  
1
NIC 1: Samba enabled  
2: Samba disabled  
12  
<1-4>  
3: Print Share disabled  
4: File Share disabled  
1468  
1469  
General User data management  
limitation setting  
General User data management  
limitation Setting by num-  
ber of printouts  
ALL  
(color)  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Disabled  
1: Enabled  
SYS 0-9,999,999:  
0-9,999,999 sheets  
1
1
<0-1>  
0
(color) <7 digits>  
1470  
1471  
Device authentication func-  
tion setting  
User authentication  
method  
ALL  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: OFF  
1: ON  
SYS 0: Local  
1: NTLM (NT Domain)  
2: LDAP  
1
1
General  
<0-1>  
0
<0-5>  
General  
3: Kerberos (Active  
Directory)  
4: Netware  
1472  
User data management  
automatic registration func-  
tion setting  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Disabled  
1: Enabled  
1
General  
<0-1>  
1473  
1474  
User data management  
limitation setting  
User data management  
limitation Setting by num-  
ber of printouts  
ALL  
(black)  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Disabled  
1: Enabled  
SYS 0-9,999,999:  
0-9,999,999 sheets  
1
1
General  
General  
<0-1>  
0
(black) <7 digits>  
1476  
Restriction on Address  
book operation by adminis-  
trator  
ALL  
0
SYS Some restrictions can  
be given on the admin-  
istrator for operating the  
Address book.  
1
Network  
<0-1>  
0: No restriction  
1: Can be operated  
only under the  
administrator's  
authorization  
1477  
Restriction on "To" ("cc")  
address  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: No restriction  
1: Can be set from  
both of the Address  
book and LDAP  
server  
1
Network  
<0-3>  
2: Can be set only  
from the Address  
book  
3: Can be set only  
from the LDAP  
server  
1478  
1479  
User  
Display of paper size set-  
ALL  
ALL  
JPN: 0  
UC: 1  
<0-1>  
SYS 0: Not displayed  
1: Displayed  
1
1
interface ting by installation opera-  
tion of drawers  
User  
Default setting of sharp-  
ness  
5
SYS 1: -4 2: -3  
3: -2 4: -1  
<1-9>  
interface  
5: 0 6: +1  
7: +2 8: +3 9: +4  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 157  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
-
1481  
User data management  
clearing  
ALL  
-
All the user data in the  
database and backup  
files can be deleted.  
3
General  
1482  
1483  
User data department  
management  
User data recovery  
ALL  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Disabled  
1: Enabled  
1
3
General  
General  
<0-1>  
-
-
The data in the data-  
base is overwritten with  
the data in the backup  
file.  
1484  
Network Authentication method of  
"Scan to Email"  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Disabled  
1: SMTP authentica-  
1
<0-2>  
tion  
2: LDAP authentica-  
tion  
1485  
1486  
Network Setting whether use of the  
Internet FAX is permitted at  
the time of authentication  
Network LDAP server setting for  
user authentication  
ALL  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Not permitted  
1: Permitted  
1
2
<0-1>  
0
<0-  
SYS  
4294967  
295>  
1487  
1488  
Network "From" address assign-  
ment method at the time of  
authentication  
ALL  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: User name + @ +  
Domain name  
1
2
<0-2>  
1: LDAP searching  
2: Use the address  
registered at "From"  
field of E-mail set-  
ting  
Network ID setting of LDAP server  
for "From" address assign-  
mentPrivate-print-only  
mode  
0
<0-  
4294967  
295>  
SYS  
1489  
1491  
Network Setting for "From" address  
edit at "Scan to Email"  
Network E-mail domain name  
ALL  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Not permitted  
1: Permitted  
SYS 96 + 2 (delimiter) char-  
acter  
1
<0-1>  
-
11  
*
ASCll sequence  
only  
1492  
1493  
Paper  
Detection method of 13"  
ALL  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Disabled  
1: Enabled  
1
1
feeding LG for single-size docu-  
<0-1>  
ment  
Role Base Access Func-  
tion  
0
0: Function off (No  
Network  
General  
SYS  
restriction on data  
saving and other  
operations)  
<0-1>  
1: Function on (Data  
saving and other  
operations have  
some restrictions)  
1494  
Limitation check method  
ALL  
0
SYS 0: Checked at every  
page printed  
1
<0-1>  
1: Checked at every  
job printed  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 158  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1495  
Mainte- Service call checking  
nance period setting  
ALL  
6
-
0: No checking period  
specified (= Calls  
service technician  
immediately)  
1
<0-12>  
2
0: 10 minutes  
1: 30 minutes  
3: 1 hour  
4: 6 hours  
5: 12 hours  
6: 24 hours  
7: 48 hours  
8: 7 days  
9: 1 month  
10: 1 year  
11: 5 years  
12: Not limited (= Calls  
service technician if  
such error has  
occurred in the past  
even once or more)  
1496  
General Operation setting for User  
authentication/registration  
ALL  
1
SYS 0 : Disables operation  
setting for User  
1
<0-1>  
authentication/regis-  
tration  
1 : Enables operation  
setting for User  
authentication/regis-  
tration  
1497  
1498  
Elec-  
tronic Fil- Client)  
ing  
e-Filing Access Mode (for  
ALL  
FAX  
0
SYS 0: Mode 1  
1: Mode 2  
1
1
<0-2>  
2: Mode 3  
FAX  
Inbound FAX function  
(Forwarding by TSI)  
1
SYS 0: OFF  
(Function disabled)  
1: ON  
<0-1>  
(Function enabled)  
1530-0 Counter Number of  
1-UP /  
PPC  
0
SYS Counts the number of  
output pages printed  
4
4
output pages Duplex  
in black mode printing  
(black) <8 digits>  
only in the black mode.  
1530-1  
1530-2  
2-UP /  
Duplex  
printing  
PPC  
0
SYS Counts the number of  
output pages printed in  
the black mode using  
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE  
SORT].  
SYS Counts the number of  
sheets printed in the  
black mode using  
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE  
SORT].  
(black) <8 digits>  
2-UP /  
Simplex  
printing  
PPC  
0
4
(black) <8 digits>  
1530-3  
1530-4  
4-UP /  
Duplex  
printing  
PPC  
0
SYS Counts the number of  
output pages printed in  
the black mode using  
[4IN1].  
SYS Counts the number of  
sheets printed in the  
black mode using  
[4IN1].  
4
4
(black) <8 digits>  
4-UP /  
Simplex  
printing  
PPC  
0
(black) <8 digits>  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
0
1531-0  
Number of  
1-UP /  
output pages Duplex  
PPC  
SYS Counts the number of  
output pages printed  
only in the full color  
mode.  
4
Counter  
(color) <8 digits>  
in full color  
mode  
printing  
1531-1  
2-UP /  
Duplex  
printing  
PPC  
(color)  
0
SYS Counts the number of  
output pages printed in  
the full color mode  
4
<8 digits>  
using [2IN1] or [MAGA-  
ZINE SORT].  
1531-2  
1531-3  
1531-4  
2-UP /  
Simplex  
printing  
PPC  
(color)  
0
SYS Counts the number of  
sheets printed in the full  
color mode using [2IN1]  
or [MAGAZINE SORT].  
SYS Counts the number of  
output pages printed in  
the full color mode  
4
4
4
4
4
<8 digits>  
4-UP /  
Duplex  
printing  
PPC  
(color)  
0
<8 digits>  
using [4IN1].  
4-UP /  
Simplex  
printing  
PPC  
(color)  
0
SYS Counts the number of  
sheets printed in the full  
color mode using  
<8 digits>  
[4IN1].  
1532-0 Counter Number of  
1-UP /  
output pages Duplex  
PPC  
(color)  
0
SYS Counts the number of  
output pages printed  
only in the twin color  
mode.  
SYS Counts the number of  
output pages printed in  
the twin color mode  
using [2IN1] or [MAGA-  
ZINE SORT].  
SYS Counts the number of  
sheets printed in the  
twin color mode using  
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE  
SORT].  
<8 digits>  
in twin color  
mode  
printing  
1532-1  
1532-2  
2-UP /  
Duplex  
printing  
PPC  
(color)  
0
<8 digits>  
2-UP /  
Simplex  
printing  
PPC  
(color)  
0
4
<8 digits>  
1532-3  
1532-4  
4-UP /  
Duplex  
printing  
PPC  
(color)  
0
SYS Counts the number of  
output pages printed in  
the twin color mode  
using [4IN1].  
SYS Counts the number of  
sheets printed in the  
twin color mode using  
[4IN1].  
4
4
<8 digits>  
4-UP /  
Simplex  
printing  
PPC  
(color)  
0
<8 digits>  
1533-0 Counter Number of  
1-UP /  
PRT  
0
SYS Counts the number of  
output pages printed in  
the black mode.  
SYS Counts the number of  
output pages printed in  
the black mode using  
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE  
SORT].  
4
4
output pages Duplex  
of the printer printing  
(black) <8 digits>  
or BOX  
1533-1  
2-UP /  
Duplex  
printing  
PRT  
(black)  
0
<8 digits>  
*
When printing is  
performed using a  
Windows driver, the  
1-UP image will be  
output.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 160  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
0
1534-0 Counter Number of  
1-UP /  
PRT  
SYS Counts the number of  
output pages printed  
only in the full color  
mode.  
4
output pages Duplex  
of the printer printing  
or BOX  
(color) <8 digits>  
2
(Full color)  
1534-1  
2-UP /  
Duplex  
printing  
PRT  
0
SYS Counts the number of  
output pages printed in  
the full color mode  
4
(color) <8 digits>  
using [2IN1] or [MAGA-  
ZINE SORT].  
*
When printing is  
performed using a  
Windows driver, the  
1-UP image will be  
output.  
1535  
Counter Number of output pages of  
the FAX printing  
FAX  
0
SYS Counts the number of  
output pages in the  
4
(black) <8 digits>  
(1-UP / Duplex printing)  
default settings.  
1661  
1662  
1663  
Wireless Wireless LAN driver  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
-
Maximum 32 letters  
12  
12  
12  
LAN  
Wireless Wireless LAN driver  
LAN Network type  
Wireless Wireless LAN driver  
LAN Security  
SSID  
1
1: Infrared wireless LAN  
2: Ad-hoc network  
1: 802.1x 2: WPA-PSK  
3: WEP 4: NONE  
5: WPA 6: WPA2  
7: WPA2PSK  
<1-2>  
4
<1-7>  
1664  
1665  
Wireless Wireless LAN driver  
LAN Encryption system  
Wireless Wireless LAN driver  
ALL  
ALL  
1
-
-
1: TKIP 2: AES  
3: Dynamic WEP  
1: 100% 2: 50%  
12  
12  
<1-3>  
1
<1-5>  
LAN  
Transmission output power  
3: 25%  
5: min  
4: 12.5%  
1666  
1667  
Wireless Wireless LAN driver  
ALL  
ALL  
1
-
-
1: Auto  
2: Manual  
12  
12  
LAN  
Wireless Wireless LAN driver  
LAN Transmission rate value  
Transmission rate  
<1-2>  
1
<1-12>  
1: 1  
3: 5.5  
5: 6  
2: 2  
4: 11  
6: 9  
7: 12  
9: 24  
10: 36  
11: 48  
12: 54  
8: 18  
1668  
1669  
1670  
1671  
1672  
1673  
1674  
1675  
Wireless Wireless LAN driver  
LAN Operation channel  
Wireless Wireless LAN driver  
LAN Operation channel value  
Wireless Wireless LAN driver  
LAN WEP bit number  
Wireless Wireless LAN driver  
LAN WEP key entry system  
Wireless Wireless LAN driver  
LAN WEP key value  
Wireless Wireless LAN driver  
LAN WPA-PSK passphrase  
Wireless Wireless LAN driver  
LAN Sleep mode setting  
Wireless Wireless LAN driver  
LAN Slot-time limitation  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1: Auto  
2: Manual  
12  
12  
12  
12  
12  
12  
12  
12  
<1-2>  
1
<1-11>  
1
1:64  
3: 152  
1: Hex  
2: 128  
<1-3>  
2
<1-2>  
2: ASCII  
-
Maximum 32 letters  
Maximum 64 letters  
-
1
1: Off  
3: Normal  
1: Long 2: Short  
2: Max  
<1-3>  
1
<1-2>  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 161  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1676  
Wireless Wireless LAN driver  
ALL  
5
-
12  
LAN  
Number of times of soft-  
<0-1000>  
ware retry  
1677  
1678  
1679  
Wireless Wireless LAN driver  
LAN Preamble  
Wireless Wireless LAN driver  
LAN Operation mode  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
LAN Wireless LAN setting  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
1
-
-
-
1: Long 2: Longshort  
12  
12  
12  
<1-2>  
1
<1-3>  
1
1: All  
2: 11b  
3: 11g  
This setting is whether  
the wireless LAN con-  
nection is enabled or  
disabled.  
<1-3>  
1: Unset 2: Enabled  
3: Disabled  
1680  
1681  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
-
Maximum 255 letters  
12  
12  
LAN  
Path name for configura-  
tion file  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
This should be the path  
name in full where the  
client certificate is  
located.  
LAN  
Path name for client certifi-  
cate  
(Maximum 255 letters)  
1682  
1684  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
-
This should be the path  
name in full where the  
client certificate is  
located.  
12  
12  
LAN  
Path name for secret key  
of client certificate  
(Maximum 255 letters)  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
This should be the path  
name in full where the  
CA self-certificate is  
located.  
LAN  
Path name for CA self-cer-  
tificate  
(Maximum 255 letters)  
1685  
1686  
1688  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
LAN EAP user name  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
-
-
-
This should be the user  
name when the EAP-  
TLS is used.  
This should be the user  
name when the PEAP  
is used.  
This should be the path  
name to which the log  
file is output.  
12  
12  
12  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
LAN EAP user name  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
LAN Log file output  
(Maximum 255 letters)  
1689  
1690  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
LAN Authentication interval  
ALL  
ALL  
30  
<30-  
65535>  
-
This should be the time-  
out interval between  
EAP responses.  
12  
12  
30: 30 seconds  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
LAN Holding interval  
60  
<60-  
65535>  
M
The EAP authentica-  
tion will start after hav-  
ing been waited in this  
period when an EAP  
failure was received.  
60: 60 seconds  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 162  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1691  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
ALL  
3
<1-  
65535>  
M
When an EAPOL-Start  
packet has been sent  
and the request ID can-  
not be received, this  
EAPOL-Start packet will  
be re-sent for the num-  
ber of times set in this  
code.  
12  
LAN  
EAPOL-Start  
Number of times of packet  
retry  
2
3: 3 times  
1692  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
LAN Session resume  
ALL  
2
-
This setting is whether  
the pre-master key  
should be updated or  
not upon a TLS re-  
negotiation.  
12  
<1-2>  
1: Session is resumed  
2: Session is not  
resumed  
1693  
1696  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
LAN MAC Frame size  
ALL  
ALL  
1398  
<1-1398>  
-
-
This is a MAC frame  
size used in the wire-  
less LAN connection.  
The data is fragmented  
into this size.  
1398: 1398 bytes  
This should be the  
device file name which  
can obtain a seed to ini-  
tialize the WEP PRNG  
for xsupplicant.  
12  
12  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
/dev/  
urandom  
LAN  
Device file setting for  
obtaining random number  
(Maximum 255 letters)  
1697  
1699  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
LAN CRL directory designation  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
This should be the path  
name of the directory in  
full where the CRL file  
is located.  
12  
12  
(Maximum 255 letters)  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
LAN EAP authentication type  
1
This setting is for the  
EAP authentication  
type which xsupplicant  
can authenticate.  
<1-3>  
1: EAP-TLS 2: PEAP  
3: EAP-TLS and PEAP  
1700  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
LAN CN name  
ALL  
-
-
This should be an  
authentication server  
12  
name (basically a  
domain name in full).  
(Maximum 255 letters)  
1701  
1702  
1703  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
LAN CN name check  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
LAN Debugging level  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
LAN Ethereal log file output  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
1
-
-
-
1: NO  
2: YES  
12  
12  
12  
<1-2>  
0
<0-7>  
1
0-7: Setting of log file  
output level  
This setting is whether  
the Ethereal log file is  
output or not.  
<1-2>  
1: NO  
2: YES  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1704  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
ALL  
0
-
The update interval of a  
secret key across AP  
(Access Point) and STA  
(Station) can be set.  
This interval is for  
updating the secret key  
from STA.  
12  
LAN  
Update interval of PTK  
(Pairwise Transient Key)  
<0-720>  
0: Not updated  
1-720: 1-720 minutes of  
interval  
1705  
1706  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
LAN Strict packet check  
ALL  
ALL  
1
-
-
The Ack bit and request  
bit of EAPOL-Key is  
checked.  
1: Not checked  
2: Checked  
A higher priority is given  
to the xsupplicant task  
when a 4-way hand-  
shake is started.  
12  
12  
<1-2>  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
1
LAN  
Priority change at 4-way  
handshake  
<1-2>  
1: Priority not changed  
2: Priority changed  
1707  
1708  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
ALL  
ALL  
1
-
-
The encryption capabil-  
ity output in TLS clien-  
tHello message can be  
selected.  
1: LOW 2: MIDDLE  
3: HIGH  
These are the security  
level which can be  
selected from the user  
interface. This setting is  
not applied in case of  
PEAP. ("LOW" and  
"MIDDLE" is manda-  
tory for PEAP)  
12  
12  
LAN  
Security level  
<1-3>  
Selectable security level  
(EAP-TLS)  
1
<1-3>  
1: LOW + MIDDLE +  
HIGH  
2: MIDDLE + HIGH  
3: HIGH  
1710  
1711  
1712  
1713  
Blue-  
tooth  
Blue-  
tooth  
Blue-  
tooth  
Blue-  
tooth  
Bluetooth  
ON/OFF setting  
Bluetooth  
Device name  
Bluetooth  
Discovery  
Bluetooth  
Security  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
1
SYS 0: OFF  
1: ON  
SYS Maximum 32 letters  
1
11  
1
<0-1>  
MFP  
1
SYS 0: Not allowed  
1: Allowed  
SYS 0: Security function  
<0-1>  
1
<0-1>  
1
OFF  
1: Security function  
ON  
1714  
Blue-  
tooth  
Bluetooth  
PIN  
ALL  
0000  
SYS Maximum 8 digits  
(8-digit sequence)  
11  
This setting is valid only  
when the bluetooth  
security function is ON.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 164  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1715  
Blue-  
tooth  
Bluetooth  
Data encryption  
ALL  
1
SYS 0: Not encrypted  
1: Encrypted  
1
<0-1>>  
This setting is valid only  
when the bluetooth  
security function is ON.  
2
1720  
1721  
Network IP address range for IP fil-  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
-
IP filter minimum area 1  
000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value:  
000.000.000.000)  
IP filter maximum area  
1
12  
12  
ter  
(Minimum area 1)  
Network IP address range for IP fil-  
ter  
(Maximum area 1)  
000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value:  
000.000.000.000)  
1722  
1723  
Network IP address range for IP fil-  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
-
IP filter minimum area 2  
000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value:  
000.000.000.000)  
IP filter maximum area  
2
12  
12  
ter I  
(Minimum area 2)  
Network IP address range for IP fil-  
ter  
(Maximum area 2)  
000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value:  
000.000.000.000)  
1724  
1725  
Network IP address range for IP fil-  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
-
IP filter minimum area 3  
000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value:  
000.000.000.000)  
IP filter maximum area  
3
12  
12  
ter  
(Minimum area 3)  
Network IP address range for IP fil-  
ter  
(Maximum area 3)  
000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value:  
000.000.000.000)  
1726  
1727  
Network IP address range for IP fil-  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
-
IP filter minimum area 4  
000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value:  
000.000.000.000)  
IP filter maximum area  
4
12  
12  
ter  
(Minimum area 4)  
Network IP address range for IP fil-  
ter  
(Maximum area 4)  
000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value:  
000.000.000.000)  
1728  
Network IP address range for IP fil-  
ALL  
-
-
IP filter minimum area 5  
000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value:  
12  
ter  
(Minimum area 5)  
000.000.000.000)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 165  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
-
1729  
Network IP address range for IP fil-  
ALL  
-
IP filter maximum area  
5
12  
ter  
(Maximum area 5)  
000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value:  
000.000.000.000)  
1730  
1731  
Network IP address range for IP fil-  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
-
IP filter minimum area 6  
000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value:  
000.000.000.000)  
IP filter maximum area  
6
12  
12  
ter  
(Minimum area 6)  
Network IP address range for IP fil-  
ter  
(Maximum area 6)  
000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value:  
000.000.000.000)  
1732  
1733  
Network IP address range for IP fil-  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
-
IP filter minimum area 7  
000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value:  
000.000.000.000)  
IP filter maximum area  
7
12  
12  
ter  
(Minimum area 7)  
Network IP address range for IP fil-  
ter  
(Maximum area 7)  
000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value:  
000.000.000.000)  
1734  
1735  
Network IP address range for IP fil-  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
-
IP filter minimum area 8  
000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value:  
000.000.000.000)  
IP filter maximum area  
8
12  
12  
ter  
(Minimum area 8)  
Network IP address range for IP fil-  
ter  
(Maximum area 8)  
000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value:  
000.000.000.000)  
1736  
1737  
Network IP address range for IP fil-  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
-
IP filter minimum area 9  
000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value:  
000.000.000.000)  
IP filter maximum area  
9
12  
12  
ter  
(Minimum area 9)  
Network IP address range for IP fil-  
ter  
(Maximum area 9)  
000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value:  
000.000.000.000)  
1738  
Network IP address range for IP fil-  
ALL  
-
-
IP filter minimum area  
10  
12  
ter  
(Minimum area 10)  
000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value:  
000.000.000.000)  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 166  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
-
1739  
Network IP address range for IP fil-  
ALL  
-
IP filter maximum area  
10  
12  
ter  
(Maximum area 10)  
000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value:  
000.000.000.000)  
2
1740  
1741  
Network SSL setting  
SSL ftp server OFF/ON  
Network SSL setting  
ALL  
ALL  
2
-
-
1: Enabled  
2: Disabled  
SSL HTTP server port  
number  
12  
12  
<1-2>  
10443  
<1-  
HTTP server port number  
65535>  
1742  
1743  
Network SSL setting  
ALL  
ALL  
2
-
-
1: Enabled  
2: Disabled  
SSL IPP server port  
number  
12  
12  
IPP server OFF/ON setting  
Network SSL setting  
IPP server port number  
<1-2>  
443  
<1-  
65535>  
1744  
SSL setting  
SSL ftp server OFF/ON  
2
OFF/ON  
1: Valid  
2: Invalid  
Network  
ALL  
-
12  
<1-2>  
1745  
1746  
SSL setting  
SSL ftp server Port  
SSL setting  
SSL LDAP Client OFF/ON  
990  
<1-5535>  
Port number to FTP  
Server  
OFF/ON  
1: Valid  
2: Invalid  
Network  
Network  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
12  
12  
2
<1-2>  
1747  
1748  
1749  
1750  
SSL setting  
SSL LDAP Client Port  
636  
<1-  
65535>  
Port number to LDAP  
Server  
Network  
Network  
Network  
Network  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
-
12  
12  
12  
12  
SSL setting  
SSL POP3 Client OFF/ON  
2
OFF/ON  
1: Valid  
2: Invalid  
Port number to POP3  
Server  
<1-2>  
SSL setting  
SSL POP3 Client Port  
995  
<1-  
65535>  
SSL setting  
SSL SMTP Client OFF/ON  
2
2: Invalid  
3: SMTP with TLS  
<1-2>  
(STARTTLS)  
4: SMTPS (SMTP  
OverSSL)  
1751  
1755  
SSL setting  
SSL SMTP Client Port  
465  
<1-  
65535>  
Port number to SMTP  
Server  
Network  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
12  
12  
Network Enabling server's IP  
address acquired by DHCP  
2
Domain Name Server  
option (6)  
<1-2>  
1: Enabled  
2: Disabled  
*
This value is used  
only when DHCP is  
enabled.  
1756  
Network Enabling server's IP  
address acquired by DHCP  
ALL  
2
-
NetBIOS over TCP/IP  
Name Server option  
(44) = Primary and  
Secondary Wins NAME  
1: Enabled  
12  
<1-2>  
2: Disabled  
*
This value is used  
only when DHCP is  
enabled.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 167  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1
1757  
Enabling server's IP  
The Host Name Ven-  
dor Extension option  
(12)  
Network  
ALL  
-
12  
address acquired by DHCP  
<1-2>  
1: Enabled  
2: Disabled  
This value is used only  
when DHCP is enabled.  
1762  
Network Enabling server's IP  
address acquired by DHCP  
ALL  
2
-
SNTP Server Option  
(42) NTP Server  
Address  
12  
<1-2>  
1: Enabled  
2: Disabled  
*
This value is used  
only when DHCP is  
enabled.  
1763  
1764  
1765  
1766  
1767  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Maximum 63 letters  
Maximum 255 letters  
Maximum 63 letters  
Maximum 63 letters  
12  
12  
12  
12  
12  
LAN  
Direction of Ethereal log  
file output  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
LAN  
Control sequence setting  
of "Cipher Suite"  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
LAN  
Path name for user certifi-  
cate  
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant  
LAN  
Path name entered for CA  
self-certificate  
Network Enabling server's IP  
address acquired by DHCP  
2
SYS DNS domain name  
Option (15) DNS  
domain name of the cli-  
ent  
<1-2>  
1: Enabled  
2: Disabled  
*
This value is used  
only when DHCP is  
enabled.  
1768  
1778  
Network Previous IP address  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
000.000.000.000-  
255.255.255.255  
(Default value:  
12  
1
000.000.000.000)  
General Hang-up period of control  
panel at the 3rd misentry of  
administrator's password  
1
0: No hang-up  
1: 0.5 minutes (= 30  
seconds)  
SYS  
<0-7>  
2: 1 minute  
3: 3 minutes  
4: 5 minutes  
5: 10 minutes  
6: 15 minutes  
7: 30 minutes  
1779  
Default data saving direc-  
tory of "Scan to File"  
0
0: Local directory  
1: REMOTE 1  
2: REMOTE 2  
Network  
ALL  
SYS  
1
<0-2>  
1781-0 Network Notification of When job  
0
Sets the notification  
method of scan job  
completion.  
0: Invalid  
1: Valid  
ALL  
ALL  
SYS  
SYS  
4
4
scan job  
completed  
<0-1>  
0
<0-1>  
1781-1  
On error  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 168  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1782  
File name format of "Save  
as file" and Email transmis-  
sion  
0
Sets the naming  
method of the file of  
"Save as file" and Email  
transmission.  
Network  
ALL  
SYS  
1
<0-5>  
2
0: [FileName]-[Data]-  
[Page]  
1: [FileName]-[Page]-  
[Data]  
2: [Data]-[FileName]-  
[Page]  
3: [Data]-[Page]-[File-  
Name]  
4: [Page]-[FileName]-  
[Data]  
5: [Page]-[Data]-[File-  
Name]  
1783  
Date display format of the  
file name of "Save as file"  
and Email transmission  
0
Sets the data display  
format of the file of  
"Save as file" and Email  
transmission.  
Network  
ALL  
SYS  
1
<0-4>  
0: [YYYY][MM][DD]  
[HH][mm][SS]  
1: [YY][MM][DD]  
[HH][mm][SS]  
2: [YYYY][MM][DD]  
3: [YY][MM][DD]  
4: [HH][mm][SS]  
The order of [YY], [MM]  
and [DD] varies  
depending on the set-  
ting of the code 08-640  
(Data display format).  
1784  
Single page data saving  
directory at "Save as file"  
0
Sets the directory  
where the file of "Save  
as file" is saved.  
Network  
ALL  
SYS  
1
<0-1>  
0: Save it under a sub-  
folder  
1: Save it without cre-  
ating a subfolder  
1785  
1786  
Page number display for-  
mat of the file of "Save as  
file" and Email transmis-  
sion  
Extension (suffix) format of  
the file of "Save as file"  
4
Sets the digit of a page  
number attached on the  
file.  
Network  
Network  
ALL  
ALL  
SYS  
SYS  
1
1
<4-6>  
4-6: 4-6 digits  
3
Sets the extension dig-  
its of the file to be  
saved.  
<3-6>  
3: Auto  
4: 4 digits  
5: 5 digits  
6: 6 digits  
1800-0  
1800-1  
1800-2  
Image  
process- forced supply  
ing time setting  
Color toner  
Y
M
C
ALL  
70  
M
M
M
Sets the motor driving  
time of the developer  
unit at the time of the  
color toner forced sup-  
ply.  
4
4
4
(color) <0-255>  
ALL 70  
(color) <0-255>  
ALL 70  
(color) <0-255>  
0-255: Setting value x  
0.1 seconds  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 169  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1801  
Image  
process- count setting  
Color toner forced supply  
ALL  
(color)  
7
M
Sets the number of  
times of the color toner  
forced supply.  
1
<1-10>  
ing  
1802-0  
1802-1  
1802-2  
1915  
Image  
process- ting of the  
Start up set-  
Level  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
3
M
M
Sets the performing  
level of the developer  
material stabilizing  
operation.  
Set the interval time  
between performances  
of developer material  
stabilizing operation.  
4
<2-8>  
ing  
developer  
material stabi-  
lizing mode.  
Pattern  
interval  
50  
<0-100>  
4
4
1
Number of  
repeating  
time  
10  
<0-20>  
M
Set the number of  
repeating times of the  
developer material sta-  
bilizing operation.  
0: Eliminates 2 mm  
from circumference  
(Void: 2 mm)  
Filing size for Network  
scanning function  
0
Network  
SYS  
<0-1>  
1: No space eliminated  
(Void: 0 mm)  
1920  
1921  
1922  
1923  
1924  
1925  
Device domain name of  
device authentication  
Windows domain No. 2 of  
user authentication  
Windows domain No. 3 of  
user authentication  
LDAP authentication  
Server type  
LDAP authentication  
User attribute  
Execution of user authenti-  
cation when the user ID is  
not entered  
UTY Maximum 128 letters  
Network  
Network  
Network  
Network  
Network  
Network  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
12  
12  
12  
12  
12  
1
Maximum 128 letters  
Maximum 128 letters  
UTY  
UTY  
1
NIC 1: Windows Server  
2: Not Windows Server  
<1-2>  
Sets a user attribute  
name.  
-
NIC  
2
0: Forcible execution  
1: Execution impossi-  
ble (pooled in the  
SYS  
<0-2>  
invalid queue)  
2: Forcible deletion  
1926  
FAX  
Tab/cover sheet printing at  
FAX reception  
Printing stop function  
0
Sets on or off of the  
printing function of spe-  
cial sheets such as tab  
or cover sheet of FAX,  
Email or list print.  
ALL  
SYS  
1
<0-1>  
0: Function off  
1: Function on  
1928  
1936  
Role Based Access  
LDAP search index  
0
<0-  
4294967  
295>  
MFP-  
serial  
5
Network  
Network  
ALL  
ALL  
SYS  
UTY  
AppleTalk device name  
Maximum 32 letters  
The Network-related  
serial number of the  
equipment appears at  
"serial".  
12  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 170  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1937  
User name and password  
at user authentication or  
"Save as file"  
0
0: User name and  
password of the  
device  
1
Network  
ALL  
SYS  
<0-2>  
1: User name and  
password at the  
user authentication  
(Template registra-  
tion information  
comes first when a  
template is  
2
retrieved.)  
2: User name and  
password at the  
user authentication  
(User information of  
the authentication  
comes first when a  
template is  
retrieved.)  
1938  
General Reformatting process due  
to a version change of SYS  
ROM  
2
Use this setting to refor-  
mat the specific parti-  
tion whose file system  
has been changed in  
Ver.2, at the version up/  
downgrade of the SYS  
ROM.  
7
ALL  
-
<0-2>  
No reformatting pro-  
cess shall be used in  
any cases other than  
this version change.  
0: Waiting (No refor-  
matting)  
1: dosFs to catFs (Ver-  
sion upgrade from  
Ver.1 to Ver.2 or  
later)  
2: catFs to dosFs (Ver-  
sion downgrade  
from Ver.2 or later to  
Ver.1)  
1939  
STAGE I/F startup setting  
STAGE port number  
32bit definition  
0: Disabled  
bit1: Normal Remote I/F  
bit2: Remote Scan I/F  
Network  
1940  
1950  
Network  
Network  
SMB signature for SMB  
server  
1
1: Auto  
2: Valid  
3: Invalid  
1: Auto  
2: Valid  
3: Invalid  
ALL  
ALL  
UTY  
UTY  
12  
12  
<0-3>  
1951  
SMB signature for SMB cli-  
ent  
1
Network  
<0-3>  
1952  
1953  
Device name for device  
authentication  
Password for the device  
name used for device  
authentication  
Maximum 128 letters  
Network  
Network  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
UTY  
UTY  
12  
12  
Maximum 128 letters  
1954  
PDC2 of user authentica-  
tion  
Maximum 128 letters  
Network  
ALL  
-
UTY  
12  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 171  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1955  
1956  
1957  
1958  
1959  
BDC2 of user authentica-  
tion  
PDC3 of user authentica-  
tion  
Maximum 128 letters  
Maximum 128 letters  
Maximum 128 letters  
Network  
Network  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
-
-
-
UTY  
UTY  
UTY  
12  
12  
12  
12  
12  
Network BDC3 of user authentica-  
tion  
PDC of device authentica-  
tion  
BDC of device authentica-  
tion  
UTY Maximum 128 letters  
Maximum 128 letters  
Network  
Network  
UTY  
Note:  
In this equipment, a toner image is formed on the transfer belt prior to a paper feeding.  
When the feeding retry occurs and the transport timing is delayed, the toner image on the trans-  
fer belt is cleaned off without the 2nd transfer since the paper cannnot be reached for the 2nd  
transfer proccess.  
After that, the toner image fomation is retried while the paper is waited.  
In this case, the toner for this image formation is consumed wastefully since the toner image on  
the transfer belt is already cleaned off, even though the printing is normally completed.  
Therefore, note that the excessive toner will be consumed consequently when the upper limit  
value of feeding retry counter is set larger or set as "0" (no limit).  
The toner is also consumed wastefully when the paper misfeeding occurs. Replace the roller at  
earlier timing if the paper misfeedings have occurred frequently.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 172  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<<Pixel counter related code>>(Ch.2.2.6)  
Note:  
In the pixel counter function, the twin color copy mode is regarded as the full color mode.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Func- <Accept-  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
2
1500  
Pixel  
counter  
Standard paper size setting  
ALL  
EUR: 0  
UC: 1  
JPN: 0  
<0-1>  
SYS Selects the standard  
paper size to convert it  
into the pixel count (%).  
0: A4  
1
1: LT  
1501  
1502  
Pixel  
counter  
Pixel counter all clearing  
Service technician refer-  
ALL  
ALL  
-
-
SYS Clears all information  
related to the pixel  
counter.  
SYS Clears all information  
related to the service  
technician reference  
pixel counter.  
3
3
Pixel  
counter ence counter clearing  
1503  
1504  
Pixel  
Toner cartridge reference  
ALL  
ALL  
-
SYS Clears all information  
related to the toner car-  
tridge reference pixel  
counter.  
SYS Selects whether or not  
to display the pixel  
counter on the LCD  
screen.  
3
1
counter counter clearing  
Pixel  
counter ting  
Pixel counter display set-  
1
<0-1>  
0: Displayed  
1: Not displayed  
1505  
Pixel  
counter ting  
Displayed reference set-  
ALL  
0
SYS Selects the reference  
when displaying the  
pixel counter on the  
LCD screen.  
1
<0-1>  
0: Service technician  
reference  
1: Toner cartridge ref-  
erence  
1506  
1507  
Pixel  
Toner empty determination  
ALL  
ALL  
0
SYS Selects the counter to  
determine toner empty.  
0: Output pages  
1
1
counter counter setting  
<0-1>  
1: Pixel counter  
Pixel  
Threshold setting for toner  
500  
<0-999>  
SYS Sets the number of out-  
put pages to determine  
toner empty. This set-  
ting is valid when “0” is  
set at 08-1506.  
counter empty determination (Out-  
put pages)  
1508  
Pixel  
Threshold setting for toner  
ALL  
21500  
<0-  
60000>  
SYS Sets the number of out-  
put pages to determine  
toner empty. This set-  
ting is valid when “1” is  
set at 08-1506.  
1
counter empty determination (Pixel  
counter)  
1509  
1510  
1511  
Pixel  
Pixel counter clear flag/  
ALL  
ALL  
0
SYS Becomes “1” when 08-  
1502 is performed.  
2
2
2
counter Service technician refer-  
ence  
Pixel  
<0-1>  
Service technician refer-  
-
-
SYS Displays the date on  
which 08-1502 was per-  
formed.  
SYS Displays the date on  
which 08-1503 was per-  
formed.  
counter ence cleared date  
Pixel  
Toner cartridge reference  
ALL  
(color)  
counter cleared date (Y)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
-
1512  
Pixel  
Toner cartridge reference  
ALL  
SYS Displays the date on  
which 08-1503 was per-  
formed.  
SYS Displays the date on  
which 08-1503 was per-  
formed.  
SYS Displays the date on  
which 08-1503 was per-  
formed.  
SYS Displays the date on  
which 08-1503 was per-  
formed.  
SYS Displays the date on  
which 08-1503 was per-  
formed.  
SYS Displays the date on  
which 08-1503 was per-  
formed.  
SYS Displays the date on  
which 08-1503 was per-  
formed.  
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
counter cleared date (M)  
(color)  
1513  
1514  
1515  
1516  
1517  
1518  
1547  
Pixel  
Toner cartridge reference  
ALL  
(color)  
-
-
-
-
-
-
counter cleared date (C)  
Pixel  
Toner cartridge reference  
ALL  
counter cleared date (K)  
Pixel  
Toner cartridge reference  
ALL  
(color)  
counter count started date (Y)  
Pixel  
Toner cartridge reference  
ALL  
(color)  
counter count started date (M)  
Pixel  
Toner cartridge reference  
ALL  
(color)  
counter count started date (C)  
Pixel  
Toner cartridge reference  
ALL  
counter count started date (K)  
Pixel  
counter fullcolor  
(Service technicianrefer-  
Number of output pages/  
PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of  
(color)  
output pagesconverted  
to the standard paper  
sizein the copy function,  
full color modeand ser-  
vice technician refer-  
ence.  
ence)  
[Unit. page]  
1548  
1549  
1550  
Pixel  
Number of output pages/  
PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of  
2
2
2
counter black (Service technician  
reference)  
(black)  
output pages con-  
verted to the standard  
paper sizein the copy  
function, black mode  
and service technician  
reference.  
[Unit. page]  
Pixel  
Number of output pages/  
PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of  
counter fullcolor (Service techni-  
(color)  
output pages con-  
verted to the standard  
paper size in the printer  
function, full color mode  
and service technician  
reference.  
cian reference)  
[Unit. page]  
Pixel  
Number of output pages/  
PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of  
counter black (Service technician  
reference)  
(black)  
output pages con-  
verted to the standard  
paper size in the printer  
function, black mode  
and service technician  
reference.  
[Unit. page]  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 174  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1551  
Pixel  
Number of output pages/  
FAX  
(black)  
<8 digits> SYS Counts the number of  
output pages con-  
2
counter black (Service technician  
reference)  
verted to the standard  
paper size in the FAX  
function, black mode  
and service technician  
reference.  
2
[Unit. page]  
1552  
Pixel  
Number of output pages/  
PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of  
2
counter full color (K) (Toner car-  
tridge reference)  
(color)  
output pages con-  
verted to the standard  
paper size in the copy  
function, full color  
mode, toner K and  
toner cartridge refer-  
ence.  
[Unit. page]  
1553  
1554  
Pixel  
Number of output pages/  
PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of  
2
2
counter black (Toner cartridge ref-  
(black)  
output pages con-  
verted to the standard  
paper size in the copy  
function, black mode  
and toner cartridge ref-  
erence.  
erence)  
[Unit. page]  
Pixel  
Number of output pages/  
PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of  
counter full color (K) (Toner car-  
(color)  
output pages con-  
verted to the standard  
paper size in the printer  
function, full color  
mode, toner K and  
toner cartridge refer-  
ence.  
tridge reference)  
[Unit. page]  
1555  
1556  
1557  
Pixel  
Number of output pages/  
PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of  
2
2
2
counter black (Toner cartridge ref-  
erence)  
(black)  
output pages con-  
verted to the standard  
paper size in the printer  
function, black mode  
and toner cartridge ref-  
erence.  
[Unit. page]  
Pixel  
Number of output pages/  
FAX  
(black)  
<8 digits> SYS Counts the number of  
output pages con-  
counter black (Toner cartridge ref-  
erence)  
verted to the standard  
paper size in the FAX  
function, black mode  
and toner cartridge ref-  
erence.  
[Unit. page]  
Pixel  
Number of output pages/  
PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of  
counter full color (Y) (Toner car-  
tridge reference)  
(color)  
output pages con-  
verted to the standard  
paper size in the copy  
function, full color  
mode, toner Y and  
toner cartridge refer-  
ence.  
[Unit. page]  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1558  
Pixel  
Number of output pages/  
PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of  
2
2
2
2
2
counter full color (Y) (Toner car-  
(color)  
output pages con-  
verted to the standard  
paper size in the printer  
function, full color  
mode, toner Y and  
toner cartridge refer-  
ence.  
tridge reference)  
[Unit. page]  
1559  
1560  
1561  
1562  
Pixel  
Number of output pages/  
PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of  
counter full color (M) (Toner car-  
tridge reference)  
(color)  
output pages con-  
verted to the standard  
paper size in the copy  
function, full color  
mode, toner M and  
toner cartridge refer-  
ence.  
[Unit. page]  
Pixel  
Number of output pages/  
PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of  
counter full color (M) (Toner car-  
tridge reference)  
(color)  
output pages con-  
verted to the standard  
paper size in the printer  
function, full color  
mode, toner M and  
toner cartridge refer-  
ence.  
[Unit. page]  
Pixel  
Number of output pages/  
PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of  
counter full color (C) (Toner car-  
tridge reference)  
(color)  
output pages con-  
verted to the standard  
paper size in the copy  
function, full color  
mode, toner C and  
toner cartridge refer-  
ence.  
[Unit. page]  
Pixel  
Number of output pages/  
ALL  
(color)  
<8 digits> SYS Counts the number of  
output pages con-  
counter full color (C) (Toner car-  
tridge reference)  
verted to the standard  
paper size in the printer  
function, full color  
mode, toner C and  
toner cartridge refer-  
ence.  
[Unit. page]  
1563  
1564  
1565  
1566  
Pixel  
Toner cartridge Y replace-  
ALL  
(color)  
<3 digits> SYS Counts the number of  
time of the toner car-  
tridge Y replacement.  
<3 digits> SYS Counts the number of  
time of the toner car-  
tridge M replacement.  
<3 digits> SYS Counts the number of  
time of the toner car-  
tridge C replacement.  
<3 digits> SYS Counts the number of  
time of the toner car-  
2
2
2
2
counter ment counter  
Pixel  
Toner cartridge M replace-  
ALL  
(color)  
counter ment counter  
Pixel  
Toner cartridge C replace-  
ALL  
(color)  
counter ment counter  
Pixel  
Toner cartridge K replace-  
ALL  
counter ment counter  
tridge K replacement.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 176  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1577  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PPC  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the copy  
function, full color  
mode, all toner and ser-  
vice technician refer-  
ence.  
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
counter color (Y+M+C+K) (Service (color)  
technician reference)  
2
[Unit: 0.01%]  
1578  
1579  
1580  
1581  
1582  
1583  
1584  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PPC  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the copy  
function, full color  
mode, toner Y and ser-  
vice technician refer-  
ence.  
counter color (Y) (Service techni-  
cian reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PPC  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the copy  
function, full color  
mode, toner M and ser-  
vice technician refer-  
ence.  
counter color (M) (Service techni-  
cian reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PPC  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the copy  
function, full color  
mode, toner C and ser-  
vice technician refer-  
ence.  
counter color (C) (Service techni-  
cian reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PPC  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the copy  
function, full color  
mode, toner K and ser-  
vice technician refer-  
ence.  
counter color (K) (Service techni-  
cian reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PRT  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the printer  
function, full color  
mode, all toner and ser-  
vice technician refer-  
ence.  
counter color (Y+M+C+K) (Service (color)  
technician reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PRT  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the printer  
function, full color  
mode, toner Y and ser-  
vice technician refer-  
ence.  
counter color (Y) (Service techni-  
cian reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PRT  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the printer  
function, full color  
mode, toner M and ser-  
vice technician refer-  
ence.  
counter color (M) (Service techni-  
cian reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1585  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PRT  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the printer  
function, full color  
mode, toner C and ser-  
vice technician refer-  
ence.  
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
counter color (C) (Service techni-  
cian reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
1586  
1587  
1588  
1589  
1590  
1591  
1592  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PRT  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the printer  
function, full color  
mode, toner K and ser-  
vice technician refer-  
ence.  
counter color (K) (Service techni-  
cian reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PPC/  
PRT  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the copy/  
printer function, full  
color mode, all toner  
and service technician  
reference.  
counter color (Y+M+C+K) (Service  
technician reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PPC/  
PRT  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the copy/  
printer function, full  
color mode, toner Y and  
service technician refer-  
ence.  
counter color (Y) (Service techni-  
cian reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PPC/  
PRT  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the copy/  
printer function, full  
color mode, toner M  
and service technician  
reference.  
counter color (M) (Service techni-  
cian reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PPC/  
PRT  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the copy/  
printer function, full  
color mode, toner C  
and service technician  
reference.  
counter color (C) (Service techni-  
cian reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PPC/  
PRT  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the copy/  
printer function, full  
color mode, toner K and  
service technician refer-  
ence.  
counter color (K) (Service techni-  
cian reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/black  
PPC  
(black)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the copy  
function, black mode  
and service technician  
reference.  
counter (Service technician refer-  
ence)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 178  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1593  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/black  
PRT  
(black)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the printer  
function, black mode  
and service technician  
reference.  
2
2
2
counter (Service technician refer-  
ence)  
2
[Unit: 0.01%]  
1594  
1595  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/black  
FAX  
(black)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the FAX  
function, black mode  
and service technician  
reference.  
counter (Service technician refer-  
ence)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/black  
PPC/  
PRT/  
FAX  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the copy/  
printer/FAX function,  
black mode and ser-  
vice technician refer-  
ence.  
counter (Service technician refer-  
ence)  
(black)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
1596  
1597  
1598  
1599  
1600  
1601  
Pixel  
Latest pixel count/full color  
PPC  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the latest pixel  
count in the copy func-  
tion, full color mode, all  
toner and service tech-  
nician reference.  
2
2
2
2
2
2
counter (Y+M+C+K) (Service tech- (color)  
nician reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Latest pixel count/full color  
PPC  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the latest pixel  
count in the copy func-  
tion, full color mode,  
toner Y and service  
technician reference.  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
SYS Displays the latest pixel  
count in the copy func-  
tion, full color mode,  
toner M and service  
technician reference.  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
SYS Displays the latest pixel  
count in the copy func-  
tion, full color mode,  
toner C and service  
technician reference.  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
SYS Displays the latest pixel  
count in the copy func-  
tion, full color mode,  
toner K and service  
technician reference.  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
counter (Y) (Service technician ref-  
erence)  
Pixel  
Latest pixel count/full color  
PPC  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
counter (M) (Service technician ref-  
erence)  
Pixel  
Latest pixel count/full color  
PPC  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
counter (C) (Service technician ref-  
erence)  
Pixel  
Latest pixel count/full color  
PPC  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
counter (K) (Service technician ref-  
erence)  
Pixel  
Latest pixel count/full color  
PRT  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the latest pixel  
count in the printer  
function, full color  
mode, all toner and ser-  
vice technician refer-  
ence.  
counter (Y+M+C+K) (Service tech-  
nician reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1602  
Pixel  
Latest pixel count/full color  
PRT  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the latest pixel  
count in the printer  
function, full color  
mode, toner Y and ser-  
vice technician refer-  
ence.  
2
2
2
2
counter (Y) (Service technician ref-  
erence)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
1603  
1604  
1605  
Pixel  
Latest pixel count/full color  
PRT  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the latest pixel  
count in the printer  
function, full color  
mode, toner M and ser-  
vice technician refer-  
ence.  
counter (M) (Service technician ref-  
erence)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Latest pixel count/full color  
PRT  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the latest pixel  
count in the printer  
function, full color  
mode, toner C and ser-  
vice technician refer-  
ence.  
counter (C) (Service technician ref-  
erence)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Latest pixel count/full color  
PRT  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the latest pixel  
count in the printer  
function, full color  
mode, toner K and ser-  
vice technician refer-  
ence.  
counter (K) (Service technician ref-  
erence)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
1606  
1607  
1608  
1609  
Pixel  
Latest pixel count/black  
PPC  
(black)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the latest pixel  
count in the copy func-  
tion, black mode and  
service technician refer-  
ence.  
2
2
2
2
counter (Service technician refer-  
ence)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Latest pixel count/black  
PRT  
(black)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the latest pixel  
count in the printer  
function, black mode  
and service technician  
reference.  
counter (Service technician refer-  
ence)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Latest pixel count/black  
FAX  
(black)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the latest pixel  
count in the FAX func-  
tion, black mode and  
service technician refer-  
ence.  
counter (Service technician refer-  
ence)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PPC  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the copy  
function, full color  
mode, toner Y and  
toner cartridge refer-  
ence.  
counter color (Y) (Toner cartridge  
reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 180  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1610  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PPC  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the copy  
function, full color  
mode, toner M and  
toner cartridge refer-  
ence.  
2
2
2
counter color (M) (Toner cartridge  
reference)  
2
[Unit: 0.01%]  
1611  
1612  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PPC  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the copy  
function, full color  
mode, toner C and  
toner cartridge refer-  
ence.  
counter color (C) (Toner cartridge  
reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PPC  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the copy  
function, full color  
mode, toner K and  
toner cartridge refer-  
ence.  
counter color (K) (Toner cartridge  
reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
1613  
1614  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/black  
PPC  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the copy  
function, black mode  
and toner cartridge ref-  
erence.  
2
2
counter (Toner cartridge reference) (black)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PPC  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the copy  
function, full color/black  
mode, toner K and  
toner cartridge refer-  
ence.  
counter color (K)+black (Toner car-  
tridge reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
1615  
1616  
1617  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PRT  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the printer  
function, full color  
mode, toner Y and  
toner cartridge refer-  
ence.  
2
2
2
counter color (Y) (Toner cartridge  
reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PRT  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the printer  
function, full color  
mode, toner M and  
toner cartridge refer  
ence.  
counter color (M) (Toner cartridge  
reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PRT  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the printer  
function, full color  
mode, toner C and  
toner cartridge refer-  
ence.  
counter color (C) (Toner cartridge  
reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1618  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PRT  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the printer  
function, full color  
mode, toner K and  
toner cartridge refer-  
ence.  
2
counter color (K) (Toner cartridge  
reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
1619  
1620  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/black  
PRT  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the printer  
function, black mode  
and toner cartridge ref-  
erence.  
2
2
counter (Toner cartridge reference) (black)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PRT  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the printer  
function, full color/black  
mode, toner K and  
toner cartridge refer-  
ence.  
counter color (K)+black (Toner car-  
tridge reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
1621  
1622  
1623  
1624  
1625  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PPC/  
PRT  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the copy/  
printer function, full  
color mode, toner Y and  
toner cartridge refer-  
ence.  
2
2
2
2
2
counter color (Y) (Toner cartridge  
reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PPC/  
PRT  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the copy/  
printer function, full  
color mode, toner M  
and toner cartridge ref-  
erence.  
counter color (M) (Toner cartridge  
reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PPC/  
PRT  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the copy/  
printer function, full  
color mode, toner C  
and toner cartridge ref-  
erence.  
counter color (C) (Toner cartridge  
reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/full  
PPC/  
PRT/  
FAX  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the copy/  
printer/FAX function,  
black mode, toner K  
and toner cartridge ref-  
erence.  
counter color (K)+black (Toner car-  
tridge reference)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Average pixel count/black  
FAX  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the average  
pixel count in the FAX  
function, black mode  
and toner cartridge ref-  
erence.  
counter (Toner cartridge reference) (black)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 182  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1626  
Pixel  
Latest pixel count/full color  
PPC  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the latest pixel  
count in the copy func-  
tion, full color mode,  
toner Y and toner car-  
tridge reference.  
2
2
2
2
2
counter (Y) (Toner cartridge refer-  
ence)  
2
[Unit:0.01%]  
1627  
1628  
1629  
1630  
Pixel  
Latest pixel count/full color  
PPC  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the latest pixel  
count in the copy func-  
tion, full color mode,  
toner M and toner car-  
tridge reference.  
counter (M) (Toner cartridge refer-  
ence)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Latest pixel count/full color  
PPC  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the latest pixel  
count in the copy func-  
tion, full color mode,  
toner C and toner car-  
tridge reference.  
counter (C) (Toner cartridge refer-  
ence)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Latest pixel count/full color  
PPC  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the latest pixel  
count in the copy func-  
tion, full color mode,  
toner K and toner car-  
tridge reference.  
counter (K) (Toner cartridge refer-  
ence)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Latest pixel count/full color  
PRT  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the latest pixel  
count in the printer  
function, full color  
mode, toner Y and  
toner cartridge refer-  
ence.  
counter (Y) (Toner cartridge refer-  
ence)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
1631  
1632  
1633  
1634  
Pixel  
Latest pixel count/full color  
PRT  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the latest pixel  
count in the printer  
function, full color  
mode, toner M and  
toner cartridge refer-  
ence.  
2
2
2
2
counter (M) (Toner cartridge refer-  
ence)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Latest pixel count/full color  
PRT  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the latest pixel  
count in the printer  
function, full color  
mode, toner C and  
toner cartridge refer-  
ence.  
counter (C) (Toner cartridge refer-  
ence)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Latest pixel count/full color  
PRT  
(color)  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the latest pixel  
count in the printer  
function, full color  
mode, toner K and  
toner cartridge refer-  
ence.  
counter (K) (Toner cartridge refer-  
ence)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
Pixel  
Latest pixel count/black  
FAX  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the latest pixel  
count in the FAX func-  
tion, black mode and  
toner cartridge refer-  
counter (Toner cartridge reference) (black)  
ence. [Unit: 0.01%]  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1639  
Pixel  
Latest pixel count/black  
PPC  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the latest pixel  
count in the copy func-  
tion, black mode and  
toner cartridge refer-  
ence.  
2
counter (Toner cartridge reference) (black)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
1640  
Pixel  
Latest pixel count/black  
PRT  
0
<0-  
10000>  
SYS Displays the latest pixel  
count in the printer  
function, black mode  
and toner cartridge ref-  
erence.  
2
counter (Toner cartridge reference) (black)  
[Unit: 0.01%]  
1641-0  
1641-1  
1641-2  
1641-3  
1641-4  
1641-5  
1641-6  
1641-7  
1641-8  
1641-9  
1642-0  
1642-1  
1642-2  
1642-3  
1642-4  
1642-5  
1642-6  
1642-7  
1642-8  
1642-9  
Pixel  
Pixel count  
0-5%  
PPC <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
counter distribution/  
full color (Y)  
(color)  
are divided into 10  
ranges. The number of  
output pages in each  
range is displayed. In  
this code, the distribu-  
tions in the copy func-  
tion, full color mode and  
toner Y are displayed.  
[Unit: page]  
5.1-10%  
10.1-15%  
15.1-20%  
20.1-25%  
25.1-30%  
30.1-40%  
40.1-60%  
60.1-80%  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
80.1-  
100%  
0-5%  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data  
Pixel  
Pixel count  
counter distribution/  
full color (M)  
(color)  
are divided into 10  
ranges. The number of  
output pages in each  
range is displayed. In  
this code, the distribu-  
tions in the copy func-  
tion, full color mode and  
toner M are displayed.  
[Unit: page]  
5.1-10%  
10.1-15%  
15.1-20%  
20.1-25%  
25.1-30%  
30.1-40%  
40.1-60%  
60.1-80%  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
80.1-  
100%  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 184  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1643-0  
1643-1  
1643-2  
1643-3  
1643-4  
1643-5  
1643-6  
1643-7  
1643-8  
1643-9  
1644-0  
1644-1  
1644-2  
1644-3  
1644-4  
1644-5  
1644-6  
1644-7  
1644-8  
1644-9  
Pixel  
Pixel count  
0-5%  
PPC <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
counter distribution/  
(color)  
are divided into 10  
full color (C)  
ranges. The number of  
output pages in each  
range is displayed. In  
this code, the distribu-  
tions in the copy func-  
tion, full color mode and  
toner C are displayed.  
[Unit: page]  
5.1-10%  
10.1-15%  
15.1-20%  
20.1-25%  
25.1-30%  
30.1-40%  
40.1-60%  
60.1-80%  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
2
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
80.1-  
100%  
0-5%  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data  
Pixel  
Pixel count  
counter distribution/  
(color)  
are divided into 10  
full color (K)  
ranges. The number of  
output pages in each  
range is displayed. In  
this code, the distribu-  
tions in the copy func-  
tion, full color mode and  
toner K are displayed.  
[Unit: page]  
5.1-10%  
10.1-15%  
15.1-20%  
20.1-25%  
25.1-30%  
30.1-40%  
40.1-60%  
60.1-80%  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
80.1-  
100%  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1645-0  
1645-1  
1645-2  
1645-3  
1645-4  
1645-5  
1645-6  
1645-7  
1645-8  
1645-9  
1646-0  
1646-1  
1646-2  
1646-3  
1646-4  
1646-5  
1646-6  
1646-7  
1646-8  
1646-9  
Pixel  
Pixel count  
0-5%  
PRT <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
counter distribution/  
(color)  
are divided into 10  
full color (Y)  
ranges. The number of  
output pages in each  
range is displayed. In  
this code, the distribu-  
tions in the printer func-  
tion, full color mode and  
toner Y are displayed.  
[Unit: page]  
5.1-10%  
10.1-15%  
15.1-20%  
20.1-25%  
25.1-30%  
30.1-40%  
40.1-60%  
60.1-80%  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
80.1-  
100%  
0-5%  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data  
Pixel  
Pixel count  
counter distribution/  
(color)  
are divided into 10  
full color (M)  
ranges. The number of  
output pages in each  
range is displayed. In  
this code, the distribu-  
tions in the printer func-  
tion, full color mode and  
toner M are displayed.  
[Unit: page]  
5.1-10%  
10.1-15%  
15.1-20%  
20.1-25%  
25.1-30%  
30.1-40%  
40.1-60%  
60.1-80%  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
80.1-  
100%  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 186  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1647-0  
1647-1  
1647-2  
1647-3  
1647-4  
1647-5  
1647-6  
1647-7  
1647-8  
1647-9  
1648-0  
1648-1  
1648-2  
1648-3  
1648-4  
1648-5  
1648-6  
1648-7  
1648-8  
1648-9  
Pixel  
Pixel count  
0-5%  
PRT <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
counter distribution/  
(color)  
are divided into 10  
full color (C)  
ranges. The number of  
output pages in each  
range is displayed. In  
this code, the distribu-  
tions in the printer func-  
tion, full color mode and  
toner C are displayed.  
[Unit: page]  
5.1-10%  
10.1-15%  
15.1-20%  
20.1-25%  
25.1-30%  
30.1-40%  
40.1-60%  
60.1-80%  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
2
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
80.1-  
100%  
0-5%  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data  
Pixel  
Pixel count  
counter distribution/  
are divided into 10  
(color)  
full color (K)  
ranges. The number of  
output pages in each  
range is displayed. In  
this code, the distribu-  
tions in the printer func-  
tion, full color mode and  
toner K are displayed.  
[Unit: page]  
5.1-10%  
10.1-15%  
15.1-20%  
20.1-25%  
25.1-30%  
30.1-40%  
40.1-60%  
60.1-80%  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
80.1-  
100%  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(color)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1649-0  
1649-1  
1649-2  
1649-3  
1649-4  
1649-5  
1649-6  
1649-7  
1649-8  
1649-9  
1650-0  
1650-1  
1650-2  
1650-3  
1650-4  
1650-5  
1650-6  
1650-7  
1650-8  
1650-9  
Pixel  
Pixel count  
0-5%  
PPC <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
counter distribution/  
(black)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(black)  
are divided into 10  
ranges. The number of  
output pages in each  
range is displayed. In  
this code, the distribu-  
tions in the copy func-  
tion and black mode  
aredisplayed.  
black  
5.1-10%  
10.1-15%  
15.1-20%  
20.1-25%  
25.1-30%  
30.1-40%  
40.1-60%  
60.1-80%  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(black)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(black)  
[Unit: page]  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(black)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(black)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(black)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(black)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(black)  
PPC <8 digits> SYS  
(black)  
80.1-  
100%  
Pixel  
Pixel count  
0-5%  
PRT <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data  
counter distribution/  
(black)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(black)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(black)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(black)  
are divided into 10  
ranges. The number of  
output pages in each  
range is displayed. In  
this code, the distribu-  
tions in the printer func-  
tion and black mode are  
displayed.  
black  
5.1-10%  
10.1-15%  
15.1-20%  
20.1-25%  
25.1-30%  
30.1-40%  
40.1-60%  
60.1-80%  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(black)  
[Unit: page]  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(black)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(black)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(black)  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(black)  
80.1-  
100%  
PRT <8 digits> SYS  
(black)  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 188  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Default  
Func- <Accept-  
Pro-  
cedur  
e
Classifi-  
cation  
Code  
Items  
RAM  
Contents  
tion  
able  
value>  
1651-0  
1651-1  
1651-2  
1651-3  
1651-4  
1651-5  
1651-6  
1651-7  
1651-8  
1651-9  
Pixel  
Pixel count  
0-5%  
FAX  
(black)  
FAX  
(black)  
FAX  
(black)  
FAX  
(black)  
FAX  
(black)  
FAX  
(black)  
FAX  
(black)  
FAX  
(black)  
<8 digits> SYS The pixel count data  
are divided into 10  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
counter distribution/  
black  
ranges. The number of  
output pages in each  
range is displayed. In  
this code, the distribu-  
tions in the FAX func-  
tion and black mode are  
dis-played.  
5.1-10%  
10.1-15%  
15.1-20%  
20.1-25%  
25.1-30%  
30.1-40%  
40.1-60%  
60.1-80%  
<8 digits> SYS  
<8 digits> SYS  
<8 digits> SYS  
<8 digits> SYS  
<8 digits> SYS  
<8 digits> SYS  
<8 digits> SYS  
<8 digits> SYS  
<8 digits> SYS  
2
[Unit: page]  
FAX  
(black)  
FAX  
(black)  
80.1-  
100%  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<<PM support mode related code>>  
The management items at PM support mode can also be operated at setting mode (08).  
The following items are displayed or set by using sub-codes at PM management setting in the table  
below.  
<Sub-codes>  
0: Present number of output pages  
- Means the present number of output pages.  
1: Recommended number of output pages for replacement  
- Means the recommended number of output pages for replacement.  
2: Number of output pages at the last replacement  
- Means the number of output pages at the last replacement.  
3: Present driving counts  
- Means the present drive counts (1 count = 2 seconds).  
4: Recommended driving counts to be replaced  
- Means the recommended drive counts for replacement (1 count = 2 seconds).  
5: Driving counts at the last replacement  
- Means the drive counts at the last replacement.  
6: Present output pages for control  
- Means the present number of output pages for controlling.  
7: Present driving counts for control  
- Means the present drive counts for controlling (1 count = 2 seconds).  
8: Number of times replaced  
- Counts up when clearing the counter of each unit in the PM Support Mode Screen.  
Notes:  
Sub-code 0 is equivalent to sub-code 6.  
Sub-code 3 is equivalent to sub-code 7.  
When the value of sub-code 3 is changed, the value of sub-code 7 is also updated and vice  
versa.  
When "0" is set at one of sub-codes 0, 3, 6 and 7, the rest of them are automatically updated  
to "0".  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 190  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PM management set- Date of previous  
Items  
ting <Procedure 4>  
*Indicated in 8 digits  
replacement  
<Procedure 2>  
Remarks  
Photoconductive drum  
1150-0 to 8  
1158-0 to 8  
1166-0 to 8  
1174-0 to 8  
1182-0 to 8  
1190-0 to 8  
1198-0 to 8  
1200-0 to 8  
1151  
1159  
1167  
1175  
1183  
1191  
1199  
1201  
<Default values of code 1150  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 130,000/160,000/  
200,000  
Sub-code 4: 315,000/315,000/  
315,000  
2
Drum cleaning blade  
Drum cleaning brush  
Main charger grid  
Main charger wire  
<Default values of code 1158  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 130,000/160,000/  
200,000  
Sub-code 4: 315,000/315,000/  
315,000  
<Default values of code 1166  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 130,000/160,000/  
200,000  
Sub-code 4: 315,000/315,000/  
315,000  
<Default values of code 1174  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 130,000/160,000/  
200,000  
Sub-code 4: 315,000/315,000/  
315,000  
<Default values of code 1182  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 130,000/160,000/  
200,000  
Sub-code 4: 315,000/315,000/  
315,000  
Main charger wire clean-  
ing pad  
<Default values of code 1190  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 130,000/160,000/  
200,000  
Sub-code 4: 315,000/315,000/  
315,000  
Ozone filter  
<Default values of code 1198  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 130,000/160,000/  
200,000  
Sub-code 4: 315,000/315,000/  
315,000  
Developer material  
<Default values of code 1200  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 100,000/120,000/  
150,000  
Sub-code 4: 116,000/116,000/  
116,000  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PM management set- Date of previous  
Items  
ting <Procedure 4>  
*Indicated in 8 digits  
replacement  
<Procedure 2>  
Remarks  
Developer material Y  
1202-0 to 8  
1204-0 to 8  
1206-0 to 8  
1214-0 to 8  
1203  
1205  
1207  
1215  
<Default values of code 1202  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 24,000/30,000/37,500  
Sub-code 4: 28,000/28,000/28,000  
Developer material M  
Developer material C  
1st transfer roller  
<Default values of code 1204  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 24,000/30,000/37,500  
Sub-code 4: 28,000/28,000/28,000  
<Default values of code 1206  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 24,000/30,000/37,500  
Sub-code 4: 28,000/28,000/28,000  
<Default values of code 1214  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 390,000/480,000/  
600,000  
Sub-code 4: 1010,000/1010,000/  
1010,000  
Transfer belt  
1228-0 to 8  
1232-0 to 8  
1240-0 to 8  
1250-0 to 8  
1258-0 to 8  
1229  
1233  
1241  
1251  
1259  
<Default values of code 1228  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 390,000/480,000/  
600,000  
Sub-code 4: 1010,000/1010,000/  
1010,000  
Transfer belt cleaning  
blade  
<Default values of code 1232  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 130,000/160,000/  
200,000  
Sub-code 4: 337,000/337,000/  
337,000  
2nd transfer roller  
Pressure roller  
Oil roller  
<Default values of code 1240  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 300,000/360,000/  
450,000  
Sub-code 4: 468,000/468,000/  
468,000  
<Default values of code 1250  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 100,000/120,000/  
150,000  
Sub-code 4: 285,000/285,000/  
285,000  
<Default values of code 1258  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 100,000/120,000/  
150,000  
Sub-code 4: 285,000/285,000/  
285,000  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 192  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PM management set- Date of previous  
Items  
ting <Procedure 4>  
*Indicated in 8 digits  
replacement  
<Procedure 2>  
Remarks  
Cleaning roller  
1260-0 to 8  
1270-0 to 8  
1272-0 to 8  
1276-0 to 8  
1261  
1271  
1273  
1277  
<Default values of code 1260  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 100,000/120,000/  
150,000  
Sub-code 4: 285,000/285,000/  
285,000  
2
Pressure roller separation  
finger  
<Default values of code 1270  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 100,000/120,000/  
150,000  
Sub-code 4: 285,000/285,000/  
285,000  
Fuser belt  
<Default values of code 1272  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 100,000/120,000/  
150,000  
Sub-code 4: 285,000/285,000/  
285,000  
Fuser belt guide  
<Default values of code 1276  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 100,000/120,000/  
150,000  
Sub-code 4: 285,000/285,000/  
285,000  
Pickup roller  
(RADF)  
1282-0, 1, 2, 8  
1284-0,1,2,8  
1286-0, 1, 2, 8  
1283  
1285  
1287  
<Default values of code 1282  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 120,000/120,000/  
120,000  
Feed roller  
(RADF)  
<Default values of code 1284  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 120,000/120,000/  
120,000  
Separation roller  
(RADF)  
<Default values of code 1286  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 120,000/120,000/  
120,000  
Pickup roller  
(Upper drawer)  
1290-0, 1, 2, 8  
1292-0,1,2,8  
1294-0,1,2,8  
1291  
1293  
1295  
<Default values of code 1290  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000  
Pickup roller  
(Lower drawer)  
<Default values of code 1292  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000  
Pickup roller  
(LCF)  
<Default values of code 1294  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 160,000/160,000/  
160,000  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PM management set- Date of previous  
Items  
Feed roller  
ting <Procedure 4>  
*Indicated in 8 digits  
replacement  
<Procedure 2>  
Remarks  
1298-0,1,2,8  
1300-0,1,2,8  
1302-0, 1, 2, 8  
1299  
1301  
1303  
<Default values of code 1298  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0  
(Upper drawer)  
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000  
Feed roller  
(Lower drawer)  
<Default values of code 1300  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000  
Feed roller  
(LCF)  
<Default values of code 1302  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 160,000/160,000/  
160,000  
Separation roller  
(Upper drawer)  
1306-0,1,2,8  
1308-0,1,2,8  
1310-0,1,2,8  
1307  
1309  
1311  
<Default values of code 1306  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000  
Separation roller  
(Lower drawer)  
<Default values of code 1308  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000  
Separation roller  
(LCF)  
<Default values of code 1310  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 160,000/160,000/  
160,000  
Separation roller  
(PFP upper drawer)  
1312-0,1,2,8  
1314-0,1,2,8  
1316-0,1,2,8  
1320-0,1,2,8  
1322-0,1,2,8  
1324-0,1,2,8  
1328-0,1,2,8  
1313  
1315  
1317  
1321  
1323  
1325  
1329  
<Default values of code 1312  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000  
Separation roller  
(PFP lower drawer)  
<Default values of code 1314  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000  
Separation roller  
(Bypass unit)  
<Default values of code 1316  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000  
Feed roller  
(PFP upper drawer)  
<Default values of code 1320  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000  
Feed roller  
(PFP lower drawer)  
<Default values of code 1322  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000  
Feed roller  
(Bypass unit)  
<Default values of code 1324  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000  
Pickup roller  
(PFP upper drawer)  
<Default values of code 1328  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 194  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PM management set- Date of previous  
Items  
Pickup roller  
ting <Procedure 4>  
*Indicated in 8 digits  
replacement  
<Procedure 2>  
Remarks  
1330-0,1,2,8  
1332-0, 1, 2, 8  
1838-0 to 8  
1331  
1333  
1839  
<Default values of code 1330  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0  
(PFP lower drawer)  
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000  
Pickup roller  
(Bypass unit)  
<Default values of code 1332  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0  
2
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000  
Pressure roller  
discharge brush  
<Default values of code 1838  
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>  
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0  
Sub-code 1: 100,000/120,000/  
150,000  
Sub-code 4: 285,000/285,000/  
285,000  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<<Procedure to copy the total counter value (08-257)>>  
(1) Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.  
(2) Key in the code “257” with the digital keys and press the [START] button (the following is dis-  
played).  
Note:  
Before performing the following operations, note the current counter values.  
Fig.2-3  
(3) Key in the value “1” or “2” and press the [START] button.  
The value entered is displayed on the left of the “%”, and the [ENTER] button is displayed.  
Note:  
The value can be erased by pressing the [CLEAR] button to change as long as the [START] but-  
ton is not pressed. (The value on the left of the “%” is reset to “0” by pressing the [CLEAR] but-  
ton.)  
Key in “1” to copy the value of the total  
counter (LGC board) (A) onto the value of  
the backup counter (SYS board) (B).  
(A)  
(B)  
Fig.2-4  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 196  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Key in “2” to copy the value of the backup  
counter (SYS board) (B) onto the value of  
the total counter (LGC board) (A).  
(A)  
(B)  
2
Fig.2-5  
(4) Press the [ENTER] button to complete overwriting of the counter value.  
Note:  
The screen returns to the code entry screen without copying (overwriting) the value when the  
[CANCEL] button is pressed.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.2.6  
Pixel counter  
1) Outline  
Pixel counter is a function that counts the number of dots emitted by the laser and converts it into the  
print ratio (%) per standard paper size. This “Print ratio (%) per standard paper size” is called Pixel  
count (%).  
This function enables you to know how each user uses the equipment and to grasp the tendency of  
toner consumption (number of output pages per cartridge).  
2) Factors affecting toner consumption  
Standard number of output pages per cartridge shows the average number of output pages under  
the condition that the data of print ratio 6% is printed on the standard paper size (A4/LT) at a normal  
temperature and humidity.  
However, users do not always print under the above condition. As for the type of original, copy/print  
mode and environment, each user has different tendency, and as a result, the number of output  
pages per cartridge becomes different depending on the user.  
The major factors affecting toner consumption are as follows:  
-
-
-
-
Original/Data coverage  
Original/Data density  
Original/Print mode  
Density setting  
Also there are other factors in addition to the above, such as environment, individual difference of  
equipment, difference in lot quality of materials, toner density and drum surface potential.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 198  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The general relations between the above 4 factors and toner consumption per output page in the  
copy function are as follows:  
2
Original coverage  
Original density  
TEXT  
/PHOTO  
PRINTED  
IMAGE  
Manual Manual Automatic Manual Manual Manual  
density density density density density density  
TEXT  
PHOTO  
MAP  
-5  
-1  
Center  
+1  
+5  
Density setting  
Original mode  
Fig.2-6 Factors affecting toner consumption and the tendency  
3) Details of pixel counter  
-
Toner cartridge reference and service technician reference  
The pixel counter function in this equipment has 2 references, toner cartridge reference and ser-  
vice technician reference.  
Toner cartridge reference  
This is a system that accumulates data between the installation of a new toner cartridge and next  
installation.  
The installation of new toner cartridge is judged when the total number of pixel count or output  
pages after the detection of toner cartridge empty has exceeded the threshold.  
The threshold to be used is selectable in the setting mode (08-1506) between the pixel count and  
output pages (0: Output pages 1: Pixel counter). The threshold of pixel count is set in the setting  
mode (08-1508) and that of output pages is set in the setting mode (08-1507). When the new  
toner cartridge is judged as installed, the data related with the previous cartridge is cleared and  
replaced with the data after the installation of new cartridge. Clearing of the counter of the toner  
cartridge reference is performed in the setting mode (08-1503).  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service technician reference  
This is a system that accumulates data between clearing the counter of the service technician  
reference by service technician and subsequently clearing the same counter.  
Clearing of the counter of the service technician reference is performed in the setting mode (08-  
1502).  
-
Print count (number of output pages)  
The number of output pages shown at the pixel counter is counted after converting all paper  
sizes to the standard paper size (A4/LT). Printing on other than the standard size is converted by  
paper area ratio. The standard paper size is set in the setting mode (08-1500).  
The examples of conversion are as follows:  
Ex.)  
“1” is added to the print count when printing on A4/LT size.  
“2” is added to the print count when printing on A3/LD size. (area ratio to A4/LT: 200%)  
“1.49” is added to the print count when printing on B4 size. (area ratio to A4: 149%)  
“1.27” is added to the print count when printing on LG size. (area ratio to LT: 127%)  
-
Pixel count (%)  
Pixel count (%) shows the ratio of laser emitting pixels to all pixels on standard paper.  
The examples of pixel count are as follows:  
Note:  
In the following examples, ‘solid copy’ is considered to be 100%. But since the image has 4  
margins, it never becomes 100% actually.  
Ex.)  
Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)  
Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 5  
Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.)  
Pixel count: 0%, Print count: 5  
Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)  
Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.)  
Pixel count: 50%, Print count: 4  
Printing 3 pages on A4/LT size with 6% of laser emission  
Printing 1 page on A4/LT size with 2% of laser emission  
Pixel count: 5%, Print count: 4  
Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)  
Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 4  
Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with 6% of laser emission  
Pixel count: 6%, Print count: 4  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 200  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
-
Average pixel count (%) and latest pixel count (%)  
There are 2 types of the value calculated as the pixel count, average pixel count (%) and latest  
pixel count (%).  
Average pixel count (%)  
The average value of all pixel count data after each reference data is cleared is calculated and  
displayed.  
2
Latest pixel count (%)  
The value is displayed for printing just before the pixel counter is confirmed.  
-
Type of calculated data  
Since this is multifunctional and color equipment, the data of pixel count is calculated for each  
function and color.  
The following list is the information that can be confirmed by LCD screen. But actually, more  
information can be confirmed by the setting mode (08).  
See after-mentioned “5)-Display in the setting mode (08)” for details.  
{: With data  
: Without data  
Toner cartridge reference  
Magen  
Service technician reference  
Full color/Twin color  
Magen  
Yellow  
Cyan  
Black  
Black  
ta  
Total  
Yellow  
Cyan  
Black  
ta  
{
{
-
Copier function  
Printer function  
FAX function  
Total  
{
{
-
{
{
{
{
{
{
-
{
{
-
{
{
{
{
{
{
-
{
{
-
{
{
-
{
{
-
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Table 2-201 Type of calculated data  
-
Setting related with the pixel counter function  
Standard paper size setting  
The standard paper size (A4 or LT) to convert it into the pixel count is selected (08-1500).  
Pixel counter display setting  
Whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen is selected (08-1504).  
Display reference setting  
The reference when displaying the pixel counter on the LCD screen (toner cartridge reference or  
service technician reference) is selected (08-1505).  
Determination counter of toner empty  
This is the counter to determine the replacement of new toner cartridge after the toner empty is  
detected.  
After the toner empty is detected by the auto-toner sensor, this counter checks if toner empty is  
not detected one more time while the specified number of pixel count or output pages is counted.  
Pixel counter clearing  
There are 3 types for the pixel count clear as follows:  
08-1501: All information related to the pixel count is cleared.  
08-1502: All information related to the service technician reference pixel count is cleared.  
08-1503: All information related to the toner cartridge reference pixel count is cleared.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4) Relation between pixel count and toner consumption  
The user’s printing out the image with large coverage or high density may cause the large value of  
pixel count. And the setting that toner consumption becomes high in the original mode or density  
setting may cause it as well.  
In this case, the replacement cycle of toner cartridge is faster than the standard number of output  
pages. Therefore, this trend needs to be grasped for the service.  
The relation between pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge is as follows:  
Standard number of output pages (K)  
Y
Standard number of output pages (Y, M, C)  
Y/2  
X
X/2  
Y/10  
X/10  
60%  
Pixel count (%)  
6% 12%  
Fig.2-7 Pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 202  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5) Pixel counter confirmation  
-
Display on LCD screen  
Whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen is selected (0: Displayed, 1: Not  
displayed) in the setting mode (08-1504), and whether or not to display it at the service techni-  
cian reference or toner cartridge reference is selected (0: Service technician reference, 1: Toner  
cartridge reference) in the setting mode (08-1505).  
The following screen is displayed when the buttons, [USER FUNCTIONS], [COUNTER] and  
[PIXEL COUNTER] are pressed in this order after “Displayed” is selected with the code above  
and the power is, as usual, turned ON. (The displayed buttons are depending on the setting of  
08-1505.)  
2
Fig.2-8  
Fig.2-9 Reference selection screen  
When selecting and pressing the button in the above screen, each pixel counter screen is dis-  
played.  
[TONER CARTRIDGE] button: Information screen of toner cartridge reference is displayed.  
[SERVICE (COLOR)] button: Information screen of service technician reference (full color) is dis-  
played.  
[SERVICE (BLACK)] button: Information screen of service technician reference (black) is dis-  
played.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 203  
05/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following screen is displayed when pressing the [TONER CARTRIDGE] button.  
Fig.2-10 Information screen of toner cartridge reference  
The following screen is displayed when pressing the [SERVICE (COLOR)] button.  
Fig.2-11 Information screen of service technician reference (full color)  
The following screen is displayed when pressing the [SERVICE (BLACK)] button.  
Fig.2-12 Information screen of service technician reference (black)  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 204  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
-
Data list printing  
The data for pixel counter can be printed in the list print mode (9S).  
9S-104: The data of the toner cartridge reference is printed.  
9S-105: The data of service technician reference is printed.  
PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST  
2005.6.14 09:55  
2
SERVICEMAN  
No DATE  
Col.  
Y
Y
PPC  
PRN  
FAX  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
TOTAL  
45678  
45678  
45678  
Print Count [LT/A4]  
Average Pixel Count [%]  
Latest Pixel Count [%]  
0
1
2
20050614  
20050614  
20050614  
12345  
12345  
12345  
23456  
23456  
23456  
Y
Print Count [LT/A4]  
Average Pixel Count [%]  
Latest Pixel Count [%]  
9
20050614  
K
K
K
12345  
12345  
12345  
23456  
23456  
23456  
12345  
12345  
12345  
45678  
45678  
45678  
10 20050614  
11 20050614  
Fig.2-13 Data list of toner cartridge reference  
PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST  
2005.6.14 09:55  
TONERCARTRIDGE  
No DATE  
Col.  
Y
Y
PPC  
PRN  
FAX  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
TOTAL  
45678  
45678  
45678  
Print Count [LT/A4]  
Average Pixel Count [%]  
Latest Pixel Count [%]  
0
1
2
20050614  
20050614  
20050614  
12345  
12345  
12345  
23456  
23456  
23456  
Y
Print Count [LT/A4]  
Average Pixel Count [%]  
Latest Pixel Count [%]  
9
20050614  
K
K
K
12345  
12345  
12345  
23456  
23456  
23456  
12345  
12345  
12345  
45678  
45678  
45678  
10 20050614  
11 20050614  
Fig.2-14 Data list of service technician reference  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
-
Display in the setting mode (08)  
Information of pixel count can be also checked in the setting mode (08).  
For details, see  
Print count, pixel count  
Full color/Twin color  
Black  
(at color)  
+
Black  
Yellow Magenta  
Cyan  
1561  
1611  
1628  
1562  
1617  
1632  
-
Black  
1552  
1612  
1629  
1554  
1618  
1633  
-
Black  
Copier  
function  
Print count  
(page)  
1557  
1609  
1626  
1558  
1615  
1630  
-
1559  
1610  
1627  
1560  
1616  
1631  
-
1553  
1613  
1639  
1555  
1619  
1640  
1556  
1625  
1634  
-
-
Average pixel count  
(%)  
1614  
Latest pixel count  
(%)  
-
Printer  
function  
Print count  
(page)  
-
Average pixel count  
(%)  
1620  
Latest pixel count  
(%)  
-
FAX function  
Print count  
(page)  
-
Average pixel count  
(%)  
-
-
-
-
-
-
Latest pixel count  
(%)  
-
-
-
-
Total  
Average pixel count  
(%)  
1621  
1622  
1623  
-
1624  
Table 2-202 Pixel count code table (toner cartridge reference)  
Full color/Twin color  
Black  
Total  
Yellow Magenta  
Cyan  
Black  
Copier  
function  
Print count  
(page)  
1547  
-
1578  
1597  
-
-
1579  
1598  
-
-
-
1548  
Average pixel count  
(%)  
1577  
1596  
1549  
1582  
1601  
-
1580  
1581  
1592  
1606  
1550  
1593  
1607  
1551  
1594  
1608  
1595  
Latest pixel count  
(%)  
1599  
1600  
Printer  
function  
Print count  
(page)  
-
-
Average pixel count  
(%)  
1583  
1602  
-
1584  
1603  
-
1585  
1586  
Latest pixel count  
(%)  
1604  
1605  
FAX function  
Print count  
(page)  
-
-
Average pixel count  
(%)  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Latest pixel count  
(%)  
-
-
-
Total  
Average pixel count  
(%)  
1587  
1588  
1598  
1590  
1591  
Table 2-203 Pixel count code table (service technician reference)  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 206  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pixel count distribution  
Full color/Twin color  
Black  
Yellow  
Magenta  
Cyan  
Black  
Copier  
function  
Print count distribution  
(page)  
1641  
1642  
1643  
1644  
1549  
Printer  
function  
Print count distribution  
(page)  
1645  
-
1646  
-
1647  
-
1648  
-
1650  
1651  
FAX function Print count distribution  
(page)  
2
Table 2-204 Pixel count code table  
Note:  
By entering the sub code at the above code, the pixel count distribution can be displayed divid-  
ing into 10 ranges. The sub codes are as follows.  
0: 0 - 5%  
1: 5.1 - 10%  
2: 10.1 - 15% 3: 15.1 - 20% 4: 20.1 - 25%  
5: 25.1 - 30% 6: 30.1 - 40% 7: 40.1 - 60% 8: 60.1- 80% 9: 80.1 - 100%  
Other information  
Toner cartridge replacement counter.  
The toner cartridge replacement count is displayed.  
08-1563: Toner cartridge Y  
08-1564: Toner cartridge M  
08-1565: Toner cartridge C  
08-1566: Toner cartridge K  
Toner cartridge reference count started date  
The toner cartridge reference count started date is displayed.  
08-1515: Toner cartridge Y  
05-1516: Toner cartridge M  
08-1517: Toner cartridge C  
05-1518: Toner cartridge K  
Service technician reference cleared date  
The service technician reference cleared date (08-1510) is displayed.  
The date (08-1502 was performed) is stored.  
Toner cartridge reference cleared date  
The toner cartridge reference cleared date is displayed.  
The date (08-1503 was performed) is stored.  
08-1511: Toner cartridge Y  
05-1512: Toner cartridge M  
08-1513: Toner cartridge C  
05-1514: Toner cartridge K  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.2.7  
Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) / Setting Mode (08)  
Classification  
Adjustment Mode (05)  
Setting Mode (08)  
User interface  
[AMS]  
605  
[X in 1]  
650  
[Color specification]  
643, 644  
[Indicator]  
671  
[Edit copying]  
645, 646  
[Sound]  
610, 969, 970  
[Counter]  
202  
[Cascade]  
652, 653  
[ACS]  
268  
[Screen]  
207, 602  
[Administrator]  
263  
[Feeding setting]  
658, 659  
[Language]  
220, 221  
[Original counter]  
302  
[Original direction]  
628  
[Copy volume]  
300  
[Automatic calibration]  
632  
[Default setting]  
276, 277, 278, 279, 280, 281, 282, 283,  
284, 285, 286, 289, 331, 503, 585, 587,  
588, 603, 604, 607, 618, 642, 1479  
[Offsetting between jobs]  
682  
[Security level]  
1708  
[Sorting]  
627, 634, 641, 649  
[Timer]  
204, 205, 206  
[Template]  
1140  
[Image shift]  
636, 1429, 1430  
[Tray reset]  
648  
[Date]  
640  
[Annotation]  
651, 657  
[Displaying number]  
342  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 208  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Classification  
Adjustment Mode (05)  
Setting Mode (08)  
User interface  
[Job Build]  
1130, 1131  
[File]  
209, 218, 219  
[Department management]  
617, 620, 621, 622, 623, 624, 629  
[Black-free]  
343  
2
[Book duplexing]  
611  
[Box printing]  
951, 953, 954  
[Paper size]  
613  
[Blank copy prevention]  
625  
Scanner  
[Log table]  
[E-mail]  
361, 362  
[Image position]  
305, 306  
272, 273  
[Carriage position]  
359, 360  
[Fixed value]  
363, 364  
[Shading position]  
350, 351  
[Distortion]  
308  
[Reproduction ratio]  
340  
Fax  
[Function]  
1498, 1926  
[Destination]  
701  
[Default setting]  
274  
[Priority drawer]  
689  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 209  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Classification  
Adjustment Mode (05)  
[Binarization]  
700, 701, 702  
[ACS]  
1065, 1066, 1675, 1676  
[RGB]  
1080, 1081, 1082  
Setting Mode (08)  
Image  
[ACS]  
609-0 to 4  
[Image quality]  
586, 589  
[Gamma correction]  
597  
[Color deviation correction]  
[Error diffusion / Dither]  
417-0 to 3, 418-0 to 3, 953-0 to 3,  
954-0 to 3, 955-0 to 3, 956-0 to 3  
[Image density]  
502  
[Automatic calibration]  
595  
501, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508, 509,  
510, 512, 514, 515, 710, 714, 715, 719,  
720, 724, 725, 729, 845, 846, 847, 850,  
851, 852, 855, 856, 857, 860, 861, 862,  
1550, 1551, 1552, 1553, 1554, 1560,  
1561, 1562, 1563, 1564, 1570, 1571,  
1572, 1573, 1574, 1580, 1581, 1582,  
1583, 1584  
[Default setting]  
550  
[Smoothing]  
561, 562  
[Pixel size]  
663  
[Color balance]  
1010-0 to 2, 1011-0 to 2, 1012-0 to 2,  
1013-0 to 2, 1014-0 to 2, 1015-0 to 2,  
1016-0 to 2, 1017-0 to 2, 1018-0 to 2,  
1019-0 to 2, 1020-0 to 2, 1021-0 to 2,  
1022-0 to 2, 1023-0 to 2, 1024-0 to 2,  
1025-0 to 2, 1026-0 to 2, 1027-0 to 2,  
1028-0 to 2, 1029-0 to 2, 1030-0 to 2,  
1031-0 to 2, 1032-0 to 2, 1033-0 to 2,  
1034-0 to 2, 1035-0 to 2, 1036-0 to 2,  
1037-0 to 2, 1038-0 to 2, 1039-0 to 2,  
1040-0 to 2, 1041-0 to 2, 1779-0 to 2,  
1780-0 to 2, 1781-0 to 2, 1782-0 to 2,  
1783-0 to 2, 1784-0 to 2, 1785-0 to 2,  
1786-0 to 2, 1787-0 to 2, 1788-0 to 2,  
1789-0 to 2, 1790-0 to 2, 1791-0 to 2,  
1792-0 to 2, 1793-0 to 2, 1794-0 to 2,  
1795-0 to 2, 1796-0 to 2, 1797-0 to 2,  
1798-0 to 2  
[Gamma adjustment]  
580, 1000, 1001, 1002, 1003, 1642, 1643  
[Gamma balance]  
590-0 to 2, 591-0 to 2, 592-0 to 2,  
596-0 to 2, 597-0 to 2, 598-0 to 2,  
599-0 to 2, 880-0 to 2, 881-0 to 2,  
882-0 to 2, 883-0 to 2  
[Highlight pen]  
1769, 1770, 1771, 1772  
[Reproduction level adjustment]  
1725  
[Maximum text density]  
1630, 1631, 1632, 1633  
[Background/Black density]  
1075, 1076, 1077  
[Background processing]  
600, 601, 602, 848, 853, 858, 1070, 1071,  
1072, 1688, 1689, 1690, 1691, 1692,  
1693, 1694, 1695, 1696, 1697, 1698,  
1699, 1700, 1701, 1702, 1708, 1709,  
1710, 1711, 1712  
[Sharpness]  
604, 605, 606, 667-0 to 4, 840, 841, 842, 843,  
1086, 1087, 1088, 1737, 1738, 1739,  
1740, 1741, 1757  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 210  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Classification  
Adjustment Mode (05)  
[Smudged/faint text]  
Setting Mode (08)  
Image  
648, 654, 655  
[Black reproduction switching]  
1761  
[Toner saving]  
664, 665, 1055, 1056, 1057, 1058  
[Toner amount]  
1046-0 to 1, 1047-0 to 1, 1048-0 to 1,  
1049-0 to 1, 1050-0 to 1, 1612, 1613,  
1614, 1615, 1616  
2
[Reproduction ratio]  
884, 1060  
[Margin]  
430, 431, 432, 433, 434-0 to 1, 435, 436,  
437, 438, 439  
[Range correction]  
532, 533, 534, 570, 571, 572, 693, 694,  
695, 825, 826, 827, 828, 830, 831, 832,  
833, 835, 836, 837, 838  
Image control [Temperature/Humidity]  
[2nd transfer]  
544, 545, 546, 548  
393  
[Color/Black developer]  
338, 339, 372, 373, 386-0 to 3  
[Contrast voltage]  
330-0 to 3, 332-0 to 3, 380-0 to 3,  
381-0 to 3, 1800-0 to 3, 1801-0 to 3,  
1811-0 to 3, 1812-0 to 3, 1815-0 to 3  
[Performing]  
[Abnormality detection]  
573, 574, 575, 576  
[Contrast voltage]  
554, 556, 558  
[Automatic starting]  
559, 565, 566, 567, 568, 569, 570, 571,  
572  
394, 395, 396, 398-0 to 3  
[Sensor]  
388, 389, 391-0 to 3, 390-0 to 3, 392  
[Main charger]  
[Smoothing]  
560  
[Setting]  
549, 551  
334, 335, 385-0 to 3, 1805-0 to 3,  
1806-0 to 3, 1807-0 to 3, 1808-0 to 3,  
1809-0 to 3, 1810-0 to 3  
[Drum]  
552, 553  
[Laser power]  
555, 557  
[Background voltage]  
1804-0 to 3, 1813-0 to 3, 1814-0 to 3  
[Laser power]  
331-0 to 3, 333-0 to 3, 382-0 to 3,  
383-0 to 3, 384-0 to 3, 1802-0 to 3,  
1803-0 to 3, 1816-0 to 3, 1817, 1819,  
1820, 1821  
Drive system [Exit motor]  
424, 425  
[Transport motor]  
426, 427  
[Main motor]  
421, 422  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Classification  
Adjustment Mode (05)  
[Aligning amount]  
Setting Mode (08)  
[Feeding setting]  
254, 255, 619  
[Paper source]  
480, 481, 1135, 1431  
[detection]  
449, 1492  
[Setting]  
Feeding  
system  
448-0 to 3, 449-0 to 3, 450-0 to 3,  
452-0 to 3, 455-0 to 2, 457, 458-0 to 2,  
460-0 to 2, 461-0 to 2, 462-0 to 3,  
463-0 to 2, 469-0 to 3, 470-0 to 3,  
471-0 to 3, 472-0 to 3, 473, 474-0 to 2,  
475-0 to 9  
[Paper pushing amount]  
988  
466-0 to 7, 467  
[Coated paper Mode]  
675-0 to 4, 676, 677-0 to 5  
[Paper size]  
224, 225, 226, 227, 228, 256  
[Paper type]  
697  
[Paper dimension]  
210, 229, 230, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235,  
236, 237, 238, 239, 240, 241, 242, 243,  
244, 245, 246, 247, 248, 249, 470, 471  
[Paper retry]  
463-0 to 1, 464-0 to 1, 465-0 to 1,  
466-0 to 1, 467-0 to 1, 468-0 to 1, 482,  
1390, 1391, 1392, 1393, 1394, 1395,  
1396, 1397, 1398, 1399, 1400, 1401  
Laser  
[Write start]  
[Polygonal motor]  
410, 411, 440, 441, 442, 443, 444, 445,  
494, 495, 496, 498-0 to 1  
[Polygonal motor]  
401, 405  
398, 399, 478, 479, 483, 484, 485, 486,  
488, 489, 490  
[Sideways deviation]  
497-0 to 5  
Main charger [Grid]  
241, 242, 243, 244  
[Cleaning]  
511, 1389  
Developer  
[Auto-toner]  
200, 201, 202, 203, 204, 206  
[Color auto-toner]  
207, 208  
[Timing adjustment]  
499  
[Color auto-toner]  
819-0 to 2, 820-0 to 2, 823-0 to 2,  
824-0 to 2, 858-0 to 2, 859-0 to 2,  
860-0 to 1, 861-0 to 1, 862-0 to 1,  
863-0 to 1, 864, 865, 866-0 to 1, 867, 868,  
869, 870, 871, 872, 873-0 to 2, 874,  
875-0 to 2, 876-0 to 2, 877-0 to 2,  
878-0 to 2, 879-0 to 2, 880-0 to 2,  
881-0 to 2, 1414, 1800-0 to 2, 1801  
[Stabilization]  
821, 822-0 to 2, 1802-0 to 2  
[Toner nearly empty]  
1415, 1416  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 212  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Classification  
Adjustment Mode (05)  
[1st transfer]  
Setting Mode (08)  
Transfer  
[1st transfer]  
816  
[2nd transfer]  
487, 817  
210, 245, 250, 251, 281, 1829-0 to 2,  
1831, 1832, 1833, 1836, 1847, 1848,  
1849, 1850-0 to 3, 1861, 1862-0 to 3,  
1863, 1864  
[Temperature correction]  
818  
[2nd transfer]  
224, 225, 226, 227-0 to 3, 229-0 to 3,  
230-0 to 1, 231-0 to 1, 232-0 to 1,  
234-0 to 3, 236-0 to 3, 237-0 to 1,  
238-0 to 1, 239-0 to 1, 252, 253, 254, 255,  
275, 276, 277-0 to 3, 279-0 to 3,  
290-0 to 1, 291-0 to 1, 292-0 to 1,  
293-0 to 4, 294-0 to 3, 296-0 to 3,  
297-0 to 1, 298-0 to 1, 299-0 to 1,  
1822-0 to 4, 1823-0 to 3, 1825-0 to 3,  
1826-0 to 1, 1827-0 to 1, 1828-0 to 1,  
1839-0 to 1, 1840-0 to 1, 1841-0 to 1,  
1842-0 to 3, 1845-0 to 1  
2
[Cleaning]  
284, 285  
[Temperature/humidity]  
247, 248, 270  
Fuser  
[Temperature]  
409, 411, 410-0 to 1, 412-0 to 1,  
413-0 to 1, 416, 422, 436, 437-0 to 1,  
438-0 to 1, 458, 460  
[Time]  
415-0 to 1, 428-0 to 1, 459  
[Status counter]  
400  
[TWD and SAD models]  
849  
[Transport speed]  
430, 431, 432  
[Pre-running]  
417-0 to 1, 439-0 to 1, 440-0 to 1,  
441-0 to 1, 461, 526-0 to 1, 583-0 to 2, 584  
Image  
processing  
[Counter]  
1370, 1371, 1372, 1378, 1380, 1382,  
1385, 1386, 1387, 1388  
[Setting]  
815-0 to 2  
RADF  
[Aligning amount]  
354, 355  
[Switchback]  
462  
[Sensor/EEPROM]  
356  
[Transporting]  
357, 358, 365, 366  
[Volume]  
367, 368  
Finisher  
[Binding/Folding position]  
468-0 to 2  
[Stapling]  
704-0 to 1  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Classification  
Adjustment Mode (05)  
Setting Mode (08)  
Network  
[AppleTalk]  
1014, 1015, 1936  
[Bindery]  
1026  
[Community]  
1065, 1066  
[DDNS]  
1020, 1112  
[DHCP]  
1755, 1756, 1757, 1762  
[Directory]  
1028, 1029  
[DNS]  
1017, 1018, 1019  
[E-mail]  
265, 1097, 1098, 1477, 1478, 1489, 1491  
[File]  
1779, 1782, 1783, 1784, 1785, 1786  
[FTP]  
1055, 1059, 1060, 1089, 1090, 1091, 1092  
[HTTP]  
1030, 1031, 1032  
[IP Conflict]  
1440  
[IP Filter]  
1720, 1721, 1722, 1723, 1724, 1725,  
1726, 1727, 1728, 1729, 1730, 1731,  
1732, 1733, 1734, 1735, 1736, 1737,  
1738, 1739  
[IPP]  
1078, 1079, 1080, 1081, 1082, 1083,  
1084, 1085, 1086, 1087, 1088, 1447,1448,  
1449, 1450, 1451  
[IPX]  
1011, 1099  
[IP address]  
1006, 1007, 1008, 1009, 1010, 1767, 1768  
[LDAP]  
1016, 1138, 1488, 1923, 1924  
[LPD]  
1075, 1076, 1077  
[MAC address]  
1141  
[MIB]  
1063  
[NDS]  
1027  
[Netware]  
1128, 1129, 1134, 1143, 1144, 1148  
[NIC]  
1002  
[Novell]  
1093, 1094  
[PCL setting]  
973  
[POP3]  
1046, 1047, 1048, 1049, 1050, 1051, 1052  
[RawPort]  
945  
[Raw/TCP]  
1073, 1074  
[Raw printing]  
290, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295, 296, 297,  
298, 299, 978, 979  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 214  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Classification  
Adjustment Mode (05)  
Setting Mode (08)  
[Rendezvous]  
1103, 1104, 1105  
Network  
[Role Base Access]  
1493, 1928  
[Samba]  
1137, 1464  
[SearchRoot]  
1095  
[SMB]  
2
1023, 1024, 1025, 1117, 1124, 1136, 1950,  
1951  
[SMTP]  
1022, 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040, 1041,  
1042, 1100, 1101, 1102, 1111  
[SNTP]  
1441, 1442, 1444, 1445, 1446  
[SSL]  
1740, 1741, 1742, 1743, 1744, 1745,  
1746, 1747, 1748, 1749, 1750, 1751  
[STAGE]  
1939, 1940  
[TRAP]  
1069, 1070  
[InternetFAX]  
266, 1114, 1485  
[Offramp]  
1043, 1044, 1045  
[Function]  
1432, 1433, 1435, 1436  
[Automatic transferring]  
660, 661  
[Initialization]  
1119  
[Scan job]  
1781-0 to 1, 1915  
[Speed and settings]  
1003  
[Data retention period]  
259, 260, 264  
[Domain]  
1113, 1121, 1122, 1123  
[Authentication]  
1139, 1484, 1486, 1487, 1920, 1921, 1922,  
1925, 1937, 1952, 1953, 1954, 1955,  
1956, 1957, 1958, 1959  
[Print queue]  
1096  
[Frame type]  
1012  
[Local I/F]  
614  
Wireless LAN  
[Supplicant]  
1679, 1680, 1681, 1682, 1684, 1685,  
1686, 1688, 1689, 1690, 1691, 1692,  
1693, 1696, 1697, 1699, 1700, 1701,  
1702, 1703, 1704, 1705, 1706, 1707,  
1763, 1764, 1765, 1766  
[Driver]  
1661, 1662, 1663, 1664, 1665, 1666,  
1667, 1668, 1669, 1670, 1671, 1672,  
1673, 1674, 1675, 1676, 1677, 1678  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 215  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Classification  
Adjustment Mode (05)  
Setting Mode (08)  
[Data encryption]  
Bluetooth  
1715  
[Setting]  
1710, 1711, 1712, 1713, 1714  
[HDD]  
390, 391, 392, 393  
Counter  
[External counter]  
381, 1126  
[Counter copy]  
257  
[Count method]  
616, 663  
[Paper source]  
356, 357, 358, 359, 360, 370, 372, 374  
[Black toner cartridge drive]  
1410  
[Paper size]  
301-0 to 16, 303-0 to 16, 304-0 to 16,  
305-0 to 16, 306-0 to 16, 307-0 to 16,  
308-0 to 16, 309-0 to 16, 310-0 to 16,  
311-0 to 16, 312-0 to 16, 313-0 to 16,  
314-0 to 16, 315-0 to 16, 316-0 to 16  
[Tab paper]  
1412  
[Double count]  
344, 346, 347, 348, 349, 352, 353  
[Large/Small size]  
317-0 to 2, 318-0 to 2, 319-0 to 2,  
320-0 to 2, 321-0 to 2, 322-0 to 2,  
323-0 to 2, 324-0 to 2, 325-0 to 2,  
326-0 to 2, 327-0 to 2, 328-0 to 2,  
329-0 to 2, 330-0 to 2, 332-0 to 2,  
333-0 to 2, 334-0 to 2, 335-0 to 2  
[n-UP printing]  
1530-0 to 4, 1531-0 to 4, 1532-0 to 4,  
1533-0 to 1,1534-0 to 1, 1535  
Version  
[FAX]  
915  
[HDD]  
944  
[Engine]  
903, 905, 907, 908  
[System]  
900, 920, 921, 922, 923, 924, 925, 926,  
927, 928, 929, 930, 931, 933, 934, 935,  
936, 937, 938, 939  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 216  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Classification  
Adjustment Mode (05)  
Setting Mode (08)  
Maintenance [Equipment number]  
976  
[FSMS]  
258, 999  
[HTTP]  
726, 727, 728, 729, 730, 731  
[PM counter]  
223, 251, 252, 375, 376  
[Error history]  
253  
2
[Equipment number]  
995  
[Emergency Mode]  
710, 711  
[Service notification]  
702, 703, 707, 715, 716, 717, 718, 719,  
720, 721, 723, 767, 768, 769, 770, 771,  
772, 773, 774, 775, 776, 777, 778, 779,  
780, 781, 782, 783, 784, 785, 786, 787,  
788, 789, 790, 791, 792, 793, 794, 795,  
796, 1145, 1495  
[Supply order]  
732, 733, 734, 738, 739, 740, 741, 742,  
743, 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750,  
751, 752, 753, 754, 755, 756, 757, 758,  
759, 760, 761, 762, 763, 764, 765  
[Downloading]  
797  
[Telephone]  
250  
[Panel calibration]  
692  
Scrambler  
board  
[HDD]  
699  
[Key code]  
698  
[Installation]  
696  
Electronic  
Filing  
[Setting]  
267, 270, 950, 976, 1497  
Data overwrite  
kit  
[HDD]  
1422, 1424, 1426  
[NVRAM]  
1427  
[SRAM]  
1428  
[Releasing F200]  
633  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 217  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Classification  
Adjustment Mode (05)  
Setting Mode (08)  
General  
[HDD]  
271, 670, 690, 691, 693, 694  
[SYS ROM]  
1938  
[TAT partition]  
1118  
[Address book]  
1125  
[Administrator’s password]  
1778  
[Clearing]  
665, 669  
[Summer time]  
612  
[Destination]  
201  
[Initialization]  
947  
[Setting]  
949, 975, 986, 1132, 1470, 1471, 1494  
[Speed switching]  
497  
[Databases]  
684, 685, 686  
[Partition]  
662, 666, 667  
[Banner]  
678, 679, 680  
[Date/Time]  
200, 638  
[File]  
288  
[Department management]  
672  
[BANNER MESSAGE button]  
681  
[Memory]  
615  
[User data management]  
1468, 1469, 1472, 1473, 1474, 1481,  
1482, 1483, 1496  
[Line]  
203  
[Duplex printing]  
683  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
2 - 218  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. ADJUSTMENT  
3.1 Adjustment Order (Image Related Adjustment)  
This chapter mainly explains the procedures for image related adjustment. When replacing compo-  
nents which have other specified instructions for adjustment, those specified instructions are to be  
obeyed in priority.  
In the following diagram, the solid lines with arrow lead to essential adjustments, while the dotted lines  
lead to adjustments to be performed if necessary.  
Parts to be replaced  
Developer material  
Laser optical unit  
Drum cleaning blade  
Drum cleaner brush  
Drum  
Transfer belt  
1st transfer roller  
2nd transfer roller  
Image quality sensor  
Main charger wire  
Main charger grid  
3
Item to be adjusted  
Code in mode 05  
3.2 Adjustment of the auto-toner sensor  
200, 201, 202, 203, 204, 206  
Item to be adjusted  
Code in mode 05  
396  
3.3 Adjustment of image quality control /  
Automatic initialization of image quality control  
3.4 Image dimensional adjustment  
Items  
Order  
1
Code in mode 05  
3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller  
448, 449, 450, 452,  
455, 457, 458, 459,  
460, 461, 462, 463  
2
3
4
5
6
3.4.3  
Printer  
related  
adjustment  
(a) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction  
(b) Primary scanning data laser writing start position  
(c) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction  
(d) Transfer belt cleaning unit contact timing adjustment  
(e) Transfer belt cleaning unit release timing adjustment  
401  
411  
421  
284  
285  
441, 440, 444  
443, 442, 445  
7
8
(f) Secondary scanning data laser writing start position  
(g) Primary scanning data laser writing start position at  
duplexing  
498  
9
(a) Image distortion  
3.4.4  
Scanner  
related  
adjustment  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
(b) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction  
(c) Image location of primary scanning direction  
(d) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction  
(e) Image location of secondary scanning direction  
(f) Top margin  
405  
306  
340  
305  
430  
432  
433  
(g)Right margin  
(h) Bottom margin  
Item to be adjusted  
3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment PPC  
Code in mode 05  
(
)
(
1642, 1643, 580  
)
(
3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment PRT  
)
1000, 1001, 1002, 1003  
Item to be adjusted  
3.5.2 Color deviation adjustment PPC  
Code in mode 05  
(A3/LD)  
(
)
417, 418  
953, 954, 955, 956 (A4/LT)  
(
3.6.1 Color deviation adjustment PRT  
)
(
)
Chapter 3.5, 3.6, 3.7  
Adjust the image quality if necessary.  
END  
Fig.3-1  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3.2 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor  
When the developer material is replaced, adjust the auto-toner sensor in the following procedure.  
(1) Install the cleaner and developer unit.  
Note:  
Do not install the toner cartridge.  
(2) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. The following message will be dis-  
played.  
100%  
A
A3  
[ ] [ ]  
0 5  
[
]
POWER  
TEST MODE  
(3) Key in a code and press the [START] button.  
Code 200: All developer materials 201: Developer material Y 202: Developer material M  
203: Developer material C 204: Developer material K 206: Developer material Y, M, C  
100%  
200  
A3  
(
)
[
]
Code  
START  
TEST MODE  
(4) Adjustment for “K” (Magnetometric sensor control)  
The following message will be displayed approx. 2 minutes later.  
( )  
B
K: xxxV  
K: zzzV  
( )  
C
( )  
A
( ) ( )  
B : Current sensor voltage V  
( )  
C : No display  
( ) ( )  
A : Target values V for adjustment reference  
voltage  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note:  
The current sensor voltage (V) shown in (B) automatically changes, gradually approaching the  
target value for adjustment reference voltage shown in (A).  
In 30 to 60 seconds, the current sensor voltage (V) in (B) is converged. Then the sensor out-  
put control value (bit value) corresponding to the initial developer material is displayed in (C).  
( )  
B
K: xxxV  
K: yyy  
( )  
C
( )  
A
K: zzzV  
( ) ( )  
B : Current sensor voltage V  
3
( ) ( )  
C : Sensor output control value bit value  
( ) ( )  
A : Target value V for adjustment reference voltage  
Note:  
Be careful that the values in (A), (B) and (C) vary with humidity.  
In case of single-color adjustment, press the [ENTER] button to store the adjustment results  
in memory when the control value is displayed. In case of multiple-color adjustment, it is auto-  
matically proceeded to the adjustment of next color.  
(5) Adjustments for “Y”, “M” and “C” (light sensor control)  
In 15 to 45 seconds, the following message will be displayed (The time varies with the num-  
ber of colors to be adjusted).  
( )  
B
Y:  
Y:  
( )  
C
( )  
A
( ) ( )  
B : Current sensor voltage V  
( )  
C : No display  
( ) ( )  
A : Target value V for adjustment reference voltage  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note:  
The current sensor voltage (V) shown in (B) automatically changes, gradually approaching the  
target value for adjustment reference voltage shown in (A).  
After approx. 5 seconds have passed, the current sensor voltage (V) in (B) is converged.  
Then the sensor output control value (bit value) corresponding to the initial developer material  
is displayed in (C).  
( )  
B
Y: xxxV  
Y: yyy  
( )  
C
( )  
A
Y: zzzV  
( ) ( )  
B : Current sensor voltage V  
( ) ( )  
C : Sensor output control value bit value  
( ) ( )  
A : Target value V for adjustment reference voltage  
In case of single-color adjustment, press the [ENTER] button to store the adjustment results  
in memory when the control value is displayed. In case of multiple-color adjustment, it is auto-  
matically proceeded to the adjustment of next color. When the adjustments of all colors have  
finished and [ENTER] is lit, press [ENTER] button to store the adjustment results in memory.  
(6) Standard of adjustment value range  
(A): Adjustment reference voltages (V)  
Humidity(%)  
K
Y
M
C
29.9 or below  
2.47  
2.49  
2.50  
2.69  
2.86  
1.25  
1.25  
1.25  
30.0-44.9  
45.0-59.9  
60.0-74.9  
75.0 or above  
Note:  
Since the adjustments for “Y”, “M” and “C” are controlled by the light sensor, the humidity correc-  
tion is not performed.  
(B): Current sensor voltages (V)  
Humidity(%)  
K
Y
M
C
29.9 or below  
2.37-2.57  
2.39-2.59  
2.40-2.60  
2.59-2.79  
2.76-2.96  
1.15-1.35  
1.15-1.35  
1.15-1.35  
30.0-44.9  
45.0-59.9  
60.0-74.9  
75.0 or above  
Note:  
Since the adjustments for “Y”, “M” and “C” are controlled by the light sensor, the humidity correc-  
tion is not performed.  
(7) Turn the power OFF.  
(8) Install the toner cartridges.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.3 Performing Image Quality Control  
(1) When unpacking  
Prior to image dimensional adjustment, perform the “Automatic initialization of image quality con-  
trol (05-396)” procedure.  
(2) When any of the following parts is replaced, be sure to perform the “Automatic initialization of  
image quality control (05-396)” procedure.  
• Photoconductive drum  
• Image quality sensor  
• 2nd transfer roller  
• Developer material  
• Transfer belt  
• Main charger  
• Laser optical unit  
• 1st transfer roller  
• Main charger grid  
• Drum cleaning blade  
• Drum cleaner brush  
Note:  
3
When performing "Automatic gamma adjustment" in addition, “Automatic initialization of image  
quality control (05-396)” should be done first.  
(3) When performing "Automatic gamma adjustment" in cases no parts written above are replaced,  
do the “Forced performing of image quality closed-loop control (05-395)” procedure before "Auto-  
matic gamma adjustment".  
Code  
Item to be adjusted  
Contents  
395  
Forced performing of  
<Procedure>  
image quality closed-loop 1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
control  
Adjustment Mode  
2) Key in [395] and press the [START] button.  
3) "WAIT" is displayed.  
4) When the adjustment finishes normally, the equipment returns to the  
initial state of Adjustment Mode. If an error has occurred, take appro-  
priate action by referring to “5. TROUBLESHOOTING”.  
396  
Automatic initialization of <Procedure>  
image quality control 1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
Adjustment Mode  
2) Key in [396] and press the [START] button.  
3) "WAIT" is displayed.  
4) When the adjustment finishes normally, the equipment will return to  
initial state of the Adjustment Mode. If an error has occurred, take  
appropriate action by referring to “5. TROUBLESHOOTING”.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3.4 Image Dimensional Adjustment  
3.4.1  
General description  
There are several adjustment items in the image dimensional adjustment, as listed below. Prior to this  
image dimensional adjustment, perform the "Automatic initialization of image quality control (05-396)".  
When adjusting these items, the following adjustment order should strictly be observed.  
Item to be adjusted  
Code in mode 05  
1) Paper alignment at the registration roller  
448, 449, 450, 452, 455, 457,  
458, 459, 460, 461, 462, 463  
Printer  
related  
Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction  
(Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation speed)  
401  
adjustment  
Primary scanning data laser writing start position  
411  
421  
Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction  
(Fine adjustment of main motor rotation speed)  
Transfer belt cleaning unit contact timing adjustment  
Transfer belt cleaning unit release timing adjustment  
Secondary scanning data laser writing start position  
Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing  
Image distortion  
284  
285  
441, 440, 444, 443, 442, 445  
498  
-
Scanner  
related  
adjustment  
Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction  
Image location of primary scanning direction  
Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction  
Image location of secondary scanning direction  
Top margin  
405  
306  
340  
305  
430  
432  
433  
Right margin  
Bottom margin  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
[Procedure to key in adjustment values]  
In accordance with the procedure described below, make adjustment of each adjustment item so that  
the measured values obtained from test copies satisfy the specification. By pressing the [FAX] button,  
immediately after starting the Adjustment Mode (05), single-sided test copying can be performed (nor-  
mal copy mode).  
<Operation keys>  
<Display>  
100%  
A
A3  
0
5
TEST MODE  
POWER  
1
Code No.  
Digital keys : Key in codes.  
100%  
XXX  
A3  
3
START  
TEST MODE  
Digital keys : Key in adjustment  
values.  
YYY  
ZZZ  
Adjustment value newly keyed in.  
(If no entering, YYY is displayed.)  
Current adjustment value  
( CLEAR Use to make corrections)  
100%  
A
A
A3  
A3  
Value ZZZ is stored  
replacing values YYY.  
ENTER  
or  
TEST MODE  
INTERRUPT  
FAX  
100%  
Test copy  
START  
Wait Warming Up  
If the test copy does not  
satisfy the specified values,  
return to step 1 and  
repeat the adjustment  
procedure.  
100%  
A
A3  
COPYING  
Power OFF/ON : Exit the Adjustment Mode.  
Fig.3-2  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.4.2  
Paper alignment at the registration roller  
The aligning amount is adjusted by using the following codes in Adjustment Mode (05).  
PFP  
upper  
drawer  
PFP  
lower  
drawer  
Bypass feed  
Black Color  
458 (*1)  
Upper  
drawer  
Lower  
drawer  
Paper type  
Weight  
LCF  
ADU  
2
Plain paper  
450 (*4) 452 (*4) 448 (*4) 449 (*4)  
457  
455 (*1)  
64-80 g/m  
17-20 lb.  
2
Thick  
paper 1  
469 (*4) 470 (*4) 471 (*4) 472 (*4)  
473  
474 (*1)  
460 (*1)  
81-105 g/m  
21-28 lb.  
2
2
Thick  
paper 2  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
461  
(*1)  
475  
(*3)  
106-163 g/m  
29-43 lb.  
Thick  
paper 3  
462  
(*2)  
475  
(*3)  
164-209 g/m  
44-55 lb.  
OHP film  
-
463  
(*1)  
475  
(*3)  
Sub-code  
(*1) 0: Long size  
(*2) 0: Long size  
1: Middle size  
1: Middle size  
2: Short size  
2: Short size  
3: Post card  
(*3) 0: Long size of thick paper 2  
2: Short size of thick paper 2  
4: Middle size of thick paper 3  
6: Long size of OHP film  
1: Middle size of thick paper 2  
3: Long size of thick paper 3  
5: Short size of thick paper 3  
7: Middle size of OHP film  
9: Post card  
8: Short size of OHP film  
(*4) 0: Long size  
1: Middle size  
2: Short size 1  
3: Short size 2  
Notes:  
1. Long size: 330 mm or longer (13.0 inches or longer)  
Middle size: 220-329 mm (8.7-12.9 inches)  
Short size: 219 mm or shorter (8.6 inches or shorter)  
Short size 1: 205-219 mm (8.1-8.6 inches or shorter)  
Short size 2: 204 mm or shorter (8.0 inches or shorter)  
2. The adjustment of “Post card” is for Japan only.  
<Procedure>  
(
)
Not necessary for LCF  
Enter new  
value  
[ ][ ]  
0 5  
Power  
Current value  
displayed  
(
)
[
]
(
)
[
]
Code  
START  
Sub-code  
START  
[
]
[
]
SET or  
[
]
POWER  
OFF/ON  
[
Drawer  
selection  
(
)
*5 + FAX  
[
]
[
]
INTERRUPT  
Stores in memory  
]
(
)
Test print  
(
)
Exit  
(*5) 1: Single-sided grid pattern in Black Mode  
3: Double-sided grid pattern in Black Mode  
55: Grid pattern of thick paper 2 in Full Color Mode  
56: Grid pattern of thick paper 3 in Full Color Mode  
57: Grid pattern of OHP film in Full Color Mode  
58: Single-sided grid pattern of thick paper 2 in Black Mode  
59: Single-sided grid pattern of thick paper 3 in Black Mode  
60: Single-sided grid pattern of OHP film in Black Mode  
Note:  
If the aligning amount is too large, abnormal noise (paper-folding noise) or actual paper folding  
may occur during paper feeding. If the aligning amount is too small, on the other hand, a skew,  
an image dislocation in feeding direction or a paper exit jam (E010) may occur. Pay attention to  
the above and select the appropriate value.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3.4.3  
Printer related adjustment  
The printer related adjustment is performed by using the printed out grid pattern.  
1
21  
A
6
B, E  
3
Fig.3-3  
Adjustment  
Tolerance  
Detail of adjustment  
A
200 ± 0.5mm  
Refer to “[A] Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of  
polygonal motor rotation speed (Printer))”  
B
C
52 ± 0.5mm  
200 ± 0.5mm  
Refer to “[B] Primary scanning data laser writing start position (Printer)”  
Refer to “[C] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment  
of main motor rotation speed (Printer))”  
D
E
52 ± 0.5mm  
52 ± 0.5mm  
Refer to “[F] Secondary scanning data laser writing start position”  
Refer to “[G] Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing”  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 9  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[A] Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation  
speed (Printer))  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.(Adjustment Mode)  
(2) Press [1] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower  
drawer.)  
(3) Measure the distance A from the 1st line to the 21st line of the grid pattern.  
(4) Check if the distance A is within 200±0.5 mm.  
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance A again.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [401]) [START]  
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))  
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
"100% A" is displayed.  
Press [1] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.)  
*
The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance A becomes (approx. 0.1 mm/step).  
[B] Primary scanning data laser writing start position (Printer)  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)  
(2) Press [1] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower  
drawer.)  
(3) Measure the distance B from the left edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.  
(4) Check if the distance B is within 52±0.5 mm.  
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance B again.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [411]) [START]  
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))  
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
"100% A" is displayed  
Press [1] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.))  
*
The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance B becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/  
step).  
[C] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of main motor rotation speed  
(Printer))  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)  
(2) Press [1] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower  
drawer.)  
(3) Measure the distance C from the 2nd line at the leading edge of the paper to the 22nd line of the  
grid pattern.  
*
Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.  
(4) Check if the distance C is within 200±0.5 mm.  
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance C again.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [426]) [START]  
*
Confirm that the input value is [153]. If not, key in [153].  
(Key in [153])  
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
(Key in the code [421]) [START]  
(Key in a value (recommended values: 110 to 140 / acceptable values: 0 to 255))  
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
*
When the value is not within the recommended values, the trailing edge area of the image  
may be out of position for the paper length or the density at the trailing edge area of the image  
may become lower. Perform the adjustment confirming the image.  
“100% A” is displayed  
Press [1] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.)  
*
The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance C becomes (approx. 0.5 mm/6  
steps).  
[D] Transfer belt cleaning unit contact timing adjustment  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)  
(2) According to the input value for “Adjustment of secondary scanning direction reproduction ratio  
(421)”, key in the value shown in the following table.  
3
*
Be sure to key in the correct value because incorrect value may reduce the cleaning effi-  
ciency of the transfer belt.  
Adjustment (code)  
Input value  
Adjustment of secondary scanning direction  
reproduction ratio (421)  
110  
147  
111-120 121-130 131-140  
Transfer belt cleaning unit contact timing  
adjustment (284)  
143  
141  
137  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [284]) [START]  
(Key in a value)  
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
[E] Transfer belt cleaning unit release timing adjustment  
This adjustment has to be performed after “Adjustment of secondary scanning direction reproduction  
ratio (421)” Acceptable values are 88 to 168. The larger the value is, the later the transfer belt cleaning  
unit release timing becomes.  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)  
(2) According to the input value for “Adjustment of secondary scanning direction reproduction ratio  
(421)”, key in the value shown in the following table.  
*
Be sure to key in the correct value because incorrect value may reduce the cleaning effi-  
ciency of the transfer belt.  
Adjustment (code)  
Input value  
Adjustment of secondary scanning direction  
reproduction ratio (421)  
110  
147  
111-120 121-130 131-140  
Transfer belt cleaning unit release timing  
adjustment (285)  
143  
141  
137  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [285]) [START]  
(Key in a value)  
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[F] Secondary scanning data laser writing start position  
This adjustment has to be performed for each paper source.  
The following table shows the order of the paper source to be adjusted, code, paper size and accept-  
able values.  
Order for  
adjustment  
Paper  
source  
Acceptable  
value  
Code  
Paper size  
Remarks  
1
Lower  
drawer  
441  
A3/LD  
0 to 80  
0 to 40  
2
Upper  
drawer  
440  
A4/LT  
3
4
5
PFP or LCF  
Bypass feed  
Duplexing  
444/443  
442  
A4/LT  
A4/LT  
A3/LD  
0 to 40  
0 to 40  
0 to 40  
445  
Paper fed from the lower drawer  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)  
(2) Press [1] ([3] for duplexing) [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out.)  
(3) Measure the distance D from the leading edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.  
*
*
Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.  
At the duplexing, measure it on the top side of the grid pattern.  
(4) Check if the distance D is within 52±0.5 mm.  
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance D again.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code shown above) [START]  
(Key in an acceptable value shown above)  
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
"100% A" is displayed  
Press [1] ([3] for duplexing)  
[FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.)  
*
The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance D becomes (approx. 0.2 mm/step).  
[G] Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing  
Note:  
Make sure the first line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished.  
[G-1] Adjustment for long-sized paper  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)  
(2) Press [3] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower  
drawer.)  
(3) Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the  
paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.  
(4) Check if the distance E is within 52±0.5 mm.  
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [498]) [START] [0] [START]  
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))  
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
"100% A" is displayed.  
Press [3] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.)  
*
The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/  
step).  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[G-2] Adjustment for short-sized paper  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)  
(2) Press [3] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A4/LT from the upper  
drawer.)  
(3) Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the  
paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.  
(4) Check if the distance E is within 52±0.5 mm.  
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [498]) [START] [1] [START]  
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))  
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
"100% A" is displayed  
Press [3] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.)  
3
*
The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/  
step).  
<Adjustment procedure summarization for A to E>  
[0] [5] [Power ON] [1] ([3](05-445, 498) for duplexing) [FAX]  
A: 05-401 (Lower drawer, A3/LD)  
B: 05-411 (Lower drawer, A3/LD)  
200±0.5 mm (0.1 mm/step)  
52±0.5 mm (0.04 mm/step)  
Key in the same value for 05-410.  
200±0.5 mm (0.5 mm/6 steps)  
52±0.5 mm (0.2 mm/step)  
C: 05-421 (Lower drawer, A3/LD)  
D: 05-440 (Upper drawer, A4/LT)  
441 (Lower drawer, A3/LD),  
442 (Bypass feed, A4/LT),  
443 (LCF, A4/LT), 444 (PFP, A4/LT),  
445 (Duplexing, A3/LD)  
E: 05-498-0 (Lower drawer, A3/LD),  
52±0.5 mm (0.04 mm/step)  
498-1 (Upper drawer, A4/LT)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.4.4  
Scanner related adjustment  
[A] Image distortion  
A
B
Feeding direction  
Step 1  
Feeding direction  
C
D
Step 2  
Fig.3-4  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
(2) Press [FAX] to make a copy of any image on a sheet of A3/LD paper.  
(3) Key in [308] and press the [START] button to move the carriage to the adjustment position.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(4) Make an adjustment in the order of step 1  
and 2.  
Step 1  
(
Adjustment screw for the mirror-3 Rear  
)
In case of A:  
Tighten the mirror-3 adjustment screw (CW).  
In case of B:  
Loosen the mirror-3 adjustment screw  
(CCW).  
Carriage-2  
3
Fig.3-5  
Step 2  
In case of C:  
Tighten the mirror-1 adjustment screw (CW).  
In case of D:  
Adjustment screw  
(
for the mirror-1 Rear  
)
Loosen the mirror-1 adjustment screw  
(CCW).  
Carriage-1  
Fig.3-6  
(5) Apply the screw locking agents to the adjustment screws. (2 areas)  
Recommended screw lock agent  
Manufacturer: Three Bond  
Product name: 1401E  
The following adjustments (b) to (e) should be performed with Test Chart No. TCC-1. (Refer to  
page 3-19.)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[B] Reproduction ratio adjustment of primary scanning direction  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)  
(2) Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side).  
(3) Press [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Black and Text/Photo.  
(4) Measure the distance A between M1 and M2 on the copy with a ruler.  
(5) Check if the distance A is within 200±0.5 mm.  
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 3. to 5. above.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [405]) [START]  
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255) with digital keys)  
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
*
The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance A becomes (approx. 0.1 mm/step).  
[C] Image location of primary scanning direction  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)  
(2) Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side).  
(3) Press [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A4/LT, 100%, Black and Text/Photo.  
(4) Measure the distance B from the left paper edge to the 10 mm line of left grid pattern on the copy  
with a ruler.  
(5) Check if the distance B is within 10±0.5 mm.  
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 3. to 5. above.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in code [306]) [START]  
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))  
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
*
The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance B becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/  
step).  
[D] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)  
(2) Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side).  
(3) Press [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A4/LT, 100%, Black and Text/Photo.  
(4) Measure the distance C between M3 and M4 on the copy with a ruler.  
(5) (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [340]) [START]  
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 3. to 5. above.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [340]) [START]  
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))  
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
*
The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance C becomes (approx. 0.22 %/step).  
[E] Image location of secondary scanning direction  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)  
(2) Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side).  
(3) Press [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A4/LT, 100%, Black and Text/Photo.  
(4) Measure the distance D from the top paper edge to the 10 mm line of top grid pattern on the copy  
with a ruler.  
(5) Check if the distance D is within 10±0.5 mm.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 3. to 5. above.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [305]) [START]  
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 92 to 164))  
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
*
The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance D becomes (approx. 0.14 mm/  
step).  
[F] Top margin  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)  
(2) Open the platen cover or RADF.  
(3) Press [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Black, Text/Photo and  
lower drawer.  
3
(4) Measure the blank area E at the leading edge of the copied image.  
(5) Check if the blank area E is within the range of 3±0.5 mm.  
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [430]) [START]  
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))  
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
(“100% A” is displayed.)  
*
The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/  
step).  
Feeding direction  
E
Fig.3-7  
[G] Right margin  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)  
(2) Open the platen cover or RADF.  
(3) Press [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Black, Text/Photo and  
lower drawer.  
(4) Measure the blank area F at the right side of the copied image.  
(5) Check if the blank area F is within the range of 2+1 mm, 2-0.5 mm.  
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [432]) [START]  
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))  
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory).  
(“100% A” is displayed.)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
*
The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the right side becomes  
(approx. 0.04 mm/step).  
Feeding direction  
F
Fig.3-8  
[H] Bottom margin  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)  
(2) Open platen cover or RADF.  
(3) Press the [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Black, Text/Photo and  
lower drawer.  
(4) Measure the blank area G at the trailing edge of the copied image.  
(5) Check if the blank area G is within the range of 2±0.5 mm.  
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 2. to 4. above.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [433]) [START]  
(Key in value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))  
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (stored in memory)  
(“100% A” is displayed.)  
*
The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the trailing edge becomes  
(approx. 0.04 mm/step).  
Feeding direction  
G
Fig.3-9  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustments and Checks using Test Chart No. TCC-1  
Following items can be checked with the Test Chart No. TCC-1.  
1) Points to be measured in the chart  
3
B
A
Fig.3-10  
<Adjustment order>  
[0] [5] [Power ON] (Chart TCC-1) [FAX] [START] (A3/LD, 100%, Black and Text/  
Photo)  
A: 05-405 200±0.5 mm (0.1 mm/step)  
B: 05-306 5±0.5 mm (0.04 mm/step)  
C: 05-340 150±0.5 mm (0.3 mm/step)  
D: 05-305 10±0.5 mm (0.14 mm/step)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2) Checking areas of the chart and their descriptions  
[ ] [ ] [ ]  
[ ]  
10  
9
1
8
[ ]  
5
[ ]  
2
[ ]  
2
[ ]  
3
[ ]  
3
TOSHIBA COLOR CHART  
No.TCC-1  
[7]  
[ ]  
2
[ ]  
1
[ ]  
1
[ ]  
6
[ ]  
6
[4]  
[ ]  
3
[
]
11  
[
14  
]
[ ]  
7
[ ]  
7
[
]
12  
[ ]  
7
[ ]  
2
[
]
13  
[ ]  
8
[ ]  
1
Fig.3-11  
[1] Grid patterns  
[2] YMCK patches  
: For adjusting margin (void) and scanner section  
: For checking uniformity  
[3] Resolution patterns  
[4] Gradation pattern  
: For checking resolution  
: Gradation pattern of seven colors (Y, M, C, R, G, B and K)  
Coverage: 10-100%  
For adjusting the halftone reproduction and gray balance  
[5] Color registration pattern : For checking color registration  
[6] Pictures  
: For checking color reproduction and moire  
[7] Magnification lines  
: For checking the magnification error of primary and secondary  
scanning directions  
[8] Center lines  
[9] Arrow  
: Center lines for A4/LT sizes  
: A mark for placing the chart properly onto the original glass  
(place it to the left rear corner of the original glass.)  
: For checking uniformity  
[10] Halftone band  
[11] White text on the black  
solid  
: For checking the reproduction of white text on black solid  
[12] Text  
: For checking reproduction of text  
[13] Thin lines  
[14] Note area  
: For checking reproduction of the thin lines (line width: 100µm)  
: For recording the date, conditions, etc.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.5 Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function)  
3.5.1  
Automatic gamma adjustment  
When the reproduction of gradation is not appropriate, the gradation reproducibility of all colors Y, M, C  
and K can be corrected by performing this automatic gamma adjustment. In case the gradation repro-  
duction of the image checked is not satisfactory, make this adjustment as described below at parts  
replacement.  
(1) When unpacking or any of the following parts has been or replaced, be sure to make this adjust-  
ment:  
• Laser optical unit  
• Main charger wire  
• 1st transfer roller  
• Image Quality sensor  
• Photoconductive drum  
• Main charger grid  
• Drum cleaning blade  
• Developer material  
• Transfer belt  
• Drum cleaner brush  
3
(2) When any of the following parts are replaced or adjusted, make a copy and check the image to  
determine if adjustment is necessary:  
2nd transfer roller  
Notes:  
1. Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing the image adjustment in "3.3 Adjust-  
ment of Image Quality Control" and "3.4 Image Dimensional Adjustment".  
2. Normally, only the adjustment of color/black integrated pattern is needed. When the adjust-  
ment of "3.5.12 Beam level conversion setting" is made, color pattern and black pattern need  
to be adjusted individually.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Code  
1642  
(1643)  
(580)  
Item to be adjusted  
Contents  
Automatic gamma  
adjustment  
<Procedure>  
1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. Adjustment  
Mode  
2) Select the A4/LT drawer. Key in the pattern number and press the [FAX] but-  
ton to output a “Patch chart for gamma adjustment”.  
Pattern No.  
4
10*  
5*  
Pattern  
Color/black integrated  
Black  
Color  
Remarks  
When performing code 1642  
When performing code 580  
When performing code 1643  
*
This adjustment is performed only when "3.5.12 Beam level conversion  
setting" is performed. Usually, only the adjustment with the color/black  
integrated pattern (05-1642) is performed.  
3) Place the patch chart for adjustment printed in step (2) face down on the  
original glass. In the cases of patterns 4 and 5, place the chart aligning its  
side with 2 black squares against the original scale.  
In the case of pattern 10, place the chart aligning its black side of the grada-  
tion pattern against the original scale.  
4) Key in a code and press the [START] button.  
The scanner reads the chart automatically and performs automatic  
gamma adjustment calculation (approx. 30 sec.).  
5) When the adjustment has finished normally, “ENTER” is shown. Press the  
[ENTER] button to have the adjustment results reflected.  
(To cancel the reflection of adjustment results, press the [CANCEL] button.)  
In the case of an abnormal ending, “ADJUSTMENT ERROR” is shown.  
Press the [CANCEL] button to clear the error display. When it is cleared, the  
control panel display will return to the ready state. Then, check if the patch  
chart on the original glass is placed in the wrong direction or if it is placed  
inclined on the original glass, and then repeat step (3) and afterward.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3.5.2  
Color Deviation Adjustment  
The color deviation amount of the secondary scanning direction can be adjusted as follows.  
There are 2 methods to adjust color deviation; using "Test pattern 63 (for A3/LD size paper)" or "Test  
pattern 68 (for A4/LT size paper)" (adjustment method 1), and using "Test pattern 64 (for A3/LD size  
paper)" (adjustment method 2). Adjust using either one of these methods.  
*
Only adjustment method 1 can be used for A4/LT paper.  
Adjustment  
method  
Paper size,  
Number of pages  
Type  
Printing Image  
Procedures  
1
Test pattern 63 (A3/LD) Ladder  
Test pattern 68 (A4/LT) Ladder  
Test pattern 64 (A3/LD) Block  
A3/LD, 2 pages  
A4/LT, 4 pages  
A3/LD, 2 pages  
05-63-[FAX]  
05-68-[FAX]  
05-64-[FAX]  
2
Note:  
Follow the procedure in the order below for the color deviation adjustment.  
If you start in the middle of the procedure, continue the subsequent steps.  
E.g.: If you start with step 2 (A3/LD, 2nd sheet), perform steps 3 to 6.  
Order  
Test pattern  
A3/LD, 1st page  
1
2
3
4
5
6
A3/LD, 2nd page  
A4/LT, 1st page  
A4/LT, 2nd page  
A4/LT, 3rd page  
A4/LT, 4th page  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Adjustment method 1  
<Adjustment procedures (for A3/LD size paper)>  
Test pattern (Ladder)  
A
3
B
[
]
Test pattern  
Details of A  
Details of B  
Use the image position of M as a  
reference and align the image positions of  
Y, C and K with this reference.  
[
]
Details of adjustment area  
Fig.3-12  
This adjustment should be applied for each printout of the test pattern. (Skip this if the test pattern is  
printed correctly.)  
The order of the adjustment, test patterns and codes to be used are listed below.  
Order  
Test pattern  
1st page  
2nd page  
Code  
1
2
417  
418  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(1) While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. -> (Adjustment  
Mode)  
(2) Print out the test pattern and adjust its deviation amount (above). Use the image position of  
magenta (M) as a reference for adjustment. The image positions of yellow (Y), cyan (C) and  
black (K) must be adjusted with this reference.  
Select A3/LD size. Key in “63” and then press the [FAX] button. -> 2 pages of the test pattern  
are printed out.  
Check the image of the test pattern (above) and specify the color to be adjusted.  
Key in the code (listed above) and press the [START] button.  
Key in the sub code of the color to be adjusted and press the [START] button.  
Sub code  
0: Black (K) 1: Cyan (C) 3: Yellow (Y)  
Key in the adjustment value and press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button.  
Notes:  
1. When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by  
0.0423 mm.  
2. Adjust the image positions of black (B), cyan (C) and yellow (Y) to align the leading/trailing  
edge of each image. If both leading and trailing edges are not aligned, adjust the deviation  
amount of each edge so that it is uniformed.  
(3) Repeat Step (2) until all the test patterns are printed correctly.  
Notes:  
1. Since the adjusted value is reflected to that of the subsequent steps, be sure to perform the  
rest of adjustment.  
2. Print out the test pattern for each adjustment.  
(4) Turn the power OFF.  
<Adjustment procedures (for A4/LT size paper)>  
Use “Test pattern 68” for the adjustment method to adjust a color deviation.  
*
Perform this adjustment after <Adjustment procedures (for A3/LD size paper)> is performed.  
This adjustment should be applied for each printout of the test pattern. (Skip this if the test pattern is  
printed correctly.)  
The order of the adjustment, test patterns and codes to be used are listed below.  
Order  
Test pattern  
1st page  
Code  
1
2
3
4
953  
954  
955  
956  
2nd page  
3rd page  
4th page  
(1) While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. -> (Adjustment  
Mode)  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(2) Print out the test pattern and adjust its deviation amount (above). Use the image position of  
magenta (M) as a reference for adjustment. The image positions of yellow (Y), cyan (C) and  
black (K) must be adjusted with this reference.  
Select A4/LT size. Key in “68” and then press the [FAX] button. -> 4 pages of the test pattern  
are printed out.  
Check the image of the test pattern (above) and specify the color to be adjusted.  
Key in the code (listed above) and press the [START] button.  
Key in the sub code of the color to be adjusted and press the [START] button.  
Sub code  
0: Black (K) 1: Cyan (C) 3: Yellow (Y)  
Key in the adjustment value and press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button.  
Notes:  
1. When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by  
0.0423 mm.  
3
2. Adjust the image positions of black (B), cyan (C) and yellow (Y) to align the leading/trailing  
edge of each image. If both leading and trailing edges are not aligned, adjust the deviation  
amount of each edge so that it is made uniform.  
(3) Repeat Step (2) until all the test patterns are printed correctly.  
Notes:  
1. Since the adjusted value is reflected in that of the subsequent steps, be sure to perform the  
rest of the adjustment.  
2. Print out the test pattern for each adjustment.  
(4) Turn the power OFF.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment method 2  
Test pattern (Block)  
Pattern on the leading edge side  
Pattern on the trailing edge side  
[
]
Test pattern  
K
K
M
Y
C
C
The colors overlap  
(
K
Rejection  
Y
C
)
Adjustment is needed .  
M
K
K
M
Y
C
C
The colors are allowed to con-  
tact each other.  
Acceptation  
K
K
Y
Y
C
C
M
K
K
C
C
M
Y
Optimal condition  
Equal gap between the image  
positions of each color is the  
optimal condition.  
M
Gap: approx. 0.169 mm  
Adjust the image positions of K, C and Y so that the colors do not overlap.  
[
]
Details of adjustment area  
Fig.3-13  
This adjustment should be applied for each printout of the test pattern. (Skip this if the test pattern is  
printed correctly.)  
The order of the adjustment, test patterns and codes to be used are listed below.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Order  
Test pattern  
1st page  
2nd page  
Code  
1
2
417  
418  
(1) While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. -> (Adjustment  
Mode)  
(2) Print out the test pattern and adjust its deviation amount (above). Use the image position of  
magenta (M) as a reference for adjustment. The image positions of yellow (Y), cyan (C) and  
black (K) must be adjusted with this reference.  
Select A3/LD size. Key in “64” and then press the [FAX] button. -> 2 pages of the test pattern  
are printed out.  
3
Check the image of the test pattern (above) and specify the color to be adjusted.  
Key in the code (listed above) and press the [START] button.  
Key in the sub code of the color to be adjusted and press the [START] button.  
Sub code  
0: Black (K) 1: Cyan (C) 3: Yellow (Y)  
Key in the adjustment value and press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button.  
Notes:  
1. When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by  
0.0423 mm.  
2. Adjust the image positions of black (K), cyan (C) and yellow (Y) so that these colors do not  
overlap one another.  
3. If patterns on both leading and trailing edges are not aligned, adjust the deviation amount of  
each edge so that it is made uniform. (i.e. Adjust it so as to make the upper-side gap of the  
pattern on the leading edge and lower-side gap of the pattern on the trailing edge equal, and  
to make the lower-side gap of the pattern on the leading edge and upper-side gap of the pat-  
tern on the trailing edge equal.)  
(3) Repeat Step (2) until all the test patterns are printed correctly.  
Notes:  
1. Since the adjusted value is reflected in that of the subsequent steps, be sure to perform the  
rest of the adjustment.  
2. Print out the test pattern for each adjustment.  
(4) Turn the power OFF.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.5.3  
Density adjustment  
The center density and the density variation controlled by density adjustment keys can be adjusted as  
follows.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Original mode  
Color  
mode  
Item to be  
adjusted  
Remarks  
Text/  
Photo  
1550  
Printed  
Image  
1552  
Text  
Photo  
Map  
Full  
1551  
1553  
1554 Manual density  
The larger the value is, the darker  
Color  
mode center value the image becomes.  
Acceptable values:  
0 to 255 (Default: 128)  
1560  
1570  
1580  
1561  
1571  
1581  
1562  
1572  
1582  
1563  
1573  
1583  
1564 Manual density  
mode dark step  
value  
The larger the value is, the darker  
the dark side becomes.  
Acceptable values:  
0 to 255 (Default: 20)  
1574 Manual density  
mode light step  
value  
The larger the value is, the lighter  
the light side becomes.  
Acceptable values:  
0 to 255 (Default: 20)  
1584 Automatic density The larger the value is, the darker  
mode  
the image becomes.  
Acceptable values:  
0 to 255 (Default: 128)  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Original mode  
Color  
mode  
Item to be  
adjusted  
Remarks  
Text/Photo  
Text  
Photo  
Black  
503  
504  
501  
Manual density  
mode center value the image becomes.  
The larger the value is, the darker  
Acceptable values:  
0 to 255 (Default: 128)  
508  
505  
514  
510  
507  
515  
509  
506  
512  
Manual density  
mode dark step  
value  
The larger the value is, the darker  
the dark side becomes.  
Acceptable values:  
0 to 255 (Default: 20)  
The larger the value is, the lighter  
the light side becomes.  
Acceptable values:  
Manual density  
mode light step  
value  
0 to 255 (Default: 20)  
Automatic density The larger the value is, the darker  
mode  
the image becomes.  
Acceptable values:  
0 to 255 (Default: 128)  
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-  
ment using the following procedure.  
Note:  
Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing "3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment".  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
(2) Key in a code and press the [START] button.  
(3) Key in an adjustment value (acceptable values: 0 to 255).  
(To correct the value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)  
(4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to  
the ready state.  
(5) Press the [FAX] button and then press the [START] button to make a test copy.  
(6) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3.5.4  
Color balance adjustment  
The color balance is adjusted by adjusting the density of each color at the Full Color Mode. The adjust-  
ment is performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high  
density.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Original mode  
Item to be  
Color  
Remarks  
Text/  
Photo  
Printed  
Image  
adjusted  
Text  
Photo  
Map  
Yellow  
1779-0  
1779-1  
1779-2  
1784-0  
1784-1  
1784-2  
1789-0  
1789-1  
1789-2  
1794-0  
1794-1  
1794-2  
1780-0  
1780-1  
1780-2  
1785-0  
1785-1  
1785-2  
1790-0  
1790-1  
1790-2  
1795-0  
1795-1  
1795-2  
1781-0  
1781-1  
1781-2  
1786-0  
1786-1  
1786-2  
1791-0  
1791-1  
1791-2  
1796-0  
1796-1  
1796-2  
1782-0  
1782-1  
1782-2  
1787-0  
1787-1  
1787-2  
1792-0  
1792-1  
1792-2  
1798-0  
1798-1  
1798-2  
1783-0 Low density  
1783-1 Medium density  
1783-2 High density  
1788-0 Low density  
1788-1 Medium density  
1788-2 High density  
1793-0 Low density  
1793-1 Medium density  
1793-2 High density  
1798-0 Low density  
1798-1 Medium density  
1798-2 High density  
The larger the value is,  
the darker the color to  
be adjusted becomes.  
Acceptable values:  
3
0 to 255. (Default: 128)  
Magenta  
Cyan  
Black  
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-  
ment using the following procedure.  
Note:  
Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing “3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment”.  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
(2) Key in the code of the mode to be adjusted (color and original mode) and press the [START] but-  
ton.  
(3) Select the density area to be adjusted with digital keys (0, 1 or 2), and press the [START] button.  
0: Low density (L)  
1: Medium density (M)  
2: High density (H)  
(4) Key in an adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)  
(5) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory.  
The equipment goes back to the ready state.  
(6) For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).  
(7) Press the [FAX] button and then press the [START] button to make a test copy.  
(8) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (7).  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3.5.5  
Gamma balance adjustment  
The density adjustment at the Black Mode is performed by selecting its density area from the following:  
low density, medium density and high density.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Original mode  
Text  
Color  
mode  
Item to be adjusted  
Remarks  
Text/Photo  
590-0  
Photo  
592-0  
592-1  
592-2  
Black  
591-0  
Low density  
The larger the value is, the  
density of the item to be  
adjusted becomes darker.  
Acceptable values:  
590-1  
591-1  
Medium density  
High density  
590-2  
591-2  
0 to 255. (Default: 128)  
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-  
ment using the following procedure.  
Note:  
Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing “3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment”.  
<Procedure>  
Procedure is same as that of “3.5.4 Color balance adjustment”.  
3.5.6  
Offsetting adjustment for background processing  
The density of background and text can be adjusted as follows.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Remarks  
Original mode  
Color  
Item to be adjusted  
Text/  
Printed  
Image  
mode  
Text  
Photo  
Map  
Photo  
Full  
Color  
1688  
1689  
1690  
1691  
1692  
Automatic density  
adjustment for back- darker the background  
The larger the value is, the  
ground  
becomes. (Automatic)  
Acceptable values:  
0 to 255.  
(Default: 128)  
1693  
1698  
1708  
1694  
1699  
1709  
1695  
1700  
1710  
1696  
1701  
1711  
1697  
1702  
1712  
Automatic density  
adjustment for text  
The larger the value is, the  
darker the text becomes.  
(Automatic)  
Acceptable values:  
0 to 255. (Default: 128)  
Manual density  
adjustment for back- darker the background  
ground  
The larger the value is, the  
becomes. (Manual)  
Acceptable values:  
0 to 255. (Default: 128)  
Manual density  
adjustment for text  
The larger the value is, the  
darker the text becomes.  
(Manual)  
Acceptable values:  
0 to 255. (Default: 128)  
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-  
ment using the following procedure.  
<Procedure>  
Procedure is same as that of "3.5.2 Density adjustment".  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3.5.7  
Judgment threshold for ACS  
The judgment level is adjusted for the automatic identification of whether the original set on the glass is  
black or color. Namely, this is to adjust the judgment level used when “Auto Color” is selected at a color  
mode. The adjustment is available for each of the manually-set original and the original used with the  
RADF.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Code  
1675  
Item to be adjusted  
Contents  
Item to be adjusted  
The larger the value is, the more an original tends to be judged as black even at  
Judgment threshold the Auto Color Mode. The smaller value is, the more it tends to be judged as  
for ACS when origi- color.  
nal is set manually  
Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 70)  
1676  
Judgment threshold  
for ACS when origi-  
nal is set on RADF  
3
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary and make  
adjustment.  
<Procedure>  
Procedure is same as that of "3.5.3 Density adjustment".  
3.5.8  
Sharpness adjustment  
If you want to make copy images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment. The adjust-  
ment can be made for each of the color modes and original modes independently.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Code  
1737  
Color mode  
Full Color  
Original mode  
Text/Photo  
Text  
Contents  
The larger the value is, the sharper the image  
becomes; while the smaller the value is, the softer the  
image becomes.  
The smaller the value is, the less moire tends to  
appear.  
The acceptable values are 0 to 31.  
The center value is 16.  
However, 0 is equivalent to the center value.  
1738  
1739  
1740  
1741  
604  
Printed Image  
Photo  
Map  
Black  
Text/Photo  
Text  
605  
606  
Photo  
1757  
Auto Color  
Text/Photo  
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-  
ment.  
Note:  
You have to make adjustment by balancing between moire and sharpness.  
<Procedure>  
Procedure is same as that of "3.5.3 Density adjustment".  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3.5.9  
Setting range correction  
The values of the background peak/text peak in the range correction at the Black Mode can be  
switched to "varied" or "fixed" in the following codes.  
If they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values.  
The values of the background peak affects the reproduction of the background density, and the values  
of the text peak affects that of the text density.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Original mode  
Item to be adjusted  
Remarks  
Text/Photo  
Photo  
Text  
570  
571  
572  
Range correction for The following are the default values set  
original manually set for each original mode.  
on the original glass  
Text/Photo: 22, Photo: 12, Text: 22  
Each digit stands for:  
One's place: Automatic density mode  
Ten's place: Manual density mode  
The setting conditions possible are as  
follows:  
693  
694  
695  
Range correction for  
original set on the  
RADF  
Background peak  
fixed  
Text peak  
fixed  
fixed  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
varied  
fixed  
varied  
varied  
varied  
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-  
ment.  
<Procedure>  
Procedure is same as that of "3.5.3 Density adjustment".  
3.5.10 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak)  
The levels of the background peak for the range correction at a Black Mode can be set at the following  
codes.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Original mode  
Item to be adjusted  
Remarks  
Text/Photo  
Photo  
Text  
532  
533  
534  
Background peak for When the value increases, the back-  
range correction  
ground (low density area) of the image  
is not output.  
Acceptable values: 0 to 255.  
(Default: Text/Photo: 40, Photo: 16,  
Text: 40)  
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-  
ment.  
<Procedure>  
Procedure is same as that of "3.5.3 Density adjustment".  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 32  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3.5.11 Adjustment of smudged/faint text  
The smudge/faint text at a Black Mode can be set at the following codes.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Original mode  
Item to be adjusted  
Text/Photo  
Remarks  
648  
Adjustment of  
smudged/ faint text  
When the value increases, the faint  
text is improved. When the value  
decreases, the smudged text is  
improved.  
Acceptable values: 0 to 255.  
(Default: 30)  
3
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-  
ment.  
Note:  
Remember the image specifications and life span of the replacing parts may not meet the stan-  
dard when the setting value is changed from the default value.  
<Procedure>  
Procedure is same as that of "3.5.3 Density adjustment".  
3.5.12 Adaptation to highlighter  
Four modes of one touch adjustment are performed and each mode can be switched into two modes;  
highlighter 1 or 2. This adjustment is performed when the reproduction mode for highlighter is needed.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Code  
1769  
1770  
1771  
1772  
One touch adjustment  
Remarks  
Vivid  
Clear  
Warm  
Cool  
0: Default (Vivid / Clear / Warm / Cool)  
1: Highlighter 1  
2: Highlighter 2  
Note:  
The color may not always be reproduced precisely due to the characteristics of fluorescent ink.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3.5.13 Beam level conversion setting  
The beam level for 4 divided smoothing is set at the Black Mode. This adjustment enables to adjust the  
dot size.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Code  
667-0  
667-1  
667-2  
667-3  
667-4  
One touch adjustment  
Beam level 0/4  
Beam level 1/4  
Beam level 2/4  
Beam level 3/4  
Beam level 4/4  
Remarks  
The smaller the value is, the smaller the beam width  
becomes. Therefore, the smaller dot is reproduced accord-  
ingly. Acceptable values: 0 to 255.  
(Default: Level 0/4: 0, Level 1/4: 63, Level 2/4: 127, Level 3/  
4: 191, Level 4/4: 255)  
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-  
ment using the following procedure.  
<Procedure>  
Procedure is same as that of “3.5.4 Color balance adjustment”.  
Notes:  
1. When this adjustment is performed, “3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (Black Mode)” (05-  
580) needs to be performed since the reproduction of density at Black Mode varies. The  
result of this adjustment is not reflected to color/black integrated pattern. Namely, each auto-  
matic gamma adjustment of Black Mode (05-580) or of Color Mode (05-1643) needs to be  
performed individually after this adjustment.  
2. After this adjustment, set “1” in 08-595 so that the correction result of the Black Mode is not  
reflected on “Automatic Calibration”.  
3. The setting value must increase as the beam level number (0 to 4) becomes higher. Do not  
increase this order when setting the values.  
4. Usually, beam level 4 is most effective on all black modes.  
3.5.14 Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type  
The maximum toner amount adhering to the paper can be controlled.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Code  
1612  
1613  
1614  
1615  
1616  
Paper type  
Plain paper  
Thick paper 1  
Thick paper 2  
Thick paper 3  
OHP film  
Remarks  
The smaller the value is, the toner amount adhered  
decreases of the high density area (ex. prevention of fusing  
offsetting, etc).  
Acceptable values : 0 to 255.  
(Default: Plain paper: 255, Thick paper 1: 249,  
Thick paper 2: 237, Thick paper 3: 237, OHP film: 249)  
Note:  
The larger the value is, the more frequently fusing offsetting occurs.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3.5.15 Maximum text density adjustment  
The maximum text density of each color at Full Color Mode can be adjusted as follows.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Remarks  
Color  
Yellow  
Magenta  
Cyan  
Code  
1630  
1631  
1632  
1633  
Item to be adjusted  
Maximum text density The larger the value is, the darker the maximum text density  
of each color to be adjusted becomes.  
Acceptable values: 0 to 10 (Default: 5)  
Black  
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-  
ment using the following procedure.  
3
Note:  
Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing “3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment”.  
<Procedure>  
Procedure is same as that of “3.5.3 Density adjustment”.  
3.5.16 Text/Photo reproduction level adjustment  
Text/Photo reproduction level at the Full color mode, Auto color mode and Gray scale mode can be  
adjusted.  
Text/Photo reproduction level adjustment can be switched to "Photo oriented 1", "Photo oriented 2",  
"Text oriented 1" or "Text oriented 2" in the following codes.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Mode  
Item to be adjusted  
Contents  
Text/Photo  
1725  
Text/Photo reproduc-  
tion level adjustment  
0: Default  
1: Photo oriented 2 (The printed image reproduction level  
higher than that of the Photo oriented 1)  
2: Photo oriented 1 (The printed image reproduction level  
higher than that of the Default)  
3: Equivalent to the Default  
4: Text oriented 1 (The text reproduction level higher than  
that of the Default)  
5: Text oriented 2 (The text reproduction level higher than  
that of the Text oriented 1)  
Notes:  
The text reproduction level is lower when the mode is switched from the default value to the  
Photo oriented 1 or Photo oriented 2. (The text reproduction level in Photo oriented 2 is lower  
than that in Photo oriented 1.)  
Changing the setting value from default value to the Text oriented 1 or Text oriented 2 causes  
image noise in the printed photo image with few lines per inch. (Photo oriented 2 causes more  
image noise than Photo oriented 1.)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3.5.17 Black reproduction switching at the Twin color copy mode  
Black reproduction can be switched at the Twin color (Black/Red) copy mode.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Contents  
Mode  
Item to be adjusted  
Twin color copy mode  
(Black/Red)  
1761  
Black reproduction  
switching  
0: Default  
1: Black reproduction oriented  
Note:  
The boundary between Red and Black may not be smooth when the setting value is "1".  
3.5.18 Background adjustment(Black Mode)  
Background of the gamma data can be adjusted with the following codes.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Original mode  
Item to be  
adjusted  
Remarks  
Text/Photo  
Photo  
Text  
600  
602  
601  
Background  
adjustment  
1 to 9: The larger the value is, the  
background becomes lighter.  
<Procedure>  
Procedure is same as that of “3.5.3 Density adjustment”.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3.6 Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function)  
3.6.1  
Automatic gamma adjustment  
When the reproduction of gradation is not appropriate, the gradation reproducibility of all colors Y, M, C  
and K can be corrected by performing this automatic gamma adjustment. In case the gradation repro-  
duction of the image checked is not satisfactory, make this adjustment as described below at parts  
replacement.  
1) When unpacking or any of the following parts has been unpacked or replaced, be sure to make this  
adjustment:  
• Laser optical unit  
• Main charger wire  
• 1st transfer roller  
• Image Quality sensor  
• Photoconductive drum  
• Main charger grid  
• Drum cleaning blade  
• Developer material  
• Transfer belt  
• Drum cleaner brush  
3
2) When any of the following parts are replaced or adjusted, make a print and check the image to  
determine if adjustment is necessary:  
2nd transfer roller  
Note:  
Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing the image adjustment in "3.3 Adjustment  
of Image Quality Control" and "3.4 Image Dimensional Adjustment".  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Color  
Code  
Remarks  
1000  
1001  
1002  
1003  
Automatic  
gamma  
adjustment  
<Procedure>  
1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. ? Adjustment  
Mode  
2) Select the A4/LT drawer. Key in the pattern number and press the [FAX] button  
to output a “Patch chart for gamma adjustment”.  
Pattern No.  
47  
48*  
49  
50*  
Language/Resolution  
PS/600x600dpi  
PS/1200x600dpi  
PCL/600x600dpi  
PCL/1200x600dpi  
Remarks  
When performing code 1000  
When performing code 1001  
When performing code 1002  
When performing code 1003  
*
Perform the adjustment only when the expansion memory has been  
installed.  
3) Place the patch chart for adjustment printed in step (2) face down on the origi-  
nal glass, with its side, on which two black squares are present, aligned  
against the original scale.  
4) Key in a code and press the [START] button. ? The scanner reads the chart  
automatically and performs automatic gamma adjustment calculation (approx.  
30 sec.).  
5) When the adjustment has finished normally, “ENTER” is shown.  
Press the [ENTER] button to have the adjustment results reflected.  
(To cancel the reflection of adjustment results, press the [CANCEL] button.)  
In the case of an abnormal ending, “ADJUSTMENT ERROR” is shown. Press  
the [CANCEL] button to clear the error display.  
When it is cleared, the control panel display will return to the ready state. Then,  
check if the patch chart on the original glass is placed in the wrong direction or  
if it is placed inclined on the original glass, and then repeat step (3) and after-  
ward.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3.6.2  
Color deviation adjustment  
The color deviation amount of the secondary scanning direction can be adjusted.  
For the adjustment procedures, see Chapter 3.5.2 “Color Deviation Adjustment”.  
Note:  
Since color deviation adjustment in the copying function is in common with that in the printer  
function, it does not need to be done if already performed in the copying function.  
3.6.3  
Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode)  
The gamma balance is adjusted by adjusting the density at the Black Mode. The adjustment is per-  
formed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Language and screen  
Color  
mode  
Smoot  
h
(PS)  
Smoot  
h
(PCL)  
Item to be adjusted  
Remarks  
Detail  
(PS)  
Detail  
(PCL)  
Black  
596-0  
596-1  
596-2  
597-0  
597-1  
597-2  
598-0  
598-1  
598-2  
599-0 Low density  
599-1 Medium density  
599-2 High density  
The larger the value is, the  
density of the item to be  
adjusted becomes darker.  
Acceptable values: 0 to 255.  
(Default: 128)  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
(2) Key in the codes to be adjusted (language and screen) and press the [START] button.  
(3) Key in the value corresponding to the density area to be adjusted (0, 1 or 2) and press the  
[START] button.  
0: Low density (L) 1: Medium density (M) 2: High density (H)  
(4) Key in the adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press [CLEAR] button.)  
(5) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. ? The equipment goes  
back to the ready state.  
(6) For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).  
(7) Let the equipment restart and perform printing job.  
(8) If the image density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (7).  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3.6.4  
Color balance adjustment (Color Mode)  
The color balance is adjusted by adjusting the density of each color. The adjustment is performed by  
selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
PS  
PCL  
Color  
600x600dpi  
1200x600dpi  
600x600dpi  
1200x600dpi  
Density Remarks  
Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail  
Yellow  
1010-0 1014-0 1018-0 1022-0 1026-0 1030-0 1034-0 1038-0 Low  
1010-1 1014-1 1018-1 1022-1 1026-1 1030-1 1034-1 1038-1 Medium  
1010-2 1014-2 1018-2 1022-2 1026-2 1030-2 1034-2 1038-2 High  
The larger  
the value  
is, the  
darker the  
color to be  
adjusted  
Magenta 1011-0 1015-0 1019-0 1023-0 1027-0 1031-0 1035-0 1039-0 Low  
3
1011-1 1015-1 1019-1 1023-1 1027-1 1031-1 1035-1 1039-1 Medium becomes.  
Acceptable  
1011-2 1015-2 1019-2 1023-2 1027-2 1031-2 1035-2 1039-2 High  
values:  
Cyan  
Black  
1012-0 1016-0 1020-0 1024-0 1028-0 1032-0 1036-0 1040-0 Low  
1012-1 1016-1 1020-1 1024-1 1028-1 1032-1 1036-1 1040-1 Medium  
1012-2 1016-2 1020-2 1024-2 1028-2 1032-2 1036-2 1040-2 High  
1013-0 1017-0 1021-0 1025-0 1029-0 1033-0 1037-0 1041-0 Low  
1013-1 1017-1 1021-1 1025-1 1029-1 1033-1 1037-1 1041-1 Medium  
1013-2 1017-2 1021-2 1025-2 1029-2 1033-2 1037-2 1041-2 High  
0 to 255.  
(Default:  
128)  
Note:  
Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing “3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment”.  
<Procedure>  
Procedure is same as that of "3.6.3 Gamma balance adjustment".  
3.6.5  
Adjustment of smudged/faint text  
The smudged/faint text at the Black Mode is adjusted.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Language  
Remarks  
PS  
PCL  
654  
655  
When the value increases, the smudged text is improved.  
When the value decreases, the faint text is improved.  
Acceptable values: 0 to 9 (Default: 5)  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
(2) Key in the codes to be adjusted and press the [START] button.  
(3) Key in the adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press [CLEAR] button.)  
(4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. ? The equipment goes  
back to the ready state.  
(5) For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (4).  
(6) Let the equipment restart and perform printing job.  
(7) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (6).  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3.6.6  
Upper limit value at Toner Saving Mode  
The upper limit value is adjusted at the Toner Saving Mode.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Black mode  
Language  
PCL  
600x600dpi 1200x600dpi 600x600dpi 1200x600dpi  
1055 1056 1057 1058  
PS  
PS  
PCL  
Remarks  
PS  
PCL  
664  
665  
The smaller the value is, the lighter  
the density of image becomes.  
Acceptable values: 0 to 255.  
(Default: 176)  
<Procedure>  
Procedure is same as that of “3.6.5 Adjustment of smudged/faint text”.  
3.6.7  
Dot size adjustment in black printing  
The dot size is adjusted in primary scanning direction in black printing.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Code  
Remarks  
663  
The smaller the value is, the dot size becomes smaller.  
Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 255)  
<Procedure>  
Procedure is same as that of “3.6.5 Adjustment of smudged/faint text”.  
3.6.8  
Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type  
The maximum toner amount adhering to the paper can be controlled.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Remarks  
Code  
Paper type  
PS  
PCL  
1046-0  
1047-0  
1048-0  
1049-0  
1050-0  
1046-1  
1047-1  
1048-1  
1049-1  
1050-1  
Plain paper  
Thick paper 1  
Thick paper 2  
Thick paper 3  
OHP film  
The smaller the value is, the toner amount adhered  
decreases of the high density area (ex. prevention of fusing  
offsetting, etc).  
Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: Plain paper: 255, Thick  
paper 1:  
255, Thick paper 2: 255, Thick paper 3: 255, OHP film: 200)  
<Procedure>  
Procedure is same as that of “3.6.3 Gamma balance adjustment”.  
Note:  
The larger the value is, the more frequently fusing offsetting occurs.  
3.6.9  
Image processing: Gamma correction table all clearing  
The state of calibration in color printing mode is initialized at the Setting Mode (08-597). This setting is  
to be performed when a defect occurs in “Automatic gamma adjustment (05-1000 to 1003)”. The cause  
of defect is presumed as an image failure (jittering or uneven image density) at the patch chart for  
gamma adjustment.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3.7 Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function)  
3.7.1  
Gamma balance adjustment  
The gamma balance at the Black Mode is adjusted by adjusting the density. The adjustment is per-  
formed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Original mode  
Item to be  
adjusted  
Gray Scale  
mode  
Remarks  
Black  
Text/Photo  
Black  
Text  
Black  
Photo  
Low density  
880-0  
880-1  
880-2  
881-0  
881-1  
881-2  
882-0  
882-1  
882-2  
883-0  
883-1  
883-2  
The larger the value is, the  
density of the item to be  
adjusted becomes darker.  
Acceptable values:  
Medium density  
High density  
3
0 to 255. (Default: 128)  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
(2) Key in the code corresponding to the desired original mode and press the [START] button.  
(3) Key in the value corresponding to the density area to be adjusted (0, 1 or 2) and press the  
[START] button.  
0: Low density (L), 1: Medium density (M), 2: High density (H)  
(4) Key in the adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press [CLEAR] button.)  
(5) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. Æ The equipment goes  
back to the ready state.  
(6) For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).  
(7) Let the equipment restart and perform scanning job.  
(8) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (7).  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3.7.2  
Density adjustment (Black Mode)  
Adjusts the center density and the variation of density adjustment buttons.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Original mode  
Color  
mode  
Item to be  
adjusted  
Remarks  
Text/Photo  
Text  
Photo  
Black  
845  
846  
847  
Manual density  
center value  
The larger the value is, the darker the  
image becomes.  
Acceptable values: 0 to 255  
(Default: 128)  
855  
850  
860  
856  
851  
861  
857  
852  
862  
Manual density  
dark step value  
The larger the value is, the darker the  
dark side becomes.  
Acceptable values: 0 to 255  
(Default: 20)  
Manual density  
light step value  
The larger the value is, the lighter the  
light side becomes.  
Acceptable values: 0 to 255  
(Default: 20)  
Automatic density The larger the value is, the darker the  
image becomes.  
Acceptable values: 0 to 255  
(Default: 128)  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
(2) Key in a code and press the [START] button.  
(3) Key in an adjustment value (acceptable values: 0 to 255).  
(To correct the value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)  
(4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. Æ The equipment goes  
back to the ready state.  
(5) Let the equipment restart and perform scanning job.  
(6) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3.7.3  
Background adjustment (Gray Scale Mode)  
The adjustment level of background center value and the control of background adjustment button are  
adjusted.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Code  
Item to be adjusted  
Remarks  
848  
Center value  
The larger the value is, the background becomes darker. The smaller the value  
is, the background becomes lighter.  
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)  
858  
853  
Dark step value  
Light step value  
The larger the value is, the image of the “dark” steps becomes darker.  
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 50)  
The larger the value is, the image of the “light” steps becomes lighter.  
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 50)  
3
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
(2) Key in the codes and press the [START] button.  
(3) Key in the adjustment values. Acceptable values : 0 to 255. (To correct the value once keyed in,  
press [CLEAR] button.)  
(4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. Æ The equipment goes  
back to the ready state.  
(5) Let the equipment restart and perform scanning job.  
(6) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).  
3.7.4  
Background adjustment (Color Mode)  
The adjustment level of background center value is adjusted. The control value of background adjust-  
ment button is automatically adjusted to the same level as the adjusted center value.  
For example, when the control value of background adjustment key ranges from 0 to 6, the background  
center value (-2 to +2) is used to be the range from 6 to 14 accordingly.  
Before adjustment  
+2  
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17  
+2 +1 -1 -2  
+1  
0
-1  
-2  
0
After adjustment  
Code  
1070  
1071  
1072  
Original mode  
Remarks  
Text  
The larger the value is, the background becomes lighter.  
Acceptable values: 0 to 50 (Default: 0)  
Printed Image  
Photo  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
(2) Key in the codes and press the [START] button.  
(3) Key in the adjustment values. Acceptable values : 0 to 50. (To correct the value once keyed in,  
press [CLEAR] button.)  
(4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. Æ The equipment goes  
back to the ready state.  
(5) Let the equipment restart and perform scanning job.  
(6) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3.7.5  
Judgment threshold for ACS  
The judgment level is adjusted for the automatic identification of whether the original set on the glass is  
black or color. Namely, this is to adjust the judgment level used when “Auto Color” is selected at color  
modes. The adjustment is available for both the manually-set original and the original used with the  
RADF.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Code  
Item to be adjusted  
Contents  
1065  
Judgment threshold The larger the value is, the more an original tends to be judged as black even  
for ACS when origi- at the Auto Color Mode. The smaller the value is, the more it tends to be  
nal is set manually  
judged as color.  
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 70)  
1066  
Judgment threshold  
for ACS when origi-  
nal is set on RADF  
<Procedure>:  
Procedure is same as that of "3.7.2 Density adjustment (Black Mode)".  
3.7.6  
Sharpness adjustment  
If you want to make scan images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment. The adjust-  
ment can be made for each of the color modes and original modes independently.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Code  
1086  
1087  
1088  
840  
Color mode  
Original mode  
Contents  
Full Color  
Text  
The larger the value is, the sharper the image becomes;  
while the smaller the value is, the softer the image becomes.  
The smaller the value is, the less moire tends to appear.  
The acceptable values are 0 to 31.  
Printed Image  
Photo  
The center value is 16.  
Black  
Text/Photo  
Text  
However, 0 is equivalent to the center value.  
841  
842  
Photo  
843  
Gray Scale  
-
Note:  
You have to make adjustment by balancing between moire and sharpness.  
<Procedure>  
Procedure is same as that of "3.7.2 Density adjustment (Black Mode)".  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3.7.7  
Setting range correction  
The values of the background peak / text peak in the range correction at the Black Mode can be  
switched to "varied" or "fixed" in the following codes.  
If they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values.  
The values of the background peak affects the reproduction of the background density and the values  
of the text peak affects that of the text density.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Black  
Original mode  
Gray  
Scale  
Item to be  
adjusted  
Remarks  
Text/  
Photo  
Text  
Photo  
3
825  
826  
827  
828  
833  
Range correc-  
tion for original  
The following are the default values set for each origi-  
nal mode.  
manually set on Photo/Text: 12, Text: 12, Photo: 12, Gray Scale: 12  
the original glass Each digit stands for:  
Ones place: Automatic density mode  
Tens place: Manual density mode  
The setting conditions possible are as follows:  
830  
831  
832  
Range correc-  
tion for original  
set on the RADF  
Background peak  
fixed  
varied  
fixed  
varied  
Text peak  
fixed  
fixed  
varied  
varied  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
<Procedure>  
Procedure is same as that of "3.7.2 Density adjustment (Black Mode)".  
3.7.8  
Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak)  
The levels of the background peak for the range correction at the Black Mode can be set at the follow-  
ing codes.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Black  
Original mode  
Gray  
Scale  
Item to be  
adjusted  
Remarks  
Text/  
Photo  
Text  
Photo  
835  
836  
837  
838  
Background  
peak for range  
correction  
When the value increases, the background (low density  
section) of the image is not output.  
Acceptable vales: 0 to 255  
(Default: Text/Photo: 56, Text: 48, Photo: 16, Gray  
Scale: 32)  
<Procedure>  
Procedure is same as that of "3.7.2 Density adjustment (Black Mode)".  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3.7.9  
Fine adjustment of black density  
The density of black side on scanned image is adjusted at color-scanning.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Code  
1075  
1076  
1077  
Original mode  
Text  
Remarks  
The larger the value is, the black side of the image becomes darker.  
Acceptable values: 0 to 4 (Default: 0)  
Printed Image  
Photo  
Note:  
Be careful for the value not to be too large since the gradation is reproduced worse in darker  
side.  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
(2) Key in the codes and press the [START] button.  
(3) Key in the adjustment values. Acceptable values : 0 to 4. (To correct the value once keyed in,  
press [CLEAR] button.)  
(4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. ? The equipment goes  
back to the ready state.  
(5) Let the equipment restart and perform scanning job.  
(6) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).  
3.7.10 RGB conversion method selection  
The color space conversion method of image is decided at color-scanning.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Code  
1080  
1081  
1082  
Original mode  
Remarks  
Text  
Remarks  
0: sRGB, 1: AppleRGB, 2: ROMMRGB, 3: AdobeRGB  
(Default: 0)  
Printed Image  
Photo  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
(2) Key in the codes and press the [START] button.  
(3) Key in the adjustment values. Acceptable values : 0 to 3. (To correct the value once keyed in,  
press [CLEAR] button.)  
(4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. ? The equipment goes  
back to the ready state.  
(5) Let the equipment restart and perform scanning job.  
(6) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3.7.11 Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (black)  
The reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction with the resolution other than 600 dpi is adjusted in  
Scanning Function for black image.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Code  
Remarks  
884  
When the value increases, the image is zoomed in.  
When the value decreases, the image is zoomed out.  
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)  
* 0.1%/step  
<Procedure>  
Procedure is same as that of “3.7.2 Density adjustment”.  
3
3.7.12 Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (color)  
The reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction with the resolution other than 600 dpi is adjusted in  
Scanning Function for color image.  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Code  
Remarks  
1060  
When the value increases, the image is zoomed in.  
When the value decreases, the image is zoomed out.  
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)  
* 0.1%/step  
<Procedure>  
Procedure is same as that of “3.7.2 Density adjustment”.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3.8 High-Voltage Transformer Setting  
3.8.1  
General description  
The high-voltage transformers (PS-HVT-350) supply high-voltage to the parts related to charging,  
development, transfer and drum cleaning.  
The high-voltage transformer has the following high-voltage outputs.  
CH1: Main charger wire  
CH2: Main charger grid bias  
CH3: Color developer bias  
CH4: Black developer bias  
CH5: 1st transfer roller bias  
CH6: 2nd transfer roller bias  
CH7: Cleaning blade bias  
Note:  
Make sure not to lose the data sheets which are attached to the high-voltage transformers. Use  
these sheets for the following setting.  
Never move the fixed volumes of resistors since output adjustment is performed when the  
devices are shipped.  
3.8.2  
Setting at the replacement of high-voltage transformer  
After replacing a high-voltage transformer, be sure to enter the data shown on the data sheets (main  
charger grid bias, color/black developer bias and 1st/2nd transfer roller bias) noted above according to  
the following procedure.  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
(2) Key in the adjusting codes in the table below and press the [START] button.  
(3) Key in the adjusting value corresponding to each code on the attached sheets, and then press  
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT].  
<Adjustment Mode (05)>  
Adjusting code  
Item to be adjusted  
Adjusting value  
334  
335  
338  
339  
372  
373  
250  
251  
252  
253  
Main charger grid bias lower limit value  
Main charger grid bias upper limit value  
Color developer bias lower limit value  
Color developer bias upper limit value  
Black developer bias lower limit value  
Black developer bias upper limit value  
1st transfer roller bias lower limit value  
1st transfer roller bias upper limit value  
2nd transfer roller bias lower limit value (+)  
2nd transfer roller bias upper limit value (+)  
Refer to the data sheets  
(4) Key in all the codes in the above table by repeating (2) and (3).  
(5) Turn the power OFF.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3.9 Adjustment of the Scanner Section  
3.9.1  
Carriages  
(1) Installing carriage wires  
When replacing the carriage wires, refer illustrations below:  
[Front side]  
Carriage-2  
Carriage wire  
3
Bracket for carriage-1  
Idler pulley  
Wire pulley  
Hook  
Tension spring  
Fig.3-14  
[Rear side]  
Carriage-2  
Carriage wire  
Bracket for carriage-1  
Hook  
Idler pulley  
Wire pulley  
Tension spring  
Fig.3-15  
Adjustment of the carriage wire tension is not necessary since a certain tension is applied to the  
carriage wires by the tension springs.  
Note:  
Make sure the tension applied to the wire is normal.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
(2) Adjusting carriages-1 and -2 positions  
Move the carriage-2 toward the exit side.  
Loosen the screws fixing the front side pulley bracket, make the sections A and B of the car-  
riage-2 touch with the inside of the exit side frame and screw them up.  
Carriage-2  
Pulley bracket  
[
]
[
]
Rear  
Front  
Exit side frame  
Enlarged view of carriage  
B
A
Fig.3-16  
Put the carriage-1 on the rail, make the sections C and D of it touch with the inside of the exit  
frame and screw up the front/rear side of the bracket to fix it.  
Note:  
Make sure that the sections A and B of the carriage-2 touch with the exit side frame.  
Carriage-1  
[
]
[
]
Rear  
Front  
Exit side frame  
Bracket  
Bracket  
Enlarged view of carriage  
D
C
Fig.3-17  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(3) Assembling carriage wires  
Winding the wire around the wire pulley:  
Pull the Ø3 ball terminal located at the center of the wire into a hole on the wire pulley.  
One end of the wire with a hook attached comes to the outside.  
Wind the wires around the wire pulleys of the front and rear sides. The number of turns to be  
wound are as follows:  
-
-
2 turns toward the opposite side of the boss  
4 turns toward the boss side  
Notes:  
Pay attention to the followings when the wires are wound around the pulleys:  
Do not twist the wire.  
Wind the wires tightly so that they are in complete contact with the surface of the pulleys.  
Each turn should be pushed against the previously wound turn so that there is no space  
between them.  
3
2 turns  
4 turns  
4 turns  
2 turns  
Ball terminal  
Ball terminal  
No space between turns  
Hook  
Hook  
Color: Silver  
Color: Black  
[
]
[
]
Front  
Rear  
Fig.3-18  
After winding the wires around the pulleys, attach the wire holder jigs not to loosen the wires.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes:  
1. When the wire holder jig is attached, make sure that the wire is not shifted or loosened.  
2. The wire should come out of the slot of the wire holder jig and be passed under the arm of it.  
Arm  
Wire holder jig  
Wire holder jig  
Fig.3-19  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.9.2  
Lens unit  
(1) Replacing the lens unit  
The lens unit must not be readjusted and some part of its components must not be replaced in  
the field since the unit is precisely adjusted. If any of the components is defective, replace the  
whole unit.  
When replacing the unit, do not loosen or remove the 6 screws indicated with the arrows.  
3
Fig.3-20  
Handle the unit with care. Do not hold the lens and adjusted part (hold the unit as shown  
below).  
Fig.3-21  
(2) Installation of lens unit  
Follow the procedure below when installing and replacing the lens unit.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
<Procedure>  
1) Attach the lens unit and fix it temporarily with 2 screws.  
2) Match the center scale of the plate in which the unit is to be installed and the rightmost scale of  
the adjusting hole on the lens unit plate.  
[
]
Rear  
Screw  
[
]
Front  
Fig.3-22  
3) Tighten 5 screws securely to fix the lens unit while pushing it to the rear side and fix 2 ground  
wires with the screws.  
[
]
Rear  
Screw  
Screw  
Screw  
[
]
Front  
Fig.3-23  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.10 Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System  
3.10.1 Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding  
<Procedure>  
The center of the printed image shifts to the front side. Move the guide to the front side (Arrow (A)  
direction in the lower figure).  
[
]
Rear  
Feeding direction  
3
Center  
[
]
Front  
Fig.3-24  
The center of the printed image shifts to the rear side. Move the guide to the rear side (Arrow (B)  
direction in the lower figure).  
[
]
Rear  
Feeding direction  
Center  
[
]
Front  
Fig.3-25  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Bypass feeding  
1) Loosen the screen.  
2) Move the entire guide to the front or rear side.  
3) Tighten the screw.  
( )  
A
( )  
B
Fig.3-26  
Drawer feeding  
1) Loosen 2 screws.  
2) Move the entire guide to the front or rear side.  
3) Tighten the screws.  
( )  
B
( )  
A
Fig.3-27  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.11 Adjustment of the Developer Unit  
3.11.1 Doctor-to-sleeve gap (black developer unit)  
Adjustment tool to use: Doctor-sleeve jig  
Adjusting procedure:  
(1) Take off the black developer unit from the equipment.  
(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the developer  
material cover. Then discharge the devel-  
oper material.  
Developer  
material cover  
3
Screw  
Fig.3-28  
(3) Remove 2 screws, release the hook and take  
off the doctor blade cover.  
Screw  
Doctor blade  
cover  
Screw  
Fig.3-29  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
(4) Loosen 2 doctor blade fixing screws. Insert  
the gauge “0.55” of the doctor sleeve jig  
between the developer sleeve and doctor  
blade to adjust the gap, and tighten the  
screws.  
Screw  
Developer sleeve  
Doctor-sleeve  
jig  
Doctor blade  
Fig.3-30  
(5) Insert the gauge “0.50” of the doctor-sleeve  
jig into the gap between the developer  
Developer sleeve  
sleeve and doctor blade and make sure that  
the gauge can move smoothly in the front/  
rear direction. In addition, confirm that the  
gauge “0.60” cannot be inserted into the gap.  
Doctor blade  
Doctor-sleeve  
jig  
Fig.3-31  
Notes:  
1. When confirming and adjusting the gap between the developer sleeve and the doctor blade,  
insert the gauges into the gap after rotating the developer sleeve so that its marking faces the  
doctor blade.  
2. While reattaching the black developer unit cover, set the latches securely.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.11.2 Doctor-to-sleeve gap (color developer unit)  
Adjustment tool to use : Doctor-sleeve jig  
Adjusting procedure:  
(1) Take off the color developer unit from the equipment.  
(2) Remove 2 screws, release 5 hooks and take  
off the developer material cover. Then dis-  
charge the developer material.  
Developer material cover  
Screw  
Screw  
3
Fig.3-32  
(3) Remove 4 screws and the toner-scattering  
prevention seal holder.  
Screw  
Toner-scattering prevention  
seal holder  
Fig.3-33  
(4) Loosen 2 doctor blade fixing screws. Insert  
the gauge “0.55” of the doctor-sleeve jig  
between the developer sleeve and doctor  
blade to adjust the gap, and tighten the  
screws.  
Screw  
Developer sleeve  
Doctor blade  
Doctor-sleeve jig  
Fig.3-34  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notes:  
1. Insert the gauge “0.50” of the doctor-  
Developer sleeve  
Doctor blade  
sleeve jig into the gap between the devel-  
oper sleeve and doctor blade and make  
sure that the gauge can move smoothly in  
the front/rear direction. In addition, con-  
firm that the gauge “0.60” cannot be  
inserted into the gap.  
Doctor-sleeve jig  
Fig.3-35  
Notes:  
1. When confirming and adjusting the gap between the developer sleeve and the doctor blade,  
insert the gauges into the gap after rotating the developer sleeve so that its marking faces the  
doctor blade.  
2. While reattaching the color developer unit cover, set the latches securely.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.11.3 Black developer unit lift up/down timing adjustment  
Perform this adjustment only when the stop position of the black developer unit lift up/down lever devi-  
ates from the reference and a CEB0 error occurs.  
The reference position means that the rib of the developer unit cover and the cutout of the black devel-  
oper unit lift up/down lever are not overlapped as shown in Figure "A". (The cutout is in the 9 o'clock  
position.)  
B
A
Cutout  
Rib  
3
C
Black developer unit  
lifting lever  
Adjustment procedure  
(1) Perform 03-460 Black developer unit lifting movement ON/OFF (continuous lifting movement)  
and check the stop position of the black developer unit lifting lever. At this time, check the devia-  
tion amount between the rib and the cutout of the lever.  
(2) The stop position is "B" (the cutout is lower than the reference position):  
Make the value of the adjustment code (05-499) smaller so that the stop position is closer to the  
reference. Making the value smaller by 1 turns the lever circumference by approx. 3 mm.  
Note:  
If the adjustment cannot be performed though 0 is input, the clutch may have failed. Examine the  
clutch.  
(3) The stop position is "C" (the cutout is upper than the reference position):  
Make the value of the adjustment code (05-499) larger so that the stop position is closer to the  
reference. Making the value larger by 1 turns the lever circumference by approx. 3 mm.  
Note:  
If the adjustment cannot be performed though 8 is input, the clutch may have failed. Examine the  
clutch.  
Note:  
If an error occurs even though this adjustment is performed, other causes may be considered.  
Examine and check the defect according to the methods in troubleshooting.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 61  
05/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Code to be used for the adjustment  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Code Classifi-  
cation  
Items  
Function  
Default  
<Accept-  
able  
RAM  
M
Contents  
Proce-  
dure  
value>  
499  
Develop Black developer unit  
-ment  
ALL  
4
Changes the lift up/down  
timing of the black devel-  
oper unit when a CEB0  
error occurs.  
1
lift up/down timing  
adjustment  
<0-255>  
Note:  
Do not input more than 8 for acceptable value. (If a number from 9 to 255 is input, it is processed  
as 8.)  
Relation between adjustment value and changing amount  
Adjustment  
value  
Changing amount for default value  
(Turning degree of black developer unit lift up/down lever)  
Turning 32 degrees CW (approx. 12 mm in the lever circumference)  
Turning 24 degrees CW (approx. 9 mm in the lever circumference)  
Turning 16 degrees CW (approx. 6 mm in the lever circumference)  
Turning 8 degrees CW (approx. 3 mm in the lever circumference)  
Default value  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Turning 8 degrees CCW (approx. 3 mm in the lever circumference)  
Turning 16 degrees CCW (approx. 6 mm in the lever circumference)  
Turning 24 degrees CCW (approx. 9 mm in the lever circumference)  
Turning 32 degrees CCW (approx. 12 mm in the lever circumference)  
*
CW: Clockwise  
CCW: Counter Clockwise  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 62  
05/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.12 Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3018)  
3.12.1 Adjustment of RADF Position  
Perform this adjustment when the RADF is not installed in the correct position.  
Note:  
Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of  
the RADF.  
[A] Checking  
(1) Open the RADF and install 2 positioning pins  
(the positioning pins are installed to the back  
side of the hinge which is on the left side of  
the RADF).  
3
Fig.3-36  
(2) Remove the platen sheet.  
Fig.3-37  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
(3) Close the RADF and check if the positioning  
pins fit the holes on the RADF.  
Fig.3-38  
[B] Adjustment  
If the pins cannot be fitted into the holes, perform the adjustment according to the following procedure.  
(1) Remove the right-hand hinge screw at the  
rear side.  
Fig.3-39  
(2) Loosen the left-hand hinge screw at the rear  
side.  
Fig.3-40  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(3) Loosen the hinge screws at the front side.  
3
Fig.3-41  
(4) Position the pins with the holes on the RADF  
by moving it so that the pins fit into the holes  
when the RADF is closed.  
Fig.3-42  
(5) Tighten the left-hand hinge screw at the rear  
side.  
Fig.3-43  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(6) Loosen the hole position adjustment screws  
on the right hand side.  
Fig.3-44  
Fig.3-45  
Fig.3-46  
(7) Match the screw hole positions.  
(8) Install the right-hand hinge screw at the rear  
side.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(9) Loosen the hinge screws at the front side.  
3
Fig.3-47  
(10) Place the platen sheet on the original glass  
and align it to the top left corner.  
Close the RADF gently and open it to check  
if the platen sheet is attached properly.  
Fig.3-48  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.12.2 Adjustment of RADF Height  
Note:  
Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of  
the RADF.  
[A] Checking  
(1) Close the RADF.  
(2) Light the exposure lamp.  
Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [3] simultaneously.  
Key in [267] and then press the [START] button. The exposure lamp is turned ON for a given  
length of time.  
(3) Visually check the gap between platen guide holder "A" and upper surface of the original glass  
"B" from the left hand side of the equipment. If the value is not within the tolerance, perform the  
adjustment according to the following procedure.  
[Tolerance of the gap]  
Rear side: 0 - 0.5 mm  
Front side: 0 mm  
A
B
A
B
Fig.3-49  
[B] Adjustment  
(1) Close the RADF.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(2) Adjust it by turning the adjustment screws on the hinges.  
Adjust the height on the rear side by means of the screw on the hinge on the feed side of the  
RADF.  
Turn it clockwise ................. Heightened  
Turn it counterclockwise ...... Lowered  
3
Fig.3-50  
Adjust the gap on the rear side by means of the screw on the hinge on the feed side of the  
RADF.  
Turn it clockwis .................... Lowered  
Turn it counterclockwise ...... Heightened  
Fig.3-51  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.12.3 Adjustment of Skew  
Note:  
Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of  
the RADF. Also, the RADF position and height shall be adjusted properly.  
[A] Checking  
Check the image using the chart (original) with vertical and horizontal lines in the following procedure.  
Fig.3-52 Chart (Original)  
Simplex copying:  
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF, select [1  
Sided -> 1 Sided] and press the [START] button.  
(2) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the inclination of the copy image.  
Duplex copying:  
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF, select [2  
Sided -> 2 Sided] and press the [START] button.  
(2) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the inclination of the copy image.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[B] Adjustment  
Simplex copying:  
(1) Shift the aligning plate with the scale as the guide shown in the figure below to adjust the skew.  
3
Fig.3-53  
(2) If the image skew is "C" as shown in the figure below, shift the aligning plate in the direction of  
"+", and if "D", shift it to "-".  
C
D
Fig.3-54  
Fig.3-55  
Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "+".  
Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "-".  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Duplex copying:  
(1) Shift the aligning plate with the scale as the guide shown in the figure below to adjust the skew.  
Fig.3-56  
(2) If the image skew is "C" as shown in the figure below, shift the aligning plate in the direction of "-  
", and if "D", shift it to "+".  
C
D
Fig.3-57  
Fig.3-58  
Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "-".  
Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "+".  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.12.4 Adjustment of the Leading Edge Position  
Note:  
Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of  
the RADF. Also, the RADF position and height shall be adjusted properly.  
[A] Checking  
Check the image using the chart (original) with vertical and horizontal lines in the following procedure.  
Simplex copying:  
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF, select [1  
Sided -> 1 Sided] and press the [START] button.  
(2) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the leading edge E of the chart and F of the copy.  
3
Duplex copying:  
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF, select [2  
Sided -> 2 Sided] and press the [START] button.  
(2) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the leading edge E of the chart and F of the copy.  
F
E
Fig.3-59 Chart (Original)  
Fig.3-60 Copy  
[B] Adjustment  
Simplex copying:  
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, key in [365] and then press the  
[START] button.  
(2) Enter the value.  
If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is larger than the (E) margin of the chart,  
enter a value smaller than the current one.  
Note:  
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.1 mm.  
If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is smaller than the (E) margin of the chart,  
enter a value larger than the current one.  
Note:  
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.1 mm.  
(3) Press the [ENTER] button.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Duplex copying:  
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, key in [366] and then press the  
[START] button.  
(2) Enter the value.  
If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is larger than the (E) margin of the chart,  
enter a value smaller than the current one.  
Note:  
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.1 mm.  
If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is smaller than the (E) margin of the chart,  
enter a value larger than the current one.  
Note:  
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.1 mm.  
(3) Press the [ENTER] button.  
3.12.5 Adjustment of Horizontal Position  
Note:  
Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of  
the RADF. Also, the RADF position and height shall be adjusted properly.  
[A] Checking  
Check the image using the chart (original) with a center line in the following procedure.  
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF.  
(2) Press the [START] button.  
(3) Fold the copy in half and check if the center line is misaligned.  
[B] Adjustment  
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously.  
(2) Key in [358] and then press the [START] button.  
If the center line of the copy image is shifted to the front side of the equipment, enter a value  
larger than the current one.  
Note:  
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.042 mm.  
G
Fig.3-61  
If the center line of the copy image is shifted to the rear side of the equipment, enter a value  
smaller than the current one.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note:  
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.042 mm.  
H
3
Fig.3-62  
(3) Press the [ENTER] button.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.12.6 Adjustment of Copy Ratio  
Note:  
Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of  
the RADF. Also, the RADF position and height shall be adjusted properly.  
[A] Checking  
Check the image using the chart (original) with vertical and horizontal lines in the following procedure.  
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF.  
(2) Press the [START] button.  
(3) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the image dimension “I”.  
[B] Adjustment  
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously.  
(2) Key in [357] and then press the [START] button.  
If the copy image dimension “I” is larger than the chart dimension, enter a value smaller than  
the current one.  
If the copy image dimension “I” is smaller than the chart dimension, enter a value larger than  
the current one.  
I
Fig.3-63  
(3) Press the [ENTER] button.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3.12.7 Adjustment of RADF Opening/Closing Sensor  
Adjust the bracket position so that the sensor is turned ON when the height “A” becomes 100 mm or  
less (within the empty weight falling limit).  
3
Fig.3-64  
Fig.3-65  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3.13 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1022)  
3.13.1 Adjusting the jogging plate width  
(1) Remove the right inner cover and the rear cover.  
(2) Adjust the front jogging plate to the home  
ON  
position.  
Set SW1 on the finisher controller PC  
board as shown in Fig. 3-1301.  
Press SW2 twice on the finisher controller  
PC board.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
-
The front jogging plate moves to the  
home position.  
Fig.3-66  
(3) Adjust the rear jogging plate to the home  
position.  
ON  
1
Set SW1 on the finisher controller PC  
board as shown in Fig. 3-1302.  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Fig.3-67  
Press SW2 twice on the finisher controller  
PC board.  
Rear jogging plate home position  
-
The rear jogging plate moves to the  
home position.  
Fig.3-68  
(4) Measure the jogging width (standard at 317 mm).  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
(5) Remove the processing tray.  
(6) Loosen the screw on the home position sen-  
sor plate at the front.  
Home position  
sensor plate  
Screw  
3
Fig.3-69  
(7) Adjust the position of the front jogging plate  
home position sensor (S6) with reference to  
the index.  
Sensor  
EX. 1  
If the width is 319 mm in step (2), the differ-  
ence from the standard is +2 mm, it requires  
relocation of the sensor [3] in the direction of  
arrow A by 2 mm.  
A B  
EX. 2  
If the width is 316 mm in step (2), the differ-  
ence from the standard is -1 mm; it requires  
relocation of the sensor [3] in the direction of  
arrow B by 1 mm.  
Fig.3-70  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.13.2 Adjusting the angle of the jogging plate  
(1) Without removing the processing tray unit,  
Screw  
Rear jogging plate  
loosen the 2 mounting screws of the rear jog-  
ging plate.  
Fig.3-71  
(2) Place several sheets of A4/LT paper on the  
processing tray, and adjust the rear jogging  
plate. (At this time, adjust the gap between  
the paper and the front end of the rear jog-  
0 mm to 0.5 mm  
ging plate so that it is 0 mm to 0.5 mm.)  
Paper  
Butted  
Screw  
Rear jogging  
plate  
Fig.3-72  
(3) With reference to the rear jogging plate adjusted in step (2), adjust the front jogging plate in the  
same manner.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3.13.3 Adjusting the overlap of the sensor flag  
If the overlap between the sensor and the flag is wrong for some reason, perform the following adjust-  
ment.  
(1) Remove the processing tray unit.  
(2) Loosen the mounting screw of the front/rear  
Jogging plate  
adjusting plate  
jogging plate adjusting plate; then, move the  
adjusting plate to the left and the right.  
Screw  
3
Adjusting plate  
Screw  
Jogging plate  
adjusting plate  
Adjusting plate  
Fig.3-73  
(3) Tighten the screw so that the overlap  
between the flag of the front/rear jogging  
rack plate and the sensor is 1.5 mm to 2.0  
mm.  
Sensor  
Sensor flag  
1.5 mm to 2.0 mm  
Fig.3-74  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3.13.4 Adjusting the tension of the stack processing motor belt  
(1) Remove the right inner cover and the rear cover.  
(2) Remove the 2 mounting screws, and detach  
the grip unit.  
Grip unit  
Screw  
Screw  
Fig.3-75  
(3) Loosen the screw on the tension arm plate.  
(The tension arm plate will be pulled under  
tension by the tension spring.)  
Screw Tension arm plate  
Fig.3-76  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(4) Move the returning roller shaft to its lower  
limit (the slack of a belt is lightly taken); then,  
tighten the screw on the tension arm plate.  
Screw  
Tension arm  
plate  
Returning  
roller shaft  
3
Fig.3-77  
(5) Check to make sure that the returning roller  
shaft moves smoothly.  
Returning  
roller shaft  
Fig.3-78  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.13.5 Releasing the stack tray guide lever fixing plate  
(1) Remove the right inner cover and the rear cover.  
(2) Remove the finisher control PC board, PC board bracket and sensor PC board.  
(3) Remove the stack tray.  
(4) Remove the stack tray drive unit.  
(5) Place the stack tray guide lever fixing plate  
so that it is in view through the hole in the  
side plate (front, rear). Then remove the fix-  
ing screw. (Perform the same for the front  
and the rear.)  
Screw  
Stack tray guide lever  
fixing plate  
Fig.3-79  
Note:  
When removing the mounting screw, be sure to hold the stack tray guide lever up from below.  
Stack tray  
guide lever  
Fig.3-80  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3.13.6 Adjustment of the upper tray angle  
(1) Remove the front cover.  
3
Fig.3-81  
(2) Loosen the screw denoted with the arrow.  
Fig.3-82  
(3) The tension becomes loose.  
While pushing the bracket down, hold the  
tray and move it up or down, to adjust the  
angle so that the tray becomes parallel by a  
visual check.  
Fig.3-83  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(4) After the height adjustment, tighten the fixing  
screw of the bracket.  
Fig.3-84  
Note:  
If the fixing screw of the bracket is not fixed, the belt is loosened which may cause a skipped  
tooth.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.13.7 DIP switch functions  
You can simulate various functions by setting the DIP switch (SW1) on the finisher controller PC board  
appropriately.  
Initiating Operations  
1) Remove any obstacles from the area of operation.  
2) Set the DIP switch (SW1) as shown, and turn ON the power (so that LED1 will start to blink).  
3) Press the pushing switch (SW2) twice to initiate the operation in question. (LED2 will remain on dur-  
ing operation).  
Setting  
Item  
Operation  
To stop  
Delivery motor  
The delivery roller rotates in a specific  
speed.  
Press SW2 again.  
Turn OFF the joint  
sensor (S4).  
ON  
1
3
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
Stackprocessing The stack delivery lever moves to its  
Turn OFF the joint  
sensor (S4).  
ON  
1
motor (stack  
home position and stops.  
delivery lever)  
Stackprocessing The returning roller moves to the home  
motor (returning position and stops.  
roller)  
Turn OFF the joint  
sensor (S4).  
ON  
1
Front jogging  
plate motor  
When not at the The front jogging plate  
Turn OFF the joint  
sensor (S4).  
ON  
1
home position  
moves to its home  
position and stops.  
When at the  
home position  
The front jogging plate  
moves over a specific  
position and stops at  
the home position.  
Turn OFF the joint  
sensor (S4).  
Rear jogging  
plate motor  
When not at the The rear jogging plate  
Turn OFF the joint  
sensor (S4).  
ON  
1
home position  
moves to the home  
position and stops.  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
When at the  
home position  
The rear jogging plate  
moves over a specific  
distance and stops.  
Turn OFF the joint  
sensor (S4).  
Upper stack tray The upper stack tray moves up and stops  
Press SW2 again.  
Turn OFF the joint  
sensor (S4).  
ON  
1
motor (up)  
when the upper stack tray upper limit  
sensor turns ON.  
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
8
Upper stack tray The upper stack tray moves down and  
Press SW2 again.  
Turn OFF the joint  
sensor (S4).  
ON  
1
motor (down)  
stops when the lower stack tray lower  
limit sensor turns ON.  
Lower stack tray The lower stack tray moves up and stops  
Press SW2 again.  
Turn OFF the joint  
sensor (S4).  
ON  
1
motor (up)  
when the lower stack tray upper limit  
sensor is turned ON.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting  
Item  
Operation  
To stop  
Lower stack tray The lower stack tray moves down and  
Press SW2 again.  
Turn OFF the joint  
sensor (S4).  
ON  
1
motor (down)  
Stapler motor  
stops when the lower stack tray lower  
limit sensor is turned ON.  
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
8
The stapler motor stops after the stapling  
operation.  
Press the stapler  
safety switch  
(S14).  
Turn OFF the joint  
sensor (S4).  
ON  
1
Shipping posi-  
tion operation  
The upper and lower stack trays move to  
the shipping position and stop.  
Turn OFF the joint  
sensor (S4).  
ON  
1
Note:  
Perform the shipping position operation when the finisher is packed again.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.14 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1023/1024)  
3.14.1 Adjusting the alignment position (Finisher unit)  
Perform this adjustment after replacing the finisher controller PC board or when the alignment position  
must be changed for some reason.  
(1) Remove the rear cover of the finisher unit.  
(2) Check that the power is OFF and set SW104 on the finisher controller PC board as follows  
according to the paper used for adjustment.  
ON  
ON  
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A4 paper  
LTpaper  
Fig.3-85  
(3) Turn ON the power.  
(4) Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC board.  
When SW103 is pressed, the swing guide opens and the alignment plate moves to prescribed  
position.  
(5) Place ten sheets of A4/LT paper between the alignment plates and push them against the stop-  
per.  
(6) Press SW101 or SW102 on the finisher controller PC board and push the alignment plate against  
the paper.  
When SW101 is pressed, alignment plate moves 0.42 mm forward.  
When SW102 is pressed, alignment plate moves 0.42 mm backward.  
(7) When adjustment is complete, remove paper and press SW103 on the finisher controller PC  
board once to store the adjustment in memory.  
(8) Turn OFF all bits of finisher controller PC board SW104.  
(9) Turn OFF the power and install the rear cover of the finisher unit.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3.14.2 Adjusting the staple position (Finisher unit)  
Perform this adjustment after replacing the finisher controller PC board or when the staple position  
must be changed for some reason. This adjustment adjusts the front/rear stitches with A4/A4-R when  
the paper used for adjustment is AB type and with LT/LT-R when the paper is INCH type.  
(1) Remove the rear cover of the finisher unit.  
(2) Check that the power is OFF and set SW104 on the finisher controller PC board as follows  
according to paper/stitch position used for adjustment.  
ON  
ON  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
1
2
2
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
A4/front stitch  
A4/rear stitch  
ON  
1
ON  
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
A4-R/front stitch  
A4-R/rear stitch  
ON  
1
ON  
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
LT/front stitch  
LT/rear stitch  
ON  
1
ON  
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
LT-R/front stitch  
LT-R/rear stitch  
Fig.3-86  
(3) Turn ON the power.  
(4) Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC board.  
When SW103 is pressed, the swing guide opens and the alignment plate moves to prescribed  
position.  
(5) Place a sheet of paper between the alignment plates. Push it against the stopper and push the  
rear edge of the paper against the rear alignment plate. If the gap between the front alignment  
plate and front edge of the paper is 1 mm or greater, stop the staple position adjustment and  
repeat the staple position adjustment after completing alignment plate adjustment.  
(6) Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC board once to staple. However, remove the stapled  
paper manually because the paper is not ejected. Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC  
board once again.  
(7) Verify the staple position. If any adjustment is needed, proceed to the step 8). If no adjustment is  
needed, proceed to the step 9).  
(8) Press SW101 or SW102 on the finisher controller PC board to adjust the staple position.  
When SW101 is pressed, the staple position shifts 0.49 mm to the front side.  
When SW102 is pressed, the staple position shifts 0.49 mm to the rear side.  
Repeat the steps 5) to 7).  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(9) After confirming that the staple position is adjusted correctly, place a sheet of paper between the  
alignment plates and push it against the stopper and push the rear edge of the paper against the  
rear alignment plate. Then press SW103 once. (Stapling is performed and the adjustment value  
is stored in memory.)  
The staple position adjustment is completed.  
(10) Turn OFF all bits of SW104 on the finisher controller PC board.  
(11) Turn OFF the power and install the rear cover of the finisher unit.  
3.14.3 Adjusting the folding position (Saddle stitcher unit)  
The folding position is adjusted by changing setting of bits 6 through 8 of SW504 on the saddle stitcher  
controller PC board to match the stitching position (adjusting the distance over which the paper posi-  
tioning plate is moved to the folding position from the stitching position).  
If you have replaced the saddle stitcher controller PC board, be sure to set the new SW504 so that the  
settings will be the same as those on the old SW504. Perform this adjustment if, for any reason, you  
must change the folding position.  
3
(1) Check that the power is OFF and separate the finisher from the host machine. If the optional  
puncher unit is installed, remove it from the finisher.  
(2) Remove the PC board cover and set bits 1 through 4 of SW504 on the saddle stitcher controller  
PC board as follows:  
ON  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Do not change bits 5 through 8.  
Fig.3-87  
(3) Remove the rear cover, open the inlet cover of the saddle stitcher unit and tape the actuator of  
inlet cover sensor (PI9) and inlet door switch (SW1).  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(4) Before inserting the paper, mark the top of the paper. You will be using two sheets of A3 or LD  
paper.  
Mark  
A3/LD paper  
Insert direction  
Fig.3-88  
(5) Turn ON the power.  
(6) Press SW1 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board so that the feed motor (M1) starts to rotate.  
(Press SW1 three seconds or more if LD paper is used.)  
(7) Open the inlet cover and insert two sheets of paper. Push them in by hand until the front edge of  
the sheets push against the paper positioning plate.  
(8) Close the inlet cover.  
(9) Press SW1 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
The saddle stitcher unit will “stitch” the sheets, and fold and deliver the stack automatically.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(10) Measure the distance (L) between the stitching position and the folding position. Then perform  
“positive width adjustment” or “negative width adjustment” to suit the relationship between the  
stitching position and the folding position.  
If the stitching position is below the folding position, perform “positive width adjustment.”  
If the stitching position is above the folding position, perform “negative width adjustment.”  
Positive Width Adjustment  
Negative Width Adjustment  
Mark  
Mark  
Stitching position  
Folding position  
Folding position  
Stitching position  
3
Unit: mm  
Example: If L is 1 mm, provide "+1 mm".  
Unit: mm  
Example: If L is 0.5 mm, provide "-0.5 mm".  
Fig.3-89  
(11) Change the settings of bits 6 through 8 on SW504 referring to the following table.  
If the width adjustment is 0  
The stitching position and the folding position match, requiring no change.  
If for “positive width adjustment”  
Set SW504 so that the difference resulting from subtraction of the interval from the appropri-  
ate setting in the table below is provided.  
Example: If SW504 is currently set to +2 and the interval is +1 mm, set SW504 to reflect - 2.  
If for “negative width adjustment”  
Set SW504 so that the sum resulting from addition of the interval from the appropriate setting  
in the table below is provided.  
Example: If SW504 is currently set to -1 and the interval is -0.5mm, set SW504 to reflect +1.  
DIPSW1 bit settings  
Setting  
(in units of 0.5 mm)  
Bit 6  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
Bit 7  
ON  
Bit 8  
ON  
+3  
+2  
+1  
0
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
-1  
-2  
-3  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
Do not use the following setting  
Bit 6  
ON  
Bit 7  
Bit 8  
OFF  
OFF  
(12) Set SW504 bits 1 to 4 to OFF.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.14.4 Fine adjustment of binding/folding position (Saddle stitcher unit)  
The binding position/folding position can be adjusted in the following (05) codes.  
Code  
468-0  
468-1  
468-2  
Paper size  
A4-R / LT-R  
B4  
Remarks  
When the value increases, the binding/folding position shifts toward the right  
page. (0.25mm/step)  
Acceptable values: -14 to 14 (Default: 0)  
A3 / LD  
Increase the adjustment value when the sheet of paper which has exited is "A".  
Decrease the adjustment value when the sheet of paper which has exited is "B".  
A: When the upper side of the folding  
is longer than the lower side  
B: When the upper side of the folding is  
shorter than the lower side  
Paper feeding direction  
Paper feeding direction  
Fig.3-90  
3.14.5 Sensor output adjustment (Puncher unit)  
Perform this adjustment when replacing the punch controller PC board, transmittance sensor (photo-  
sensor PC board/LED PC board), or deflection sensor (scrap full detector PC board unit).  
(1) Check that the power is OFF and then remove the rear cover of the puncher.  
(2) Set SW601 on the punch controller PC board as shown below.  
ON  
1
2
3
4
Fig.3-91  
(3) Turn ON the power.  
(4) Press SW602 on the punch controller PC board. Sensor output is adjusted automatically when  
the switch is pressed.  
Adjustment is complete if LED601 and LED602 on the punch controller PC board blinks alter-  
nately.  
(5) Press SW602 or SW603 on the punch controller PC board to end the adjustment mode and set  
all bits of SW601 to OFF.  
(6) Turn OFF the power.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3.14.6 Registering the number of punch holes (Puncher unit)  
This operation registers which puncher unit is attached to the IC on the punch driver PC board so that  
the puncher unit can be identified by the finisher. For this reason, this operation must be performed  
when the punch driver PC board has been replaced.  
(1) Check that the power is OFF and then remove the rear cover of the puncher.  
(2) Set SW601 on the punch controller PC board as shown below.  
ON  
1
2
3
4
3
Fig.3-92  
(3) Turn ON the power.  
(4) Press SW602 on the punch controller PC board to select the number of punch holes.  
The items in the following table are displayed repeatedly from top to bottom each time SW602  
is pressed.  
Number of punch holes  
LED601/LED602  
2 hole (E)  
Blinks 1 times per cycle  
2/3 hole (N)  
Blinks 2 times per cycle  
Blinks 3 times per cycle  
Blinks 4 times per cycle  
4 hole (F)  
4 hole (S)  
(5) Press SW603 on the punch controller PC board. The number of punch holes is registered to the  
punch controller PC board each time the switch is pressed.  
Registration is complete if LED601 and LED602 on the punch controller PC board blinks  
alternately.  
(6) Press SW602 or SW603 on the punch controller PC board to end the adjustment mode and set  
all bits of SW601 to OFF.  
(7) Turn OFF the power.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
3 - 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
4.1 PM Support Mode  
4.1.1  
General description  
The timing for the parts replacement usually depends on the number of output pages / develop counts  
after they were replaced before. However, the life span of them changes depending on the general use  
of users and the environment in which the equipment is placed. Therefore, it is necessary to consider  
not only the number of output pages but also the drive counts when deciding the timing for the parts  
replacement in order to utilize the parts and materials effectively.  
In addition, the drum rotates 4 times at color modes to transfer the images of 4 colors on the transfer  
belt, overlaying one after another. Therefore, the number of output pages is counted as “4” for 1 page  
for printing at color mode.  
This equipment has the PM support mode, which makes it possible to see the general use of each part  
(the number of output pages, develop counts and drive counts) and replacement record and to do a  
counter clearing operation more efficiently when replacing.  
The replacement record can be printed out in the list printing mode (9S-103).  
4
4.1.2  
Operational flow and operational screen  
[ 1 ] Operational flow  
PM support mode activated  
[6]+[START]+[POWER]ON  
[RETURN] pressed  
[2] [START]  
Main unit chosen  
[SUB UNIT] pressed  
Main screen  
Main unit list displayed  
[RETURN]  
pressed  
Main unit chosen  
[RESET]  
[CANCEL] pressed  
Sub screen  
Sub unit list displayed  
Clear screen  
Clear finished  
[CANCEL]  
pressed  
Counter clear  
confirmation displayed  
Sub unit chosen  
[RESET] pressed  
[INITIALIZE]  
pressed  
Clear finished  
Counter clear performed  
Fig.4-1  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
4 - 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
*
The screen goes back to the main screen when the counter clear is performed or the [CANCEL]  
button is pressed after moving from the main screen, while it goes back to the sub screen after  
moving from the sub screen.  
[ 2 ] Operational screen  
1) Main screen  
10  
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Fig.4-2  
1
2
3
Displaying of the main unit name  
Back to the PM support mode activation screen  
Moving to the clear screen to clear the selected unit counters  
9
7
and , including all sub unit  
(parts) counters belonging to that unit When the unit is not selected, all counters are cleared.  
4
5
6
Moving to the sub screen of the selected unit  
Moving to the next/previous page  
Displaying of the standard number of output pages / develop counts (x1,000) to replace the  
unit parts  
Displaying of the present drive counts (x1,000)  
7
“*” is displayed next to the present number when the number of drive counts has exceeded its  
PM standard number.  
8
9
Displaying of the standard number of drive counts (x1,000) to replace the unit parts  
Displaying of the present number of output pages/develop counts (x1,000)  
When there are differences among the sub units (parts), “_” is displayed and “CHECK SUB-  
UNIT” is displayed at the top  
“*” is displayed next to the present number when the number of output pages or develop  
counts has exceeded its PM standard number.  
Displaying of the number of output pages / develop counts (Page/D. cnt), drive counts (Cnt.)  
and previous replacement date (Chg.) for a chosen unit  
10  
When the replacement date for the sub unit is different, press the [SUB UNIT] button to move  
to the sub screen and see each information, otherwise information is not displayed  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes:  
1. “—” is always displayed at the drive counts section for the reversing automatic document  
feeder (RADF) and feed unit.  
2. “—” is displayed at the numeric section for the paper source which is not installed since the  
paper source is different depending on the structure of options.  
4
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
4 - 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2) Sub screen  
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Fig.4-3  
1
Displaying of the sub unit (parts) name  
Back to the main screen  
2
3
4
5
Moving to the clear screen to clear the selected unit (parts) counters  
Moving to the next/previous page  
Displaying of the present number of output pages / develop counts (x1,000)  
“*” is displayed next to the present number when the number of output pages or develop  
counts has exceeded its PM standard number.  
Displaying of the standard number of output pages / develop counts (x1,000) to replace the  
sub unit (parts)  
6
7
Displaying of the present drive counts (x1,000)  
“*” is displayed next to the present number when the number of drive counts has exceeded its  
PM standard number.  
8
9
Displaying of the standard number of drive counts (x1,000) to replace the sub unit (parts)  
Displaying of the number of output pages, develop counts and drive counts and previous  
replacement date for a chosen sub unit  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3) Clear screen  
1
2
Fig.4-4  
4
When the [CANCEL] button is pressed, the counter is not cleared and the display returns to  
the main or sub screen..  
1
2
When the [INITIALIZE] button is pressed, “Present number of output pages/develop counts”  
and Present driving counts” are cleared and “Previous replacement date” is updated.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
4 - 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[ 3 ] Access tree  
Note:  
The name inside [ ] is displayed on the LCD screen.  
Main screen  
Drum/cleaner unit  
Sub-screen  
Drum [DRUM]  
[CLEANER/DRUM]  
Drum cleaning blade [DRUM BLADE]  
Drum cleaner brush [DRUM BRUSH]  
Main charger unit  
[MAIN CHARGER]  
Main charger grid [GRID]  
Main charger wire [MAIN CHARGER WIRE]  
Main charger wire pad [WIRE CLEANING PAD]  
Ozone filter  
[FILTER]  
Ozone filter [OZONE FILTER]  
Black developer unit  
Developer material K [BLACK DEVELOPER]  
[BLACK DEVELOPER]  
Color developer unit  
[COLOR DEVELOPER]  
Developer material Y [YELLOW DEVELOPER]  
Developer material M [MAGENTA DEVELOPER]  
Developer material C [CYAN DEVELOPER]  
Transfer belt cleaning unit  
Transfer belt cleaning blade [BELT CLEANING BLADE]  
[TRANSFER BELT CLEANER]  
2nd transfer roller unit  
[2nd TRANSFER]  
2nd transfer roller [2nd TRANSFER ROLLER]  
Fuser unit  
[FUSER]  
Fuser belt [FUSER BELT]  
Pressure roller [PRESS ROLLER]  
Oil roller [OIL ROLLER]  
Cleaning roller [CLEANING ROLLER]  
Separation finger [PRESS ROLLER FINGER]  
Fuser belt guide [BELT GUIDE]  
Pressure roller discharge brush [PRESS ROLLER ERASER BRUSH]  
Upper drawer  
[1st CST.]  
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(1st CST.)]  
Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(1st CST.)]  
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(1st CST.)]  
Lower drawer  
[2nd CST.]  
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(2nd CST.)]  
Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(2nd CST.)]  
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(2nd CST.)]  
Bypass unit  
[SFB]  
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(SFB)]  
Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(SFB)]  
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(SFB)]  
RADF  
[RADF]  
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(RADF)]  
Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(RADF)]  
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(RADF)]  
LCF  
[LCF]  
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(LCF)]  
Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(LCF)]  
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(LCF)]  
PFP upper drawer  
[3rd CST.]  
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(3rd CST.)]  
Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(3rd CST.)]  
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(3rd CST.)]  
PFP lower drawer  
[4th CST.]  
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(4th CST.)]  
Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(4th CST.)]  
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(4th CST.)]  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note:  
When the counter value of any of the pickup roller, feed roller and separation roller in each unit is  
reset, the value of the feeding retry counter is also reset simultaneously. When the [RESET] but-  
ton is pressed after selecting the feed unit in the Main Screen, the value of the feeding retry  
counter is also reset simultaneously.  
The feeding retry counter:  
Upper drawer  
Lower drawer  
Reset the feeding retry counter (08-1390)  
Reset the feeding retry counter (08-1391)  
PFP upper drawer Reset the feeding retry counter (08-1392)  
PFP lower drawer Reset the feeding retry counter (08-1393)  
Bypass unit  
LCF  
Reset the feeding retry counter (08-1394)  
Reset the feeding retry counter (08-1395)  
4
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
4 - 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.3  
Work flow of parts replacement  
The timing for the parts replacement usually depends on the number of output pages / develop counts  
after they were replaced before. However, its drive counts is also to be considered when replacing the  
parts. Even if the number of output pages has reached the level of replacement, for instance, the part  
may still be usable with its drive counts not reaching the specified drive counts. On the other hand, the  
part may need replacement even if the number of output pages has not reached the level of replace-  
ment with its driving time exceeding the specified drive counts. The life span of some parts such as feed  
roller is heavily dependent on the number of output pages rather than the drive counts.  
The following work flow diagram shows how to judge the timing of replacement with the number of out-  
put pages and the drive counts.  
The number of output pages is counted as “4” for 1 page for printing at color modes. This “4” is “develop  
counts”.  
Example 1:  
When the number of output pages has reached the specified level  
• The parts in RADF  
• The parts in feeding system  
• The parts in the drum/cleaner unit  
• The parts in the transfer belt unit  
• The parts in the 2nd transfer unit  
• Developer material  
• The parts in the fuser unit  
Check the drive counts at PM  
support mode.  
Replace the part.  
Yes  
Replace the part.  
Does it exceed the specified  
drive counts?  
No  
The part is still usable.  
Replace the part after the drive  
counts has reached the specified  
count.  
Fig.4-5  
Example 2:  
When the image failure occurred before the number of output pages has reached the specified  
level  
Check the drive counts of all parts at PM support mode.  
Yes  
Replace the part.  
Does it exceed the specified drive count?  
No  
Check the part and equipment according to the “TROUBLESHOOTING”.  
Fig.4-6  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
4 - 8  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4.2 General Descriptions for PM Procedure  
(1) Preparation  
Ask the user about the current conditions of the equipment and note them down.  
Before starting maintenance, make some sample copies and store them.  
See the replacement record and check the parts to be replaced in the PM support mode (6S-  
2) or list printing mode (9S-103).  
6S-2  
: [6] + [START] + [POWER] ON Æ [2] Æ [START]  
9S-103 : [9] + [START] + [POWER] ON Æ [103] Æ [START]  
PM SUPPORT CODE LIST  
XX-XX-'XX 11:28  
UNIT  
OUTPUT PAGES/  
PM OUTPUT PAGE/  
DRIVE COUNTS  
PM DRIVE COUNTS  
DEVELOP COUNTS DEVELOP COUNTS  
DRUM  
22220  
22220  
22220  
22220  
22220  
22220  
200000  
200000  
200000  
200000  
200000  
200000  
30948  
30948  
30948  
30948  
30948  
30948  
320000  
320000  
320000  
320000  
320000  
320000  
DRUM BLADE  
DRUM BRUSH  
GRID  
MAIN CHARGER WIRE  
WIRE CLEANING PAD  
4
Fig.4-7  
Turn OFF the power and make sure to unplug the equipment.  
(2) Perform a preventive maintenance using the following checklist and illustrations. Refer to the  
Service Manual if necessary.  
(3) Plug in the equipment after the maintenance has been finished. Then turn ON the power and  
make some copies to confirm that the equipment is working properly.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
4 - 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4.3 Operational Items in Overhauling  
Overhaul each equipment with the following timing.  
e-STUDIO281c:  
e-STUDIO351c:  
e-STUDIO451c:  
When the number of output pages has reached 300,000 or 2.5 years have  
passed from the start of use (Whichever is earlier.)  
When the number of output pages has reached 360,000 or 2.5 years have  
passed from the start of use (Whichever is earlier.)  
When the number of output pages has reached 450,000 or 2.5 years have  
passed from the start of use (Whichever is earlier.)  
(1) Replace all the supplies.  
(2) Check the components in the drive section (gears, pulleys, timing belts, etc.). Replace them with  
new ones if they are damaged.  
(3) Check all the adhesives such as tape and Mylar if they are damaged or have become unstuck.  
Replace them with new ones if necessary.  
(4) Check the performance of all the switches and sensors. Replace them with new ones if neces-  
sary.  
(5) Clean inside the equipment thoroughly.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4.4 Preventive Maintenance Checklist  
Symbols/value used in the checklist  
Cleaning  
Lubrication/Coating  
Replacement  
Value:  
Operation check  
A: Clean with alcohol  
B: Clean with soft pad, SI:  
L:  
Launa 40  
Silicon oil  
O: After cleaning or  
replacement,  
Replacement  
cloth or vacuum  
cleaner  
W1: White grease  
(Molykote X5-6020)  
W2: White grease  
cycle  
(output pages or  
develop counts)  
confirm there is  
no problem.  
(Molykote HP-300) R: Replace if  
AV:  
FL:  
Alvania No.2  
deformed or  
damaged  
Floil (GE-334C)  
[Preventive Maintenance Checklist]  
Notes:  
1. Perform cleaning and lubricating in the following timing. Exceptionally, the lubrication for the  
drum unit, main charger, color developer unit and 1st transfer unit must follow the PM cycle of  
each unit.  
e-STUDIO251c:every 100,000 sheets  
e-STUDIO351c:every 120,000 sheets  
4
e-STUDIO451c:every 150,000 sheets  
2. Value under "Replacement" indicates the replacement cycle, and when the cycle is different  
for each product, values are indicated in the order of e-STUDIO251c, e-STUDIO351c and e-  
STUDIO451c.(KS= x 1,000 sheets, KD= x 1,000 developments)  
3. The replacement cycle of the parts for the charge, development and 1st transfer in copying  
process is not indicated by the number of output pages (sheet), but the develop counts  
(development). The number of output pages is counted as “4 developments” for 1 page for  
printing at color mode, and “1 development” at black-and-white mode.  
4. The replacement cycle of the parts in the feeding section equals to the number of sheets fed  
from each paper source.  
5. Be careful not to put oil on the rollers, belts and belt pulleys when lubricating.  
6. Page-Item (P-I) is described in the column of the Parts list.  
A. Scanner  
Items to check  
Lubrication/  
Coating  
Replacement  
(KS)  
Operation Parts list  
Cleaning  
Remarks  
check  
<P-I>  
25-1  
25-2  
A1 Original glass  
A2 ADF original glass  
A3 Mirror-1  
B or A  
*a1  
*a1  
B
B
B
B
B
B
A4 Mirror-2  
A5 Mirror-3  
A6 Reflector  
A7 Lens  
11-10  
26-6  
A8 Exposure lamp  
R
R
O
O
A9 Automatic original  
detection sensor  
B
11-12  
A10 Slide sheet  
(front and rear)  
B or A  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
4 - 11  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
B. Laser unit  
Items to check  
Lubrication/  
Coating  
Replacement  
(KS)  
Operation Parts list  
check <P-I>  
Cleaning  
Remarks  
Remarks  
B1 LSU slit glass  
B
C. Feed unit  
Items to check  
Lubrication/  
Coating  
Replacement  
(KS)  
Operation Parts list  
Cleaning  
check  
<P-I>  
18-20  
18-24  
18-5  
C1 Pickup roller  
C2 Feed roller  
80  
80  
80  
R
C3 Separation roller  
C4 Transport roller  
C5 Paper guide  
AV, W2  
W1  
*c1  
*c2  
A
B
C6 Drive gear  
(tooth face and shaft)  
C7 GCB bushing bearing  
L
C8 One side of the plastic  
bushing to which the  
shaft is inserted  
W1  
C9 Registration roller  
A
B
R
R
23-15,34  
23-2,30  
C10 Paper dust removal  
brush  
*c10  
D. Automatic duplexing unit  
Lubrication/  
Coating  
Replacement  
(KS)  
Operation Parts list  
Items to check  
Cleaning  
Remarks  
check  
<P-I>  
D1 Transport roller (upper,  
middle and lower)  
A
R
43-7,  
36,56  
D2 One side of the GCB  
bushing to which the  
shaft is inserted  
L
D3 One side of the plastic  
bushing to which the  
shaft is inserted  
W1  
D4 Paper guide  
B
43-46  
E. Bypass feed unit  
Items to check  
Lubrication/  
Coating  
Replacement  
(KS)  
Operation Parts list  
Cleaning  
Remarks  
check  
<P-I>  
22-26  
22-37  
21-1  
E1 Pickup roller  
80  
80  
80  
E2 Feed roller  
E3 Separation roller  
E4 Bypass tray  
AV, W2  
*e1  
B
A
E5 Drive gear (shaft)  
E6 GCB bushing bearing  
E7 Transport roller  
W1  
L
R
22-4,40  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 12  
05/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F. Main charger  
Items to check  
Lubrication/  
Coating  
Replacement  
(KD)  
Operation Parts list  
Cleaning  
Remarks  
check  
<P-I>  
F1 Main charger case  
F2 Main charger wire  
B
*f1  
*f1  
130/160/200  
O
28-15  
F3 Contact point of termi-  
nals  
B
28-4,9  
F4 Charger wire cleaning  
pad  
28-12  
28-21  
130/160/200  
130/160/200  
F5 Main charger grid  
G. Drum/Cleaner related section  
Lubrication/  
Coating  
Replacement  
(KD)  
Operation Parts list  
Items to check  
Cleaning  
Remarks  
check  
<P-I>  
G1 Photoconductive drum  
103-1  
Refer to  
Chapter  
4.8.2  
130/160/200  
4
G2 Drum stay  
B
B
*g1  
G3 Whole cleaner unit  
G4 Drum cleaning blade  
G5 Drum cleaner brush  
G6 Recovery blade  
32-10  
32-5  
*g2  
*g2  
*g3  
130/160/200  
130/160/200  
R
B
B
32-26  
G7 Used toner auger drive  
section  
W1  
G8 Discharge LED  
G9 Ozone filter  
28-32  
14-31  
130/160/200  
Note:  
Check the color deviation after replacing G1 and G4.  
H. Toner bag  
Items to check  
Lubrication/  
Coating  
Replacement  
(KD)  
Operation Parts list  
Cleaning  
Remarks  
check  
<P-I>  
H1 Toner bag  
50  
103-6  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
4 - 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I. Black developer unit  
Items to check  
Lubrication/  
Coating  
Replacement  
(KS)  
Operation Parts list  
Cleaning  
Remarks  
check  
<P-I>  
I1 Whole black developer  
unit  
B
I2 Black developer unit  
drive section  
W1  
I3 Developer material (K)  
I4 Front shield  
100/120/150  
103-2  
34-39  
*i1  
*i2  
B
R
R
I5 Oil seal (4 pcs.)  
I6 Guide roller  
AV  
34-3,15  
34-17  
B or A  
I7 Toner cartridge drive  
gear  
W1  
I8 Side shield  
B
R
R
34-37,38  
34-8  
I9 Front bearings of mix-  
ers  
AV  
*i3  
J. Color developer unit / Revolver unit  
Lubrication/  
Coating  
Replacement  
(KS)  
Operation Parts list  
Items to check  
Cleaning  
Remarks  
check  
<P-I>  
J1 Whole color developer  
unit (Y, M and C)  
B
J2 Color developer unit  
drive section  
W1  
(Y, M and C)  
J3 Developer material  
(Y, M, and C)  
24/30/37.5  
103-3  
33-24  
*j1  
*j2  
J4 Front shield  
(Y, M and C)  
B
R
R
J5 Oil seal  
AV  
33-4,14  
(4 pcs. for each color)  
J6 Toner cartridge drive  
gear (Y, M and C)  
W1  
J7 Revolver drive gear  
W1  
AV  
J8 Color auto-toner sen-  
sor  
B
B
36-18  
*j3  
J9 Side shield  
R
R
33-39,40  
33-9  
J10 Polarity adjustment  
plate  
FL  
AV  
*j4  
*j5  
*j6  
J11 Color toner cartridge  
sensor  
B
36-104  
33-12  
J12 Front bearings of mix-  
ers  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
K. Transfer belt unit / Transfer belt cleaning unit  
Lubrication/  
Replacement  
(KD)  
Operation Parts list  
Items to check  
Cleaning  
Remarks  
Coating  
check  
<P-I>  
29-31  
29-14  
30-7  
K1 Transfer belt  
K2 1st transfer roller  
K3 Drive roller  
B
R
R
R
R
A
A
*k1  
*k1  
K4 2nd transfer facing  
roller  
30-15  
K5 Transfer belt home  
position sensor  
(2 pcs.)  
B
29-9  
*k2  
K6 Transfer belt cleaning  
blade  
130/160/200  
R
31-8  
K7 Transfer belt recovery  
blade  
B
31-16  
*k3  
K8 Blade seal (front side)  
K9 Blade seal (rear side)  
130/160/200  
130/160/200  
130/160/200  
31-10  
31-12  
31-9  
4
K10 Blade mylar (front  
side)  
K11 Blade mylar (rear side)  
31-11  
130/160/200  
Note:  
Check the color deviation after replacing K1, K2 and K6.  
L. 2nd transfer roller unit  
Lubrication/  
Coating  
Replacement  
Operation Parts list  
Items to check  
Cleaning  
Remarks  
(KS)  
check  
<P-I>  
L1 2nd transfer roller  
200/240/300  
13-19  
L2 Paper guide  
B
B
L3 Image quality sensor  
23-24  
*l1  
Note:  
Check the color deviation after replacing L1.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
4 - 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M. Fuser unit  
Items to check  
Lubrication/  
Coating  
Replacement  
(KS)  
Operation Parts list  
Cleaning  
Remarks  
check  
<P-I>  
M1  
M2  
M3  
M4  
M5  
M6  
M7  
M8  
M9  
Fuser belt  
100/120/150  
100/120/150  
100/120/150  
100/120/150  
100/120/150  
R
39-1  
Pressure roller  
Separation finger  
Oil roller  
42-5  
42-25  
42-22  
42-11  
*m1  
*m2  
Cleaning roller  
Thermistor (3 pcs.)  
Fuser unit drive gear  
Exit roller  
A
A
W1  
W2  
Fuser belt guide  
100/120/150  
100/120/150  
42-18  
41-2  
39-1  
M10 Separation roller  
*m3  
M11 Pressure roller dis-  
charge brush  
N. RADF (MR-3018)  
Items to check  
Lubrication/  
Coating  
Replacement  
(KS)  
Operation Parts list  
Cleaning  
Remarks  
check  
<P-I>  
1
2
3
4
5
Pickup roller  
A
A
A
A
A
120  
120  
120  
5-1  
Separation roller  
Feed roller  
4-10  
5-1  
Registration roller  
Intermediatetransfer  
roller  
6
7
8
9
Front read roller  
Platen roller  
A
A
A
A
Rear read roller  
Reverse registration  
roller  
10  
11  
Exit/reverse roller  
Platen sheet  
A
B or A  
O. PFP (KD-1011)  
Items to check  
Lubrication/  
Coating  
Replacement  
(KS)  
Operation Parts list  
Cleaning  
Remarks  
check  
<P-I>  
O1  
O2  
O3  
O4  
Pickup roller  
(upper/lower)  
A
80  
80  
80  
5-29  
Feed roller  
(upper/lower)  
A
A
5-26  
Separation roller  
(upper/lower)  
AV, W2  
W1  
5-112  
*o1  
Drive gear  
(tooth face)  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P. LCF (KD-1012)  
Items to check  
Lubrication/  
Coating  
Replacement  
(KS)  
Operation Parts list  
Cleaning  
Remarks  
check  
<P-I>  
4-30  
4-28  
5-12  
P1  
P2  
P3  
P4  
Pickup roller  
Feed roller  
A
A
A
160  
160  
160  
Separation roller  
Drive gear  
(tooth face)  
W1  
4
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
4 - 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A2 A4 A5  
A8 A6  
A3  
A1  
A7  
A10  
K6  
K7  
K8  
K9  
K10  
K11  
D1  
A9  
K3 K5 K2  
M8  
M1 M3 M11 M2  
G5  
D4  
G9  
J8  
G1  
G6 G3  
M5  
G7  
G4  
M4  
M6  
J11  
K5  
J1  
J3  
J4  
J5  
D1  
K4  
J9  
L2  
J10  
J12  
L1  
C9, C10  
D1  
E7  
E4  
E1  
I1  
I3  
I4  
I5  
I6  
I8  
I9  
E2  
E3  
C4  
C2  
C3  
C4  
C2  
C3  
F5 F2 F1 G8  
F4 F3  
K1  
C1  
C5  
B1  
Fig.4-8 Front side  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
N5  
N9  
N4  
N3  
N2 N1  
N6  
N7 N8  
N10  
N11  
Fig.4-9  
O1 O2  
4
O3  
O2  
O3  
O1  
Fig.4-10 Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
4 - 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P1  
P2  
P3  
Fig.4-11 Large Capacity Feeder (LCF)  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remarks “*” in the Preventive Maintenance Check List  
*
a1.  
Original glass, ADF original glass  
Clean both sides of the original glass and ADF original. Make sure that there is no dust on  
the mirrors-1, -2, -3 and lens after cleaning. Then install the original glass and ADF original  
glass.  
Note:  
Make sure that there is no fingerprints or oil staining on part of the original glass on where the  
original scale is mounted since the shading correction plate is located below the scale to be  
scanned.  
*
c1, o1. Separation roller (Feed unit, PFP)  
Apply an even coat of grease (Alvania No.2) to all round the inside of the spring.  
When replacing the separation roller, apply adequate amount of white grease (Molykote  
HP-300) on the places of the holder shown in the figure (4 places).  
Note:  
Make sure that the grease does not adhere to the roller surface. Wipe it off with alcohol if  
adhered.  
4
Apply white grease  
Apply grease on the  
inner surface  
Fig.4-13  
Fig.4-12  
*
c2.  
Drive gears in the paper feeding section (teeth of gears and shafts)  
Apply some white grease (Molykote X5-6020) to the teeth of gears and shafts of the drive  
gears.  
Note:  
Make sure that oil is not running over or scattered around as the gear is rotated coming into the  
clutch after applying molykote to the gear which is located near the clutch. The quantity of moly-  
cote should be smaller than that to be applied to the other parts.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
4 - 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
*
c10.  
When installing the intermediate guide after cleaning the paper dust removal brush  
attached to it, check whether 2 hooks are fitted in and boss "A" in the figure is inserted into  
its groove correctly.  
A
A
A
Fig.4-14  
*
e1.  
Separation roller (SFB)  
Apply an even coat of grease (Alvania No.2) to all round the inside of the spring.  
When replacing the separation roller, apply adequate amount of white grease (Molykote  
HP-300) on the places of the holder shown in the figure (4 places).  
Note:  
Make sure that the grease does not adhere to the roller surface. Wipe it off with alcohol if  
adhered.  
Apply grease on the  
inner surface  
Apply white grease  
Fig.4-15  
Fig.4-16  
*
f1.  
Main charger case / Main charger wire  
Clean the main charger case and wire with a cloth soaked in water and squeezed tightly,  
and then wipe them with a dry cloth.  
Note:  
Be careful of the following when attaching a new wire (length: 373 mm).  
-
-
-
Insert the wire securely into the V-grooves of the front and rear sides.  
Do not twist the wire.  
Do not touch the wire with your bare hand.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 22  
05/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
*
g1.  
Drum stay  
If toner accumulates on the drum stay, take off the drum stay from the process unit and  
clean it with an electric vacuum cleaner. Also, remove any toner stains around the drum  
stay with a cloth.  
Drum stay  
4
Fig.4-17  
*
g2.  
Drum cleaning blade / Drum cleaner brush  
Since the edge of the blade is vulnerable and can be easily damaged by factors such as  
the adherence of paper dust. Replace the cleaning blade and brush with new ones if poor  
images are copied due to the damaged blade regardless of the number of output pages  
which have been made.  
*
*
*
g3.  
Recovery blade  
Replace the recovery blade regardless the number of output pages if the edge of the blade  
get damaged.  
i1, j1.  
Developer material  
After replacing the developer material, be sure to perform the auto-toner adjustment and  
then image quality control initialization (Ch.3.2).  
i2, j2.  
Oil seal  
Mixer unit (Rear side of mixers-1 & -2) 2 pcs.  
Developer sleeve  
2 pc.  
Notes:  
1. Lubricate the oil seal only when the oil seal is replaced  
2. When exchanging the oil seal of the mixer unit, replace "i3, j6. Front bearings of mixer" at the  
same time.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
4 - 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
During replacement, coat the oil seal with grease (Alvania No.2).  
(1) Push in a new oil seal parallel to the mount-  
ing hole section of the developer frame or  
outside of the nozzle mixer.  
Developer frame  
(Nozzle mixer)  
*
Pay attention to the direction in which the  
oil seal is attached. (See figure on right.)  
Outside  
(2) Apply an even coat of grease to the inside of  
the oil seal.  
Amount: About two small drops  
(3) Wipe off any grease exuded from the inside.  
Grease  
Inside  
Oil seal  
Fig.4-18  
*
*
i3, j6.  
j3.  
Front bearings of mixers  
When exchanging the oil seals (rear side of mixer-1 and -2) replace the front bearings of  
mixer-1 and -2 at the same time. Since the oil seal is attached to the front bearings of  
mixer-1 and -2, apply grease when replacing them referring to *i2, j2.  
Color auto-toner sensor  
Clean the color auto-toner sensor as follows:  
1) Pull the sensor case of the color auto-toner sensor unit toward you, then remove 1  
screw to take off the sensor shutter. Clean the surface of the sensor with a cotton swab  
or soft cloth with sufficient alcohol filled in.  
Sensor shutter  
Sensor case  
Color auto-toner sensor  
Fig.4-19  
2) Clean the reference plate of the sensor shutter by blowing off the toner dust with the  
blower brush or the air spray cleaner etc.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note:  
When you clean the reference plate, never touch it directly with the cleaning brush etc. as the  
surface of the reference plate is fragile.  
Reference plate  
Fig.4-20  
*
j4.  
Polarity adjustment plate  
Apply two-rice-grain-amount of FLOIL (GE-334C) to the polarity adjustment plate (feeding  
terminal).  
4
Fig.4-21  
*
*
j5.  
Color toner cartridge sensor  
Perform the cleaning of the surface of the color toner cartridge sensor when you replace  
the color developer unit (e-STUDIO281c: 24,000 sheets / e-STUDIO351c: 30,000 sheets /  
e-STUDIO451c: 37,500 sheets).  
k1.  
Transfer belt drive roller -1, -2  
Fully clean up the toner and such adhered to the roller with alcohol since an image failure  
may occur if there are any bolts remaining on the roller.  
Blot  
Fig.4-22  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
4 - 25  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
*
k2.  
Transfer belt home position sensor  
Clean each surface of transfer belt home position sensors (2 pcs.) with a dry cloth when  
replacing the transfer belt.  
Transfer belt  
home position sensor-1  
Fig.4-23  
Transfer belt  
home position sensor-2  
Fig.4-24  
*
k3.  
Transfer belt recovery blade  
Clean the surface of transfer belt recovery blade with a cloth soaked in water and tightly  
squeezed, and the wipe it with a dry cloth when replacing the transfer belt cleaning blade.  
If the edge of recovery blade is damaged, replace the blade regardless of the number of  
output pages.  
*
*
l1.  
Area around image quality sensor  
Clean the shutter of the image quality sensor and around it. Do not touch the sensor head  
inside the shutter.  
m1.  
Separation finger  
The paper jam may be caused if the tip of the finger is damaged or deformed. If there is  
any problem with it, replace the finger with a new one regardless of the number of output  
pages which have been made. Do not damage the tip of the finger during the cleaning.  
The finger may be damaged if the toner adhering to the tip of it is scraped off forcibly.  
Replace the finger if the toner is sticking to it heavily.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
*
*
m2.  
m3.  
Thermistor  
Clean the thermistor with alcohol if the toner or dirt is sticking to it when the fuser roller is  
replaced. Do not deform or damage the thermistor during the cleaning. Replace the ther-  
mistor with a new one if it is damaged or deformed regardless of degree.  
Separation roller  
When replacing the transfer belt, apply some White Molykote (HP-300) on both ends of  
the separation roller shaft.  
4
Fig.4-25  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
4 - 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.5 PM KIT  
KIT name  
Component  
Drum cleaning blade  
Part name  
BL-3511D  
Qty.  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
EPU-KIT-281C  
Main charger wire  
Main charger grid  
Drum cleaner brush  
Ozone filter  
WIRE-CHARGR-373  
GRID-220  
B-281C  
FILTER-OZ-SPB-600  
ASYS-PAD-CHARGR-350  
BL-281CTR  
Charger wire cleaning pad  
Belt cleaning blade*  
Developer material (Y)  
Developer material (M)  
Developer material (C)  
Cleaning jig  
DEV-KIT-281CCLR  
D-281C-Y  
D-281C-M  
D-281C-C  
JIG-CLEAN-DOC  
D-3511-K  
DEV-KIT-281C  
FR-KIT-281C  
Developer material (K)  
Cleaning jig  
JIG-CLEAN-DOC  
CR-281CTR2  
2nd transfer roller  
Fuser belt  
BT-3511-FU  
Pressure roller  
HR-3511-L  
Separation finger  
Oil roller  
SCRAPR-FUS-350  
SR-3511U  
Cleaning roller  
B-281CU  
Fuser belt guide  
Pressure roller discharge brush  
Pick up roller  
COLOR-HR-IN-N  
BRUSH-FUS-PR  
ROLLER-PICK-AT  
K-ROLL-FEED  
K-ROLL-SPT  
ROL-KIT-16CST  
ROL-KIT-1010  
DF-KIT-3018  
Feed roller  
Separation roller  
Pick up roller  
ROL-PICK-UP  
ROL-PAPER-FED-F  
ROL-PAPER-FED-S  
ASYS-ROL-FEED  
ASYS-ROL-FEED  
ASYS-ROL-RET  
Feed roller  
Separation roller  
Pick up roller  
Feed roller  
Separation roller  
* The following seals and Mylar sheets are attached to the Belt cleaning blade.  
Name  
Blade seal (front side)  
Blade seal (rear side)  
Blade mylar (front side)  
Blade mylar (rear side)  
Part name  
Qty.  
SEAL-SIDE-CLN-TBU-F-1  
1
1
1
1
SEAL-SIDE-CLN-TBU-R-1  
ASYS-SEAL-SIDE-CLT-F-1  
ASYS-SEAL-SIDE-CLT-R-1  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 28  
05/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4.6 Jig List  
Parts list  
Item  
Page  
101  
101  
101  
101  
101  
101  
102  
101  
102  
102  
102  
102  
101  
101  
101  
Item  
1
Door switch jig  
Test chart (A4)  
3
Test chat (LT)  
3
Test chart No. TCC-1 (A4)  
Test chart No. TCC-1 (LT)  
Doctor blade cleaning jig  
Downloading jig (DLM board)  
Wire holder jig  
2
2
4
1
5
Download JIG-2 (6 Flash ROMs)  
Download JIG-1 (2 Flash ROMs)  
ROM writer adapter (For 1881)  
ROM writer adapter (For 1931)  
Doctor sleeve jig  
2
3
4
4
5
7
Developer material nozzle  
Belt tenstion jig (spring)  
8
20  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
4 - 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4.7 Grease List  
Parts list  
Grease name  
Part name  
Volume  
Container  
Page  
Item  
8
SI Silicon oil  
ASM-SILICONE-1M  
OIL-LAUNA40-100  
MOLYKOTE-100  
ASM-PG-HP300-S  
GREASE-HP-S  
100 cc  
100 cc  
100 g  
100 g  
10 g  
Bottle  
Oiler  
101  
101  
101  
101  
101  
101  
101  
L Launa 40  
9
W1 White grease (Molykote X5-6020)  
W2 White grease (Molykote HP-300)  
W2 White grease (Molykote HP-300)  
AV Alvania No.2  
Tube  
Bottle  
Bottle  
Tube  
Bottle  
12  
10A  
10B  
11  
ASM-PG-ALV2  
100 g  
20 g  
FL Floil (GE-334C)  
ASM-PG-GE334C-S  
13  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4.8 Precautions for Storing and Handling Supplies  
4.8.1  
Precautions for storing TOSHIBA supplies  
1) Toner/Developer  
Toner and developer should be stored in a place where the ambient temperature is between 10°C to  
35°C (no condensation), and should also be protected against direct sunlight during transportation.  
2) Photoconductive drum  
Like the toner and developer, photoconductive drum should be stored in a dark place where the  
ambient temperature is between 10°C to 35°C (no condensation). Be sure to avoid places where  
drums may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.  
3) Drum cleaning blade / Transfer belt cleaning blade  
This item should be stored in a flat place where the ambient temperature is between 10°C to 35°C,  
and should also be protected against high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.  
4) Transfer belt / Transfer roller / Fuser belt / Pressure roller  
Avoid places where the rollers may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.  
4
5) Oil roller / Cleaning roller  
Avoid places where the rollers may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.  
They should also be stored “horizontally” on a flat surface.  
6) Paper  
Avoid storing copy paper in places where it may be subjected to high humidity.  
After a package is opened, be sure to place and store it in a storage bag.  
4.8.2  
Checking and cleaning of photoconductive drum  
1) Use of gloves  
If fingerprints or oil adhere to the drum surface, the property of the photosensitive drum may  
degrade, affecting the quality of the copy image. So, do not touch the drum surface with bare hands.  
2) Handling precautions  
As the photoconductive drum surface is very sensitive, be sure to handle the drum carefully when  
installing and removing it so as not damage its surface.  
Be sure to apply “patting powder” (lubricant) to the entire surface of the drum (including both ends of  
the drum where OPC is not coated) when replacing the drum. When the drum has been replaced  
with a new one, the drum counter (setting mode (08-1150-0, 3, 6 and 7) must be cleared to 0 (zero).  
This clearing can be performed in PM support mode.  
Notes:  
1. Application of the patting powder is for reducing the friction between the drum and cleaning  
blade. If the application of patting powder is neglected, the drum and cleaning blade may be  
damaged.  
2. When paper fibers or dint adhere to the cleaning blade edge, they may reduce the cleaning  
efficiency and, in addition, may damage the blade and the drum. Be sure to remove any fibers  
found adhering to the blade.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
4 - 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3) Installation of equipment and storage of drum  
Avoid installing the equipment where it may be subjected to high temperature, high humidity, chemi-  
cals and/or their fumes.  
Do not place the drum in a location where it is exposed to direct sunlight or high intensity light such  
as near a window. Otherwise the drum will fatigue, and will not produce sufficient image density  
immediately after being installed in the equipment.  
4) Cleaning the drum  
At periodic maintenance calls, wipe the entire surface of the drum clean using the designated clean-  
ing cotton. Use sufficiently thick cleaning cotton (dry soft pad) so as not to scratch the drum surface  
inadvertently with your fingertips or nails. Also, remove your rings and wristwatch before starting  
cleaning work to prevent accidental damage to the drum.  
Do not use alcohol, selenium refresher and other organic solvents or silicon oil as they will have an  
adverse effect on the drum.  
5) Scratches on photoconductive drum surface  
If the surface is scratched in such a way that the aluminum substrate is exposed, no copy image will  
be produced on this area. In addition, the cleaning blade will be damaged so replacement with a  
new drum will be necessary.  
6) Collecting used photoconductive drums  
Regarding the recovery and disposal of used photoconductive drums, we recommend following the  
relevant local regulations or rules.  
4.8.3  
Checking and cleaning of drum cleaning blade and transfer belt  
cleaning blade  
1) Handling precautions  
Pay attention to the following points as the cleaning blade life is determined by the condition of its  
edge:  
-
-
-
-
-
-
Do not allow hard objects to hit or rub against blade edge.  
Do not rub the edge with a cloth or soft pad.  
Do not leave oil (or fingerprints, etc.) on the edge.  
Do not apply solvents such as paint thinner to the blade.  
Do not allow paper fibers or dirt to contact the blade edge.  
Do not place the blade near a heat source.  
2) Cleaning procedure  
Clean the blade edge with a cloth moistened with water and squeezed lightly.  
4.8.4  
Handling of drum cleaner brush  
Do not touch the brush surface with bare hands.  
4.8.5  
Handling of transfer belt  
1) Do not touch the transfer belt surface with bare hands.  
2) Prevent oil or other foreign matter from adhering to the transfer belt surface.  
3) Do not touch the transfer belt with alcohol or any other organic solvent.  
4) Do not apply external pressure that might scratch the transfer belt.  
5) When replacing the belt and transfer belt cleaning unit, apply patting powder sufficiently and evenly.  
Otherwise, it may reduce the cleaning efficiency.  
6) When replacing the transfer belt, clean the drive roller-1 drive roller-2, and tension roller with a sol-  
vent such as alcohol, and then attach the transfer belt.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4.8.6  
Checking and cleaning of fuser belt and pressure roller  
1) Handling precautions  
Fuser belt  
-
-
-
-
Do not touch the fuser belt surface with bare hands.  
Prevent oil or other foreign matter from staining the fuser belt surface.  
Do not allow alcohol or any other organic solvent to contact with the fuser belt.  
Do not apply external pressure that might scratch the fuser belt.  
Pressure roller  
-
-
Do not leave any oil (fingerprints, etc.) on the pressure roller.  
Be careful not to allow any hard object to hit or rub against the pressure roller, or it may be dam-  
aged, possibly resulting in poor cleaning.  
2) Checking  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Check for stain and damage on the fuser belt and pressure roller, and clean if necessary.  
Check the separation guide and fingers and check for chipped tips.  
Check the cleaning effect of the cleaning roller.  
Check the thermistors for proper contact with the pressure roller.  
Check the fused and fixed condition of the toner.  
Check the gap between the inlet guide and pressure roller.  
Check the fuser belt for proper transportation.  
4
Check the pressure roller for proper rotation.  
3) Cleaning procedure  
When the fuser belt and pressure roller become dirty, they will cause jamming. If this happens, wipe  
the surface clean with a suitable cloth. For easier cleaning, clean the belt and roller while they are  
still warm.  
Note:  
Be careful not to rub the fuser belt and pressure roller surface with your nails or hard objects  
because it can be easily damaged. Do not use silicone oil on the fuser belt and pressure roller.  
4) Checking after the assembly of the fuser belt unit  
After the assembly, rotate the fuser belt for a round to confirm that the belt is neither folded nor  
scratched.  
A folded or scratched belt may be broken when it is in use.  
Note:  
Never rotate the fuser belt in the reverse direction as it will cause deformation of the thermistor  
and discharge brush.  
4.8.7  
Checking and replacing the oil roller and cleaning roller  
1) Handling precautions  
Never allow solvents such as paint thinner to touch to the oil/cleaning rollers.  
2) Poor cleaning and corrective treatment  
Judgment should be made depending on how much toner has been deposited on the fuser belt sur-  
face. When its surface is stained with toner, check the oil roller and cleaning roller. If toner is heavily  
adhered on the oil/cleaning rollers, it means the cleaning performance is declined and the oil/clean-  
ing rollers should be replaced with new ones.  
The oil/cleaning rollers are gradually degraded due to subjection to the heat from the fuser belt over  
a long period of time. Replace them after the specified number of output pages have been made.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
4 - 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4.8.8  
Checking and cleaning of discharge brush  
1) Handling precautions  
Be careful not to bend the end bristle of the brush as it may cause the bad contact with the pressure  
roller.  
2) Checking  
Replace the discharge brush with a new one if toner is stick to it regardless of the number of output  
pages, as the performance of the brush may have been deteriorated.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. TROUBLESHOOTING  
When any of the PC boards or the HDD requires replacement, refer to “5.3 Replacement of PC Boards  
and HDD”.  
5.1 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code  
5.1.1  
Paper transport jam (paper exit section)  
[E010] Jam not reaching the exit sensor  
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper on the transport path?  
|
È
YES Æ 1) Remove the paper.  
2) Check if the intermediate guide is installed properly. (Ch.4.4 *c10)  
NO  
Is the paper clinging to the transfer belt entering under the receiving tray?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the intermediate guide installed properly? (Ch.4.4 *c10)  
È
NO Æ Install the intermediate guide correctly.  
YES  
Is there any paper jammed in the fuser unit?  
|
È
YES Æ 1) Remove the paper.  
2) Check if there is any abnormality on the paper transport path.  
5
NO  
Is the exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[H])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the exit sensor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN334 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the exit sensor.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
Is the registration clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-108/158)  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the registration clutch is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN339 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the registration clutch.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
Check the registration roller. Replace it if it is worn out.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 1  
05/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
[E020] Stop jam at the exit sensor  
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper on the transport path?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[H])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the exit sensor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN334 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the exit sensor.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
Check the exit roller. Replace it if it is worn out.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 2  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1.2  
Paper misfeeding  
[E110] ADU misfeeding (paper not reaching the registration sensor)  
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the registration sensor?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check:03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the registration sensor.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
Is the ADU clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-222)  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the ADU clutch is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the ADU clutch.  
5
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
Check the rollers in the ADU. Replace them if they are worn out.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[E120] Bypass misfeeding (paper not reaching the registration sensor)  
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the registration sensor?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the registration sensor.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
Are the bypass feed clutch and bypass feed sensor working?  
(Perform the output check: 03-204 and the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[D])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the bypass feed clutch is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the bypass feed clutch.  
6) Replace the bypass feed sensor.  
7) Replace the LGC board.  
|
È
YES  
Check the rollers in the ADU. Replace them if they are worn out.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 4  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[E130] Upper drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor)  
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the upper drawer feed sensor?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the upper drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed sensor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the upper drawer feed sensor.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
Is the upper drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-201)  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed clutch is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN341 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the upper drawer feed clutch.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
5
YES  
Check the upper drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they  
are worn out.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[E140] Lower drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor)  
Open the side cover. Is there any paper in front of the lower drawer feed sensor?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the lower drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[G])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the lower drawer feed sensor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the lower drawer feed sensor.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
Is the lower drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-202)  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the lower drawer feed clutch is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN341 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the lower drawer feed clutch.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
Check the lower drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they are  
worn out.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[E150] PFP upper drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor)  
Open the PFP side cover. Is there any paper in front of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the PFP upper drawer feed sensor working?  
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D])  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor is discon-  
nected.  
2) Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board is dis-  
connected.  
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short  
circuited or open circuited.  
6) Replace the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.  
7) Replace the PFP board.  
8) Replace the LGC board.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
YES  
Is the PFP upper drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-226)  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer feed clutch is discon-  
nected.  
2) Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN242 and CN244 on the PFP  
board is disconnected.  
5
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short  
circuited or open circuited.  
6) Replace the PFP upper drawer feed clutch.  
7) Replace the PFP board.  
8) Replace the LGC board.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
YES  
Check the PFP upper drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if  
they are worn out.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[E160] PFP lower drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the PFP lower drawer feed sensor)  
Open the PFP side cover. Is there any paper in front of the PFP lower drawer feed sensor?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the PFP lower drawer feed sensor working?  
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[D])  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the PFP lower drawer feed sensor is discon-  
nected.  
2) Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board is dis-  
connected.  
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short  
circuited or open circuited.  
6) Replace the PFP lower drawer feed sensor.  
7) Replace the PFP board.  
8) Replace the LGC board.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
YES  
Is the PFP lower drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-228)  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the PFP lower drawer feed clutch is discon-  
nected.  
2) Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN242 and CN244 on the PFP  
board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short  
circuited or open circuited.  
6) Replace the PFP lower drawer feed clutch.  
7) Replace the PFP board.  
8) Replace the LGC board.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
YES  
Check the PFP lower drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if  
they are worn out.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[E190] LCF misfeeding (paper not reaching the LCF feed sensor)  
Open the LCF side cover. Is there any paper in front of the LCF feed sensor?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the LCF feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[G])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the LCF feed sensor is disconnected.  
2) Check if either of the connectors CN100 or CN104 on the LCF board is dis-  
connected.  
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short  
circuited or open circuited.  
|
|
|
6) Replace the LCF feed sensor.  
7) Replace the LCF board.  
|
È
8) Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
Is the LCF feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-209)  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the LCF feed clutch is disconnected.  
2) Check if any of the connectors CN100, CN101 and CN103 on the LCF  
board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short  
circuited or open circuited.  
5
|
|
|
6) Replace the LCF feed clutch.  
7) Replace the LCF board.  
|
È
8) Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
Check the LCF feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they are worn  
out.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1.3  
Paper transport jam  
[E200] Upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)  
[E210] Lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)  
[E300] PFP upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)  
[E330] PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)  
[E3C0] LCF transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)  
Open the jam access cover. Is there paper in front of the registration sensor?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the registration sensor.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
Are the upper transport clutches (high/low speed) working?  
(Perform the output check: 03-439, 440)  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the upper transport clutches (high/low speed)  
are disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN339 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the upper transport clutches (high/low speed).  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
1) Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper  
source, and replace them if they are worn out.  
2) Check the transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[E220] Lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor)  
[E310] PFP upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor)  
[E340] PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor)  
[E3D0] LCF transport jam (not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor)  
Open the jam access cover. Is there paper in front of the upper drawer feed sensor?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the upper drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed sensor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the upper drawer feed sensor.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
Are the lower transport clutches (high/low speed) working?  
(Perform the output check: 03-203, 205)  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the lower transport clutches (high/low speed) are  
disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN341 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
5
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the lower transport clutches (high/low speed).  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
1) Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper  
source, and replace them if they are worn out.  
2) Check the transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[E320] PFP upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor)  
[E350] PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor)  
[E3E0] LCF transport jam (not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor)  
Open the side cover. Is there paper in front of the lower drawer feed sensor?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the lower drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[G])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the lower drawer feed sensor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the lower drawer feed sensor.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
Are the lower transport clutches working? (Perform the output check: 03-203, 205)  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the lower transport clutches (high/low speed) are  
disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN341 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the lower transport clutches (high/low speed).  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
When the paper fed from the PFP:  
Is the PFP transport clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-225)  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the PFP transport clutch is disconnected.  
2) Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN242 and CN244 on the PFP  
board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short  
circuited or open circuited.  
|
|
|
6) Replace the PFP transport clutch.  
7) Replace the PFP board.  
È
8) Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
1) Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper  
source, and replace them if they are worn out.  
2) Check the transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[E360] PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor)  
Open the PFP side cover. Is there any paper in front of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the PFP upper feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D])  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor is discon-  
nected.  
2) Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board is dis-  
connected.  
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short  
circuited or open circuited.  
6) Replace the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.  
7) Replace the PFP board.  
8) Replace the LGC board.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
YES  
Is the PFP transport clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-225)  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the PFP transport clutch is disconnected.  
2) Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN242 and CN244 on the PFP  
board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short  
circuited or open circuited.  
5
|
|
|
6) Replace the PFP transport clutch.  
7) Replace the PFP board.  
|
È
8) Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
1) Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper  
source, and replace them if they are worn out.  
2) Check the PFP transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[E510] ADU transport stop jam  
Open the ADU. Is there any paper in front of the ADU entrance sensor?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the ADU entrance sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[H])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the ADU entrance sensor is disconnected.  
2) Check if either of the connectors CN211 or CN214 on the ADU board is dis-  
connected.  
3) Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short  
circuited or open circuited.  
|
|
|
6) Replace the ADU entrance sensor.  
7) Replace the ADU board.  
|
È
8) Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
Is the exit motor (rotating in reverse) working? (Perform the output check: 03-121/171)  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the exit motor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connectors CN437 and CN434 on the DRV board is discon-  
nected.  
3) Check if the connector CN331 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the DRV board and LGC board are short  
circuited or open circuited.  
|
|
|
6) Replace the exit motor.  
7) Replace the DRV board.  
|
È
8) Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
Is the ADU motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-110/160)  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the ADU motor is disconnected.  
2) Check if any of the connectors CN211, CN212 and CN215 on the ADU  
board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short  
circuited or open circuited.  
|
|
|
6) Replace the ADU motor.  
7) Replace the ADU board.  
È
8) Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
Check the rollers in the ADU and the exit roller of the equipment. Replace them if they are  
worn out.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[E520] Stop jam in the ADU  
Open the ADU. Is there any paper in front of the ADU exit sensor?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the ADU exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[G])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the ADU exit sensor is disconnected.  
2) Check if either of the connectors CN211 or CN213 on the ADU board is dis-  
connected.  
3) Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short  
circuited or open circuited.  
|
|
|
6) Replace the ADU exit sensor.  
7) Replace the ADU board.  
|
È
8) Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
Is the ADU clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-222)  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the ADU clutch is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the ADU clutch.  
5
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
Check the rollers in the ADU. Replace them if they are worn out.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[EB50] Paper remaining on the transport path due to multiple feeding  
When the paper is fed from any of the upper drawer, bypass feed unit or ADU:  
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the registration sensor?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
When the paper is fed from the upper drawer:  
Is the upper drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed sensor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the upper drawer feed sensor.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
When the paper is fed from the bypass feed unit:  
Is the bypass feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[D])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the bypass feed sensor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the bypass feed sensor.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
When the paper is fed from the ADU:  
Is the ADU exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[G])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the ADU exit sensor is disconnected.  
2) Check if either of the connectors CN211 or CN213 on the ADU board is dis-  
connected.  
3) Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short  
circuited or open circuited.  
|
|
|
6) Replace the ADU exit sensor.  
7) Replace the ADU board.  
È
8) Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the registration sensor.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
Check the rollers. Replace them if they are worn out.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 16  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the paper is fed from any of the lower drawer, PFP or LCF:  
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the upper drawer feed sensor?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Are the upper/lower drawer feed sensors working?  
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H], /[3]/[G])  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the upper/lower drawer feed sensors are discon-  
nected.  
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the upper/lower drawer feed sensors.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
Check the rollers. Replace them if they are worn out.  
[EB60] Paper remaining on the transport path due to multiple feeding  
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the registration sensor?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
5
Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the registration sensor.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
Check the rollers. Replace them if they are worn out.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1.4  
Other paper jam  
[E030] Power-ON jam  
Open the cover of the unit/area whose picture is flashing on the control panel.  
Is there any paper on the transport path? (Refer to the following table)  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the sensor in the jamming area working?  
(Perform the input check: Refer to the following table.)  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected.  
2) Check if any of the connectors on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the sensor.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
NO  
Replace the LGC board.  
Relation between the jamming area and the corresponding sensors/covers.  
(If a jam is occurring in the ADU, LCF or PFP, check the board in each unit.)  
Jamming area  
Registration area  
Cover  
Jam access cover Registration sensor  
Upper drawer feed sensor  
Exit sensor  
Sensor  
Test Mode/Input check  
03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E]  
03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H]  
03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[H]  
03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[H]  
03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[G]  
03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[G]  
Exit area  
ADU  
Fuser cover  
ADU  
ADU entrance sensor  
ADU exit sensor  
Feeding area  
(equipment)  
Side cover  
Lower drawer feed sensor  
Bypass unit  
LCF  
PFP  
Bypass unit  
LCF side cover  
PFP side cover  
Bypass feed sensor  
LCF feed sensor  
PFP upper drawer feed sensor  
PFP lower drawer feed sensor  
Bridge unit transport sensor-1  
Bridge unit transport sensor-2  
03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[D]  
03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[G]  
03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D]  
03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[D]  
03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[C]  
03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[A]  
Bridge unit  
Bridge unit  
[E061] Incorrect paper size setting for upper drawer  
[E062] Incorrect paper size setting for lower drawer  
[E063] Incorrect paper size setting for PFP upper drawer  
[E064] Incorrect paper size setting for PFP lower drawer  
[E065] Incorrect paper size setting for bypass tray  
If any paper remains in the equipment or drawer, remove it. Match the paper size of the  
drawer setting and the one in the drawer.  
*
Paper size detection is performed at the first sheet of paper when the drawer is opened  
or closed, or when the power of the equipment is turned ON.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[E090] Image data delay jam  
1) Remove the paper remained in front of the registration sensor.  
2) Check if the error is cleared by turning the power OFF and then back ON.  
3) Check if the connectors connecting the SYS board, SLG board and PLG board are dis-  
connected.  
4) Check if the connectors of the HDD are disconnected.  
5) Check if the harnesses connecting the SYS board, SLG board and PLG board are open-  
circuited.  
6) Replace the HDD, SYS board, SLG board and PLG board.  
[E550] Paper remaining on the transport path  
Open the cover of the unit/area whose picture is flashing on the control panel.  
Is there any paper on the transport path?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the sensor in the jamming area working?  
(Perform the input check: Refer to the following table)  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected.  
2) Check if any of the connectors on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the sensor.  
5
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
Replace the LGC board.  
Relation between the jamming area and the corresponding sensors/covers  
(If a jam is occurring in the ADU, LCF or PFP, check the board in each unit.)  
Jamming area  
Registration area  
Cover  
Jam access cover Registration sensor  
Upper drawer feed sensor  
Exit sensor  
Sensor  
Test Mode/Input check  
03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E]  
03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H]  
03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[H]  
03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[H]  
03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[G]  
03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[D]  
03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[G]  
Exit area  
ADU  
Fuser cover  
ADU  
ADU entrance sensor  
ADU exit sensor  
Bypass unit  
Feeding area  
(equipment)  
Bypass unit  
Side cover  
Bypass feed sensor  
Lower drawer feed sensor  
LCF  
PFP  
LCF side cover  
PFP side cover  
LCF feed sensor  
03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[G]  
03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D]  
03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[D]  
03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[C]  
03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[A]  
-
PFP upper drawer feed sensor  
PFP lower drawer feed sensor  
Bridge unit transport sensor-1  
Bridge unit transport sensor-2  
Sensors in the finisher  
Bridge unit  
Finisher  
Bridge unit  
Finisher door  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1.5  
Cover open jam  
[E400] Jam access cover open  
Is the jam access cover open?  
È
YES Æ Remove paper if there is any, then shut the cover.  
NO  
Is the voltage of 24V being supplied from the power supply unit?  
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX] ON/[1]/[H])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector for 24V power supply is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN335 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
Replace the LGC board.  
[E410] Front cover open jam  
Is the front cover open?  
È
YES Æ Shut the cover.  
NO  
Is the voltage of 24V being supplied from the power supply unit?  
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX] ON/[1]/[H])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector for 24V power supply is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN335 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
Is the front cover opening/closing switch working?  
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[F])  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the front cover opening/closing switch is discon-  
nected.  
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the front cover opening/closing switch.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
Replace the LGC board.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[E420] PFP side cover open jam  
Is the PFP side cover open?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper if there is any, then shut the cover.  
NO  
Is the PFP side cover opening/closing switch working?  
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[F])  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the PFP side cover opening/closing switch is dis-  
connected.  
2) Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board is dis-  
connected.  
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short  
circuited or open circuited.  
6) Replace the PFP side cover opening/closing switch.  
7) Replace the PFP board.  
8) Replace the LGC board.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
YES  
1) Replace the PFP board.  
2) Replace the LGC board.  
5
[E430] ADU open jam  
Is the ADU open?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper if there is any, then shut the ADU.  
NO  
Is the ADU opening/closing switch working?  
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[F])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the ADU opening/closing switch is disconnected.  
2) Check if either of the connectors CN211 or CN217 on the ADU board is dis-  
connected.  
3) Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short  
circuited or open circuited.  
|
|
|
6) Replace the ADU opening/closing switch.  
7) Replace the ADU board.  
|
È
8) Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
1) Replace the ADU board.  
2) Replace the LGC board.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[E440] Side cover open jam  
Is the side cover open?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper if there is any, then shut the cover.  
NO  
Is the side door switch working?  
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[E])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the side door switch is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the side door switch.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
Replace the LGC board.  
[E450] LCF side cover open jam  
Is the LCF side cover open?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper if there is any, then shut the cover.  
NO  
Is the LCF side cover opening/closing switch working?  
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[D])  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the LCF side cover opening/closing switch is dis-  
connected.  
2) Check if either of the connectors CN100 or CN106 on the LCF board is dis-  
connected.  
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short  
circuited or open circuited.  
6) Replace the LCF side cover opening/closing switch.  
7) Replace the LCF board.  
8) Replace the LGC board.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
YES  
1) Replace the LCF board.  
2) Replace the LGC board.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[E480] Bridge unit open jam  
Is the Bridge unit open?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper if there is any, then close the unit.  
NO  
Is the bridge unit cover opening/closing detection switch working?  
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[B])  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the bridge unit cover opening/closing detection  
switch is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN353 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the bridge unit cover opening/closing detection switch.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
Replace the LGC board.  
5
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1.6  
RADF jam  
[E712] Jam not reaching the original registration sensor  
Are the pickup roller, feed roller and separation roller stained or worn out?  
È
YES Æ Clean the rollers or replace them.  
NO  
Is the original excessively curled or folded?  
È
YES Æ Flatten and set it again.  
NO  
Is the original registration sensor working?  
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[H])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the original registration sensor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN74 on the RADF board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the original registration sensor.  
6) Replace the RADF board.  
È
YES  
Replace the RADF board.  
[E713] Cover open jam in the read ready status  
Are the RADF jam access cover or front cover opened in read ready status?  
È
YES Æ Close the cover  
NO  
Is the original excessively curled or folded?  
È
YES Æ Flatten and set it again.  
NO  
Is the RADF jam access cover sensor working?  
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[C])  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the RADF jam access cover sensor is discon-  
nected.  
2) Check if the connector CN75 on the RADF board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
|
|
|
|
È
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the RADF jam access cover sensor.  
6) Replace the RADF board.  
YES  
Replace the RADF board.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[E714] Feed signal reception jam  
Is the empty sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[B])  
È
YES Æ Clean the rollers or replace them.  
NO  
Is the original excessively curled or folded?  
È
YES Æ Flatten and set it again.  
NO  
Are the original length sensor and registration sensor working?  
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[8]/[E], [7]/[H])  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the lever of empty sensor is working normally.  
2) Check if the connector of the empty sensor is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector CN75 on the RADF board is disconnected.  
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
|
|
|
|
|
5) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
6) Replace the empty sensor.  
7) Replace the RADF board.  
È
YES  
Replace the RADF board.  
[E721] Jam not reaching the read sensor  
5
Are the registration roller and read roller stained?  
È
YES Æ Clean the rollers.  
NO  
Is the read sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[G])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the read sensor are disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN75 on the RADF board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the read sensor.  
6) Replace the RADF board.  
È
YES  
Replace the RADF board.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[E722] Jam not reaching the exit sensor (during scanning)  
[E723] Jam not reaching the reverse sensor (during scanning)  
Is the read roller stained?  
È
YES Æ Clean the roller.  
NO  
Are the exit sensor and reverse sensor working?  
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[E], [7]/[F])  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the exit sensor and reverse sensor are discon-  
nected.  
2) Check if the connector CN75 on the RADF board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the exit sensor and reverse sensor.  
6) Replace the RADF board.  
È
YES  
Replace the RADF board.  
[E724] Stop jam at the registration sensor  
Is the registration roller stained?  
È
YES Æ Clean the roller.  
NO  
Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[H])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN74 on the RADF board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the registration sensor.  
6) Replace the RADF board.  
È
YES  
Replace the RADF board.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[E725] Stop jam at the read sensor  
Is the read roller stained?  
È
YES Æ Clean the roller.  
NO  
Is the read sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[G])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the read sensor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN75 on the RADF board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the read sensor.  
6) Replace the RADF board.  
È
YES  
Replace the RADF board.  
[E731] Stop jam at the exit sensor  
Is the exit roller stained?  
È
YES Æ Clean the roller.  
NO  
Is the exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[E])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the exit sensor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN75 on the RADF board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
5
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the exit sensor.  
6) Replace the RADF board.  
È
YES  
Replace the RADF board.  
[E860] RADF jam access cover open  
Is the RADF jam access cover opened?  
È
YES Æ Remove the original, if any, and close the jam access cover.  
NO  
Is the RADF jam access cover switch working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[C])  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the RADF jam access cover switch is discon-  
nected.  
2) Check if the connector CN72 on the RADF board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
|
|
|
|
È
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the RADF jam access cover switch.  
6) Replace the RADF board.  
YES  
Replace the RADF board.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[E870] RADF open jam  
Is the RADF opened?  
È
YES Æ Remove the original, if any, and close the RADF.  
NO  
Is the RADF opening/closing sensor adjusted within the specified range?  
È
NO Æ Adjust the RADF opening/closing sensor.  
YES  
Is the RADF opening/closing sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[D])  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the RADF opening/closing sensor is discon-  
nected.  
2) Check if the connector CN75 on the RADF board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the RADF opening/closing sensor.  
6) Replace the RADF board.  
È
YES  
Replace the RADF board.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1.7  
Finisher jam  
[ 1 ] Jam in bridge unit  
[E910] Paper not reaching the bridge unit transport sensor-1  
[E920] Paper stopping at the bridge unit transport sensor-1  
[E930] Paper not reaching the bridge unit transport sensor-2  
[E940] Paper stopping at the bridge unit transport sensor-2  
Is there any paper remaining inside the bridge unit?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Are the bridge unit transport sensors-1 and -2 working?  
(Perform the input check:03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[C], /[0]/[A])  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the bridge unit transport sensors-1 and -2 are  
disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector J510 of the bridge unit is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector CN353 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
5) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
|
|
È
6) Replace the bridge unit transport sensors-1 and -2.  
7) Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
5
Is the bridge unit gate solenoid working? (Perform the output check: 03-232)  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector J510 of the bridge unit is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN353 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Replace the bridge unit gate solenoid.  
|
|
È
5) Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
Does the transport roller of the bridge unit work when the main motor is rotated?  
(Perform the output check: 03-101/151)  
È
NO Æ Check the drive system of the equipment and bridge unit.  
YES  
Check if the rollers in the bridge unit are worn out.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
[ 2 ] Paper jam in finisher section  
[EA10] Paper transport delay jam  
MJ-1022  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (S2) open cir-  
cuited?  
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is the inlet sensor working normally? (Check the movement of the actuator.)  
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely.  
2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.  
3) Replace the inlet sensor.  
È
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
MJ-1023/1024  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the connector J708 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI33) open cir-  
cuited?  
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)  
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely.  
2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.  
3) Replace the inlet sensor.  
È
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[EA20] Paper transport stop jam  
MJ-1022  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (S2) open cir-  
cuited?  
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)  
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely.  
2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.  
3) Replace the inlet sensor.  
È
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
MJ-1023/1024  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is any of the connectors (J707, J708 and J722B) on the finisher controller PC board discon-  
nected?  
Is the harness between the finisher controller PC board and each sensor (the inlet sensor  
[PI33], the transport path sensor [PI34], the processing tray sensor [PI38]) open circuited?  
5
È
YES Æ Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses.  
NO  
Is each of the sensors (the inlet sensor, the transport path sensor and the processing tray sen-  
sor) working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)  
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Connect the connectors of the sensors securely.  
2) Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place.  
3) Replace the sensors.  
È
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[EA30] Power-ON jam  
MJ-1022  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (S2) open cir-  
cuited?  
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)  
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely.  
2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.  
3) Replace the inlet sensor.  
È
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
MJ-1023/1024  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is any of the connectors J707, J708 and J722B on the finisher controller PC board discon-  
nected?  
Is the harness between the finisher controller PC board and each sensor (the inlet sensor  
[PI33], the transport path sensor [PI34], the processing tray sensor [PI38], open circuited?  
È
YES Æ Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses.  
NO  
Is each of the sensors (the inlet sensor, the transport path sensor and the processing tray sen-  
sor) working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)  
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Connect the connectors of the sensors securely.  
2) Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place.  
3) Replace the sensors.  
È
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[EA40] Door open jam  
MJ-1022  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the finisher connected with the equipment?  
È
NO Æ Connect the finisher with the equipment.  
YES  
Is the connector J11 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and joint sensor (S4) open cir-  
cuited?  
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is the joint sensor working properly?  
|
|
È
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the joint sensor securely.  
2) Replace the joint sensor.  
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
MJ-1023/1024  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
5
NO  
Is either of the covers upper or front of the finisher closed?  
È
NO Æ Close the door.  
YES  
Is any connectors J707 and J708 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and upper/front cover opening sen-  
sors (PI31 and PI32) open circuited?  
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is the upper/front cover opening sensor working properly?  
|
|
È
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the upper/front cover opening sensor securely.  
2) Replace the upper/front cover opening sensor.  
YES  
Is the connector J719 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and front cover switch (MS31) open  
circuited?  
|
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is the front cover switch working properly?  
|
|
È
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the front cover switch securely.  
2) Replace the front cover switch.  
YES  
Is the connector J5 on the punch controller PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness connecting the punch controller PC board and upper door switch (MSW61)  
open circuited?  
Is the harness connecting the punch controller PC board and front door switch (MSW62) open  
circuited?  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
È
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Are the upper and front door switches working properly?  
|
|
È
NO Æ 1) Connect the connectors of the upper and front door switches securely.  
2) Replace the upper/front door switches.  
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[EA50] Stapling jam  
MJ-1022  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment or on the sta-  
pling tray?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staple  
sheet slid from the staple case?  
È
YES Æ End.  
NO  
Is the connector J8 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and stapling home position sensor  
(S17) open circuited?  
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is the stapling home position sensor working properly?  
|
|
È
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the stapling home position sensor securely.  
2) Replace the stapling home position sensor.  
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
MJ-1023/1024  
5
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment or on the sta-  
pling tray?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staple  
sheet slid from the staple case?  
È
YES Æ End.  
NO  
Is the connector J721B on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and staple home position sensor  
(PI40) open circuited?  
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is the staple home position sensor working properly?  
|
|
È
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the staple home position sensor securely.  
2) Replace the staple home position sensor.  
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[EA60] Early arrival jam  
MJ-1022  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (S2) open cir-  
cuited?  
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)  
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely.  
2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.  
3) Replace the inlet sensor.  
È
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
MJ-1023/1024  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the connector J708 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI33) open cir-  
cuited?  
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)  
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely.  
2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.  
3) Replace the inlet sensor.  
È
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
[EA70] Stack delivery jam  
MJ-1022  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the connector J9 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and stack delivery lever home posi-  
tion sensor (S8) open circuited?  
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is the stack delivery lever home position sensor working properly?  
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the stack delivery lever home position sensor  
securely.  
2) Replace the stack delivery lever home position sensor.  
È
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[EAF0] Stack return jam  
MJ-1022  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and returning roller home position  
sensor (S3) open circuited?  
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is the returning roller home position sensor working properly?  
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the returning roller home position sensor  
securely.  
2) Replace the returning roller home position sensor.  
È
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
5
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[ 3 ] Paper jam in saddle stitcher section  
[EA80] Stapling jam  
MJ-1024  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path or the stapling tray in the finisher, saddle  
stitcher section or equipment?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staples  
stuck in the stapling unit?  
È
YES Æ End.  
NO  
Is the connector J8 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and stitcher home position  
switch (rear: SW5, front: SW7 open circuited?  
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Are the stitcher home position switches working properly?  
|
|
È
NO Æ 1) Connect the connectors of the stitcher home position switches securely.  
2) Replace the stitcher home position switches.  
YES  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
[EA90] Door open jam  
MJ-1024  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher, saddle stitcher section or  
equipment?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the saddle stitcher door closed?  
È
NO Æ Close the door.  
YES  
Is either of the connectors J10 or J11 on saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?  
Are the harnesses between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and cover opening sensors  
(delivery cover sensor [PI3], inlet cover sensor [PI9]) open circuited?  
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is each of the sensors (delivery cover sensor, inlet cover sensor) working properly?  
|
|
È
NO Æ 1) Connect the connectors of the each sensor securely.  
2) Replace the sensors.  
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[EAA0] Power-ON jam  
MJ-1024  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or saddle stitcher section?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is any of the connectors J9, J10 and J13 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board discon-  
nected?  
Is the harness between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and each sensor (No.1 paper  
sensor [PI18], No.2 paper sensor [PI19], No.3 paper sensor [PI20], the vertical path paper sen-  
sor [PI17] and the delivery sensor[PI11]) open circuited?  
È
YES Æ Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses.  
NO  
Is each of the sensors (No.1 paper sensor, No.2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor, the vertical  
path paper sensor, and the delivery sensor) working properly? (Check the movement of the  
actuator.)  
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Connect the connectors of the sensors securely.  
2) Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place.  
3) Replace the sensors.  
È
YES  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
[EAB0] Paper transport stop jam  
MJ-1024  
5
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher, saddle stitcher section or  
equipment?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the connector J708 on finisher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness between the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor [PI33] open circuited?  
Is either of the connectors J9 or J10 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and each sensor (No.1 paper  
sensor [PI18], No.2 paper sensor [PI19], No.3 paper sensor [PI20] and the delivery sensor  
[PI11]) open circuited?  
È
YES Æ Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses.  
NO  
Is each of the sensors (the inlet sensor, No.1 paper sensor, No.2 paper sensor, No.3 paper  
sensor and the delivery sensor) working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)  
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Connect the connectors of the sensors securely.  
2) Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place.  
3) Replace the sensors.  
È
YES  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[EAC0] Transport delay jam  
MJ-1024  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher, saddle stitcher section or  
equipment?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the connector J708 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI33) open cir-  
cuited?  
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)  
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the sensor securely.  
2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.  
3) Replace the sensor.  
È
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[ 4 ] Paper jam in puncher unit  
[E9F0] Punching jam  
MJ-1023/1024  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?  
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the connector J605A on the punch controller PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness connecting the punch controller PC board and punch home position sensor  
(PI63) open circuited?  
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is the punch home position sensor working properly?  
|
|
È
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the punch home position sensor securely.  
2) Replace the punch home position sensor.  
YES  
Replace the punch controller PC board.  
5
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[ 5 ] Other paper jam  
[EAD0] Print end command time-out jam  
Is the main motor rotating normally?  
È
NO  
1) Replace the SYS board.  
2) Replace the LGC board.  
[EAE0] Receiving time-out jam  
Is the finisher working?  
È
YES Æ Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
NO  
1) Check if the voltage (24V) is being supplied to the finisher.  
2) Check the connection of the LGC board and IPC board.  
3) Check if the harness connecting the IPC board and finisher I/F connector of the equipment  
side is open circuited.  
4) Check if the harness connecting the I/F connector of the finisher side and finisher controller  
PC board is open circuited.  
5) Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
[EB30] Ready time-out jam  
Is there paper in the equipment?  
È
NO Æ Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
Are the IPC board and LGC board properly connected to each other?  
È
NO Æ Connect them properly.  
YES  
Is the harness securely connected to the IPC board?  
È
NO Æ Connect the harness properly.  
YES  
Is any of the connector pins of the harness connecting the equipment and finisher discon-  
nected or any of those harnesses open circuited?  
È
NO Æ Connect the pin or replace the harness.  
YES  
1) Replace the IPC board.  
2) Replace the LGC board.  
3) Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.1.8  
Drive system related service call  
[C010] Main motor abnormality  
Is the main motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-101/151)  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector J581 of the main motor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN336 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor patterns on the main motor board and LGC board  
are short circuited or open circuited.  
5) Replace the main motor.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
1) Check if the PLL lock signal CN336-8 pin output from the LGC board is always level “L”.  
2) Check if the voltage supplied to the ASIC input terminal IC40-152 pin is always “L”.  
3) Replace the LGC board.  
[C020] Developer motor abnormality  
Is the developer unit motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-112/162)  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector J578 of the developer motor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN337 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
5
4) Check if the conductor patterns on the developer motor board and LGC  
board are short circuited or open circuited.  
5) Replace the developer motor.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
1) Check if the PLL lock signal CN337-B6 pin output from the LGC board is always level “L”.  
2) Check if the voltage supplied to the ASIC input terminal IC40-150 pin is always “L”.  
3) Replace the LGC board.  
[C030] Transport motor abnormality  
Is the transport motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-123/173)  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector J582 of the transport motor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN337 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor patterns on the transport motor board and LGC  
board are short circuited or open circuited.  
5) Replace the transport motor.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
1) Check if the PLL lock signal CN337-A7 pin output from the LGC board is always level “L”.  
2) Check if the voltage supplied to the ASIC input terminal IC40-149 pin is always “L”.  
3) Replace the LGC board.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.1.9  
Paper feeding system related service call  
[C040] PFP motor abnormality  
Is the PFP motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-109/159)  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the signal line connector CN503 of the PFP motor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the power line connector CN502 of the PFP motor is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector CN246 on the PFP board is disconnected.  
4) Check if the signal line connector CN241 on the PFP board is discon-  
nected.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5) Check if the power line connector CN242 on the PFP board is discon-  
nected.  
6) Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
7) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
|
|
|
|
|
È
8) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP motor board, PFP board and  
LGC board are short circuited or open circuited.  
9) Replace the PFP motor.  
10)Replace the PFP board.  
11)Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
Is the LED on the PFP motor board lit without flashing?  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
2) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP motor board, PFP board and  
LGC board are short circuited or open circuited.  
3) Replace the PFP motor.  
|
|
|
È
4) Replace the PFP board.  
5) Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
1) Check if the PLL lock signal CN246-8 pin output from the PFP board is always “L” level.  
2) Check if the voltage supplied to the microcomputer input terminal IC5-17 pin is always “L”  
level.  
3) Replace the PFP board.  
4) Replace the LGC board.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[C130] Upper drawer tray abnormality  
[C140] Lower drawer tray abnormality  
Does the tray go up? (Perform the output check: 03-242, 243)  
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the tray-up motor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN341 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
|
È
5) Replace the tray-up motor.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
Is the tray-up sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[6]/[H], /[6]/[G])  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN341 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the slit reaches the sensor.  
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
|
|
|
|
|
5) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
6) Replace the tray-up sensor.  
7) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.  
2) Replace the LGC board.  
5
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[C150] PFP upper drawer tray abnormality  
[C160] PFP lower drawer tray abnormality  
Does the tray go up? (Perform the output check: 03-278, 280)  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the tray-up motor is disconnected.  
2) Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN242 and CN244 on the PFP  
board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short  
circuited or open circuited.  
|
|
|
6) Replace the tray-up motor.  
7) Replace the PFP board.  
È
8) Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
Is the tray-up sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[H], /[4]/[H])  
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected.  
2) Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN247 and CN248 on the PFP  
board is disconnected.  
|
|
|
|
|
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
4) Check if the slit reaches the sensor.  
|
5) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
6) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short  
circuited or open circuited.  
7) Replace the tray-up sensor.  
8) Replace the PFP board.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
9) Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.  
2) Replace the LGC board.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[C180] LCF tray-up motor abnormality  
Does the tray move? (Perform the output check: 03-271)  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the LCF tray-up motor is disconnected.  
2) Check if any of the connectors CN100, CN101 and CN103 on the LCF  
board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short  
circuited or open circuited.  
|
|
|
6) Replace the LCF tray-up motor.  
7) Replace the LCF board.  
È
8) Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
Are the LCF tray-up sensor and LCF tray bottom sensor working?  
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[F], /[3]/[A])  
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the sensors are disconnected.  
2) Check if any of the connectors CN100, CN104 and CN105 on the LCF  
board is disconnected.  
|
|
|
|
|
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
4) Check if the slit reaches the sensors.  
|
5) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
6) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short  
circuited or open circuited.  
7) Replace the sensor.  
8) Replace the LCF board.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5
È
9) Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.  
2) Replace the LGC board.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[C1A0] LCF end fence motor abnormality  
Is the LCF end fence motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-207)  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the LCF end fence motor is disconnected.  
2) Check if any of the connectors CN100, CN101 and CN103 on the LCF  
board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short  
circuited or open circuited.  
|
|
|
6) Replace the LCF end fence motor.  
7) Replace the LCF board.  
È
8) Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
Are the LCF end fence home/stop position sensors working?  
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[A], /[5]/[B])  
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the sensors are disconnected.  
2) Check if either of the connectors CN100 or CN107 on the LCF board is dis-  
connected.  
|
|
|
|
|
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
4) Check if the slit reaches the sensors.  
|
5) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
6) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short  
circuited or open circuited.  
7) Replace the sensors.  
8) Replace the LCF board.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
9) Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.  
2) Replace the LGC board.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[C1B0] LCF transport motor abnormality  
Is the LCF transport motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-122/172)  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector CN112 of the LCF transport motor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN102 on the LCF board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the signal line connector CN100 on the LCF board is discon-  
nected.  
4) Check if the power line connector CN101 on the LCF board is discon-  
nected.  
5) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
6) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
|
|
7) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF transport motor board, LCF  
board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited.  
8) Replace the LCF transport motor.  
9) Replace the LCF board.  
10)Replace the LGC board.  
|
|
|
|
|
È
YES  
1) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open circuited.  
2) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF transport motor board, LCF board and LGC  
board are short circuited or open circuited.  
3) Check if the PLL lock signal CN102-3 pin output from the LCF board is always “L” level.  
4) Check if the voltage supplied to the microcomputer input terminal IC103-17 pin is always  
“L” level.  
5) Replace the LCF transport motor.  
6) Replace the LCF board.  
5
7) Replace the LGC board.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1.10 Scanning system related service call  
[C260] Peak detection error  
Does the exposure lamp light? (Perform the output check: 03-267)  
|
|
|
|
|
YES Æ 1) Check if the connectors on the CCD and SLG boards are disconnected.  
2) Check if the shading correction plate is dirty.  
3) Check if the conductor pattern on the CCD board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open  
|
|
|
|
È
circuited.  
5) Replace the lens unit.  
6) Replace the SLG board.  
NO  
1) Check if the connectors of the exposure lamp and inverter are disconnected.  
2) Check the SLG board if the connector pin CN21 is disconnected or the harness is short cir-  
cuited or open circuited.  
3) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.  
4) Replace the SLG board.  
5) Replace the inverter.  
6) Replace the exposure lamp.  
[C270] Carriage home position sensor not going OFF within a specified time  
Remove the original glass and move the carriages to the paper feeding side. Turn ON the power and  
check the following items.  
Are the carriages slightly moved to the feeding direction?/Are the carriages staying at a posi-  
tion other than home position?  
È
YES Æ Check if the circuits of the SLG board are abnormal.  
NO  
1) Check if the connector pin is disconnected or the harness is short circuited or open cir-  
cuited.  
2) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.  
3) Replace the SLG board.  
[C280] Carriage home position sensor not going ON within a specified time  
Remove the original glass and move the carriages to the paper feeding side. Turn ON the power and  
check the following items.  
Do the carriages make a big noise after they arrive at the home position?  
|
|
|
YES Æ The carriage home position sensor is not turned ON.  
1) Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the circuits of the SLG board are abnormal.  
È
NO  
The carriages are stopped at the home position and do not move.  
1) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are short circuited or open  
circuited.  
2) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.  
3) Replace the SLG board.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.1.11 Fuser unit related service call  
Note:  
Be sure to turn OFF the power and unplug the power cable beforehand when checking the IH control cir-  
cuit and IH coil.  
The fuser unit itself or the part of the unit remains heated and the capacitors are still charged after a while  
the power cable is unplugged. So make sure the unit is cooled down enough before checking.  
[C411/C412] Thermistor/heater abnormality at power-ON  
1.Check the power voltage  
(1) Check if the power voltage is normal.(Is the voltage during the operation ±10% of the rated volt-  
age?)  
2.Check the thermistors  
(1) Check if the connectors are disconnected.  
(2) Check if the center and side thermistors (front, rear) are in contact with the surface of the fuser  
roller properly?  
(3) Check if the harnesses of the center and side thermistors (front, rear) are open circuited.  
3. Check the heater  
5
(1) Check if the IH coil is broken.  
(2) Check if the connector of the IH coil is disconnected.  
(3) Check if the thermostat is blown.  
(4) Check if the connectors on the IH control board are disconnected (AC input connector and LGC  
I/F connectors CN455).  
(5) Check if the IH control board is abnormal.  
Replace the IH control board.  
4. Check the LGC board  
(1) Check if the connectors CN334 are disconnected.  
(2) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.  
(3) Replace the LGC board.  
5. Clear the status counter  
After repairing the matter which caused the error [C411/C412], perform the following:  
(1) Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.  
(2) Key in "400", then press [START].  
(3) Change the current status counter value "1" or "2" to "0", then press [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT]  
(to cancel [C411/C412]).  
(4) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Make sure that the equipment enters the normal ready  
state.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[C443/C445/C446/C447/C449] Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment  
1,2.3. Check the thermistors, Heater and LGC board  
Check the above components following the procedures 1, 2 and 3 for [C411/C412].  
4. Clear the status counter  
Change the current status counter value (08-400) "3", "5" , "6" , "9" , "19" , "21" , "22" , "23" , "24" , "25"  
, "27" or "29" to "0" for [C44X], taking the same procedure as that for [C41X].  
The status counter value is as follows in the following cases.  
-
-
-
The error occurred during warming-up: "3", "5" or "6"  
The error occurred after the equipment has become ready: "7"  
The temperature detected by the center thermistor is 240°C or higher, the temperature  
detected by the side thermistor is 250°C or higher or the temperature detected by the edge  
thermistor is 270°C or higher: "9", "19", "21", "22", "23", "25", "27" or "29".  
The error occurred during printing: "24" or "25"  
-
-
-
The error occurred during energy saving: "26" or "27"  
A paper jam occurred: "28" or "29"  
[C471/472/475] IH power voltage abnormality or IH initial abnormality  
1. Check the AC input voltage  
Check if the AC input voltage is within the specified range.  
(especially when the heater becomes ON after the power is turned ON (the copier is warming up))  
2. Check the thermostat  
Check if the thermostat is blown.  
3. Check the IH control board  
(1) Check if the AC input connector on the IH control board, the LGC I/F connectors CN455 is dis-  
connected?  
(2) Check if the fuse on the IH control board has blown.  
(3) Replace the IH control board.  
4. Check the LGC board  
(1) Check if the connector CN334 are disconnected.  
(2) Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short- or open-circuited.  
(3) Replace the LGC board.  
5. Clear the status counter  
Change the values "10", "11", "12" of the status counter (08-400) to "0".  
[C480] Overheating of IGBT  
1. Check the operation of the IH control board cooling fan  
Check if the IH control board cooling fan is rotating normally. (Is the connector securely connected?)  
2. Check the IH board  
(1) Check if the IGBT or IGBT radiation plate is normal. (Is the radiation plate securely attached?)  
(2) Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short circuited or open circuited.  
(3) Replace the IH board.  
3. Clear the status counter  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Change the values “12”, “15” or “18” of the status counter (08-400) to “0”.  
*
The status counter value is as follows in the following cases. Change them to "0" respectively.  
The error occurred before the temperature of the fuser roller reaches 40°C: "12"  
The error occurred before the equipment has become ready: "15"  
The error occurred when the equipment is in the ready state: "18"  
(When the only one side of IH coil is energized continuously for 15 seconds)  
[C490] IH control circuit or IH coil abnormality  
1. Check the IH board  
(1) Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short circuited or open circuited.  
(2) Replace the IH board.  
2. Check the IH coil  
(1) Check if the coil is broken or short out.  
(2) Replace the IH coil.  
3. Clear the status counter  
Change the values “13”, “16” or “19” of the status counter (08-400) to “0”.  
*
The status counter value is as follows in the following cases. Change them to "0" respectively.  
The error occurred before the temperature of the fuser roller reaches 40°C: "13"  
The error occurred before the equipment has become ready: "16"  
5
The error occurred when the equipment is in the ready state: "19"  
When the problem is solved, [C470], [C480] and [C490] can be cleared by turning OFF and ON the  
main switch so the status counter does not have to be changed to "0".  
The value of the status counter remains the same until the next service call overwrites the value.  
[C4B0] IGBT overheating abnormality  
1. Check the LGC board  
(1) Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short circuited or open circuited.  
(2) Check if NVRAM is mounted.  
(3) Replace the LGC board.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1.12 Communication related service call  
[C550] RADF I/F error  
(1) Check if the harness connecting the RADF board and SLG board is disconnected or open cir-  
cuited.  
(2) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open circuited.  
(3) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.  
(4) Replace the RADF board.  
(5) Replace the SLG board.  
[C570] Communication error between Engine-CPU and IPC board  
(1) Check if the LGC board and IPC board are connected properly.  
(2) Check if the conductor pattern on the IPC board is short circuited or open circuited.  
(3) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.  
(4) Replace the IPC board.  
(5) Replace the LGC board.  
[C580] Communication error between IPC board and finisher  
(1) Check if the specified finisher is attached.  
(2) Check if the harness connecting the IPC board and the finisher controller PC board is discon-  
nected or open circuited.  
(3) Check if the conductor pattern on the IPC board is short circuited or open circuited.  
(4) Check if the conductor pattern on the finisher controller PC board is short circuited or open cir-  
cuited.  
(5) Replace the IPC board.  
(6) Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
[F070] Communication error between System-CPU and Engine-CPU  
(1) Check if the harness connecting the SYS board and LGC board is disconnected or open cir-  
cuited.  
(2) Check the version of the system ROM on the SYS board.  
(3) Check the version of the engine ROM version on the LGC board.  
(4) Replace the SYS board.  
(5) Replace the LGC board.  
[F110] Communication error between System-CPU and Scanner-CPU  
[F111] Scanner response abnormality  
(1) Check if the harness connecting the SYS board and SLG board is disconnected or open cir-  
cuited.  
(2) Check the version of the system ROM on the SYS board.  
(3) Check the version of the scanner ROM version on the SLG board.  
(4) Replace the SYS board.  
(5) Replace the SLG board.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.1.13 RADF related service call  
No service call for the RADF (MR-3018).  
5.1.14 Circuit related service call  
[C900] Connection error between the SYS board and the LGC board  
(1) Check if the connector CN117 on the SYS board is completely inserted or not disconnected.  
(2) Check if the connector CN357 on the LGC board is completely inserted or not disconnected.  
(3) Check if the harness connecting the SYS board (CN117) and the LGC board (CN357) is open  
circuited.  
(4) Check if the conductor pattern on each board is short circuited or open circuited.  
(5) Replace the SYS board.  
(6) Replace the LGC board.  
[C940] Engine-CPU abnormality  
Does service call still occur even after turning OFF the main switch then back ON?  
È
NO Æ Leave it for a while and see how.  
YES  
1) Check if the conductor pattern between the Engine-CPU and FROM is short circuited  
or open circuited.  
2) Replace the LGC board if it frequently occurs.  
5
[C950] Memory of the LGC board abnormality, ID abnormality  
(1) Check if the connectors CN331 and CN 343 on the SYS board are completely inserted or not dis-  
connected.  
(2) Check if the connector CN434 on the DRV board is completely inserted or not disconnected.  
(3) Check if the conductor pattern on each board is short circuited or open circuited.  
(4) Replace the NVRAM.  
(5) Replace the LGC board.  
(6) Replace the DRV board.  
(7) Replace the SYS board.  
(8) Ask a specialist for a repair (Abnormal ID).  
[C960] Connection error between the LGC board and the DRV board, ID abnormality  
(1) Check if the connectors CN331 and CN343 on the LGC board are completely inserted or not dis-  
connected.  
(2) Check if the connector CN434 on the DRV board is completely inserted or not disconnected.  
(3) Check if the harness connecting the DRV board (J434) and the LGC board (CN360) is open cir-  
cuited.  
(4) Check if the harness connecting the LGC board (CN331) and the high-voltage transformer  
(J480) is open circuited.  
(5) Check if the conductor pattern on each board is short circuited or open circuited.  
(6) Replace the DRV board.  
(7) Replace the LGC board.  
(8) Ask a specialist for a repair (Abnormal ID).  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
[C9E0] Connection error between the SLG board and the SYS board  
(1) Check if the connector CN18 of the SLG board is completely inserted or not disconnected.  
(2) Check if the connector CN102 of the SYS board is completely inserted or not disconnected.  
(3) Check if the harness connecting the SLG board (CN18) and the SYS board (CN102) is open cir-  
cuited.  
(4) Check if the conductor pattern on each board is short circuited or open circuited.  
(5) Replace the SLG board.  
(6) Replace the SYS board.  
[F090] SRAM abnormality on the SYS board  
(1) Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).  
(2) When the message “SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE?” is displayed on the LCD, press the  
[INITIALIZE] button. (SRAM is cleared.)  
(3) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the SYS board.  
[F091] NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board  
(1) Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).  
(2) When the message “NVRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE?” is displayed on the LCD, press the  
[INTERRUPT] or [INITIALIZE] button. (NVRAM is initialized.)  
(3) Perform the panel calibration (08-692).  
Note:  
When the NVRAM is initialized, the scanner and image processing related adjustments are also  
initialized. Readjust them after the NVRAM initialization.  
(4) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the NVRAM on the  
SYS board.  
[F092] SRAM/NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board  
(1) Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).  
(2) When the message “NVRAM/SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE?” is displayed on the LCD,  
press the [INTERRUPT] or [INITIALIZE] button. (SRAM is cleared and NVRAM is initialized.)  
(3) Perform the panel calibration (08-692).  
Note:  
When the NVRAM is initialized, the scanner and image processing related adjustments are also  
initialized. Readjust them after the NVRAM initialization.  
(4) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the NVRAM on the  
SYS board.  
[F350] SLG board abnormality  
(1) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.  
(2) Replace the SLG board.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1.15 Laser optical unit related service call  
[CA10] Polygonal motor abnormality  
Is the polygonal motor rotating?  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector CN342 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
2) Check if the harness is open circuited or the connector pin is disconnected.  
3) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
4) Replace the laser optical unit.  
|
|
È
5) Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
Is the printed image distorted?  
|
|
|
|
|
YES Æ 1) Check if the connector CN342 on the LGC board is almost disconnected.  
2) Check if the harness is almost open circuited or the connector pin is almost  
disconnected.  
3) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the laser unit cooling fan is stopped.  
5) Check if the suction area of laser unit cooling fan is plugged up.  
6) Replace the laser optical unit.  
7) Replace the LGC board.  
È
NO  
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.  
2) Check if the units with high-voltage (developer unit, transfer belt unit and 2nd transfer roller  
unit) are securely grounded.  
5
3) Check if the bias supply joints of the units with high-voltage are securely connected or they  
are not stained.  
4) Check if the plate in paper transport system is securely grounded.  
5) Check if the equipment is grounded.  
6) Check if the laser unit cooling fan is stopped.  
7) Check if the suction area of laser unit cooling fan is plugged up.  
8) Replace the laser optical unit.  
9) Replace the LGC board.  
[CA20] H-Sync detection error  
Is the cable (flexible flat type) between the connector (CN345) on the LGC board and connec-  
tor (CN201) on the LDR board open circuited, broken or disconnected?  
|
|
|
YES Æ 1) Reconnect the cable.  
2) Check if the connector on the LGC board hold the cable securely.  
3) Replace the laser optical unit.  
È
NO  
1) Check if the units with high-voltage (developer unit, transfer belt unit and 2nd transfer roller  
unit) are securely grounded.  
2) Check if the bias supply joints of the units with high-voltage are securely connected or they  
are not stained.  
3) Check if the plate in paper transport system is securely grounded.  
4) Check if the equipment is grounded.  
5) Check if the conductor pattern is short circuited or open circuited.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
7) Replace the laser optical unit.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.1.16 Finisher related service call  
[CB20] Delivery motor abnormality  
MJ-1022  
Rotate the delivery roller by hand. Does it rotate smoothly?  
È
NO Æ Fix the mechanism.  
YES  
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and delivery motor (M1) correct?  
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Is the delivery motor clock sensor (S1) working properly?  
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.  
YES  
1) Replace the delivery motor.  
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
[CB30] Tray 1/2 shift motor abnormality  
MJ-1023/1024  
Are the tray 1 shift area sensors 1-3 and tray 2 shift area sensors 1-3 normal?  
È
NO Æ Replace the tray 1/2 shift area sensor boards.  
YES  
Are the wirings between the finisher controller PC board and the tray 1/2 shift motors (M37/  
M38) correct?  
È
NO Æ Correct the wirings.  
YES  
Is there any problem with the tray lift mechanism?  
È
NO Æ Fix the lift mechanism.  
YES  
1) Replace the tray 1/2 shift motors.  
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
[CB40] Rear aligning plate motor abnormality  
MJ-1023/1024  
Is the rear aligning plate home position sensor (PI37) normal?  
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Is there any mechanical problem with the path of aligning plate?  
È
NO Æ Fix the mechanism.  
YES  
1) Replace the rear aligning plate motor.  
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[CB50] Staple motor abnormality  
MJ-1022/1023/1024  
Is the wiring between the stapler and finisher controller PC board correct?  
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.  
YES  
1) Replace the stapler.  
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
[CB60] Stapler unit shift motor abnormality  
MJ-1023/1024  
Is the stapler shift home position sensor (PI40) working normally?  
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the stapler shift motor (M35) cor-  
rect?  
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Is there any mechanical problem with the stapler stand motion path?  
È
YESÆ Fix the lift mechanism.  
NO  
1) Replace the stapler shift motor.  
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
5
[CB80] Backup RAM data abnormality  
MJ-1023/1024  
Is the problem solved by turning the power of the equipment OFF and ON?  
È
YESÆ End.  
NO  
1) Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
2) Replace the punch controller PC board.  
[CB90] Paper pushing plate motor abnormality  
MJ-1024  
Are the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14), paper pushing plate top position  
sensor (PI15) and paper pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1) working normally?  
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Is the paper pushing plate drive mechanism normal?  
È
NO Æ Fix the mechanism.  
YES  
1) Replace the paper pushing plate motor (M8).  
2) Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CBA0] Stitch motor (front) abnormality  
[CBB0] Stitch motor (rear) abnormality  
MJ-1024  
Are the front and rear stitchers and their stands installed properly?  
È
NO Æ Install them properly.  
YES  
Are the stitcher home position switches (SW7/SW5) and stitcher motors (M7/M6) on the front  
and rear stitchers working normally?  
È
NO Æ Replace the front or rear stitcher.  
YES  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
[CBC0] Alignment motor abnormality  
MJ-1024  
Is the alignment plate home position sensor (PI5) working normally?  
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Is the alignment plate drive mechanism normal?  
È
NO Æ Fix the mechanism.  
YES  
1) Replace the alignment motor (M5).  
2) Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
[CBD0] Guide motor abnormality  
MJ-1024  
Is the guide home position sensor (PI13) working normally?  
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Is the guide plate drive mechanism normal?  
È
NO Æ Fix the mechanism.  
YES  
1) Replacing the guide motor (M3).  
2) Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
[CBE0] Paper folding motor abnormality  
MJ-1024  
Are the paper folding motor clock sensor (PI4) and paper folding home position sensor (PI21)  
working normally?  
È
NO Æ Replace the sensors.  
YES  
Is the paper folding roller drive mechanism normal?  
È
NO Æ Fix the mechanism.  
YES  
1) Replacing the paper folding motor (M2).  
2) Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 60  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CBF0] Paper positioning plate motor abnormality  
MJ-1024  
Is the paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7) working normally?  
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Is the paper positioning plate drive mechanism normal?  
È
NO Æ Fix the mechanism.  
YES  
1) Replacing the paper positioning plate motor (M4).  
2) Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
[CC00] Sensor connector abnormality  
MJ-1024  
Are the guide home position sensor (PI13), paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14)  
and paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15) connected to the saddle stitcher controller  
PC board?  
È
NO Æ Connect them to the board.  
YES  
Is the wiring between the sensors and the saddle stitcher correct?  
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.  
Is 5V DC being supplied from the connector pins J9-7, -10 and -13 on the saddle stitcher con-  
troller PC board?  
5
È
NO Æ Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
YES  
Are the connector pins J9-8, -11 and -14 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board correctly  
connected to the ground?  
È
NO Æ Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
YES  
End.  
[CC10] Microswitch abnormality  
MJ-1024  
Are the front cover switch (MS31), inlet door switch (SW1) and delivery door switch (SW3) nor-  
mal?  
È
NO Æ Replace the switches.  
YES  
Measure the voltage between J704-1 (+) and J704-2 (-) on the finisher controller PC board. Is  
it 24V?  
È
NO Æ Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
Is the wiring between J704 on the finisher controller PC board and J1 on the saddle stitcher  
controller PC board correct?  
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CC20] Communication error between finisher and saddle stitcher  
MJ-1024  
Is the problem solved by turning OFF and ON the power switch of the equipment?  
È
YESÆ End.  
NO  
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the saddle stitcher controller PC  
board connected?  
È
NO Æ Connect the wiring.  
YES  
1) Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
2) Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
[CC30] Stack processing motor abnormality  
MJ-1022  
[Procedure 1]  
Is the tension of the drive belt normal?  
È
NO Æ Loosen the adjustment screw to adjust its tension.  
YES  
Does the bushing attached to the returning roller shaft smoothly move up and down?  
NO Æ Apply grease on the cut-out part of the front side frame with where the bushing  
|
È
contacts.  
Is the spring of the returning roller detached?  
È
YESÆ Attach the spring.  
NO  
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and stack processing motor (M2) cor-  
rect?  
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Is the stack delivery lever home position sensor (S8) working properly?  
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.  
YES  
1) Replacing the stack processing motor.  
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
[Procedure 2]  
Does the bushing attached to the returning roller shaft smoothly move up and down?  
NO Æ Apply grease on the cut-out part of the front side frame with where the bushing  
|
È
contacts.  
YES  
Is the spring of the returning roller detached?  
È
YESÆ Attach the spring.  
NO  
Is the tension of the stack processing motor drive belt normal?  
È
NO Æ Loosen the adjustment screw to adjust its tension.  
YES  
Is the returning roller home position sensor (S3) working properly?  
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.  
YES  
1) Replace the stack processing motor.  
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CC40] Swing motor abnormality  
MJ-1023/1024  
Is the swing unit home position sensor (PI35) normal?  
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the swing motor (M36) correct?  
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Is the swing mechanism normal?  
È
NO Æ Fix the mechanism.  
YES  
1) Replace the swing motor.  
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
[CC50] Horizontal registration motor abnormality  
MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)  
Is the horizontal registration home position sensor (PI61) working normally?  
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Is the wiring between the horizontal registration home position sensor and finisher controller  
PC board correct?  
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.  
5
YES  
Is the horizontal registration mechanism normal?  
È
NO Æ Fix the mechanism.  
YES  
1) Replace the horizontal registration motor (M62).  
2) Replace the punch controller PC board.  
3) Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
[CC60] Punch motor abnormality  
MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)  
Are the punch home position sensor (PI63) and punch motor clock sensor (PI62) working nor-  
mally?  
È
NO Æ Replace the sensors.  
YES  
Is the wiring between the sensors and finisher controller PC board correct?  
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Is the punching mechanism normal?  
È
NO Æ Fix the mechanism.  
YES  
1) Replace the punch motor (M61).  
2) Replace the punch controller PC board.  
3) Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CC80] Front jogging motor abnormality/Front aligning plate motor abnormality  
MJ-1022 (Front jogging motor abnormality)  
Is the front jogging plate home position sensor (S6) working properly?  
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and front jogging motor (M3) correct?  
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Has the rack run over the stopper of the roll?  
È
YES Æ Fix it.  
NO  
1) Replace the front jogging motor.  
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
MJ-1023/1024 (Front aligning plate motor abnormality)  
Is the front aligning plate home position sensor (PI36) normal?  
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the front aligning plate motor (M33)  
correct?  
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Is there any mechanical problem with the path of aligning plate?  
È
NO Æ Fix the mechanism.  
YES  
1) Replace the front aligning plate motor.  
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CC90] Upper stack tray lift motor abnormality  
MJ-1022  
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and upper stack tray lift motor (M5) cor-  
rect?  
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Are the front and rear sides of the upper stack tray leveled?  
È
NO Æ Level them.  
YES  
Is the upper stack tray lift motor clock sensor (S19) working properly?  
È
NO Æ Level them.  
YES  
Is the stack tray paper height sensor (S10) working properly?  
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Are the upper stack tray upper limit sensor (S25), upper stack tray full sensor (S23) and stack  
processing safety switch (S26) working properly?  
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor or sensor controller PC board.  
YES  
Does the voltage between the pins J14-1 and -2 on the finisher controller PC board become  
24V when the upper stack tray lift motor starts rotating?  
È
NO Æ Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
YES  
5
Check the wiring between the upper stack tray lift motor and finisher controller PC board. If  
there is no problem, replace the upper stack tray lift motor.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CCA0] Lower stack tray lift motor abnormality  
MJ-1022  
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and lower stack tray lift motor (M7) cor-  
rect?  
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Are the front and rear sides of the lower stack tray leveled?  
È
NO Æ Level them.  
YES  
Is the lower stack tray lift motor clock sensor (S9) working properly?  
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Is the stack tray paper height sensor (S10) working properly?  
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Are the lower stack tray upper limit sensor (S13) and lower stack tray full sensor (S23) working  
properly?  
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor or sensor controller PC board.  
YES  
Does the voltage between the pins J3-1 and -2 on the finisher controller PC board become  
24V when the lower stack tray lift motor starts rotating?  
È
NO Æ Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
YES  
Check the wiring between the upper stack tray lift motor and finisher controller PC board. If  
there is no problem, replace the motor.  
[CCB0] Rear jogging motor abnormality  
MJ-1022  
Is the rear jogging plate home position sensor (S7) working properly?  
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and rear jogging motor (M4) correct?  
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Has the rack run over the stopper of the roll?  
È
YESÆ Fix it.  
NO  
1) Replace the rear jogging motor.  
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CCD0] Stack ejection motor abnormality  
MJ-1023/1024  
Is the shutter home position sensor (PI45) normal?  
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Are the wirings between the finisher controller PC board and the stack ejection motor (M32)/  
shutter clutch (CL31) correct?  
È
NO Æ Correct the wirings.  
YES  
Is there any problem with the shutter mechanism?  
È
YESÆ Fix the shutter mechanism.  
NO  
1) Replace the stack ejection motor and shutter clutch.  
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
[CCE0] Rear end assist motor abnormality  
MJ-1023/1024  
Is the rear end assist guide home position sensor (PI39) normal?  
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the rear end assist motor (M39) cor-  
rect?  
5
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Is there any problem with the rear end assist mechanism?  
È
YESÆ Fix the rear end assist mechanism.  
NO  
1) Replace the rear end assist motor.  
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
[CCF0] Gear change motor abnormality  
MJ-1023/1024  
Is the gear change home position sensor (PI49) normal?  
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the gear change motor (M40) cor-  
rect?  
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Is there any problem with the gear change mechanism?  
È
YESÆ Fix the gear change mechanism.  
NO  
1) Replace the gear change motor.  
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CE00] Communication error between finisher and puncher unit  
MJ-1023/1024 (When MJ-6004 is installed)  
Is the problem solved by turning OFF and ON the power of the equipment?  
È
YESÆ End.  
NO  
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and punch controller PC board correct?  
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.  
YES  
1) Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
2) Replace the punch controller PC board.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1.17 Image control related service call  
(1) Based on the procedure of [CE10], [CE20] and [CE40] described below, check the status and  
take appropriate actions. And then perform the forced performing of image quality closed-loop  
control according to the following procedure.  
1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn ON the power.  
2. Key in [395], and then press the [START] button. Confirm that the image quality control  
has finished normally.  
(2) After confirming the items in (1), clear the abnormal detection counter of image quality control.  
1. While pressing [0] and [8] simultaneously, turn ON the power.  
2. Key in [573], and then press the [START] button.  
3. Rewrite the displayed status counter from "1" - "16" to "0", and then press the [ENTER]  
or [INTERRUPT] button.  
4. Key in [574], and then press the [START] button.  
5. Rewrite the displayed status counter from "1" - "16" to "0", and then press the [ENTER]  
or [INTERRUPT] button.  
6. Key in [575], and then press the [START] button.  
7. Rewrite the displayed status counter from "1" - "16" to "0", and then press the [ENTER]  
or [INTERRUPT] button.  
5
8. Key in [576], and then press the [START] button.  
9. Rewrite the displayed status counter from "1" - "16" to "0", and then press the [ENTER]  
or [INTERRUPT] button.  
[CE10] Image quality sensor abnormality (OFF level)  
Is the connector of the image quality sensor, or the connector CN338 on the LGC board dis-  
connected?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the image quality sensor, or the harness between  
the LGC board and the switching power supply open circuited?  
È
YESÆ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is the output voltage from the 12V-power supply normal?  
È
NO Æ Check the power supply system and replace the switching power supply.  
YES  
1) Replace the image quality sensor.  
2) Replace the LGC board.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[CE20] Image quality sensor abnormality (no pattern level)  
1) Check if the transfer belt or transfer belt unit are securely installed.  
2) Check for any abnormal stain caused by poor cleaning, large flaw or break on the transfer belt sur-  
face.  
3) Check if the drum and the transfer belt are rotating. If any abnormality is found, correct any mechan-  
ical problem.  
Is the connectors CN338 on the LGC board disconnected?  
Is the connector of the image quality sensor disconnected or the surface of the sensor  
stained?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the image quality sensor open circuited?  
Is the shutter of image quality sensor opening and closing normally?  
Is the shutter damaged?  
|
|
|
|
|
YESÆ <Procedure>  
1) Take off the transfer belt unit so that the image quality sensor unit can be  
easily seen.  
2) While pressing the digital keys [0] and [3] simultaneously, turn the power  
ON.  
|
|
|
|
|
3) Key in “430”.  
4) The shutter is opened and closed repeatedly by pressing the [START] but-  
ton repeatedly.  
|
|
|
|
Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. Clean the sensor.  
Replace the shutter if it is damaged.  
Replace the shutter solenoid if its operation is defective.  
È
NO  
Is the output voltage from the 12V-power supply normal?  
|
È
NO Æ Check the power supply system, and replace the switching power supply.  
YES  
1) Replace the image quality sensor.  
2) Replace the LGC board.  
[CE40] Image quality control test pattern abnormality  
(1) Use "Image quality control abnormal detection counter Y to K display/0 clearing (08-573 to 576)"  
to check the abnormal occurring condition for each color.  
(2) Check “Output value display of image quality sensor / Low-density pattern (05-391-0 to 3)” to  
check if the low-density pattern abnormality occurs for each color. The values under 320 for Y, M  
and C, and under 220 for K are defined as low-density pattern abnormality.  
|
|
|
|
|
È
320 or above (Y, M and C)  
220 or above (K)  
Under 320 (Y, M and C)  
Under 220 (K)  
|
|
|
|
|
|
Low-density pattern abnormality  
Check the transfer belt. If the cleaning is poor, correct the  
transfer belt around its cleaning blade.  
|
È
|
È
To (9)  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(3) Check “Output value display of image quality sensor / High-density pattern (05-390-0 to 3)” to  
check if the high-density pattern abnormality occurs for each color and identify the color which  
pattern is abnormal. If the value is 630 or above, it is defined as high-density pattern abnormality.  
(4) Set the values of “Image quality closed-loop control / Contrast voltage (08-556)” and “Image  
quality closed-loop control / Laser power (08-557)” to “0” (Invalid).  
(5) Perform “Enforced performing of image quality open-loop control (05-394)”.  
(6) Output the image quality control test pattern (04-270) more than one time and check the patch of  
the color identified in step (3) to see if the image is abnormal (Note).  
|
|
|
È
Normal  
Abnormal  
|
|
|
|
Correct the items related to the image.  
|
È
To (9)  
È
(7) Replace the image quality sensor.  
(8) Set the values of “Image quality closed-loop control / Contrast voltage (08-556)” and “Image  
quality closed-loop control / Laser power (08-557)” to “1” (Valid).  
(9) Perform “Enforced performing of image quality open-loop control (05-394)” and make sure it is  
completed normally. (Error [CE40] does not appear.) Then perform “Automatic gamma adjust-  
ment“ ( Chapter 3.5.1 and 3.6.1).  
5
(10) Clear all "Image quality control abnormal detection counter Y to K display/0 clearing (08-573 to  
576)".  
Note:  
Abnormal image:  
Blank print, Solid print, White banding, Color banding, White spots, Poor transfer, Uneven image  
density, Faded image (low density), Uneven light distribution, Blotched image.  
[CE50] Temperature/humidity sensor abnormality  
Is the connector CN333 on the LGC board or the connector of the temperature/humidity sen-  
sor disconnected?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the temperature/humidity sensor disconnected ?  
È
YESÆ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
1) Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.  
2) Replace the LGC board.  
[CE90] Drum thermistor abnormality  
Is the connector CN333 on the LGC board, or the connector of the drum thermistor discon-  
nected?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the drum thermistor disconnected?  
È
YESÆ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
1) Replace the drum thermistor.  
2) Replace the LGC board.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1.18 Copy process related service call  
[C360] Charger cleaner motor abnormality  
(1) Check if the main charger is installed normally.  
(2) Check if the charger wire is broken.  
(3) Check if any of the connector pins of the charger cleaner front/rear position detection switch is  
disconnected.  
(4) Check if the cleaning pads are damaged or removed.  
(5) Check if any of the connector pins of the charger cleaner motor is disconnected.  
(6) Replace the charger cleaner motor.  
(7) Replace the LGC board.  
[C970] High-voltage transformer abnormality  
(1) Is the main charger installed securely?  
(2) Check if the spring of high-voltage supply contact point is deformed.  
(3) Check if the charger wire is broken or the main charger grid is deformed.  
(4) Check if any foreign matter is on the charger wire or main charger grid.  
[CEA0] Revolver home position detection abnormality  
Is the revolver home position sensor working properly?  
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[C])  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector or joint connector of the revolver home position sen-  
sor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN331 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are  
open circuited.  
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the revolver home position sensor.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.  
2) Replace the LGC board.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[CEB0] Black developer unit lifting movement abnormality  
Check the timing of the black developer lifting clutch (stop position), and adjust it if it deviates.  
(
È
Is the black developer lifting clutch working properly? (Perform the output check: 03-433)  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the black developer lifting clutch is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN339 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are  
open circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the black developer lifting clutch.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
Are the black developer contact position detection sensor and black developer contact timing  
detection sensor working properly? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[1]/[C], /[1]/[B]  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the black developer contact position detection  
sensor or black developer contact timing detection sensor are discon-  
nected.  
2) Check if the connector CN333 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are  
open circuited.  
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5
|
|
|
5) Replace the black developer contact position detection sensor and black  
developer contact timing detection sensor.  
|
È
6) Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.  
2) Replace the LGC board.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 73  
05/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CEC0] 2nd transfer roller position detection abnormality  
Is the 2nd transfer roller contact clutch working properly? (Perform the output check: 03-435)  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector or joint connectors of the 2nd transfer contact clutch  
are disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are  
open circuited.  
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the 2nd transfer roller contact clutch.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
Is the 2nd transfer roller position detection sensor working properly?  
(Perform the input check:03-[FAX]ON/[1]/[A])  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector or joint connectors of the 2nd transfer roller position  
detection sensor are disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are  
open circuited.  
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the 2nd transfer roller position detection sensor.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.  
2) Replace the LGC board.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CEE0] Transfer belt position detection abnormality (Normal speed)  
[CEE1] Transfer belt position detection abnormality (When decelerating)  
If the error [CEE0] has occurred, check the transfer belt home position sensor-1. If the error [CEE1] has  
occurred, check the transfer belt home position sensor-2.  
Is there any stain or scratch on the reflection tape inside the transfer belt?  
YES Æ Clean the transfer belt or replace it.  
|
È
Replace the cleaning pad if it is excessively stained.  
NO  
Are the transfer belt home position sensors-1 and -2 stained?  
È
YES Æ Clean them.  
NO  
Are the transfer belt home position sensors-1 and -2 working properly?  
(Perform the input check:03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[H])  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors or joint connectors of the transfer belt home posi-  
tion sensors-1 and -2 are disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN361 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are  
open circuited.  
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the transfer belt home position sensor-1 and -2.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
5
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.  
2) Replace the LGC board.  
[CEF0] Revolver motor abnormality  
Is the revolver motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-450)  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the revolver motor is disconnected.  
2) Check if the connectors CN435 and CN434 on the DRV board are discon-  
nected.  
3) Check if the connector CN331 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open cir-  
cuited.  
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the DRV board and LGC board are short  
circuited or open circuited.  
|
|
|
6) Replace the revolver motor.  
7) Replace the DRV board and LGC board.  
È
YES  
1) Check if the teeth of the revolver motor gear or the revolver unit gear do not get chipped or  
cracked.  
2) Check if the conductor patterns on the DRV board and LGC board are short circuited or  
open circuited.  
3) Replace the DRV board and LGC board.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1.19 Toner density control related service call  
[CF20] Toner density detection voltage abnormality  
(1) Specify the developer unit with the abnormality by checking the setting values of 08-824-0 to 08-  
824-2. (When the value is “1”, an abnormality occurs.)  
(2) Correct the defective section of the unit specified in (1) with the following procedure.  
Is the developer material transported properly?  
Is the form of magnetic brush is normal?  
|
|
|
|
È
NO Æ 1) Check if the amount of the developer material is normal or any foreign matter  
is mixed in.  
2) Correct the transport mechanism of developer material.  
3) Check the polar position and correct if necessary.  
YES  
Is the color auto-toner sensor stained?  
È
YES Æ Clean it.  
NO  
Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid working normally?  
(Perform the output check: 03-125/175)  
Is the color auto-toner sensor working?  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors or joint connectors of the color auto-toner sensor  
shutter solenoid and color auto-toner sensor are disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open cir-  
cuited.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
4) Replace the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid.  
5) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
7) Replace the color auto-toner sensor and perform “Enforced correction of  
color auto-toner sensor light amount (05-208)”.  
YES  
Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter opening position correct?  
(Perform the output check: 03-125/175)  
|
|
È
NO Æ Adjust the install position of solenoid so that the sensor holder will touch and  
face the positioning component when opening the shutter.  
YES  
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.  
2) Replace the LGC board.  
(3) When the correction is completed, reset the values of 08-824-0 to 08-824-2 from “1” to “0” to  
clear the abnormality.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[CF30] Reference plate detection voltage abnormality  
Are the reference plate and color auto-toner sensor stained?  
È
YESÆ Clean them.  
NO  
Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid working normally?  
(Perform the output check: 03-125/175)  
Is the color auto-toner sensor working?  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors or joint connectors of the color auto-toner sensor  
shutter solenoid and color auto-toner sensor are disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open  
circuited.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
4) Replace the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid.  
5) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
7) Replace the color auto-toner sensor and perform “Enforced correction of  
color auto-toner sensor light amount (05-208)”.  
YES  
Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter closing position correct?  
(Perform the output check: 03-125/175)  
|
|
È
NO Æ Adjust the install position of solenoid so that the gap between the sensor  
holder and stopper will be 1.0 mm when closing the shutter.  
5
YES  
1) Replace the LGC board.  
2) Replace the reference plate and perform “Initialization of color auto-toner sensor light  
amount correction target value (05-207)”.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CF40] Light amount correction voltage abnormality  
(1) Specify the developer unit with the abnormality by checking the setting values of 08-823-0 to 08-  
823-2. (When the value is “1”, an abnormality occurs.)  
(2) Correct the defective section of the unit specified in (1) with the following procedure.  
Is the developer unit inserted properly?  
È
NO Æ Insert it properly.  
YES  
Is the developer material transported properly?  
Is the form of magnetic brush is normal?  
|
|
|
|
È
NO Æ 1) Check if the amount of the developer material is normal or any foreign matter  
is mixed in.  
2) Correct the transport mechanism of developer material.  
3) Check the polar position and correct if necessary.  
YES  
Is the color auto-toner sensor stained?  
È
YES Æ Clean it.  
NO  
Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid working normally?  
(Perform the output check: 03-125/175)  
Is the color auto-toner sensor working?  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors or joint connectors of the color auto-toner sensor  
shutter solenoid and color auto-toner sensor are disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open cir-  
cuited.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
4) Replace the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid.  
5) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
7) Replace the color auto-toner sensor and perform “Enforced correction of  
color auto-toner sensor light amount (05-208)”.  
YES  
Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter opening position correct?  
(Perform the output check: 03-125/175)  
|
|
È
NO Æ Adjust the install position of solenoid so that the sensor holder will touch and  
face the positioning component when opening the shutter.  
YES  
1) Replace the LGC board.  
2) Replace the reference plate and perform “Initialization of color auto-toner sensor light  
amount correction target value (05-207)”.  
(3) When the correction is completed, reset the values of 08-823-0 to 08-823-2 from “1” to “0” to  
clear the abnormality.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CF50] Color auto-toner sensor abnormality  
Are the connector of color auto-toner sensor, joint connector and connector CN356 on the LGC  
board connected normally?  
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Reconnect the connectors.  
2) Correct or replace if the connector pins are disconnected or harnesses are  
open circuited.  
È
YES  
Are the color auto-toner sensor and reference plate stained?  
È
YES Æ Clean them.  
NO  
Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid working normally?  
(Perform the output check: 03-125/175)  
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors or joint connectors of the color auto-toner sensor  
shutter solenoid and color auto-toner sensor are disconnected.  
2) Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open cir-  
cuited.  
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open  
circuited.  
5) Replace the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid.  
6) Replace the LGC board.  
È
YES  
Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter closing position correct?  
(Perform the output check: 03-125/175)  
5
|
|
È
NO Æ Adjust the install position of solenoid so that the gap between the sensor holder  
and stopper will be 1.0 mm when closing the shutter.  
YES  
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.  
2) Replace the LGC board.  
3) Replace the reference plate and perform “Initialization of color auto-toner sensor light  
amount correction target value (05-207)”.  
4) Replace the color auto-toner sensor and perform “Enforced correction of color auto-toner  
sensor light amount (05-208)”.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1.20 Other service call  
[F100] HDD format error  
(1) Check if the HDD is mounted.  
(2) Check if the specified HDD is mounted.  
(3) Check if the connector pins of the HDD are bent.  
(4) Check if the connectors CN112, CN113 on the SYS board is disconnected.  
(5) Replace the harness.  
(6) Format the HDD. (Key in "2" at 08-690.)  
(7) Replace the HDD.  
(8) Replace the SYS board.  
[F101] HDD unmounted  
[F102] HDD start error  
[F103] HDD transfer time-out  
[F104] HDD data error  
[F105] HDD other error  
(1) Check if the connectors of the HDD are disconnected.  
(2) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are open circuited.  
(3) Perform the bad sector check (08-694). If the check result is OK, recover the data in the HDD. If  
the check result is failed, replace the HDD.  
(4) Replace the SYS board.  
[F106] Point and Print partition damage  
(1) Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).  
(2) Key in “662” and press the [START] button. (Partition clearing is performed.)  
(3) Restart the equipment.  
(4) Access TopAccess. Click the [Administration] tab, and then click the Maintenance Menu to open.  
Then install the “Point and Print” driver.  
[F107] / SHR partition damage  
Initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-666).  
[F108] /SHA partition damage  
Initialize the shared folder using the Setting Mode (08-667).  
[F120] Database abnormality  
(1) Rebuild the databases. (Perform 08-684.)  
(2) If the error is not recovered, initialize the HDD. (Key in “2” at 08-690.)  
*
When “Rebuilding all databases (08-684)” is performed, all data in the Address Book and Mail-  
box are deleted. Make sure to back up these data in advance of rebuilding and restore the data  
after rebuilding.  
[F130] Invalid MAC address  
Compare the serial number of the equipment with a number displayed in 08-995. If they are different,  
enter the correct serial number at 08-995.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[F200] Data overwrite kit (GP-1060) is taken off  
Clear the service call “F200”. (Key in “0” at 08-633.)  
*
When the Data overwrite kit (GP-1060) is taken off from the equipment, the service call “F200”  
occurs.  
5.1.21 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function  
Notes:  
1. When initializing the Electronic Filing (Setting Mode (08-666)), all data in the Electronic  
Filing are erased. Back up the data in the Electronic Filing by using the Electronic Filing  
Function of TopAccess before the initialization.  
2. When initializing the shared folder (Setting Mode (08-667)), all data in the shared folder  
are erased. Back up the data in the shared folder by using Explorer before the initializa-  
tion.  
3. When formatting the HDD (Setting Mode (08-690)), all data in the shared folder, Electronic  
Filing, Address Book, template, etc. are erased. Back up these data before the initializa-  
tion. Note that some of data cannot be backed up ( Page 5-1).  
[ 1 ] Internet FAX related error  
[1C10] System access abnormality  
[1C32] File deletion failure  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
5
If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then perform the HDD formatting (08-  
690).  
[1C11] Insufficient memory  
When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs.  
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.  
[1C12] Message reception error  
[1C13] Message transmission error  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
[1C14] Invalid parameter  
When a template is used, form the template again.  
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.  
[1C15] Exceeding file capacity  
Reset and extend the "Maximum send to E-mail/iFAX size" or reduce the number of pages and perform  
the job again.  
[1C20] System management module access abnormality  
[1C21] Job control module access abnormality  
[1C22] Job control module access abnormality  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690).  
If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 81  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
[1C30] Directory creation failure  
[1C31] File creation failure  
[1C33] File access failure  
Check if the access privilege to the storage directory is writable.  
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.  
[1C40] Image conversion abnormality  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
Replace the main memory and perform the job again.  
[1C60] HDD full failure during processing  
Reduce the number of pages of the job in error and perform the job again.  
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.  
[1C61] Address Book reading failure  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
Reset the data in the Address Book and perform the job again.  
[1C62] Memory acquiring failure  
Check if there is any job being performed and perform the job in error again.  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
Replace the main memory and perform the job again.  
[1C63] Terminal IP address unset  
Reset the Terminal IP address.  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
[1C64] Terminal mail address unset  
Reset the Terminal mail address.  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
[1C65] SMTP address unset  
Reset the SMTP address and perform the job.  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
[1C66] Server time-out error  
Check if the SMTP server is operating properly.  
[1C67] NIC time-out error  
[1C68] NIC access error  
[1C6D] System error  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
If the error still occurs, replace the SYS board.  
[1C69] SMTP server connection error  
Reset the login name or password of SMTP server and perform the job again.  
Check if the SMTP server is operating properly.  
[1C6A] HOST NAME error  
Check if there is an illegal character in the device name.  
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate device name.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 82  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[1C6B] Terminal mail address error  
Check if there is an illegal character in the Terminal mail address.  
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Terminal mail address, then perform the job  
again.  
[1C6C] Destination mail address error  
Check if there is an illegal character in the Destination mail address.  
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Destination mail address, then perform the job  
again.  
[1C70] SMTP client OFF  
Set the SMTP valid and perform the job again.  
[1C71] SMTP authentication ERROR  
Check that SMTP authentication method, login name and password are correct, then perform authenti-  
cation again.  
[1C72] POP Before SMTP ERROR  
Check that both the POP Before SMTP setting and POP3 setting are correct, then perform authentica-  
tion again.  
[1C80] Internet FAX transmission failure when processing E-mail job received  
Reset the "Received InternetFax Forward".  
5
[1C81] Onramp Gateway transmission failure  
Reset the mail box.  
[1C82] Internet FAX transmission failure when processing FAX job received  
Reset the "Received Fax Forward".  
[1CC1] Power failure  
Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely.  
Check if the power voltage is unstable.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[ 2 ] RFC related error  
[2500] HOST NAME error (RFC: 500) / Destination mail address error (RFC: 500) / Terminal mail  
address error (RFC: 500)  
[2501] HOST NAME error (RFC: 501) / Destination mail address error (RFC: 501) / Terminal mail  
address error (RFC: 501)  
Check if the Terminal mail address and Destination mail address are correct.  
Check if the mail server is operating properly.  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
[2503] Destination mail address error (RFC: 503)  
[2504] HOST NAME error (RFC: 504)  
[2551] Destination mail address error (RFC: 551)  
Check if the mail server is operating properly.  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
If the error still occurs, replace the SYS board.  
[2550] Destination mail address error (RFC: 550)  
Check the state of the mail box in the mail server.  
[2552] Terminal/Destination mail address error (RFC: 552)  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
If the error still occurs, replace the NIC board.  
[2553] Destination mail address error (RFC: 553)  
Check if there is an illegal character in the mail box in the mail server.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[ 3 ] Electronic Filing related error  
[2B10] No applicable job error in Job control module  
[2B11] JOB status abnormality  
[2B20] File library function error  
[2B30] Insufficient disk space in BOX partition  
[2BC0] Fatal failure occurred  
[2BC1] System management module resource acquiring failure  
Erase some data in the Electronic Filing and perform the job in error again (in case of [2B30]).  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690).  
If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.  
[2B50] Image library error  
[2B90] Insufficient memory capacity  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
If the error still occurs, replace the main memory.  
Perform the job in error again.  
Check if there are no other running jobs and initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-  
666).  
[2B31] Status of specified Electronic Filing or folder is undefined or being created/deleted  
Check if the specified Electronic Filing or folder exists. (If no, this error would not occur.)  
Delete the specified Electronic Filing or folder.  
Perform the job in error again.  
If the specified Electronic Filing or folder can not be deleted, initialize the Electronic Filing using the Set-  
ting Mode (08-666).  
5
[2B32] Electronic Filing printing failure: Specified document can not be printed because of cli-  
ent's access (being edited, etc.)  
Check if the specified document exists. (If no, this error would not occur.)  
Delete the specified document.  
Perform the job in error again.  
If the specified document can not be deleted, initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-  
666).  
[2B51] List library error  
Check if the Function List can be printed out.  
If it can be printed out, perform the job in error again.  
If it can not be printed out, replace the main memory.  
If the recovery is still not completed, perform the HDD formatting (08-690).  
[2BA0] Invalid Box password  
Check if the password is correct.  
Reset the password.  
When this error occurs when printing the data in the Electronic Filing, perform the printing with the  
administrator's password.  
If the recovery is still not completed or in case of invalid password for the operation other than printing  
(opening the file, etc.), initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-666).  
[2BB1] Power failure  
[2BD0] Power failure occurred during restoring of Electronic Filing  
Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely.  
Check if the power voltage is unstable.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[2BE0] Machine parameter reading error  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
[2BF0] Exceeding maximum number of pages  
Reduce the number of inserting pages and perform the job again.  
[2BF1] Exceeding maximum number of documents  
Backup the documents in the box or folder to PC or delete them.  
[2BF2] Exceeding maximum number of folders  
Backup the folders in the box or folder to PC or delete them.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 86  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[ 4 ] E-mail related error  
[2C10] System access abnormality  
[2C32] File deletion failure  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then perform the HDD formatting (08-  
690).  
[2C11] Insufficient memory  
When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs.  
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.  
[2C12] Message reception error  
[2C13] Message transmission error  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
[2C14] Invalid parameter  
When a template is used, form the template again.  
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.  
[2C15] Exceeding file capacity  
Reset and extend the "Maximum send to E-mail/iFAX size" or reduce the number of pages and perform  
the job again.  
5
[2C20] System management module access abnormality  
[2C21] Job control module access abnormality  
[2C22] Job control module access abnormality  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690).  
If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.  
[2C30] Directory creation failure  
[2C31] File creation failure  
[2C33] File access failure  
Check if the access privilege to the storage directory is writable.  
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.  
[2C40] Image conversion abnormality  
[2C62] Memory acquiring failure  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
Replace the main memory and perform the job again.  
[2C60] HDD full failure during processing  
Reduce the number of pages of the job in error and perform the job again.  
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.  
[2C61] Address Book reading failure  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
Reset the data in the Address Book and perform the job again.  
[2C63] Terminal IP address unset  
Reset the Terminal IP address.  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[2C64] Terminal mail address unset  
Reset the Terminal mail address.  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
[2C65] SMTP address unset  
Reset the SMTP address and perform the job.  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
[2C66] Server time-out error  
Check if the SMTP server is operating properly.  
[2C67] NIC time-out error  
[2C68] NIC access error  
[2C6D] NIC system error  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
If the error still occurs, replace the SYS board.  
[2C69] SMTP server connection error  
Reset the login name and password of SMTP server and perform the job again.  
Check if the SMTP server is operating properly.  
[2C6A] HOST NAME error (No RFC error)  
Check if there is an illegal character in the device name.  
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate device name.  
[2C6B] Terminal mail address error  
Check if there is an illegal character in the Terminal mail address.  
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Terminal mail address, then perform the job  
again.  
[2C6C] Destination mail address error (No RFC error)  
Check if there is an illegal character in the Destination mail address.  
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Destination mail address, then perform the job  
again.  
[2C70] SMTP client OFF  
Set the SMTP valid and perform the job again.  
[2C71] SMTP authentication ERROR  
Check that SMTP authentication method, login name and password are correct, then perform authenti-  
cation again.  
[2C72] POP Before SMTP ERROR  
Check that both the POP Before SMTP setting and POP3 setting are correct, then perform authentica-  
tion again.  
[2C80] E-mail transmission failure when processing E-mail job received  
Reset the "Received InternetFax Forward".  
[2C81] Process failure of FAX job received  
Reset the setting of the mail box or "Received InternetFax Forward".  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[2CC1] Power failure  
Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely.  
Check if the power voltage is unstable.  
5
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[ 5 ] File sharing related error  
[2D10] System access abnormality  
[2D32] File deletion failure  
[2DA6] File deletion failure  
[2DA7] Resource acquiring failure  
Delete some files in the shared folder by using Explorer because of automatic/manual file deletion fail-  
ure (in case of [2DA6])  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then perform the HDD formatting (08-  
690).  
[2D11] Insufficient memory  
When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs.  
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.  
[2D12] Message reception error  
[2D13] Message transmission error  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
[2D14] [2D61] Invalid parameter  
When a template is used, form the template again.  
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.  
[2D15] Exceeding document number  
Delete some documents in the folder, and then perform the job in error again.  
[2D20] System management module access abnormality  
[2D21] Job control module access abnormality  
[2D22] Job control module access abnormality  
[2D60] File library access abnormality  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690).  
If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.  
[2D30] Directory creation failure  
[2D31] File creation failure  
[2D33] File access failure  
Check if the access privilege to the storage directory is writable.  
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.  
[2D40] Image conversion abnormality  
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.  
Replace the main memory and perform the job again.  
If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then initialize the shared folder using  
the Setting Mode (08-667).  
[2D62] File server connection error  
Check the IP address or path of the server.  
Check if the server is operating properly.  
[2D63] Invalid network path  
Check the network path.  
If the path is correct, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[2D64] Login failure  
Reset the login name and password. Perform the job.  
Check if the account of the server is properly set up.  
[2D65] Exceeding documents in folder: Creating new document is failed  
Delete some documents in the folder.  
[2D66] HDD full failure during processing  
Reduce the number of pages of the job in error and perform the job again.  
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.  
[2D67] FTP service not available  
Check if the setting of FTP service is valid.  
[2D68] File sharing service not available  
Check if the setting of SMB is valid.  
[2DC1] Power failure  
Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely.  
Check if the power voltage is unstable.  
5
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[ 6 ] E-mail reception related error  
[3A10] [3A11] [3A12] E-mail MIME error  
The format of the mail is not corresponding to MIME 1.0.  
Request the sender to retransmit the mail in the format corresponding to MIME 1.0.  
[3A20] [3A21] [3A22] E-mail analysis error  
[3B10] [3B11] [3B12] E-mail format error  
[3B40] [3B41] [3B42] E-mail decode error  
These errors occur when the mail data is damaged from the transmission to the reception of the mail.  
Request the sender to retransmit the mail.  
[3A30] Partial mail time-out error  
The partial mail is not received in a specified period of time.  
Request the sender to retransmit the partial mail, or set the time-out period of the partial mail longer.  
[3A40] Partial mail related error  
The format of the partial mail is not corresponding to this equipment.  
Request the sender to remake and retransmit the partial mail in RFC2046 format.  
[3A50] [3A51] [3A52] Insufficient HDD capacity error  
[3A60] [3A61] [3A62] Warning of insufficient HDD capacity  
These errors occur when the HDD capacity is not sufficient for a temporary concentration of the jobs,  
etc.  
Request the sender to retransmit after a certain period of time, or divide the mail into more than one.  
Insufficient HDD capacity error also occurs when printing is disabled for no printing paper.  
In this case, supply the printing paper.  
[3A70] Warning of partial mail interruption  
This error occurs when the partial mail reception setting becomes OFF during the partial mail reception.  
Reset the partial mail reception setting ON and then request the sender to retransmit the mail.  
[3A80] [3A81] [3A82] Partial mail reception setting OFF  
Reset the partial mail reception setting ON and then request the sender to retransmit the mail.  
[3B20] [3B21] [3B22] Content-Type error  
The format of the attached file is not supported by this equipment (TIFF-FX).  
Request the sender to retransmit the file in TIFF-FX.  
[3B30] [3B31] [3B32] Charset error  
These errors occur when the standard of the Charset is other than ISO-8559-1 or ISO-8559-2.  
Request the sender to reformat the Charset into either of the standards described above and then  
retransmit the mail.  
[3C10] [3C11] [3C12] [3C13] TIFF analysis error  
These errors occur when the mail data is damaged from the transmission to the reception of the mail, or  
when the format of the attached file is not supported by this equipment (TIFF-FX).  
Request the sender to retransmit the mail.  
[3C20] [3C21] [3C22] TIFF compression error  
The compression method of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment. (Acceptable: MH/MR/  
MMR/JBIG)  
Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable compression method.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[3C30] [3C31] [3C32] TIFF resolution error  
The resolution of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment. (Acceptable: 200 x 100, 200 x 200,  
200 x 400, 400 x 400, 300 x 300 or equivalent)  
Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable resolution.  
[3C40] [3C41] [3C42] TIFF paper size error  
The paper size of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment. (Acceptable: A4, B4, A3, B5, LT, LG,  
LD or ST)  
Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable paper size.  
[3C50] [3C51] [3C52] Offramp destination error  
These errors occur when the FAX number of the offramp destination is incorrect.  
Request the sender to correct the FAX number of offramp destination and then retransmit the mail.  
[3C60] [3C61] [3C62] Offramp security error  
These errors occur when the FAX number of the offramp destination is not on the Address Book.  
Check if the FAX number of the offramp destination is correctly entered or the number has not been  
changed.  
[3C70] Power failure error  
Check if the mail is recovered after turning ON the power again.  
Request the sender to retransmit the mail if it is not recovered.  
[3D10] Destination address error  
5
Check if the setting of the server or DNS is correct. Correct if any of the setting is incorrect.  
When the content of the setting is correct, confirm the sender if the destination is correct.  
[3D20] Offramp destination limitation error  
Inform the sender that the transfer of the FAX data over 40 is not supported.  
[3D30] FAX board error  
This error occurs when the FAX board is not installed or the FAX board has an abnormality.  
Check if the FAX board is correctly connected.  
[3E10] POP3 server connection error  
Check if the IP address or domain name of the POP3 server set for this equipment is correct, or check  
if POP3 server to be connected is operating properly.  
[3E20] POP3 server connection time-out error  
Check if POP3 server to be connected is operating properly.  
Check if the LAN cable is correctly connected.  
[3E30] POP3 login error  
Check if the POP3 server login name and password set for this equipment are correct.  
[3E40] POP3 Login Type ERROR  
Check that the login type (Auto, POP3 or APOP) to the POP3 server is correct.  
[3F00] [3F10] [3F20] [3F30] [3F40] File I/O error  
These errors occur when the mail data is not transferred properly to the HDD.  
Request the sender to retransmit the mail.  
Replace the HDD if the error still occurs after retransmission.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[402F] Page memory size error  
This error occurs when the expansion memory is not installed or the expansion memory has an abnor-  
mality.  
Check if the expansion memory exists or not, or it is correctly installed.  
[4031] HDD full failure during printing  
Reduce the number of pages of the job in error and perform the job again.  
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.  
[4032] Private-print-only error  
Select "Private", and then perform the printing again.  
[4033] Printing data storing limitation error  
Select "Print", and then perform the printing again.  
[4034] e-Filing storing limitation error  
Select "Print", and then perform the printing again.  
[4035] Local file storing limitation error  
Select "Remote" (SMB/FTP) for the destination of the file to save.  
[4036] User authentication error  
Perform the authentication or register as a user, and then perform the printing again.  
[A221] Print job cancellation  
This message appears when deleting the job on the screen.  
[A222] Print job power failure  
When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs.  
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.  
[A290] Limit over error (black)  
[A291] Limit over error (black)  
[A292] Limit over error (black)  
Clear the limit counter (black).  
[A2A0] Limit over error (color)  
[A2A1] Limit over error (color)  
[A2A2] Limit over error (color)  
Clear the limit counter (color).  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.2 Troubleshooting for the Image  
1) Color deviation  
<Symptoms>  
Original mode  
Location  
Phenomena  
All modes  
Color blurred in outline of white text or Color  
illustration on a colored background  
deviationÆ  
Text Mode  
Outline in black text on a colored  
White voidÆ  
Text/Photo Mode background  
Photo Mode  
Map Mode  
Color blurred in outline of line or text  
Color  
deviationÆ  
Fig.5-1  
Cause/Section Step  
Check Item  
Test printing (A3/LD)  
Measure  
Output the built-in grid pattern  
Remark  
For the fol-  
lowing  
1
checks  
Drum rotation  
abnormality  
2
3
4
Check the main motor operation in  
the test mode (03) to see if there is  
any rotation abnormality of the drum.  
Check the main motor operation in  
the test mode (03) to see if there is  
Replace the main motor.  
5
Reconnect the connectors.  
Replace the harnesses.  
any rotation abnormality of the drum. Replace the LGC board.  
Inadequate  
main motor  
rotation speed  
Check the value set for main motor  
rotation speed. (Is the value signifi-  
cantly different from the default  
value?)  
Reset main motor speed to 128.  
Drum coupling  
and coupling  
on the equip-  
ment side  
5
Loose coupling, damage, deforma-  
tion  
Check if they are installed prop-  
erly or replace the couplings.  
Transfer belt  
6
7
8
9
Deformation or damage of the trans- Clean or replace the transfer belt.  
fer belt or stains on the transfer belt.  
Is there any abnormality of the trans- Clean or replace the sensor.  
fer belt home position sensor?  
The reflection tape is stained or dam- Clean or replace the transfer belt.  
aged.  
Are the couplings on the transfer belt Tighten the screws if they loosen,  
side loosen, damaged or deformed? or replace the couplings.  
10 Stain or damage of the drive roller  
Clean or replace the drive roller.  
11 Does the rib of the transfer belt over- Adjust the position of the transfer  
lap the collar on both edge of the  
drive roller?  
belt.  
12 Is the belt edge damaged or stained? Clean or replace the transfer belt.  
13 Peeling of the cleaning blade  
(Large driving load)  
Replace the cleaning blade.  
14 Is the transfer belt unit installed nor- Check and correct the installing.  
mally?  
(Is the unit properly grounded?)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cause/Section Step  
Check Item  
Measure  
Remark  
Fθ lens  
characteris-  
tic defect or  
reflection  
Laser optical  
unit  
15 Check the grid pattern. Are the lines Replace the laser optical unit.  
of the primary scanning direction  
warped?  
mirror warp  
High-voltage  
transformer  
16 Check the connection of the high-  
voltage supply terminal of the 1st or  
2nd transfer rollers.  
Correct or replace the terminal if  
it is loosened or damaged.  
*
If the desired image has not been obtained with the above measures or the more qualified image is  
needed, adjustment the "deviation amount" in the adjustment mode (05). (Refer to 3.5.2 Color devi-  
ation adjustment)  
2) Uneven pitch and jitter image  
<Symptoms>  
Original mode  
Location  
Phenomena  
All modes  
Occurs cyclically at right  
angles to paper feeding  
direction  
Uneven pitch  
Feeding  
direction  
Fig.5-2  
Cause/Section Step  
Check Item  
Test printing (A3/LD)  
Measure  
Remark  
1
Output the built-in halftone For the following  
and grid patterns.  
checks  
Drum  
2
3
4
Are there uneven pitches approx.  
283 mm?  
Replace the main motor.  
Is there any damage on the drum  
surface?  
Clean or replace the  
drum.  
Drum rotation  
abnormality  
Check the main motor operation in  
the test mode (03) to see if there is  
any rotation abnormality of the drum.  
Replace the main motor.  
5
6
7
Check the main motor operation in  
the test mode (03) to see if there is  
any rotation abnormality of the drum. Replace the harnesses.  
Reconnect the connec-  
tors.  
Replace the LGC board.  
Inadequate  
main motor  
rotation speed  
Check the value set for main motor  
rotation speed. (Is the value signifi-  
cantly different from the default  
value?)  
Reset main motor speed  
to 128.  
Drum coupling  
Loose coupling, damage, deforma-  
tion  
Tighten the screws if they  
loosen. Or replace the  
couplings.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cause/Section Step  
Check Item  
Measure  
Remark  
Transfer belt  
8
Is the belt tension of the driving unit  
normal?  
Adjust the tension of the  
transfer belt.  
Check the halftone  
pattern.  
(Uneven pitch:  
approx. 2.5 mm)  
9
Deformation or damage of the trans- Replace the transfer belt. Check the halftone  
fer belt  
pattern.  
(Uneven pitch:  
approx. 75 mm)  
10 Stain or damage of the drive roller  
Clean or replace the drive Check the halftone  
roller.  
pattern.  
(Uneven pitch:  
approx. 75 mm)  
11  
Large driving load due to the peeling Replace the cleaning  
of the cleaning blade  
blade.  
Laser optical  
unit  
12 Check the halftone pattern to see if  
there are uneven pitches of approx.  
0.3 mm each in the whole image.  
Replace the laser optical  
unit.  
Check the halftone  
pattern.  
(Uneven pitch:  
approx. 0.3 mm)  
5
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3) Poor image density, color reproduction and gray balance  
Check gray balance.  
Check image density.  
Check color reproduction.  
Check color reproduction.  
Fig.5-3  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Measures  
Remarks  
Density / Color  
reproduction /  
Gray balance  
1
Check the image density / color  
reproduction / gray balance.  
Perform the enforced performing of  
image quality closed-loop control  
(05-395) and then automatic  
gamma adjustment.  
Printer density  
2
Check the density of printer output Output the test patterns and check See step 5  
image.  
them.  
if defect  
occurs.  
Color: using 04-231 for each color  
Black: using 04-113  
Scanner  
3
4
5
Check if the original glass, mirrors  
or lens is dirty.  
Clean it.  
Parameter  
adjustment value  
Check the image processing  
parameters.  
Adjust the color balance (color).  
Adjust the image density.  
Printer output  
image abnormal  
Is there any faded image (low den- Perform the troubleshooting proce-  
sity)? dures against the faded image.  
Is there any fog in the background? Perform the troubleshooting proce-  
dures against the background fog-  
ging.  
Is there any blotch image?  
Is there any poor transfer?  
Perform the troubleshooting proce-  
dures against the blotch image.  
Perform the troubleshooting proce-  
dures against the poor transfer.  
Is there any poor cleaning of the  
transfer belt? (Check inside the  
equipment.)  
Correct the transfer belt area.  
(Refer to Service Manual)  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4) Background fogging  
5
Fig.5-4  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Measures  
Remarks  
Density repro-  
duction  
1
Check the gradation reproduction.  
Perform the forced performing of  
image quality closed-loop control  
(05-395) and then automatic  
gamma adjustment.  
Printer section  
Scanner  
2
Check the printer output image.  
Output the test patterns and check See step 6  
them.  
if defects  
occur.  
Color: using 04-231 for each color  
Black: using 04-113  
3
4
Check if the original glass, mirrors  
or lens is dirty.  
Clean it.  
Parameter  
adjustment value  
Check the image processing  
parameters.  
Check the value of offsetting  
adjustment for background pro-  
cessing (color), background adjust-  
ment (black) and background peak  
adjustment for range correction  
(black).  
5
Adjust the image processing  
parameters.  
While checking the above encircled  
image, adjust the reproduction level  
by the offsetting adjustment for  
background processing (color),  
background adjustment (black) and  
background peak adjustment for  
range correction (black).  
Cover  
6
Is the cover installed properly?  
(Is the drum exposed to the exter-  
nal light?)  
Correct it.  
Auto-toner  
7
8
Is the auto-toner sensor normal?  
Check the operation of autotoner  
sensor and readjust.  
Is the toner supply operating con-  
stantly?  
Check the motor and circuits.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Measures  
Remarks  
Main charger  
output  
9
Is the main charger output normal? Check the circuits.  
Developer bias  
Developer unit  
10 Is the developer bias proper?  
Check the circuits.  
11 Is the contact between the drum  
and developer material proper?  
Check the doctor-to-sleeve gap  
and pole position.  
Developer mate-  
rial/Toner/Drum  
12 Using the specified developer  
material, toner and drum?  
Use the specified developer mate-  
rial, toner and drum.  
13 Have the developer material and  
drum reached their PM life?  
Replace the developer material and  
drum.  
14 Is the storage environment of the  
Use the toner cartridge stored in  
toner cartridge 35oC or less without the environment within specifica-  
dew?  
tion.  
Drum cleaning  
blade  
15 Is the drum cleaned properly?  
Check the drum cleaning blade  
pressure.  
Transfer belt  
cleaning blade  
16 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade  
contacted and released properly?  
Check if the spring of the transfer  
belt cleaner clutch is removed or if  
any connector is disconnected.  
Otherwise replace the clutch.  
17 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade in Check if the blade pressure spring  
proper contact with the transfer  
belt?  
is installed.  
Toner dusting  
18 Is the toner accumulated on the  
seals of the developer unit?  
Remove the toner and clean the  
seals.  
*
If the trouble is not solved at the step 1 and the step 2 or followings (excluding the parameter adjust-  
ment) are performed, make sure to perform “Enforced performing of image quality closed-loop con-  
trol” and then “Automatic gamma adjustment” after taking a measure.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5) Moire/lack of sharpness  
B
5
A
Fig.5-5  
Moire  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Measures  
Remarks  
Density repro-  
duction  
1
Check the gradation  
reproduction.  
Perform the forced performing of  
image quality closed-loop control  
(05-395) and then automatic  
gamma adjustment.  
Parameter  
adjustment value  
2
3
Check the image process- Check the sharpness adjustment  
ing parameters. value.  
Adjust the image process- While checking the above encir-  
ing parameters.  
cled images A and B, decrease  
moire by sharpness adjustment.  
Printer section  
4
Check the printer output  
image.  
Output the test patterns and check When defects occur,  
them. perform the corre-  
Color: using 04-231 for each color sponding trouble-  
Black: using 04-113  
shooting procedures.  
Lack of sharpness  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Measures  
Remarks  
Density repro-  
duction  
1
Check the gradation  
reproduction.  
Perform the forced performing of  
image quality closed-loop control  
(05-395) and then automatic  
gamma adjustment.  
Parameter  
adjustment value  
2
3
Check the image process- Check the sharpness adjustment  
ing parameters. value.  
Adjust the image process- While checking the above encir-  
ing parameters.  
cled image A, increase sharpness  
by sharpness adjustment.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
*
If the trouble is not solved at the step 1 and the step 2 or followings (excluding the parameter adjust-  
ment) are performed, make sure to perform “Enforced performing of image quality closed-loop con-  
trol” and then “Automatic gamma adjustment” after taking a measure.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6)Toner offset  
Black solid  
Approx.  
173 mm  
Shadow image  
Fig.5-6  
5
Toner offset (Shadow image appears approx. 173 mm behind the high density image.)  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Measures  
Remarks  
Fuser unit  
1
Is the pressure between the  
fuser belt and pressure roller  
proper?  
Check the pressure removal  
parts and pressure mechanism.  
2
3
Is the thermostat in contact?  
Is there scratch on the fuser belt Replace the fuser belt or the  
or pressure roller surface?  
Establish its contact.  
pressure roller.  
4
5
6
Has the fuser belt or pressure  
roller reached its PM life?  
Is the fuser roller temperature  
proper?  
Is the paper type corresponding Use the proper type of paper or  
to its mode?  
Replace the fuser belt or the  
pressure roller.  
Check and correct the control cir-  
cuit.  
Paper  
select the proper mode.  
7
8
Using recommended paper?  
Is the specified developer used? Use the specified developer and  
toner.  
Use the recommended paper.  
Developer mate-  
rial  
Scanner  
9
Are the mirrors, original glass or Clean them.  
lens dirty?  
Image quality  
control  
10 Is the control activated?  
Check the image quality control  
related codes.  
Density  
11 Is the density too high?  
Perform the forced performing of  
image quality closed-loop control  
(05-395) and then automatic  
gamma adjustment.  
Printer density  
12 Check the density of printer out- Output the test patterns and  
When defects  
occur, perform  
the correspond-  
ing trouble-  
put image.  
check them.  
Color:  
using 04-231 for each color  
Black:  
using 04-113  
shooting  
procedures.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7) Blurred image  
Fig.5-7  
Toner offset (Shadow image appears approx. 173 mm behind the high density image.)  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Is the scanner bedewed?  
Is the drum bedewed or dirty?  
Measures  
Scanner  
Drum  
1
2
Clean it.  
Wipe the drum with dry cloth.  
*
Be sure never use alcohol or other  
organic solvents because they have  
bad effect on the drum.  
Ozone exhaust  
3
4
Is the ozone exhaust fan operating prop-  
erly?  
Check the connection of the connector.  
Is the ozone filter stained or damaged?  
Replace it.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8) Poor fusing  
5
Fig.5-8  
Toner offset (Shadow image appears approx. 173 mm behind the high density image.)  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Measures  
IH electric  
power/control  
abnormal  
1
2
Check if the connector contacts properly. Correct it.  
Is the IH coil shorted or broken?  
Is the IH control board normal?  
Replace the IH coil or IH control board.  
3
Are the connectors on the LGC board and Reconnect them.  
joint connectors connected properly?  
4
5
Is the LGC board normal?  
Replace the LGC board.  
Is the harness between the LGC board  
and IH board short circuited or open cir-  
cuited?  
Replace the harness.  
Pressure  
6
7
Are the pressure springs working prop-  
erly?  
Check/adjust the pressure springs.  
between fuser  
belt and pres-  
sure roller  
improper  
Fuser roller tem-  
perature  
Is the temperature of fuser roller too low? Check/correct the setting value of fuser  
roller temperature.  
Clean or replace the thermistors.  
Check/correct the related circuit.  
Developer mate-  
rial and toner  
8
9
Using the specified developer material  
and toner?  
Use the specified developer material and  
toner.  
Paper  
Is the paper damp?  
Change the paper.  
10 Is the paper type corresponding to its  
mode?  
Use the proper type of paper or select the  
proper mode.  
11 Using the recommended paper?  
Use the recommended paper.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9) Blank print  
Fig.5-9  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Measures  
High-voltage  
transformer  
1
Is the high-voltage transformer output  
defective?  
Adjust the output and correct the circuit,  
or replace the transformer.  
(1st/2nd transfer  
roller and devel-  
oper bias)  
2
Are the connector of the high-voltage har- Reconnect the harness securely.  
ness securely connected?  
Replace the high-voltage harness.  
Is the harness open circuited?  
Developer unit  
3
4
5
Is the developer unit installed securely?  
Check/correct the developer sleeve cou-  
pling engaging.  
Do the developer sleeve and mixer  
rotate?  
Check/correct the developer drive sys-  
tem.  
Is the developer material properly trans-  
ported?  
Remove foreign matter from the devel-  
oper material, if any.  
6
7
8
Is there any magnetic brush phase error? Check the developer pole position.  
Is the doctor sleeve gap incorrect?  
Is the drum rotating?  
Adjust the gap with the doctor-sleeve jig.  
Drum  
Check that the drum shaft is inserted.  
Check the drum drive system.  
9
Is the drum grounded?  
Check the contact of the grounding plate.  
Transfer unit  
10 Is the transfer belt in proper contact with  
the drum?  
Check if the contact releasing lever is at  
releasing position. Check the installation  
of the transfer belt.  
11 Is the transport of the transfer belt nor-  
mal?  
Check the installation of the transfer belt  
or transport mechanism.  
12 Is the releasing movement of the transfer Check the installation of the transfer belt  
belt cleaner is normal? (Does the cleaning cleaning blade. Check the operation of  
blade stay in contact?)  
the transfer belt cleaner clutch.  
13 Is the 2nd transfer roller contacted and  
released properly?  
Check the connection of the connector of  
2nd transfer roller contact clutch and open  
circuit of harness.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Measures  
Switching power  
supply  
14 Is the power supply output (5.1VD) nor-  
mal?  
Replace the switching power supply.  
Harnesses for  
SLG, SYS, LGC  
and LDR boards  
15 Are the connectors securely connected?  
Reconnect the connectors securely.  
Is any harness between the boards open Replace the harness.  
circuited?  
Laser optical unit 16 Was the protection seal of slit removed  
when replacing the unit?  
Remove the protection seal.  
5
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10)Solid print  
Fig.5-10  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Measures  
Exposure lamp  
Inverter  
1
Does the exposure lamp light?  
Check the contact of the inverter connec-  
tor.  
If the inverter does not work, replace it.  
If the lamp does not work, replace it.  
Main charger  
2
3
4
Is the main charger securely installed?  
Is the main charger wire open circuited?  
Reinstall it securely.  
Replace it.  
High-voltage  
transformer  
Is the high-voltage transformer output  
defective?  
Adjust the output and correct the circuit,  
or replace the high-voltage transformer.  
(main charger  
wire/grid bias)  
5
6
Are the connector of the high-voltage har- Reconnect the harness securely.  
ness securely connected?  
Replace the high-voltage harness.  
Is the harness open circuited?  
Harnesses for  
SLG, SYS and  
LGC boards  
Are the connectors securely connected?  
Reconnect the connectors securely.  
Is any harness between the boards open Replace the harness.  
circuited?  
Scanner  
7
8
Is there foreign matter in the optical path? Remove it.  
Bedewing of  
scanner and  
drum  
Is the scanner or the drum bedewed?  
Clean the mirrors, lens and drum.  
Keep the power cord plugged so that the  
damp heater can work.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11)White banding (in feeding direction)  
5
Fig.5-11  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Is there foreign matter or dust on the slit  
glass?  
Is there foreign matter on the charger  
grid?  
Is there foreign matter inside the doctor  
blade?  
Measures  
Clean the slit glass.  
Laser optical unit  
1
2
3
Main charger  
grid  
Remove foreign matter.  
Remove foreign matter.  
Developer unit  
4
5
Is there foreign matter on the drum seal? Remove foreign matter.  
Is the drum seal of developer unit in  
proper contact with the drum?  
Modify the position of drum seal or  
replace it.  
Drum  
6
7
8
9
Is there scratch or foreign matter on the  
drum surface?  
Is there scratch or foreign matter on the  
transfer belt surface?  
Are the harness or foreign matters in con- Correct or remove them.  
tact with the transfer belt surface?  
Is the transfer belt cleaning blade con-  
tacted and released properly?  
Replace the drum.  
Transfer unit  
Replace the transfer belt.  
Check if the spring of the transfer belt  
cleaner clutch is removed or if any con-  
nector is disconnected. Otherwise replace  
the clutch.  
10 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade in  
proper contact with the transfer belt?  
Check if the blade pressure spring is  
installed.  
11 Is there any scratch or hole on the 1st/2nd Replace the 1st/2nd transfer roller.  
transfer roller?  
Transport path  
12 Does the toner image touch foreign mat-  
ter after transfer, before entering the fuser  
unit?  
Remove foreign matter.  
Discharge lamp  
Scanner  
13 Has any LED of discharge lamp gone  
out?  
14 Is there foreign matter or dust in the opti- Clean the lens and mirrors.  
cal path?  
Replace the discharge lamp.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12)White banding (at right angles to feeding direction)  
Fig.5-12  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Measures  
Remove foreign matter.  
Main charger  
1
2
3
Is there foreign matter on the charger?  
Is the terminal contact poor?  
Clean or adjust the terminals.  
Replace the drum.  
Drum  
Is there any abnormalities on the drum  
surface?  
4
5
Is the drum grounded?  
Check the contact of the grounding plate.  
Discharge lamp  
Developer unit  
Is the discharge lamp lighting properly?  
Replace the discharge lamp or clean ter-  
minals.  
6
Is the developer sleeve rotating correctly? Check the developer drive system, or  
Is there any abnormalities on the sleeve  
surface?  
clean the sleeve surface.  
7
8
9
Is the connection of developer bias supply Correct it.  
terminal normal?  
Drive systems  
Is the drum, scanner or transfer belt jit-  
tery?  
Check each drive system.  
High-voltage  
transformer  
Is the high-voltage transformer output  
defective?  
Check/correct any electric leakage and  
related circuits.  
(main charger  
wire/grid, 1st/  
2nd transfer  
roller and devel-  
oper bias)  
If the high-voltage transformer does not  
work, replace it.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13)Skew (slantwise copying)  
5
Fig.5-13  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Is the drawer or LCF properly installed?  
Measures  
Drawer/LCF  
1
2
Reinstall the drawer or LCF properly.  
Is too much paper loaded in the drawer or Reduce paper to 550 sheets or less.  
LCF?  
(2500 sheets or less/stack for LCF)  
Change the paper direction and reinsert it.  
Adjust the side guides.  
3
4
Is the paper corner folded?  
Are the drawer or LCF side guides prop-  
erly set?  
Paper feed roller  
Rollers  
5
6
Is the surface of paper feed roller dirty?  
Clean the roller surface with alcohol, or  
replace the roller.  
Is each roller improperly fixed to the  
shaft?  
Check and reinstall E-rings, pins, clips  
and setscrews.  
Aligning amount  
7
8
Is the aligning amount proper?  
Increase the aligning amount.  
Registration  
roller  
Is the registration roller spring removed?  
Mount the spring correctly. Clean the  
roller if it is dirty.  
Pre-registration  
guide  
9
Is the pre-registration guide improperly  
installed?  
Correct it.  
2nd transfer  
front guide  
10 Is the 2nd transfer front guide installed  
properly?  
Correct it.  
RADF  
11 Is the RADF installed and adjusted prop- Reinstall and readjust it.  
erly?  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14)Color banding (in feeding direction)  
Fig.5-14  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Measures  
Scanner  
1
2
Is there foreign matter in the optical path? Clean the slit, lens and mirrors.  
Is there dust or stain on the shading cor-  
rection plate or ADF original glass?  
Clean it.  
Main charger  
3
Is there foreign matter on the charger  
grid?  
Remove foreign matter.  
4
5
Is the charger grid dirty or deformed?  
Is there foreign matter on the main  
charger?  
Clean or replace the charger grid.  
Remove foreign matter.  
6
7
Is the charger wire dirty or deformed?  
Is there foreign matter inside the charger Remove foreign matter.  
case?  
Clean or replace the charger wire.  
8
9
Is the inner surface of charger case dirty? Clean inside.  
Are the pads of charger wire cleaner stop- Correct the position.  
ping at the position other than their home  
position?  
Cleaner  
10 Is there paper dust on the cleaning blade Clean or replace the paper dust removal  
edge?  
brush for the registration roller.  
Clean or replace the cleaning blade.  
11 Is the cleaning blade contact improper?  
12 Is toner recovery defective?  
Correct it.  
Clean the toner recovery auger section.  
Transfer unit  
13 Are the harness or foreign matters in con- Correct or remove them.  
tact with the transfer belt surface?  
14 Is there paper dust on the edge of transfer Clean or replace it.  
belt cleaning blade?  
15 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade con-  
tacted and released properly?  
Check if the spring of the transfer belt  
cleaner clutch is removed or if any con-  
nector is disconnected. Otherwise replace  
the clutch.  
16 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade in  
proper contact with the transfer belt?  
Check if the blade pressure spring is  
installed.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Measures  
Fuser unit  
17 a. Is there dirt or scratches on the fuser  
belt and pressure roller surface?  
b. Is the thermistor dirty?  
a. Clean or replace them.  
b. Clean the thermistor.  
Drum  
18 Are there scratches on the drum surface? Replace the drum.  
Laser optical unit 19 Is there foreign matter or dust on the slit  
glass?  
Remove foreign matter or dust.  
5
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15)Color banding (at right angles to feeding direction)  
Fig.5-15  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Measures  
Main charger  
Fuser unit  
1
2
Is the charger wire dirty or deformed?  
Clean or replace the charger wire.  
Is the fuser belt, pressure roller or oil roller Clean them.  
dirty?  
High-voltage  
transformer  
(main charger  
wire/grid and  
transfer roller  
bias)  
3
4
Is the high-voltage transformer output  
defective?  
Check the circuit and replace the highvolt-  
age transformer if not working.  
Is each joint of high-voltage output loos-  
ened? (Check if any electric leakage is  
causing noise.)  
Reconnect each joint.  
Drum  
5
6
Is there deep scratch on the drum sur-  
face?  
Replace the drum, especially if the  
scratch has reached the aluminum base.  
Are there fine scratches on the drum sur- Check and correct the contact of cleaning  
face (drum pitting)?  
blade and recovery blade.  
7
8
Is the drum grounded?  
Check the contact of the grounding plate.  
Clean the roller area or replace the roller.  
2nd transfer  
roller  
Is the 2nd transfer roller rotating nor-  
mally?  
Scanner  
9
Is there foreign matter on the carriage  
rail?  
Remove foreign matter.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16)White spots  
5
Fig.5-16  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Measures  
Developer unit/  
Toner cartridge  
1
Is the toner density of developer material Check and correct the auto-toner sensor  
proper?  
and toner supply operation.  
Check if the amount of toner is sufficient  
in the toner cartridge.  
2
3
Is the doctor-sleeve gap proper?  
Using the specified developer material,  
toner and drum?  
Adjust the gap.  
Use the specified developer material,  
toner and drum.  
Developer mate-  
rial/Toner/Drum  
4
5
6
Have the developer material and drum  
reached their PM life?  
Is the storage environment of the toner  
cartridge 35oC or less without dew?  
Is there any dent on the surface of the  
drum?  
Replace the developer material and drum.  
Use the toner cartridge stored in the envi-  
ronment within specification.  
Replace the drum.  
7
8
Is there any film forming on the drum?  
Is the drum bedewed?  
Clean or replace the drum.  
Wipe the drum surface with a piece of dry  
cloth.  
Transfer unit  
Main charger  
9
Is there foreign matter on the transfer belt Remove foreign matter.  
surface?  
10 Is there foreign matter on the transfer belt Clean the transfer belt unit.  
drive roller?  
11 Is there foreign matter on the charger?  
12 Is the charger wire dirty or deformed?  
13 Is the high-voltage transformer output  
defective?  
Remove it.  
Clean or replace the charger wire.  
Adjust the output.  
High-voltage  
transformer  
(main charger  
wire/grid, devel-  
oper 1st/2nd  
transfer roller  
bias)  
Paper  
14 Is the paper type corresponding to its  
mode?  
Use the proper type of paper or select the  
proper mode.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17)Poor transfer  
Fig.5-17  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Measures  
Transfer unit  
1
2
3
4
5
Is the transfer belt or 1st/2nd transfer roll- Clean it.  
ers dirty?  
Is the transfer belt in proper contact with  
the drum ?  
Correct it.  
Is the 2nd transfer roller in proper contact Correct it.  
with the transfer belt?  
Is there any deformation or abnormalities Replace the belt.  
on the transfer belt?  
Is the high-voltage fed to the 2nd transfer If any contact failure occurs in the feeding  
roller correctly?  
area (e.g. the conductive bushing and  
spring come off), correct it.  
Paper  
6
7
8
9
Is paper in the drawer or LCF curled?  
Is paper in the drawer or LCF damp?  
Is the registration roller malfunctioning?  
Is the aligning amount proper?  
Reinsert paper with reverse side up or  
change paper.  
Change paper.  
*
Avoid storing paper in damp place.  
Registration  
roller  
Clean the roller, remount the spring, or  
replace defective clutch-related parts.  
Aligning amount  
Inckease the aligning amount  
High-voltage  
transformer  
10 Is the high-voltage transformer output  
defective?  
Check the circuit and adjust the trans-  
former output.  
(1st/2nd transfer  
roller bias)  
11 Are the high-voltage harness and termi-  
nals in proper contact?  
Correct them if loosened.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18)Uneven image density  
5
Fig.5-18  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Is the main charger dirty?  
Measures  
Main charger  
Transfer unit  
1
2
Clean it or replace the charger wire.  
Is the transfer belt or 1st/2nd transfer roll- Clean the belt.  
ers dirty?  
3
4
5
6
Is the transfer belt in proper contact with  
the drum?  
Correct it.  
Is 2nd transfer roller in proper contact with Correct it.  
the transfer belt? (Is the roller tilted?)  
Is there any abnormalities or deformation Replace the transfer belt.  
on the transfer belt?  
Laser optical unit  
Discharge lamp  
Is there foreign matter or dust on the slit  
glass?  
Clean the slit glass.  
7
8
Is the discharge lamp dirty?  
Clean it.  
Has any LED of discharge lamp gone  
out?  
Replace it.  
Developer unit  
9
Is the magnetic brush in proper contact  
with the drum?  
Adjust the doctor-sleeve gap.  
10 Is the developer unit pressure mechanism Check the mechanism.  
malfunctioning?  
11 Is the transport of developer material  
poor?  
Remove foreign matter if any.  
Scanner section  
12 a. Is the platen cover or RADF open?  
b. Is the original glass, mirrors, or lens  
dirty?  
a. Close the platen cover or RADF.  
b. Clean them.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19)Faded image (low density)  
Fig.5-19  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Measures  
Toner empty  
Auto-toner circuit  
1
2
3
Is the “ADD TONER” symbol blinking?  
Is there enough toner in the cartridge?  
Replace the toner cartridge.  
Check the auto-toner circuit function.  
Is the toner density of developer material  
too low?  
Toner motor  
4
5
Is the toner motor malfunctioning?  
Check the motor drive circuit.  
Replace the toner cartridge.  
Toner cartridge  
Are there any abnormalities in the toner  
cartridge?  
Developer mate-  
rial  
6
7
Has the developer material reached its  
PM life?  
Replace developer material.  
Developer unit  
Is the magnetic brush in proper contact  
with the drum?  
Check the developer unit installation.  
Check the doctor-sleeve gap and pole  
position.  
Main charger  
Drum  
8
9
Is the main charger dirty?  
Clean it or replace the charger wire.  
Is there film forming on the drum surface? Clean or replace the drum.  
10 Has the drum reached its PM life?  
Replace the drum.  
Transfer unit  
11 Has the transfer belt, 1st or 2nd transfer  
roller reached its PM life?  
Replace the transfer belt, 1st or 2nd trans-  
fer roller.  
High-voltage  
transformer  
12 Is the high-voltage transformer output set- Adjust the high-voltage transformer out-  
tings improper? put.  
(developer bias)  
13 Are the connector of the high-voltage har- Reconnect the harness securely.  
ness securely connected? Is the harness Replace the high-voltage harness.  
open circuited?  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
20)Image dislocation in feeding directio  
5
Fig.5-20  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Measures  
Adjustment error  
of scanner or  
1
Is same dislocation on every copy?  
Adjust the scanner/printer using the  
Adjustment Mode.  
printer section  
Registration roller  
2
3
4
Is the registration roller dirty, or is the  
spring removed?  
Clean the roller with alcohol.  
Reinstall the spring.  
Is the registration motor malfunctioning?  
Adjust or replace the gears, etc. if they  
are not engaged properly.  
Is the registration roller clutch operating  
normally? (Is the timing of operation  
delaying?)  
Replace the registration roller clutch.  
Paper feed  
clutch, Transport  
clutch  
5
Are the paper feed clutch and transport  
clutch malfunctioning?  
Check the circuit or the clutch and  
replace them if necessary.  
Aligning amount  
6
7
Is the aligning amount proper?  
Decrease the aligning amount.  
Reinstall the guide.  
Pre-registration  
guide  
Is the pre-registration guide improperly  
installed?  
Transfer belt  
8
9
Is there any stain or scratch on the reflec- Clean or replace it.  
tion tape?  
Is the lens of the transfer belt home posi- Clean or replace it.  
tion sensor stained?  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
21)Image jittering  
Fig.5-21  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Is the toner image on the drum proper?  
Measures  
-
1
2
3
If proper, perform step 1 to 3; otherwise  
perform step 4 and after.  
Registration  
roller  
Is the registration roller rotating normally? Check the registration roller section and  
its springs.  
Transfer unit  
Is the transfer belt or 2nd transfer roller  
operating normally?  
Check the drive system and replace the  
transfer belt or 2nd transfer roller if neces-  
sary.  
Fuser unit  
4
Are the fuser roller and pressure roller  
rotation proper?  
Check the drive system.  
Replace the fuser belt, fuser roller and  
Is the fuser belt transportation proper?  
pressure roller if necessary.  
Drum  
5
6
7
Is there large scratch on the drum?  
Is the slide sheet defective?  
Replace the drum.  
Replace it.  
Scanner  
Are there any abnormalities on the car-  
riage feet?  
Replace the feet.  
8
9
Is the tension of timing belt inappropriate? Correct the tension.  
Is the carriage drive system malfunction-  
ing?  
Check the carriage drive system.  
10 Are any mirrors loosely installed?  
11 Is the drum drive system malfunctioning? Check the drum drive system.  
Clean or replace the belts, pulleys, bush-  
ings if they have dirt or scratches.  
Install them properly.  
Drum drive sys-  
tem  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
22)Poor cleaning  
Note:  
Poor cleaning may occur in feeding direction.  
5
Fig.5-22  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Measures  
Developer mate-  
rial  
1
2
3
4
5
Is the specified developer material used? Use the specified developer material and  
toner.  
Cleaner  
Is there paper dust on the drum cleaning  
blade edge?  
Clean it.  
Is the drum cleaning blade peeled?  
Replace the blade.  
Check and replace the drum.  
Is the cleaning brush rotating normally?  
Check the brush driving section.  
Clean the brush area.  
Is the cleaning brush damaged?  
Is there foreign matter on the brush?  
Replace the brush and clean the brush  
area. Check the drum and replace if there  
is any abnormality.  
Transfer belt  
cleaner  
6
Is there paper dust on the edge of transfer Clean or replace it.  
belt cleaning blade?  
7
8
Is the transfer belt cleaning blade peeled? Replace the blade.  
Is the transfer belt cleaning blade con-  
tacted and released properly?  
Check if the spring of the transfer belt  
cleaner clutch is removed or if any con-  
nector is disconnected. Otherwise replace  
the clutch.  
9
Is the transfer belt cleaning blade in  
proper contact with the transfer belt?  
Check if the blade pressure spring is  
installed.  
Toner recovery  
auger  
10 Is the toner recovery defective?  
Clean the toner recovery auger.  
Check the cleaning blade pressure.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Measures  
Fuser unit  
11 Is the cleaning roller or the oil roller dam- Replace them.  
aged?  
Have the roller reached their PM life?  
12 Is there any bubble-like defect on the  
fuser belt (173 mm pitch on the image)?  
Replace the fuser belt. Check and modify  
the heater control circuit.  
13 Have the fuser belt and pressure roller  
reached their PM life?  
Replace them.  
14 Is the pressure between the fuser belt and Check and adjust the pressure mecha-  
pressure roller proper? nism.  
15 Is the temperature of fuser roller proper? Check/correct the setting value of fuser  
roller temperature.  
Clean or replace the thermistors.  
Check and correct the circuit.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
23)Uneven light distribution  
5
Fig.5-23  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Is the original glass dirty?  
Measures  
Clean the glass.  
Original glass  
Main charger  
1
2
Are the main charger wire, grid and case Clean or replace them.  
dirty?  
Discharge lamp  
Scanner  
3
4
Is the discharge lamp dirty?  
Clean it.  
Are the reflector, exposure lamp, mirrors, Clean them.  
lens, etc. dirty?  
Exposure lamp  
5
6
Is the exposure lamp tilted?  
Adjust the installed position of the lamp.  
Replace it.  
Is the lamp discolored or degraded?  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
24)Blotched image  
Fig.5-24  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Measures  
Paper  
1
Is the paper type corresponding to its  
mode?  
Check the paper type and mode.  
2
3
Is paper too dry?  
Change paper.  
Correct it.  
Transfer unit  
Is the transfer belt in proper contact with  
the drum?  
4
5
6
Is the 2nd transfer roller in proper contact Correct it.  
with the transfer belt?  
Are there any abnormalities on the trans- Clean or replace the transfer belt.  
fer belt?  
High-voltage  
transformer  
Is the high-voltage transformer output  
abnormal?  
Adjust the output. Replace the trans-  
former, if necessary.  
(1st/2nd transfer  
roller bias)  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
25)Stain on the paper back side  
Printing side of 1st page  
The edge of image  
cut off.  
5
Back side of 2nd page  
Fig.5-25  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cause/Section Step  
Check items  
Measures  
Adjust the margin.  
Image adjust-  
ment/setting  
1
Is the margin adjustment of image cor-  
rect?  
2
Is the margin adjustment of image correct Adjust the margin.  
when the paper size is not selected in  
bypass feeding?  
3
4
5
Is the margin adjustment of image at  
duplexing correct?  
Adjust the margin. (05-434)  
Is the image location in primary/second-  
ary scanning direction correct?  
Adjust the location.  
Is the reproduction ratio of image in pri-  
mary/secondary scanning direction cor-  
rect?  
Adjust the reproduction ratio.  
6
7
Is the tab setting correct?  
Correct the setting.  
Paper feeding /  
Transport area  
Does the size of paper in the drawer or  
LCF correspond to the setting?  
Use the appropriate paper size or correct  
the size setting.  
8
9
Is the width between the slides in the  
drawer correct (too wide)?  
Correct the position of the slides.  
Is the width between the slides of the  
bypass tray correct (too wide)?  
Correct the width.  
10 Is the sideways deviation adjustment for  
drawers or slides of the bypass tray cor-  
rect?  
Adjust the deviation.  
11 Is the paper aligning amount sufficient?  
Adjust the aligning amount.  
Clean or replace the rollers.  
12 Are the feed roller and transport roller  
dirty or worn out?  
13 Does the paper mode correspond to the  
paper type?  
Use the appropriate paper type or paper  
mode.  
14 Using the recommended paper?  
Use the recommended paper.  
Transfer unit  
15 Is there any stain caused by a poor clean- Clean the transfer belt.  
ing, etc. on the transfer belt?  
16 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade in  
proper contact with the transfer belt?  
Check if the blade pressure spring is  
installed.  
17 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade con-  
tacted or released properly?  
Check if the spring of the transfer belt  
cleaner clutch is removed or if any con-  
nector is disconnected. Otherwise replace  
the clutch.  
18 Is the 2nd transfer roller rotating properly? Clean the area around the roller.  
Otherwise replace the roller.  
19 Is there any foreign matter or stain on the Clean or replace the roller.  
2nd transfer roller?  
20 Has the 2nd transfer roller reached to its  
PM life?  
Replace the 2nd transfer roller.  
Clean the fuser belt and pressure roller.  
Clean the rib.  
Fuser unit  
21 Are the fuser belt and pressure roller  
dirty?  
22 Is the rib of transport guide dirty?  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.3 Replacement of PC Boards and HDD  
<CAUTION IN REPLACING PC BOARDS>  
The ID for each equipment is registered on the LGC board, the DRV board, the SYS board and the SLG  
board. So, if their replacement is required, be sure to replace only one board at a time.  
If more than one of the LGC board, the DRV board and the SYS board require replacement, replace  
them in the following procedure.  
1) First, replace one of the board to be replaced.  
2) Turn the power ON and confirm that "READY" is displayed.  
3) Turn the power OFF.  
4) Replace another board that requires replacement.  
5) Repeat steps 2 to 4.  
The LGC board and DRV board can be replaced without other settings.  
When the HDD requires replacement, see “5.3.1 Replacing HDD”.  
When the SYS board requires replacement, see “5.3.2 Replacing SYS board”.  
When the SLG board requires replacement, see “5.3.3 Replacing SLG board”.  
When NVRAM requires replacement or clearing, see “5.3.4 NVRAM replacing and clearing”.  
5.3.1  
Replacing HDD  
<CAUTION IN REPLACING HDD>  
When the HDD is replaced, it is necessary to back up the data in the HDD before replacing and to  
recover them after replacing.  
5
Notes:  
1. To maintain the security, ask users to perform the backup/restore for users’ data/information  
in the HDD. The service technician can perform them only when users permit it.  
2. Some data in the HDD cannot be backed up and can be kept only on the paper.  
The procedure for replacing the HDD is as follows.  
(1) Ask users to back up the data in the HDD. See the following for the item of data, and the possibil-  
ity and the measure of the backup.  
Image data in the Electronic Filing  
Archive them in the “e-Filing” of TopAccess.  
F-code information, Template registration information, Address book  
Back them up in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess.  
Department management data  
Export them in “Administrator” menu of TopAccess.  
Log data (Print, Scan, FAX (Transmission/Reception))  
Export them in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess. (Import cannot be performed.)  
Data in the shared folder (Scanned data, Saved data of copy / FAX transmission)  
-
-
-
-
-
Copy them to the client computer via the network. (The data which have been copied to  
the client computer cannot be copied to the shared folder.)  
Print waiting data (Copying data and FAX reception data that are waiting to be printed due to  
the paper run-out and jam, etc.)  
-
Finish printing them after the paper supply and the jam release, etc. (The data cannot be  
kept.)  
Print job (Private print data, Schedule print data)  
If any jobs are left, print them. (The data cannot be backed up.)  
FAX saved data (Confidential / Bulletin board data)  
-
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
-
Print them. (The data cannot be backed up.)  
Registration data for FAX transmission (Delayed transmission / Recovery transmission)  
The data cannot be backed up.  
-
(2) Print out the “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE” (content of Function Mode (13) setting)  
list.  
Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button and then the [USER] button.  
Press the [LIST] button.  
Key in [*] [#] [*] [*] [3] [3] and then press the [START] button. The list is outputted.  
(3) Print out the “FUNCTION” list.  
Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button.  
Press the [ADMIN] button, enter the password, and then press the [ENTER] button.  
Press the [LIST/REPORT] button and then the [LIST] button.  
Press the [FUNCTION] button. The list is outputted.  
(4) Replace the HDD.  
(5) Update of HDD program data and UI data.  
Create partitions. (In case of using the download jig, this is not necessary.)  
While pressing [3] and [CLEAR] button, turn the power ON. When “Firmware Version Up  
Mode” appears on the LCD, key in [3] and press the [START] button.  
Update with the USB storage. See “6. FIRMWARE UPDATING” for details.  
Format the HDD. (Setting Mode (08-690: 2))  
*
When the FAX unit (GD-1150) is installed. Start up with the FAX Clearing Mode (1*). Per-  
form the 1*-100 (FAX Set Up), 1*-102 (Clearing the image data) of the FAX Clearing Mode.  
Perform the gamma automatic adjustment of the printer. See “3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjust-  
ment” for details.  
(6) Ask users to reset the user’s setting items and to restore the data/information. See the following  
for the reset and the restore.  
Printer driver  
Upload them in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess.  
F-code information, Template registering information, Address book  
Restore them in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess  
Department management data  
Import them in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess.  
Image data in the Electronic Filing  
Upload them in the “e-Filing” of TopAccess.  
-
-
-
-
(7) Referring to the “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE” list which was printed beforehand, per-  
form the re-setting.  
Print out the “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE” list after the formatting. (Refer to the  
procedure of (2).)  
While pressing [1] and [3] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Function Mode)  
Compare the lists which were printed before and after the formatting to check the setting  
items having the different setting values. Set the value which was set before the formatting.  
Turn the power OFF.  
(8) Referring to the “FUNCTION” list which was printed beforehand, perform the re-setting of the  
default setting of the FAX function.  
Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button.  
Press the [ADMIN] button, enter the password, and then press the [ENTER] button.  
Press the [FAX] button and then the [TERMINAL ID] button to set each item.  
Press the [INITIAL SETUP] button to set each item.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.3.2  
Replacing SYS board  
<<CAUTION IN REPLACING the SYS board>>  
Perform the following procedures and settings when the SYS board is replaced.  
<After replacing the SYS board>  
(1) Install DIMM (main memory) to the new SYS board (from the old SYS board).  
(2) Install NVRAM to the new SYS board (from the old SYS board).  
(3) Update the version of system ROMs (System Firmware, OS data, UI data) (The ROMs had been  
used for the old SYS board).  
*
See “6. FIRMWARE UPDATING” for the details of System ROM update.  
(4) Turn the power OFF and start up with the Setting Mode (08).  
(5) When the message “SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE?” is displayed on the LCD, press the  
[INITIALIZE] button.  
*
*
SRAM is cleared  
If SRAM is not performed, F090 error occurs when starting up.  
Notes:  
• When SRAM is cleared, following items need to be re-set, so make sure the contents of set  
tings are kept as a record.  
<FAX settings>  
5
Terminal ID  
Default setting of fax  
<E-mail settings>  
Setting of properties for E-mail message  
<Internet Fax>  
Setting of properties for Internet Fax  
When SRAM is cleared, the toner cartridge consumed count of Automatic ordering function of  
supplies becomes 0, however, it cannot be re-set.  
(6) [If a scrambler board has already been installed]  
Perform 08-698 (Entering the key code for scrambler board). Have the user enter the key code.  
(7) Perform 08-200 (date and time setting) to set Date/Time.  
(8) Check the serial number after performing 08 Code 995. If the number is different from the num-  
ber on the label attached on the rear cover of the machine, re-input the correct number with 08  
Code 995.  
(9) Perform 08-693 (initialization of the NIC information).  
(10) Turn the power OFF.  
*
If the FAX board has not been installed, skip to step (14).  
(11) Start up with the FAX Clearing Mode (1*)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(12) Perform 1*-102 (Clearing the image data).  
Notes:  
Following image data are deleted when 1*-102 is performed.  
Images of fax polling transmission  
Images of fax Mailbox and box information  
Images of fax transmission  
Images of fax reception  
(13) Turn the power OFF.  
(14) Turn the power ON.  
(15) Set the dial type. [USER FUNCTIONS] [ADMIN] [FAX] [INITIAL SETUP]  
5.3.3  
Replacing SLG board  
<CAUTION IN REPLACING SLG BOARD>  
When the SLG board has been replaced, “Data transfer of characteristic value of scanner / SYS board  
SLG board (05-363)” must be performed.  
5.3.4  
Replacing or clearing NVRAM  
<<Caution in replacing or clearing NVRAM>>  
When NVRAM has been replaced or cleared (”System all clearing (08-669)”), the setting must be per-  
formed according to the following procedure.  
<After replacing or clearing NVRAM>  
(1) Take off the FAX board if installed.  
(2) Start up with the Setting Mode (08).  
(3) Check the serial number after performing 08-995 (Equipment number display). If the number is  
different from the one on the label attached to the rear cover of the equipment, enter the correct  
serial number again with 08-995.  
Note:  
The MAC address of the equipment is generated based on this serial number. Entering the incor-  
rect serial number may result in an inability to access the network due to an invalid MAC  
address.  
(4) Perform 08-693 (initialization of the NIC information).  
(5) Perform “Data transfer of characteristic value of scanner / SLG board Æ SYS board (05-364)”.  
(6) Perform “Image quality control initialization (05-396)” (Chapter 3.3), and then perform “Automatic  
gamma adjustment (05-1642, 1000 and 1002)” consecutively (Chapters 3.5.1 and 3.6.1).  
(7) Perform “1: Electrical counter -> Backup counter” of 08-257 (Counter copy) to recover the total  
counter.  
(8) Shut down the equipment.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 130  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
(9) Install the FAX board taken off in step (1).  
If the FAX board has not been installed, the following steps are not necessary.  
*
(10) Start up with the Setting Mode (08).  
(11) Set the destination with 08-701 (Destination setting of FAX machine).  
(12) Start up with the FAX Clearing Mode (1*).  
(13) Perform 1*-100 (FAX Set Up).  
(14) Turn the power OFF.  
(15) Turn the power ON.  
(16) Set the dial type. [USER FUNCTIONS] [ADMIN] [FAX] [INITIAL SETUP]  
5.3.5  
Cautions when Data overwrite kit (GP-1060) is installed  
When the Data overwrite kit (GP-1060) is installed, follow the cautions below.  
<<Cautions when disposing of the HDD>>  
Before disposing of the HDD of the equipment, be sure to perform 08-1426 (forcible HDD data clearing)  
and confirm that deleting of the HDD data is completed.  
5
Check that the percentage is 100% and “HDD Erase [OK]” appears on the upper left of the screen.  
Check that the version (SYS V1.0) is displayed on the lower right of the screen.  
*
When the scrambler board is installed, data in the HDD are overwritten with encrypted data and  
erased.  
<<Caution when disposing of the SYS board>>  
Before the SYS board is disposed, the following codes can be performed.  
08-1427 (Forcible NVRAM data all clearing)  
08-1428 (Forcible SRAM backup data all clearing)  
If these codes are performed, the equipment cannot be started up.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 131  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.3.6  
HDD information display  
This code displays the HDD operation history, which is recorded in the HDD, on the control panel. HDD  
failure can be diagnosed or predicted with the information displayed.  
1) Display  
The following screen is displayed with setting code 08-670.  
HDD manufacturer  
Model name  
HDD serial number  
-
-
Items supported differ depending on the HDD manufacturer.  
"---" is displayed on the VALUE, NAV and Worst columns if items are not supported.  
2) Usage  
The combination of the values of ID=05 and c5 is used to diagnose whether or not the HDD has a  
physical failure when HDD failure is suspected (service call F100-180 or 120 occurred).  
Result  
Description  
Low possibility of physical failure  
Diagnosis  
ID  
05  
c5  
05  
c5  
05  
c5  
05  
c5  
05  
c5  
VALUE  
0
0
HDD replacement  
is not required.  
From 1 to 999  
0
Any value  
1 or more  
Either one is at  
least 1000.  
Defective sector has been reassigned and HDD is recovered.  
HDD replacement  
is not required.  
High possibility of defective sector existence. (There will be a  
possibility of physical failure depending on the use of HDD.)  
HDD replacement  
is recommended.  
High possibility of physical failure  
HDD replacement  
is recommended.  
All values are dis- High possibility of physical failure (A HDD connector, harness or HDD replacement  
played as "-------". SYS board may be one of the causes.) is recommended.  
3) ID=05 and c5  
ID  
Name  
Description  
Remarks  
05 Re-allocated Sector Count  
The number of sectors reassigned  
This value tends to increase at  
HDD failure.  
c5 Current Pending Sector Count The number of candidate sectors to  
be reassigned  
This value tends to increase at  
HDD failure.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 132  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4) Description of each ID  
ID  
Name  
Meaning  
01 Read Error Rate  
02 Throughput Performance  
03 Spin Up Time  
This attribute is a measure of the read error rate.  
This attribute is a measure of the throughput performance.  
This attribute is a measure of how quickly the drive is able to  
spin up from a spun down condition.  
04 Spin Start/Stop Count  
This attribute is a measure of the total number of spin ups  
from a spun down condition.  
05 Re-allocated Sector Count  
This attribute is a measure of the total number of reallocated  
sectors.  
07 Seek Error Rate  
This is a measure of the seek error rate.  
08 Seek Time Performance  
This attribute is a measure of a drive's seek performance dur-  
ing normal online operations.  
09 Power-On Hours  
This attribute is a measure of the total time (hours or minutes  
depending on disk manufacturer) the drive has been on.  
0a Spin Retry Count  
0c Power Cycle Count  
This attribute is a measure of the total number of spin retries.  
This attribute is a measure of the number of times the drive  
has been turned on.  
c0 Power off Retract Count  
c1 Load Cycle Count  
This attribute is a measure of the total number of emergency  
unloads.  
5
This attribute is a measure of the total number of load/  
unloads.  
c2 Temperature  
This attribute is a measure of the temperature in the HDD.  
c3 ECC On the Fly Count  
This attribute is a measure of the total number of the ECC On  
the Fly.  
c4 Reallocation Event Count  
This attribute is a measure of the total number of the reallo-  
cation events.  
c5 Current Pending Sector Count  
This attribute is a measure of the total number of candidate  
sectors to be reallocated.  
c6 Off-Line Scan Uncorrectable Sector Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of uncorrect-  
able sectors found during the off-line scan.  
c7 Ultra DMA CRC Error Count (Rate)  
This attribute is a measure of the total number of errors found  
in data transfer in the Ultra-DMA mode.  
c8 Write Error Rate  
This attribute is a measure of the write error rate.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
5 - 133  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.4 Other errors  
1) Operation cannot be performed (operation from the control panel is not successful) after installing  
the option(s) such as Wireless LAN module, Scrambler board and/or Parallel board.  
-
Check if the optional board is installed properly.  
2) The connection to the Wireless LAN cannot be made even though it is set to “Enabled”.  
-
The connection state and settings of the Wireless LAN can be checked with [USER FUNC-  
TIONS] [ADMIN] [WIRELESS LAN] [SETTING CHECK].  
Confirm the settings with the administrator.  
*
“NIC INITIALIZING” does not disappear at the time of the power being turned ON and it dis-  
appears after 6 minutes with the NIC initializing time-out. In this case, the connection to the  
Wireless LAN did not succeed even though “NIC INITIALIZING” disappears.  
The connection to the Wireless LAN cannot be made if the Access Point to be connected is  
not found or security settings are not correct.  
*
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 134  
05/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. FIRMWARE UPDATING  
In this equipment, following firmware is written on the ROM on each board.  
Firmware  
Stored  
Update method  
Master data  
Hard disk  
USB Storage Device  
(HDD program data, UI data)  
System ROM  
(System firmware, OS data, UI  
data)  
System control PC board  
(SYS board)  
USB Storage Device  
*
Update with Download jig also  
possible.  
Engine ROM  
(Machine firmware)  
Logic PC board  
(LGC board)  
USB Storage Device  
*
Update with Download jig also  
possible.  
Scanner ROM  
(Scanner firmware)  
Scanning section control PC  
board  
USB Storage Device  
*
Update with Download jig also  
(SLG board)  
possible.  
RADF ROM  
(RADF firmware)  
RADF control PC board  
(MR-3018)  
Download jig  
Download jig  
Download jig  
Download jig  
Finisher ROM  
(Finisher firmware)  
Finisher control PC board  
(MJ-1023/ MJ-1024)  
Finisher ROM  
(Saddle stitcher firmware)  
Finisher control PC board  
(MJ-1024)  
FAX ROM  
(FAX firmware)  
FAX board  
(GD-1200)  
When you want to update the firmware above or the equipment becomes inoperative status due to  
some defectives of the firmware, updating the firmware is available by the following actions.  
Updating with the download jig  
Updating with the USB Storage Device  
6
Notes:  
Written firmware varies depending on the kinds of the boards provided as service parts. For  
updating, only the minimum firmware is installed on the system control PC board, logic PC  
board, and scanning section control PC board. No firmware is installed on the FAX board. The  
latest version of the firmware at the delivery is written on the RADF control PC board and fin-  
isher control PC board.  
When any of above boards is replaced with a new one in the field, confirm the other firmware  
version used with and then write the suitable version of the firmware.  
The firmware (master data) is not installed on the hard disk provided as a service part. When  
the hard disk is replaced with a new one, confirm the other firmware version used with and  
then write the suitable version of the firmware.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
6 - 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6.1 Firmware Updating with Download Jig  
In this equipment, it is feasible to update the firmware automatically by connecting the download jig  
using the dedicated connector and turning ON the equipment.  
The download jig consists of the ROM, in which the program is written, and the jig board.  
And two types of the download jigs are available for each type of the firmware.  
For updating the firmware, in addition to the current ways such as updating each firmware individually,  
the batch update of the firmware of the equipment is available (except the hard disk and the option).  
Download jig  
Firmware  
System ROM  
Stored  
Batch update  
Individual update  
System control PC board  
(SYS board)  
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2  
(48 MB)  
-
<Two download jigs are  
needed.>  
Engine ROM  
Logic PC board  
(LGC board)  
K-PWA-DLM-320  
K-PWA-DLM-320  
Scanner ROM  
Scanning section control  
PC board  
(SLG board)  
RADF ROM  
RADF control PC board  
(MR-3018)  
-
-
-
-
K-PWA-DLM-320  
K-PWA-DLM-320  
K-PWA-DLM-320  
K-PWA-DLM-320  
Finisher ROM  
(Finisher firmware)  
Finisher control PC board  
(MJ-1023/MJ-1024)  
Finisher ROM  
(Saddle stitcher firmware) (MJ-1024)  
Finisher control PC board  
FAX ROM FAX board (GD-1200)  
Refer to the following for the details to update with each download jig.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
6 - 2  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48MB)  
Connector  
Connector  
(
(
for SYS board  
)
connection  
for ROM writer  
adapter connection  
)
ROM4 ROM1  
ROM5 ROM2  
ROM6 ROM3  
Fig.6-1 Jig board: PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB)  
Important:  
To perform update, two download jigs (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2) are needed.  
The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) is the jig in which the Flash ROM is mounted on  
the board directly. Therefore, ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required to write the  
data to these Flash ROMs. Refer to the following to write the data.  
K-PWA-DLM-320  
Connector  
Mark for ROM  
installation direction  
LED  
6
ROM  
Fig.6-2 Jig board: K-PWA-DLM-320  
Important:  
Pay attention to the direction of the ROM.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
6 - 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6.1.1  
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB)  
The firmware of the equipment except for the hard disk and the option can be updated individually or in  
a batch by using PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB). Update the ROM data written on each board  
according to the need such as the case of replacing the system control PC board, logic PC board or  
scanning section control PC board.  
The data to be overwritten by this update are as follows.  
<Updating System ROM>  
System firmware (System firmware data, FROM internal program data)  
OS data (FROM basic section software)  
UI data (fixed section data, common section data, UI data in FROM displayed at power ON)  
<Updating Engine ROM>  
Engine ROM data  
<Updating Scanner ROM>  
Scanner ROM data  
[A] Update procedure  
Important:  
Use two “PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2” for the download jigs.  
Turn OFF the power before installing and removing the download jig.  
Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not be oper-  
ated properly.  
(1) Write the ROM data to be updated to the download jig.  
(2) Shut down the equipment.  
(3) Take off the connector cover.  
Connector cover  
Fig.6-3  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
6 - 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
(4) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN105, CN106) on the SYS board.  
Connector  
Download jig 1  
Download jig 0  
Fig.6-4  
Download jig number  
Download jig 0  
Connector name  
CN105  
Download jig 1  
CN106  
(5) Turn ON the power while [8] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously.  
The screen for selecting the items to be updated is displayed. “*” is displayed next to the items to  
be updated. (All items are selected in the default settings.)  
6
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
6 - 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(6) Select the item with the digital keys.  
“*” is displayed next to the selected item. Display or delete the “*” by pressing the number of the  
item. All items are selected in the default settings.  
Select all items to update the firmware of the equipment in a batch.  
Select items as follows to update it individually.  
<Updating System ROM>  
Select “0. OS Update”, “1. UI Update”, and “2. System Firmware”.  
<Updating Engine ROM>  
Select “3. Engine Firmware Update” only.  
<Updating Scanner ROM>  
Select “4. Scanner Firmware Update” only.  
Example: Updating the system ROM  
(Updating all the items is taken as an example and explained in the following procedures.)  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
6 - 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(7) Press the [START] button.  
Updating starts and the processing status is displayed on the LCD screen.  
Status display during update  
Status display when update is completed  
OS Update ....... Completed  
OS Update  
.......  
UI Data Update .......  
UI Data Update ....... Completed  
SysFirm Update ....... Completed  
Engine MAIN Update .. Completed  
Scanner Firm Update.. Completed  
SysFirm Update .......  
Engine MAIN Update .. Flash Update  
Scanner Firm Update..Flash Update  
(8) “Update Completed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is com-  
pleted properly.  
6
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
6 - 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
“Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not com-  
pleted properly. “Failed” appears next to the failed item on the status display. Turn OFF the  
power, and then check the following items. After confirming and cleaning the problems, restart  
updating from the beginning.  
Is the download jig connected properly?  
Is the updating data written to the download jig properly?  
Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?  
(9) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the connector  
cover.  
(10) Perform the initialization of the updating data.  
Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.  
Key in “947”, and then press the [START] button.  
Press the [INITIALIZE] button.  
[B] Confirmation of the updated data  
After the updating is completed, check each data version in the Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the  
data was overwritten properly.  
<Updating System ROM>  
08-900: System ROM version  
08-920: FROM basic section software version  
08-921: FROM internal program version  
08-922: UI data fixed section version  
08-923: UI data common section version  
08-930: Version of UI data in FROM displayed at power ON  
<Updating Engine ROM>  
08-903: Engine ROM version  
<Updating Scanner ROM>  
08-905: Scanner ROM version  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
6 - 8  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[C] Display during the update  
Update is performed in parallel as shown in the transition diagram below.  
Item Selection Screen for Update  
System ROM]  
Engine ROM]  
Scanner ROM]  
0. OS Update  
3. Engine Firmware Update  
4. Scanner Firmware Update  
1. UI Data Update  
2. System Firmware Update  
Update Completed  
Below is an example of the changes of the LCD screen during update.  
Note that the screen order may be different from the actual one, because a parallel update is performed  
in the process.  
Turn ON the power while [8] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously  
6
Select items to be updated and press the  
[START] button to start updating the  
[System ROM], [Engine ROM] and  
[Scanner ROM] in parallel.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
6 - 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the [System ROM]-[OS Update] has  
been updated, “OS Update…Completed” is  
displayed and the [UI Update] update will start.  
When the [System ROM]-[UI Update] has been  
updated, “UI Data Update…Completed” is dis-  
played and the [System Firmware Update]  
update will start.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
6 - 10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the [Engine ROM] has been updated,  
“Engine MAIN Update..Flash Update” is  
changed to “Engine MAIN Update..Com-  
pleted”.  
When the [System ROM]-[System Firmware  
Update] has been updated, “SysFirm  
Update…Completed” is displayed.  
6
When the [Scanner ROM] has been updated,  
“Scanner Firm Update..Flash Update” is  
changed to “Scanner Firm Update..Com-  
pleted”.  
When all data has been updated, “Update  
Completed” is displayed.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
6 - 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
*
“Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed  
properly. “Failed” appears next to the failed item on the status display.  
Failed items  
Error message  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
6 - 12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.1.2  
Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)  
The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) is the jig in which the Flash ROM is mounted on the board  
directly. The ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required to write data to these Flash ROMs.  
Connect the download jig with the ROM writer via ROM writer adapter to write data. For the procedure  
to write data, refer to the download procedure, instruction manual of each ROM writer, or others.  
Download jig  
(
)
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG  
ROM writer adapter  
(
)
PWA-DL-ADP-350  
PC  
ROM writer  
Fig.6-5  
Note:  
There are two types of the ROM writer adapter. Use the proper one according to the ROM writer  
to be used. Applicable type of the adapter for the ROM writer can be confirmed by the model  
name indicated on the board. Confirm that the adapter is available for the ROM writer to be used  
before connecting them. If an unapplied adapter is connected, the application of the ROM writer  
judges it as an error and writing the data cannot be implemented. Applicable combinations of the  
ROM writer and adapter are as follows.  
6
ROM writer  
ROM writer adapter  
Minato Electronics MODEL 1881XP  
(or equivalent)  
PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881 (model 1881)  
Minato Electronics MODEL 1893/1895/1931/1940 PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931 (model 1931)  
(or equivalent)  
model 1881  
model 1931  
(
)
LV650  
[
]
[
]
PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881  
PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931  
Fig.6-6 PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881  
Fig.6-7 PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
6 - 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Precaution when writing the data  
-
Consider two download jigs (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2) as “Download jig 0” and “Down load jig 2”  
and do not mix them up when writing.  
-
-
Set the writing voltage (VID) to 3.3 V.  
When writing the data, set the address from 0 to 3FFFFF. The data may not be written correctly if  
it is not set.  
-
The Flash ROM in which the data will be written, on the download jig is selected by switching the  
rotary switch on the adapter. Be sure to switch the rotary switch on the adapter depending on the  
data (file) to be written.  
File Name  
RotarySwitch  
Flash ROM  
Download jig 0  
jigu0-1.bin  
jigu1-1.bin  
jigu2-1.bin  
N/A  
Download jig 1  
jigu0-0.bin  
jigu1-0.bin  
jigu2-0.bin  
N/A  
1
2
3
4
5
6
ROM1  
ROM2  
ROM3  
ROM4  
ROM5  
ROM6  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Note:  
Be sure not to confuse different ROM Versions since the file name is identical although the ROM  
version is different.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
6 - 14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.1.3  
K-PWA-DLM-320  
The firmware of the equipment (engine ROM, scanner ROM) and the option (RADF ROM, Finisher  
ROM, FAX ROM) can be updated individually by using K-PWA-DLM-320. Update the ROM data written  
on each board according to the need such as the case of replacing the board.  
The data to be overwritten by this update are as follows.  
<Updating Engine ROM>  
Engine ROM data  
<Updating Scanner ROM>  
Scanner ROM data  
<Updating RADF ROM>  
RADF ROM data  
<Updating Finisher ROM>  
Finisher firmware  
Saddle stitcher firmware  
<Updating FAX ROM>  
FAX ROM data  
[A] Update Procedure  
Since the procedure differs depending on the data, see the each procedure below.  
Important:  
Turn OFF the power before installing or removing the download jig.  
Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not be oper-  
ated properly.  
6
<Updating Engine ROM>  
(1) Install the ROM to the download jig.  
Make sure the direction is correct ( P.6-3 " K-PWA-DLM-320").  
(2) Shut down the equipment.  
(3) Take off the connector cover.  
Connector cover  
Fig.6-8  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
6 - 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
(4) Remove the cover plate.  
Cover plate  
Fig.6-9  
(5) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN344) on the logic PC board (LGC board).  
Connector  
Fig.6-10  
(6) Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.  
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.  
(7) When the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts  
blinking in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does  
not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the  
following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.  
Is the download jig connected properly?  
Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?  
Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?  
Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?  
(8) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the connector  
cover.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
6 - 16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Updating Scanner ROM>  
(1) Install the ROM to the download jig.  
Make sure the direction is correct ( P.6-3 " K-PWA-DLM-320").  
(2) Shut down the equipment.  
(3) Take off the right upper cover.  
Right upper cover  
Fig.6-11  
(4) Remove the cover plate.  
6
Cover plate  
Fig.6-12  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
6 - 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(5) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN16) on the scanning section control PC  
board (SLG board).  
Connector  
Fig.6-13  
(6) Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.  
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.  
(7) After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blink-  
ing in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not  
start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the fol-  
lowing items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.  
Is the download jig connected properly?  
Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?  
Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?  
Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?  
(8) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the right upper  
cover.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
6 - 18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Updating RADF ROM>  
(1) Install the ROM to the download jig.  
Make sure the direction is correct ( P.6-3 " K-PWA-DLM-320").  
(2) Shut down the equipment.  
(3) Take off the RADF rear cover.  
RADF rear cover  
Fig.6-14  
(4) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN81) on the RADF control PC board.  
6
Connector  
Fig.6-15  
(5) Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.  
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.  
(6) After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks slowly (at an interval  
of approx. 0.8 sec.). The LED starts blinking in approx. 15 sec. since the update starts. It is  
assumed that the update is failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed or  
the LED blinks fast (at an interval of approx. 0.1 sec.). In this case, turn OFF the power and  
check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.  
Is the download jig connected properly?  
Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?  
Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?  
Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?  
(7) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the RADF rear cover.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
6 - 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Updating Finisher ROM>  
Finisher firmware (MJ-1023/1024) and saddle stitcher firmware (MJ-1024 only) are written on the fin-  
isher ROM. These two kinds of firmware can be updated individually by installing the download jig to  
the finisher control PC board.  
Remark:  
The following updates are needed according to the finisher model.  
MJ-1023 (Console type):  
Only the update of “Finisher firmware” is needed.  
MJ-1024 (Console type with the saddle stitcher):  
Two kinds of update “Finisher firmware” and “Saddle stitcher firmware” are needed.  
(1) Install the ROM to the download jig.  
Make sure the direction is correct ( P.6-3 " K-PWA-DLM-320").  
(2) Shut down the equipment.  
(3) Take off the finisher rear cover.  
Finisher rear cover  
Finisher rear cover  
[
]
[
]
MJ-1023  
MJ-1024  
Fig.6-16  
*
Connect the finisher interface cable with the equipment after removing the finisher rear cover.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
6 - 20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(4) Connect the download jig with the jig connector on the finisher control PC board.  
Connector  
Fig.6-17  
(5) Change the setting of the DIP switch on the finisher contorol PC board.  
Change the setting of the DIP switch as follows according to the firmware to be updated.  
Note:  
Record the current settings of the DIP switch before changing them. After the updating is com-  
pleted, return the DIP switch to the status as record.  
6
Fig.6-18  
<Updating Finisher Firmware>  
Change all the setting of the DIP switch (1-8) to OFF.  
<Updating Saddle Stitcher Firmware>  
Change the setting of the DIP switch 1-6 to OFF and 7-8 to ON.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
6 - 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(6) Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.  
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.  
Important:  
The processing status can be confirmed by the lighting of the LED (LED 101-103) on the finisher  
control board.  
Fig.6-19  
LED  
Processing status  
LED103  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
LED102  
OFF  
ON  
LED101  
ON  
0% or above  
15% or above  
30% or above  
45% or above  
60% or above  
75% or above  
90% or above  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
(7) After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks slowly (at interval of  
0.8 sec). The LED starts blinking in approx. 30 sec. (finisher section) or 2 min. 30 sec. (saddle  
stitcher section) since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not start  
blinking even though 1 min. has passed (finisher section) or 3 min. (saddle stitcher section), or  
LED flashes fast (at interval of 0.1 sec.). In this case, turn OFF the power and check the following  
items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.  
Is the download jig connected properly?  
Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?  
Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?  
Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?  
Is the DIP switch on the finisher control PC board set properly according to the download sec-  
tion (finisher or saddle stitcher)?  
(8) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and return the DIP switch to the status before  
updating.  
(9) Install the finisher rear cover.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
6 - 22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Updating FAX ROM>  
Important:  
Before updating the FAX ROM, make sure to print out the current Function list for mainte-  
nance, Function list (ADMIN), Phone book number information and Group number informa-  
tion. In case the updating is failed and the registered information of the users is lost for some  
reason, re-register the user information referring to the lists and recover it.  
Confirm the following items before turning OFF the power of the equipment. Turning OFF the  
power may clear the data below.  
-
-
-
Confirm that the “MEMORY RX” LED is OFF and there are no memory reception data.  
Print the “Mailbox/Relay box report” and then confirm that there are no F code data.  
Press the [JOB STATUS] button to display the screen and then confirm that there are no  
memory transmission data.  
(1) Install the ROM to the download jig. Make sure the direction is correct ( P.6-3 " K-PWA-DLM-  
(2) Shut down the equipment.  
(3) Take off the connector cover.  
Connector cover  
6
Fig.6-20  
(4) Remove the cover plate.  
Cover plate  
Fig.6-21  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
6 - 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(5) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN602) on the FAX board.  
Connector  
Fig.6-22  
(6) Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.  
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.  
(7) After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blink-  
ing in approx. 30 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not  
start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the fol-  
lowing items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.  
Is the download jig connected properly?  
Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?  
Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?  
Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?  
(8) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the connector  
cover.  
(9) In the FAX Clearing Mode, perform the “FAX Set Up”.  
Confirm the destination setting is correct in the Setting Mode (08).  
08-201: Destination setting of the equipment  
08-701: Destination setting of the FAX machine  
Turn ON the power while [1] button and [*] button are pressed simultaneously.  
Key in “100”.  
Press the [START] button.  
Notes:  
If the equipment does not work properly after the operation (9), follow the procedure below and  
then perform the “Clearing the image data” in the FAX Clearing Mode to erase the image data in  
the memory.  
Confirm the destination setting is correct in the Setting Mode (08).  
08-201: Destination setting of the equipment  
08-701: Destination setting of the FAX machine  
Turn ON the power while [1] button and [*] button are pressed simultaneously.  
Key in “102”.  
Press the [START] button.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
6 - 24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[B] Confirmation of the updated data  
After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data  
was overwritten properly.  
<Updating Engine ROM>  
08-903: Engine ROM version  
<Updating Scanner ROM>  
08-905: Scanner ROM version  
<Updating RADF ROM>  
08-907: RADF ROM version  
<Updating Finisher ROM>  
08-908: Finisher ROM version  
<Updating FAX ROM>  
08-915: FAX ROM version  
6
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
6 - 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.2 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device  
In this equipment, it is feasible to update the firmware by connecting the USB storage device on which  
the firmware data is written to the USB connector mounted on the system control PC board and turning  
ON the power.  
The type of firmware to be updated can be selected on the LCD screen in this method. This allows to  
update only the necessary firmware individually or to update all firmware in a batch.  
The type of firmware which can be updated with this method are as follows in the table below.  
Model specific  
Firmware  
Stored  
Data file name  
folder name  
Master data  
Hard disk  
1, 2, 3 ... n  
*
The file name should be consecutive  
numbers from 1 to “n” without file  
extension. The capacity of each file  
is approx. 8 MB. However, the file  
capacity of “n” (last number) may be  
less than 8 MB.  
28_451C  
System ROM System control PC board  
(SYS board)  
firmImage0.bin, firmImage1.bin  
Engine ROM  
Logic PC board  
(LGC board)  
firmImage2.bin  
Scanner ROM Scanning section control PC board  
(SLG board)  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
6 - 26  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Important:  
• Only the USB storage device which meets the following conditions should be used for updat-  
ing. Be careful since updating with any device other than the above is never guaranteed.  
-
A combination USB storage device with a flash memory (to be connected directly to the  
USB port) and its capacity is between 64 MB to 512 MB (or 1 GB).  
Operation of the USB storage device used for updating has been confirmed at the input  
check of this equipment (Test mode 03).  
-
(
-
A USB storage device which is complied with the following standards regulated by USB-IF  
(USB Implementers Forum)  
Class number:  
Sub-class number:  
Protocol number:  
8 (=08h) (Mass-storage class)  
6 (=06h) (SCSI transfer command set)  
80 (=50h) (Bulk-Only)  
*
Most common USB storage devices are complied with the specification above and can  
be used for updating. However, the operation in all the Multi Functional Digital Color  
Systems and Multi Functional Digital Systems is not necessarily guaranteed since the  
most of these devices are developed based on the use in PC environment (Windows or  
Macintosh). Therefore, confirm thoroughly that the device is operational in the equip-  
ment for which the updating will be performed when purchasing the device.  
The data file for updating is stored in the model specific folder.  
Never change the model specific folder name since it is used for discriminating the data file  
when the updating data files for multiple models are stored in the USB storage device.  
Store the model specific folder in the root directory of the USB storage device.  
Storing the data file directly in the root directory is possible when the updating data files for  
one specific model is stored in the USB storage device.  
However, if the model specific folder for the same model as that of the data file stored in the  
root directory already exists, the model specific folder will have the priority.  
6
The USB storage device complied with USB1.1 and USB2.0 can be used for updating. How-  
ever, the update is performed in the speed of USB1.1 when the device complied with USB2.0  
is used.  
Do not update the firmware by any storage device other than a flash memory (such as a USB  
connection type memory card reader, CD/DVD drive or hard disk) since it is never guaran-  
teed.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
6 - 27  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[A] Update procedure  
Important:  
The file system of USB storage device should be formatted in FAT format. Be careful since  
the devices formatted in FAT32 or NTFS format will not be operated. The file system can be  
confirmed on the properties in applications such as Explorer of Windows.  
Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not to be  
operated properly.  
(1) Connect the USB storage device to the PC and write the model specific folder in which the data  
file is stored.  
Confirm the model specific folder name and data file name before writing the data (  
The file system of USB storage device should be formatted in FAT format.  
Windows 95 and NT do not support USB. Be careful since the data can not be written on the  
devices in the PCs with these operating systems.  
(2) Shut down the equipment.  
(3) Take off the cover plate.  
Cover plate  
Fig.6-23  
(4) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.  
USB storage device  
(
)
USB connector host  
Fig.6-24  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
6 - 28  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(5) Turn ON the power while [4] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously.  
The screen for selecting the items to be updated is displayed after 3 minutes. “*” is displayed  
next to the items to be updated. (All items other than "0. OS Update" are selected in the default  
settings.)  
Note:  
The display of items on this screen varies depending on the types of data written on the USB  
storage device. Each item is displayed only when each data file is written on the USB storage  
device in the following conditions.  
Item  
Condition  
firmImage0.bin is written.  
0. OS Update  
1. HDD Update  
All master data files (1, 2, 3 ... n) are written.  
firmImage0.bin is written.  
2. UI Data Update  
3. System Firmware Update  
4. Engine Firmware Update  
5. Scanner Firmware Update  
firmImage0.bin and firmImage1.bin are written.  
firmImage2.bin is written.  
6
firmImage2.bin is written.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
6 - 29  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the USB storage device is not recognized properly, the following message is displayed. In this  
case, turn OFF the power of the equipment and connect the device properly. Then repeat the  
procedure from (5).  
If the updating data file does not exist or a data file for other model is stored, the following mes-  
sage is displayed. In this case, turn OFF the power of the equipment and confirm if the data file  
stored in the USB storage device is correct. Then repeat the procedure from (5).  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
6 - 30  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(6) Select the item with the digital keys.  
“*” is displayed next to the selected item. Display or delete the “*” by pressing the number of the  
item. All items are selected in the default settings.  
Select all items to update the firmware of the equipment in a batch.  
Select items as follows to update individually.  
<Updating OS data>  
Select “0. OS Update” only.  
<Updating Master data>  
Select “1. HDD Update” only.  
<Updating System ROM>  
Select “2. UI Data Update” and “3. System Firmware Update”.  
<Updating Engine ROM>  
Select “4. Machine Firmware Update” only.  
<Updating Scanner ROM>  
Select “5. Scanner Firmware Update” only.  
Example: Updating the master data and system ROM  
6
(Updating all the items is taken as an example and explained in the following procedures.)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
6 - 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(7) Press the [START] button.  
Updating starts and the processing status is displayed on the LCD screen.  
Status display during update  
Status display when update is completed  
OS Update ....... Completed  
OS Update  
.......  
HD Data Update .......  
HD Data Update ....... Completed  
UI Data Update ....... Completed  
SysFirm Update ....... Completed  
Engine MAIN Update .. Completed  
Scanner Firm Update.. Completed  
UI Data Update .......  
SysFirm Update .......  
Engine MAIN Update .. Flash Update  
Scanner Firm Update.. Flash Update  
(8) “Update Completed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is com-  
pleted properly.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
6 - 32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
“Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not com-  
pleted properly. “Failed” appears next to the failed item on the status display. Turn OFF the  
power, and then check the following items. After confirming and clearing the problems, restart  
updating from the beginning.  
Does the USB storage device meet the conditions to be used for updating ( P.6-26 "6.2  
Is the data file written properly on the USB storage device?  
Is the USB storage device installed properly?  
Do the USB storage device and equipment operate properly?  
(9) Turn OFF the power, remove the USB storage device and install the cover plate.  
(10) Perform the initialization of the updating data.  
Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.  
Key in “947”, and then press the [START] button.  
Press the [INITIALIZE] button.  
6
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
6 - 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[B] Confirmation of the updated data  
After the updating is completed, check each data version in the Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the  
data was overwritten properly.  
<Updating Master data>  
08-924: Version of UI data language 1 in HDD  
08-925: Version of UI data language 2 in HDD  
08-926: Version of UI data language 3 in HDD  
08-927: Version of UI data language 4 in HDD  
08-928: Version of UI data language 5 in HDD  
08-929: Version of UI data language 6 in HDD  
08-931: Version of UI data language 7 in HDD  
08-933: HDD unit data version  
08-934: Version of Web UI data language 1 in HDD  
08-935: Version of Web UI data language 2 in HDD  
08-936: Version of Web UI data language 3 in HDD  
08-937: Version of Web UI data language 4 in HDD  
08-938: Version of Web UI data language 5 in HDD  
08-939: Version of Web UI data language 6 in HDD  
<Updating System ROM>  
08-900: System ROM version  
08-922: UI data fixed section version  
08-923: UI data common section version  
08-930: Version of UI data in FROM displayed at power ON  
<Updating Engine ROM>  
08-903: Engine ROM version  
<Updating Scanner ROM>  
08-905: Scanner ROM version  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
6 - 34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[C] Display during the update  
Update is performed in parallel as shown in the transition diagram below.  
Item Selection Screen for Update  
[System ROM]  
0. OS Update  
[Master data]  
[Engine ROM]  
[scanner ROM]  
4. Engine  
Firmware Update  
5. Scanner  
Firmware Update  
1. HDD Update  
2. UI Data Update  
3. System  
Firmware Update  
Update Completed  
6
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
6 - 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Below is an example of the changes of the LCD screen during update.  
Note that the screen order may be different from the actual one, because a parallel update is performed  
in the process.  
Turn ON the power while [4] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously  
The initial screen is displayed and the recogni-  
tion of the USB storage device connected to  
the equipment is started.  
When the device is recognized properly, the  
screen for selecting update items is displayed.  
Select items to be updated and press the  
[START] button to start updating the  
[System ROM], [Master Data], [Engine ROM]  
and [Scanner ROM] in parallel.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
6 - 36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the [System ROM]-[OS Update] has  
been updated, “OS Update…Completed” is  
displayed and the [UI Update] update will start.  
6
When the [System ROM]-[UI Update] has been  
updated, “UI Data Update…Completed” is dis-  
played and the [System Firmware Update]  
update will start.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
6 - 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the [Engine ROM] has been updated,  
“Engine MAIN Update..Flash Update” is  
changed to “Engine MAIN Update..Com-  
pleted”.  
When the [System ROM]-[System Firmware  
Update] has been updated, “SysFirm  
Update…Completed” is displayed.  
Total files  
Copies  
File name of  
master data  
When the [Master Data] has been updated,  
“HD Data Update…Completed” is displayed.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
6 - 38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the [Scanner ROM] has been updated,  
“Scanner Firm Update..Flash Update” is  
changed to “Scanner Firm Update..Com-  
pleted”.  
When all data has been updated, “Update  
Completed” is displayed.  
6
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
6 - 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
*
If the USB storage device is not recognized properly, the following message is displayed and the  
update is interrupted.  
*
“Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed  
properly. “Failed” appears next to the failed item on the status display.  
Failed items  
Error message  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
6 - 40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.2.1  
Appendix  
[A] Assist Mode  
This equipment has the Assist Mode to enable the following functions.  
(1) NVRAM flag clearing (“Clear NvRAM flags.”)  
Even if the firmware downloading has been completed normally, the Recovery Mode may acci-  
dentally start up when the power is turned ON again. In this case, clear the NVRAM flags used in  
the download process with this function. (Normally, the flags are automatically cleared in the  
download process.)  
Also in the case the Recovery Mode accidentally starts up after the replacement of NVRAM on  
the SYS board, the flags are cleared with this function.  
(2) Data storage partition formatting (“Format Loader Partition.”)  
When a defection occurs on the UI data, etc. which are stored in the HDD, the partition with the  
stored UI data, etc. is formatted with this function. (Do not use this function since it is not nor-  
mally necessary.)  
(3) HDD partition creation (“All Partition Delete and Create Loader Partition.”)  
When the HDD is replaced or UI data, etc. are downloaded using the USB storage, it is neces-  
sary to format a partition in the HDD before downloading. In this case, the partition is created in  
the HDD with this function.  
Notes:  
1. When downloading with a download jig, it is not necessary to format a partition in advance.  
2. Perform the HDD partition formatting only when a new HDD and scrambler board are installed  
since all data in the current HDD are erased by this operation.  
[B] Operating Procedure of Assist Mode  
6
(1) Turn ON the power while [3] button and [CLEAR] button are pressed simultaneously.  
The following screen is displayed.  
(2) Select the item with the digital keys and press the [START] button.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
6 - 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
6 - 42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. POWER SUPPLY UNIT  
7.1 Output Channel  
The followings are three output channels which are not linked with the cover switch.  
1) +3.3V  
+3.3VA:  
+3.3VB:  
+3.3VB:  
+3.3VB:  
CN464 Pins 9, 10 and 11  
Output to the SYS board  
CN464 Pins 15 and 16  
Output to the SYS board  
CN466 Pin 3  
Output to the LGC board  
CN467 Pins 17 and 18  
Output to the SLG board  
2) +5.1V  
+5.1VA:  
+5.1VB:  
+5.1VB:  
+5.1VB:  
+5.1VB:  
+5.1VB:  
+5.1VB:  
CN464 Pins 21, 22, 23 and 24  
Output to the SYS board  
CN464 Pin 19  
Output to the SYS board  
CN466 Pin 1  
Output to the LGC board, PFP/LCF (via LGC board), Bridge unit (via LGC board)  
CN467 Pins 5 and 6  
Output to the RADF  
CN467 Pins 21 and 22  
Output to the SLG board  
CN468 Pin 4  
Output to the finisher  
CN469 Pin 5  
Output to the FIL board  
3) +12V  
+12VA:  
+12VB:  
+12VB:  
+12VB:  
CN464 Pin 5  
Output to the SYS board  
CN464 Pin 3  
Output to the SYS board  
CN466 Pin 16  
Output to the LGC board  
CN471 Pin 1  
7
Output to the FAX unit  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c POWER SUPPLY UNIT  
7 - 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The followings are two output channels which are linked with the cover switch.  
1) +5.1V  
+5.1VD:  
CN466 Pin 11  
Output to the LGC board  
2) +24V  
+24VD1:  
+24VD1:  
+24VD1:  
+24VD2:  
+24VD3:  
+24VD4:  
+24VD5:  
CN465 Pins 1 and 2  
Output to the LGC board, Bridge unit (via LGC board)  
CN469 Pins 1 and 2  
Output to the PFP/LCF  
CN470 Pin 1  
Output to the power supply cooling fan  
CN465 Pins 5 and 6  
Output to the DRV board  
CN467 Pins 1 and 2  
Output to the RADF  
CN467 Pins 10, 12 and 14  
Output to the SLG board  
CN468 Pin 2  
Output to the finisher  
Output voltage by the type of connector  
Main switch line  
Connector  
Destination  
Voltage  
CN464  
SYS board  
+3.3VA, +3.3VB, +5.1VA, +5.1VB, +12VA,  
+12VB  
CN466  
LGC board, PFP/LCF (via LGC board),  
Bridge unit (via LGC board)  
+3.3VB, +5.1VB, +12VB  
CN467  
CN468  
CN469  
CN471  
SLG board, RADF  
Finisher  
+3.3VB, 5.1VB  
+5.1VB  
FIL board  
+5.1VB  
FAX unit  
+12VB  
Cover switch line  
Connector  
Destination  
Voltage  
CN465  
LGC board, DRV board, PFP/LCF (via LGC +24VD1, +24VD2  
board), Bridge unit (via LGC board)  
CN466  
CN467  
CN468  
CN469  
CN470  
LGC board  
+5.1VD  
SLG board, RADF  
Finisher  
+24VD3, +24VD4  
+24VD5  
PFP/LCF  
+24VD1  
Power supply cooling fan  
+24VD1  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c POWER SUPPLY UNIT  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
7 - 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.2 Fuse  
When the power supply secondary fuse is blown out, confirm that there is no abnormally with each part  
using the following table.  
Voltage  
Board/Unit  
Part  
Fuse type  
+24VD1  
LGC  
Polygonal motor  
Tray-up motor  
ADU motor  
F3:8A (Semi time-lag)  
Main motor  
Developer motor  
Transport motor  
Drum cleaner brush motor  
Transfer belt cleaner auger motor  
Toner motor  
Laser unit cooling fan  
IH control board cooling fan  
Ozone exhaust fan  
Internal cooling fan  
2nd transfer roller contact clutch  
Bypass feed clutch  
Registration clutch  
Upper transport clutch (high speed)  
Upper transport clutch (low speed)  
Lower transport clutch (high speed)  
Lower transport clutch (low speed)  
Upper drawer feed clutch  
Lower drawer feed clutch  
ADU clutch  
Color developer toner supply clutch  
Color developer drive clutch  
Black developer drive clutch  
Black developer lifting clutch  
Transfer belt cleaner contact clutch  
Bypass pickup solenoid  
Image quality sensor shutter solenoid  
Color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid  
Discharge LED  
7
Key copy counter / Copy key card  
Charger cleaner motor  
Power supply Power supply cooling fan  
PFP/LCF  
Bridge unit  
+24VD2  
DRV  
Revolver motor  
Exit motor  
F4:8A (Semi time-lag)  
F5:8A (Semi time-lag)  
+24VD3  
+24VD4  
RADF  
SLG  
Exposure lamp (lamp inverter)  
CCD drive circuit (CCD board)  
Scanner unit cooling fan  
Scan motor  
+24VD5  
Finisher  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c POWER SUPPLY UNIT  
7 - 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7.3 Configuration of Power Supply Unit  
Regulator  
Regulator  
C N 4 6 0  
C N 4 6 0  
Fig.7-1  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c POWER SUPPLY UNIT  
7 - 4  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8. REMOTE SERVICE  
There are following functions as Remote Service.  
(1) Auto Supply Order  
Automatically orders the toner and used toner container by FAX or E-mail.  
(2) Service Notification  
Notifies the status of the equipment to the service technician by E-mail or FAX.  
8.1 Auto Supply Order  
8.1.1  
Outline  
Automatically orders the toner and used toner container.  
(1) Placing an Order  
There are two ways to place an order.  
FAX  
Installation of the FAX board is required.  
If the FAX board has not been installed, it is regarded as OFF setting.  
E-mail (E-mail body + TIFF image)  
(2) Order Intervals  
When the toner empty occurs, the number of occurrences is counted. And when it reaches the  
specified number for CONDITION, the order is placed automatically.  
With regard to the used toner container, it is done according to the number of the used toner con-  
tainer full detection.  
The number of the CONDITION can be set respectively for the toner and used toner container.  
(3) If Order Failure Occurs  
If some problems occur and the order cannot be placed after registering an order as a job, refer  
to the standard countermeasure for the FAX/E-mail transmission failure.  
8
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE  
8 - 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8.1.2  
Setting Item  
To enable Auto Supply Order, the following settings are required.  
Note:  
When selecting E-mail to place an order, it is required that sending and receiving E-mails are  
available. Confirm the details to the administrator.  
(1) Self-diagnosis (08) Setting  
As the default setting, the Auto Supply Order setting screen is not displayed on the touch panel.  
To display it, switching the Valid/Invalid setting (08-765) is required.  
0: Valid (FAX/Internet FAX)  
1: Valid (FAX/Internet FAX/HTTP)*  
2: Invalid (Default)  
When changing the setting value from "2" (default) to "0", the Auto Supply Order setting screen is  
displayed. (* HTTP has not been supported yet.)  
(2) Touch Panel Setting  
Each item is set from the Auto Supply Order screen on the touch panel.  
Entering the password and customer information is required because the setting is made from  
the ADMIN screen. Setting it with the administrator is a must.  
Basic setting  
[ADMIN] > [SERVICE] > [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] > [ORDER INFORMATION]  
AUTO SUPPLY ORDER  
FAX NUMBER  
E-MAIL  
Ordered by: [FAX], [MAIL], [HTTP] (*1)  
FAX number of supplier (*2)  
E-mail address of supplier (*3)  
Customer information  
CUSTOMER  
NAME  
TEL NUMBER  
E-MAIL  
ADDRESS  
SUPPLIER  
NAME  
Supplier information  
ADDRESS  
SERVICE TECNICIAN  
NUMBER  
Service technician information  
NAME  
TEL NUMBER  
E-MAIL  
*1 HTTP has not been supported yet.  
*2 Even when "FAX" is selected, the order is not placed without entering the FAX number.  
*3 Even when "MAIL" is selected, the order is not placed without entering the E-mail address.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
8 - 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Detailed setting for the order  
[ADMIN] > [SERVICE] > [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] > [TONER ORDERING]  
***** TONER ORDER  
PART NUMBER  
CONDITIOIN  
Order information (TONER /USED TONER CONTAINER)  
Part number to be ordered  
The number of conditions (*)  
QUANTITY  
The quantity to be ordered  
AUTO ORDER  
ON/OFF setting of order for each part  
*
The order is placed when the number of replacement reaches the number specified for the  
CONDITION.  
FAX number of this equipment (common information)  
[ADMIN] > [FAX] > [TERMINAL ID]  
ID NAME  
ID name of this equipment  
FAX NUMBER  
FAX number of this equipment  
E-mail information of this equipment (common information)  
[ADMIN] > [E-MAIL]  
FROM ADDRESS  
E-mail address of this equipment (*)  
FROM NAME  
E-mail username of this equipment  
*
When sending an E-mail, validity of the address is checked. If the address is invalid, it is  
not sent.  
(3) Output of setting list of the Auto Supply Order Keying in the following buttons and keys prints the  
setting list.  
[USER FUNCTIONS] [USER] [LISTS] [*] [#] [*] [*] [3] [8] [START]  
8
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE  
8 - 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.1.3  
Setting procedure  
(1) Start up the self-diagnosis setting mode 08-765, and then change the setting value to "0".  
(2) Turn the power OFF, and then ON.  
(3) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button to enter the user function screen.  
(4) Press the [ADMIN] button.  
When the Administrator Password has been set, ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORD screen is  
displayed.  
Fig.8-1  
(5) Press the [PASSWORD] button and the screen is switched to a full keyboard. Then key in the  
Administrator Password and press the [ENTER] button.  
*
Confirm the password to the administrator.  
Fig.8-2  
(6) Press the [SERVICE] button in the ADMIN screen.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE  
8 - 4  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(7) The SERVICE screen is displayed.  
Fig.8-3  
(8) Press the [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] button.  
Fig.8-4  
(9) Press the [ORDER INFORMATION] button.  
(10) The ORDER INFORMATION screen is displayed.  
8
Fig.8-5  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE  
8 - 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(11) Press the buttons on the screen of ORDER INFORMATION to set the required item.  
[FAX]/[MAIL]/[OFF] Select the [FAX] or the [MAIL] button for the transmitting way of order.  
(HTTP has not been supported yet.)  
[OFF]: Turn off the AUTO SUPPLY ORDER function.  
[FAX NUMBER]  
[E-MAIL]  
Input the FAX number of supplier.  
(To transmit by FAX, the order cannot be placed automatically if you do not  
input the number.)  
Input the E-mail address of supplier.  
(To transmit by E-mail, the order cannot be placed automatically if you do  
not input the address.)  
(12) Press the [NEXT] button.  
(Press the [ENTER] button to register, and then the screen returns to the (7) SERVICE screen.  
Press the [CANCEL] button to cancel this register, and then the screen returns to the (7) SER-  
VICE screen.)  
(13) The CUSTOMER/SUPPLIER screen is displayed.  
Fig.8-6  
(14) Press the buttons of the screen of CUSTOMER/SUPPLIER to set the required item.  
CUSTOMER  
[NAME]  
Input the name of customer.  
[TEL NUMBER]  
[E-MAIL]  
[ADDRESS]  
Input the telephone number of customer.  
Input the E-mail address of customer.  
nput the address of customer.  
SUPPLIER  
[NAME]  
[ADDRESS]  
Input the name of supplier.  
Input the address of supplier.  
(15) Press the [NEXT] button.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
8 - 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(16) The SERVICE TECHNICIAN/ RESULT PRINTING screen is displayed.  
Fig.8-7  
(17) Press a button on the screen of SERVICE TECHNICIAN/ RESULT PRINTING to set the required  
item.  
SERVICE TECHNICIAN  
[NUMBER]  
[NAME]  
Input the number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.  
Input the name of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.  
[TEL NUMBER]  
[E-MAIL]  
Input the telephone number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.  
Input the E-mail address of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.  
[DESCRIPTION] Input the remarks if you want to register.  
RESULT PRINTING  
[OFF] / [ALWAYS] / [ON ERROR]  
Whichever you press, the result list is printed.  
(18) Press the [ENTER] button to register and complete the order information setting.  
(19) The SERVICE screen is returned.  
8
Fig.8-8  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE  
8 - 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(20) Press the [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] button.  
Fig.8-9  
(21) Press the [TONER ORDERING] button.  
(22) The TONER ORDERING screen is displayed.  
Fig.8-10  
(23) Press the [YELLOW(Y)] button. (Select the part to be ordered.)  
Fig.8-11  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE  
8 - 8  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(24) Input the order information of TONER.  
[PART NUMBER]  
Toner number  
[CONDITION]  
The order is placed when the number of toner empty reaches the number  
specified for the CONDITION.  
[QUANTITY]  
Quantity to be ordered  
AUTO ORDER  
[ON]/[OFF]  
Allows you to select whether each part to be ordered is placed automati-  
cally or not.  
(25) Press the [ENTER] button to register the setting of toner order.  
(26) The TONER ORDERING screen is displayed.  
Fig.8-12  
(27) Press the [MAGENTA(M)] / [CYAN(C)] / [BLACK(K)] / [USED TONER CONTAINER] button, and  
then input the order information in the same way.  
8
Fig.8-13  
(28) Press the [ENTER] button to register the order information.  
(29) The screen returns to the TONER ORDERING.  
(30) Press the [USER FUNCTION] button to be switched from the ADMIN screen on touch panel and  
returned to the BASIC screen, so that the setting of Auto Supply Order is finished.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE  
8 - 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note:  
Auto Supply Order setting is also available from the following setting mode (08).  
Items  
08 code  
Contents  
The transmitting way of order  
[FAX]/[MAIL] /[OFF]  
732  
0: Ordered by FAX  
1: Ordered by E-mail  
2: Ordered by HTTP  
3: OFF  
SUPPLIER  
[FAX NUMBER]  
733  
734  
738  
739  
740  
741  
746  
747  
742  
743  
744  
745  
748  
764  
Maximum 32 digits  
Maximum 192 letters  
Maximum 50 letters  
Maximum 32 digits  
Maximum 192 letters  
Maximum 100 letters  
Maximum 50 letters  
Maximum 100 letters  
Maximum 5 digits  
SUPPLIER  
[E-MAIL]  
CUSTOMER  
[NAME]  
CUSTOMER  
[TEL NUMBER]  
CUSTOMER  
[E-MAIL]  
CUSTOMER  
[ADDRESS]  
SUPPLIER  
[NAME]  
SUPPLIER  
[ADDRESS]  
SERVICE TECHNICIAN  
[NUMBER]  
SERVICE TECHNICIAN  
[NAME]  
Maximum 50 letters  
Maximum 32 digits  
Maximum 192 letters  
Maximum 128 letters  
SERVICE TECHNICIAN  
[TEL NUMBER]  
SERVICE TECHNICIAN  
[E-MAIL]  
Remarks  
[DESCRIPTION]  
RESULT PRINTING  
0: OFF  
[OFF] / [ALWAYS] / [ON ERROR]  
1: Always  
2: ON Error  
YELLOW(Y) TONER  
[PART NUMBER]  
755  
757  
756  
752  
754  
753  
749  
751  
Maximum 20 digits  
YELLOW(Y) TONER  
[CONDITION]  
1-99  
YELLOW(Y) TONER  
[QUANTITY]  
1-99  
MAGENTA(M) TONER  
[PART NUMBER]  
Maximum 20 digits  
MAGENTA(M) TONER  
[CONDITION]  
1-99  
MAGENTA(M) TONER  
[QUANTITY]  
1-99  
CYAN(C) TONER  
[PART NUMBER]  
Maximum 20 digits  
1-99  
CYAN(C) TONER  
[CONDITION]  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
8 - 10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Items  
CYAN(C) TONER  
08 code  
Contents  
750  
1-99  
[QUANTITY]  
BLACK(K) TONER  
[PART NUMBER]  
758  
760  
759  
761  
763  
762  
Maximum 20 digits  
BLACK(K) TONER  
[CONDITION]  
1-99  
BLACK(K) TONER  
[QUANTITY]  
1-99  
USED TONER CONTAINER  
[PART NUMBER]  
Maximum 20 digits  
USED TONER CONTAINER  
[CONDITION]  
1-99  
1-99  
USED TONER CONTAINER  
[QUANTITY]  
8.1.4  
Order Sheet Format  
The sample of order sheet is as follows.  
(1) FAX (This format is the same as that of TIFF image attached E-mail.)  
*1 Part not to be ordered is not output. (Less space between the lines)  
DATE & TIME  
:99-99-'99 99:99  
CUSTOMER NUMBER  
CUSTOMER NAME  
:XXX  
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
CUSTOMER ADDRESS  
CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER  
CUSTOMER E-MAIL ADDRESS  
SERVICE TECHNICIAN TEL NUMBER :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
SERVICE TECHNICIAN E-MAIL  
SUPPLIER NAME  
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
SUPPLIER ADDRESS  
PART NUMBER  
QUANTITY  
TONER CARTRIDGE  
CYAN  
: XXXXXXXXXXXX  
: XXXXXXXXXXXX  
: XXXXXXXXXXXX  
: XXXXXXXXXXXX  
: XXXXXXXXXXXX  
99  
99  
MAGENTA  
(*1)  
YELLOW  
99  
99  
99  
BLACK  
USED TONER CONTAINER  
DESCRIPTION AREA ..............................................  
.................................................................  
8
DEVICE DESCRIPTION  
SERIAL NUMBER  
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
DEVICE FAX NUMBER  
DEVICE E-MAIL ADDRESS  
TOTAL  
BLACK  
TWIN COLOR  
999999999  
999999999  
FULL COLOR  
999999999  
999999999  
PRINT COUNTER  
SCAN COUNTER  
999999999  
999999999  
999999999  
999999999  
Fig.8-14  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE  
8 - 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(2) E-MAIL (TIFF image attached with the E-mail is the same format with that of the FAX order  
sheet.)  
SUBJECT: SUPPLY ORDER REQUEST  
*1 Part not to be ordered is not output. (Less space between the lines)  
Date&Time: '05-06-14 00:17  
Customer Number: S01 MachineName: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO451c  
SerialNumber: 1234567890  
Device FAX Number:  
Device Email: [email protected]  
OrderInformation:  
YELLOW PartNumber: YELLOW-03 Quantity:17  
CounterInformation:  
PrintCounter(Small) FullColor: 0 TwinColor: 0 Black: 141  
(*1)  
PrintCounter(Large) FullColor: 0 TwinColor: 0 Black: 0  
ScanCounter FullColor: 0 TwinColor: 0 Black: 7  
Fig.8-15  
(3) Result list  
*1 Part not to be ordered is not output. (Less space between the lines)  
ORDER XXXXXXXXX  
DATE & TIME  
:99-99-'99 99:99  
CUSTOMER NUMBER  
CUSTOMER NAME  
:XXX  
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
CUSTOMER ADDRESS  
CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER  
CUSTOMER E-MAIL ADDRESS  
SERVICE TECHNICIAN  
TEL NUMBER  
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
SERVICE TECHNICIAN E-MAIL  
SUPPLIER NAME  
SUPPLIER ADDRESS  
PART NUMBER  
QUANTITY  
TONER CARTRIDGE  
CYAN  
: XXXXXXXXXXXX  
: XXXXXXXXXXXX  
: XXXXXXXXXXXX  
: XXXXXXXXXXXX  
: XXXXXXXXXXXX  
99  
99  
MAGENTA  
YELLOW  
99  
99  
99  
(*1)  
BLACK  
USED TONER CONTAINER  
DESCRIPTION AREA ..............................................  
.................................................................  
DEVICE DESCRIPTION  
SERIAL NUMBER  
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
DEVICE FAX NUMBER  
DEVICE E-MAIL ADDRESS  
TOTAL  
BLACK  
TWIN COLOR  
999999999  
999999999  
FULL COLOR  
999999999  
999999999  
PRINT COUNTER  
SCAN COUNTER  
999999999  
999999999  
999999999  
999999999  
Fig.8-16  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
8 - 12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.2 Service Notification  
8.2.1  
Outline  
This function automatically notifies the status of the equipment to the service technician by E-mail or  
FAX. The following three are the items to be notified.  
Total Counter Transmit  
When this function is effective, it notifies each counter information periodically (on the set date and  
time every month).  
Service Call Transmit (E-mail only)  
When this function is effective, it notifies the corresponding error code and such at a service call  
error.  
PM Counter Transmit  
When this function is effective, it notifies that the PM timing has come when the present PM count  
has reached to its setting value, or the present PM driving count has reached to its setting value.  
8.2.2  
Setting  
Note:  
When using this function, it is required that sending and receiving E-mails or FAXes are avail-  
able. Confirm the details to the administrator.  
[ 1 ] Preparation  
The screen to set this function is not displayed at the default setting.  
Set this screen to be displayed with the following code (08).  
08-774 Setting of notification display  
0: Invalid (Default)  
1: Valid  
8
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE  
8 - 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
[ 2 ] Setting procedure  
(1) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button and select the [ADMIN] button. Then enter the password  
and press the [ENTER] button.  
Confirm the password to the administrator.  
Fig.8-17  
(2) Press the [SERVICE] button.  
Fig.8-18  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
8 - 14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(3) Press the [SERVICE NOTIFICATION] button.  
Fig.8-19  
(4) Press the [E-MAIL] or [FAX] button in "SERVICE NOTIFICATION".  
When the [OFF] button is pressed, all functions related Service Notification become ineffec-  
tive.  
Fig.8-20  
8
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE  
8 - 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(5) Enter the E-mail address or FAX number of the destination.  
When pressing the [E-MAIL] button, the screen is switched to a full keyboard. Then enter the  
E-mail addresses and press the [ENTER] button. (Maximum 3 addresses can be set.)  
Fig.8-21  
Press the [FAX NUMBER] button, key in the FAX number and then press the [ENTER] button.  
Fig.8-22  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
8 - 16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(6) Press the [ON] button to notify or [OFF] button not to notify of each item for E-mail and FAX.  
When the Total Count Transmit is set ON, the screen to set the notification date is displayed.  
Then set the notification date with the following procedure. (The information is notified on the set  
date and time every month.)  
Fig.8-23  
Key in the date (acceptable values: 1-31) in "Date" and press the [SET] button. (Correct the  
value by pressing the [CLEAR] button if the [SET] button is not yet pressed. Correct the value  
by pressing the [RESET] button to move the cursor back to the digit to be corrected if the  
[SET] button is already pressed.)  
Key in the time (acceptable values: 00:00-23:59) in "Time".  
Key in the time in the hour column of "Time", press the [SET] button, key in the time in the  
minute column of "Time" and press the [SET] button. (Correct the value by pressing the  
[CLEAR] button if the [SET] button is not yet pressed. Correct the value by pressing the  
[RESET] button to move the cursor back to the digit to be corrected if the [SET] button is  
already pressed.)  
Press the [ENTER] button to set all. The display returns to the screen at procedure 5).  
(7) Press the [ENTER] button. The setting completes.  
8
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE  
8 - 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note:  
Service Notification setting is also available from the following setting mode (08).  
Items  
08 code  
767  
Contents  
0: OFF (Invalid) 1:E-mail 2:FAX  
Maximum 192 letters  
Maximum 192 letters  
Maximum 192 letters  
Maximum 32 digits  
0: OFF (Invalid) 1: ON (Valid)  
1 to 31  
Service Notification setting  
E-mail address 1  
768  
E-mail address 2  
777  
E-mail address 3  
778  
FAX number  
1145  
769  
Total Counter Transmit setting  
Total counter transmission date setting  
770  
Total counter transmission interval setting  
(Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute)  
776  
00:00-23:59  
Service Call Transmit setting  
PM Counter Transmit setting  
775  
771  
0: OFF (Invalid) 1: ON (Valid)  
0: OFF (Invalid) 1: ON (Valid)  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
8 - 18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.2.3  
Items to be notified  
The items to be notified are shown below.  
1) Total Counter Transmit / PM Counter Transmit by E-mail (XML file attached to E-mail has also the  
same format.)  
Subject: Counter Notification  
(In case of the PM Counter Transmit, it is shown as "Periodical Maintenance Notification".)  
Date  
: 06/14/2005 13:47  
1
2
3
4
Machine Model : TOSHIBA e-STUDIO451c  
SerialNumber : 1234567890  
Total Counter : 00004787  
ChargeCounterFormat:  
LargeSizeChargeCount  
1
LargeSizeChargePaperDefinition 1  
5
6
PMCounterFormat:  
LargeSizePMCount  
LargeSizePMPaperDefinition  
7
8
1
0
Charge Counter:  
Large  
Small  
<Print Counter>  
Full Color -------------------------------------  
9
Copy  
Print  
00000000 00000000  
00000000 00000000  
10  
Twin Color ------------------------------------  
Copy 00000000 00000000  
Black ------------------------------------------  
11  
Copy  
Print  
List  
00000000 00000000  
00000000 00000000  
00000000 00000000  
00000000 00000000  
12  
13  
14  
15  
FAX  
<Scan Counter>  
Full Color -------------------------------------  
Copy Scan 00000000 00000000  
16  
17  
Net Scan  
00000000 00000000  
Twin Color ------------------------------------  
Copy Scan 00000000 00000000  
Black ------------------------------------------  
Copy Scan 00000000 00000000  
18  
19  
20  
21  
FAX Scan  
Net Scan  
00000000 00000000  
00000000 00000000  
<FAX Counter>  
Transmit  
Receive  
00000000 00000000  
00000000 00000000  
22  
23  
Periodical Maintenance Counter:  
Set PM  
Current PM  
Set PMTime  
00150000  
00004787  
00000000  
24  
25  
26  
27  
8
CurrentPMTime 00000000  
28  
Printer Error History:  
Date  
Time  
-----------------------------------------------  
ErrorCode  
06/13/2005 16:44  
06/12/2005 22:28  
06/12/2005 22:23  
05/15/2005 22:23  
04/25/2005 11:12  
F110  
F110  
F110  
F110  
F110  
(*1)  
Fig.8-24  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE  
8 - 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Date  
1
2
Machine model name  
Serial number  
3
Total counter value  
4
Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)  
Definition setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)  
Count setting of large-sized paper (PM)  
5
6
7
Definition setting of large-sized paper (PM)  
8
Number of output pages in the Copier Function (FULL COLOR)  
Number of output pages in the Printer Function (FULL COLOR)  
Number of output pages in the Copier Function (TWIN COLOR)  
Number of output pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)  
Number of output pages in the Printer Function (BLACK)  
Number of output pages at the List Print Mode (BLACK)  
Number of output pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)  
Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (FULL COLOR)  
Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (FULL COLOR)  
Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (TWIN COLOR)  
Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)  
Number of scanning pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)  
Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (BLACK)  
Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)  
Number of received pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)  
PM count setting value  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
PM count present value  
PM driving count setting value  
PM driving count present value  
History of error  
*1 The latest 20 errors are displayed.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
8 - 20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2) Total Counter Transmit / PM Counter Transmit by FAX  
*1 In case of the PM Counter Transmit, the title is replaced to "PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE  
NOTIFICATION".  
COUNTER NOTIFICATION (*1)  
DATE  
: 05/06/14 13:47  
1
2
3
4
MACHINE MODEL : TOSHIBA e-STUDIO451c  
SERIAL NUMBER : 1234567890  
TOTAL COUNTER : 00004787  
CHARGE COUNTER FORMAT  
PM COUNTER FORMAT  
LARGE SIZE PM COUNT  
LARGE SIZE PM PAPER DEFINITION : 1  
5
6
LARGE SIZE CHARGE COUNT : 1  
LARGE SIZE CHARGE PAPER DEFINITION : 1  
: 1  
7 8  
CHARGE COUNTER  
PRINT COUNTER  
SCAN COUNTER  
FULL COLOR  
COPY SCAN 00000000 00000000  
FULL COLOR  
COPY  
PRINT  
LARGE  
SMALL  
LARGE  
SMALL  
9
00000000 00000000  
00000000 00000000  
16  
17  
10  
NET SCAN  
TWIN COLOR  
00000000 00000000  
LARGE SMALL  
TWIN COLOR LARGE  
SMALL  
00000000 00000000  
LARGE SMALL  
11  
18  
COPY  
BLACK  
COPY  
PRINT  
LIST  
COPY SCAN 00000000 00000000  
BLACK LARGE SMALL  
COPY SCAN 00000000 00000000  
12  
13  
14  
15  
19  
20  
21  
00000000 00000000  
00000000 00000000  
00000000 00000000  
00000000 00000000  
FAX SCAN  
NET SCAN  
00000000 00000000  
00000000 00000000  
FAX  
FAX COUNTER  
PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE COUNTER  
LARGE  
SMALL  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
TRANSMIT  
RECEIVE  
00000000 00000000  
00000000 00000000  
SET PM  
CURRENT PM  
SET PM TIME  
: 00000000  
: 00000000  
: 00000000  
CURRENT PM TIME : 00000000  
28  
PRINTER ERROR HISTORY  
DATE  
TIME ERROR CODE  
DATE  
TIME ERROR CODE  
05/06/13  
05/06/12  
05/06/12  
05/05/15  
05/04/25  
16:44  
22:28  
22:23  
22:23  
11:12  
F110  
F110  
F110  
F110  
F110  
(*2)  
Fig.8-25  
8
Date  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Machine model name  
Serial number  
Total counter value  
Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)  
Definition setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)  
Count setting of large-sized paper (PM)  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE  
8 - 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Definition setting of large-sized paper (PM)  
8
Number of output pages in the Copier Function (FULL COLOR)  
Number of output pages in the Printer Function (FULL COLOR)  
Number of output pages in the Copier Function (TWIN COLOR)  
Number of output pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)  
Number of output pages in the Printer Function (BLACK)  
Number of output pages at the List Print Mode (BLACK)  
Number of output pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)  
Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (FULL COLOR)  
Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (FULL COLOR)  
Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (TWIN COLOR)  
Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)  
Number of scanning pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)  
Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (BLACK)  
Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)  
Number of received pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)  
PM count setting value  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
PM count present value  
PM driving count setting value  
PM driving count present value  
History of error  
*2 The latest 20 errors are displayed.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
8 - 22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3) Service Call Transmit  
Subject: Service Call Notification  
1
Date: 06/14/2005 13:47  
Machine Name: e-STUDIO451c SerialNumber:1234567890  
2
3
Function: Print  
Severity: Error  
ErrorCode: XXXX  
Message:  
4
5
6
7
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
8
Printer Error History:  
Date  
Time  
ErrorCode  
------------------------------------------  
06/13/2005 16:44  
06/12/2005 22:28  
06/12/2005 22:23  
05/15/2005 22:23  
04/25/2005 11:12  
F110  
F110  
F110  
F110  
F110  
(*1)  
Fig.8-26  
Date (When an error occurs)  
Machine model name  
Serial number  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Function: Fixed at "Print"  
Severity: Fixed at "Error"  
Error code  
Error message: The content of error is displayed.  
History of error  
*1 The latest 20 errors are displayed.  
8
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE  
8 - 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
8 - 24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE  
In this equipment, the user data, setting items and SRAM data can be backed up / restored by turning  
the power ON after connecting the USB storage device on which the data cloning programs have been  
written to the USB connector mounted on the SYS board.  
The type of data to be backed up/restored can be selected on the LCD screen in this method.  
This allows you to back up/restore only the necessary data individually or to back up/restore all data in  
a batch.  
Programs needed for data cloning with this method are given in the following table.  
Storage location  
Program file name  
Root directory  
rootusb, clone_28_451c  
Important:  
It is assumed that data cloning is to be performed when equipment is installed or options are  
installed. If the address book has been registered, do not perform data cloning. Registered /  
set data are lost.  
The USB storage device for the data cloning must meet the following conditions. A data clon-  
ing operation with any devices other than the following will not be guaranteed.  
-
A combination USB storage device with a flash memory (to be connected directly to the  
USB port) and its capacity is between 128 MB and 512 MB (or 1 GB).  
A device compliant with the following specifications established by USB-IF (USB Imple-  
menters Forum)  
-
Class number:  
Sub-Class number: 6 (=06h)  
Protocol number: 80 (=50h)  
8 (=08h)  
(Mass storage class)  
(SCSI transfer command set)  
(Bulk-only)  
*
Most of the common USB storage devices are compliant with the above specifications and  
are therefore applicable to this data cloning. However, most of these devices were origi-  
nally developed to be used in an environment for PCs (e.g. Windows or Macintosh) and  
thus operations exclusively with this equipment have not been fully guaranteed. Therefore,  
the user must thoroughly check in advance whether there will be any problem in operating  
with this equipment when adopting one of these devices.  
The USB storage devices compliant with both USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 can be used for this data  
cloning. However, the operating speed when using a device compliant with USB 2.0 is equiv-  
alent to the one with a device compliant with USB 1.1.  
Data cloning with any storage devices other than a flash memory (e.g. USB-connectable  
memory card reader, CD/DVD drive, hard disk) will never be guaranteed. Therefore never use  
them for this operation.  
Be sure to unplug the LAN cable and Fax line before data are backed up / restored. Also, do  
not use the RADF and open the cover, drawer, etc. during the data cloning.  
Data can be backed up / restored only for the same model and version. If the version is differ-  
ent, update the firmware and back up / restore data in the same version.  
Restore data to equipment which has the same options as when the data are backed up.  
If "Department management" or "User management information" is restored, the counter val-  
ues are copied as well, so clear all of them. However, the total counter is not copied.  
Delete the backed up data in the USB storage device after the data cloning.  
9
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE  
9 - 1  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[A] Data cloning procedure (Backup)  
Important:  
The file system for the USB storage device should be in the FAT format. Note that any device  
formatted in FAT32 or NTFS will not be operated. Its file system can be confirmed by opening  
the properties of the device from Windows Explorer.  
Never turn the power of the equipment OFF during data cloning, or the data could be dam-  
aged and the operation not carried out properly.  
(1) Connect the USB storage device to the PC and delete all data in the USB storage device.  
The file system for the USB storage device should be in the FAT format.  
Windows95 and NT do not support USB. The data cannot be written into the device with the  
PC in which these OS are installed.  
(2) Write the program file.  
Write the data cloning program into the root directory.  
(3) Shut down the equipment.  
(4) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.  
USB storage device  
(
)
USB connector host  
Fig. 9-1  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
9 - 2  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<User Data Backup>  
(5) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.  
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.  
Fig. 9-2  
(6) Select the items to be performed with the digital keys.  
In case of backup, select one of the following items.  
<Backing up User data>  
Select "1: User Data Back Up".  
<Backing up Setting item>  
Select "3: Setting Back Up".  
<Backing up SRAM data>  
Select "5: SRAM Data Back Up".  
Note:  
After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.  
(7) Press the [1] button.  
The screen to select the user data backup item is displayed. In this screen, the items to be  
backed up are shown after the mark "*". (The items "4", "5" and "6" are selected in the screen by  
default.)  
9
Fig. 9-3  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE  
9 - 3  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(8) Select the items to be backed up with the digital keys.  
The mark "*" is shown on the selected item. The mark "*" can be deleted or added each time the  
corresponding digital key is pressed.  
To back up the data in a batch, select "4", "5" or "6". (Selecting "4" performs "1", "2" and "3"  
together.)  
To back up the data individually, select the following items.  
<Backing up Address book>  
Select "1: Address Book" only.  
<Backing up Mail box>  
Select "2: Mail Box" only.  
<Backing up Template>  
Select "3: Template" only.  
<Backing up 1: Address Book, 2: Mail Box and 3: Template in a batch>  
Select "4: Combined" only.  
<Backing up Department management>  
Select "5: Department Code" only.  
<Backing up User management information>  
Select "6: User Info" only.  
E.g.:  
In case of backing up the department management and user management information  
Fig. 9-4  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE  
9 - 4  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(The following screens are given as an example of when all items are backed up.)  
(9) Press the [Start] button.  
The backup starts and the backing up status is displayed on the LCD screen.  
Fig. 9-5  
(10) "Back Up Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the backup has been properly com-  
pleted.  
Fig. 9-6  
(11) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.  
9
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE  
9 - 5  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Setting Backup>  
(12) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.  
(13) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.  
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.  
Fig. 9-7  
Note:  
After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.  
(14) Press the [3] button.  
The screen to select the setting backup item is displayed. In this screen, the items to be backed  
up are shown after the mark "*". (No items are selected in the screen by default.)  
Fig. 9-8  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE  
9 - 6  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(15) Select the items to be backed up with the digital keys.  
The mark "*" is shown on the selected item. The mark "*" can be deleted or added each time the  
corresponding digital key is pressed.  
To back up the data individually, select the following items.  
<Backing up TopAccess: Network/Print Service>  
Select "1: Network/Print Service" only.  
<Backing up TopAccess: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX>  
Select "2: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX" only.  
<Backing up TopAccess: Notification >  
Select "3: Notification" only.  
<Backing up TopAccess: Directory Service>  
Select "4: Directory Service" only.  
<Backing up Option: Fax setting>  
Select "5: FAX Kit" only.  
<Backing up Option: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth setting>  
Select "6: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth Kit" only.  
(The following screens are given as an example of when all TopAccess items are backed up.)  
(16) Press the [Start] button.  
The backup starts and the backing up status is displayed on the LCD screen.  
Fig. 9-9  
9
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE  
9 - 7  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(17) "Back Up Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the backup has been properly com-  
pleted.  
Fig. 9-10  
(18) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.  
<SRAM Data Backup>  
(19) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.  
(20) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.  
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.  
Fig. 9-11  
Note:  
After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE  
9 - 8  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(21) Press the [5] button.  
The screen to select the SRAM data backup item is displayed. In this screen, the item to be  
backed up is shown after the mark "*". (The item is not selected in the screen by default.)  
Fig. 9-12  
(22) Select the item to be backed up with the digital keys.  
The mark "*" is shown on the selected item. The mark "*" can be deleted or added each time the  
corresponding digital key is pressed.  
To back up the data individually, select the following item.  
<Backing up SRAM Data>  
Select "1. SRAM".  
Note:  
The backup/restore of the SRAM data can be performed only for the same model.  
The ROM version must be the same when the data are backed up and restored.  
(The following screens are given as an example of when SRAM data are backed up.)  
(23) Press the [Start] button.  
The backup starts and the backing up status is displayed on the LCD screen.  
9
Fig. 9-13  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE  
9 - 9  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(24) "Back Up Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the backup has been properly com-  
pleted.  
Fig. 9-14  
(25) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
9 - 10  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[B] Data cloning procedure (Restore)  
Important:  
The file system for the USB storage device should be in the FAT format. Note that any device  
formatted in FAT32 or NTFS will not be operated. Its file system can be confirmed by opening  
the properties of the device from Windows Explorer.  
Never turn the power of the equipment OFF during data cloning, or the data could be dam-  
aged and the operation not carried out properly.  
(1) Shut down the equipment.  
(2) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.  
USB storage device  
(
)
USB connector host  
Fig. 9-15  
9
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE  
9 - 11  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<User Data Restore>  
(3) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.  
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.  
Fig. 9-16  
(4) Select the items to be performed with the digital keys.  
In case of restore, select the following items.  
<Restoring User data>  
Select "2: User Data Restore".  
<Restoring Setting item>  
Select "4: Setting Restore".  
<Restoring SRAM data>  
Select "6: SRAM Data Restore".  
Note:  
After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.  
(5) Press the [2] button.  
The screen to select the user data restore item is displayed. In this screen, the items to be  
restored are shown after the mark "*". (The items "4", "5" and "6" are selected in the screen by  
default.)  
Fig. 9-17  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
9 - 12  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(6) Select the items to be restored with the digital keys.  
The mark "*" is shown on the selected item. The mark "*" can be deleted or added each time the  
corresponding digital key is pressed.  
To restore the data in a batch, select "4", "5" or "6". (Selecting "4" performs "1", "2" and "3"  
together.)  
To restore the data individually, select the following items.  
Be sure to select the same item as the one backed up individually.  
<Restoring Address book>  
Select "1: Address Book" only.  
<Restoring Mail box>  
Select "2: Mail Box" only.  
<Restoring Template>  
Select "3: Template" only.  
<Restoring 1: Address Book, 2: Mail Box and 3: Template in a batch>  
Select "4: Combined" only.  
<Restoring Department management>  
Select "5: Department Code" only.  
<Restoring User management information>  
Select "6: User Info" only.  
E.g.:  
In case of restoring the department management and user management information  
Fig. 9-18  
9
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE  
9 - 13  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(The following screens are given as an example of when all items are restored.)  
(7) Press the [Start] button.  
The restore starts and the restoring status is displayed on the LCD screen.  
Fig. 9-19  
(8) "Restore Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the restore has been properly com-  
pleted.  
Fig. 9-20  
(9) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.  
(10) Clear the counter (in case of restoring "Department Code" and "User Info").  
Since the counter values are also copied, clear all of them. However, the total counter is not cop-  
ied.  
<Procedure>  
Press the buttons as follows: [USER FUNCTION] [ADMIN] Enter the password →  
[COUNTER] [DEPARTMENT SETTING] Enter the password [RESET ALL COUNTERS]  
*
Enable the department management when the [RESET ALL COUNTERS] button is set to be  
disabled.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
9 - 14  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Setting Restore>  
(11) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.  
(12) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.  
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.  
Fig. 9-21  
Note:  
After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.  
(13) Press the [4] button.  
The screen to select the setting restore item is displayed. In this screen, the items to be restored  
are shown after the mark "*". (No items are selected in the screen by default.)  
Fig. 9-22  
9
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE  
9 - 15  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(14) Select the items to be restored with the digital keys.  
The mark "*" is shown on the selected item. The mark "*" can be deleted or added each time the  
corresponding digital key is pressed.  
To restore the data individually, select the following items.  
<Restoring TopAccess: Network/Print Service>  
Select "1: Network/Print Service" only.  
<Restoring TopAccess: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX>  
Select "2: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX" only.  
<Restoring TopAccess: Notification >  
Select "3: Notification" only.  
<Restoring TopAccess: Directory Service>  
Select "4: Directory Service" only.  
<Restoring Option: Fax setting>  
Select "5: FAX Kit" only.  
<Restoring Option: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth setting>  
Select "6: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth Kit" only.  
Note:  
Be sure to restore the same option items in the same condition as when the option items were  
backed up.  
(The following screens are given as an example of when all TopAccess items are restored.)  
(15) Press the [Start] button.  
The restore starts and the restoring status is displayed on the LCD screen.  
Fig. 9-23  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
9 - 16  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(16) "Restore Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the restore has been properly com-  
pleted.  
Fig. 9-24  
(17) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.  
<SRAM Data Restore>  
(18) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.  
(19) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.  
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.  
Fig. 9-25  
Note:  
9
After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE  
9 - 17  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(20) Press the [6] button.  
The screen to select the SRAM data restore item is displayed. In this screen, the item to be  
restored is shown after the mark "*". (The item is not selected in the screen by default.)  
Fig. 9-26  
(21) Select the item to be restored with the digital keys.  
The mark "*" is shown on the selected item. The mark "*" can be deleted or added each time the  
corresponding digital key is pressed.  
To restore the data individually, select the following item.  
<Restoring SRAM Data>  
Select "1. SRAM".  
Note:  
The backup/restore of the SRAM data can be performed only for the same model.  
The ROM version must be the same when the data are backed up and restored.  
(The following screens are given as an example of when SRAM data are restored.)  
(22) Press the [Start] button.  
The restore starts and the restoring status is displayed on the LCD screen.  
Fig. 9-27  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
9 - 18  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(23) "Restore Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the restore has been properly com-  
pleted.  
Fig. 9-28  
(24) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.  
9
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE  
9 - 19  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[C] Confirmation of the error  
"Back Up ERROR X" (X: Error number) is displayed at the top of the LCD screen when the data have  
not been properly backed up / restored. In this case, turn the power OFF and then check the following  
items. After confirming and solving the problem, back up / restore the data again from the beginning.  
Does the USB storage device meet the conditions being used for this cloning?  
Is the updated program file written on the USB storage device properly?  
Is the USB storage device installed properly?  
Is the USB storage device or the equipment damaged?  
Fig. 9-29  
Error number  
ERROR 1  
Error content  
Copy error  
I/F error  
ERROR 2  
ERROR 3  
ERROR 4  
ERROR 5  
ERROR 6  
ERROR 7  
ERROR 8  
ERROR 9  
ERROR 10  
ERROR 11  
USB memory full error  
Working folder error  
File not found error  
Security error  
Checksum error  
Model check error  
Version check error  
Destination check error  
Serial number check error  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
9 - 20  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[D] Backup file  
Backed up data files are encrypted.  
<User data file>  
The folder "user_data" is created in the root directory and the following files are stored in it.  
Data item  
File name  
Address book  
Mailbox  
Template  
BACKUP_ADDR.sct  
BACKUP_MBOX.sct  
BACKUP_TEMP.sct  
Back up the Address book, Mailbox and Template in a batch BACKUP_ALL.sct  
Department management information  
User management information  
BACKUP_Department.sct  
BACKUP_User.sct  
<Setting data file>  
The folder "setting_data" is created in the root directory and the following files are stored in it.  
Data item File name  
Network / Print service  
SaveAsFile / Email / InternetFAX  
Notification setting  
network.sct  
scan.sct  
notice.sct  
ldap.sct  
Directory Service  
FAX setting  
fax.sct  
Wireless LAN setting / Bluetooth setting  
wl.sct, bl.sct  
<SRAM data file>  
The folder "sram_data" is created in the root directory and the following file is stored in it.  
Data item File name  
SRAM  
sram.sct  
*
In addition to the backed up data, the following files are created in each folder.  
Back up item File name  
User data  
Setting item data  
SRAM data  
user_data.txt  
setting_data.txt  
sram_data.txt  
<Contents of file>  
Version: VTD08.100 J  
Serial Number: 0123456789  
Date: MON SEP 26 18:34:40 2005  
File format (user_data.txt, setting_data.txt, sram_data.txt: all in common)  
9
Line 1: Version  
Line 2: Serial number  
Line 3: Date  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE  
9 - 21  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
9 - 22  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS  
10.1 AC Wire Harness  
N F  
N F  
1
2
3
1
2
3
J 6 5 0  
J 6 5 3  
10  
Fig.10-1  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS  
10 - 1  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS  
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC  
10 - 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10.2 DC Wire Harness  
d r a w e r  
1 s t  
d r a w e r  
2 n d  
d r a w e r  
1 s t  
d r a w e r  
2 n d  
1 s t d r a w e r  
2 n d d r a w e r  
S G 3 0  
+ 5 . 1 V 2 B 9  
I P R S 2 T 8  
O E 2 7  
S G 2 6  
I / F 0 7 2 5  
I / F 0 5 2 4  
I / F 0 3 2 3  
I / F 0 1 2 2  
A D 7 2 1  
A D 5 2 0  
A D 3 1 9  
A D 1 1 8  
+ 5 . 1 V 1 B 7  
S G 1 6  
I P C S 1 W 5  
+ 5 . 1 V 1 B 4  
C S I P 1 2 3  
W E 1 2  
S G 1 1  
I / F 6 1 0  
I / F 4 9  
3 0  
2 9  
2 8  
2 7  
2 6  
2 5  
2 4  
2 3  
2 2  
2 1  
2 0  
1 9  
1 8  
1 7  
1 6  
1 5  
1 4  
1 3  
1 2  
1 1  
1 0  
9
I / F 2 8  
8
I / F 0 7  
7
A D 6 6  
6
1 0  
C N T - G N D  
F - C N T  
A D 4 5  
5
9
A D 2 4  
4
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
N C  
N C  
N C  
N C  
S G  
A D 0 3  
3
+ 5 . 1 V 2 B  
2
1
S G  
1
C N 3 J 4 1 9  
T X D  
S G  
R X D  
J 2  
B 8  
C T R C N T 2  
+ 5 . 1 V B  
B 7  
B 6  
B 5  
B 4  
B 3  
B 2  
B 1  
A 8  
A 7  
S I Z E 0  
S I Z E 1  
S I Z E 2  
S I Z E 3  
S G  
F L C T R  
M N C T R  
B K C T R  
A 6  
A 5  
A 4  
A 3  
A 2  
A 1  
P G  
E X T C T R  
M C R U M  
C T R C N T  
C T R O N  
+ 2 4 V D 1  
C N 3 5 2  
D o w n l o a d j i g ( L G C )  
5 0  
4 9  
4 8  
4 7  
4 6  
4 5  
4 4  
4 3  
4 2  
4 1  
4 0  
3 9  
3 8  
3 7  
3 6  
3 5  
3 4  
3 3  
3 2  
3 1  
3 0  
2 9  
2 8  
2 7  
2 6  
2 5  
2 4  
2 3  
2 2  
2 1  
2 0  
1 9  
1 8  
1 7  
1 6  
1 5  
1 4  
1 3  
1 2  
1 1  
1 0  
5 0  
4 9  
4 8  
4 7  
4 6  
4 5  
4 4  
4 3  
4 2  
4 1  
4 0  
3 9  
3 8  
3 7  
3 6  
3 5  
3 4  
3 3  
3 2  
3 1  
3 0  
2 9  
2 8  
2 7  
2 6  
2 5  
2 4  
2 3  
2 2  
2 1  
2 0  
1 9  
1 8  
1 7  
1 6  
1 5  
1 4  
1 3  
1 2  
1 1  
1 0  
S G  
S G  
/ W R X  
R M S L  
+ 3 . 3 V A  
/ C S  
D o w n l o a d j i g ( F A X )  
A 2 2  
A 0 2  
A 0 4  
A 0 6  
A 0 8  
A 1 0  
A 1 2  
A 1 4  
A 1 6  
A 1 8  
A 2 0  
D A T A 1 5  
D A T A 1 3  
D A T A 1 1  
D A T A 9  
D A T A 7  
D A T A 5  
D A T A 3  
D A T A 1  
1 1  
1 0  
N C  
S G  
S G  
1 0  
1 0 1 0  
D F C N T - 0 A  
9
9
D F R Q - 0 A  
9
9
b o a r d  
M O D E M b o a r d  
+ 3 . 3 V A  
+ 3 . 3 V A  
C S 0 - B  
C S 0 - A  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
D F R R Q - 0 A  
8
8
7
D F R A K - 0 A  
7
7
6
6
6
S G  
S G  
5
D F T X D - 0 A  
5
5
R D X  
4
4
4
A 0 3  
A 0 5  
A 0 7  
A 0 9  
A 1 1  
A 1 3  
A 1 5  
A 1 7  
A 1 9  
A 2 1  
3
D F R X D - 0 A  
3
3
2
2
D F S C S T - 0 A  
2
1
1
1
D F A K - 0 A  
J 4 2  
C N 7 1  
C N 1 1  
D o w n l o a d j i g ( S L G )  
9
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
D A T A 1 4  
D A T A 1 2  
D A T A 1 0  
[ L i n e 1 ] b o a r d N C U b o a r d [ L i n e 1 ]  
[ L i n e 2 ] b o a r d N C U b o a r d [ L i n e 2 ]  
D A T A 8  
D A T A 6  
D A T A 4  
D A T A 2  
D A T A 0  
C N 1 0 5  
B l u e t o o t h m o d u l e  
( C C D )  
P W A - F - C C D  
5 0  
5 0  
S G  
S G  
4 9  
4 8  
4 7  
4 6  
4 5  
4 4  
4 3  
4 2  
4 1  
4 0  
3 9  
3 8  
3 7  
3 6  
3 5  
3 4  
3 3  
3 2  
3 1  
3 0  
2 9  
2 8  
2 7  
2 6  
2 5  
2 4  
2 3  
2 2  
2 1  
2 0  
1 9  
1 8  
1 7  
1 6  
1 5  
1 4  
1 3  
1 2  
1 1  
1 0  
4 9  
4 8  
4 7  
4 6  
4 5  
4 4  
4 3  
4 2  
4 1  
4 0  
3 9  
3 8  
3 7  
3 6  
3 5  
3 4  
3 3  
3 2  
3 1  
3 0  
2 9  
2 8  
2 7  
2 6  
2 5  
2 4  
2 3  
2 2  
2 1  
2 0  
1 9  
1 8  
1 7  
1 6  
1 5  
1 4  
1 3  
1 2  
1 1  
1 0  
/ W R X  
R M S L  
+ 3 . 3 V A  
/ C S  
A 2 2  
A 0 2  
A 0 4  
A 0 6  
A 0 8  
A 1 0  
A 1 2  
A 1 4  
A 1 6  
A 1 8  
A 2 0  
D A T A 1 5  
D A T A 1 3  
D A T A 1 1  
D A T A 9  
D A T A 7  
D A T A 5  
D A T A 3  
D A T A 1  
D D R D I M M  
W i r e l e s s L A N m o d u l e  
S G  
S G  
+ 3 . 3 V A  
+ 3 . 3 V A  
C S 0 - B  
C S 0 - A  
R D X  
A 0 3  
A 0 5  
A 0 7  
A 0 9  
A 1 1  
A 1 3  
A 1 5  
A 1 7  
A 1 9  
A 2 1  
9
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
D A T A 1 4  
D A T A 1 2  
D A T A 1 0  
D I M M [ 0 ]  
D I M M [ 1 ]  
D A T A 8  
D A T A 6  
D A T A 4  
D A T A 2  
D A T A 0  
C N 1 0 6  
P C I s l o t  
( D S P )  
P W A - F - D S P  
k i t  
i n t e r f a c e P a r a l l e l i n t e r f a c e k i t  
b o a r d  
S c r a m b l e r b o a r d  
P C i n t e r f a c e ( I E E E 1 2 8 4 )  
( L C D )  
L C D  
( K E Y )  
P W A - F - K E Y  
L C D b a c k l i g h t  
T o u c h p a n e l  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10.3 Electric Parts Layout  
[A] Unit construction  
[B] Scanner unit  
[B-1] Motor, sensor, lamp  
A4 series  
[B] Scanner unit  
[B-2] Switch, PC board, heater, thermostat, other parts  
[C] Control panel unit  
[D] Process unit  
[D-1] Motor, sensor, switch, clutch, solenoid  
M15  
M1  
Drive unit  
S5  
S7  
S6  
Scanner unit  
PC board unit  
M2  
S16  
Control panel unit  
S4  
KEY  
S15  
DH2*  
CLT1  
SLG  
LCD  
Fuser unit  
Automatic  
EXP  
CCD  
S1  
Front side  
S9  
S2  
S3  
duplexing  
unit  
S41  
S19  
S8  
THMO2*  
LT series  
S12  
S11  
DH1*  
Bypass unit  
M15  
M1  
S10  
Front side  
INV  
Front side  
DSP  
SOL1  
Transport unit  
M20  
Front side  
S5  
M16  
S7  
S6  
Process unit  
Front side  
Paper feeder unit  
Laser unit  
S4  
EXP  
Front side  
S2  
S3  
[D] Process unit  
[D-2] Motor, sensor, switch, solenoid, heater, ther-  
mistor, thermostat  
[D] Process unit  
[D-3] Motor, switch  
[E] Laser unit  
[F] Paper feeder unit  
[G] Transport unit  
S45*  
CLT2  
S31  
CLT3  
M3  
CLT5  
S22  
S27  
S20  
S14  
S33  
S32  
S29  
S18  
SNS  
SOL2  
S25  
S28  
S34  
S17  
S23  
M13  
S42  
ERS  
S26  
S30  
S43  
S44  
LDR  
THM4  
THMO3*  
DH4*  
S24  
Front side  
M4  
Front side  
DH3*  
Front side  
Front side  
S13  
Front side  
[H] Bypass unit  
[I] Automatic duplexing unit  
[J] Fuser unit  
[K] Drive unit  
[L] PC board unit  
M17  
HDD  
M21  
M6  
IH  
SFB  
S37  
M7  
M18  
M8  
S38  
SYS  
S39  
S40  
M5  
CLT6  
DRV  
M12  
IH-COIL  
M19  
CLT12  
M9  
CLT7  
ADU  
LGC  
CLT14  
CLT13  
THMO1  
THM2  
CLT8  
SOL3  
CLT15  
CLT9  
CLT16  
BRK  
S35  
M10  
CLT11  
Front side  
Front side  
THM3  
THM1  
CLT10  
FIL  
S36  
Front side  
PS  
Front side  
M11  
Front side  
HVT  
Wire harness  
location  
Motors  
Sensors and Switches  
PC boards  
Symbol  
S43  
Name  
Figure  
[G]  
Wire harness  
location  
Wire harness  
location  
4-E  
Wire harness  
location  
COV-INTLCK-SW  
Symbol  
Name  
Figure  
[B-1]  
[D-1]  
[D-2]  
[E]  
Symbol  
S1-5  
S6  
Name  
Figure  
[B-1]  
[B-1]  
[B-1]  
[D-1]  
[D-1]  
[D-1]  
[D-1]  
[D-1]  
[D-2]  
[D-2]  
[D-1]  
[D-1]  
[D-2]  
[G]  
Symbol  
Name  
Figure  
[B-2]  
[B-2]  
[C]  
AC wire harness  
8-G  
Cover opening/closing interlock switch  
SIDE-COV-SW  
SCAN-MOT  
M1  
APS 1-3, APS-C, APS-R  
PWA-F-CCD  
4-G  
7-F  
8-G  
8-B  
6-G  
6-B  
6-G  
8-D  
6-C  
8-F  
6-B  
6-F  
8-C  
4-F  
7-D  
8-A  
8-A  
5-H  
7-D  
5-A  
CCD  
SLG  
DSP  
KEY  
LDR  
SNS  
3-F  
4-G  
1-G  
1-H  
8-B  
8-B  
S44  
[G]  
Scan motor  
Automatic original detection sensor  
HOME-SNR  
4-F  
CCD driving PC board (CCD board)  
PWA-F-SLG  
Side cover opening/closing switch  
CLING-SNR  
BELT-CLN-MOT  
M2  
4-F  
4-F  
6-F  
7-D  
7-C  
7-E  
7-E  
7-E  
8-G  
7-F  
7-F  
8-H  
8-G  
7-D  
8-C  
8-G  
8-G  
8-G  
8-C  
8-C  
8-E  
8-E  
8-E  
8-E  
8-E  
8-F  
8-E  
8-E  
6-H  
6-G  
6-G  
6-F  
6-F  
6-C  
Transfer belt cleaner auger motor  
TNR-MOT  
Carriage home position sensor  
PLTN-SNR  
Scanning section control PC board (SLG board)  
PWA-F-DSP  
S45  
Paper clinging detection sensor  
* Only for JPD model of all equipments  
[G]  
8-F  
M3  
M4  
S7  
Toner motor  
Platen sensor  
Display PC board (DSP board)  
PWA-F-KEY  
M/DC-POL  
REVLV-HP-SNR  
S8  
[C]  
Polygonal motor  
ADU-MOT  
Revolver home position sensor  
COLR-TNR-SNR  
Key control PC board (KEY board)  
PWA-F-LDR  
Electromagnetic spring clutches  
M5  
[I]  
S9  
[E]  
ADU motor  
Color toner cartridge sensor  
COLR-ATTNR-SNR  
Laser driving PC board (LDR board)  
PWA-F-SNS  
Wire harness  
location  
MAIN-MOT  
Symbol  
Name  
Figure  
[D-1]  
[F]  
M6  
[K]  
S10  
S11  
S12  
S13  
S14  
S15  
S16  
S17  
S18  
S19  
S20  
S22  
S23  
S24  
S25  
S26  
S27  
S28  
S29  
S30  
S31  
S32  
S33  
S34  
S35  
S36  
S37  
S38  
S39  
S40  
S41  
S42  
[E]  
Main motor  
Color auto-toner sensor  
K-DEV-POS-SNR  
H-sync signal detection PC board (SNS board)  
PWA-F-SFB  
TRBLT-CLN-CLT  
EXIT-MOT  
CLT1  
7-D  
8-D  
8-F  
8-F  
6-H  
6-F  
8-D  
8-D  
8-D  
8-C  
8-D  
8-D  
8-D  
8-F  
8-F  
M7  
[K]  
Transfer belt cleaner clutch  
CST-U-FEED-CLT  
Exit motor  
Black developer contact position detection sensor  
K-DEV-TIM-SNR  
SFB  
Bypass tray slide guide width detection PC board  
(SFB board)  
[H]  
6-H  
7-G  
DRM-CLN-MOT  
Drum cleaner brush motor  
TRSP-MOT  
CLT2  
M8  
[K]  
Upper drawer feed clutch  
CST-L-FEED-CLT  
Black developer contact timing detection sensor  
K-ATTNR-SNR  
PWA-F-ADU  
ADU  
IH  
[I]  
ADU driving PC board (ADU board)  
PS-IH  
CLT3  
[F]  
M9  
[K]  
Lower drawer feed clutch  
2TR-CONT-CLT  
Transport motor  
TRY-MOT  
Black auto-toner sensor  
K-TNR-SW  
7-B  
[K]  
[K]  
[L]  
[L]  
[L]  
IH control PC board (IH board)  
PWA-F-DRV  
AC wire harness  
CLT5  
[G]  
[H]  
[I]  
M10  
M11  
M12  
M13  
M15  
M16  
M17  
M18  
M19  
M20  
M21  
[K]  
2nd transfer roller contact clutch  
SFB-FEED-CLT  
Tray-up motor  
Black toner cartridge switch  
TRBLT-HP-SNR1  
DRV  
SYS  
LGC  
FIL  
6-G  
3-A  
6-A  
Driving PC board (DRV board)  
PWA-F-SYS  
DEV-MOT  
CLT6  
[K]  
Bypass feed clutch  
Developer motor  
REVLV-MOT  
Transfer belt home position sensor-1  
TRBLT-HP-SNR2  
ADU-CLT  
System control PC board (SYS board)  
PWA-F-LGC  
CLT7  
[K]  
ADU clutch  
Revolver motor  
CCL-MOT  
Transfer belt home position sensor-2  
TNLVL-SNR  
COLR-DEV-TNR-CLT  
Color developer toner supply clutch  
COLR-DEV-CLT  
Logic PC board (LGC board)  
PWA-F-FIL  
CLT8  
[K]  
[B-1]  
[B-1]  
[D-1]  
[K]  
Charger cleaner motor  
SCAN-FAN-MOT  
Scanner unit cooling fan  
LSU-FAN-MOT  
Laser unit cooling fan  
IH-FAN-MOT  
Image quality sensor  
TR2-POS-SNR  
6-H  
Filter PC board (FIL board)  
AC wire harness  
CLT9  
[K]  
Color developer drive clutch  
K-DEV-CLT  
2nd transfer roller position detection sensor  
TEMP/HUMI-SNR  
CLT10  
CLT11  
CLT12  
CLT13  
CLT14  
CLT15  
CLT16  
[K]  
[D-1]  
[D-2]  
[G]  
Black developer drive clutch  
K-DEV-LIFT-CLT  
Temperature/humidity sensor  
USD-TNR-FLL-SNR  
Toner bag full detection sensor  
RGST-SNR  
[K]  
Thermistors and thermostats  
Black developer lifting clutch  
RGST-CLT  
IH control board cooling fan  
OZN-FAN-MOT  
Ozone exhaust fan  
PS-FAN-MOT  
Wire harness  
location  
[K]  
Symbol  
Name  
Figure  
[J]  
[K]  
Registration clutch  
Registration sensor  
CST-U-TR-L-CLT  
THMS-EDGE-FBLT  
Front edge thermistor  
THMS-MAIN-FBLT  
Main thermistor  
THMS-SUB-FBLT  
Sub thermistor  
FED-U-SNR  
[K]  
THM1  
7-C  
7-C  
[L]  
[G]  
Upper transport clutch (Low speed)  
CST-U-TR-H-CLT  
Power supply cooling fan  
INTRNL-FAN-MOT  
Internal cooling fan  
HDD-FAN-MOT  
HDD cooling fan  
Upper drawer feed sensor  
FED-L-SNR  
[K]  
THM2  
[J]  
[D-1]  
[L]  
[G]  
Upper transport clutch (High speed)  
CST-L-TR-L-CLT  
Lower drawer feed sensor  
CCL-F-POS-SW  
[K]  
THM3  
[J]  
7-C  
[D-3]  
[D-3]  
[F]  
Lower transport clutch (Low speed)  
CST-L-TR-H-CLT  
Charger cleaner front position detection switch  
CCL-R-POS-SW  
THMS-DRM  
[K]  
THM4  
[D-2]  
[J]  
7-F  
Lower transport clutch (High speed)  
Drum thermistor  
THERMO-FSR  
Charger cleaner rear position detection switch  
CST-U-TRY-SNR  
THMO1  
THMO2  
THMO3  
AC wire harness  
AC wire harness  
AC wire harness  
Fuser thermostat  
THERMO-SCN-DH  
Upper drawer tray-up sensor  
CST-L-TRY-SNR  
Lamps and heaters  
[B-2]  
[D-2]  
Wire harness  
location  
[F]  
Scanner damp heater thermostat  
THERMO-DRM-DH  
Lower drawer tray-up sensor  
EMP-U-SNR  
Symbol  
Name  
Figure  
[B-1]  
[D-2]  
[J]  
Solenoids  
Symbol  
Wire harness  
location  
[F]  
LP-EXPO  
Drum damp heater thermostat  
Name  
Figure  
[D-1]  
[D-2]  
[H]  
EXP  
3-G  
7-E  
Upper drawer empty sensor  
EMP-L-SNR  
Exposure lamp  
LP-ERS  
ATTNR-SHUT-SOL  
[F]  
SOL1  
SOL2  
SOL3  
7-D  
8-H  
6-G  
ERS  
Lower drawer empty sensor  
NEMP-U-SNR  
Color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid  
TNLVL-SHUT-SOL  
Discharge LED  
IH-COIL  
[F]  
Upper drawer paper stock sensor  
NEMP-L-SNR  
IH-COIL  
AC wire harness  
Others  
Image quality sensor shutter solenoid  
SFB-SOL  
IH coil  
Wire harness  
location  
[F]  
SCN-L-DH  
Symbol  
Name  
Figure  
[B-2]  
[C]  
Lower drawer paper stock sensor  
CST-U-SW  
Bypass pickup solenoid  
Scanner damp heater (Left)  
DH1  
DH2  
[B-2]  
[B-2]  
AC wire harness  
AC wire harness  
INV-EXP  
* Optional for NAD/MJD model, standard for other  
[F]  
INV  
LCD  
HDD  
PS  
4-G  
1-G  
5-B  
Upper drawer detection switch  
CST-L-SW  
Inverter board  
LCD  
models  
SCN-R-DH  
[F]  
Lower drawer detection switch  
SFB-SNR  
LCD panel  
HDD  
Scanner damp heater (Right)  
Transformer  
Symbol  
* Optional for NAD/MJD model, standard for other  
[H]  
[L]  
Bypass paper sensor  
SFB-FED-SNR  
Wire harness  
location  
models  
Hard disk  
PS-ACC  
Name  
Figure  
DRM-DH  
5-G  
[H]  
[L]  
Bypass feed sensor  
PS-HVT  
HVT  
Drum damp heater  
Switching regulator  
BREAKER  
Breaker  
AC wire harness  
[K]  
6-D  
DH3  
DH4  
[D-2]  
[F]  
AC wire harness  
AC wire harness  
High-voltage transformer  
ADU-SET-SW  
* Optional for NAD/MJD model, standard for other  
models  
[I]  
BRK  
[L]  
AC wire harness  
ADU opening/closing switch  
ADU-TRU-SNR  
CST-DH  
[I]  
ADU entrance sensor  
ADU-TRL-SNR  
Drawer damp heater  
* Only for JPD model of all equipments  
[I]  
ADU exit sensor  
EXIT-SNR  
[J]  
Exit sensor  
MAIN-SW  
8-A  
[B-2]  
[G]  
Main switch  
AC wire harness  
FRNT-COV-SW  
8-H  
Front cover opening/closing switch  
05/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Taylor Scale TE10R User Manual
Toshiba DVD Player SD 3800 User Manual
Toshiba Flat Panel Television WLT68 User Manual
Tricity Bendix Oven TBS 749 User Manual
United States Stove Home Security System 2931 User Manual
Vector Camping Equipment VEC1198POB User Manual
Velodyne Acoustics Speaker Digital Drive Subwoofer User Manual
Vox Camcorder VC 12 User Manual
Vulcan Hart Range V2B18 User Manual
Waves Speaker MiniWoofer User Manual